Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION - NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 1-4 REHABILITATION - 10-0023-UT
CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION Northeast WRF Clarifiers 1 -4 Rehabilitation (PROJECT No. 10- 0023 -UT) CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS Prepared for Clearwater BID DOCUMENTS APRIL 2011 APR 2 6 2011 OP ID: SS ricj_Fet,' CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MM /DO/YYYY) 07/22/11 THIdTERTIhICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES 'BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATI • lc WiED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement o iltl� el' -Id, '' r rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s)- ODUCER 727 -522 -7777 Wallace Welch S: Willingham Inc 727- 521 -2902 10 First Avenue South, 5th Fl 0. Box 33020 , Petersburg, FL 33733 AUchaeLBell CONTACT NAME: , �k. FA n. - o _ CUSTOMER ID ' - INSURER S AFFORDING • - NAIC # INSURED RTD Construction, Inc. I 5344 9th Street FL 33542 INSURER A : Amerisure Ins. Co. 19488 American 26247 INSURER D : Mt. Hawle Ins. Co. EACH OCCURRENCE INSURER E : AGCS Marine Ins. Co. 1,000,000 X DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES {Ea occurrence) CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD IINDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, - EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR R TYPE OF INSURANCE !NM POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF (MM DD/YYYY) POUCY EXP JMM DD/YYYY) LIMITS 1 GENERAL LIABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY OCCUR CLP3274167 06/30/11 06/30112 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 X DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES {Ea occurrence) $ 100,000 CLAIMS -MADE X MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY ril jT I LOC PRODUCTS - COMP /OP AGG $ 2,000,000 7 $ II IJ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS - CAP353 5' ^0 (h:� Avv 06/30/11 \ Cy. -� ,`�j� J ~ 06/30/12 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 X BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ XV BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ X $ $ C UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB X OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE OS `, AUC92662880� N^\".- 06/30111 06/30/12 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 10,000,000 AGGREGATE R 10.000,000 DEDUCTIBLE RETENTION $ $ X $ A I AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER /EXECUTIVE OFFICER /MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory In NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS Y / N N / A WC2070309 06/30/11 06/30/12 X TQRY 1.IN1LT5 DTI H- $ 1,000,000 E.L. EACH ACCIDENT E. L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 below E. L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 D Pollution Leased &Rented EGL0001350 MX193019402 01/01/11 06/30/11 01/01/12 06/30/12 Pollution Equipment 1,000,000 250,000 CRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule If more space Is required) ject:Northeast Water Reclamation Facility Clarifiers 1-4 Rehabilitation Bid # 10- 0023 -UT City of Clearwater is added as Additional Insured with respects to General lability, Auto and Umbrella. Waiver of Subrogation in favor of The City of arwater with respects to General Liability, Auto, Workers Compensation» RTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION 1 City of Clearwater 100 South Myrtle Avenue 3rd FL Clearwater, FL 33756 -5520 L CITCLEI SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE IORD 25 (2009/09) © 1988-2009 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD NOTEPAD: HOLDER CODE CITCLEI INSURED'S NAME RTD Construction, Inc. RTDCO -1 OP ID: SS PAGE 2 DATE 07/22/11 dn'd Umbrella (Follow Form) Cancellation per policy (attached) wording. THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. CONTRACTORS ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT - COMPLETED OPERATIONS This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM SECTION II - WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include: Any 'owner ", 'contractor ", "construction manager', "engineer' or 'architect' if it is required in your written contract or written agreement executed by you and all other parties to the contract or agreement prior to any loss that such person(s) or organization(s) be added as an additional insured on your policy for completed operations but only for the project designated in your written contract or written agreement and only with respect to "bodily injury" or 'property damage" included in the 'products - completed operations hazard' and caused, at least in part, by your negligence and with respect to liability resulting from: A. Your work' performed for the additional insured(s), or B. Acts or omissions of the additional insured(s) in connection with their general supervision of "your work'. With respect to the insurance afforded such additional insureds in connection with this endorsement and the above referenced Commercial General Liability Form, the following additional provisions apply to limit that coverage: 1. We will have no duty to defend the additional insured against any "suit" seeking damages for "bodily injury' or "property damage" until we receive written notice from the additional insured requesting that we defend it in the 'suit.' 2. The Limits of Insurance applicable to the additional insureds under this endorsement are the minimum limits specified in the written contract or agreement requiring this coverage, or as stated in SECTION III - LIMITS OF INSURANCE of the COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM, whichever is less. These Limits of Insurance are inclusive of and not in addition to the Limits of Insurance described in SECTION III of that form. 3. As additional conditions of coverage under this form, an additional insured under this endorsement will as soon as practicable: a. Give written notice to us of an "occurrence" which may result in a claim. This shall include: (1) How, when and where the "occurrence' took place; (2) The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses; and (3) The nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the 'occurrence". b. Give written notice to us of a claim or "suit" brought against the additional insured including specifics of the claim or "suit" and the date it was received. c. Give written notice of such claim or 'suit,' including a demand for defense and indemnity, to any other insurer who had coverage for the claim or "suit" under its policy(ies), either at the time of, or at any time subsequent to the occurrence of the 'bodily injury' or °property damage" which is the basis for such claims or "suit.' (1) Such notification must demand the full coverage available under that policy; and (2) The additional insured shall not take any action to waive or limit such other coverage available to it. GL -4382 (12/04) -1- 4. This insurance does not apply to: a. "Bodily injury" or 'property damage" resulting from any act or omission of the additional insured(s) or any of their employees, other than the general supervision of work performed for the additional insured(s) by you; b. 'Bodily injury" or "property damage" resulting from your work" performed on a project where other valid and collectible insurance is available to the additional insured under an Owner Controlled Insurance Program or Consolidated (wrap -up) Insurance Program; c. 'Bodily injury or 'property damage' (1) In connection with a project where your work" on the project was completed prior to the effective date of this policy, unless the written contract or written agreement includes a specific time requirement for completed operations coverage to be provided by you for the additional insured for "bodily injury" or "property damage" occurring during the policy period. (2) In connection with a project where your work" on the project was completed and where the duration of the additional insured coverage requirement in the written contract or written agreement governing your work" on that project had expired by the time that the injury or damage first occurred. (3) In connection with a project where your work" on the project was completed more than thirty six (36) months prior to the effective date of this policy. For the purpose of this endorsement, your work' will be deemed completed as set forth in the "products - completed operations hazard" definition. d. "Bodily injury" or "property damage': (1) Arising out of the rendering or failure to render any professional services by any insured, or on their behalf, but only with respect to either or both of the following operations; (a) Providing engineering, architectural or surveying services to others in the insureds capacity as an engineer, architect or surveyor, and (b) Providing, or hiring independent professionals to provide, engineering, architectural or surveying services in connection with work the insured performs. (2) Subject to paragraph (3) below, professional services include: (3) (a) (b) The preparing, approving or failing to prepare or approve maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders, or drawings and specifications; and Supervisory or inspection activities performed as part of any related architectural or engineering activities, but does not include the general supervision of your operations on such project. Professional services do not include services within construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures employed by you in connection with your operations as a construction contractor. For the purpose of this endorsement, the following definitions are added: "Owner" means a person or organization who has ownership in the project premises designated in your written contract or written agreement, at which you are performing or performed work. GL -4382 (12/04) -2- "Contractor means a person or organization with whom you have agreed in a written contract or written agreement to perform work for at the project designated in the written contract or written agreement. "Construction Manager means a person or organization designated as 'construction manager' in your written contract or written agreement, and has management or supervisory responsibilities over your work` for the project designated in the written contract or written agreement. "Engineer° means a person or organization who has been engaged by the "owner", "contractor' or ' construction manager' to perform engineering services for the project designated in your written contract or written agreement and has a contractual responsibility for supervising, directing or controlling your work° on such project. ' Architect" means a person or organization who has been engaged by the 'owner ", 'contractor' or "construction manager" to perform architectural services for the project designated in your written contract or written agreement and has a contractual responsibility for supervising, directing or controlling your work" on such project. Any coverage provided herein will be excess over any other valid and collectable insurance available to the additional insured(s) whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis unless you have agreed in a written contract or written agreement executed prior to any Toss that this insurance will be primary. However, any insurance specifically purchased for a designated project(s), including but not limited to additional insured coverage, owners contractors protective coverage, etc., will be primary with the insurance provided by this endorsement being excess. If this insurance is determined to be primary, we agree not to seek contribution from such other insurance only if you have so agreed in the written contract or written agreement. In no event will any coverage provided under this endorsement extend beyond the expiration date of this policy. GL -4382 (12/04) -3- "Construction Manager" means a person or organization designated as "construction manager' in your' written contract or written agreement, and has management or supervisory responsibilities over your operations for the project designated in your written contract or written agreement. "Engineer" means a person or organization who has been engaged by the "owner', "contractor' or 'construction manager" to perform engineering services for the project designated in your written contract or written agreement and has a contractual responsibility for supervising, directing or controlling your operations on such project. "Architect" means a person or organization who has been engaged by the 'owner ", "contractor" or 'construction manager" to perform architectural services for the project designated in your written contractor written agreement and has a contractual responsibility for supervising, directing or controlling your operations on such project. Any coverage provided herein will be excess over any other valid and collectable insurance available to the additional insured(s) whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis unless you have agreed in a written contract or written agreement executed prior to any loss that this insurance will be primary. However, any other insurance specifically purchased for a designated project(s), including but not limited to additional insured coverage, owners contractors protective coverage, etc., will be primary with the insurance provided by this endorsement being excess_ If this insurance is determined to be primary, we agree not to seek contribution from such other insurance only if you have so agreed in the written contract or written agreement. C. AUTOMATIC WAIVER OF SUBROGATION Item 8. of SECTION IV - COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following: 8. Transfer of Rights of Recovery Against Others to Us and Automatic Waiver of Subrogation. a. if the insured has rights to recover all or part of any payment we have made under this Coverage Form, those rights are transferred to us. The insured must do nothing after loss to impair those rights. At our request, the insured will bring 'suit' or transfer those rights to us and help us enforce them. b. If required by a written contract executed prior to toss, we waive any right of recovery we may have against any person or organization because of payments we make for injury or damage arising out of "your work" for that person or organization. D. EXTENDED NOTICE OF CANCELLATION, NONRENEWAL Item A.2.b. of the COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following: A.2.b. 60 days before the effective dale of the cancellation if we cancel for any other reason. Item 9. of SECTION IV - COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following: 9. WHEN WE DO NOT RENEW a. If we choose to nonrenew this policy, we will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured shown in the Declarations written notice of the nonrenewal not less than 60 days before the expiration date. b. If we do not give notice of our intent to nonrenew as prescribed in a. above, it is agreed that you may extend the period of this policy for a maximum additional sixty(60) days from its scheduled expiration date. Where not otherwise prohibited by law, the existing terms, conditions and rates will remain in effect during that extension period. It is further agreed that so long as it is not GL -3084 (01/06) -4- WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY INSURANCE POLICY WC 00 03 13 (Ed. 4 -84) WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule. (This agreement applies only to the extent that you perform work under a written contract that requires you to obtain this agreement from us.) This agreement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. Schedule "As needed by contract and shown on certificate of insurance on file with company" "This endorsement is not applicable in California, Kentucky, New Hampshire, New Jersey, Texas and Utah." "This endorsement does not apply to policies in Missouri where the employer is in the construction group of code classifications. According to Section 287.150 {6) of the Missouri Statues, a contractual provision purporting to waive subrogation rights is against public policy and void where one party to the contract is an employer in the construction group of code classifications." This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached and is effective on the date issued unless otherwise stated. (The information below is required only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) Endorsement Effective Policy No. Endorsement No. Insured Premium $ Insurance Company Countersigned by WC 00 03 13 (Ed. 4 -84) Copyright 1983 National Council on Compensation Insurance. Hart Forms & Services Reorder No. 14.4888 IL 02 55 09 08 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. FLORIDA CHANGES -- CANCELLATION AND NONRENEWAL This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: CAPITAL ASSETS PROGRAM (OUTPUT POLICY) COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL PROPERTY COVERAGE PART CRIME AND FIDELITY COVERAGE PART EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN COVERAGE PART FARM COVERAGE PART STANDARD PROPERTY POLICY A. Paragraph 2. of the Cancellation Common Policy Condition is replaced by the following: 2. Cancellation For Policies In Effect 90 Days Or Less a. If this policy has been in effect for 90 days or less, we may cancel this policy by mail- ing or delivering to the first Named Insured written notice of cancellation, accompanied by the specific reasons for cancellation, at least: (1) 10 days before the effective date of cancellation if we cancel for nonpay- ment of premium; or (2) 20 days before the effective date of cancellation if we cancel for any other reason, except we may cancel immedi- ately if there has been: (a) A material misstatement or misrep- resentation; or (b) A failure to comply with underwriting requirements established by the in- surer. b. However, Paragraph 2.a.(2) does not apply to a first Named Insured whose residential structure has been insured by us or an af- filiated insurer for at least a live -year period immediately prior to the date of written no- tice. Instead, refer to Paragraph C.7.b.(4) of this endorsement. c. We may not cancel: (1) On the basis of property insurance claims that are the result of an act of God, unless we can demonstrate, by claims frequency or otherwise, that you have failed to take action reasonably necessary as requested by us to pre- vent recurrence of damage to the in- sured property; or (2) On the basis of filing of claims for partial Toss caused by sinkhole damage or clay shrinkage, regardless of whether this policy has been the subject of a sinkhole or clay shrinkage claim, or on the basis of the risk associated with the occur- rence of such a claim. However, we may cancel this policy if: (a) The total of such property insurance claim payments for this policy ex- ceeds the current policy limits of coverage for property damage; or (b) You have failed to repair the struc- ture in accordance with the engineer- ing recommendations upon which any loss payment or policy proceeds were based. (3) Solely on the basis of a single property insurance claim which is the result of water damage, unless we can demon- strate that you have failed to take action reasonably requested by us to prevent a future similar occurrence of damage to the insured property. IL 02 55 09 08 ® Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2008 Page 1 of 4 B. Paragraph 5. of the Cancellation Common Policy Condition is replaced by the following: 5. If this policy is cancelled, we will send the first Named Insured any premium refund due. If we cancel, the refund will be pro rata. If the first Named Insured cancels, the refund may be less than pro rata. If the return premium is not refunded with the notice of cancellation or when this policy is returned to us, we will mail the refund within 15 working days after the date cancellation takes effect, unless this is an audit policy. 11 this is an audit policy, then, subject to your full cooperation with us or our agent in securing the necessary data for audit, we will return any premium refund due within 90 days of the date cancellation takes effect. If our audit is not completed within this time limitation, then we shall accept your own audit, and any premium refund due shall be mailed within 10 working days of receipt of your audit. The cancellation will be effective even if we have not made or offered a refund. C. The following is added to the Cancellation Com- mon Policy Condition: 7. Cancellation For Policies In Effect For More Than 90 Days a. If this policy has been in effect for more than 90 days, we may cancel this policy only for one or more of the following rea- sons: (1) Nonpayment of premium; (2) The policy was obtained by a material misstatement; There has been a failure to comply with underwriting requirements established by us within 90 days of the effective date of coverage; (4) There has been a substantial change in the risk covered by the policy; The cancellation is for all insureds under such policies for a given class of insur- eds; On the basis of property insurance claims that are the result of an act of God, if we can demonstrate, by claims frequency or otherwise, that you have failed to take action reasonably neces- sary as requested by us to prevent re- currence of damage to the insured property; (3) (5) (6) Page 2 of 4 (7) On the basis of filing of claims for partial loss caused by sinkhole damage or clay shrinkage, or on the basis of the risk as- sociated with the occurrence of such a claim, if: (a) The total of such property insurance claim payments for this policy ex- ceeds the current policy limits of coverage for property damage; or (b) You have failed to repair the struc- ture in accordance with the engineer- ing recommendations upon which any loss payment or policy proceeds were based; or On the basis of a single property insur- ance claim which is the result of water damage, if we can demonstrate that you have failed to take action reasonably re- quested by us to prevent a future similar occurrence of damage to the insured property. b. If we cancel this policy for any of these reasons, we will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured written notice of cancella- tion, accompanied by the specific reasons for cancellation, at least: (1) 10 days before the effective date of cancellation if cancellation is for non- payment of premium; or (2) 45 days before the effective date of cancellation if: (a) Cancellation is for one or more of the reasons stated in Paragraphs 7.a.(2) through 7.a.(8) above; and (b) This policy does not cover a residen- tial structure or its contents; or (3) 100 days before the effective date of cancellation if: (8) (a) Cancellation is for one or more of the reasons stated in Paragraphs 7.a.(2) through 7.a.(8) above; and (b) This policy covers a residential struc- ture or its contents, unless Para- graph 7.b.(4) applies. Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2008 IL 02 55 09 08 However, if cancellation is to become ef- fective between June 1 and November 30, we will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured written notice of cancel- lation at least 100 days prior to the ef- fective date of cancellation or by June 1, whichever is earlier. Therefore, when cancellation is to become effective be- tween September 9 and November 30, we will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured written notice of cancellation by June 1. (4) 180 days before the effective dale of cancellation if: (a) Cancellation is for one or more of the reasons stated in Paragraphs 7.a.(2) through 7.a.(8) above; and (b) The first Named Insured's residential structure has been insured by us or an affiliated insurer for at least a five - year period immediately prior to the date of the written notice. D. The following is added: NONRENEWAL 1. If we decide not to renew this policy we will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured writ- ten notice of nonrenewal, accompanied by the specific reason for nonrenewal, at least: a. 45 days prior to the expiration of the policy if this policy does not cover a residential structure or its contents; or b. 100 days prior to the expiration of the policy if this policy covers a residential structure or its contents, unless Subsection c. or d. ap- plies. c. If this policy covers a residential structure or its contents and nonrenewal is to become effective between June 1 and November 30, we will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured written notice of nonrenewal at least 100 days prior to the effective date of nonrenewal or by June 1, whichever is ear- lier. Therefore, when nonrenewal is to be- come effective between September 9 and November 30, we will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured written notice of nonre- newal by June 1. if nonrenewal is due to a revision to this policy's coverage for sink- hole losses or catastrophic ground cover collapse pursuant to the 2007 changes in the Florida Insurance Laws concerning such coverage, then this subsection, c., does not apply. Therefore, in such a case, Subsection b. or d. applies. d. 180 days prior to the effective date of non- renewal if the first Named Insured's resi- dential structure has been insured by us or an affiliated insurer for at least a five -year period immediately prior to the date of the written notice. 2. Any notice of nonrenewal will be mailed or delivered to the first Named insured's last mail- ing address known to us. 11 notice is mailed, proof of mailing will be sufficient proof of no- tice. 3. We may not refuse to renew this policy: a. On the basis of property insurance claims that are the result of an act of God, unless we can demonstrate, by claims frequency or otherwise, that you have failed to take action reasonably necessary as requested by us to prevent recurrence of damage to the insured properly; or b. On the basis of filing of claims for partial Toss caused by sinkhole damage or clay shrinkage, regardless of whether this policy has been the subject of a sinkhole or clay shrinkage claim, or on the basis of the risk associated with the occurrence of such a claim. However, we may refuse to renew this policy if: (1) The total of such property insurance claim payments for this policy exceeds the current policy limits of coverage for property damage; or (2) You have failed to repair the structure in accordance with the engineering rec- ommendations upon which any loss payment or policy proceeds were based. c. Solely on the basis of a single property insurance claim which is the result of water damage, unless we can demonstrate that you have failed to take action reasonably requested by us to prevent a future similar occurrence of damage to the insured prop- erty. 11.02 55 09 08 Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2008 Page 3 of 4 E. Limitations On Cancellation And Nonrenewal In The Event Of Hurricane Or Wind Loss — Residential Property 1. The following provisions apply to a policy cov- ering a residential structure or its contents, if such property has sustained damage as a re- sult of a hurricane or windstorm that is the sub- ject of a declaration of emergency by the Gov- ernor and filing of an order by the Commis- sioner of Insurance Regulation: a. Except as provided in Paragraph E.1.b., we may not cancel or nonrenew the policy until at least 90 days after repairs to the residen- tial structure or its contents have been sub- stantially completed so that it is restored to the extent that it is insurable by another in- surer writing policies in Florida. If we elect to not renew the policy, we will provide at least 100 days' notice that we intend to non- renew 90 days after the substantial comple- tion of repairs. b. We may cancel or nonrenew the policy prior to restoration of the structure or its con- tents, for any of the following reasons: (1) Nonpayment of premium; (2) Material misstatement or fraud related to the claim; (3) We determine that you have unrea- sonably caused a delay in the repair of the structure; or (4) We have paid the policy limits. If we cancel or nonrenew for nonpayment of premium, we will give you 10 days' notice. If we cancel or nonrenew for a reason listed in Paragraph b.(2), b.(3) or b.(4), we will give you 45 days' notice. Page 4 of 4 2. With respect to a policy covering a residential structure or its contents, any cancellation or nonrenewal that would otherwise take effect during the duration of a hurricane will not take effect until the end of the duration of such hur- ricane, unless a replacement policy has been obtained and is in effect for a claim occurring during the duration of the hurricane. We may collect premium for the period of time for which the policy period is extended. 3. With respect to Paragraph E2., a hurricane is a storm system that has been declared to be a hurricane by the National Hurricane Center of the National Weather Service (hereafter re- ferred to as NHC). The hurricane occurrence begins at the time a hurricane watch or hurri- cane warning is issued for any part of Florida by the NHC, and ends 72 hours after the ter- mination of the last hurricane watch or hurri- cane warning issued for any part of Florida by the NHC. © Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2008 IL 02 55 09 08 COMMERCIAL AUTO CA 02670108 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. FLORIDA CHANGES - CANCELLATION AND NONRENEWAL This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM BUSINESS AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE FORM GARAGE COVERAGE FORM MOTOR CARRIER COVERAGE FORM TRUCKERS COVERAGE FORM With respect to the coverage provided by this endorsement, the provisions of the Coverage Form apply unless modified by the endorsement. A. Paragraph A.2.6. of the Common Policy Conditions, Cancellation, is changed to read as follows: b. 45 days before the effective date of cancella- tion if we cancel for any other reason. The no- tice of cancellation will state the reason(s) for the cancellation. B. Paragraph A.5. of the Common Policy Conditions, Cancellation, is replaced by the following: 5. If this policy is cancelled, we will send the first Named Insured any premium refund due. If we cancel, the refund will be pro rata. If the first Named Insured cancels, the refund may be less than pro rata. If the return premium is not re- funded with the notice of cancellation or when this policy is returned to us, we will mail the re- fund within 15 working days after the date cancel- lation takes effect, unless this is an audit policy. If this is an audit policy, then, subject to your full cooperation with us or our agent in securing the necessary data for audit, we will return any pre- mium refund due within 90 days of the date can- cellation takes effect. If our audit is not completed within this time limitation, then we shall accept your own audit, and any premium refund due shall be mailed within 10 working days of receipt of your audit. The cancellation will be effective even if we have not made or offered a refund. CA 02670108 C. The following is added to Paragraph A. of the Com- mon Policy Conditions, Cancellation: 7. If this policy provides Personal Injury Protection, Property Damage Liability Coverage or both and: a. It is a new or renewal policy, it may not be cancelled by the first Named Insured during the first 60 days following the date of issuance or renewal, except for one of the following reasons: (1) The covered °auto' is completely de- stroyed such that it is no longer operable; (2) Ownership of the covered 'auto' is trans- ferred; or (3) The Named Insured has purchased an- other policy covering the motor vehicle in- sured under this policy. b. It is a new policy, we may not cancel for non- payment of premium during the first 60 days following the date of policy issuance unless a check used to pay us is dishonored for any reason. ® ISO Properties, Inc., 2007 Page 1 of 2 D. The following Condition is added: Nonrenewal 1. If we decide not to renew or continue this policy, we will mail you notice at least 45 days before the end of the policy period. If we offer to renew or continue and you do not accept, this policy will terminate at the end of the current policy period. Failure to pay the required renewal or continua- tion premium when due shall mean that you have not accepted our offer. 2. If we fail to mail proper notice of nonrenewal and you obtain other insurance, this policy will end on the effective date of that insurance. 3. Notice of nonrenewal will state the reason(s) for the nonrenewal and the effective dale of nonre- newal. The policy period will end on that date. Page 2 of 2 ® ISO Properties, Inc., 2007 CA 02 67 01 08 City of Clearwater, Florida CLARIFIER REHABILITATION (10- 0023 -UT) SECTION I SECTION II SECTION III SECTION IV SECTION IVA SECTION V APPENDIX A TABLE OF CONTENTS ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS GENERAL CONDITIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer - i - 04/26/11 SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 1 -4 REHABILITATION (PROJECT # 10- 0023 -UT) CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and /or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.myClearwater.conn /cityprojects, ON FRIDAY APRIL 29, 2011, . until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only. The work for which proposals are invited consists of the rehabilitation of four clarifiers at the Northeast WRF, including miscellaneous improvements to the North RAS Pump House. A MANDATORY Pre -Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on Thursday May 12, 2011 at 10:00 a.m. on site at the Northeast Water Reclamation Facility, 3290 SR 580, Safety Harbor, FL 34695. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project. Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 S. Myrtle Ave., 3rd Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520, until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY, JUNE 9, 2011, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for �.( K N, ,.* f u IL4 A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub - contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are currently City pre - qualified Contractors in the construction category of Wastewater and Water Treatment Facilities with a minimum pre - qualification amount of $ 2,000,000. Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks /ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. A 1.0% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida George McKibben, Purchasing Manager (727) 562 -4634 Section 1 .doc Page 1 of 1 04/26/2011 SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents: SECTION II 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3 6 CONTRACT TIME 3 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 3 1.0 BID /PROPOSAL FORM 4 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 5 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5 15 OPENING OF BIDS 5 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 7 19 BID PROTEST 7 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 9 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 9 Section II.doc i 04/26/11 Section If — Instructions to Bidders 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room — website address: www .myclearwater.com/cityprojects. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non - refundable. A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre - qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre - qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub- bidders or others. 1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre - qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre - qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758- 4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562 -4750. All qualification data must be completed and delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14) days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre - qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non - technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in Section Il.doc Page 1 of 9 04/26/2011 Section II — Instructions to Bidders preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, by the City's plan room to all parties recorded by the City's plan room as plan holder's having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten the time frame specified at the pre -bid meeting prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal Section II.doc Page 2 of 9 04/26/2011 Section 11 Instructions to Bidders written Addenda will be binding. Ural and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. 4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10 %) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid opening. 5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. 6 CONTRACT TIME 6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Section II.doc Page 3 of 9 04/26/2011 Section 11— Instructions to Bidders Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50 %) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID /PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice - president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5 "x11" manila envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof Section 11_doc Page 4 of 9 04/26/2011 Section II — Instructions to Bidders ' and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. ' 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the ' requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS ' 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in 1 the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 1 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non - Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. ' 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ' 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees Section II.doc Page 5 of 9 04/26/2011 1 Section II — Instructions to Bidders and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor. Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug -free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug -free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug -free workplace program. In order to have a drug -free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug -free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. Section IL.doc Page 6 of 9 04/26/2011 Section 11— Instructions to Bidders (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does /does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid /Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite Section II.doc Page 7 of 9 04/26/2011 Section II -- Instructions to Bidders specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he /she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. 19.3 PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. Section II.doc Page 8 of 9 04/26/2011 Section 11-- Instructions to Bidders 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918 -08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60 - 553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System ( NPDES) storm water permit and implement storm water pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or storm water management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction - related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction - related Best Management Practices. References EPA website Section II.doc Page 9 of 9 04/26/2011 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: 1 DEFINITIONS 1 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT 5 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 5 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS 6 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 7 3.1 INTENT 7 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 8 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 8 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 8 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS 9 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 9 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND 9 5.2 INSURANCE 9 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE 10 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE 10 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 11 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS 12 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 12 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 13 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 14 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 14 6.5 USE OF PREMISES 15 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS 15 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 15 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 16 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16 6.8 PERMITS 16 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION 17 6.10 EMERGENCIES 18 6.11 DRAWINGS 18 Section III.doc i 04/26/2011 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFI.S, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18 6.11.2 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 19 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 21 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: 23 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK 23 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION 23 6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 24 7 OTHER WORK 24 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE 24 7.2 COORDINATION 25 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY 25 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 25 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE 25 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 25 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 26 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 26 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 26 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 27 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK 27 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 28 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 28 11.2 ALI:,OWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJIJSTMENT 30 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK 30 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 30 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 31. 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION 31 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK 32 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 32 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 13.5 WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD 33 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 34 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 34 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 34 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 35 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 35 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION 36 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION 36 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 37 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 37 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS 38 Section III.doc ii 04/26/2011 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 38 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 38 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE 38 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TER.MINA T E 39 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 40 17 MISCELLANEOUS 40 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 40 17.2 GIVING NOTICE 40 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM 40 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 41 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 41 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION 41 17.7 ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS 41 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 41 19 MATERIAL USED 41 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 41. 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION 41 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 42 22.1 GENERAL 42 22.2 EXAMPLE 42 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 43 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE 43 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 43 23.3 FIXED SIGN 43 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS 44 23.5 SIGN COLORING 44 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT 44 23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE 44 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 44 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 45 Section 111.doc iii 04/26/201I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 111 — General Conditions 1 DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agent Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the City. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application,fnr Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents- The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid forth, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding Section III.doc Page 1 of 46 04/26/11 Section 1.1i — General Conditions contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Docuinenls The Agreement, Addenda (w.h.i.ch pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of clays or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule —CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty -four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent Section III.doc Page 2 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111— General Conditions professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F D. C). T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida .Department of "Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish ", "furnish and install ", "install ", and "provide" or words of siinilar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "t rnish and install complete in place and ready for service ". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. 'These terms shall not be construed to mean. supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws. and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental. bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. Person A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Section IILdoc Page 3 of 46 04/26/11 Section 1.11. — General Conditions Partial Utilization Use by owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre - construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (8111) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, ill.ustrat.ion.s, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is _intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. Section lti.doc Page 4 or 46 04/26/11 Section 111 — General Conditions Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME /NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable Section IIl.doc Page 5 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111— General Conditions field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction Manager. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall. also bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of construction stakeout and as -built survey. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification. 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi- weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RH) log, a look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. Section II1.doc Page 6 of 46 04/26/11 Section 1 1 1 — General Conditions 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's R.epresentative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any govermnental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth. in the Contract Documents, shall. change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall. be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof Section Ill.doc Page 7 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111 — General Conditions 1 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner sh.ail furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights -of -way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with. which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. Section III.doc Page 8 of 46 04/26/1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 111 — General Conditions 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are .necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work, Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in. grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such. reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily Section IfI.doc Page 9 of 46 04/26/11 Section III — General Conditions injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death. of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claitns for damages insured by customary personal. injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a. result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any otb.er person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located., including toss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in. accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims -made basis, shall remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional, insured, of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise /Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products /Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form. Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: Section Ill.doc Page 10 of 46 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000. 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise /Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products /Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form. Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: Section Ill.doc Page 10 of 46 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 111 — General Conditions 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non -owned vehicles: Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Amlual Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with employment exclusion deleted $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non -owned vehicles: Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from. Owner. Longshore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self- insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. Section I[Ldoc Page 11 of 46 04/26/1 I Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each. Person $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from. Owner. Longshore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self- insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. Section I[Ldoc Page 11 of 46 04/26/1 I Section 111 — General Conditions 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased. in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified 113 the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any ofth.e perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub- contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused_ None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. in addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant an.d the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption., loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed Section JJLdoc Page 12 of 46 04/26/11 1 Section III — General Conditions from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check .made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $60.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise .indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start -up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. Section I IL.doc Page 13 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111. — General Conditions 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an. item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is function.a.11y equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in. the Engineer's sole discretion an item. of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that na►.ned and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Section I[I.doc Page 14 of 46 04/26/1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 111 — General Conditions Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against: whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right -of -way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out. of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right -of -ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. • Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. Section IiLdoc Page 15 of 46 04/26/11 Section III — General Conditions • Sod must be restored with ten (10) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention., design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11 -02 shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E- Verify System to verify employment eligibility. 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of Section I1I.doc Page 16 of 46 04/26/11 1 Section 111 General Conditions opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract .Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit. Fees will be waived. 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to he incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and. (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work., or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall Section IlLdoc Page 17 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111 — General Conditions continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergen.ey, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty -one (2] ) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty -one (21) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Section Iri.doc Page 18 of 46 04/26/11 Section 11[ - General Conditions Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval. will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction. (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. Contractor shall, furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item. within two (2) submittals. Owner's R.epresentative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number greater than twenty percent (20 %) of the total number of first time submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. 6.11.2 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not . indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As -Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. Section 1[Ldoc Page 19 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111 — General Conditions The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As -Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up blueline prints do not conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Final pay request shall not be processed until A.s -Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water plains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer- intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the '`As -Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As -Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS -BUILT SURVEY" per chapter. 5J -17, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered and surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 5J- 17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As -Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and /or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also know as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As -Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As -Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe Construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. Section II.I.doc Page 20 of 46 04/26/1 l 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 111 General Conditions 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as- built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as -built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit: runs, 1 -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control The As -Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6 Standards The As -Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61G17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDA.R.DS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as- built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and 110 more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7 Other The As -Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1 Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.1.2 Layer Naming Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances Section 111.doc Page 21 of 46 04/26/11 Section 1]] — General Conditions CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER, water tines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Section III.doc Page 22 of 46 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section I11— General Conditions Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5 °, and a text height of .010 times th.e plot scale. 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: The as -built survey shall be produced on vellum or bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1"=20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format. Acceptable file formats include: DWG, DXF of a shape file. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562 -4762 or e -mail address Thomas .M.ahonv(cimyclearwater.com. 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and wi 11 not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non - execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance ". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of Section I1I.doc Page 23 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111— General Conditions engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work; provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed. by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such. person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, a.ny other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub - contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. 6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email . addresses, etc. 7 OTHER WORK 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. Section 1ll.doc Page 24 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111 -- Gcnnca•al Conditions 7.2 COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will he provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with. the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not he responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Dependant of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Section IILdoc Page 25 of 46 04/26/11 Section 11I — General Conditions Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall. be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed. Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with. Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor Section III.doc Page 26 of 46 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 111 — General Conditions to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim. dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision., unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will. be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Section I11.doc Page 27 of 46 04/26/11 Section III — General Conditions- Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result. of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or un.dertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Trice may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by Section III.doc Page 28 of 46 04/26/11 1 Section III — General Conditions claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i.) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract. Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engin.eer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equi.prnent, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work. (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item. are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full - unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor -owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand -by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15 %) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5 %), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10 %). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10 %) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. Section IILdoc Page 29 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111 — General Conditions 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract .Price all allowances so named in. the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of Section 111.doc Page 30 of 46 04 /26/11 Section III General Conditions the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, 1 unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract .Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control. of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. 1 Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or 1 approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required Section III.doc Page 31 of 46 04/26/11 1 Section 111 — General Conditions certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's R.epresentative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. It; however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. Section III.doc Page 32 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111 — General Conditions 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's R.epresentative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it. from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5 WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. Section III.doc Page 33 01 46 04 /26/11 Section 111 •. General Conditions 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in. accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other- provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial. action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from. all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall he entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5 %) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as -built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on -site Section 111.doc Page 34 of 46 04/26/11 Section I11— General Conditions marked up as -built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. in addition to all other payment provisions set out in th.i.s contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and /or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment, unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty -five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be Section III.doc Page 35 of46 04/26/11 Section Hi — General Conditions necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work. (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction. and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set -off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with. Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in. writing of particulars in which Section III.doc Page 36 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111 General Conditions this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or detective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall. immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's R.epresentative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all. maintenance and operating instructions, As- built /Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents; Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and Section LILdoc Page 37 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111 - Central Conditions accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. Section I1I.doc Page 38 of46 04/26/11 Section III — General Conditions The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. - If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and. Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner Section IiLdoc Page 39 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111— General Conditions payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contra.ctor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping 'Work as permitted by this article. 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2 GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. Section IFLdoc Page 40 of 46 04/26/11 Section III General Conditions 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and dama.ges," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the Contractor /Vendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. 17.7 ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers and /or dumpsters for their disposal needs. For availability or pricing contact Tom Glenn at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, phone: (727) 562 -4923 or email: tom.glenn @myclearwater.com. 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 19 MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding process as part of the project's documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in Section IHI.doc Page 41 of 46 04/26/11 Section III - General Conditions the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. The Owner purchasing of construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. See SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION for ODP items included in the Contract Documents and the APPENDIX for ODP Documents. 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following infonnation about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and /or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and /or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4 -1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during nonnal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non - specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. 22.2 EXAMPLE CITY SEAL Of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right -of -way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the . ending start of construction. Section III.doc Page 42 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111 General Conditions (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items irom•tll.e right -of -way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will he made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and /or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping in.atcrials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere, We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager at (727) . We will he more than happy to assist you. Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 — SCOPE DESCRIPTION. 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on . sign at the preconstruction conference. 23.3 FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2- inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4-inch by 4 -inch. (4 "x4 ") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24- inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. Section III.doc Page 43 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111— General Conditions 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24- inches by 30- inches (24 "x30 ") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 - inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 23.5 SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital. letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's su.n and waves logo. Th.e color of the sun shall be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black. 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of- way, the signs will be placed in the right -of -way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN Section 1I1.doc Page 44 of 46 04/26/11 Section 111 — General Conditions PROJECT NAME (CTONTRACT NUMBER) DEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT CONTRACTOR. T COMPLETION DATE: FUNDING: OWNER'S .REPRESENTATIVE: ',Clearwater U 27 -3' 4 "x" P. T. Pos: 'TYP.i 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar days as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Section III.doc Page 45 of 46 04/26/11 Section 11I — General Conditions Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight -hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his owii expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. Section IlLdoc Page 46 of 46 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1 1.1, SCOPE DESCRIPTION 1 L2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 7 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTR.A.C1'OR 7 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS 7 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA 7 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 7 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS 7 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS 8 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 8 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 9 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK 9 6 CONCRETE 10 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 11 7.1 EXCAVATION 11 7.2 FORMS 11 8 REINFORCEMENT 11 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT 11 9 OBSTRUCTIONS 11 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 12 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 12 1.2 DEWATERING 13 12.1 GENERAL 13 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 13 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL 13 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROMANYNON- CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY 13 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 16 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE 16 13.2 PRECAST TYPE 16 Section IV.doc i 04/26/11 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) 17 13.3 DROP MANHOLES 17 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS 17 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS 17 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 17 14 13ACKFILL 17 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. 18 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 18 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT 18 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL 18 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 18 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 18 18 UNDERDRAINS 18 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 19 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 19 19 STORM SEWERS 19 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION 19 19.2 TESTING 20 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 20 20.1 MATERIALS 20 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 20 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 21 20.2 INSTALLATION 21 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 21 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 21 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS 21 20.4 TESTING 22 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS 22 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS 22 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 22 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 22 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 22 21 DRAINAGE 23 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 23 22.1 BASE 23 22.1-1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE 24 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE 24 22.2 SUBGRADE 25 22_2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 25 22.2_2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 25 Section IV.doc ii 04/26/11 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 25 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 25 23 -1.1 AGGREGATE. 25 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS 2j 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES -- PLANT, ME'T'HODS, EQTJIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE 26 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 26 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 26 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 27 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 28 23.6 1 CRACKS- 28 23.6.2 POTHOLES 28 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES 28 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 29 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 29 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 30 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT 30 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 30 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 31 25.1 IRRIGATION 3 I 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION 31 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 32 25.1.3 EXECUTION 36 25.2 LANDSCAPE 40 25.2.1 GENERAL =10 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 45 25.2.3 EXECUTION 48 26 HOPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 55 26.1 INTENT 55 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 55 26.3 MATERIALS 55 26.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION 56 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION 56 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION 56 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION 57 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 57 26.9 PAYMENT 57 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS 57 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 57 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 57 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS 58 29 CONCRETE CURBS 58 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 58 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 58 Section IV.doc iii 04/26/11 1 I 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 58 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 58 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 58 I 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 59 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT 59 1 31 SODDING 59 32 SEEDING 59 I 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES 60 33.1 BU1L1 UP TYPE STRUCTURES 60 U 33.2 PRECAST TYPE 60 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT 61 I 34 MATERIAL USED 61 35 CONFLICT 1" BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 61 ' 36 STREET SIGNS 61. 37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 61 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO /VIDEO RECORDING 61 I 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO /VIDEO RECORDING 61 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 61 37.4 EQUIPMENT 61 I 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO 62 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO 62 1 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION 62 37.8 LIGHTING 62 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL 62 1 37.10 VIDEO LOG /INDEX 63 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE 63 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 63 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 63 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 63 1 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 63 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 63 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES 64 I 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS 64 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES 64 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 64 1 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 65 38.9 MAINTENANCE 65 38.10 COMPLIANCE 65 I39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 68 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 68 1 Section IV.doc iv 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 41 POTABLE WA.FERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 68 41.1 SCOPF 68 41.2 MATERIALS 69 41.2.1 GENERAL 69 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS.AND FITTINGS 69 41.2.3 GATE VALVES 71 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES 71 41.2.5 HYD.RA.N7S 72 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES 73 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 73 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 73 41.2.9 7APPING SLEEVES 74 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 74 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 74 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 74 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 74 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 76 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS 7'O EXISTING LINES 76 41.4 TESTS 77 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS 77 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST 77 41.5 STERILIZATION 77 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT 77 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM 77 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE 77 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 78 41.5.5 .BACTERIAL TESTS 78 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 78 41.6.1 GENERAL 78 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 79 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 79 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 79 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 79 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 80 43 TENNIS COURTS 80 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 80 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS 80 43.1.2 BASE COURSE 80 43.1.3 PRIME COAT 80 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE 80 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE 80 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 81 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 82 43.2.1 GENERAL 82 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 83 Section IV.doc v 04/26/11. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 43.2.3 SLOPE 83 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 84 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURI3ING 84 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 84 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER 84 43.2.8 FENCING 83 43.2.9 WINDSC :KEENS 85 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 85 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE 87 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) 87 43.2.13 CONCRETE 87 43.2.14 EXLSTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 87 43.2.1 5 WATER COOLER 88 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION 88 43.2.17 WARRANTY 88 44 WORK. ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 89 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WC)RK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 89 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 89 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY 89 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 90 44.3.1 ALL .ROADWAYS... 90 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS 90 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 90 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 90 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 90 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 91 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 91 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 91 45 CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE LINING 91 45.1 INTENT 91 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR /INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 92 45.3 MATERIALS 92 45.4 CLEANING /SURFA.CE PREPARATION 92 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION 93 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION 93 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION 93 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 93 45.9 PAYMENT 93 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 94 46.1 MATERIALS 94 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS 94 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL 94 46.1.3 SAMPLES 94 46.1.4 REJECTION 94 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS 94 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 95 Section IV.doc vi 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE 95 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS 95 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING 95 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE 95 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 95 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS 95 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION 95 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS 96 46.4.4 INSERTION OF ME LINER 96 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES 96 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED 96 46.4.7 BAC'KFILLING 97 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR 97 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS 97 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE R.IBBEI) PIPE 97 47.1 SCOPE 97 47.2 MATERIALS 97 47.3 PIPE 97 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM 98 47.5 FITTINGS 98 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 98 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT 98 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE 98 48.3 COMPOSITION 98 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS 99 48.5 MATERIALS 99 48.6 WATER 99 48.7 REINFORCEMENT 99 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS 99 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION 100 48.10 PROPORTIONING 100 48.11 MIXING 100 48.12 APPLICATION 100 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 101 48.14 SURFACE FINISH 101 48.15 CURING 101 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION 101 48.17 INSPECTION 102 48.18 EQUIPMENT 102 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 103 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT 103 49.2 PAYMENT 103 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 103 49.3_ I MATERIALS 103 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 104 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 104 Section IV.doc vii 04/26/1 I 49.4.1 MATERIALS 105 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL 105 49.6 GROUTING MIX 105 49.7 LINER. MIX 105 49.8 WATER 106 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS 106 49.10 EQUIPMENT 106 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 106 49.11.1 PREPARATION 106 49.11.2 MIXING 107 49.11.3 SPRAYING 107 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING 107 49.11.5 CURING 107 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE 108 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER. PRODUCT SYSTEM 108 49.12.1 SCOPE 108 49.12.2 MATERIALS 108 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 110 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 112 51 IN -LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 112 51.1 SCOPE 112 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 113 51.2.1 ASPHALT 113 51.2.2 CONCRETE 113 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX 113 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 113 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE 114 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 114 51.6 PLAYING LINES 114 51.7 GENERAL 114 51.8 LIMITATIONS 114 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 115 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 115 53.1 MATERIAL 115 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 115 53.1.2 GABIONAND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL_ 117 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE 118 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC 118 53.2 PERFORMANCE 118 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 119 54.1 SCOPE 119 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK 119 54.3 WORK METHODS 120 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING 120 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT 120 Section IV.doc viii 04 /26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 54.4 LIT ".I'ER 120 54.5 VISUAL CHECK 120 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING 120 54.7 PI]OENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) 120 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL, 120 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL 121 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY 121 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION 121 54.12 WEED REMOVAL 1N LANDSCAPED AREA 121 54.13 MULCH CONDITION 121 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR 121 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL 121 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION 121 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION 122 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE 122 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK 122 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 122 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 122 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 123 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 123 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 123 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 124 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 124 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 124 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 124 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING 124 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 125 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 125 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT 125 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 125 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 125 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 125 57 RIPRAP 125 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 125 57.2 BASIS OF' PAYMENT 126 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY 126 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL 126 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING 126 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 126 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 127 60 SIGNING AND MARKING 127 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 127 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING 127 Section TV.doc ix 04/26/11 61A BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 127 62 TREE PROTECTION 128 62.1 TREE BARRICADES 128 62.2 ROOT PRUNING 128 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING 129 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 130 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN 130 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES 130 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE 130 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS 131 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS 131 63.6 POSTING 131 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES 131 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 131 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS 131 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 131 Section IVdoc x 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION Project Number: 10- 0023 -UT Scope of Work: The work consists of rehabilitating existing circular clarifiers and associated equipment at the City's three Water Reclamation Facilities as described herein. Restrictions for this Project: All work associated with this project is at the City of Clearwater's Northeast WRF and is restricted to Clarifiers 1 thru 4, the North RAS Pump House, and the plant SCADA system serving those clarifiers and that pump house. The Contractor shall disregard any references to Clarifiers 5 thru 8 and the South RAS Pump House at the Northeast WRF. The Contractor shall also disregard any references to the Marshall Street WRF and the East WRF. 1. Northeast Plant: Clarifiers 1 thru 4 and North RAS Pump House • Replace all rotating and mechanical equipment in Clarifiers 1 thru 4 including the center columns, the rotating mechanism, the drives, the walkway bridges, the walkway bridge handrail, the scum beaches, the scum troughs, the scum baffles, the scum baffle supports, the weirs, and the associated hardware and subcomponents of these items. • Replace the scum pipe wall penetrations on each clarifier from the scum trough to the first pipe joint or fitting outside the clarifier wall. Use schedule 80 PVC pipe for the new installation. Replace the link seals for the wall penetrations. Saw cut, remove and restore the overbearing concrete slab as required to replace the scum pipe wall penetrations. • Replace two RAS pumps, motors, pump bases, and VFDs. Re -grout the pump bases. Reconnect the existing seal water piping and the existing drain piping. • Remove the existing copper piping associated with the existing flow matcher VFDs. Plug the copper pipe to liquid connections with appropriate fittings on the RAS piping and at the RAS well. • Replace two RAS pump suction plug valves. • Replace two RAS pump discharge check valves. • Replace two RAS pump discharge butterfly valves. • Replace two WAS pumps, motors, pump bases, and VFDs. Re -grout the bases. Reconnect the existing seal water piping and the existing drain piping. • Replace the MCC, electrical panels, conduit, and wire as shown. • Add current trip devices to the clarifier drive motor starters. Integrate the trip devices into the plant SCADA system. • Replace the seals in four telescopic valves. Section CVdoc Page 1 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications • Cut in and add a WAS flow meter to the WAS piping. • Replace 1 WAS plug valve. • Replace RAS piping supports. Replace all pipe supports on the suction piping for the WAS pumps. • Paint the new RAS and WAS pumps, piping, supports, and valves to match existing. • Replace the supports under the RAS pump suction valves with fabricated stainless steel supports. These are similar to Piping Technology & Products Figure 46 supports. • Replace the nosings on five sets of stairs. • Replace one ultrasonic RAS well level detector. Replace one low level switch in the RAS well. • Relocate four existing sludge blanket level detector probes from the existing walkway bridges to the new walkway bridges. • Integrate monitoring and control signals for all clarifier drives and starters, all blanket level detectors, both RAS pump motor VFDs, both WAS pump motor VFDs, the WAS flow meter, the RAS well level detector, and the RAS well low level switch into pump control logic and the plant SCADA system. • Add 8 ground water pressure relief valves in the bottom of each clarifier. A total of 32 ground water pressure relief valves are to be added. • Add spray water piping, valves, and nozzles to each new bridge for scum control. • Add a 1 -inch hose bib to each new clarifier access platform. • Add scum trough flush water piping, valves, and controls to each scum trough for scum control. • Furnish, install, operate, maintain, and permit a groundwater dewatering system as required to prevent clarifier tanks from becoming buoyant while empty. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused by buoyant tanks. 2. Northeast Plant: Clarifiers 5 thru 8 and South RAS Pump House • Replace all rotating and mechanical equipment in Clarifiers 5 thru 8 including the center columns, the rotating mechanism, the drives, the walkway bridges, the walkway bridge handrail, the scum beaches, the scum troughs, the scum baffles, the scum baffle supports, the weirs, and the associated hardware and subcomponents of these items. • Replace the scum pipe wall penetrations on each clarifier from the scum trough to the first pipe joint or fitting outside the clarifier wall. Use schedule 80 PVC pipe for the new installation. Replace the link seals for the wall penetrations. Saw cut, remove and restore the overbearing concrete slab as required to replace the scum pipe wall penetrations. • Replace two RAS pumps, motors, pump bases, and VFDs. Re -grout the pump bases. Reconnect the existing seal water piping and the existing drain piping. Section 1V.doc Page 2 of 132 04/26/2011 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV Technical Specifications • Remove the existing copper piping associated with the existing flow matcher VFDs. Plug the copper pipe to liquid connections with appropriate fittings on the RAS piping and at the RAS well. • Replace two RAS pump suction plug valves. • Replace two RAS pump discharge check valves. • Replace two RAS pump discharge butterfly valves. • Replace the MCC, electrical panels, conduit, and wire as shown. • Add current trip devices to the clarifier drive motor starters. Integrate the trip devices into the plant SCADA system. • Replace the seals in four telescopic valves. • Replace RAS piping supports. • Paint the new RAS pumps, piping, supports, and valves to match existing. • Replace the supports under the RAS pump suction valves with fabricated stainless steel supports. These are similar to Piping Technology & Products Figure 46 supports. • Replace one ultrasonic RAS well level detector. Replace one low level switch in the RAS well. • Relocate four existing sludge blanket level detector probes from the existing walkway bridges to the new walkway bridges. • Integrate monitoring and control signals for all clarifier drives and starters, all blanket level detectors, both RAS pump motor VFDs, both WAS pump motor VFDs, the WAS flow meter, the RAS well level detector, and the RAS well low level switch into pump control logic and the plant SCADA system. • Replace 8 ground water pressure relief valves in the bottom of each clarifier. A total of 32 ground water pressure relief valves are to be replaced. • Add spray water piping, valves, and nozzles to each new bridge for scum control. • Add a 1 -inch hose bib to each clarifier access platform. • Add scum trough flush water piping, valves, and controls to each scum trough for scum control. • Furnish, install, operate, maintain, and permit a groundwater dewatering system as required to prevent clarifier tanks from becoming buoyant while empty. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused by buoyant tanks. 3. Marshall Street Plant • Replace all rotating and mechanical equipment in Clarifiers 1 thru 4 including the center columns, the rotating mechanism, the drives, the walkway bridges, the walkway bridge handrail, the scum beaches, the scum troughs, the scum baffles, the scum baffle supports, the weirs, and the associated hardware and subcomponents of these items. Section IV.doc Page 3 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV Technical Specifications • Replace four- scum pipe wall penetrations from the scum trough to the first pipe joint outside the clarifier wall. Replace the link seals for these scum pipes. • Relocate four- existing ultrasonic sludge blanket level detectors from the existing walkway bridges to the new walkway bridges. • R.eplace four RAS telescoping valves and valve operators. • Replace four gates in the clarifier splitter box. Install, operate, and maintain temporary bypass pumping while these four gates are being replaced. • Replace 12 ground water pressure relief valves in the bottom of each clarifier. A total of 48 ground water pressure relief valves are to be replaced. • Add spray water piping, valves, and nozzles to each new bridge for scum control. • Add a 1 -inch hose bib to each clarifier access platform. • Add scum trough flush water piping, valves, and controls to each scum trough for scum control. • Furnish, install, operate, maintain, and permit a groundwater dewatering system as required to prevent clarifier tanks from becoming buoyant while empty. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused by buoyant tanks. 4. East Plant • Replace the scum beaches, the scum troughs, the scum baffles, the scum baffle supports, the skimmer arms, the drives, and the weirs on both clarifiers. • Repaint all rotating, mechanical, and structural ferrous equipment in both clarifiers that is not being replaced. • Replace the walkway bridge center access platform, and handrail on the East clarifier. Paint the new platform to match existing. • Replace one scum pump check valve and two scum pump discharge valves at the existing scum pump location. • Replace one clarifier effluent gate valve for the west clarifier. • Replace one clarifier drain valve for the east clarifier. Take extra precaution to prevent damage to the plant perimeter wall and the clarifier tank located near this valve. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages by excavating and repairing the drain valve. • Replace two RAS telescoping valve seals. • Replace 12 ground water pressure relief valves in the bottom of each clarifier. A total of 24 ground water pressure relief valves are to be replaced. • Add spray water piping, valves, and nozzles to the new bridge for scum control. • Add a 1 -inch hose bib to each clarifier access platform. • Retrofit the existing scum trough flush water piping, valves, and controls for each clarifier to the rehabilitated clarifiers. Section IV.doc Page 4 of 132 04/26/2011 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 1V — Technical Specifications • Replace two existing ultrasonic sludge blanket level detectors with new units and mount them on the on the walkway bridges. • Furnish and install a scum decant system.. • Furnish, install, operate, maintain, and permit a groundwater dewatering system as required to prevent clarifier tanks from becoming buoyant while empty and during all excavations. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused by buoyant tanks. 5. Project Sign The Contractor shall provide 1 fixed project sign as described in SECTION 111, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. 6. Project Contract Period THE CONTRACT PERIOD ES 270 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST Project Name: CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION Project Number: 10- 0023 -UT The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown below: 1 /1 Scope Of Work 2.1 Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Contractor 2.2 • Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The City 3 /1 Definition Of Tenns 4 n Order And Location Of The Work 5 /1 Excavation For Underground Work 6 Concrete 7 n Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 ❑ Reinforcement 9 /1 Obstructions 10 0 Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement 11 U Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 Dewatering 13 ❑ Sanitary Manholes 14 ❑ Backfill 15 ❑ Street Crossings, Etc. 16 ❑ Raising Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures 17 Unsuitable Material Removal 18 Underdrains 19 U Storm Sewers 20 LI Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains Section IV.doc Page 5 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — 'fechnicel Specifications 21 ❑ Drainage 22 Roadway Base And Subgrade 23 Asphaltic Concrete Materials Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt 24 25 General. Planting Specifications 26 fl Hdpe Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining Plant Mix Driveways 27 28 n Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials 29 Concrete Curbs 30 Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways 31 f Sodding 32 • Seeding 33 Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 fl Material Used 35 1 Conflict Between Plans And Specifications 36 Street Signs 37 17 Audio /Video Recording Of Work Areas 38 n Erosion And Siltation Control 39 [1 Utility Tie In Location Marking 40 ❑ Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee 41 Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appurtenances 42 [ 1 Gas System Specifications 43 ❑ Tennis Courts 44 Work Zone Traffic Control 45 ❑ Cured -In -Place Pipe Lining 46 ❑ Specifications for Polyethylene Sliplining 47 ❑ Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe 48 Gunite Specifications 49 n Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration 50 [1 Project Information Signs 51 ❑ In -Line Skating Surfacing System 52 n Resident Notification of Start of Construction 53 ❑ Gabions and Mattresses 54 H Lawn Maintenance Specifications 55 • Milling Operations 56 ❑ Clearing and Grubbing 57 Riprap 58 -❑ Treatment Plant Safety 59 Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials 60 ❑ Signing And Marking 61 ❑ Roadway Lighting 62 ❑ Tree Protection 63 • Project Web Pages Section IV.doc Page 6 of 132 04/26/2011 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 2,1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor- shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engin.cers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As- built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property comers or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida. 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III, ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assurne any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated Section IV.doc Page 7 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV - Technical Specifications quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows: Section IV.doc AA Aluminum Association, Inc. AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials. ACI American Concrete Institute AISI . American Iron and Steel Institute AMA Acoustical Materials Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge AWMA Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CFR Code of Federal Regulations CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards DEP Department of Environmental Protection (Florida) DOT Department of Transportation (Florida) EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAC Florida Administrative Code FBC Florida Building Code FFPC Florida Fire Prevention Code FGC Florida Gas Code FMC Florida Mechanical Code FPC Florida Plumbing Code FedSpec Federal Specifications HI Standards of Hydraulic Institute Page 8 of 132 04/26/2011 Section TV — Technical Specifications IB:BM Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted 1 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IPS Iron Pipe Size MIL Military Specification INAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code INEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association I NPT National Pipe Thread NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association PCA Portland Cement Association I PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute SBC Standard Building Code (SBCCI) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. I SDI Steel Door Institute SFPC Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI) SGC Standard Gas Code (SBCCI) I S.il. Steel Joist Institute SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association II SMC Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI) SPC Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau I SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Title Council of America UL Underwriters' Laboratories 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 1 This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 — ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times 1 maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health 1 Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as ' OSHA "Type C ". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of 1 Section IV.doc Page 9 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation it in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench - shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall. be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American, Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M -85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C -33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C -94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5 ", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as Section IV_doc Page 10 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV ••• Technical Specifications determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry". 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall he free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. 8 REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA -A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASFITO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM. 775/A77 M -86 requirements. 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. Section IV.doc Page 11 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged. shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum. 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2 ", if over 6 ", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASI IT() T- 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equi.prn.ent required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration. or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall. be a minimum of 6" thick and he reinforced with 6/6 X 10 /10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre- Section IV.doc ['age 12 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirena.ents. 12 DEWATERING 12.1 GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry ". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non- Contaminated Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON- CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: I) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results 2) A copy of the FDEP Notification It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have any questions. You may contact the City at 562 -4750 for direction or further assistance. STATE OF FLORIDA Section 1V.doc Page 13 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Speeilicai ons DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON - CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non - contaminated site activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62- 620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists. Minirn.wrn reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled before the comm.encemen.t of discharge, again within. thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1. TABLE 1 If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the City of Clearwater. (a) Section 1V.doc For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC Page 14 of 132 04/26/2011 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Screening Values for Discharges into: Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg /1 10.0 mg /1 PH, standard units 6.0 -8.5 6.5 -8.5 Total Recoverable Mercury — by Method 1631E 0.012 pg /1 0.025 .tg /1 Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 .tg /1 9.3 tg /1 Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 i_tg /1 2.9 µg/1 Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/1 5.6 µg/1 Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 tg /1 86.01.1g/1 Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 p.g /1 50.0 µg /1 Benzene 1.0 .tg /l 1.0 µg /1 Naphthalene 100.014g/1 100.0 p.g /1 If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the City of Clearwater. (a) Section 1V.doc For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC Page 14 of 132 04/26/2011 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: 1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude); 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification. of coverage is received from the Department. For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pll outside of this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration of less than 1500 mg /1, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than 1500 mg/1. In accordance with Rule 62- 302.500(1)(a -c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters. If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit. If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during Section IV.doc Page 15 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62- 621.250, F.A.C.; are applicable to this Generic Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in. shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: fora directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches. Standard Drop Manholes shall. be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely .filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 13.2 PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Detail #302 Sheet 2 of 3. Section IV.doc Page 16 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 -- Asphaltic Concrete Adjustment of Manholes. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer. to Detail. 301. 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2 -inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry thickness of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite. 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. Section IV.doc Page 17 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — 'technical Specifications Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction ofAASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of ba.ckfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the .Engineer, the trenches shall he bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must he satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off- site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material . excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub - surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non - degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" Section IV.doc Page 18 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specilical.ions diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F -758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC 1Jnderdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AA.S-ITO M -189 described in FDOT Section 948 -4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM. D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A -2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454/33 or 124540, manufactured per ASTM F949 -93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D24.12 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Cnderdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non- perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly - chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi. 140 -N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub -drain in place and accepted. 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 19 STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941 of the current FDOT Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 1.40N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream Section JV.doc Page .19 of 132 04/26/2011 Section 1V Technical Specifications manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) 19.2 TESTING The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 20.1 MATERIALS 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20 -feet. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets Section IV.doc Page 20 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV Technical Specifications shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. A two -way cleanout shall. be installed on each lateral at the property line. 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform. to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 20.2 INSTALLATION 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321 and Unihell UNI B 5. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12 -inch on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe aligmnent. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class 1 material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings Section IV.doc Page 21 of 132 04/26/2011 Section 1V — Technical Specilicalions will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manh.oies. 20.4 TESTING 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by tilling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all. labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4- inches shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two -way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. Section 1V.doc Page 22 of 132 04/26/2011 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV Technical Specifications 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found then. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22.1 BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material. Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall he done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Section IV.doc Page 23 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV - -- Technical Specifications Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box_ The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (i.e. vehicles, etc.) from. airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall. be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 6 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330 -11, and for soil cement per Section 270 -5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half -inch (1/2 "). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), Section 1V.doc Page 24 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and. plans. 22.2 SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade. 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161 -6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per FDOT Section 160 -7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition). 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S -Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 919 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Section IV.doc Page 25 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV Technical Specifications 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The .plant and methods of operation used to prepare all. asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control /assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction /gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to rn.eet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per Section 330 -11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330 -13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of 1/4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330- 15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of 1/4" or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Section IV.doc Page 26 of 132 04/26/2011 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE THICKNESS (Inches) LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) FC -3 Type S —I Type S -1 with Type S ---III Top Layer Type S ---III Type S - -III with .I'C -3 Top Layer Type S —I with FC -3 Top Layer 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2°d 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 1 1 1'/2 11/2 2 1% 3/4 * 1 1 21/2 11/4 11/4 11/2 1 11/2 1 3 11/2 11/2 2 1 2 1 * At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S -III is acceptable for use on residential streets Additional Notes: 1. Type S —III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only). 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design detail. 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S -1II per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000, and all residential streets. 6. An FC -3 friction course per section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of 3000 or greater. 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Section IV.doc Page 27 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 23.6.1 CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application. of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by band, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stonii drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A -36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A -36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. Section IV.doc Page 28 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to he included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom Tractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre - wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be 1/4" above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections A through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). Section 1V.doc Page 29 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an. approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67 -22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpa.ve mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and /or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http: / /wwwl1.myflorida.coln. It is under the section "Doing Business with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index ". For additional information, call FDOT @ 850- 414 -4000. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. Section IV.doc Page 30 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 25.1 IRRIGATION 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and /or specified. Work noted as "NIC ", "existing ", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf /landscape areas except at road /paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four -hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two -hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. Section IV.doc Page 31 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS .A.. The hTigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all ocher trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigations Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty rnateri.als, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. Section 1V.doc Page 32 of 132 04/26/201 I Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall. be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200 -250 psi Ball Valve 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded -Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non -Shock Safe -T Shear Stem 5. Safe -T -Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company , Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 21/2" IN. AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA -C -509 2. 200 lb. O.W.G 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. 25.1.2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance - pressure across -the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25 -30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a Section IV.doc Page 33 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical /UV resistant materials. The valve's one -piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of th.e valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and [JNIK. control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36 -T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. 13. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10 ") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6 ") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one -half inch (1/2 ") low - density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self - cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12 ", 18 ", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self - flushing /cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7 -70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15 -45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow /reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12 ", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7 ". Section I..V.doc Page 34 of 132 04/26/201,1 Section IV — Technical Specifications B. For on- surface or under mulch installations,. 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3' -5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub- surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the cnd of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall thatch the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 25.1.2.10.4 AIR /VACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air /Vacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within =/ -6 %. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high - impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. Section IV.doc Page 35 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program. operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation. controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every kcy stroke. The screen shall. automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UN.IK. Control Modules. D. The Field Transrnitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PER, PES -B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.3 EXECUTION 25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. Section IV.doc Page 36 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV Technical Specifications E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. H. I)o not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. 1. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. 13. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than 1/2 in. C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. Section 1V.doc Page 37 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV -- Technical Specifications G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6 ") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non - pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and /or irrigation plans and notify the .Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. Section IV.doc Page 38 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1 Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup /curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. I . The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. Section IV.doc Page 39 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2 LANDSCAPE 25.2.1 GENERAL 25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions when required. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and /or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Section JV.doc Page 40 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV • Technical Specifications Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non - compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call" at 1- 800 -432- 4770. 0. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work., such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. 25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions /alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions /alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS /DEFINITIONS 0.A. or HT.: The over -all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C.T. : Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. Section 1V.doc Page 41 of 132 04/26/2011 C. W:: SPR.: Section IV -• Technical Specifications Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf • sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST. TR. : Straight trunk. Minimum. GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. O. C.: On center, distance between plant centers. DIA.: Diameter. LVS.: Leaves. D. B. H Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4 -1/2 feet above grade. CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. B &B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. PPP: FG: STD.: Plants per pot. Field grown. Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner's Representative: Owner's on -site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Section IV.doc Page 42 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend. or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. if plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special. approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & 13 plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty -four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. Section IV.doc Page 43 of 132 04/26/2011 Section I.V -- Technical Specifications 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 25.2.19.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub - grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from. planting operations. 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's Representative and /or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and /or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. Section IV.doc Page 44 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS 25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural. Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well - developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for narne variety, size quality, or designated area. E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non - available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. • Section IV.doc Page 45 of 132 04/26/2011 Section (V 'Technical Speciiicalion.s I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have frtn, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa provided the quality is equal. or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as /if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not he stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall he as certification requirements. 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade `B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre- emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan. B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction. 25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20 -10 -5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osrnocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than 1/4 the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). Section IV.doc Page 46 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall. be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two - 3/4" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL A Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may he unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1". C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil. 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra -Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4 - 1/2 feet above grade. Section IV.doc Page 47 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when. specified in the plans and /or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with. Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed /turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre- emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round -Up" or "Rodeo ", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. Section IV.doc Page 48 of 132 04/26/2011 Section 1V Technical Specifications The Contractor shall r-em.ove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - '/2 inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub - grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release forrn. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil. E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on. Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well - drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as Section IV.doc Page 49 of 132 04/26/2011 Section 1V Technical Specifications the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular- in outline. Planting pit shal l be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in. the locations shown, at such level that after settlement nonnal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20 -10 -5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each ' /z" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7- 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back - filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back -fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. Section 1V.doc Page 50 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — l'echnical Specifications G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed -free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. 1. Sabal palms may he planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. Luring periods of drought, sod shall he watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil. adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6 -6 -6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn. areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is ]aid in place. C. Solid socl shall he laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1 -1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling -in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum. of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Section lV_doc Page 51 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical SpcciIIcaions Stakes shall he driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail. the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two 3/4 inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be -`trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non - mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. 25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. 13. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN -UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean -up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. Section N_doc Page 52 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H..A.) standards. .B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall. be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may he done by others; at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash -out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and /or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and /or Landscape Contractor. Section IV.doc Page 53 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been mad.e. 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plans material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim.. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent ", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under - specified plant materials. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. Section IV.doc Page 54 of 132 04/26/2011 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR /INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold • and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must he certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E= 113,000 psi Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft -lb /in Flexure Modulus E= 136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c -0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Section 1V.doc Page 55 of 132 04/26/20I 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Liner shall be marked at 5 -foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall subnni.t to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design. calculations for th.c liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1- 800 - 344 -3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and /or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 26.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material. removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed - circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. Section 1.V.doc Page 56 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — "technical Specifications 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall he resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be recomlected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal. usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving. When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replace ment shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Section TV.doc Page 57 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS This Article deleted. 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs sh.al.l be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project. Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall he lineal. feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall he full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4 "), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6 ") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10 /10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 x 10 /10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. Section IV.doc Page 58 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a socl roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and /or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and /or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. Section IV.doc Page 59 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications When this work. is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then. the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other.- work. 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B ln.dex Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Section. Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall he protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. 33.2 PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wal], thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using 0 ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. Section IV.doc Page 60 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 — MAI" ERTA L USED. 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 — CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 37 AUDIO /VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO /VIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio /video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights -of -way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre - construction conditions. 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty -one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre - construction color audio -video recording documentation. 37.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. Section IV.doc Page 61 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each. recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall he displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 37.8 LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed forty -four (44) feet per minute. Section IV.doc Page 62 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications 37.10 VIDEO LOG /INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall, describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on -site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. Section IV.doc Page 63 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and /or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first. step .in. the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used they shall be capable at all times of contain -ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal. of sediment from the basin. 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and /or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. Silt curtains or other filter /siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. Section tV.doc Page 64 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet. of trench shall he open at any one time; h. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material. shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and /or repaired as required. 38.10 COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and /or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (hut not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order ". City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. Section IV.doc Page 65 of 132 04/26/2011 Section IV — Technical Specifications City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility- to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: 1st occurrence Warning 2nd occurrence - $32 Re- inspection Fee 3rd occurrence - $80 Re- inspection Fee 4th occurrence - Stop Work Order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction Services at 562 -4750 or Planning & Development Services at 562 -4741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562 -4750. Section IV.doc Page 66 of 132 04/26/2011 1 NE I I N I I INI N ON NO I I IIN I N AN an - Section IV —Technical Specifications CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF EROSION VIOLATION UNDER SECTION 3 -701 (DIVISION 7 — EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE. Warning $32.00 Re- inspection Fee $80.00 Re- inspection Fee Stop Work Order DATE POSTED: CITY OF CLEARWATER PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562 -4741 ENGINEERING /CONSTRUCTION 727 562 -4750 Inspector's Name: Received by: Inspector's Signature: Section IV.doc (Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt or concurrence with findings of the inspector.) IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED Page 67 of 132 3/14/2011 Section CV — Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the hack of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. Th.e tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil .Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6 -inch x 3 -inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4 -inch X 2 -inch and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 — AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE. 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. Section IV.doc Page 68 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.2 MATERIALS 41.2.1 GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall. be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest revision. 41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4 -inch through 8 -inch shall be in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: Section IV.doc Page 69 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications Size Dimension Ratio (OD /Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8 -inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4 -inch through 8 -inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4 -inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A..W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18- inches between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2 -inch PVC pipe to 12- inches minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be the sane length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2 -inch removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from 4 -inch through 16 -inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C153 /A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI /AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSI /AWWA Cl 04/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C111 /A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI /AWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) ;manufacture will be acceptable. 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on • the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. Section IV.doc Page 70 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 41.2.3 GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4- inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2 -inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16 -inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI /A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509 -515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistent bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0 ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body.. Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16 -inch shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI /AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by -pass. 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be a- piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall he provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. Section 1V -doc Page 71 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV Technical Specifications 41.2.5 HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than. those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant • AVK Nostalgic 2780. • American Darling B -84 -B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA. Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1 _ All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A. W. W.A. Standard C -502 latest revision and must be UL /FM I i sted. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an 0-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately 2 -inch above the ground line. Breakaway bolts not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one -piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 (1- 1 /2- inch) pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with 0-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a 6 -inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a 5 -1/4 -inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1/2-inch pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. Section IV.doc Page 72 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV •'I'echnical Specifications 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA. standard C- 502 -85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA. Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement. of the hydrant. All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4 -inch P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on 4 -inch main shall be 1 -1/2 -inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2- inch service connections to 6 -inch and larger mains. Service saddles (.1CM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed are: Section IV.doc Page 73 of 132 04/26/11 Section iV — Technical Specifications 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each. end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backllow prevention device a device containing a minimum. of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., .1CM 412 or Smith -Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4 -inch bronze test plug. 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30- inches and a maximum of 42- inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. Section IV.doc Page 74 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall he carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall he immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the hell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall. he made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI /AWWA C600 -82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. Section IV.doc Page 75 of 132 04/26/11 Section 1V — Technical Specifications 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL Valves, h.ydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and _joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed 18- inches from the main line. The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall he centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located 10 -feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall. be connected to the main with a 6 -inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. Section IV.doc Page 76 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 t r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and. workmanlike Manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division. 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48 -hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 4t5 STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron ". 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. Section IV.doc Page 77 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system_ in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization. and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and /or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joints materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. Section IV.doc Page 78 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as treasured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSI /AWWA C 110 /A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust Section IV.doc Page 79 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV - Technical Specifications anchorage, 6- inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000 square foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retain.ed and turned into the Engineer's Office. 43.1.2 BASE COURSE Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section [V - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. 43.1.3 PRIME COAT The material used for prime coat shall be cut -back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC -250 and shall conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction ". 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S -III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. If a deficiency of more than ' /a" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S -III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV.doc Page 80 of 132 04/26/1 1 1 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications be approved. If a deficiency of more than t /." exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching an.d color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval. of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In. requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the .name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials. Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and /or patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use. After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. It a deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix. No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured. 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required. Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for all other others. The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty -eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. Section 1.V.doc Page 81 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 Degree's F and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum. or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings_ The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein.. Basis of design for clay courts with sub - surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub - surface irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in . conformance with the specifications and drawings. Section IV.doc Page 82 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS The Owner shall provide and maintain. reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an arca adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed." 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub -grade at the proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub -grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub -grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. 43.2.2.3 SUB -GRADE The sub -grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub -grade elevation. The sub -grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO 1-180 is required. The Contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO 1-180 is required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings. Section IV.doc Page 83 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.1 LINER Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub -grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are res.ista.nt to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE The base course shall. consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Qu.aiity Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one - quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade. 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one - quarter (2 -1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub- surface irrigation system. 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 43.2.5.1 CURB Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one - quarter (1/4) to one -half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation. 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE 1 A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one - eighth (1/8) inch. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo -tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub - surface base course of the clay tennis Courts. Section IV.doc. Page 84 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV -. "Technical Specifications 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT -25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification._ 43.2.8.2 POSTS All posts shall. be a minimum 2 -1/2" Ameristar HT -25 pipe; top rails 1 -5/8" Arneristar H1-25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1 -3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom -type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger -bar. include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch, fork type or plunger -bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges --- Size and material to suit gate size, non -lift-off type, and offset to permit 180- degree gate opening. Provide one and one -half (1 -1/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high - density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty -six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty -two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty -three (33) feet on a singles court. 43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven - eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support Section 1V.doc Page 85 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications the net a height of forty -two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manul_a.ctures .recommendation.. 1 1 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USIA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USIA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration lio.m the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each corner. Basis of Design. — Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchor. 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one -half (2 -- 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USIA. 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: 1. Ride -on. Tandem Roller - Brutus AR -I Roller, automatic forward- neutral- reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3 -horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4 -1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4 -1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction- driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier /Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction "Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels. 8. Court Rake (1 each) — six -foot length aluminum. Section IV.doc Page 86 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV Technical Specifications 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench. 8" — 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute for each court. 43.2.13 CONCRETE Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per A.STM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd-, 1 -inch maximum size aggregate, 3 -inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re- aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE -LAMP The Contractor shall re -lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight -(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887 -0770 fax (336) 887 - 0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: Section IV.doc Page 87 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications Pole T1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole '12 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole 15 Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole 15 Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole 15 new pole w /existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 Circuits Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole'( 5 Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T9 existing 5 .fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan relocation light poles accordingly. 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits. New conduits will be required for the three (3) n.ew light poles and the Contractor shall include the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles. 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 431.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series — water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion. Section 1V.doc Page 88 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB- SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub - surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and /or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and /or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and 1- highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and /or around construction or maintenance work zones. The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control . zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate signs ". 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction Section tV.doc Page 89 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Speci lications 102 -5 Traffic Control: 102 -5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to he accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform. to national and state standards. 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of 7 -day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C -View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562 -4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. Section IV.doc Page 90 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control. devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction .Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non- specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal form. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and /or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24 -hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day -to -day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24 -hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 45 CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE LINING 45.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand Section IV.doc Page 91 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR /INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequa.lified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project rn.ust exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured properties: Tensile Strength Flexural Strength Flexural Modulus of Elasticity Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D638 ASTM D790 ASTM D790 ASTM D2290 to insertion. Resin type liner with the following 3,000 psi 4,500 psi 300,000 psi 150,000 psi Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be I-IS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305- 979 -0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 45.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. Section IV.doc Page 92 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed - circuit color television_ and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of th.e entire periphery of the pipe. 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight -hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 45.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. Section 1V.doc Page 93 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV 'Technical Specifications 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 46.1 MATERIALS 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform. to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 34.54340 as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. if fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall. be of the sani.e manufacture as the pipe being supplied. 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL 1 The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the saute raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 1 1 1 1 1 46.1.3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal FPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and /or the scope of work. Section IV.doc Page 94 of 132 04/26/11. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such. stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: 12 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15 -inch existing sewer. 16 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18 -inch existing sewer. 18 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21 -inch existing sewer. 21 V2 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24 -inch existing sewer. 28 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30 -inch existing sewer. 34 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36 -inch existing sewer. 42 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48 -inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to inserting the liner. Section 1V.doc Page 95 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV Technical Specifications 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the specifying engineer or his representative. Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates. 1 1 1 1 1 1 After the 12 -hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and . installation of the liner. 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. Section [V.doc Page 96 of 132 04/26/1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre - fabricated polyethylene saddle. A. neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFILLING All excavations shall be backtilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for slipl.ining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and /or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a finer pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right -of -ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right -of -ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter ". The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic. 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. Section IV.doc Page 97 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral hell gask..eted joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have hell and /or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable, sewage and /or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. Section IV.doc Page 98 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS Concrete ingredients shall be selected; proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering; and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28 -day strength of 4;000 psi. 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation 01.50 for Portland Cement, Type 1. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic .foot. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong, durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits: Passing No. 3/8 Sieve 100% Passing No. 4 Sieve 95% to 100% Passing No. 8 Sieve 80% to 100% Passing No. 16 Sieve 50% to 85% Passing No. 30 Sieve 25% to 60% Passing No. 50 Sieve 10% to 30% Passing No. 100 Sieve 2% to 10% 48.6 WATER Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and /or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. Section IV.doc Page 99 of 132 04 /26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly_ or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation. that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose n...ateriai. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a. air /water blast to remove all particles from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. 48.10 PROPORTIONING Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required. If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the drum at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water contained in the aggregate. Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the Section 1V.doc Page 100 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from. the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if: 1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand. at the nozzle. 2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing reinforcement. The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45- degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air jet. 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit. Section IV.doc Page 101 of 132 04/26/11 Section I \/ — Technical Specifications 48.17 INSPECTION Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. 48.18 EQUIPMENT Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry niix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position. in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical. parts. Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose: Comp. Cap (cfm) Max. Hose Dia. (In.) Max. Size Nozzle (In.) Min. Air Press. (psi) 365 1 5/8 1 5/8 60 600 2 2 80 750 2 1/2 2 1/2 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). Section IV.doc Page 102 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made -in -place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met_ 49.2 PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and /or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO 1-120 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type [ and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type 11 per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. Section TV.doc Page 103 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to he taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert Loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1 /2" of Pinellas County Type II surface. 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator /contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. Section IV.doc Page 104 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. 49.4.1 MATERIALS 49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Compressive Strength (ASTM C -109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi Shrinkage (ASTM C -596) Bond (ASTM C -952) Cement Density, when applied 28 days, 150 psi 28 days, 1.50 psi Sulfate resistant 105 +/- 5 pef 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C- 109) -- 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM. C -952) _ 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 49.6 GROUTING MIX Strong -Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi. 49.7 LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering alt interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 6. Density, when applied 3,000 psi 300 psi 600 psi 0% at 90% R.H. 130 psi 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2 %) by weight. Section 1V.doc Page 105 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV -- Technical Specifications Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Alu.minate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job, site. Bag weight shall be 50 -51. pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65 % -75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two coat application of Liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. 'fh.e second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 49.8 WATER Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and Section IV.doc Page 106 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV - - Technical Spec'lications concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and /or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall. be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with. the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cezmentitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required.. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix. and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all. preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another hatch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to, the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. Section 1V.doc Page 107 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — 'technical Specifications 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.1 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam - injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and /or b. Hydrophilic gel- injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 Section IV.doc 1 -3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi Page 108 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specification: Flexural. Strength ASTM C 78 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING 1 day 410psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574 -86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574 -86 Bonding Strength 250-300 psi A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole -to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density 8.75 -9.17 lbs /gal ASTM D -3574 Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412 Elongation 250% ASTM D -3574 Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D -1042 Toxicity Non Toxic 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components -two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six na.onths. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C 190 380 psi (2.62 MPa) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) Permeability 8.1x10 llcm/sec to (3 day cure) 7.6x10 cm /sec CRD 48 55 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING at 100% RH at 50% RH A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Firs 24 H rs 7 Days 28 Days Section IV.doc Page 109 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength- I'si 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% I- lumidi[Y -- <0.04 =0.06 •=0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze -Thaw An. 300 Cycle No Damage Astrn C 990 Pull.- Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity /Adsorption Test 4 - 5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 H:rs moist curing at 68 F. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1 116 and ASTM. C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture sh.all be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPDXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can he applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray Pot Life, hrs 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 Tensile Elongation, % 10 —20 Water Extractable Substances, mg. /sq. in., max 5 Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3 %), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10 %), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3 %), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3 %), and many others. 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and /or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and /or sand blast structure. Section IV.doc Page 110 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply ccmentitious /crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and /or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1 -5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty -four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and /or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing /crystallization. 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING /CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a still-brush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. Section IV_doc Page 111 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. `texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24 -hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPDXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS This article deleted. See SECTION 1II, ARTICLE 23 — PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS. 51 IN -LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexif7or Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In -Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the Section IV.doc Page 1 12 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specillcal.ions site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex System. 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. 4. Plexiflor In -line Skating Surfacing System • 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfaces • 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave • 2 Coats of Plexiflor • Plexicolor Line Paint 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation). 51.2.2 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80 -100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement. 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer Water (Clean and Potable) Sand (60 -80 mesh) Liquid Yield 55 gallons 20 -40 gallons 600 -900 pounds 112 -138 gallons 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Non- coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with California Ti -Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix Section IV.doc Page 113 of 132 04/26/11 Section 1V— Technical Spec] cations must be applied within 3 hours of the T.iCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurtacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE After the filler- coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons Plexichrorne 20 gallons Water 20 gallons 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and provide uniform application. 2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04 -.05 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In -Line Hockey Association. 51.7 GENERAL 1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. 2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. 51.8 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50 °F or more than 1 40 °F. 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. Section N_doc Page 114 of 132 04/26/11 1 Section IV — Technical Specilications 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In -line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70 °F with 60% relative humidity. 11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In -Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear: 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION. 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 53.1 MATERIAL 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non - raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ -W -461 H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A -641. The weight of zinc coating shall be determined by ASTM A -90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B -6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four 1- minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A -239. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 '/2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 1/2), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger -Tite Section IV.doc Page 1.15 0.17132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification A.STM A -313, "Type 302, Class 1, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTM A -641. 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties- The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. 1. Specific Gravity: a. According to ASTM D -2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1..34. 2. Tensile Strength: a. According to A.STM D -142; not Less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of .Elasticity: a. According to ASTM. D -412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B). 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D -746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: . a. According to ASTM D -2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. 7. Creeping Corrosion: a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HC1 (hydrochloric acid 12 Be). 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests: 1. Salt Spray Test: a. According to ASTM B -117 b. Period of test = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D -1499 and ASTM G -23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test = 3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade. Section IV.doc Page 116 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D -2287. 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following properties: 1. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in color. 2. Specific Gravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 8. Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade. b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade. 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: • Absorption, maximum 5% • Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45% • Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1- T104), maximum loss 12% Section IV -doc Page 117 0' 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications • Flat and elougated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. • All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical. diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall. not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows: 1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs. /sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs. /sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge. 3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel. mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D -2, and FDOT Standard Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one -half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. Section 1V.doc Page 118 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall he inserted during the tilling operation in the following manner: Ga.bions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextiie fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 54.1 SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54i SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. Section IV.doc Page 119 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV -- 'technical Specifications 54.3 WORK METHODS 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must. be approved, either verbally or in. writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurrican.es, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material., vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, according to the following specifications: 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. Section 1V.doc Page 120 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — "Technical Specilications 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and sate work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and. plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20 -6 -12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid- February, early June, and mid - September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and. amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at his /her expense. 54.13 MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to the monthly maintenance fee. 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. Section IV.doc Page 121 of 132 04/26/1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material. to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty -four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on -site work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well. as an hourly rate per employee required. 'The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze /frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6 :30 a.m. — 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and. 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads /fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. Section IV.doc ['age 122 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or his /her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. Th.e City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling. 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre - wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and /or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications for S -Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for Section IV.doc Page 123 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications supci-pave resurfacing projects. Th.e cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall. be included in the bid item for milling. 1 . Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete_ 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562 -4950 to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line /edge of pavement to curb line /edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. Section 1V.doc Page 124 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV 'technical Specifications 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and /or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required nulling of radius returns and intersections, prime and /or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 57 RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand- cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (lastest edition). 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand - cernent, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. Section IV.doc Page 125 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Spccificationy 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand - cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfi.11, dressing and shaping for placement of sand- cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on -site is used as rubble riprap. 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: • An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns to the skin and eyes. At the pre - construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub - contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of these documents. 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include: • Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas. • The date of the training, and • The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, Section 1V.doc Page 126 of 132 04/26/11 1 1 1 Section IV — 'I'echiictl Specifications pedestrian. detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall he signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and scaled by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arras colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both the City and Ff)OT. in addition to this, all pedestrian signal in.dicators shall utilize countdown. features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is P.ROHI..BITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall he specified in the contract documents and /or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 60 SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators /flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and /or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in . the contract documents and /or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. Section IV.doc Page 127 0.1'132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications 62 TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation Of construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and /or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two - thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. :Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two -inch lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four -inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the harriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 62.2 ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and /or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an. International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by Section IV.doc Page 128 01'132 04/26/11 Section IV -- Technical Specifications construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Public Works projects for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562 -4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under- the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual. root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and /or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18 ". H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and /or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A -300. Section IV.doc Page 129 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush. cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Cod.es and Ordinances. C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion- tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will. require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http: / /www.w3.org /TRI.I 999 / WAI- WEBCONTENT- 19990505/ http: / /www.section508.gov/ In particular, use of variable -width tables, user- adjustable /relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public Communications. This is for internal use only. Section 1 \.doc Page 130 of 132 04/26/11 1 i i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 63.6 POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up -to -date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines the Contractor shall utilize one of the following options: Option 1 - 1:- laving the power lines de- energized and visibly grounded. Option 2 - Maintaining a minimum distance of 20 feet of clearance for voltages up to 350 kV an 50 feet of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV. Option 3 - Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the table included in Section 64.2. 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES VOLTAGE (nominal, kV, alternating current) MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE (feet) Up to 50 10 Over 50 to 200 15 Over 20 to 350 20 Over 350 to 500 25 Over 500 to 750 35 Section IV.doc Page 131 of 132 04/26/11 Section IV — Technical Specifications Over 750 to 1,000 45 Over 1000 (as established by the utility owner /operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electric power transmission and distr.ibut.ion) Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up to and including 200kV. Section IV.doc Page 132 of ] 32 04/26/11 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IVA CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PROJECT SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BID DOCUMENTS PREPARED FOR: ° arwater U CITY OF CLEARWATER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT 100 SOUTH MYRTLE AVENUE CLEARWATER, FL 33756 PREPARED BY: Kin ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC. g KING ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC. 4921 MEMORIAL HIGHWAY ONE MEMORIAL CENTER, SUITE 300 TAMPA, FL 33634 April 2011 Index for Professional Registrations Sign and Seal Sheet for CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION Northeast WRF Clarifiers 1 -4 Rehabilitation (PROJECT No. 10- 0023 -UT) SPECIFICATIONS Thomas A. Traina, P.E. DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 02 — SITEWORK. DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE DIVISION 05 — METALS DIVISION 06 — WOOD AND PLASTICS DIVISION 09 — FINISHES DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL Page i of ii 04/26/11 Sign and Seal Sheet Index for Professional Registrations Sign and Seal Sheet for CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION Northeast WRF Clarifiers 1 -4 Rehabilitation (PROJECT No. 10- 0023 -UT) SPECIFICATIONS Luis Rodriguez, P.E. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Page ii of ii 04/26/11 Sign and Seal Sheet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01014 SUMMARY OF WORK 01015 CONTROL OF WORK 01030 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01040 COORDINATION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 01065 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01150 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01152 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01153 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01200 MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 01300 SUBMITTALS 01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01385 COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01410 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01505 MOBILIZATION 01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES i - 04/26/11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01625 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01640 QUALITY CONTROL 01670 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01820 TRAINING DIVISION 02 SITEWORK 02062 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 02064 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT 02221 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02485 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03600 GROUT 03740 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE DIVISION 05 METALS 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METAL DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06600 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS ii - 04/26/11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 1 DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09865 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 1 09900 PAINTING DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 1 11225 CLARIFIERS 1 11280 WATER CONTROL GATES (Not in Contract) 11310 RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMP 1 11317 WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMP 1 DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 1 13567 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING (Not in Contract) I13615 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13630 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 1 DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL ' 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 1 15064 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15094 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1 15100 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 1 1 - iii - 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16110 RACEWAYS 16120 WIRE AND CABLES 16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, RACEWAYS 16142 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16143 WIRING DEVICES 16170 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16452 GROUNDING 16460 TRANSFORMERS 16470 PANELBOARDS 16481 MOTORS 16483 MOTOR STARTERS 16620 SURGE SUPPRESSORS 16775 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - iv - 04/26/11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01005 2 3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Description 10 11 The work to be completed consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials and 12 equipment, and the performance of all Work included in this Contract. 13 14 B. Work Included 15 16 The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials, plant, 17 power, light, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies and other 18 means of construction necessary or proper for performing and completing the 19 Work. He shall perform and complete the Work in the manner best calculated 20 to promote rapid construction consistent with safety of life and property and to 21 the satisfaction of the Engineer, and in strict accordance with the Contract 22 Documents. The Contractor shall clean up the Work and maintain it during 23 and after construction, until accepted, and shall do all work and pay all costs 24 incidental thereto. He shall repair or restore all structures and property that 25 may be damaged or disturbed during performance of the Work. 26 27 The cost of incidental work described in these General Requirements, for 28 which there are no specific Contract Items, shall be considered as part of the 29 general cost of doing the work and shall be included in the prices for the 30 various Contract Items. No additional payment will be made therefore. 31 32 The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and 33 equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform in 34 a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the work required by this Contract. 35 Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used. 36 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his 37 workmanship, materials and equipment, prior approval of the Engineer 38 notwithstanding. 39 40 C. Public Utility Installation and Structures 41 42 Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all 43 poles, tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, house service connections, vaults, 44 manholes and all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether 45 owned or controlled by the Owner, other governmental bodies or privately 46 owned by individuals, firms or corporations, used to serve the public with 47 transportation, traffic control, gas, electricity, telephone, sewerage, drainage, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -1 04/26/11 1 water or other public or private property which may be affected by the work 2 shall be deemed included hereunder. 3 4 The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures from 5 damage during the work. Access across any buried public utility installation, 6 or structure, shall be made only in such locations and by means approved by 7 the Engineer. The Contractor shall so arrange his operations as to avoid any 8 damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction 9 shall be provided by the Contractor at his expense. All existing public utilities 10 damaged by the Contractor, which are shown on the Plans or have been 11 located in the field by the utility, shall be repaired by the Contractor, at his 12 expense, as directed by the Engineer. No separate payment shall be made 13 for such protection or repairs to public utility installations or structures. 14 15 Public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner or 16 other governmental body, which are shown on the Plans to be removed, 17 relocated, replaced or rebuilt by the Contractor shall be considered as a part of 18 the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid for 19 the various contract items. No separate payment shall be made therefore. 20 21 Where public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the 22 Owner or other governmental body are encountered during the course of the 23 Work, and are not indicated on the Plans or in the Specifications, and when, in 24 the opinion of the Engineer, removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding is 25 necessary to complete the work under this Contract, such work shall be 26 accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, or such work may be ordered, in 27 writing by the Engineer, for the Contractor to accomplish. If such work is 28 accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction it will be carried out expeditiously 29 and the Contractor shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete 30 the removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding as required. If such work is 31 accomplished by the Contractor, it will be in accordance with the General and 32 Supplemental General Conditions. 33 34 All Owners, other governmental utility departments, and other owners of public 35 utilities that may be affected by the Work will be informed in writing by the 36 Engineer within two weeks after the execution of the Contract or Contract 37 covering the work. Such notice will set out, in general, and direct attention to, 38 the responsibilities of the Owner and other governmental utility departments 39 and other owners of public utilities for such installations and structures as may 40 be affected by the work and will be accompanied by one set of Plans and 41 Specifications covering the work under such Contract or Contracts. 42 43 In addition to the general notice given by the Engineer, the Contractor shall 44 give written notice to Owner and other governmental utility departments and 45 other owners of public utilities of the locations of his proposed construction 46 operations, at least forty -eight hours in advance of breaking ground in any 47 area or on any unit of the work. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation or rebuilding of public utility 3 installations and structures, when accomplished by the Contractor as herein 4 provided, shall be done by methods approved by the Engineer. 5 6 1 02 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 7 8 A. Drawings 9 10 When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall be used 11 in preference to scaled dimensions, and large scale drawings in preference to 12 small scale drawings. 13 14 B. Copies Furnished to Contractor 15 16 The Engineer will incorporate the addenda into a set of "conformed" drawings 17 and specifications, and provide one electronic copy of each to the Contractor. 18 The conformed drawings and specifications shall not supersede the Contract 19 Documents provided to the Contract. It shall be the responsibility of the 20 Contractor to check that the conformed drawings and specifications properly 21 include all revisions to the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall furnish 22 each of the subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers such copies of the 23 Contract Documents as may be required for their work. Additional copies of 24 the Drawings and Specifications, when requested, may be furnished to the 25 Contractor at cost of reproduction. 26 27 C. Supplementary Drawings 28 29 When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more 30 fully the work to be done or to illustrate the work further or to show any 31 changes which may be required, Drawings known as Supplementary 32 Drawings, with Specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the 33 Engineer and copies thereof will be given to the Contractor and the Owner. 34 35 D. Contractor to Check Drawings and Data 36 37 The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the 38 Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, Schedules, Specifications or other data 39 received from the Engineer and shall notify him of any errors, omissions, 40 conflicts and discrepancies found therein. The Contractor shall submit to the 41 Engineer a Request for Information (RFI), consecutively numbered, detailing 42 all errors, omissions, conflicts and discrepancies. Engineer shall promptly 43 provide a response to all RFIs submitted by the Contractor. Contractor will not 44 be allowed to take advantage of any errors or omissions, as full instructions 45 will be furnished by the Engineer, should such errors or omissions be 46 discovered. 47 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -3 04/26/11 1 E. Specifications 2 3 The Technical Specifications consist of three parts: General, Products, and 4 Execution. The General Section contains General Requirements that govern 5 the work. Products and Execution modify and supplement these by detailed 6 requirements for the work and shall always govern whenever there appears to 7 be a conflict. 8 9 F, Intent 10 11 All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not 12 shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice verse, shall be of like 13 effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the 14 Drawings or in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out their intent or in 15 the complete and proper execution of the work, is required and shall be 16 performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or 17 described. 18 19 The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent 20 omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done 21 and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best 22 general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the 23 best quality is to be used, and interpretation of these Specifications shall be 24 made upon that basis. 25 26 The inclusion of the Related Requirements (or work specified elsewhere) in 27 the General part of the specifications is only for the convenience of the 28 Contractor, and shall not be interpreted as a complete list of related 29 Specification Sections. 30 31 1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 32 33 A. Manufacturer 34 35 The names of proposed manufacturers, suppliers and dealers who are to 36 furnish materials, fixtures, equipment, appliances or other fittings shall be 37 submitted to the Engineer for approval. Such approval must be obtained 38 before shop drawings will be checked. No manufacturer will be approved for 39 any materials to be furnished under this Contract unless he shall be of good 40 reputation and have a plant of ample capacity. He shall, upon the request of 41 the Engineer, be required to submit evidence that he has manufactured a 42 similar product to the one specified and that it has been previously used for a 43 like purpose for a sufficient length of time to demonstrate its satisfactory 44 performance. All transactions with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall 45 be through the Contractor, unless the Contractor shall request, in writing to the 46 Engineer, that the manufacturer or subcontractor deal directly with the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Engineer. Any such transactions shall not in any way release the Contractor 2 from his full responsibility under this Contract. 3 4 Any two or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type or 5 classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall be made by 6 the same manufacturer. 7 8 B. Delivery 9 10 The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to insure the most 11 speedy and uninterrupted progress of the work so as to complete the work 12 within the allotted time. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries in 13 order to avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the work of any 14 related Contractor. 15 16 C. Tools and Accessories 17 18 The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, 19 furnish with each type, kind or size of equipment, one complete set of suitably 20 marked high grade special tools and appliances which may be needed to 21 adjust, operate, maintain or repair the equipment. Such tools and appliances 22 shall be furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly labeled and 23 equipped with good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys. 24 25 Spare parts shall be furnished as specified. Where spare parts are specified 26 to be "manufacturer's recommended" or "as recommended by the 27 manufacturer ", the Contractor shall furnish those spare parts that are normally 28 or commonly recommended by the manufacturer as shown on the 29 manufacturer's readily available literature. 30 31 Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate, 32 securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name, 33 year of manufacture, serial number, weight and principal rating data. 34 35 D. Installation of Equipment 36 37 The Contractor shall have on hand sufficient proper equipment and machinery 38 of ample capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all emergencies normally 39 encountered in work of this character. 40 41 Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the 42 foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings, unless 43 directed otherwise by the Engineer during installation. All equipment shall be 44 correctly aligned, leveled and adjusted for satisfactory operation and shall be 45 installed so that proper and necessary connections can be made readily 46 between the various units. 47 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -5 04/26/11 1 The Contractor shall furnish, install and protect all necessary anchor and 2 attachment bolts and all other appurtenances needed for the installation of the 3 devices included in the equipment specified_ Anchor bolts shall be as 4 approved by the Engineer and made of ample size and strength for the 5 purpose intended. Substantial templates and working drawings for installation 6 shall be furnished. 7 8 The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish all materials and labor for, 9 and shall properly bed in non - shrink grout, each piece of equipment on its 10 supporting base that rests on masonry foundations. Grout shall completely fill 11 the space between the equipment base and the foundation. All metal surfaces 12 coming in contact with concrete or grout shall receive a coat of coal tar epoxy 13 equal to Kop -Coat 300M. 14 15 E. Service of Manufacturer's Representative 16 17 The prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a competent and 18 experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent the manufacturer 19 and shall assist the Contractor, when required, to install, adjust, test and place 20 in operation the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents. 21 22 Prior to placing the equipment in permanent operation, the manufacturer and 23 shall furnish to the Engineer and Contractor a written Certificate of Proper 24 Installation stating that the equipment has been installed in strict accordance 25 with the manufacturer's recommendations. 26 27 After the equipment is placed in permanent operation by the Owner, such 28 engineer or superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required by 29 the Engineer to prove that such equipment is proper and in satisfactory 30 operating condition, shall instruct such personnel as may be designated by the 31 Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment. 32 33 1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING 34 35 A. General 36 37 For tests specified to be made by the Contractor, the testing personnel shall 38 make the necessary inspections and tests and the reports thereof shall be in 39 such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Contract 40 Documents. Five copies of the reports shall be submitted and authorities' 41 certification thereof must be furnished to the Engineer as a prerequisite for the 42 acceptance of any material or equipment. 43 44 If, in the making of any test of any material or equipment, it is ascertained by 45 the Engineer that the material or equipment does not comply with the 46 Contract, the Contractor will be notified thereof and he will be directed to 47 refrain from delivering said material or equipment, or to remove it promptly GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 from the site or from the work and replace it with acceptable material, without 2 cost to the Owner. 3 4 Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be 5 conducted in accordance with recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or 6 the IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein. 7 8 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment 9 during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim 10 for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner 11 formally takes over the operation thereof. 12 13 B. Costs 14 15 All inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract will be 16 performed by the Owner or duly authorized inspections engineers or 17 inspection bureaus without cost to the Contractor, unless otherwise expressly 18 specified. 19 20 The cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests 21 specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the 22 Contractor and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract 23 price. 24 25 Materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as equivalent to those 26 specified may be tested by the Owner for compliance with the specifications. 27 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the expenditures incurred in 28 making such tests on materials and equipment that are rejected for non - 29 compliance. 30 31 C. Inspection of Materials 32 33 The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Engineer, sufficiently in 34 advance of his intention to commence the manufacture or preparation of 35 materials especially manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the 36 permanent construction. Such notice shall contain a request for inspection, 37 the date of commencement and the expected date of completion of the 38 manufacture or preparation of materials. Upon receipt of such notice, the 39 Engineer will arrange to have a representative present at such times during 40 the manufacture as may be necessary to inspect the materials or he will notify 41 the Contractor that the inspection will be made at a point other than the point 42 of manufacture, or he will notify the Contractor that inspection will be waived. 43 The Contractor must comply with these provisions before shipping any 44 material. Such inspection shall not release the Contractor from the 45 responsibility for furnishing materials meeting the requirements of the Contract 46 Documents. 47 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -7 04/26/11 1 D. Certificate of Manufacture 2 3 When inspection is waived or when the Engineer so requires, the Contractor 4 shall furnish to him authoritative evidence in the form of Certificates of 5 Manufacture that the materials to be used in the work have been 6 manufactured and tested in conformity with the Contract Documents. These 7 certificates shall be notarized and shall include copies of the results of physical 8 tests and chemical analyses, where necessary, that have been made directly 9 on the product or on similar products of the manufacturer. 10 11 E. Shop Tests of Operating Equipment 12 13 Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency, 14 performance, function or special requirements are specified shall be tested in 15 the shop of the maker in a manner which shall conclusively prove that its 16 characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 17 No such equipment shall be shipped to the work until the Engineer notifies the 18 Contractor, in writing, that the results of such tests are acceptable. 19 20 Five copies of the manufacturer's actual test data and interpreted results 21 thereof, accompanied by a certificate of authenticity sworn to by a responsible 22 official of the manufacturing company, shall be forwarded to the Engineer for 23 approval. 24 25 The cost of shop tests and of furnishing manufacturer's preliminary and shop 26 test data of operating equipment shall be borne by the Contractor. 27 28 F. Preliminary Field Tests 29 30 As soon as conditions permit, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, 31 and instruments and shall make preliminary field tests of equipment. If the 32 preliminary field tests disclose any equipment furnished under this Contract 33 that does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the 34 Contractor shall, prior to the acceptance tests, make all changes, adjustments 35 and replacement required. The furnishing Contractor shall assist in the 36 preliminary field tests as applicable. 37 38 G. Final Field Tests 39 40 Upon completion of the work and prior to final payment, all equipment and 41 piping installed under this Contract shall be subjected to acceptance tests as 42 specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents. 43 44 The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water and all other materials, 45 equipment and instruments necessary for all acceptance tests, at no additional 46 cost to the Owner. The Supplier shall assist in the final field tests as 47 applicable. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -8 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 H. Failure of Tests 2 3 Any defects in the materials and equipment or their failure to meet the tests, 4 guarantee or requirements of the Contract Documents shall be promptly 5 corrected by the Contractor by replacements or otherwise as directed by the 6 Engineer. The decision of the Engineer as to whether or not the Contractor 7 has fulfilled his obligations under the Contract shall be final and conclusive. If 8 the Contractor fails to make these corrections or if the improved materials and 9 equipment, when tested, shall again fail to meet the guarantees or specified 10 requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding its partial payment for work, and 11 materials and equipment, may reject the materials and equipment and may 12 order the Contractor to remove them from the site at his own expense. 13 14 I. Final Inspection 15 16 During such final inspections, the work shall be clean and free from water. In 17 no case will the final estimate be prepared until the Contractor has complied 18 with all requirements set forth and the Engineer has made his final inspection 19 of the entire work and is satisfied that the entire work is properly and 20 satisfactorily constructed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract 21 Documents. 22 23 1.05 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES 24 25 A. Temporary Fences 26 27 If, during the course of the work, it is necessary to remove or disturb any fence 28 or part thereof, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, if so ordered by the 29 Engineer, provide a suitable temporary fence, which shall be maintained until 30 the permanent fence is replaced. The Engineer shall be solely responsible for 31 the determination of the necessity for providing a temporary fence and the 32 type of temporary fence to be used. 33 34 B. Temporary Driveways 35 36 At its own expense, the Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain and remove 37 all temporary driveways and access roads required to provide access to the 38 work and through the site of the work to maintain existing operations and to 39 allow construction of other projects in . the area. The Contractor shall fully 40 cooperate with the Owner in providing this access. 41 42 C. Temporary Structures and Facilities 43 44 The Contractor shall construct any temporary piping and facilities as required 45 in order to maintain existing treatment capacity and operations during 46 construction. 47 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -9 04/26/11 1 1.06 TEMPORARY SERVICES 2 3 A. First Aid 4 5 The Contractor shall keep upon the site, at each location where work is in 6 progress, a completely equipped first aid kit and shall provide ready access 7 thereto at all times when people are employed on the work. 8 9 1.07 LINES AND GRADE 10 11 A. Grade 12 13 All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines 14 and grades shown on the Drawings, or as given by the Engineer. The full 15 responsibility for keeping alignment and grade rests upon the Contractor. 16 17 The Contractor, prior to commencing of construction, shall have established 18 bench marks and base line controlling points. The Contractor shall so place 19 excavation and other materials as to cause no inconvenience in the use of the 20 reference marks provided. He shall remove any obstructions placed by him 21 contrary to this provision. 22 23 B. Surveys 24 25 The Contractor shall furnish and maintain, at his own expense, stakes and 26 other such materials to establish all working or construction lines and grades, 27 as required, and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy thereof. 28 29 All surveying shall be performed in accordance with Specification 01050. 30 31 C. Safeguarding Marks 32 33 The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments 34 and bench marks made or established on the work, bear the cost of re- 35 establishing them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work 36 improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without 37 authorization such established points, stakes and marks. 38 39 The Contractor shall safeguard all existing and known property corners, 40 monuments and marks adjacent to but not related to the work and, if required, 41 shall bear the cost of re- establishing them if disturbed or destroyed. 42 43 1.08 ADJACENT STRUCTURES AND LANDSCAPING 44 45 A. The Contractor shall also be entirely responsible and liable for all damage or 46 injury as a result of his operations to all other adjacent public and private 47 property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto met with during the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -10 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 progress of the work. The cost of protection, replacement in their original 2 locations and conditions or payment of damages for injuries to such adjacent 3 public and private property and structures affected by the work, whether or not 4 shown on the Drawings or specified shall be included in the various Contract 5 Items and no separate payments will be made therefore. Where such public 6 and private property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto are not 7 shown on the Drawings and when, in the opinion to avoid interference with the 8 work, payment therefore will be made as provided for in the General 9 Conditions. 10 11 Contractor is expressly advised that the protection of buildings structures, 12 tunnels, tanks, pipelines, etc. and related work adjacent to and in the vicinity of 13 his operations, wherever they may be, is solely his responsibility. Conditional 14 inspection of buildings or structures in the immediate vicinity of the project 15 which may reasonably be expected to be affected by the Work shall be 16 performed by and be the responsibility of the Contractor. 17 18 Contractor shall, before starting operations, make an examination of the 19 interior and exterior of the adjacent structures, buildings, facilities, etc., and 20 record by noted, measurements, photographs, etc., conditions which might be 21 aggravated by open excavation and construction. Repairs or replacement of 22 all conditions disturbed by the construction shall be made to the satisfaction of 23 the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This does not preclude 24 conforming to the requirements of the insurance underwriters. Copies of 25 surveys, photographs, reports, etc., shall be given to the Engineer. 26 27 Prior to the beginning of any excavations the Contractor shall advise the 28 Engineer of all building or structures on which he intends to perform work or 29 which performance of the project work will affect. 30 31 B. Protection of Trees 32 33 1. The Contractor shall adequately protect all trees and shrubs with boxes 34 or otherwise in accordance with ordinances governing the protection of 35 trees. No excavated materials shall be placed so as to injure such 36 trees or shrubs. Trees or shrubs destroyed through negligence of the 37 Contractor or his employees shall be replaced with new stock of similar 38 size and age, in the proper season and at the sole expense of the 39 Contractor. 40 41 2. Beneath trees or other surface structures, where possible, pipelines 42 may be built in short tunnels, backfilled with excavated materials, 43 except as otherwise specified, or the trees or structures carefully 44 supported and protected from damage. 45 46 3. The Owner may order the Contractor, for the convenience of the 47 Owner, to remove trees along the line or trench excavation. If so GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -11 04/26/11 1 ordered, the Owner will obtain any permits required for removal of 2 trees. 3 4 C. Lawn Areas 5 6 Lawn areas shall be left in as good condition as before the starting of the work. 7 Where sod is to be removed, it shall be carefully removed, and later replaced, 8 or the area where sod has been removed shall be restored with new sod. 9 10 D. Restoration of Fences 11 12 Any fence, or part thereof, that is damaged or removed during the course of 13 the work shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor and shall be left in as 14 good or better a condition as existed before starting the work. The manner in 15 which the fence is repaired or replaced and the materials used in such work 16 shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. No additional payment will be 17 made for the replacement or repair of any fence. 18 19 1.09 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PUBLIC 20 21 A. Barriers and Lights 22 23 During the prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall put up and maintain at 24 all times such barriers and lights as will effectively prevent accidents. The 25 Contractor shall provide suitable barricades, red lights, "danger" or "caution" or 26 "street closed" signs and watchmen at all places where the work causes 27 obstructions to the normal traffic or constitutes in any way a hazard to the 28 public. 29 30 B. Smoke Prevention 31 32 The Contractor shall use hard coal, coke, oil or gas as fuel for equipment 33 generating steam. A strict compliance with ordinances regulating the 34 production of emission of smoke will be required. No open fires will be 35 permitted. 36 37 C. Noise 38 39 The Contractor shall eliminate noise to as great an extent as practicable at all 40 times. Air compressing plants shall be equipped with silencers and the 41 exhaust of all gasoline motors or other power equipment shall be provided with 42 mufflers. In the vicinity of hospitals and schools, special care shall be used to 43 avoid noise or other nuisances. The Contractor shall strictly observe all local 44 regulations and ordinances covering noise control. 45 46 Except in the event of an emergency, no work shall be done between the 47 hours of 7:00 P.M. and 7:00 A.M., or on Sundays. If the proper and efficient GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -12 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 prosecution of the work requires operations during the night, the written 2 permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before starting such items of the 3 work. 4 5 D. Access to Public Services 6 7 Neither the materials excavated nor the materials or plant used in the 8 construction of the work shall be so placed as to prevent free access to all fire 9 hydrants, valves or manholes. 10 11 E. Dust Prevention 12 13 The Contractor shall prevent dust nuisance from his operations or from traffic 14 by keeping the roads and /or construction areas sprinkled with water at all 15 times or when directed by the Owner and /or Engineer. 16 17 1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING 18 19 A. The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his portion of the work 20 that may be required to make the several parts thereof join and coordinate in a 21 manner satisfactory to the Engineer and in accordance with the Drawings and 22 Specifications. The work shall be performed by competent workmen skilled in 23 the trade required by the restoration. 24 25 1.11 CLEANING 26 27 A. During construction of the work, the Contractor shall, at all times, keep the site 28 of the work and adjacent premises as free from material, debris and rubbish as 29 is practicable and shall remove the same from any portion of the site if, in the 30 opinion of the Engineer, such material, debris, or rubbish constitutes a 31 nuisance or is objectionable. 32 33 The Contractor shall remove from the site all of his surplus materials and 34 temporary structures when no further need therefore develops. 35 36 B. Final Clearing 37 38 At the conclusion of the work, all erection plant, tools, temporary structures 39 and materials belonging to the Contractor shall be promptly taken away, and 40 he shall remove and promptly dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other 41 foreign substances. 42 43 The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials installed by 44 him and shall deliver such materials and equipment undamaged in a bright, 45 clean, polished and new operating condition. 46 47 1.12 MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -13 04/26/11 1 2 A. Protection Against Siltation and Bank Erosion 3 4 1. The Contractor shall arrange his operations to minimize siltation and 5 bank erosion on construction sites and on existing or proposed water 6 courses, drainage ditches, wetlands and other areas of concern. 7 8 2. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall remove any siltation deposits 9 and correct any erosion problems as directed by the Engineer that 10 results from his construction operations. 11 12 3. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any fines resulting. from 13 the encroachment of any environmentally protected areas. 14 15 B. Protection of Wetland Areas 16 17 The Contractor shall properly dispose of all surplus material, including soil, in 18 accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations and the permits issued 19 for this project. Under no circumstances shall surplus material be disposed of 20 in wetland areas as defined by the Florida Department of Environmental 21 Protection, Southwest Florida Water Management District, U.S. Army Corps of 22 Engineers, etc. 23 24 C. Existing Facilities 25 26 The work shall be so conducted to maintain existing facilities in operation 27 insofar as is possible. Requirements and schedules of operations for 28 maintaining existing facilities in service during construction shall be as 29 described in the Special Provisions, herein. 30 31 D. Use of Chemicals 32 33 All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project 34 operation, whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of 35 other classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all 36 such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with 37 manufacturers' instructions. 38 39 E. Tree Removal 40 41 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and any regulatory authorities forty - 42 eight (48) hours in advance of any removal of trees on the project. No clearing 43 shall occur and no earth moving equipment shall be placed on -site until after 44 the notice has been issued. The Contractor shall provide maintenance of the 45 tree barricades and other preventive measures to protect the trees that are to 46 remain. Failure to notify the Engineer before removing trees shall result in the 47 in -kind replacement of the tree at no additional cost to the Owner. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -14 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 F Sanitary and Storm Sewer Systems 3 4 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the satisfactory installation of 5 storm sewer and sanitary sewer systems to be in substantial conformance to 6 the approved Drawings. It is strongly recommended that no roadway base or 7 paving be constructed until the Contractor has performed tamping of these 8 lines to his and the Engineer's satisfaction, and all storm sewer and sanitary 9 sewer invert grades are verified in the field by the Owner. The Tamping of lines 10 and verification of elevations in no way absolves the Contractor from any of his 11 contractual obligations. 12 13 G. Related Permits 14 15 The Contractor recognizes that the Owner has applied for, and may have 16 received, certain permits pertaining to the work. At the sole discretion of the 17 Owner, the Owner may assign said permits to the Contractor and the 18 Contractor shall accept said assignments upon such request from the Owner. 19 20 H. All work in the vicinity of open waters, wetlands or any jurisdictional area is to 21 be performed in strict accordance with the environmental permits and their 22 conditions. Erosion barriers, when shown on the construction Drawings, are 23 the minimum required. If the Contractor's construction methods require that 24 additional erosion control is necessary to satisfy these permits, such controls 25 shall be supplied, installed and maintained throughout the construction 26 process by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or Engineer. 27 28 It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to submit, in a timely manner, any 29 information, data, etc. which is required as a condition of a permit. Required 30 information, data, etc. shall be submitted directly to the permitting agency by 31 the Contractor with copies to the permittee and the Engineer. The Contractor 32 will be held responsible for any fine(s) or other action resulting from a violation 33 of permit conditions. 34 35 1.13 DISPOSAL 36 37 A. The Contractor will directly pay all tipping fees associated with disposal of the 38 construction demolition debris at all sites. The Contractor shall provide and 39 include in its bid all costs associated with hauling, disposal, and tipping fees. 40 41 1.14 RESTORATION OF PROPERTY 42 43 A. Responsibility. All damage resulting from construction work on existing 44 structures, wetland areas, roadway pavement, driveways, other paved areas, 45 fences, utilities, traffic control devices and any other obstruction not 46 specifically named herein, shall be repaired, restored or replaced by the 47 Contractor unless otherwise specified. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -15 04/26/11 1 2 B. Temporary Repairs. All damage named in Paragraph A above shall be at 3 least temporarily repaired, restored or replaced immediately following 4 construction efforts at that location. Temporary restoration shall mean putting 5 the affected area back into a safe, usable condition. In no case shall trenches 6 remain open over night within a street right -of -way unless the governing Traffic 7 Control Division grants specific approval. 8 9 C. Permanent Repairs. All damage shall be permanently repaired, restored, or 10 replaced not later than the 30th calendar day following the completion of 11 construction at that location unless otherwise stipulated. Permanent repairs 12 will be accomplished in a professional workmanship -like manner in 13 accordance with Specifications contained herein, or contract documents, if 14 addressed. The Contractor may be relieved of the 30 -day time limit above 15 only by specific written agreement with the Engineer. 16 17 D. Owner Retribution. In the event that the Contractor fails to make the 18 permanent repairs within the time specified, the Owner, at its option, will, with 19 its own resources or by contract with others, cause the repair, restoration, or 20 replacement of the affected area to be accomplished. The costs of such work 21 will be deducted either from the next pay request or from any other monies 22 owed the Contractor. 23 24 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 25 26 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 27 28 29 END OF SECTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -16 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01014 2 3 SUMMARY OF WORK 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 LOCATION OF WORK 8 9 A. All Work of this Contract is located in rights -of -way, easements, or on 10 property owned by the City of Clearwater, Florida. 11 12 1.02 WORK TO BE DONE 13 14 A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services 15 and incidentals to complete all work required by these Specifications and as 16 shown on the Drawings. 17 18 B. The Contractor shall perform the work complete, in place and ready for 19 continuous service, and shall include repairs, testing, permits, clean up, 20 replacements, and restoration required as a result of damages caused 21 during this construction. 22 23 C. All materials, equipment, skills, tools, and labor which is reasonably and 24 properly inferable and necessary for the proper completion of the work in a 25 substantial manner and in compliance with the requirements stated or 26 implied by these Specifications or Drawings shall be furnished and installed 27 by the Contractor without additional compensation, whether specifically 28 indicated in the Contract Documents or not. 29 30 D. The Contractor shall comply with all Municipal, County, State, Federal, and 31 other codes applicable to the proposed construction work. 32 33 1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK TO BE PERFORMED 34 35 A. The work of this Contract comprises the general rehabilitation of the 36 following facilities, as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified 37 herein. 38 39 1. Mobilization, demobilization, insurances, permits and bonds. 40 41 2. Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 thru 4 and North RAS Pump House 42 Equipment at the Northeast WRF, which, in general, includes but is 43 not limited to: 44 45 a. Rehabilitating four (4) existing secondary clarifiers; 46 replacement of two (2) return activated sludge (RAS) pumps 47 and two (2) waste activated sludge (WAS) pumps, including 48 new pump bases and pipe supports; replacement of two (2) SUMMARY OF WORK 01014 -1 04/26/11 1 1 RAS pump suction valves, two (2) RAS pump discharge 2 valves, and two (2) RAS pump check valves; replacement of 3 two (2) telescopic valve seals, replacement of one (1) WAS 4 plug valve, installing a new WAS flow meter, replacement of 5 RAS and WAS variable speed drives, replacement of the 6 Pump House MCC, and various other instrumentation and 7 SCADA upgrades_ 8 9 3. Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 5 thru 8 and South RAS Pump House 10 Equipment at the Northeast WRF, which, in general includes but is 11 not limited to: 12 13 a. Rehabilitating four (4) existing secondary clarifiers; 14 replacement of two (2) return activated sludge (RAS) pumps, 15 including new pump bases and pipe supports; replacement of 16 two (2) RAS pump suction valves, two (2) RAS pump 17 discharge valves, and two (2) RAS pump check valves; 18 replacement of two (2) telescopic sludge valve seals, 19 replacement of RAS and WAS variable speed drives, 20 replacement of the Pump House MCC, and various other 21 instrumentation and SCADA upgrades. 22 23 4. Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 thru 4 at the Marshall Street WRF, which, 24 in general, includes rehabilitating four (4) existing secondary clarifiers; 25 replacing four (4) RAS telescopic valves and operators, replacing four 26 (4) splitter box gates and supplying and operating the bypass 27 pumping system made necessary by the work in the splitter box. 28 29 4. Rehabilitation of the East and West Clarifiers at the East WRF, which 30 in general, includes but is not limited to rehabilitating two (2) 31 secondary clarifiers; replacement of a 24 -inch effluent valve, 32 replacement of a clarifier drain valve, replacement of a check valve 33 and two (2) discharge valves on the scum pump, and replacement of 34 telescopic valve seals. 35 36 1.04 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES 37 38 A. General 39 40 1. Upon successful construction completion of each new component, 41 and pre - operational testing, Contractor shall conduct testing as 42 required by the Contract Documents. 43 44 2. Contractor shall ensure that, prior to start-up of any component, all 45 handrails, walkways, lighting and associated safety - related facilities 46 are in place. 47 48 3. Contractor shall provide Engineer a minimum of 14- calendar days 49 advance written notice of any requested change in operation to the SUMMARY OF WORK 01014 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 existing facility, bypass requirements or connections to existing 2 facilities, and shall obtain the Engineer's written approval before 3 scheduling this work. 4 5 B. Restrictions 6 7 1. In planning its work, the Contractor shall consider the following 8 requirements. 9 10 a. As noted elsewhere in these Specifications, the Contractor will 11 be limited in the number of clarifies that can be taken out of 12 service. 13 14 b. The Contractor shall not take any existing facilities out of 15 service without obtaining the Engineer's prior written approval. 16 17 c. All new facilities shall be tested in accordance with 18 Specification 01625 to demonstrate to the Engineer and Owner 19 that the new facility and associated equipment properly 20 operates prior to taking any existing facilities or equipment out 21 of service. 22 23 c. All manipulation of valves shall be performed by the Owner's 24 personnel. The Contractor shall not be allowed to manipulate 25 any valves except in emergencies. If there is an emergency, 26 the Owner shall be notified immediately. 27 28 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 29 30 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 31 32 33 34 END OF SECTION SUMMARY OF WORK 01014 -3 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SUMMARY OF WORK 01014 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01015 2 3 CONTROL OF WORK 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 WORK PROGRESS 8 9 A. The Contractor shall provide equipment that will be efficient, safe, appropriate 10 and large enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and a rate of 11 progress which will insure the completion of the work within the Contract 12 Times. If, at any time, such facilities appear to the Engineer to be inefficient, 13 inappropriate, insufficient or unsafe for securing the quality of work required or 14 for producing the rate of progress aforesaid, he may order the Contractor to 15 increase the facilities equipment, and the Contractor shall conform to such 16 order. Failure of the Engineer to give such order shall in no way relieve the 17 Contractor of his obligations to secure the quality of the work and rate of 18 progress required. 19 20 1.02 PRIVATE LAND 21 22 A. The Contractor shall not enter or occupy private land outside of easements, 23 except by permission of the Owner. 24 25 1.03 WORK LOCATIONS 26 27 A. Work shall be located substantially as indicated on the Drawings, but the 28 Engineer reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as may be 29 found desirable to avoid interference with existing structures or for other 30 reasons. Where fittings are noted on the Drawings, such notation is for the 31 Contractor's convenience and does not relieve him from laying and jointing 32 different or additional items where required. 33 34 1.04 OPEN EXCAVATIONS 35 36 A. All open excavations shall be adequately safeguarded by providing temporary 37 barricades, caution signs, lights and other means to prevent accidents to 38 persons, and damage to property. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, 39 provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings for accommodating 40 travel by Owner's personnel, pedestrians and workmen. Bridges provided for 41 access to private property during construction shall be removed when no 42 longer required. The length of open trench will be controlled by the particular 43 surrounding conditions and does not endanger existing facilities. If the 44 excavation becomes a hazard, or if it excessively restricts traffic, construction 45 procedures such as limiting the length of open trench, prohibiting stacking 46 excavated material in the street, and requiring that the trench shall not remain 47 open overnight. CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -1 04/26/11 1 2 B. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to 3 open trenches. All trenches, excavated material, equipment, of other 4 obstacles, which could be dangerous to the public, shall be well lighted at 5 night. 6 7 1.05 TEST PITS 8 9 A. The Contractor shall excavate test pits for locating underground pipeline or 10 structures in advance of construction to verify that the work can be constructed 11 as intended. Test pits shall be excavated and backfilled by the Contractor so 12 as not to create a hazardous area. Test pits shall be backfilled immediately 13 after their purpose has been satisfied and the surface restored and maintained 14 in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 15 16 1.06 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC 17 18 A. Unless permission to close a street is received in writing from the proper 19 authority, all excavated material shall be placed so that vehicular and 20 pedestrian traffic may be maintained at all times. If the Contractor's 21 operations cause traffic hazards, he shall repair the road surface, provide 22 temporary ways, erect wheel guards or fences, or take other measures for 23 safety satisfactory to the Engineer. 24 25 B, Detours around construction will be subject to the approval of the Owner and 26 the Engineer. Where detours are permitted, the Contractor shall provide all 27 necessary barricades and signs as required to divert the flow of traffic. While 28 traffic is detoured the Contractor shall expedite construction operations and 29 those periods when traffic is being detoured will be strictly controlled by the 30 Owner. 31 32 C. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to 33 open trenches. Night watchmen may be required where special hazards exist, 34 or police protection provided for traffic while work is in progress. The 35 Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage or injuries whether or not 36 police protection has been provided. 37 38 1.07 CARE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY 39 40 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and 41 private property, and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage 42 thereto. If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private property 43 by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution 44 of the work on the part of the Contractor, such property shall be restored by 45 the Contractor, at his expense, to a condition similar or equal to that existing 46 before the damage was done, or he shall make good the damage in other 47 manner acceptable to the Engineer. CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 B. All sidewalks that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations shall be 3 restored to their original condition with the use of similar or comparable 4 materials. All curbing shall be restored in a condition equal to the original 5 construction and in accordance with the best modern practice. 6 7 C. Along the location of the work all fences, walks, bushes, trees, shrubbery, and 8 other physical features shall be protected and restored in a thoroughly 9 workmanlike manner. Fences and other features removed by the Contractor 10 shall be replaced in the location indicated by the Engineer as soon as 11 conditions permit. All grass areas beyond the limits of construction that have 12 been damaged by the Contractor shall be restored to original conditions. 13 14 D. Trees close to the work shall be boxed or otherwise protected against injury. 15 The Contractor shall trim all branches that are susceptible to damage because 16 of his operations, but in no case shall any tree be cut or removed without prior 17 notification of the appropriate tree authority. All injuries to bark, trunk, limbs, 18 and roots of trees shall be repaired by dressing, cutting, and painting in 19 accordance with approved methods, using only approved tools and materials. 20 21 E. The protection, removal, and replacement of existing physical features shall be 22 part of the work under the Contract and all costs in connection therewith shall 23 be included in the unit and /or lump sum prices established. 24 25 1.08 PROTECTION AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES 26 27 A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection of all 28 buildings, structures, and utilities, public or private, including poles, signs, 29 services to buildings, utilities in the street, gas pipes, water pipes, hydrants, 30 sewers, drains, and electric and telephone cables, whether or not they are 31 shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall carefully support and protect all 32 such structures and utilities from injury of any kind. Any damage resulting 33 from the Contractor's operations shall be repaired by him at his expense. 34 35 B. The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for obtaining all locations of 36 underground structures and utilities (including existing water services, drain 37 lines, and sewers). Services shall be maintained and all costs or charges 38 resulting from damage thereto shall be paid by the Contractor. 39 40 C. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, permanent relocation of a utility owned by the 41 Owner is required, the Engineer may direct the Contractor in writing, to 42 perform the work. Work so ordered will be paid for at the unit prices bid in the 43 Proposal, if applicable, or as extra work as provided for in the General 44 Conditions. If relocation of a privately owned utility is required, the Owner will 45 notify the Utility to perform the work as expeditiously as possible. The 46 Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Owner and Utility, and shall have no 47 claim for delay due to such relocation. CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -3 04/26/11 1 2 D. Underground and above ground utilities /facilities are identified on the 3 Drawings based on best information available at the time for the preparation of 4 the plans. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to locate all utilities prior to 5 any excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to 6 existing underground utilities and facilities, and shall coordinate the protection 7 of these utilities with the Owner. 8 9 1.09 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND SERVICES 10 11 A. The Contractor shall interrupt water, telephone, Cable TV, sewer, gas, or other 12 related utility services and disrupt the normal functioning of the system as little 13 as possible, and shall notify the Engineer and public well in advance of any 14 requirement for dewatering, isolating, or relocating a section of a utility, so that 15 necessary arrangements may be made with the appropriate agency. 16 17 B. If it appears that utility service will be interrupted for an extended period, the 18 Engineer may order the Contractor to provide temporary service lines. 19 Inconvenience of the users shall be the minimum, consistent with the existing 20 conditions. The safety and integrity of the system is of prime importance in 21 scheduling work. 22 23 1.10 PROTECTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND EQUIPMENT 24 25 A. All newly constructed work shall be carefully protected from injury or damage 26 in every way. No wheeling or walking or placing of heavy loads shall be 27 allowed and any portion injured or damaged shall be reconstructed by the 28 Contractor at his own expense. 29 30 1.11 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES 31 32 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and paying for all water 33 required for construction purposes. The Contractor shall make all connections 34 and other provisions, including backflow prevention and metering provisions, 35 necessary to obtain said water from the local utility's potable and /or reclaimed 36 water system, as required. The Contractor shall pay the appropriate party for 37 all water used for construction purposes. Bid prices shall include the costs 38 incurred for water usage. 39 40 1.12 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW 41 42 A. The Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide for the flow of sewers, drains, 43 and water courses interrupted during the progress of the work, and shall 44 immediately remove all offensive matter. The entire procedure for maintaining 45 existing flows shall be approved by the Engineer in advance of the interruption 46 of any flow. 47 CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1.13 COOPERATION WITHIN THIS CONTRACT 2 3 A. All firms or persons authorized to perform any work under this Contract shall 4 cooperate with the General Contractor and his subcontractors or trades, and 5 shall assist in incorporating the work of other trades where necessary or 6 required. 7 8 B. Cutting and patching, drilling and fitting shall be carried out where required by 9 the trade or subcontractor having jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated 10 herein or directed by the Engineer. 11 12 1.14 COOPERATION OUTSIDE THIS CONTRACT 13 14 A. As part of normal and /or emergency system operations and maintenance, the 15 Owner may employ the services of contractors outside this contract. As such, 16 the Contractor of this Work shall coordinate their schedule with and 17 accommodate said contractor as necessary for the execution of their work. 18 This coordination shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 19 20 B. As part of normal and /or emergency system operations and maintenance, the 21 Owner has normal delivery and maintenance suppliers that will be on -site on a 22 regular basis. Contractor shall allow continuous access to all equipment and 23 facilities, so as not to impede the operation and maintenance of said facility. 24 This coordination shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 25 26 1.15 CLEAN -UP 27 28 A. During the course of the work, the Contractor shall keep the site of his 29 operations in a clean and neat condition. He shall remove, transport and 30 properly dispose of all surplus broken pavement, crushed concrete, lumber, 31 excess steel, equipment, temporary structures, and any other refuse from the 32 construction operation, on a weekly basis or as directed by the Owner and /or 33 Engineer. At the conclusion of the work, he shall remove, transport and 34 properly dispose of any surplus excavation, and refuse remaining from the 35 construction operation, and shall leave the entire site of his work in a neat and 36 orderly condition. 37 38 B. The Contractor shall provide for disposal of excavated material removed from 39 the site. 40 41 1.16 COORDINATION WITH ELECTRICAL UTILITY 42 43 A. If required, the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the power 44 company to have electrical service supplied to the site. 45 46 1.17 WORK SEQUENCE 47 CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -5 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 A. The Owner may incur penalties for failure to maintain service /operations. Therefore, the Contractor will schedule and complete the work in a manner that assures that the facility maintains service throughout the duration of the project. Prior to taking any service or operation off -line, Contractor shall prepare a work sequence and coordinate all shut downs with the Owner and /or Engineer. All temporary measures and materials required to meet this condition during construction will be provided, installed, maintained and removed by the Contractor. All costs associated with this effort will be borne by the Contractor. All fines imposed by failure to meet this operating condition, due to the Contractor's Work Sequence, will be borne by the Contractor. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 w 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01030 2 3 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8 9 A. When a particular product is specified or called for, it is intended and shall be 10 understood by the Contractor that the Contractor's proposal includes those 11 products in its bid. Should the Contractor desire to incorporate products equal 12 to those specified, the Contractor shall furnish information as described in the 13 General Conditions. The alternate product or products submitted by the 14 Contractor shall meet the requirements of the Specifications and shall, in all 15 respects, be equal to the products specified by name herein. 16 17 B. All apparatus, mechanism, equipment, machinery and manufactured articles 18 for incorporation into the Work shall be the new and unused standard products 19 of recognized reputable manufacturers unless specifically noted otherwise. 20 21 C. Contractor shall properly dispose of all excess materials from the site. 22 23 1.02 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS 24 25 A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to locate, excavate and 26 prepare for connections to the existing systems, as shown on the Drawings. 27 All connections to existing systems shall be coordinated with the Owner and /or 28 Engineer prior to commencing the work. All connections to existing systems 29 shall be attended by the Owner and /or Owner's Representative. The costs for 30 this work and for the actual connection to the existing systems shall be 31 included in the various prices bid and shall not result in any additional cost to 32 the Owner. 33 34 1.03 EXISTING UNDERGROUND PIPING, STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES 35 36 A. The attention of the Contractor is directed to the fact that during excavation, 37 the possibility exists that the Contractor may encounter various water, gas, 38 telephone, electrical, and /or other utilities not shown on the Drawings. The 39 Contractor shall exercise extreme care before and during excavation to locate 40 and flag these lines so as to avoid damage thereto. Should damage occur to 41 an existing line, the Contractor shall immediately contact the utility and the 42 Owner. If the repair is to be completed by the Contractor it shall be carried out 43 in a timely and quality manner. Costs associated with such damage shall be 44 borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 45 46 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -1 04/26/11 1 B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all utility or other poles, 2 the stability of which may be endangered by the close proximity of excavation, 3 are temporarily supported in position while work proceeds in the vicinity of the 4 pole and that utility or other companies concerned be given reasonable 5 advance notice of any such excavation by the Contractor. 6 7 C. The locations of existing utilities are shown without express or implied 8 representation, assurance, or guarantee that they are complete or correct or 9 that they represent a true picture of underground piping to be encountered. 10 Encountering existing utilities at different depths or locations than shown on 11 the Drawings shall not be cause for additional costs to the Owner. 12 13 D. The existing piping and utilities that interfere with new construction shall be 14 rerouted as shown, specified or required. The Contractor shall excavate test 15 pits sufficiently ahead of the proposed work to predict potential conflicts. 16 Before any piping and utilities not shown on the Drawings are disturbed, the 17 Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of the location of the pipeline 18 or utility and shall reroute or relocate the pipeline or utility as directed. 19 20 E. The Contractor shall exercise care in any excavation to locate all existing 21 piping and utilities. All utilities that do not interfere with completed work shall 22 be carefully protected against damage. Any existing utilities damaged in any 23 way by the Contractor shall be restored or replaced by the Contractor at his 24 expense, as directed by the Engineer. 25 26 F It is intended that wherever existing utilities such as water, gas, telephone, 27 electrical, or other service lines must be crossed, deflection of the pipe within 28 recommended limits and cover shall be used to satisfactorily clear the 29 obstruction unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. However, when in 30 the opinion of the Owner or Engineer this procedure is not feasible, he may 31 direct the use of fittings for the utility crossing. The Contractor shall verify 32 utility crossings with test pits prior to construction as required by the Engineer. 33 34 1.04 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE TECHNICIAN 35 36 A. Bid prices for equipment furnished shall include the cost of a competent field 37 service technician of the manufacturers of all equipment to supervise the 38 installation, adjustment and testing of the equipment, and to instruct the 39 Owner's operating personnel on operation and maintenance. The approved 40 manufacturer's operation and maintenance data, shall be delivered to the 41 Engineer prior to instructing the Owner's personnel. This supervision may be 42 divided into two or more time periods, as required by the installation program 43 or as directed by the Engineer. 44 45 B. After installation of the equipment has been completed and the equipment is 46 presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the 47 manufacturer's field service technician shall inspect, operate, test and adjust SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 the equipment. The inspection shall include at least the following points where 2 applicable: 3 4 1. Soundness (without damaged parts). 5 6 2. Completeness in all details, as specified and required. 7 8 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various 9 parts. 10 11 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing and lubricants. 12 13 5. Calibration and adjustment of all related instrumentation and controls. 14 15 6. Energize equipment. 16 17 7. Deficiency correction. 18 19 8. Demonstration of compliance with applicable performance specification. 20 21 C. The operation, testing and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the 22 equipment has been left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under 23 the conditions specified. 24 25 D. Upon completion of this work, the manufacturer's field service technician shall 26 submit to the Engineer in triplicate, a complete, signed report of the results of 27 his inspection, operation, adjustments and tests. The report shall include 28 detailed descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, 29 quantitative results obtained if such are specified, and suggestions for 30 precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance. 31 32 E. Each equipment manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner's 33 operating personnel. Training shall not be performed until the requirements of 34 Paragraphs B, C and D above have been fully satisfied and any specified 35 performance testing completed. Training shall be provided for the number of 36 days specified in each equipment section of these specifications. Training 37 shall be provided on an 8 -hour per day basis. Partial days of less than eight 38 (8) full working hours shall not be credited toward the specified duration. 39 Training shall not be concurrent with on -going testing, debugging or 40 installation activities; but shall be on a separate activity devoted exclusively to 41 the instruction of the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of 42 the manufacturer's equipment. Qualified representatives of each equipment 43 manufacturer specifically skilled in providing instruction to operations 44 personnel shall perform training. Training shall provide an overview of 45 operations and maintenance requirements and shall include as a minimum, 46 but not be limited to: 47 1. Description of unit and component parts. SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -3 04/26/11 1 2 2. Operating capabilities and performance criteria. 3 4 3. Operating procedures. 5 6 4. Maintenance procedures. 7 8 5. Servicing and lubrication schedules. 9 10 6. Troubleshooting. 11 12 7. Electrical instrumentation and control requirements and interface. 13 14 The operating and maintenance data to be provided shall be used as a basis 15 for training. 16 17 F. A written "Certificate of Proper Installation" executed by the manufacturer 18 stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment 19 has been satisfactorily tested and ready for operation, and that the operating 20 personnel have been instructed in the operation and maintenance of the 21 equipment shall be submitted before start-up by the Owner. The Certificate 22 shall indicate date and time instruction was given and names of operating 23 personnel in attendance. This certification shall be submitted on a certification 24 form approved by the Engineer. 25 26 G. See the Technical Specifications for additional requirements for furnishing the 27 services of the manufacturer's field service technician. 28 29 H. For other equipment furnished, the Contractor, unless otherwise specified, 30 shall furnish the services of accredited field services technicians of the 31 manufacturer only when some evident malfunction or over - heating makes 32 such services necessary in the opinion of the Engineer. 33 34 1.05 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 35 36 A. Operating and maintenance data for each piece of equipment furnished shall 37 be delivered directly to the Engineer for approval within 60 days of shop 38 drawing approval. No payment shall be made for equipment installed or 39 stored on -site until the Engineer has approved the adequacy and 40 completeness of operating and maintenance data. Final approved copies of 41 operating and maintenance data shall have been delivered to the Engineer 42 prior to scheduling the instruction period with the Owner. 43 44 1.06 EQUIPMENT DATA LIST 45 46 A. Obtain, prepare and submit a complete, detailed listing of equipment and 47 motor data for all electrical items furnished under this Contract. This listing SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 shall be submitted with the preliminary draft of Operations and Maintenance 2 Data Manuals on Equipment Data Sheets. 3 4 1.07 SPARE PARTS 5 6 A. Spare parts for certain equipment to be provided are specified in the pertinent 7 sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare 8 parts in a manner approved by the manufacturer. In addition, the Contractor 9 shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment 10 they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, and the 11 delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be 12 furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. The Contractor 13 shall deliver the spare parts to the Engineer ten (10) days prior to facility start- 14 up. 15 16 B. All spare parts shall be furnished in containers clearly identified in indelible 17 markings as to contents. Each container shall be packed for prolonged 18 storage. 19 20 1.08 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT 21 22 A. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of all equipment, with 23 particular attention to mechanical equipment such as pumps and electric 24 drives. The units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by qualified 25 millwrights after their sole plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the 26 anchor bolts. The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened 27 against the shims. After the foundation alignments have been approved by 28 the manufacturer, the bedplates or wing feet of the equipment shall be 29 securely bolted in place. The alignment of equipment shall be further checked 30 after securing to the foundations, and after confirmation of all alignments, the 31 sole plates shall be finally grouted in place. The Contractor shall be 32 responsible for the exact alignment of equipment with associated piping and, 33 under no circumstances, will "pipe springing" be allowed. 34 35 B. All wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, or other materials necessary 36 to properly align, level and secure apparatus in place shall be furnished by the 37 Contractor. All parts intended to be plumb or level must be proven exactly so. 38 Any grinding necessary to bring parts to proper bearing after erection shall be 39 done at the expense of the Contractor. 40 41 1.09 MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULES 42 43 A. For all mechanical and electrical equipment furnished, the Contractor shall 44 provide a list including the equipment name, address and telephone number of 45 the manufacturer's representative and service company so that service and /or 46 spare parts can be readily obtained. 47 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -5 04/26/11 1 1.10 INSTALLATION LISTS 2 3 A. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1.11 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS 12 13 A. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 B. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 A. 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 B. 42 43 44 45 1.13 VALVE INDICES 46 All manufacturers or equipment suppliers who propose to furnish equipment or products shall submit an installation list to the Engineer along with the required Shop Drawings. B. The installation list shall include all installations (minimum of two) where identical equipment has been installed and has been in operation for a period of at least one (1) year. The Contractor shall provide all openings, channels, chases, etc., and install anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in concrete, as required to complete the work under this Contract, together with those required by subcontractors, and shall do all cutting and patching, excepting cutting and patching of materials of a specified trade and as stated otherwise in the following paragraph. The Contractor shall coordinate with the subcontractors to provide all sleeves, inserts, hangers, anchor bolts, etc., of the proper size and material for the execution of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any corrective cutting and refinishing required to make the necessary openings, chases, etc. In no case shall beams, lintels or other structural members be cut without the written approval of the Engineer. 1.12 PROVISIONS FOR CONTROL OF EROSION Sufficient precautions shall be taken during construction to minimize the run- off of polluting substances such as silt, clay, fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, or other polluting materials harmful to humans, fish, or other life, into the supplies and surface waters of the state. Control measures must be adequate to assure that turbidity in the receiving water will not be increased more than 10 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU), or as otherwise required by the state or other controlling body, in water used for public water supply or fish unless limits have been established for the particular water. In surface water used for other purposes, the turbidity must not exceed 25 NTU unless otherwise permitted. Special precautions shall be taken in the use of construction equipment to prevent operations that promote erosion. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the EPA -NPDES general permit for storm water discharges and the storm water pollution prevention plan developed for the project. SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing tags for all valves required 2 on the work and installing the tags required for his own work. Tags on above 3 ground valves shall be non - corrosive metal or plastic, 2 inches in diameter, 19- 4 gauge thickness. Tags for buried valves shall be secured to a concrete base 5 as shown on the Drawings. Submit to the Engineer for approval, two (2) 6 samples of each type of tag proposed and manufacturer's standard color chart 7 and letter styles. Tags shall have stamped on them the information shown on 8 the Drawings and the data described herein. The Contractor shall submit to 9 the Engineer for approval, not less than 120 days before start-up, a valve 10 schedule containing all valves required for the work. The schedule shall 11 contain for each valve, the location, type, a number, words to identify the 12 valve's function, and the normal operating position. The information contained 13 in the valve schedules shall be coded on the tags in a system provided by the 14 Owner. Above ground valve tags shall be furnished with non - corrosive metal 15 wire for attachment thereof. 16 17 1.14 HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS PLAN 18 19 A. Within 30 days of the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to 20 the Engineer and Owner a Hurricane Preparedness Plan. The Plan should 21 outline the necessary measures that the Contractor proposes to perform at no 22 additional cost to the Owner in case of a hurricane warning. 23 24 B. In the event of inclement weather, or whenever Engineer shall direct; the 25 Contractor shall carefully protect the Work and materials against damage or 26 injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or 27 material has been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the 28 Contractor or subcontractors to set protect the Work, such Work and materials 29 shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 30 31 1.15 WARRANTIES 32 33 A. The Contractor and the equipment manufacturers shall warranty all equipment 34 supplied under these Specifications for a minimum period of one (1) year 35 unless otherwise specified. Warranty period shall commence on the date that 36 the Work is accepted by the Owner as substantially complete. 37 38 B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, 39 design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the 40 warranty period, it shall be replaced and returned to service at no expense to 41 the Owner. 42 43 C. If, within the guarantee period, repairs or changes are required in connection 44 with work that in the opinion of the Engineer is rendered necessary as the 45 result of the use of materials, equipment or workmanship that is inferior, defec- 46 tive, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -7 04/26/11 1 promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner and without expense to the 2 Owner: 3 4 1. Place in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such work and 5 correct all defects herein. 6 7 2. Repair or replace all damage to buildings, the site, or equipment or 8 contents thereof, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is the result of 9 the use of materials, equipment or workmanship that are inferior, 10 defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract 11 12 3. Repair or replace any work or material or equipment disturbed in 13 fulfilling any such guarantee. 14 15 D. If the Contractor, after notice, fails within ten (10) days to proceed to comply 16 with the terms of this guarantee, the Owner may have the defects corrected, 17 and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expenses incurred, 18 provided, however, that in case of an emergency where, in the opinion of the 19 Owner, delay would cause loss or damage, repairs may be started without 20 notice being given to the Contractor and the Contractor shall pay the cost 21 thereof. 22 23 E. All special guarantees or warranties applicable to specific parts of the work, as 24 may be stipulated in the Contract Documents, shall be subject to the terms of 25 this paragraph during the first year following acceptance. All special 26 guarantees and manufacturers' warranties shall be assembled by the 27 Contractor and delivered to the Engineer, along with a summary list thereof, 28 before the acceptance of the Work. 29 30 F. The manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the 31 Contractor's warranty or guarantee period. No exception to this provision shall 32 be allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining equipment 33 warranties from each of the respective suppliers or manufacturers for all the 34 equipment specified. The form of warranty may be included in the Contract 35 Documents, or shall otherwise be acceptable to the Owner. 36 37 G. In the event that the manufacturer is unwilling to provide a one -year warranty 38 commencing at the time of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall obtain 39 from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty starting at the time that the 40 manufacturer certified proper installation as specified elsewhere herein. This 41 three -year warranty shall not relieve the Contractor of the one -year warranty 42 commencing upon Substantial Completion. 43 44 H. The Contractor's one -year warranty or guarantee period shall be part of the 45 project's Performance Bond. 46 47 1.16 WATERTIGHTNESS SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -8 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 A. Special precautions shall be taken in the curing of concrete to reduce concrete 3 cracking as called for in Section 03300. All water - retaining structures (those 4 that are intended to hold a liquid) shall be filled and tested for Teaks by the 5 Contractor, with water acceptable to the Engineer, prior to surface coating or 6 painting. Procedure and manner in which any leaks are repaired must meet 7 the approval of the Engineer. All cost associated with the testing and repair of 8 leaks shall be at the expense of the Contractor. 9 10 1.17 CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS 11 12 A. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the specific requirements of the 13 governmental unit or agencies having jurisdiction over the work. Wherever 14 there is a difference in the requirements of a jurisdictional body and these 15 Specifications, the more stringent shall apply. 16 17 1.18 PUBLIC NUISANCE 18 19 A. The Contractor shall not create a public nuisance including, but not limited to, 20 encroachment on adjacent lands, flooding of adjacent lands, or excessive 21 noise. 22 23 B. Sound levels measured by the Engineer personnel shall not exceed 45 dBA 7 24 PM to 7 AM or 55 dBA 7 AM to 7 PM. This sound level shall be measured at 25 the exterior of the exterior wall of the nearest residence. Levels at the equip - 26 ment shall not exceed 85 dBA measured five (5) feet from the equipment at 27 any time. Sound levels in excess of these values are sufficient cause to have 28 the work suspended. Work stoppage by the Engineer or Owner for excessive 29 noise shall not relieve the Contractor of completing the Work in accordance 30 with the Contract Time, at no additional cost to the Owner. 31 32 C. No extra charge may be made for time lost due to work stoppage resulting 33 from the creation of a public nuisance. 34 35 1.19 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 36 37 A. Contractor shall perform work in accordance with OSHA, state and local safety 38 requirements. 39 40 1.20 SUSPENSION OF WORK DUE TO WEATHER 41 42 A. During inclement weather, all work that could be damaged or rendered inferior 43 by such weather conditions shall be suspended. The orders and decisions of 44 the Engineer as to suspensions shall be final and binding. The ability to issue 45 such an order shall not be interpreted as a requirement to do so. During 46 suspension of the work for any cause, the work shall be suitably covered and SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -9 04/26/11 1 protected so as to preserve it from injury by the weather or otherwise; and, if 2 the Engineer shall so direct, rubbish and surplus materials shall be removed. 3 4 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for documenting all inclement weather 5 conditions. 6 7 1.21 RELOCATIONS 8 9 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the relocation of structures, including 10 but not limited to light poles, signs, sign poles, fences, piping, conduits and 11 drains that interfere with the positioning of the work as set out on the 12 Drawings. The cost of all such relocations shall be borne by the Contractor at 13 no additional cost to the Owner. 14 15 1.22 SALVAGE 16 17 A. Any existing equipment or material including, but not limited to, valves, pipes, 18 fittings, couplings, etc., which is removed or replaced as a result of 19 construction under this project may be designated y the Owner to be salvaged. 20 Any existing equipment or material to be salvaged shall remain onsite and the 21 Contractor shall be responsible for delivering the salvage equipment/materials 22 to the exact location onsite as directed by the Engineer. 23 24 1.23 PERMITS 25 26 A. Upon notice of award, the Contractor shall immediately apply for all applicable 27 permits, not previously obtained by the Owner, from the appropriate 28 governmental agency or agencies. No work shall commence until all 29 applicable permits have been obtained and copies delivered to the Engineer. 30 The costs for obtaining all permits shall be borne by the Contractor. 31 32 1.24 PUMPING 33 34 A. The Contractor with his own equipment shall perform all pumping necessary to 35 prevent flotation of any part of the structures during construction operations. 36 All water collected during pumping operations shall be properly disposed of in 37 accordance with these specifications and /or regulatory requirements, 38 whichever is more stringent. 39 40 B. The Contractor shall, with his own equipment, pump out water that may seep 41 or leak into the excavations or structures. All water collected during pumping 42 operations shall be properly disposed of in accordance with these 43 specifications and /or regulatory requirements, whichever is more stringent. 44 Below grade galleries and other operating areas shall be kept dry at all times. 45 The extent of pumping required in tanks, channels and other non - operating 46 areas will be determined by the Owner /Engineer. 47 48 1.25 NOTIFICATION OF WORK ON EXISTING FACILITIES SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -10 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 A. Before commencing work on any of the existing structures or equipment, the 3 Contractor shall notify the Owner /Engineer, in writing, at least 10 calendar 4 days in advance of the date he proposed to commence such work. 5 6 1.26 OWNER OCCUPANCY AND OPERATION OF COMPLETED FACILITIES 7 8 A. It is assumed that portions of the work will be completed prior to completion of 9 the entire work. Upon completion of construction of each individual facility, 10 including testing, if the Owner, at his sole discretion, desires to accept the 11 individual facility, the Contractor will be issued a dated certificate of completion 12 and acceptance for each individual facility. The Owner will assume ownership 13 and begin operation of the individual facility on that date and the one -year 14 guaranty period shall commence on that date. The Owner has the option of 15 not accepting any individual completed facility, but accepting the entire work 16 as a whole when it is completed and tested. 17 18 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 19 20 21 PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 22 23 24 END OF SECTION SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -11 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -12 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01040 2 3 COORDINATION 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.1 PROJECT COORDINATION 8 9 A. The Contractor shall provide for the complete coordination of all construction 10 efforts. This shall include but not necessarily be limited to coordination of the 11 following: 12 13 1. The work of subcontractors. 14 15 2. The flow of material and equipment from suppliers. 16 17 3. The effort of equipment manufacturers during test and checkout. 18 19 4 The interrelated work with public and private utility companies. 20 21 5. The interrelated work with the Owner where tie -ins to existing facilities 22 are required. 23 24 6. The effort of independent testing agencies. 25 26 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) 27 28 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 29 30 31 32 END OF SECTION COORDINATION 01040 -1 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK COORDINATION 01040 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01050 2 3 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 B. The accuracy of any method of staking shall be the responsibility of the 19 Contractor. All surveying for vertical and horizontal control shall be the 20 responsibility of the Contractor. 21 22 C. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the preservation of all stakes and 23 marks. If any stakes or marks are carelessly or willfully disturbed by the 24 Contractor, the Contractor shall not proceed with any work until he has 25 established such points, marks, lines and elevations as may be necessary for 26 the prosecution of the work. 27 28 1.02 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS 29 30 A Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those 31 designated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall locate and protect control 32 points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference 33 points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or 34 reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any 35 such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed 36 due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them 37 referenced and reset by a Registered Land Surveyor. 38 39 1.03 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS 40 41 A. The Contractor shall engage the services of a Florida Registered Land 42 Surveyor to establish all lines and grades on the Drawings necessary to fully 43 construct the work in accordance with Chapter 5J -17 of the Florida 44 Administrative Code. A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all field engineering and survey services required. Such work shall include survey work to establish existing and /or proposed lines and grades and to locate and lay out site boundaries and easements, project control, site improvements, structures, controlling lines and levels and all other survey required for the construction of the work. Also included are such engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and surveyors shall be licensed professionals registered in the State of Florida. 45 46 47 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 01050 -1 04/26/11 1 B. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish and stake all pipeline and 2 roadway right -of -way adjacent to construction at 100' intervals on tangents, 50' 3 intervals on curves and at all changes in direction. The surveyor shall place 4 lath and hub at such points with stations indicated. Tack in hub shall not be 5 permitted. 6 7 1. The Registered Land Surveyor shall utilize current right -of -way maps, 8 plats and property deeds, all being of public record, in conjunction with 9 existing monumentation to establish the existing right -of -way lines and 10 utility easement boundaries. 11 12 C. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish a temporary benchmark system 13 in accordance with Chapter 5J -17 F.A.C. and shall provide a written list to the 14 Contractor for his use. 15 16 D. The Contractor shall provide an as -built survey of all pipes and structures 17 constructed under the project that shall be signed and sealed by a Florida 18 Registered Surveyor and Mapper. At minimum, the As -Built Survey shall 19 include: 20 21 1 _ Top of concrete elevations and northings and eastings for all basins 22 and structures 23 2. Weir elevations for all basins and structures 24 3. Pipe inverts for gravity pipelines and top of pipe elevations for pressure 25 pipelines for all yard piping, and northings and eastings of all changes 26 in pipe direction. 27 28 1.04 RECORDS 29 30 A. Contractor shall maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey 31 work as construction progresses. Survey notes indicating the information and 32 measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in 33 notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the Record Drawings. 34 35 1.05 SUBMITTALS 36 37 A. Submit name and address of surveyor to the Engineer. 38 39 B. On request of the Engineer, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field 40 engineering work. 41 42 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 43 44 PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 45 46 END OF SECTION FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 01050 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01065 2 3 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the construction of the 10 project adheres to City, County, State, and Federal standards and regulations, 11 and to all permits and easements acquired for the project. 12 13 B. The Contractor shall coordinate all work within rights -of -way with the agency 14 having jurisdiction, including all road /lane closures, road /lane narrowing and 15 detours. 16 17 C. Copies of any Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements or License Agreements 18 that the Owner has obtained will be available for review by prospective bidders 19 at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room -- website address: 20 www .myclearwater.com /cityprojects. The Contractor shall conduct all 21 operations in accordance with the requirements of all Permits, Easements and 22 License Agreements. 23 24 D. Where Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or License Agreements 25 require that certain Work is to be performed only in the presence of a 26 representative of the permitting entity, the Contractor shall provide all 27 coordination and notification required to assure full compliance with the permit 28 conditions. 29 30 E. The Owner has obtained or will obtain certain Permits, Deeds, 31 Easement Agreements, or License Agreements required for construction of 32 the project. A listing of those Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or 33 License Agreements that the Owner has obtained or applied for is listed 34 below. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all other Permits, 35 Easement Agreements, or License Agreements necessary for the proper 36 execution of the Work not specifically noted to be obtained by the Owner. 37 38 F. The Contractor shall comply with all terms, conditions, provisions and 39 requirements of all permits issued or to be issued for the Project. Should the 40 Contractor's failure to comply with said permits lead to enforcement action 41 by any of the permitting or jurisdictional agencies, any resultant costs in 42 the forms of repairs, fines, penalties, administrative costs, attorney's fees or 43 consultant fees shall be deducted from the Contract Price or shall be 44 otherwise collectible from the Contractor and its Surety, jointly and severally_ 45 46 G. The Contractor shall notify the Owner a minimum of 30 days prior to the PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 01065 -1 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1.02 PERMITS 8 9 10 expiration of a permit if said expiration occurs prior to completion of the Work. H. Prior to any land clearing or tree removal, the Contractor shall construct a soil tracking device in accordance with current Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) design standards. 11 12 13 14 15 16 A. Permits obtained by, or applied for by, the Owner are as follows: None. Permit Title Agency Permit /File Number B. Each bidder shall be familiar with the requirements of the permit conditions that relate to construction activities and shall include the cost of satisfying these permit conditions in developing a bid for the project. 17 C. At a minimum, the Contractor shall register with appropriate authorities, obtain 18 the following permits as required and comply with their respective conditions 19 and submit copies of all applications and final permits to Engineer and Owner: 20 21 1. City of Clearwater building permit(s) 22 2. Generic Permit for the Production of Groundwater. 23 3. Storm Water NPDES 24 25 D. The Contractor shall obtain all construction permits required including those 26 necessary for clearing, grubbing, and tree removal. No clearing shall occur 27 and no earth - moving equipment shall be placed on -site until after the permits 28 have been issued. 29 30 E. The Contractor shall obtain, implement and comply with all local and state 31 permits required for dewatering, including consumptive or water use 32 permitting, if required for construction from the Southwest Florida Water 33 Management District. 34 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 01065 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining, and complying with, all 2 required permits relating to discharges from dewatering shall obtain a State of 3 Florida Department of Environmental Protection Generic Permit for the 4 Discharge of Produced Ground Water From Any Non - Contaminated Site 5 Activity in accordance with 62- 621.300(2) FAC. 6 7 G. The Contractor shall obtain, implement and comply with the requirements of a 8 Generic Permit for Storm Water Discharge from Large and Small Construction 9 Activities (CGP), in accordance with 62- 621.300(4) FAC. The Contractor shall 10 submit a CGP Notice of Intent (NOI) to the Florida Department of 11 Environmental Protection (FDEP) and develop and submit a Storm Water 12 Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as part of the CGP. The Contactor shall: 13 14 1. Obtain the CGP form and NOI Application Form from the FDEP 15 or its website, DEP Documents 62- 621.300(4)(a) and 62-- 621.300(4)(b), 16 respectively. 17 18 2. Develop an SWPPP in compliance with FDEP storm water 19 permitting rules that shall include, at a minimum, the following: 20 a. A site evaluation of how and where pollutants may be mobilized 21 by storm water. 22 b. A site plan for managing storm water runoff. 23 c. Identification of appropriate erosion and sediment controls 24 including Best Management Practices to reduce erosion, 25 sedimentation, and storm water pollution. 26 d. A maintenance and inspection schedule. 27 e. Plan and procedures for record keeping. 28 f. A map depicting storm water exit areas. 29 30 3. Complete and submit the NOI Application, including all attachments, to the 31 local FDEP office along with the appropriate application fee. 32 33 4. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the FDEP Notice of 34 Permit, along with a copy of the SWPPP, to the Engineer. 35 36 1.03 EASEMENTS 37 38 A. The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the various easements for 39 the following parcels: N/A PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 01065 -3 04/26/11 1 Easement Number Owner County Parcel ID 2 3 4 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 6 (NOT USED) 7 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 9 (NOT USED) 10 11 12 END OF SECTION PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 01065 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01090 2 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Contract Documents to identify 10 reference standards. 11 12 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 13 14 A. Application: When a standard is specified by reference, comply with 15 requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when 16 requirements are modified by the Contract Documents or applicable codes 17 establish stricter standards. 18 19 B. Publication Date: The publication in effect on the date of issue of Contract 20 Documents, except when a specific publication date is specified. 21 22 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS, NAMES, AND ADDRESSES OF ORGANIZATIONS 23 24 Obtain copies of referenced standards direct from publication source, when needed 25 for proper performance of Work, or when required for submittal by Contract 26 Documents 27 28 AA Aluminum Association 29 900 19th Street NW 30 Washington, DC 20006 31 32 AASHTO American Association of State Highway 33 and Transportation Officials 34 444 North Capitol Street, NW Suite 249 35 Washington, DC 20001 36 37 ACI American Concrete Institute 38 38800 Country Club Drive 39 Farmington Hills, MI 48331 40 41 Al Asphalt Institute 42 2696 Research Park Drive 43 Lexington KY 40511 44 45 46 47 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 -1 04/26/11 1 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 2 One East Wacker Drive 3 Suite 3100 4 Chicago, IL 60601 -2001 5 6 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 7 1140 Connecticut Avenue 8 Suite 705 9 Washington DC 20036 10 11 ANSI American National Standards Institute 12 1819 L Street, NW 13 Washington, DC 20036 14 15 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 16 Three Park Avenue 17 New York, NY 10016 -5990 18 19 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 20 100 BarrHarbor Drive 21 West Conshohoken, PA, 19428 22 23 AWWA American Water Works Association 24 6666 W. Quincy Avenue 25 Denver, CO 80235 26 27 AWS American Welding Society 28 550 N.W. LeJeune Road 29 Miami, FL 33126 30 31 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 32 933 N. Plum Grove Road 33 Schaumburg, IL 60173 -4758 34 35 FS Federal Specification General Services 36 Administration Specifications and Consumer 37 Information Distribution Section (WFSIS) 38 470 L'enfant Plaza — Suite 8100 39 Washington, DC 20407 40 41 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 42 1300 North l7t" Street 43 Suite 1847 44 Rosslyn, VA 22209 45 46 PCA Portland Cement Association 47 5420 Old Orchard Road REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 PCI 4 5 6 7 SSPC 8 9 10 11 UL 12 13 14 15 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 16 17 PART 3 - EXECUTION 18 19 20 Skokie, IL 60077 Prestressed Concrete Institute 209 W. Jackson Blvd. Chicago, IL 60606 Society for Protective Coatings 40 24th Street,. 6th floor Pittsburgh, PA 15222 Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 (NOT USED) (NOT USED) END OF SECTION REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 -3 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01150 2 3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. This section defines the Work included in each bid item in the Bid /Proposal 10 section of the Contract Documents. Payment will be made based on the 11 specified items included in the description in this section for each pay item 12 number. 13 14 B. All prices included in the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices will be full 15 compensation for all labor, supervision, materials, tools, equipment, and 16 incidentals necessary to complete the Work as shown on the Drawings and /or 17 as specified in the Contract Documents. Actual quantities of each item bid on 18 a unit price basis will be determined upon completion of the construction in the 19 manner established for each item in this section. Payment for all items listed 20 in the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices shall constitute full compensation for all 21 work shown and /or specified to be performed under the Contract. 22 23 C. Restoration is considered to be an integral part of the Work, and all bid prices 24 shall include the cost of restoration necessitated by the Work related to that 25 bid item. All existing structures and property including, but not limited to, 26 paving, stabilized roads, drainage piping and ditches, catch basins, head 27 walls, yard culverts, lawns, fences, trees, shrubs, ground areas, walkways, 28 sidewalks, driveways, alleys, curbs, gutters, irrigation systems, buildings, 29 structures and equipment that are altered, removed or damaged during 30 construction shall be restored to the same or better condition than existed prior 31 to construction at no additional cost to the Owner. Cleanup is an integral part 32 of restoration process. 33 34 D. The Contractor shall exercise care to preserve and protect existing facilities 35 during all periods for the construction phase. All existing structures, 36 equipment, and private property, including, but not limited to paving, stabilized 37 roads, drainage piping and ditches, latch basins, head walls, yard culverts, 38 lawns, fences, trees, shrubs, ground areas, walkways, driveways, alleys, 39 curbs, gutters and irrigations systems that are altered, removed or damaged 40 during construction and are not included in the proposed alterations of the new 41 work shall be restored to the same or better condition than existed prior to 42 construction. 43 44 E. The Contractor shall be responsible for all traffic maintenance requirements 45 necessitated by the construction /installation of those specific bid items MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -1 04/26/11 1 requiring traffic maintenance. The cost for this work shall be included in the 2 specific unit price submitted for that particular bid item. 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 4 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 6 7 3.01 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 8 9 A. Equipment for Clarifiers 1 thru 4 and the North RAS Pump House at the 10 Northeast WRF (Bid Item 1A) 11 12 1. Owner Direct Purchase: The Owner will direct purchase the equipment 13 listed below from the Contractor -- selected supplier /vendor in accordance 14 with the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Documents included in the 15 Appendix. 16 17 • Clarifier mechanical equipment included in Section 11225. 18 • RAS Pumps included in Section 11310. 19 • WAS Pump included in Section 11317. 20 21 The price bid for Bid Item 1A shall include all equipment, materials,. 22 spare parts, special tools, O&M manuals, factory testing, field services, 23 warranty and other items normally provided by the manufacturer of the 24 equipment. 25 26 2. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price 27 included in the Bid Form under Bid Item 1A Equipment for Clarifiers 1 28 thru 4 and the North RAS Pump House at the Northeast WRF shall be 29 made in accordance with the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Documents 30 included in the Appendix. 31 32 3. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price included under Bid Item 1A 33 shall be made directly by the Owner to the equipment vendor in 34 accordance with the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Documents 35 included in the Appendix. The cost of the equipment will be deducted 36 from the Contract Price by Change Order in accordance with the Owner 37 Direct Purchase (ODP) Documents included in the Appendix. 38 39 B. ODP — Sales Tax Savings Retained by the City (Bid Item 1 B) 40 41 1. Measurement: Measurement of the lump sum price stipulated in the 42 Bid Form for Bid Item 1B, ODP — Sales Tax Savings Retained, shall be 43 the actual amount of sales tax savings associated with the Owner's 44 Direct Purchase of the equipment furnished under Bid Item 1A. 45 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price included under Pay Item 1B 2 shall not be made. The ODP - Sales Tax Savings shall be deducted 3 from the Contract by Change Order in accordance with the Owner 4 Direct Purchase (ODP) Documents included in the Appendix. 5 6 C. Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 thru 4 and the North RAS Pump House at the 7 Northeast WRF Complete (Pay Item 1 C) 8 9 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price 10 bid for Bid Item 1C, Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 thru 4 and the North 11 RAS Pump House at the Northeast WRF Complete shall not be made 12 and all items shall be included in the lump sum price bid. 13 14 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price bid for Pay Item 1C shall be 15 made in accordance with the Schedule of Values and shall be full 16 compensation for the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, 17 and supervision required to perform the work as shown on the 18 Drawings and Specifications as indicated herein including, but not 19 limited to, the design, installation, operation, and maintenance of a 20 groundwater removal system as required to prevent each clarifier from 21 becoming buoyant; the disassembly, removal and disposal (unless 22 otherwise indicated) of all existing clarifier rotating components center 23 columns, drives, weir plates, scum baffles, scum baffle supports, scum 24 beach plates and supports, walkway bridges and handrails, scum pipe 25 wall penetrations, sludge blanket level detector probes and support 26 brackets, chlorine solution piping, reclaimed water piping to the limits 27 shown on the Drawings, and the flush water piping for the scum 28 troughs; the disassembly, removal and disposal of all existing WAS and 29 RAS pumps, motors, bases and electrical controls and associated 30 valves as shown on the Drawings; the installation of new clarifier 31 components including center columns, drives, bridges and walkways, 32 rotating mechanisms, scum baffles and supports, scum beaches with 33 supports, scum pipes and wall penetrations, reclaimed water piping on 34 the walkway bridges, scum beach plate flush water systems and weir 35 plates; modifications to the clarifier RAS piping, clarifier influent piping, 36 and to the clarifier concrete floor slabs as required for maintaining the 37 floor drains in service; the furnishing and installation of new WAS and 38 RAS pumps and associated valves, control panels and electrical work; 39 pipe supports; the removal furnishing and installation of a new WAS 40 plug valve and WAS flow meter; the removal and replacement of the 41 existing telescoping sludge valve seals with new telescoping sludge 42 valves seals; the furnishing and installation of pressure relief valves in 43 the floors of each clarifier; the removal and replacement of existing 44 concrete stair nosings with new stair nosings; the removal and 45 replacement of the existing motor control center and associated wiring 46 and controls with new electrical power and control conduit, wire and MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -3 04/26/11 1 equipment as shown on the Drawings; provisions for temporary 2 electrical power and controls as required to maintain service; removal 3 and replacement of the existing RAS wet well liquid level detector with a 4 new RAS well level detector, re- mounting of the sludge level detector 5 probes and brackets on new clarifier walkways; re- wiring and re- 6 connecting the sludge level detectors; incorporating new equipment 7 and process variables and updating /re- programming the existing plant 8 SCADA system; all pertinent Division 1 requirements; and, all other 9 equipment, materials and services necessary for the complete 10 Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 Thru 4 and North RAS Pump House 11 Equipment at the Northeast WRF as detailed in the Contract 12 Documents. 13 14 Under this Bid Item 1C, the Contractor shall furnish and install all work 15 at the Northeast WRF excluding that equipment furnished under Bid 16 Items 1A, 1D, and 2 thru 7, including, but not limited to, all coordination, 17 ordering and scheduling of the equipment delivery to the site, 18 transportation, unloading, storage, installation in strict accordance with 19 the manufacturer's instructions, and all other labor, materials, tools, 20 appliances, supervision and incidentals but necessary for the proper 21 completion of the work. 22 23 D. SCADA Software Implementation Services Allowance (Bid Item 1 D) 24 25 1. Measurement: Measurement for pay item 1D shall be made in 26 accordance with the appropriate authorization by the Owner. The 27 allowance is for the Owner's Systems Programmer to perform the work 28 described in Section 13630. 29 30 2. Payment: Payment from the SCADA Software Implementation Services 31 allowance shall be made in accordance with the terms of the 32 Authorization. 33 34 E. Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 5 thru 8 and South RAS Pump House Equipment at 35 the Northeast WRF. (Pay Item 2). 36 37 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for 38 the Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 5 Thru 8 and South RAS Pump House 39 Equipment at the Northeast WRF shall not be made and all items shall 40 be included in the lump sum price bid. 41 42 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price bid for Pay Item 2 shall be 43 made in accordance with the Schedule of Values and shall be full 44 compensation for the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, 45 and supervision required to perform the work as shown on the drawings 46 and specified herein including but not limited to disassembly, and MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 removal of all clarifier rotating components; removal of center columns, 2 removal of drives, removal of the weirs, scum baffles, scum baffle 3 supports, scum beaches, scum beach supports, walkway bridges, scum 4 pipe wall penetrations, sludge blanket level detector probes and probe 5 mounting brackets, chlorine solution piping, reclaimed water piping on 6 the walkway bridges, and flush water piping for the scum beaches; 7 furnish and install all new clarifier components including new center 8 columns, new drives, new walkways; new rotating mechanisms; new 9 scum baffles and supports; new scum beaches, new scum beach 10 supports, new scum pipe wall penetrations new chlorine solution piping, 11 new reclaimed water piping on the walkway bridges, new scum beach 12 flush waster system; modify the base concrete, RAS piping, influent 13 piping, and drain lines in each clarifier as required, disassembly and 14 removal, of all RAS pumps, pump motors, pump bases, and electrical 15 controls, disassembly and removal of RAS pump suction valves, check 16 valves, and discharge valves, furnish and install new RAS pumps, 17 motors, and bases, new RAS pump suction valves, new RAS pump 18 check valves, new RAS pump discharge valves, new RAS and WAS 19 electrical and control panels; new RAS pipe supports, remove existing 20 telescoping sludge valve seals; furnish and install new telescoping 21 sludge valves seals, disassemble and remove the existing MCC, furnish 22 and install new replacement electrical power and control wire, conduit, 23 and equipment, provide temporary electrical power and control wiring 24 and conduit as required, remove existing RAS well liquid level detector, 25 furnish and install new RAS well level detector, mount sludge level 26 detector probes and brackets on new clarifier walkways, reconnect 27 sludge level detectors, incorporate new equipment and process 28 variables into the existing plant SCADA system, provide inspection, 29 sandblasting, painting, startup, testing, and coordination services by the 30 manufacturer's authorized representative; all pertinent Division 1 31 requirements and all other services necessary for the complete 32 Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 5 Thru 8 and South RAS Pump House 33 Equipment at the Northeast WRF as detailed in the Contract 34 Documents. 35 36 F Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 Thru 4 and the Splitter Box at the Marshall Street 37 WRF (Pay Item 3) 38 39 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for 40 the Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 Thru 4 and the Splitter Box at the 41 Marshall Street WRF shall not be made and all items shall be included 42 in the lump sum price bid. 43 44 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price bid for Pay Item 3 shall be 45 made in accordance with the Schedule of Values and shall be full 46 compensation for the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -5 04/26/11 1 and supervision required to perform the work as shown on the drawings 2 and specified herein including but not limited to disassembly, and 3 removal of all clarifier rotating components; removal of center columns, 4 removal of drives, removal of the weirs, scum baffles, scum baffle 5 supports, scum beaches, scum beach supports, walkway bridges, scum 6 pipe wall penetrations, sludge blanket level detector probes and probe 7 mounting brackets, chlorine solution piping, reclaimed water piping on 8 the walkway bridges, and flush water piping for the scum beaches; 9 furnish and install all new clarifier components including new center 10 columns, new drives, new walkways; new rotating mechanisms; new 11 scum baffles and supports; new scum beaches, new scum beach 12 supports, new scum pipe wall penetrations; modify the base concrete, 13 RAS piping, influent piping, and drain lines in each clarifier as required, 14 disassembly and removal of existing telescoping sludge valves and 15 associated manual valve operator bases and supports; furnish and 16 install new telescoping sludge valves, manual operators, and supports, 17 mount sludge level detector probes and brackets on new clarifier 18 walkways, reconnect sludge level detectors, remove existing splitter 19 box gates, furnish and install new splitter box gates, provide bypass 20 pumping as required to replace the splitter box gates, provide 21 inspection, sandblasting, painting, startup, testing, and coordination 22 services by the manufacturer's authorized representative; all pertinent 23 Division 1 requirements and all other services necessary for the 24 complete Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 Thru 4 at the Marshall Street 25 WRF as detailed in the Contract Documents. 26 27 G. Rehabilitation of the East and West Clarifiers at the East WRF (Pay Item 4). 28 29 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for 30 the Rehabilitation of the East and West Clarifiers at East WRF shall not 31 be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum price bid. 32 33 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price bid for Pay Item 4 shall be 34 made in accordance with the Schedule of Values and shall be full 35 compensation for the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, 36 and supervision required to perform the work as shown on the drawings 37 and specified herein including but not limited to disassembly and 38 removal of the east clarifier walkway; removal of drives, scum baffles, 39 scum beaches, scum beach supports, weirs, and chlorine solution 40 piping on each clarifier; reclaimed water piping on the east clarifier 41 walkway bridge, scum trough flush water system on the east clarifier; 42 and corroded skimmer arm assembly at the surface of both clarifiers; 43 sandblast and paint the rotating mechanisms and the center columns 44 on each clarifier, the access platform on the west clarifier walkway 45 bridge; furnish and install new scum baffles, scum baffle supports, 46 scum beaches, scum beach supports, skimmer assemblies, chlorine MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 solution piping, reclaimed water piping on the walkway bridge, flush 2 water piping system for the scum trough, furnish and install a new 3 walkway bridge on the east clarifier, new drives for each clarifier, 4 furnish and install new telescoping sludge valve seals; replace the 5 scum pump discharge valve and check valves with new valves, 6 excavate and replace the west clarifier effluent valve and the east 7 clarifier drain valve, inspection, startup, testing, and coordination 8 services by the manufacturer's authorized representative; all pertinent 9 Division 1 requirements; and, all other services necessary for the 10 complete rehabilitation of the East and West Clarifiers at the East WRF 11 as detailed in the Contract Documents. 12 13 H. Mobilization (Pay Item 5) 14 15 1 _ Measurement: Measurement for payment of mobilization costs shall be 16 on a lump sum basis, but the cost shall not exceed four percent (4 %) of 17 the proposed Project's Base Bid Total. 18 19 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum bid for Pay Item 5 shall be full 20 compensation for all costs associated with initiating the project as 21 limited by other sections of the agreement including the Contractor's 22 Performance and Payment Bonds. Payment for these performances 23 shall be based on the terms of Section III and in accordance with the 24 Schedule of Values. 25 26 I. Indemnification (Pay Item 6) 27 28 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of indemnification shall not 29 be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum. 30 31 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) 32 for Pay Item 6 shall be full compensation for Indemnification of the 33 Owner and the Owner's Design Professional as specified in the 34 General Conditions, and shall be included in the first payment request. 35 36 J Contingency Allowance (Pay Item 7) 37 38 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment shall be as agreed upon by 39 the Owner and Contractor. 40 41 2. Payment: Payment shall be made in accordance with the terms of the 42 Contingency Allocation Work Request and, if applicable, in accordance 43 with the Schedule of Values. 44 45 46 END OF SECTION MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -7 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -8 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01152 2 3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Submit Applications for Payment to the Engineer in accordance with the 10 approved payment schedule and in the format established by the Owner. 11 12 B. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, the proposed Application 13 for Payment form, prior to the first payment request. 14 15 1.02 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED 16 17 A. Submit applications typed on forms either provided in these Specifications, 18 furnished by the Owner, or as approved by the Owner, with itemized data 19 typed on 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch or 8-1/2 inch x 14 -inch white paper continuation 20 sheets. 21 22 B. Provide itemized data on continuation sheet: 23 24 1. Format, schedules, line items and values: those of the Schedule of 25 Values accepted by the Engineer. 26 27 1.03 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT 28 29 A. Application Form: 30 31 1. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed 32 prior to date of submittal of application. 33 34 2. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated 35 on continuation sheets. 36 37 3. Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of the 38 Contractor. 39 40 B. Continuation Sheets: 41 42 1. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item 43 number and scheduled dollar value for each item. 44 45 2. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when 46 work has been performed or products stored. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152 -1 04/26/11 1 2 3. List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission, at the 3 end of the continuation sheets. 4 5 a. List by Change Order Number, and description, as for an original 6 component item of work. 7 8 4. To receive approval for payment on component material stored on site, 9 submit copies of the original invoices with the Application for Payment. 10 The application for payment must also include a table summarizing the 11 amount of each invoice and the schedule of values Tine item to which 12 the stored materials apply. 13 14 1.05 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 15 16 A. Provide substantiating data, containing suitable information for review of costs 17 requested with a cover letter identifying: 18 19 1. Project. 20 21 2. Application number and date. 22 23 3. Detailed list of enclosures. 24 25 4. For stored products: 26 27 a. Item number and identification as shown on application. 28 29 b. Description of specific material. 30 31 c. Supplier invoices. 32 33 d. A table identifying stored material, amount stored, amount 34 installed, and schedule of values item, which the material 35 applies. 36 37 B. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application. 38 39 C. The Contractor is to maintain an updated set of drawings to be used as record 40 drawings. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor is 41 to exhibit the updated record drawings for review by the Owner and the 42 Engineer. 43 44 D. Contractor shall maintain an updated construction schedule in accordance 45 with the Specification. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, 46 Contractor shall submit the updated construction schedule with the APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 applications for progress payments. If the Contractor fails to submit the 2 required updated schedule within the time prescribed, the Engineer may 3 withhold approval of progress payment estimates until such a time as the 4 Contractor submits the required updated schedule. 5 6 1.06 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT 7 8 A. Fill in application form as specified for progress payments. 9 10 B. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as 11 specified in the Specification. 12 13 C_ All appropriate information must be entered on the application form. 14 15 1. The line title, "Application Period ", must indicate the dates between 16 which all work was completed during the pay period. These dates must 17 be consecutive with the dates of the previous Payment Request and 18 they must not overlap. 19 20 2. All blank lines within the "Contract Data" and "Summary of Project 21 Status" section of the application must be completed. Also, if any 22 Change Orders have been approved, the "Change Orders" section 23 must include that information. 24 25 3. All calculations and arithmetic must be precise to the penny. 26 27 4. The application must be signed and dated by an authorized 28 representative of the Contractor. 29 30 1.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 31 32 A. Prior to submitting a completed Application for Payment request, the 33 Contractor shall arrange a field meeting with the Owner and /or Engineer to 34 review and verify all installed quantities and /or stored materials. Only when 35 the Owner /Engineer and Contractor agree on installed quantities and 36 percentages, should the Application for Payment be submitted. 37 38 B. Submit six (6) copies of Applications for Payment to the Engineer at the times 39 stipulated in the General Conditions. 40 41 C. When the Engineer finds Application properly completed and correct, he will 42 transmit certificate for payment to Owner, with copy to Contractor. 43 44 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 45 46 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152 -3 04/26/11 1 2 END OF SECTION APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01153 2 3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Promptly implement Change Order procedures. 10 11 1. Provide full written data required to evaluate changes. 12 13 2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material /force 14 account basis. 15 16 3 Provide full documentation to Engineer on request. 17 18 B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization: 19 20 1. Who is authorized to accept changes in the work. 21 22 2. Who is responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of 23 the authorization of changes in the work. 24 25 1.02 DEFINITIONS 26 27 A. Change Order: See General Conditions. 28 29 B. Work Directive Change: A written order to the Contractor, signed by Owner 30 and Engineer, which amends the Contract Documents as described, 31 authorizes Contractor to proceed with a change that affects the Contract Sum 32 or the Contract Time, and that will be included in a subsequent Change Order. 33 34 C. Engineer's Supplemental Instructions: A written order, instructions, or 35 interpretations, signed by Engineer making minor changes in the Work not 36 involving a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 37 38 D. Field Order: A written order to the Contractor, signed by the Engineer and the 39 Contractor, which is issued to interpret/clarify the Contract Documents, order 40 minor changes in the work. The work described by a Field Order is to be 41 accomplished without change to the Contract Sum, Contract Time, and /or 42 claims for other costs. 43 44 1.03 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES 45 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -1 04/26/11 1 A. Owner and Engineer may initiate changes by submitting a Work Directive 2 Change to the Contractor. Request will include: 3 4 1. Detailed description of the change, products, and location of the change 5 in the Project. 6 7 2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications. 8 9 3. The projected time span for making the change, and a specific 10 statement as to whether overtime work is or is not authorized. 11 12 4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be 13 considered valid. 14 15 B. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to the Engineer, 16 containing: 17 18 1. Description of the proposed changes. 19 20 2. Statement of the reason for making the changes. 21 22 3. Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 23 24 4. Statement of the effect on the work of separate contractors. 25 26 5. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract 27 Time, as appropriate. 28 29 1.04 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION 30 31 A. Work Directive Change will describe changes in the Work, both additions and 32 deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of 33 the change and will designate the method of determining any change in the 34 Contract Sum and any change in Contract Time. 35 36 B. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Work Directive Change as 37 authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes. 38 39 1.05 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS 40 41 A. Support each quotation for a lump sum proposal, and for each unit price, 42 which has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating data 43 to allow the Engineer to evaluate the quotation. 44 45 B. On request, provide additional data to support time and cost computations: 46 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. Labor required. 2 3 2. Equipment required_ 4 5 3. Products required. 6 7 a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost. 8 9 b. Quantities required. 10 11 12 13 14 15 6. Overhead and profit. 16 17 7. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 18 19 C. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time -and- 20 material /force account basis, with documentation as required for a Lump Sum 21 proposal, plus additional information: 22 23 1. Name of the Owner's authorized agent who ordered the work and date 24 of the order. 25 26 2. Dates and times work was performed and by whom. 27 28 3. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid. 29 30 4. Receipts and invoices for: 31 32 a. Equipment used, listing dates, and times of use. 33 34 b. Products used, listing of quantities. 35 36 c. Subcontracts. 37 38 1.06 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS AND FIELD ORDERS 39 40 A. Engineer will prepare each Change Order and Field Order. 41 42 B. Change Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, 43 with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the 4. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. 5. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented. 44 change. 45 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -3 04/26/11 1 C. Change Order will provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract 2 Sum and in the Contract Time. 3 4 D. Field Order will describe interpretations or clarifications of Contract 5 Documents, order minor changes in the Work, and/ or memorialize trade --off 6 agreements_ 7 8 E. Field Order work will be accomplished without change in the Contract Sum, 9 Contract Time, and /or claims for other costs. 10 11 1.07 LUMP SUM /FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER 12 13 A. Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and 14 attachments based upon documents and proposals submitted by Contractor, 15 or requests from Owner, or both. 16 17 B. Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent 18 to Contractor for approval. After approval by Contractor, all copies should be 19 sent to Owner for approval. Engineer should make distribution of executed 20 copies. 21 22 1.08 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER 23 24 A. Content of Change Orders will be based on either: 25 26 1. Engineer's definition of the scope of the required changes. 27 28 2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Engineer. 29 30 3. Survey of complete work. 31 32 B. The amounts of the unit prices to be: 33 34 1. Those stated in the Agreement. 35 36 2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor. 37 38 C. When quantities of each of the items affected by the Change Order can be 39 determined prior to start of the work: 40 41 1. Owner and Engineer will sign and date a Work Directive Change as 42 authorization for Contractor to proceed with the changes. 43 44 D. When quantities of the items cannot be determined prior to start of the work: 45 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Engineer or Owner will issue a Work Directive change directing the 2 Contractor to proceed with the change on the basis of unit prices, and 3 the Engineer will cite the applicable unit prices. 4 5 2. Upon completion of the change, the Engineer will determine the cost of 6 such work based on the unit prices and quantities used. Contractor 7 shall submit documentation to establish the number of units of each 8 item and any claims for a change in Contract Time 9 10 3. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change 11 in Contract Sum and in Contract Time. 12 13 4. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their 14 agreement with the terms therein. 15 16 5. Owner will then sign the change order. 17 18 1.09 TIME AND MATERIAL /FORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDER /CONSTRUCTION 19 CHANGE AUTHORIZATION 20 21 A. Engineer and Owner will issue a Work Directive Change directing Contractor 22 to proceed with the changes. 23 24 B. Upon completion of the change, the Contractor shall submit itemized 25 accounting and supporting data. 26 27 C. Engineer will determine the allowable cost of such work, as provided in 28 General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. 29 30 D. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in 31 Contract Sum and in Contract Time. 32 33 E. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement 34 therewith. 35 36 F. Owner will then sign the Change Order. 37 38 1.10 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS 39 40 A. Not greater than monthly revise Schedule of Values and Application for 41 Payment forms to record each change as a separate item of work and to 42 record the adjusted Contract Amount. 43 44 B. Not greater than monthly revise the Progress Schedule to reflect each change 45 in Contract Time. Revise sub - schedules to show changes for other items of 46 work affected by the Change Order. 47 48 C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in 49 Record Documents. 50 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -5 04/26/11 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2 3 PART 3 -- EXECUTION (NOT USED) 4 5 END OF SECTION CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01200 2 3 MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 PRE - CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 8 9 A. In accordance with the Contract Documents, prior to the commencement of 10 Work, a preconstruction conference shall be held at a mutually agreed time 11 and place. 12 13 B. The purpose of the conference shall be to designate responsible personnel 14 and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination shall be 15 discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The agenda 16 shall include as a minimum: 17 18 1. Contractor's Initial Construction Schedule 19 20 2. Procedures for Transmittal, Review and Distribution of Shop Drawings 21 22 3. Procedures for Submittal and Review of Monthly Applications for 23 Payment 24 25 4. Maintaining Record Drawings 26 27 5. Critical Work Sequencing and Construction Restrictions 28 29 6. Field Decisions and Change Orders 30 31 7. Field Office, Storage Areas and Security 32 33 8. Equipment and Material Deliveries 34 35 9. Safety Meetings and Program 36 37 10. Traffic Control Plan 38 39 11. Pre - construction Video 40 41 C. The Engineer shall preside at the conference and shall arrange for keeping 42 the minutes and distributing them to all persons in attendance. 43 44 1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS 45 46 A. The Owner shall schedule and conduct regular project meetings at least MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 01200 -1 04/26/11 1 monthly and at other times as deemed necessary by the progress of the work. 2 The Contractor and the Engineer shall be represented at each meeting. The 3 Contractor and /or Engineer may request attendance by representatives of 4 material Supplier(s) and Subcontractor(s). 5 6 B. The Engineer shall preside at the conference and shall arrange for keeping 7 the minutes and distributing them to all persons in attendance. The purpose of 8 the meetings shall include but not be limited to reviewing the progress of the 9 Work, maintaining coordination of efforts, discussing changes in scheduling 10 and resolving problems that may develop; claims review; and future 11 scheduling. 12 13 PART 2 — PRODUCT (Not Used). 14 15 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 16 17 18 19 END OF SECTION MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 01200 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01300 2 3 SUBMITTALS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 8 9 A. Before Work is started, Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review a 10 schedule of the proposed construction operations. The construction schedule 11 shall indicate the sequence of the Work, the time of starting and completion of 12 each part, the installation date for each major item of equipment, and the time 13 for making connections to existing piping, structures, or facilities. 14 15 B. At least every 30 days the schedule shall be revised as necessary to reflect 16 changes in the progress of the Work. 17 18 C. Owner may require Contractor to add to his equipment, or construction forces, 19 as well as increase the working hours, if operations fall behind schedule at any 20 time during the construction period. 21 22 1.02 PROGRESS REPORTS 23 24 A. A progress report shall be furnished to Engineer with each Application for 25 Payment. If the Work falls behind schedule, Contractor shall submit additional 26 progress reports at such intervals as Engineer may request. 27 28 B. Each progress report shall include sufficient narrative to describe current and 29 anticipated delaying factors, their effect on the construction schedule, and 30 proposed corrective actions. Any Work reported complete, but which is not 31 readily apparent to Engineer, must be substantiated with satisfactory 32 evidence. 33 34 C. Each progress report shall also include three (3) prints of the accepted graphic 35 schedule marked to indicate actual progress. 36 37 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 38 39 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a schedule of values 40 after review of the tentative schedule and before submission of the first 41 application for payment. The schedule of values, showing the value of each 42 kind of work, shall be acceptable to Engineer before any application for 43 payment is prepared or approved. 44 45 B. The sum of the items listed in the schedule of values shall equal the Contract 46 Price. Such items as Bond premium, temporary construction facilities, may be SUBMITTALS 01300 -1 04/26/11 1 listed separately in the schedule of values, provided the amounts can be 2 substantiated. Overhead and profit shall not be listed as separate items. 3 4 C. In addition to those items listed in Paragraph B, items that shall also be 5 included on the schedule of values include 0 & M manuals (including 6 electronic format), As- Builts, Start -Up and Training, and any individualized 7 component that the Contractor wishes to separately itemize for payment. 8 9 D. An unbalanced Schedule of Values providing for overpayment of Contractor 10 on items of Work that would be performed first will not be accepted. The 11 Schedule of Values shall be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to 12 Engineer. Final acceptance by Engineer shall indicate only consent to the 13 schedule of values as a basis for preparation of Applications for Payments and 14 shall not constitute an agreement as to the value of each indicated item. 15 16 1.04 SCHEDULE OF PAYMENTS 17 18 A. Within thirty (30) days after award of the Contract, Contractor shall furnish to 19 Engineer a schedule of estimated monthly payments. The schedule shall be 20 revised and resubmitted each time an Application for Payment varies more 21 than 10 percent from the estimated Schedule of Payment. 22 23 1.05 SURVEY DATA 24 25 A. All field books, notes, and other data developed by Contractor in performing 26 surveys required as part of the Work shall be available to Engineer for 27 examination throughout the construction period. All such data shall be 28 submitted to Engineer with the other documentation required for final 29 acceptance of the Work. 30 31 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING DATA 32 33 A. Engineering data covering all equipment and fabricated materials that will 34 become a permanent part of the Work shall be submitted to Engineer, for 35 review. These data shall include drawings and descriptive information in 36 sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and operation of 37 component materials and devices; the external connections, anchorages, and 38 supports required; performance characteristics; and dimensions needed for 39 installation and correlation with other materials and equipment. 40 41 B. All submittals, regardless of origin, shall be stamped with the approval of 42 Contractor and identified with the name and number of this Contract, 43 Contractor's name, and references to applicable specification paragraphs and 44 Contract Drawings. Each submittal shall indicate the intended use of the item 45 in the Work. When catalog pages are submitted, applicable items shall be 46 clearly identified. The current revision, issue number, and date shall be SUBMITTALS 01300 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 indicated on all drawings and other descriptive data. 2 3 C. Contractor's stamp of approval is a representation to Owner and Engineer that 4 Contractor accepts full responsibility for determining and verifying all 5 quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, 6 and similar data, and that he has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with 7 the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. 8 9 D. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified on each 10 submittal and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal. Such 11 submittals shall indicate, as pertinent to the deviation, essential details of all 12 changes proposed by Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that 13 may be a result of the deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams. 14 15 E. Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each 16 submission, and, in the case of a resubmission, shall verify that all exceptions 17 previously noted by Engineer have been taken into account. In the event that 18 more than one resubmission is required because of failure of Contractor to 19 account for exceptions previously noted, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for 20 the charges of Engineer for review of the additional resubmissions. 21 22 F. Resubmittals shall be made within seven (7) days of the date of the letter 23 returning the material to be modified or corrected, unless within seven (7) days 24 the Contractor submits an acceptable request for an extension of the 25 stipulated time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed 26 within that time. 27 28 G. Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining 29 Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the 30 Contract Time unless delay of the Work is directly caused by a change in the 31 work authorized by a Change Order or by failure of Engineer to return any 32 submittal within 21 days after its receipt in Engineer's office. 33 34 H. Contractor's letter of resubmittal shall list the date of his original submittal 35 letter, the date of the Engineer's letter returning the submittal, and the dates of 36 submission and return of any previous resubmittals. In addition, the 37 Contractor shall reimburse the Engineer in the amount of $200.00 for review of 38 the second resubmittal and each of any subsequent resubmittals. 39 40 I. Engineer's review of drawings and data submitted by Contractor will cover 41 only general conformity to the drawings and specifications, external 42 connections, and dimensions which affect the layout. Engineer's review does 43 not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details of the 44 material, equipment, device or item shown. Engineer's review of submittals 45 shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors, omissions, or 46 deviations, nor responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. SUBMITTALS 01300 -3 04/26/11 1 2 J. Five copies of each drawing and necessary data, plus the number of copies 3 that the Contractor wants returned, shall be submitted to Engineer. Engineer 4 will not accept submittals from anyone but Contractor. Submittals shall be 5 consecutively numbered in direct sequence of submittal based on the 5 digit 6 Specification Section number and a sequential number (001, 002, etc.), and 7 without division by subcontract or trade. Resubmittals shall bear the number 8 of the first submittal followed by a letter (A, B, etc.) to indicate the sequence of 9 the resubmittal. If applicable, the Engineer will provide the Contractor with an 10 electronic file of the submittal format to be followed. 11 12 K. When the drawings and data are returned marked AMEND — RESUBMIT or 13 REJECTED - RESUBMIT, the corrections shall be made as noted thereon and 14 as instructed by Engineer and five corrected copies (or one corrected 15 reproducible copy) resubmitted. 16 17 L. When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall in writing direct 18 specific attention to all revisions and shall list separately any revisions made 19 other than those called for by Engineer on previous submissions. 20 21 M. When the drawings and data are returned marked EXCEPTIONS NOTED, NO 22 EXCEPTIONS NOTED, or RECORD COPY, no additional copies need be 23 furnished. 24 25 1.07 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA 26 27 A. Operation and maintenance data shall include the following: 28 29 1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting 30 conditions. 31 32 2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking 33 instructions. 34 35 3. Lubrication and maintenance instructions. 36 37 4. Guide to "troubleshooting ". 38 39 5. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 40 41 B. The operation and maintenance data shall be in addition to any instructions or 42 parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered, or which 43 may be required by Contractor. 44 45 1.08 LAYOUT DATA 46 SUBMITTALS 01300 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. Contractor shall keep neat and legible notes of measurements and 2 calculations made by him in connection with the layout of the Work. Copies of 3 such data shall be furnished to the Engineer for use in checking. 4 5 B. Contractor's layout data as provided under Lines and Grades. All such data 6 considered of value to Owner will be transmitted to Owner by Engineer with 7 other records upon completion of the Work. 8 9 1.09 SUBMITTALS FOR COLOR SELECTION 10 11 A. The following is a list of items that must be submitted together for color 12 selection. No single item on this list will be approved without the submittal of 13 all other items. 14 15 1. Paint for aboveground piping, valves, valve box covers, meter box covers, 16 etc. 17 2. Paint for above ground equipment. 18 3. Paint for ground storage tank. 19 20 PART 2 — PRODUCT (Not Used) 21 22 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 23 24 25 26 END OF SECTION SUBMITTALS 01300 -5 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SUBMITTALS 01300 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01310 2 3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 4 5 6 PART 1 - GENERAL 7 8 1.01 GENERAL 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 B. All construction schedules shall be of the critical path method, bar chart type, 16 and shall be prepared using SURETRACK, PRIMAVERA P3, or equal. 17 18 1.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING GENERAL PROVISIONS 19 20 A. Within 15 calendar days after the issuance of the Notice of Award, the 21 Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a preliminary construction 22 progress schedule. The schedule shall contain a sufficient number of tasks such 23 that no single task has a value that exceeds 2.0% of the total Contract Price. 24 Partial payments will not be approved until an acceptable construction progress 25 schedule has been approved by the Engineer. 26 27 B. The schedule shall be updated monthly reflecting the approved baseline 28 schedule and the Contractor's progress on each activity. No progress payment 29 will be approved until the updated schedule is submitted and approved by the 30 Engineer. 31 32 C. Night work may be established by the Contractor as regular procedure only with 33 the prior written permission of the Owner. Such permission, however, may be 34 revoked at any time by the Owner if the Contractor fails to maintain adequate 35 equipment and supervision for the proper execution and control of the work at 36 night. 37 38 D. The Contractor shall designate an authorized representative who shall be 39 responsible for development and maintenance of the schedule and of progress 40 and payment reports. This representative of the Contractor shall have direct 41 project control and complete authority to act on behalf of the Contractor in 42 fulfilling the commitments of the Contractor's schedule. A. Construction under this contract must be coordinated to assure that construction is completed within the time allowed by the Contract Documents. The Contractor will also coordinate his activities with the other contractors to allow orderly and timely completion of all the work. 43 44 1.03 PROGRESS OF THE WORK 45 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -1 04/26/11 1 A. The work shall be executed with such progress as may be required to prevent 2 any delay to the general completion of the work. The work shall be executed at 3 such times and in or on such parts of the project, and with such forces, materials 4 and equipment to assure completion of the work in the time established by the 5 Contract. 6 7 B. If the Contractor, for his convenience and at his own expense, should desire to 8 carry on his work at night or outside regular hours, he shall submit written notice 9 to the Engineer and he shall allow ample time for satisfactory arrangements to 10 be made for inspecting the work in progress. The Contractor shall reimburse the 11 Owner for extra inspection required for work outside regular hours. The 12 Contractor shall light the different parts of the project as required to comply with 13 all applicable Federal and State regulations and with all applicable requirements 14 of the municipality in which the work is being done. 15 16 PART 2 - PROGRESS SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS 17 18 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 19 20 A. As required within the General Conditions, the Contractor shall submit a critical 21 path progress schedule as described herein. The schedule shall take into 22 considerations all work phasing and restrictions as specified elsewhere in the 23 Contract Documents. 24 25 B. The critical path progress schedule requirement shall consist of a detailed 26 schedule, monthly status reports (Monthly Reports), a start-up schedule, and 27 revisions to the schedules and analyses as described. The planning, 28 scheduling, management and execution of the work are the sole responsibilities 29 of the Contractor. The progress schedule shall allow the Engineer to review 30 Contractor's planning, scheduling, management and execution of the work; to 31 assist Engineer in evaluating work progress and make progress payments; to 32 allow other contractors to cooperate and coordinate their activities with those of 33 the Contractor; and to provide Owner with information about "construction 34 schedule" and "cumulative outlay schedule." 35 36 C. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall not relieve Contractor from the 37 responsibility for any deviations from the Contract Documents unless Contractor 38 has in writing called Engineer's attention to such deviations at the time of 39 submission and Engineer has given written concurrence to the specific 40 deviations, nor shall any concurrence by Engineer relieve Contractor from 41 responsibility for errors and omissions in the submittals. 42 43 D. Float or slack time is not for the exclusive benefit of the Owner, the Engineer or 44 the Contractor. Extensions of time for performance, as specified in the General 45 and Supplementary Conditions, will be granted only to the extent that equitable 46 time adjustments for the network activity, or activities affected, exceed the total CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 float or slack time along the affected network paths, as shown in the precedence 2 diagram and report in effect at the instant of either (a) a notice to proceed with a 3 change, or (b) a notice of suspension of work or possession, or (c) detection of a 4 subsequently acknowledged differing site condition, or (d) occurrence of cause 5 for an excusable delay. Further, use of float time in the schedule, or the 6 allocation of float time to activities by means of special logic restraints or 7 imposed dates, shall be shared to the benefit of Owner, Engineer, Contractor, 8 and his subcontractors and suppliers in proportion of their scope of 9 responsibilities. Excessive use of float time to the detriment of succeeding 10 activities may be cause for denying an extension of time if it can be 11 demonstrated that the float along the network paths affected at the instant of the 12 delaying condition would have been larger than the delay had it not been for the 13 excessive and unreasonable float usage in violation of the sharing concept 14 required by this Specification. 15 16 E_ Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall be only for conformance with 17 the information given in the Contract Documents and shall not extend to the 18 means, methods, sequences and techniques or procedures of construction or to 19 safety precautions or programs incident thereto. Engineer's review of the 20 schedule submittals will be predicated on a Contractor's stamp of approval 21 signed off by Contractor. Contractor's stamp of approval on any schedule 22 submittals shall constitute a representation to Owner and Engineer that 23 Contractor, has either determined or verified all data on the submittal, or 24 assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor and his 25 subcontractors and suppliers have reviewed and coordinated the sequences 26 shown in the submittal with the requirements of the work under the Contract 27 Documents. 28 29 2.02 SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS 30 31 A. Graphic network diagrams shall be on a time - scaled precedence network format. 32 The graphic network diagram shall include the following format: 33 34 1. Description of each activity, or restraint, shall be brief but convey the 35 scope of work described. 36 37 2. Activities shall identify all items of work that must be accomplished to 38 achieve Substantial Completion, or any interim substantial completion, 39 such as the major disciplines of work; items pertaining to the approval of 40 regulatory agencies; contractor's time required for submittals, fabrication 41 and deliveries; the time required by Engineer to review all submittals as 42 set forth in the Contract Documents; items of work required of Owner to 43 support pre - operational and start-up testing; time required for the 44 relocation of utilities. Activities shall also identify interface milestones with 45 the work of other contract work under separate contracts with Owner. 46 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -3 04/26/11 1 3. Any activities not shown on the graphic network diagram shall be 2 considered to have no effect on the Contractor's ability to achieve 3 Substantial Completion, or any interim substantial completion, within the 4 Contract Time. Any delays to activities that do not appear in the 5 concurred detailed schedule shall give rise only to non - prejudicial delays. 6 Attempts to impose after - the -fact logic constraints where none existed 7 previously to justify time extensions will not be permitted. 8 9 4. Activity durations shall be in whole working days. 10 11 5. Graphic diagrams shall be time - scaled and sequenced by work areas. 12 The Diagram of Activities shall show numerical values for total float and 13 be shown on their early schedules. The diagram shall be neat and legible 14 and submitted on sheets no larger than 24 inches by 36 inches on a 15 medium suitable for reproduction. 16 17 B. Printout reports shall contain the following data for each activity or restraint: 18 19 1. Activity identification, activity description, activity duration, activity 20 man -days, computed or specified early start date, computed early finish 21 date, computed late start date, computed or specified late finish date, and 22 total float and free float. 23 24 2. Five separate reports shall be provided, including all activities and 25 restraints, and shall be submitted monthly as follows: 26 27 a. Activity, sort by early start dates in order of ascending numbers. 28 b. Activity, sort by department. 29 c. Float report, in order of ascending total float values. 30 d. Successor /predecessor report. 31 32 PART 3 - EXECUTION 33 34 3.01 DETAILED SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL 35 36 A. Submittal shall include a time - scaled graphic diagram showing all Contract 37 activities, computer printout reports, and a supporting narrative. The initial 38 Detailed Schedule submittal shall be delivered within 10 calendar days after the 39 Notice to Proceed, and shall use the Notice to Proceed as the "data date ". Upon 40 receipt of Engineer's comments, Contractor shall meet with Engineer and 41 discuss an appraisal and evaluation of the proposed work plan. Necessary 42 revisions resulting from this review shall be made by Contractor and the detailed 43 schedule resubmitted within 15 calendar days after the meeting. The re- 44 submittal, if agreed to by the Owner, and unless subsequently changed with the 45 concurrence of or at the direction of Owner, shall be the work plan to be used by 46 the Contractor for planning, scheduling, managing and executing the work. If CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Contractor fails to provide an acceptable Detailed Schedule submittal, he will be 2 deemed not to have provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, 3 which will further constitute reasons for refusing to recommend payment. 4 5 B. The graphic diagram shall be formatted in accordance with Article 2.02(A) 6 above. The diagram shall include (1) all detailed activities grouped by major 7 areas of work. The critical path activities shall be identified, including critical 8 paths for interim dates, if applicable, by clearly highlighting the path on the 9 graphics diagram. 10 11 C. This submittal shall include five copies of the graphic diagram, the printout 12 reports and the narrative, in accordance with Article 2.02 of these scheduling 13 requirements. 14 15 D. The narrative shall include sufficient data to explain the basis of Contractor's 16 determination of durations, describe the contract conditions and restraints 17 plugged into the schedule, and provide a "what -if' analysis pertaining to potential 18 problems and practical steps to mitigate them. Should Engineer require 19 additional data, this information shall be supplied by Contractor within ten 20 calendar days. 21 22 3.02 MONTHLY STATUS REPORTS 23 24 A. Beginning with the first month, and every month thereafter, Contractor shall 25 submit to Engineer, with each Application for Payment, a Monthly Status Report 26 (based on the Detailed Schedule) with data as of the last day of the pay period. 27 The monthly Status Report shall include a revised copy of the currently accepted 28 graphic diagram, computer printouts and a narrative. The Monthly Status Report 29 will be reviewed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall address the Engineer's 30 comments in the subsequent Monthly Status Report. If Contractor fails to 31 provide acceptable Monthly Status Reports, he will be deemed not to have 32 provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, which will be reason 33 for refusing to recommend progress payments. 34 35 B. The revised diagram shall show, for the currently accepted detailed diagram, 36 percentages of completion for all activities, actual start and finish dates, and 37 remaining durations, as appropriate. Activities not previously included in the 38 currently accepted detailed schedule shall be added, except that contractual 39 dates will not be changed except by Change Order. Review of a revised 40 diagram by the Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with the 41 time frames, duration, or sequencing for such added activities; instead the 42 corresponding data as ultimately incorporated into an appropriate change order 43 shall govern. 44 45 C. The narrative shall include the information shown in the following outline in a 46 narrative form: CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -5 04/26/11 1 2 1. Construction progress (refer to activity number in the Detailed Schedule) 3 including: 4 5 a. Activities completed this reporting period; 6 b. Activities in progress this reporting period; 7 c. Activities scheduled to commence next reporting period. 8 9 2. Description of problem areas 10 11 3. Current and anticipated delays 12 13 a. Cause of the delay; 14 b. Corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the delay; 15 c. Impact of the delay on other activities, on milestones, and on 16 completion dates. 17 18 4. Changes in construction sequence 19 20 5. Pending items and status thereof 21 22 a. Permits 23 b. Change Orders 24 c. Time extensions 25 d. Other 26 27 6. Contract completion date status 28 29 a. Ahead of schedule and number of days 30 b. Behind schedule and number of days 31 32 3.03 REVISIONS 33 34 A. All revised Detailed Schedule submittals shall be in the same form and detail as 35 the initial submittal and shall be accompanied by an explanation of the reasons 36 for such revisions, all of which shall be subject to review by Engineer. The 37 revision shall incorporate all previously made changes to reflect current as -built 38 conditions. Minor changes to the submittal may be reviewed at monthly 39 meetings. Changes to activities having adequate float shall be considered a 40 minor change. 41 42 B. A revised detailed work plan submittal shall be submitted for review, when 43 required by Engineer, for one of the following reasons: 44 45 1. Owner or Engineer directs a change that affects the date(s) specified in 46 the Agreement or alters the length of a critical path. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 2 2. Contractor elects to change any sequence of activities so as to affect a 3 critical path of the currently accepted detailed schedule documents. 4 5 C. If, prior to agreement on an equitable adjustment to the Contract Time, Engineer 6 requires revisions to the Detailed Schedule in order to evaluate planned 7 progress, Contractor shall provide an interim revised submittal for review with 8 change effect(s) incorporated as directed. Approved interim revisions to the 9 documents will be incorporated during the first subsequent Monthly Status 10 Report. 11 12 3.04 START -UP SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS 13 14 A. At least 90 calendar days prior to the date of Substantial Completion, Contractor 15 shall submit a time - scaled (days after notice to proceed) graphic diagram 16 detailing the work to take place in the period between 60 days prior to 17 Substantial Completion, together with a supporting narrative. Engineer shall 18 respond within 10 calendar days after receipt of the submittal. Upon receipt of 19 Engineer's comments, Contractor shall make the necessary revisions and 20 submit the revised schedule within ten calendar days. If Contractor fails to 21 provide acceptable Start-up Schedule Submittals, he will be deemed not to have 22 provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, which will be reason 23 for refusing to recommend payment. 24 25 B. The Start-up Schedule may not be combined with the Detailed Schedule. The 26 Start -up Schedule is intended to show much greater detail than the. Detailed 27 Schedule for start-up activities. Typical information required includes, but is not 28 limited to, the timing of vendor representatives, pre -op testing, individual 29 equipment start-ups, Owner's training, and performance certification testing. 30 31 C. The graphic diagram shall use the currently accepted Detailed Schedule for 32 those activities completed ahead of the last 60 calendar days prior to Substantial 33 Completion, and detailed activities for the remaining 60 -day period within the 34 time frames outlined in the currently accepted Detailed Schedule. 35 36 D. Contractor will be required to continue the requirement for monthly reports, as 37 outlined in Articles 3.03 and 3.04 above. In preparing these reports, Contractor 38 must assure that the Detailed Schedule is consistent with the progress noted in 39 the Start-up Schedule. 40 41 E. In addition, Contractor will be required to submit a revised copy of the start-up 42 graphic diagram on a monthly basis with a start-up narrative. This revised 43 diagram shall highlight percentages of completion, actual start and finish dates, 44 and remaining durations as applicable. Activities not previously included in the 45 accepted detailed work plan shall be added in these submittals, except that 46 contractual dates shall not be changed except by Change Order. Reviews of CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -7 04/26/11 1 these submittals by Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with 2 the time frames, durations or sequence of work for each added activity. 3 4 3.05 CONSTRUCTION PERIOD 5 6 A. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly progress evaluation 7 and updated schedule data that any milestone and /or Contract completion date 8 will not be met, the Contractor shall take appropriate action to bring the work 9 back on schedule. Actions could include: 10 11 1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as to 12 substantially eliminate the backlog of work; 13 14 2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per work day, work 15 days per week, or the amount of construction equipment, or any 16 combination of the foregoing sufficient to substantially eliminate the 17 backlog of work; and 18 19 3. Reschedule work items to achieve concurrency of accomplishment. 20 21 B. The addition of equipment or construction forces, increasing the working hours 22 or any other method, manner, or procedure to return to the current Detailed 23 Schedule shall be at the Contractor's own cost and shall not be considered 24 justification for a Change Order or treated as an acceleration order. 25 26 27 28 END SECTION CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -8 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 e 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01340 2 3 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review such working drawings, 10 shop drawings, test reports and data on materials and equipment (hereinafter 11 in this Section called data), and material samples (hereinafter in this Section 12 called samples) as are required for the proper control of work, including but 13 not limited to those working drawings, shop drawings, data and samples for 14 materials and equipment specified elsewhere in the Specifications and in the 15 Contract Drawings. 16 17 B. The Contractor shall note that there are specific submittal requirements in 18 other sections of these Specifications. 19 20 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS 21 22 A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "shop drawings" shall be 23 considered to mean Contractor's Drawings for material and equipment that will 24 become an integral part of the Project. These drawings shall be complete and 25 detailed. Shop drawings shall consist of fabrication, erection and setting 26 drawings and schedule drawings, manufacturer's scale drawings, bills of 27 material, wiring and control diagrams, and inspection and test reports including 28 performance curves and certifications as applicable to the Work. 29 30 B. All details on shop drawings submitted for review shall show clearly the 31 elevations of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure 32 and /or equipment, and where correct fabrication of the work depends upon 33 field measurements, such measurements shall be made and noted on the 34 shop drawings before being submitted for review. 35 36 C. See Shop Drawing Schedule requirements in Subparagraph 1.07 37 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY. 38 39 1.03 PRODUCT DATA 40 41 A. Product data as specified in individual sections, include, but are not 42 necessarily limited to, standard prepared data for manufactured products 43 (sometimes referred to as catalog data), such as the manufacturers product 44 specification and installation instructions, availability of colors and patterns, 45 manufacturer's printed statements of compliances and applicability, roughing - 46 in diagrams and templates, catalog cuts, product photographs, standard wiring SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -1 04/26/11 1 diagrams, printed performance curves and operational -range diagrams, 2 production or quality control inspection and test reports and certifications, mill 3 reports, product operating and maintenance instructions and recommended 4 spare -parts listing storage instructions, and printed product warranties, as 5 applicable to the work. 6 7 1.04 WORKING DRAWINGS 8 9 A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "working drawings" shall be 10 considered to mean the Contractor's Drawings for temporary structures such 11 as temporary bulkheads, support of open cut excavation, support of utilities, 12 ground water control systems, forming and falsework; for underpinning; and 13 for such other work as may be required for construction but does not become 14 an integral part of the Project. 15 16 B. Working drawings shall be signed and sealed by a registered Professional 17 Engineer, currently licensed to practice in the State and shall convey, or be 18 accompanied by, calculations or other sufficient information to completely 19 explain the structure, machine, or system described and its intended manner 20 of use. Prior to commencing such work, working drawings must have been 21 reviewed without specific exceptions by the Engineer. Such review will be for 22 general conformance and will not relieve the Contractor in any way from his 23 responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. All 24 risks of error are assumed by the Contractor. The Owner and Engineer shall 25 have no responsibility for errors on the working drawings or the finished work. 26 27 1.05 SAMPLES 28 29 A. The Contractor shall furnish, for review of the Engineer, samples required by 30 the Contract Documents or requested by the Engineer. Samples shall be 31 delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed and in quantities and sizes 32 as specified. A minimum of two samples of each item shall be submitted 33 unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall prepay all shipping charges 34 on samples. Materials or equipment for which samples are required shall not 35 be used in work until reviewed by the Engineer. 36 37 B. Samples specified in individual sections, include, but are not necessarily 38 limited to, physical examples of the work such as sections of manufactured or 39 fabricated work, small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of 40 repetitively -used products, color /texture /pattern swatches and range sets, 41 specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic symbols, and units of work 42 to be used by the Engineer or Owner for independent inspection and testing, 43 as applicable to the Work. 44 45 C. The Contractor shall prepare a transmittal letter for each shipment of sample, 46 shall enclose a copy of this letter with the shipment, and shall send a copy of SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 this letter to the Engineer. Review of a sample shall be only for the 2 characteristics or use named in such review and shall not be construed to 3 change or modify any Contract requirements. 4 5 1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 6 7 A. The Contractor shall review, approve, and submit, with reasonable 8 promptness and in such sequence, so as to cause no delay in the Contract 9 Work or in the Work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all shop 10 drawings, product data, working drawings and samples required by the 11 Contract Documents. 12 13 B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer five (5) copies of all shop 14 drawings, plus the number of copies he wants returned. The Engineer will 15 review the submittal and return to the Contractor marked -up copies of the 16 shop drawings with the appropriate review comments. 17 18 C. Shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples shall be 19 furnished with the following information: 20 21 1. Number and title of the drawing. 22 2. Date of drawing or revision. 23 3. Name of project building, facility or system. 24 4. Name of contractor, subcontractor, and manufacturer submitting 25 drawing. 26 5. Clear identification of contents, location of the work, and the sheet 27 numbers where the product is found in the contract drawings. 28 6. Contractor Certification Statement. 29 7. Submittal Identification Number. 30 8. Contract Drawing Number Reference. 31 9. Statement indicating any deviations from the Contract Documents. 32 33 D. All items specified are not necessarily intended to be a manufacturer's 34 standard product. Variations from specified items will be considered on an "or 35 equal" basis. If submittals show variations from Contract requirements 36 because of standard shop practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall 37 describe such variations in his letter of transmittal and on the shop drawings 38 along with notification of his intent to seek contract adjustment. If acceptable, 39 proper adjustment in the Contract shall be implemented where appropriate. If 40 the Contractor fails to describe such variations he shall not be relieved of the 41 responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even 42 though such drawings have been reviewed. Variations submitted but not 43 described may be cause for rejection. Any variations initiated by the 44 Contractor will not be considered as an addition to the scope of work unless 45 specifically noted and then approved as such in writing by the Engineer. 46 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -3 04/26/11 1 E. Data on materials and equipment shall include materials and equipment lists 2 giving, for each item thereon, the name and location of the supplier or 3 manufacturer, trade name, catalog reference, material, size, finish and all 4 other pertinent data. 5 6 F For all mechanical and electrical equipment, the Contractor shall provide a 7 single list that includes the equipment name, and address and telephone 8 number of the manufacturer's representative and service company, so that 9 service and /or spare parts can be readily obtained. In addition, a maintenance 10 and lubrication schedule for each piece of equipment shall be submitted as 11 specified in Section 01730. 12 13 G. The Contractor shall use the color "green" to make his remarks on the 14 Submittals. Only the Engineer will utilize the color "red" in marking submittals. 15 16 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY 17 18 A. It is the duty of the Contractor to check, and coordinate with the work of all 19 trades, all drawings, data, schedules and samples prepared by or for him 20 before submitting them to the Engineer for review. Each copy of every 21 drawing or data sheet 11 "x17" and larger shall bear Contractor's stamp 22 showing that they have been so checked and approved. Drawings or data 23 sheets 11"x17" and smaller shall be bound together in an orderly fashion and 24 bear the Contractor's stamp on the cover sheet. The cover sheet shall fully 25 describe the packaged data and include a list of all sheet numbers within the 26 package. Shop drawings submitted to the Engineer without the Contractor's 27 stamp will be returned to the Contractor, without review, at the Engineer's 28 option. 29 30 B. The Contractor shall review shop drawings, product data, and samples prior to 31 submission to determine and verify the following. 32 33 1. Field measurements. 34 35 2. Field construction criteria. 36 37 3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers and similar data. 38 39 4. Conformance with Specifications. 40 41 C. Shop drawings shall indicate any deviations in the submittal from the 42 requirements of the Contract Documents. 43 44 D. At a time decided upon at the pre - construction meeting the Contractor shall 45 furnish the Engineer a Shop Drawing schedule fixing the respective dates for 46 the initial submission of shop and working drawings, the beginning of SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 manufacture, testing and installation of materials, supplies and equipment. 2 This schedule shall be provided as a separate entity and indicate those 3 submittals that are critical to the progress schedule. The Contractor shall 4 prepare and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performing the 5 related work or other applicable activities, or within the time specified in the 6 individual work sections of the Specifications, so that the installation will not be 7 delayed by processing times including disapproval and resubmittal (if 8 required), coordination with other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, 9 delivery, and similar sequenced activities. No extension of time will be 10 authorized because of the Contractor's failure to transmit complete and 11 acceptable submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work. 12 13 E. The Contractor shall not begin any work affected by a submittal returned, 14 "Rejected. Revise as indicated and resubmit ". Before starting this work, all 15 revisions must be corrected by the Contractor. After resubmittal they will be 16 reviewed and returned to him by the Engineer. If returned marked, "No 17 exceptions noted" or "Exceptions as noted ", then the Contractor may begin 18 this work. Any corrections made to the shop drawings are to be followed 19 without exception. 20 21 F The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all shop drawings and data 22 sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to provide no less than 23 twenty -one (21) calendar days for Engineer's review from the time the 24 Engineer receives them. 25 26 G. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all cost of damages that may 27 result from the ordering of any material or from proceeding with any part of 28 work prior to review by the Engineer of the necessary shop drawings. 29 30 H. All shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples submitted by 31 subcontractors for review shall be sent directly to the Contractor for checking. 32 The Contractor shall be responsible for their submission according to the 33 approved shop drawing schedule so as to prevent delays in delivery of 34 materials and project completion. 35 36 I. The Contractor shall check all subcontractor's shop drawings, product data, 37 working drawings and samples regarding measurements, size of members, 38 materials, and details to satisfy himself that they are in conformance to the 39 Contract Documents. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in 40 error shall be returned to the subcontractors for correction before submission 41 to the Engineer. 42 43 1.08 ENGINEER'S REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING 44 DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 45 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -5 04/26/11 A. The Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept and Contract Documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications or departures thereof. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for coordinating the work with all other associated work and trades, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for performing work in a safe manner. B. The review of shop drawings, data, and samples will be general. The review shall not be construed as: 1. Permitting any departure from the Contract Documents; 2. Relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including details, dimensions, and materials; or, 3. Approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except as otherwise provided herein. C. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations per subparagraph 1.06D show a departure from the Contract Documents that Engineer finds to be in the interest of the Owner and to be so minor as not to involve a change in Contract Price or time for performance, the Engineer may return the reviewed drawings without noting an exception. D. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor under one of the following: "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" is assigned when there are no notations or comments on the submittal. When returned under this code the Contractor may release the equipment and /or material for manufacture. "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" is assigned when notations or comments have been made on the submittal pointing out minor discrepancies as compared with the Contract Documents. Resubmittal or confirmation is not necessary prior to release for manufacturing. "AMEND - RESUBMIT." This combination of codes is assigned when a resubmittal is required by the Contractor. The Contractor may release that portion of the equipment or material for manufacture for which there were no corrections noted; however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final submittal. This resubmittal is to address the omissions and /or nonconforming items that were noted. "REJECTED - RESUBMIT." This combination of codes is assigned when the submittal is in noncompliance with the Contract Documents and must be corrected and the entire package resubmitted. This code generally means SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -6 04/26/11 1 that the equipment or material cannot be released for manufacture unless the 2 Contractor takes full responsibility for providing the submitted items in 3 accordance with Contract Documents. 4 5 "FOR YOUR INFORMATION" is assigned when the package provides 6 information of a general nature that may or may not require a response. 7 8 E. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. On 9 resubmittals the Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing, on the 10 letter of transmittal and on resubmitted shop drawings by use of revision 11 triangles or other similar methods, to revisions other than the corrections 12 requested by the Engineer on previous submissions. Any such revisions that 13 are not clearly identified shall be made at the risk of the Contractor. The 14 Contractor shall make corrections to any work done because of this type 15 revision that is not in accordance to the Contract Documents as may be 16 required by the Engineer. 17 18 F If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to 19 constitute a change to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give 20 written notice thereof to the Engineer at least seven (7) working days prior to 21 release for manufacture. 22 23 G. The Engineer will review a submittal /resubmittal a maximum of two (2) times 24 after which cost of review will be borne by the Contractor. The cost of 25 engineering shall be as specified in Section 01300 or, if not specified therein, 26 shall be equal to the Engineer's charges to the Owner under the terms of the 27 Engineer's agreement with the Owner. 28 29 H. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the 30 Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the construction in accordance 31 therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written 32 instruction from the Engineer. 33 34 I. Partial submittals may not be reviewed. The Engineer will be the only judge 35 as to the completeness of a submittal. Submittals not complete will be 36 returned to the Contractor. The Engineer may at his option provide a list or 37 mark the submittal directing the Contractor to the areas that are incomplete. 38 39 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 40 41 2.01. SHOP DRAWINGS 42 43 Final approved shop drawings shall be submitted in electronic format. 44 45 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 46 47 END OF SECTION SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -7 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -8 04/26/11 1 SECTION 01385 2 3 COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 DESCRIPTION 8 9 A. Scope 10 11 The Contractor shall prepare color audio /video DVDs of all work areas within 12 20 days of the Notice to Proceed. 13 14 B. Requirements Included 15 16 Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color 17 audio /video DVD recording taken of the entire Project, including access to the 18 site of the work. Streets, easements, rights -of way, lots or construction sites 19 within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of pre - construction 20 conditions. One copy of the DVD recordings and video log shall be submitted 21 to the Owner. The Engineer will designate those areas, if any, to be omitted 22 from or added to the audio- visual coverage. All DVDs and written records 23 shall become the property of the Owner. 24 25 C. Scheduling 26 27 No construction shall begin prior to review and approval of the DVDs covering 28 the Project construction area(s) by the Owner. The Owner will have the 29 authority to reject all or any portion of video DVD not conforming to 30 specifications and order that it be redone at no additional charge. The 31 Contractor shall reschedule unacceptable coverage within seven days after 32 being notified. 33 34 D. Videographer Qualifications 35 36 The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer 37 known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of preconstruction 38 color audio -video DVD documentation. The videographer, through the 39 Contractor, shall furnish to the Engineer a list of all equipment to be used for 40 the audio -video recording, i.e., manufacturer's name, model number, 41 specifications and other pertinent information. 42 43 Additional information to be furnished by the videographer is the names and 44 addresses of two references that the videographer has performed color audio - 45 video recording on projects of a similar nature within the last 12 months. 46 Engineer's approval of the selected videographer is required prior to taking COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385 -1 04/26/11 1 first audio -video DVD. 2 3 E. Equipment 4 5 The Contractor shall finish all equipment, accessories, materials and labor to 6 perform this service. The total audio -video system shall reproduce bright, 7 sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, 8 tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the 9 recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper 10 volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some 11 instances, audio -video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by 12 conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 13 The color video camera used in the recording shall be of Industrial Grade and 14 shall have EIA Standard NTSC type color - 1.0V 75 OHMS. Video output from 15 camera shall be capable of horizontal resolution of 350 lines at center and 16 utilize a minimum of 8:1 zoom with a 2/3 Newvicon tube or CCD pick-up 17 element for optimum color imagery plus minimum lag through of one foot 18 candle. The recording shall be made with Industrial Grade recorder. The 19 recordings shall be high resolution, extended still frame capable, in color. The 20 recorded video DVDs shall be compatible for playback with any American TV 21 Standard DVD player. 22 23 F Recorded Information, Audio 24 25 Each DVD shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by 26 the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. 27 Accompanying the video recording of each video DVD shall be a 28 corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio 29 recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or 30 aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, 31 differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being 32 shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be 33 free from any conversations. 34 35 G. Recorded Information, Video 36 37 All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information 38 to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain 39 the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the actual hour, 40 minutes and seconds of the day. Additional information shall be displayed 41 periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project 42 name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This 43 transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of 44 the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom -out rates shall be sufficiently 45 controlled such that recorded objects are clearly viewed during video DVD 46 playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Tens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and 2 electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture 3 quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 4 5 H. Viewer Orientation 6 7 The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer 8 orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and 9 business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed 10 construction location will not be readily apparent to the video DVD viewer, 11 highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion 12 as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When 13 conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording 14 system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall 15 not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of 16 the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 17 18 I. Lighting 19 20 All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No recording shall be 21 done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when 22 sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording 23 and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 24 25 J. Speed of Travel 26 27 The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be 28 directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features 29 within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the 30 general direction of travel of any vehicle used during recording of a linear 31 project site shall not exceed 44 feet per minute. 32 33 K. Video Log /Index 34 35 All video DVDs shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified 36 by video DVD number and project title. Each video DVD shall have a log of 37 that video DVD's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of 38 coverage contained on the video DVD in terms of the names of the streets or 39 location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, 40 video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if 41 reasonably available) and the date. 42 43 L. Area of Coverage 44 45 DVD coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of 46 influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385 -3 04/26/11 1 coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, 2 curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, 3 culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc., 4 within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the 5 existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. DVD coverage shall be limited to 6 one side of the site, street, easement or right -of -way at any one time. 7 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 9 (NOT USED) 10 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION 12 13 3.01 GENERAL 14 15 Prior to requesting Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall review the pre - 16 construction video with the Owner /Engineer and identify any work needed to restore 17 the site to pre - construction conditions. 18 19 20 END OF SECTION COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01410 2 3 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Owner will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing 10 Laboratory to perform that geotechnical testing (concrete, compaction) 11 specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or specified in the 12 Specifications and may at any other time elect to have materials and 13 equipment tested for conformity with the Contract Documents. 14 15 1 _ Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution 16 of its required services. 17 18 2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's 19 obligations to perform the Work of the Contract. 20 21 B. Contractor shall perform and pay for all other testing (pressure, torque, etc.) 22 required in the specifications. 23 24 1.02 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY 25 26 A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 27 28 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract 29 Documents. 30 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 31 32 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 33 34 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 35 36 A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, to 37 Manufacturer's operations. 38 39 B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representational 40 samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. 41 42 C. Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for 43 concrete, and other materials mixes, which require control by the testing 44 laboratory. 45 TESTING AND LABORATORTY SERVICES 01410 -1 04/26/11 1 D. Materials and equipment used in the performance of work under this Contract 2 are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabrication. 3 Standard specifications for quality and workmanship are indicated in the 4 Contract Documents. The Engineer may require the Contractor to provide 5 statements or certificates from the manufacturers and fabricators that the 6 materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in 7 full accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship 8 indicated in the Contract Documents. All costs of this testing and providing 9 statements and certificates shall be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor, 10 and no extra charge to the Owner shall be allowed on account of such testing 11 and certification, 12 13 E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 14 15 1. To provide access to work to be tested. 16 17 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the 18 product to be tested. 19 20 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 21 22 4. For storage and curing of test samples. 23 24 F The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the laboratory sufficiently in 25 advance (minimum 48 hours) of operations to allow for laboratory assignment 26 of personnel and scheduling of tests. 27 28 1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, 29 reimburse Owner for laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred 30 due to Contractor's negligence. 31 32 G. Employ and pay for the services of the same or a separate, equally qualified 33 independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and 34 testing required for the Contractor's convenience and as approved by the 35 Engineer. 36 37 H. If the test results indicate the material or equipment complies with the Contract 38 Documents, the Owner shall pay for the cost of the testing laboratory. If the 39 tests and any subsequent retests indicate the materials and equipment fail to 40 meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor may pay for 41 the laboratory costs directly to the testing firm or the total of such costs shall 42 be deducted from any payments due the Contractor. 43 44 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 45 46 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) TESTING AND LABORATORTY SERVICES 01410 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 END OF SECTION TESTING AND LABORATORTY SERVICES 01410 -3 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TESTING AND LABORATORTY SERVICES 01410 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01500 2 3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SANITARY FACILITIES 8 9 A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary sanitary facilities at the site, as 10 provided herein, for the needs of all construction workers and others 11 performing work or furnishing services on the Project. 12 13 B. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained 14 throughout the construction period, and obscured from public view to the 15 greatest practical extent. If toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at 16 least one toilet will be furnished for each 20 persons. The Contractor shall 17 enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the site. 18 19 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC 20 21 A. Contractor shall conduct his work to interfere as little as possible with public 22 travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Whenever it is necessary to cross, 23 obstruct, or close roads, driveways and walks, whether public or private, 24 Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or 25 other temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and private 26 travel, and shall give reasonable notice to owners of private drives before 27 interfering with them. Driveway access to commercial properties shall be 28 maintained at all times. Such maintenance of traffic shall not be required 29 when Contractor has obtained permission from the owner and tenant of private 30 property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over public property involved, 31 to obstruct traffic at the designated point. At all times, the Contractor shall 32 perform the Work in accordance with the permits and easement agreements. 33 34 B. Traffic control shall be in accordance with DOT Roadway and Traffic Design 35 Standards for Traffic Control Through Work Zones. All local Traffic 36 Regulations shall be followed. 37 38 C. In making open -cut street crossings, the Contractor shall not block more than 39 one -half of the street at a time. Whenever possible, Contractor shall widen the 40 shoulder on the opposite side to facilitate traffic flow. Temporary surfacing 41 shall be provided as necessary on shoulders. 42 43 1.03 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS 44 45 A. All streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares that are closed to 46 traffic shall be protected by effective barricades on which shall be placed TEMPORARY FACILITES 01500 -1 04/26/11 1 acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest 2 intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section. 3 4 B. All open trenches and other excavations shall have suitable barricades, signs, 5 and lights to provide adequate protection to the public. Obstructions such as 6 material piles and equipment shall be provided with similar warning signs and 7 lights. Contractor shall be responsible for public safety within the construction 8 area. 9 10 C. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated with warning lights from 11 sunset to sunrise. Material storage and conduct of the Work on or alongside 12 public streets and highways shall cause the minimum obstruction and 13 inconvenience to the traveling public. All barricades, signs, lights and other 14 protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity with 15 applicable statutory requirements and, where within railroad and highway 16 rights -of -way, as required by the authority having jurisdiction thereof. 17 18 D. Open trenches and other excavations shall not be left open over weekends 19 and holidays, or greater than one calendar day, except during extreme 20 weather conditions. 21 22 1.04 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY 23 24 A. Contractor shall protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain all underground 25 pipes, conduits, drains, and other underground construction uncovered or 26 otherwise affected by his construction operations. All pavement, surfacing, 27 driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, utility poles, guy wires, fences, and other 28 surface structures affected by construction operations, together with all sod 29 and shrubs in yards and parking areas, shall be restored to their original 30 condition, whether within or outside the easement. All replacements shall be 31 made with new materials. 32 33 1.05 PARKING 34 35 A. Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all 36 construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services in 37 connection with the Project, as required to avoid any need for parking personal 38 vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic, Owner's operations, or 39 construction activities, where indicated on the drawings or directed by the 40 Engineer. 41 42 1.06 DUST CONTROL 43 44 A. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust. 45 Earth surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water or by 46 application of a chemical dust suppressant. Dusty materials in piles or in TEMPORARY FACILITES 01500 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 transit shall be covered when practicable to prevent blowing. 2 3 B. Buildings or operating facilities that may be adversely affected by dust shall be 4 adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors, 5 instrument panels or similar equipment, shall be protected by suitable dust 6 screens. Proper ventilation shall be included with dust screens. 7 8 1.07 SWEEPING 9 10 A. The Contractor shall sweep loose material from all pavement at the end of 11 each workday. 12 13 1.08 POLLUTION CONTROL 14 15 A. Contractor shall prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary 16 wastes, sediment, debris and other substances resulting from construction 17 activities. No sanitary wastes will be permitted to enter any drain or 18 watercourse other than sanitary sewers. No sediment, debris or other 19 substance will be permitted to enter sanitary sewers and reasonable measures 20 will be taken to prevent such materials form entering any drain or watercourse. 21 22 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) 23 24 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 25 26 27 28 END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITES 01500 -3 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TEMPORARY FACILITES 01500 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01505 2 3 MOBILIZATION 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 DEFINITION AND SCOPE 8 9 A. Mobilization shall include the obtaining of all permits, insurance, and bonds; 10 moving onto the site of all plant and equipment; furnishing and erecting plants, 11 temporary facilities, and other construction facilities; all as required for the 12 proper performance and completion of the Work. Mobilization shall include, 13 but not be limited to, the following principal items: 14 15 1. Move onto the site all plant and equipment required for first month's 16 operations. 17 18 2. Install temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities. 19 20 3. Establish fire protection plan and safety program. 21 22 4. Secure construction water supply. 23 24 5. Provide on -site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities. 25 26 6. Arrange for and erect Contractor's work and storage yard and 27 employees' parking facilities. 28 29 7 Submit all required insurance certificates and bonds. 30 31 8. Obtain all required permits. 32 33 9. Post all OSHA, Environmental Protection Agency, Department of Labor, 34 and all other required notices. 35 36 10. Have superintendent at the job site full time. 37 38 11. Submit a detailed construction schedule acceptable to the Engineer. 39 40 12. If required, erect project construction sign(s). 41 42 13. Submit a finalized schedule of values of the Work acceptable to the 43 Owner. 44 45 14. Submit a finalized schedule of submittals. 46 MOBILIZATION 01505 -1 04/26/11 1 1 15. Construct, maintain, and restore temporary access and haul roads. 2 3 16_ Provide a continuous color audio - videotape recording of existing 4 conditions. 5 6 PART 2 --- PRODUCT (Not Used) 7 8 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 9 10 11 12 END OF SECTION MOBILIZATION 01505 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01510 2 3 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required for construction, 10 remove on completion of Work. 11 12 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 13 14 A. Comply with National Electric Code. 15 16 B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and regulations and with utility 17 company requirements. 18 19 C. Comply with Pinellas County Health Department Regulations. 20 21 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 22 23 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL 24 25 A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the 26 required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate 27 requirements of applicable codes and standards. 28 29 2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING 30 31 A. Arrange with utility company and Owner to provide service required for power 32 and lighting, and pay all costs for service and for power used in the 33 construction, testing and trial operation prior to final acceptance of the work by 34 the Owner. All cost associated with obtaining temporary and permanent 35 power shall be at Contractor expense. 36 37 B. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is not 38 adequate for work, and for areas accessible to the public. 39 40 2.03 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE 41 42 A. Arrange with local telephone service- company to provide direct line telephone 43 service at the construction site for the use by personnel and employees. 44 45 B. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges. 46 TEMPORARY UTILITES 01510 -1 04/26/11 1 C. In lieu of direct telephone service, provide cellular phone service for site 2 superintendent(s). 3 4 2.04 TEMPORARY WATER 5 6 A. The Contractor shall install at each connection to the local water supply 7 system a backflow preventer and meter meeting local utility requirements. 8 9 B, The Contractor shall pay for all temporary water facilities, including the 10 backflow preventers and meters, and the actual amount of water used during 11 construction. 12 13 2.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES 14 15 A. Provide sanitary facilities in compliance with laws and regulations. 16 17 B, Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures. 18 19 PART 3 - EXECUTION 20 21 3.01 GENERAL 22 23 A. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service. 24 25 B. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires. 26 27 C. Allow the Owner and Engineer reasonable use of all temporary utilities. 28 29 3.02 REMOVAL 30 31 A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no 32 longer required as determined by the Engineer. 33 34 B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of 35 temporary facilities. 36 37 38 END OF SECTION TEMPORARY UTILITES 01510 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01600 2 3 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 Material and equipment incorporated into the Work: 10 11 A. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. 12 13 B. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved 14 in writing by the Engineer. 15 16 C. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: 17 18 1. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and 19 shop practices. 20 21 2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, 22 to be interchangeable. 23 24 3. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same 25 manufacturer. 26 27 4. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. 28 29 5. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall 30 be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. 31 32 D. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is 33 designed or is specified. 34 35 1.02 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS 36 37 A. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the 38 inspection and approval of the Engineer. No material shall be delivered to the 39 work without prior review of the Engineer. 40 41 B. Facilities and labor for handling and inspection of all materials and equipment 42 shall be furnished by the Contractor. If the Engineer requires, either prior to 43 beginning or during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall submit 44 samples of materials for such special tests as may be necessary to demon - 45 strafe that they conform to the specifications. Such samples shall be 46 furnished, stored, packed, and shipped as directed at the Contractor's MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -1 04/26/11 1 expense. Except as otherwise noted, the Owner will make arrangements for 2 and pay for the tests. 3 4 C. The Contractor shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit 5 consideration and review before materials are necessary for incorporation in 6 the work. Any delay resulting from the Contractor's failure to submit samples 7 or data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claims against the Owner or 8 the Engineer_ 9 10 D. The materials and equipment used on the work shall correspond to the 11 approved samples or other data previously submitted to the Engineer for 12 review. 13 14 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION 15 16 A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with 17 manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such 18 instructions to parties involved in the installation, including four copies to the 19 Engineer. 20 21 1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during 22 installation and until completion. 23 24 B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord 25 with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. 26 27 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with 28 manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for further 29 instructions. 30 31 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. 32 33 C. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any 34 preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or 35 exempted by Contract Documents. 36 37 1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING 38 39 A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accord with construction schedules, 40 coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. 41 42 1. Deliver Products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original 43 containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 44 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -2 04/26/11 1 I1 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with 2 requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that 1 3 Products are properly protected and undamaged. 4 5 B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent I6 soiling or damage to Products or packaging. 7 8 1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION I 9 10 A. The Contractor shall furnish a covered, weather - protected storage structure 11 providing a clean, dry, non - corrosive environment for all mechanical 12 equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation 13 equipment, and special equipment to be incorporated into this project. I 14 Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for 15 storage" of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection of 16 heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. The Contractor shall I 17 furnish a copy of the manufacturer's instructions for storage to the Engineer 18 prior to storage of all equipment and materials. Corroded, damaged or 19 deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the I20 project. Equipment and materials not properly stored will not be included in a 21 payment estimate. 22 I23 B. Store Products in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and 24 labels intact and legible. 25 I26 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather tight 27 enclosures. 28 29 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by 30 manufacturer's instructions. 31 I32 3. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, 33 prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to 34 deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate I35 ventilation to avoid condensation. 36 37 4. Store loose granular materials in a well- drained area on solid surfaces I38 to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 39 40 C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled 41 and stored by the Contractor before, during, and after shipment in a manner to 42 prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury, 43 theft or damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or equipment. I44 45 D. Cement, sand and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and 46 shall be kept completely dry at all times. All miscellaneous steel, and • MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -3 04/26/11 1 1 reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent 2 accumulations of dirt or grease, and in a position to prevent accumulations of 3 standing water and to minimize rusting. Precast concrete sections shall be 4 handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing 5 water, staining, chipping or cracking. Brick, block and similar masonry 6 products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce breakage, 7 chipping, cracking, and spilling to a minimum. 8 9 E. All materials that, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged as 10 to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from 11 the site of the work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the 12 damaged material or its removal. 13 14 F. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make 15 periodic inspections of stored Products to assure that Products are maintained 16 under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. 17 18 G. Protection After Installation: 19 20 1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products 21 from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. 22 Remove covering when no longer needed. 23 24 H. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment, and supplies 25 sold and delivered to the Owner under this Contract until final inspection of the 26 work and acceptance thereof by the Owner. In the event any such material, 27 equipment, and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed prior to final 28 inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall replace same without 29 additional cost to the Owner. 30 31 1. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of 32 equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written notice 33 to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all deficiencies 34 noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated 35 with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract. These costs may be 36 comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical, 37 engineering and any other costs associated with making the necessary 38 corrections. 39 40 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 41 42 A. Contractor's Options: 43 44 1. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product 45 meeting that standard. 46 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -4 04/26/11 1 I1 2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, 2 submit the products or manufacturers named in the Proposal, which 1 3 complies with the specifications. 4 5 3. For products specified by naming one or more products or I6 manufacturers and "or equal ", Contractor shall submit a request as for 7 substitutions for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. I8 9 B. Substitutions: 10 I 11 1. After the Effective Date of the Agreement, the Engineer will consider 12 written requests from Contractor for substitution of products. 13 I 14 2. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with complete 15 data, with drawings and samples as appropriate, including: 16 ' 17 a. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that 18 specified. 19 I 20 21 b. Changes required in other elements of the work because of the substitution. 22 I23 c. Effect on the construction schedule. 24 25 d. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product I26 specified. 27 28 e. Any required license fees or royalties. 29 30 f. Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement 31 materials. I32 33 3. The Engineer will be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed 34 substitution. I35 36 C. Contractor's Representation: 37 I38 1. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor: 39 40 a. Has investigated the proposed Product and determined that it is I41 equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 42 43 b. Shall provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution I44 as for the product specified. 45 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -5 04/26/11 1 1 c. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into 2 the Work, and make such other changes as may be required to 3 make the Work complete in all respects. 4 5 d. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, 6 which may subsequently become apparent. 7 1.07 SPECIAL TOOLS 8 9 A. Manufacturers of equipment and machinery shall furnish any special tools 10 (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal 11 adjustment, operations and maintenance, together with instructions for their 12 use. The Contractor shall preserve and deliver to the Owner these tools and 13 instructions in good order no later than upon completion of the Contract. 14 15 1.08 WARRANTY 16 17 A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment 18 manufacturer as specified in Section 01740. The manufacturer's warranty 19 period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's warranty. 20 21 1.09 SPARE PARTS 22 23 A. Spare parts for certain equipment have been specified in the pertinent 24 sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare 25 parts so required in an area to be designated by the Engineer. In addition, the 26 Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the 27 equipment they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, 28 and the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item 29 shall be furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. 30 31 1.10 GREASE, OIL, AND FUEL 32 33 A. All grease, oil, and fuel required for testing of equipment shall be furnished 34 with the respective equipment. The Owner shall be furnished with a year's 35 supply of required lubricants including grease and oil of the type 36 recommended by the manufacturer with each item of equipment supplied. 37 38 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and 39 intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment after initial break -in of the 40 equipment, which in no event shall be any longer than three weeks of 41 operation. 42 43 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 44 45 PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 46 END OF SECTION MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01625 2 3 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Prior to requesting issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the 10 Contractor shall perform start-up testing services as specified herein. 11 12 B. Start-up of the facilities and appurtenances will require completion of all 13 structures, installation of all equipment, and all connections to existing 14 systems. All components of the new system shall be installed as if each were 15 ready for use by the Owner for their intended purposes. The Contractor shall 16 provide a written startup plan, for approval by the Engineer, for individual 17 facilities and systems. As applicable, the startup plan shall be in accordance 18 with the construction phasing plan described in Section 01016, if provided. 19 20 C. All equipment will be tested, approved, and accepted by the Engineer prior to 21 placement of the new facilities into operation. 22 23 D. All lubricants, water, air, fuel and power necessary for initial operation and 24 tests shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 25 26 E. In addition to furnishing, delivering, installing, and testing each piece of 27 equipment, the Contractor shall provide the services of competent factory 28 certified representatives for the periods indicated in other sections of these 29 Specifications. Such representatives shall assist the Engineer by instructing 30 the operating personnel of the Owner in the maintenance and operation of the 31 equipment, conducting tests, and making recommendations for producing the 32 most efficient results. These services shall be made during the initial 33 operation of the completed facilities and be in addition to services necessary 34 during erection or to correct defective materials or workmanship during the 35 guarantee period. These representatives shall be specially trained and 36 qualified to provide installation services, adjustment, start-up, and testing work 37 and shall not be sales representatives only. The cost of such representation, 38 including subsistence and travel, shall be provided by the Contractor at no 39 additional cost to the Owner. 40 41 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 42 43 PART 3 - EXECUTION 44 45 3.01 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 46 47 A. General Requirements: START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -1 04/26/11 1 1 Successfully execute the start-up of the system and demonstrate satisfactory performance of the intended use thereof. The start-up and performance demonstration shall be successfully executed prior to the Engineer's issuance of Substantial Completion. 2. Field acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. At least thirty (30) calendar days prior to testing, Contractor shall submit details of all test procedures to the Engineer for review, comment, and approval. Test procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with Specification Section 01340. This notification shall be shown on the Progress Schedule. 3. All performance tests and inspections shall be scheduled at least ten (10) working days in advance with the Engineer. All performance tests and inspections shall be conducted during the normal work week of Monday through Friday, unless otherwise authorized, in writing, by the Engineer. 4. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during start-up systems testing and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner takes over the operation thereof. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all necessary valves, whether shown on the Drawings or not, in order to facilitate testing of pumping systems, tanks, and all other system start- up testing, at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Preparation for Systems Start-Up: 1. Upon completion of the Work and all related systems, all pipes, tanks and process systems shall be filled and flushed clean with water and hydraulically checked for leaks, cracks, and defects. All sumps, tanks, basins, chambers and wet wells that will contain water or process liquids under normal operating conditions shall also be hydraulically checked for leaks, cracks and defects. 2. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be checked to ensure that each component is in good working order and properly installed and connected. All systems shall be purged as required. All sumps, tanks, basins, chambers, wet wells, and pipelines that are hydraulically checked shall be drained and returned to their original condition once the water testing is complete. All pipelines that have been filled and flushed shall be drained clean. START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3. All instruments and controls shall be calibrated through their full 2 operational distribution range. Any other adjustments required for 3 proper operation of all instrumentation and control equipment shall be 4 made and confirmed by the specific factory authorized service 5 representative. 6 7 4. The Contractor shall work with each factory certified technician to 8 complete any remaining tasks, connections, adjustments, and 9 preparations needed to ensure proper equipment and /or system 10 operation. 11 12 5. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has 13 confirmed that all specified safety equipment has been installed and is 14 in good working order. 15 16 6. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has 17 verified that all maintenance equipment, spare parts, and approved 18 equipment Operation and Maintenance manuals have been furnished 19 as specified. 20 21 7 No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the factory certified 22 technician for that particular component has confirmed that all 23 lubricants, electrical connections, drains, fuel and exhaust systems 24 have been provided and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's 25 recommendations. 26 27 3.02 PRESSURE TESTS 28 29 A. Field pressure tests shall be made to confirm compliance with the Contract 30 Documents. The Contractor shall perform field tests as herein specified. All 31 tanks, water mains, piping and equipment shall be tested in the field in the 32 presence of the Engineer or his authorized agent. 33 34 B. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be performed in accordance with the 35 applicable sections of the American Water Works Association Standard for 36 Installation of Cast Iron /Ductile Iron Water Mains, AWWA C -600, Concrete 37 Pressure Pipe, AWWA M9, and Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride 38 (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water Mains, AWWA C -605, except as 39 herein modified. 40 41 C. The Contractor shall submit his plan for pressure testing to the Engineer for 42 review at least ten (10) days before starting the work. The Contractor shall 43 remove and adequately dispose of all blocking material and equipment after 44 completion and acceptance of the field hydrostatic test, unless otherwise 45 directed by the Engineer. Any damage to the pipe shall be repaired by the 46 Contractor. START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -3 04/26/11 1 2 D. After completion of all work and before final acceptance, a hydrostatic and 3 leakage test shall be conducted. Water required for testing new pipelines will 4 be provided by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Water mains shall 5 be tested with potable water and force mains and storm water lines shall be 6 tested with reclaimed water, if available. Where applicable, the Contractor 7 shall coordinate the development of the water supply with the pipeline work in 8 order that water will be available to meet these requirements. At no time are 9 valves on the water supply system to be operated without the prior 10 authorization of the Engineer. 11 12 E. Each newly installed pressure main shall be tested at a pressure equal 1.5 13 times the pipeline working pressure or 150 psi; whichever is greater. The 14 duration of each test shall be a minimum of two (2) hours. 15 16 F Any test pump(s), piping connections, taps, fittings, pressure gauges, 17 compressors, and all necessary components thereof which might be required 18 for the hydrostatic tests, shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional 19 cost to the Owner. 20 21 G. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves, air valves, blow -offs and joints shall be 22 carefully examined during the test, and all joints showing a visible leakage 23 shall be made tight. All defective pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and 24 accessories shall be removed from the line and replaced by the Contractor 25 with new components at no additional cost to the Owner. 26 27 H. The Contractor may backfill the trench before testing the line, but he shall 28 open up the trench at his own expense to repair any leaks. 29 30 I. All visible leaks shall be corrected regardless of the total leakage revealed by 31 the test as compared to the allowable calculated losses. All lines that fail to 32 meet the test shall be repaired and retested as necessary, until test 33 requirements are complied with. All repairs and retests shall be performed at 34 the Contractor's own expense with no additional cost to the Owner. 35 36 J. The installation will not be accepted until the leakage is equal to or less than 37 the allowable leakage as determined by the formula below: 38 39 L = SD(P)°.5 40 133,200 41 42 in which "L" equals the allowable leakage, in gallons per hour; "S" is the length 43 of the pipe tested, in feet; "D" is the nominal pipe diameter, in inches; and "P" 44 is the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square 45 inch, gauge. START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 K. All tests shall be made under the supervision of the Engineer or authorized 2 agents thereof. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor for 3 performing the above required tests; the cost of all labor, materials, lubricants, 4 fuels, power, necessary appliances, and the coordination for testing purposes 5 shall be included in the unit price or prices bid for the various items of work. 6 7 L. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a minimum of 72 hours advance 8 notice for scheduling hydrostatic and leakage tests. 9 10 3.03 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER LINES 11 12 A. Prior to disinfection, the lines shall be cleaned and flushed. Flushing and 13 cleaning shall occur after all hydrostatic and leak tests have been performed 14 and approved. Lines shall be disinfected in accordance with the applicable 15 requirements of AWWA C651 and as described hereinafter. 16 17 B. Before being placed in service, all potable water pipelines installed under this 18 Contract shall be disinfected by chlorination in accordance with AWWA 19 Standards. Either of the following disinfectants may be allowed upon written 20 authorization from the Engineer. 21 22 1. Liquid Chlorine: A chlorine gas -water mixture shall be applied by 23 means of a solution -feed chlorination device. The device must provide 24 a means to prevent the backflow of water into the chlorine cylinder. 25 26 2. Calcium Hypochlorite Solution: A solution consisting of 5 percent 27 calcium hypochlorite powder and 95 percent water by weight shall be 28 prepared and this solution will be injected or pumped into the line. 29 30 C. The point of application of the chlorinating agent shall be at the beginning of 31 the pipeline extension and through a corporation stop inserted in the top of the 32 newly installed pipe. The water injector for delivering the chlorine- bearing 33 water into the pipe may be supplied from a tap on the pressure side of the 34 valve controlling the flow into the pipeline extension. 35 36 D. Water from the existing distribution system or other source of supply shall be 37 controlled so as to flow slowly into the newly installed pipeline during the 38 application of chlorine. The Contractor shall not allow the chlorine solution in 39 the line being treated to flow back into the line supplying the water. 40 41 E. Treated water shall be retained in the new pipeline at least 24 hours, after 42 which the chlorine residual in the line shall be at least 50 mg /I. Should the 43 initial procedure fail to result in the conditions specified, the chlorination 44 procedure shall be repeated until acceptable results are obtained, at the 45 Contractor's expense. 46 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -5 04/26/11 1 F. The Contractor shall tap the lines at points designated by the Engineer and 2 provide necessary piping to discharge water from the line to a designated 3 location as directed by the Engineer. 4 5 G. Following chlorination, all treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the 6 line, at its extremities, until the replacement water throughout its length, upon 7 testing, is proved comparable to the quality of water in the existing distribution 8 system. 9 10 H. Water for flushing will be provided through connections to the Owner's piping 11 systems. The Contractor shall pay for all water used in flushing the pipelines. 12 At no time are valves on the distribution system to be operated without the 13 presence of a duly qualified representative of the Engineer. 14 15 1 After the water lines have been disinfected and flushed, samples of water shall 16 be taken from several points in sterilized containers, and samples forwarded to 17 the Engineer, or its designated representative, for bacterial examination. If 18 repeated tests of such samples show the presence of coliform organisms, the 19 disinfection shall be repeated or continued until tests indicate absence of 20 contamination. Final approval of the bacterial samples shall be received prior 21 to placing the system into operation. 22 23 J. The Contractor shall submit his plan for disinfection of the potable water 24 pipelines to the Engineer for review at least ten (10) days before starting the 25 work. Lines shall be totally free and clean prior to final acceptance. 26 27 3.04 LEAKAGE TEST — GRAVITY SEWERS AND OTHER PIPELINES 28 29 A. All gravity sewer will be tested by the Contractor prior to final acceptance of 30 the work. All tests will be conducted in a manner to minimize any interference 31 with the Contractor's work or progress. The Contractor shall notify the 32 Engineer 72 hours in advance of such tests and, at his option, the Engineer 33 shall witness such tests. 34 35 B. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the work is ready for testing, 36 and tests shall be made as soon thereafter as practicable, under the 37 observation of the Engineer. Reading meters, gauges or other measuring 38 devices shall be new and furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall 39 furnish all other labor, materials, services and equipment including power, fuel, 40 meters and gauges; water and other items and apparatus necessary for 41 making leakage tests, preparing guidelines for testing, assembling, placing, 42 and removing testing equipment and placing in service. 43 44 C. Air Leakage Test 45 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. Tests by this method shall be limited to sewers 36 inches in diameter 2 and smaller. The maximum allowable air leakage is based on 3 pre - wetted pipe walls. The Contractor may therefore fill the pipe with 4 clear water and then empty the pipe prior to air testing. When pipe 5 walls are pre - wetted, air leakage tests shall be completed within 24 6 hours after filling the sewer section to be tested. 7 8 2. Air pressure tests shall be made by placing the sewer under 3.0 psig air 9 pressure and measuring the volume of air required to maintain this 10 pressure. The rate of air leakage shall be determined when the system 11 reaches an equilibrium state and air flow shall be read by means of an 12 approved rotometer. 13 14 3. The maximum rate of air loss shall be 0.003 cfm per square foot of 15 interior pipe surface and the maximum air flow shall not exceed 2.0 cfm 16 when the total pressure on the sewer is maintained at 3.0 psig. When 17 the groundwater level is above the invert of the sewer, but below a level 18 adequate for infiltration testing, the maximum air Toss shall be reduced 19 6 percent for each foot of groundwater above the sewer invert. 20 21 4. Air testing equipment shall be arranged so that compressors, valving, 22 gauges, and other test devices are located at the ground surface. Air 23 testing equipment shall have an approved air relief arrangement to 24 prevent the sewer from being pressurized to greater than 10.0 psig. 25 26 D. Manhole Vacuum Tests: Each manhole shall be visually inspected for leakage 27 or evidence thereof after assembly, installation, and backfilling activities have 28 been completed. This inspection shall occur by the Engineer or the Engineer's 29 authorized agent. The Contractor shall demonstrate the integrity of the 30 installed materials and construction procedures by conducting a vacuum test 31 in accordance with ASTM C1244 -93. If the manhole shows signs of leakage, 32 it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to 33 the Owner. 34 35 E. Repairing Leaks: When leakage occurs in excess of the specified amount, 36 defective manholes, pipe, pipe joints, or other appurtenances shall be located 37 and repaired at the expense of the Contractor. If the defective portions cannot 38 be located, the Contractor shall remove, reconstruct, and retest as much of the 39 original work as necessary to obtain satisfactory test results. 40 41 3.05 SYSTEM START -UP 42 43 A. Contractor Responsibilities 44 45 1. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer ten (10) days notice in writing 46 of his intent to perform systems start-up. START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -7 04/26/11 1 2 2. The Contractor shall provide sufficient personnel to test equipment, 3 monitor and record data, as directed by the Engineer. 4 5 6 7 8 9 4. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer, provide access to the 10 work, provide all incidental labor and facilities, and provide any 11 temporary utilities or construction aids required. 12 13 5. The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment, subsystems, and other 14 separable parts of the Work have been adjusted and balanced and that 15 any and all field tests have been conducted and demonstrated to be in 16 proper operating condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 17 18 B. Start -Up Tests 19 20 1. Start -Up Systems Testing shall include, but not be limited to the 21 following: 22 23 a. The Contractor shall verify that all valves (new and existing, 24 manual and automatic) are in their proper operating position in 25 accordance with the specific operating scenario being tested. 26 27 b. The Contractor shall fill the pipelines with water, in an approved 28 manner, taking care to allow the gradual release of air from all 29 high points. 30 31 c. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a water supply 32 during start-up and testing at no additional cost to the Owner. 33 34 d. The Contractor shall manually start -up and operate all equipment 35 through its full flow range and at various system pressures, and 36 all other equipment as directed by the Engineer for a period of 37 not less than two (2) eight --hour days. Data records shall be kept 38 by the Contractor reflecting flow versus system pressure for the 39 various flow scenarios described above. This information shall 40 be submitted to the Engineer for review at the end of the two (2) 41 day test period. 42 43 e. The Contractor shall demonstrate proper operation of all the 44 flow, level and pressure sensors and all other sensors and 45 controllers. The Contractor shall be responsible for calibrating 46 and verifying the accuracy of all new instruments. The Contractor START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -8 04/26/11 3. The Contractor shall obtain, install, calibrate and operate all test equipment, gauges, pressure recorders, communications systems, etc., as directed by the Engineer. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 shall demonstrate the proper operation of all auto - shutdown 2 features and standby power systems or devices. 3 4 f Following the successful completion of these tests, the 5 Contractor shall demonstrate automatic, controlled operation of 6 all facilities over a period of not less than 72 hours of continuous 7 successful operation. 8 9 g. The Contractor shall also be responsible for performing all tests 10 outside of those previously described as may be required by the 11 manufacturers for all pumps and control valves. 12 13 2. Should the Contractor fail to demonstrate satisfactory performance on 14 the first and any subsequent attempt, he shall make all necessary 15 alterations, adjustments, repairs and replacements. When the facility is 16 again ready for operation, it shall be brought on line and new tests shall 17 be started. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary until 18 the facility has operated continuously to the satisfaction of the Engineer, 19 for the specified test duration. 20 21 3. The Contractor shall demonstrate proper operation of all aspects of the 22 Control System, PLC's, Operator Interface Terminals, and all hardware 23 and software furnished. If applicable, the Contractor shall also 24 demonstrate the full integration of the SCADA System with the Owner's 25 existing network. The Contractor shall make modifications to the 26 existing HMI screens as required for a fully functional system. 27 28 29 30 END OF SECTION START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -9 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -10 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01640 2 3 QUALITY CONTROL 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 8 9 A. Quality assurance and control of installation. 10 11 B. References. 12 13 C. Field samples. 14 15 D. Mock -up. 16 17 E. Inspection and testing laboratory services. 18 19 F. Manufacturers' field services and reports. 20 21 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 22 23 A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. 24 25 B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and 26 Certificates. 27 28 C. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services. 29 30 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE /CONTROL OF INSTALLATION 31 32 A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site 33 conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. 34 35 B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. 36 37 C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request 38 clarification from Engineer before proceeding. 39 40 D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except 41 when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate 42 higher standards or more precise workmanship. 43 44 E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified 45 quality. 46 QUALITY CONTROL 01640 -1 04/26/11 1 1 F Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized 2 to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 3 4 1.04 REFERENCES 5 6 A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Owner Bids. 7 8 B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, 9 request clarification for Engineer before proceeding. 10 11 C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered 12 from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any 13 reference document. 14 15 1.05 FIELD SAMPLES 16 17 A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections 18 for review. 19 20 B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work. 21 22 C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear 23 area after field sample has been accepted by Engineer. 24 25 1.06 MOCK -UP 26 27 A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section. 28 29 B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage 30 devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. 31 32 C. Where mock -up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area 33 after mock -up has been accepted by Engineer. 34 35 1.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 36 37 A. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to 38 perform inspection and testing. 39 40 B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services 41 specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Engineer. 42 43 C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Engineer, in 44 duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating 45 compliance or non - compliance with Contract Documents. 46 QUALITY CONTROL 01640 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, 2 equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. 3 4 1 _ Notify Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time 5 for operations requiring services. 6 7 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional 8 samples and tests required for Contractor's use. 9 10 E. Retesting required because of non - conformance to specified requirements 11 shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the 12 Engineer. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by 13 deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Price. 14 15 1.08 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS 16 17 A. Submit qualifications of observer to Engineer 30 days in advance of required 18 observations. Observer shall be subject to approval of Engineer and Owner. 19 20 B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product 21 suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site 22 conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, 23 start -up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, 24 and to initiate instructions when necessary. 25 26 C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to 27 applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' 28 written instructions. 29 30 D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Engineer for review. 31 32 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 33 34 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 35 36 37 END OF SECTION QUALITY CONTROL 01640 -3 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK QUALITY CONTROL 01640 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01670 2 3 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 DESCRIPTION 8 9 A. General: 10 11 1. This section covers furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, 12 and performing all work and services for furnishing, submission, 13 processing and handling of requests for substitution and product 14 options. See items as indicated on drawings and as specified. Any 15 substitution or option shall be in accord with provisions of Contract 16 Documents, and completely coordinated with work of other trades. 17 18 2. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish all 19 supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices 20 incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. 21 22 3. See appropriate sections for specific items specified. See General 23 Conditions for additional information. 24 25 B. Procedure: 26 27 1. For equipment and materials that are to be listed in the proposal, 28 observe procedures outlined in Section 00300. 29 30 2. For products, equipment, and materials which are named in drawings or 31 specifications for which a request for substitution is made, observe 32 procedures outlined in these specifications. 33 34 C. Costs: Cost incurred by requester in providing information, catalogs, and 35 samples - including but not limited to labor, materials, freight postage, and 36 transportation - are sole cost of "Requestor" with no cost assessed Owner or 37 Engineer. 38 39 1.02 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION - GENERAL: 40 41 A. Base all bids on materials, equipment and procedures specified. 42 43 B. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in 44 specifications by means of trade names and catalog numbers and /or 45 manufacturer's names. Where this occurs, it was not intended to exclude from 46 consideration such types of equipment and kinds of material bearing other SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670 -1 04/26/11 1 trade names, catalog numbers and /or manufacturer's names, capable of 2 accomplishing purpose of types of equipment or kinds of material specifically 3 indicated. 4 5 C. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable to Owner 6 and Engineer. 7 8 D. Types of equipment, kinds of material and methods of construction, if not 9 specifically indicated must be approved in writing by Engineer and be agreed 10 upon by Owner. 11 12 E. Conditional bids will not be accepted. 13 14 1.03 SUBMISSION OF REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION: 15 16 A. Within no more than 30 days after award of the Contract, the Engineer will 17 consider requests for substitutions of products, materials, systems or other 18 items. Requests must be received by Engineer within 30 calendar days after 19 the date of Contract award. All requests for substitution shall be completed as 20 specified below. 21 22 B. Substitute items must comply with color and pattern of base specified items 23 unless specifically approved otherwise. 24 25 C. Submit two (2) copies of request for substitution. Include in request: 26 27 1. Name of product located by Drawing No. or Specification No., followed 28 by a detail or line number the particular item(s) for which request for 29 substitution is initiated. 30 31 2. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with 32 Contract Documents. 33 34 3. For Products: 35 36 a. Product identification by schedule or tag no., including 37 manufacturer's name. 38 39 b. Manufacturer's literature, marked to indicate specific model, 40 type, size, and options to be considered: 41 42 1) Product Description 43 2) Performance and test data 44 3) Reference standards 45 4) Difference in power demand 46 5) Dimensional differences for specified unit SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 c. Submit samples, full size if so required. Engineer reserves right 3 to impound sample until physical units are installed on project for 4 comparison purposes. All costs of furnishing and return of 5 samples shall be paid by requester. Engineer is not responsible 6 for loss of or damage to samples. 7 8 d. Name and address of similar projects where product was used, 9 date of installation, and field performance data on installation. 10 11 4. For construction methods: 12 13 a. Detailed description of proposed method. 14 15 b. Drawings illustrating methods. 16 17 5. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method 18 specified. 19 20 6. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 21 22 7 Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product 23 or method specified. 24 25 8. Include with any request a specific statement defining changes in 26 contract time or amount. 27 28 D. In making request for substitution, or in using an approved substitute item, 29 Supplier /Manufacturer represents: 30 31 1. He has personally investigated proposed product or method, and has 32 determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified, 33 and that it will perform function for which it is intended. 34 35 2. Will provide same or better warranty for substitute item as for product or 36 method specified. 37 38 39 3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, to include 40 but not be limited to the following: 41 42 a. Building and structure modifications as necessary; 43 44 b. Additional ancillary equipment to accommodate change; 45 46 c. Piping, valving, mechanical, electrical, or instrumentation SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670 -3 04/26/11 1 changes, and 2 3 d. All other changes required for work to be complete in all respects 4 to permit incorporation of substitution into project. 5 6 4. Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which 7 subsequently become apparent. 8 9 E. Written acceptance or rejection of items presented for alternative 10 consideration will be given within two weeks after request is received. 11 12 F In the event the acceptance of an alternate results in a change in contract 13 price or time, or is a deviation from the Contract Documents, a change order 14 will be issued to reflect such change. In the event the acceptance of an 15 alternate does not result in a change in Contract price or time, a field order 16 shall be issued. 17 18 G. Alternates may be rejected for the following reasons: 19 20 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents or 21 building spaces. 22 23 2. If they are in Engineer's opinion, not equal to base product specified, or 24 will not adequately perform function for which intended. 25 26 3. If request is not initiated by the Contractor in accordance with this 27 specification section. 28 29 1.04 SUBSTITUTION DUE TO UNAVAILABILITY 30 31 A. Unavailability of specified item due to strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy, 32 discontinuance of production, proven shortage, or similar occurrences are 33 reasons for substitution after Contract award. 34 35 B. Notify Engineer in writing, as soon as condition of unavailability becomes 36 apparent; include substantiating data. Submit request for substitution 37 sufficiently in advance to avoid delays. 38 39 C. Submit data as required in paragraph 1.03 above. 40 41 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 42 43 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 44 45 END OF SECTION SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670 -4 04/26/11 1 SECTION 01700 2 I3 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 4 I5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED I9 A. Comply with requirements stated in General Conditions and in Specifications 10 for administrative procedures in closing out the Work. I11 12 B. Electronic Shop Drawings and O&M Manuals 13 I14 1. The Contractor shall furnish final approved Shop Drawings and 15 Operations and Maintenance Data in electronic ".pdf" format for all 16 equipment furnished under all Specification Sections in Divisions 11, I17 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16. 18 19 2. The Contractor shall organize all electronic Shop Drawings and I20 Operations and Maintenance Data by specification division and section 21 number, and submit two (2) copies on compact disk media (CDROM). 22 23 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 24 25 A. When Contractor considers the Work is substantially complete, he shall submit I27 26 to the Engineer: 28 1. A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is I29 substantially complete. 30 31 2. A list of items to be completed or corrected. 32 33 B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the Engineer will make 34 an inspection to determine the status of completion. I35 36 C. Should the Engineer determine that the Work is not substantially complete: 37 38 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor, in writing, giving the 39 reasons therefore. 40 41 2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a 42 second written notice of substantial completion to the Engineer. 43 1 44 3. The Engineer will re- inspect the Work. 45 46 D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is substantially complete, he will: • CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -1 04/26/11 1 1 2 1. Prepare and deliver to Owner a tentative Certificate of Substantial 3 Completion with a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected 4 before final payment. 5 6 2. After consideration of any objections made by the Owner as provided in 7 General Conditions, and when the Engineer considers the Work 8 substantially complete, he will execute and deliver to the Owner and the 9 Contractor a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a 10 revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected. 11 12 1.03 FINAL INSPECTION 13 14 A. When Contractor considers all the Work to be complete, he shall submit 15 written certification that: 16 17 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 18 19 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 20 21 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 22 23 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the 24 Owner's representative and are operational. 25 26 5. Work is completed and ready for final inspection. 27 28 B. The Engineer will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with 29 reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification. 30 31 C. Should the Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: 32 33 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the 34 incomplete or defective work. 35 36 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated 37 deficiencies, and send a second written certification to the Engineer that 38 the Work is complete. 39 40 3. The Engineer will re- inspect the Work. 41 42 D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract 43 Documents, he shall request the Contractor to make closeout submittals. 44 45 1.03 PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCE 46 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -2 04/26/11 t 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. For the purpose of construction phasing and for the commencement of the 2 warranty period for equipment, the Owner shall accept Partial Substantial 3 Completion of process systems. Partial Substantial Completion shall be 4 allowed for a complete process system only, or combination of process 5 systems working together, and the Owner shall only consider for partial 6 substantial completion those systems as specified herein. 7 8 B. The following general requirements must be completed prior to the Owner 9 accepting partial substantial completion of a system. Owner shall accept 10 stand -alone ancillary systems for consideration of partial substantial 11 acceptance. 12 13 1. An equipment manufacturer representative shall be present for all initial 14 start -up and testing as specified in Section 01625 and all other start-up 15 and testing as required in the equipment specifications in Division 11. 16 17 2. The Contractor shall provide training of Owner personnel in the 18 operation of new equipment, according to the equipment specifications 19 outlined in Division 11 and Section 01820. 20 21 3. Contractor shall provide Operating and Maintenance Data to the Owner 22 as required by Section 01730. 23 24 4. All electrical equipment including controls, conduit, wiring and safety 25 interlocks for each piece of equipment as shown on the Drawings must 26 be completed as outlined in Divisions 13 and 16. 27 28 5. Ali Control System equipment must be installed and operational for the 29 system that is being tested for partial substantial completion as outlined 30 in Divisions 13 and 16. 31 32 6. All inlet and discharge piping must be connected and tested for each 33 system that is being tested for partial substantial completion in 34 compliance with Division 01. 35 36 7 Certifications of Proper Installation shall be furnished, along with spare 37 parts, calibration certificates, and the results of all tests. 38 39 1.05 RE- INSPECTION FEES 40 41 A. Should the Engineer perform re- inspections, due to failure of the Work, to 42 comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor: 43 44 1. Owner will compensate the Engineer for such additional services. 45 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -3 04/26/11 1 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final 2 payment to the Contractor. 3 4 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ENGINEER 5 6 A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities. 7 8 B. Project Record Documents. 9 10 C. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel. 11 12 D. Warranties and Bonds. 13 14 E. Keys and Keying Schedule. 15 16 F. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. 17 18 G. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens. 19 20 H. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations. 21 22 I. Contractor's Final Affidavit. 23 24 J. Lien Waivers from Subcontractors and Suppliers. 25 26 K. Consent of Surety from the bonding company. 27 28 L. Contractor's Guarantee. 29 30 1.07 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS 31 32 A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer. 33 34 B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum: 35 36 1. The original Contract Sum. 37 38 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: 39 40 a. Previous Change Orders. 41 42 b. Unit Prices. 43 44 c. Deductions for uncorrected Work. 45 46 d. Penalties and Bonuses. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 e. Deductions for liquidated damages. 3 4 f. Deductions for re- inspection payments. 5 6 g. Other adjustments. 7 8 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted. 9 10 4. Payments. 11 12 5. Sum remaining due. 13 14 C. Engineer will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to 15 the Contract Sum, which were not previously made by Change Orders. 16 17 1.08 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 18 19 A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with 20 procedures and requirements stated in the General Conditions. 21 22 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 23 24 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 25 26 END OF SECTION CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -5 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01720 2 3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of: 10 11 1. Drawings 12 13 2. Specifications 14 15 3. Addenda 16 17 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract 18 19 5. Engineer's Field Orders or written instructions 20 21 6. Approved Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples 22 23 7. Field Test Records 24 25 8. Construction Photographs, if provided 26 27 9. Detailed progress schedule 28 29 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES 30 31 A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from 32 documents used for construction. 33 34 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 35 36 2. Provide locked cabinet of secure storage space for storage of samples. 37 38 B. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI format. 39 40 C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do 41 not use record documents for construction purposes. 42 43 D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the 44 Engineer. 45 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720 -1 04/26/11 1 E. As a pre - requisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor is to exhibit 2 the currently updated "record documents" for review by the Engineer and 3 Owner. 4 5 1.03 MARKING DEVICES 6 7 A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code 8 designated by the Engineer. 9 10 1.04 RECORDING 11 12 A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. 13 14 B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 15 16 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. 17 18 C. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction: 19 20 1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor 21 datum. 22 23 2. Denote all underground piping elevations and dimensions; all changes 24 to piping location; horizontal and vertical locations of underground 25 utilities and appurtenances, all referenced to permanent surface 26 improvements. Actual installed pipe material, class, etc_ 27 28 3. Locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the 29 construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the 30 structure. 31 32 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 33 34 5. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 35 36 6. Details not on original Contract Documents. 37 38 7 Equipment and piping relocations. 39 40 8. Major architectural and structural changes including relocation of doors, 41 windows, etc. 42 43 9. Architectural schedule changes according to Contractor's records and 44 shop drawings. 45 46 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 1. 5 6 2. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1.05 SUBMITTAL 14 15 A. 16 17 18 B. 19 20 1. 21 22 2. 23 24 3. 25 26 4. 27 28 5. 29 30 31 PART 2 .- PRODUCTS 32 33 34 PART 3 - EXECUTION 35 36 37 D. Specifications and Addenda; legibly mark each Section to record: Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. Shop Drawings (after final review and approval): Five (5) sets of record drawings for each piece of process equipment, piping, electrical and instrumentation system. At contract close -out, deliver Record Documents to the Engineer for the Owner. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: Date, Project title and number, Contractor's name and address, Title and number of each Record Document, and Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative. (NOT USED) (NOT USED) END SECTION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017203 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01730 2 3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's 10 maintenance and operation of new equipment and processes furnished and or 11 installed by the Contractor. 12 13 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section 14 and as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications. 15 16 2. The information in the O &M Manual shall be specific and targeted for 17 the equipment and processes supplied for this project. 18 19 3. Incorporate operating and maintenance data furnished by the Owner, if 20 previously defined in the scope of work. 21 22 B. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and all other items required to supply 23 and deliver to the Engineer, O &M Manuals for the work, mechanical 24 equipment, instrumentation equipment, electrical equipment, process control 25 equipment, and software on a facility wide, system by system, and individual 26 equipment basis as pertinent to the project. 27 28 C. Five (5) draft O &M Manuals for each piece of equipment shall be submitted to 29 the Engineer upon delivery of the equipment. The draft O &M Manuals will 30 include the manufacturer's test results and specification and may be used as a 31 training aid. 32 33 D. Furnish the Owner five (5) approved complete hardcopy sets of operation and 34 maintenance data and two (2) approved complete set of operation and 35 maintenance data in electronic "pdf" format on a CD as specified herein for the 36 project. 37 38 1. Any modifications required after final O &M submission shall be made to 39 the manuals by issuance of all new manuals with the revised or 40 additional information included and clearly identified. 41 42 E. The operating and maintenance data shall meet the requirements of 62- 43 600.720 Florida Administrative Code (F.A.C.). 44 45 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 46 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -1 04/26/11 1 A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 2 3 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described 4 products. 5 6 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section_ 7 8 3. Skilled and technical writer to the extent required to communicate 9 essential data. 10 11 4. Skilled as draftspersons competent to prepare required Drawings. 12 13 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS 14 15 A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. 16 17 B, Format: 18 19 1. Size: 8 -1/2 inches x 11- inches. 20 21 2. Paper: 20 pound minimum white, for typed pages. 22 23 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. 24 25 4. Drawings: 26 27 a. Provide reinforced punched binder tabs, bind in with text. 28 b. Reduce larger Drawings to 11- inches x 17- inches and fold to 29 size of text pages and printed only on one side, 30 31 5. Provide tabbed fly -leaf for each separate product, or each piece of 32 operating equipment. 33 34 a. Provide typed description of the product, and of each major 35 component part of equipment. 36 b. Provide indexed tabs. 37 38 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING 39 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS." List: 40 41 a. Title of Project 42 b. Identity of separate structure as applicable. 43 c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. 44 45 C. Binders: 46 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Commercial quality three -post binders with durable and cleanable 2 plastic covers. 3 4 2. Maximum post width: 2- inches. Each binder filled to not more than 5 75% capacity. 6 7 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related 8 consistent groupings. 9 10 D. Refer to Specification Section 00120 for additional submittal requirements_ 11 12 1.04 GENERAL CONTENT OF MANUAL 13 14 A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic 15 order. If more than one volume is required, the table of contents of each 16 volume shall be included with all volumes. 17 18 B. The contact information, address, and phone number for the Contractor and 19 the responsible principal shall be included. 20 21 C. A list of each product included, indexed to content of the volume. 22 23 D. A list, with each product, name, address, and telephone number of: 24 25 a. Manufacturer 26 b. Subcontractor or installer. 27 c. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. 28 d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 29 30 E. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set 31 forth in Contract Documents. 32 33 F Product Data: 34 35 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 36 37 2. Annotate each sheet to: 38 39 a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed. 40 b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation. 41 c. Delete references to inapplicable information. 42 43 G. Drawings: 44 45 1. Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clearly 46 illustrate: OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -3 04/26/11 2 a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. I 3 b. Control and flow diagrams. 4 c. Owner Tag Numbers. 5 d. Exploded views with part numbers listed and identified. I 6 7 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to 8 assure correct illustration of completed installation. I 9 10 H. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular 11 installation: I 12 13 1. Organized in consistent format under separate headings for different 14 procedures. I 15 16 2. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure. 17 I 18 3. Provide an overview of how the complete system should operate. 19 20 I. Provide a copy of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued. 21 22 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel with the following 23 information: I 24 25 a. Proper procedures in event of failure. 26 b. Circumstances and events that may affect validity of warranties I 27 or bonds. 28 29 1.05 CONTENT OF MANUAL FOR ARCHITECTURAL PRODUCTS, MOISTURE- 1 30 PROTECTED, WEATHER- EXPOSED, AND APPLIED MATERIALS, AND FINISHES 31 32 A. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. I 33 34 1. Catalog number, size, and composition. I35 2. Applicable Standards 36 3. Chemical Composition 37 4. Details of Installation or Application I 38 5. Color and texture designations. 39 6. Information required for re- ordering special- manufactured products. 40 7. Storage instructions and shelf life information. I 41 42 B. Instructions for care and maintenance. 43 I 44 1. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and 45 methods. 46 I OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to 2 product. 3 4 3. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. 5 6 4. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. 7 8 1.06 CONTENT OF MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS 9 10 A. Content, for each electrical, mechanical, instrumentation, and communication 11 system, as appropriate: 12 13 1. A table identifying each piece of equipment, each associated control or 14 instrument, the location of the control or instrument, and the function of 15 the control or instrument. 16 17 2. A description of the system and its component parts. 18 19 3. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions for 20 the system, the sub - system, and the component parts. 21 22 4. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. 23 24 5. Complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replaceable parts, 25 26 6. Assembly drawings. 27 28 7 The manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and 29 diagrams, and exploded views required for operations and 30 maintenance. 31 32 8. Manufacturer's model and serial number. 33 34 9. List of all special tools required to service equipment and /or systems 35 including where the tools are stored. 36 37 10. Circuit directories of panel boards. 38 39 a. Electrical service. 40 b. Controls. 41 c. Communications. 42 43 11. As- installed color -coded wiring diagrams and control diagrams. 44 45 12. Instrument loop diagrams showing the path that a control or 46 instrumentation signal takes from its origin to the action it takes. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -5 04/26/11 13. An electrical schematic for each item. 14. A chart listing the controls /instruments in a loop identifying the equipment's abbreviated symbol, a description of the symbol, design criteria, process flow, quantity supplied, and manufacturer's model and serial number. 15. Operating procedures. a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. d. Start -up, break -in, routine, and normal operating instructions. e. Regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. f. Special operating instructions. g. Control settings and ranges. 16. Maintenance procedures. a. Routine maintenance. b. Guide to "trouble- shooting." c. Disassembly, repair, and re- assembly. d. Alignment, adjustment, tolerances, and checking. e. Type and frequency of preventive maintenance activities required for each piece of equipment. t. List of lubricants required. g. Period between lubrications. h. Servicing and lubrication schedule. 17. The manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 18. Abnormal and emergency operations. a. Potential overloads. b. Procedures for equipment breakdown c. Action to be taken in a power outage. d. Identity of alarms by equipment location and action to correct. e. Equipment safety features, requirements, and potential hazards. 19. Programming manuals for programmable devices including list of standard programming. 20. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of the Specifications. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 21. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts, manufacturer's 2 current prices, recommended quantities to be maintained in storage, 3 and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 4 5 22. The final approved manual shall include the startup report for each 6 piece of equipment and documentation that the Owner's designated 7 personnel attended a formal training session as applicable for each 8 piece of equipment. 9 10 23. Charts of equipment, instrument, and valve tag numbers with location, 11 function, sheet number, model number, serial number, and actuator 12 type identified. 13 14 1.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL 15 16 A. Refer to Specification 01820 for Training and Instruction of Owner's personnel. 17 18 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) 19 20 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 21 22 23 END OF SECTION OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -7 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -8 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01740 2 3 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Compile warranties and bonds, as specified in the General Conditions. 10 11 B. Co- execute submittals when so specified. 12 13 C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. 14 15 D. Submit to the Engineer for review and transmittal to Owner. 16 17 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 18 19 A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts, 20 executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and 21 subcontractors. 22 23 B. Number of original signed copies required. Two each. 24 25 C. Table of Contents. Neatly typed in orderly sequence. Provide complete 26 information for each item. 27 28 1. Product or work item. 29 30 2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number. 31 32 3. Scope. 33 34 4. Date of beginning warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 35 36 5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract. 37 38 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel: 39 40 a. Proper procedure in case of failure. 41 42 b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 43 44 7 Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone 45 number. 46 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740 -1 04/26/11 1 2 1.03 WARRANTY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 3 4 A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment 5 manufacturer. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with 6 the Contractor's for one (1) year, unless otherwise specified, commencing at 7 the time of substantial completion and /or final acceptance by the Owner, 8 whichever is later. 9 10 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining certificates for equipment 11 warranty for all major equipment that has a 1 HP motor or that has a list price 12 of more than $1,000. The Engineer reserves the right to request warranties 13 for equipment not classified as major. The Contractor shall still warrant 14 equipment not considered to be "major" in the Contractor's one -year warranty 15 period even though certificates of warranty may not be required. 16 17 C. In the event that the equipment manufacturer or supplier is unwilling to provide 18 a one -year warranty commencing at the time of Owner acceptance, the 19 Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty 20 commencing at the time of equipment delivery to the job site. The two -year 21 warranty from the manufacturer shall not relieve the Contractor of the one -year 22 warranty starting at the time of Owner acceptance of the equipment. 23 24 1.04 WARRANTY START DATE 25 26 A. No warranty shall start until the Engineer has issued a "Notice of Substantial 27 Completion" 28 29 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 30 31 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 32 33 34 END OF SECTION WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01820 2 TRAINING 3 4 5 PART 1 GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 The Contractor shall be responsible for performing and /or coordinating the following work 10 relating to training the Owners designated personnel for this project: 11 12 A. Instruct and train the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of 13 the equipment and systems supplied and /or installed under this Contract. 14 15 B. Incorporate operation and maintenance data and training services furnished 16 by the suppliers into the training program such as shop drawings, equipment 17 manuals, and start -up, engineering, and training assistance. 18 19 C. Ensure that system suppliers provide qualified training instructors experienced 20 in the proper operation and maintenance of all applicable equipment and 21 systems. 22 23 D. Prepare instructors and training materials required for complete factory, field, 24 classroom, and hands -on training. 25 26 E. Furnish training videos and training manuals during the training program. The 27 training manual shall be a separate document from the O &M Manual_ 28 29 F. Include in the Contract Price the cost for training equipment; preparing training 30 manuals in addition to O &M manuals; conducting classroom instructions; 31 performing field, factory, and hands -on training; and coordinating and 32 incorporating training service provided by suppliers and all other activities 33 required to provide a comprehensive training program of sufficient length, as 34 determined by the Owner. 35 36 1.02 SUBMITTALS 37 38 A. TRAINING PLAN 39 40 In conjunction with submittal of draft O &M Manuals, and at least 30 days 41 before equipment or systems startup, the Contractor shall submit to the 42 Engineer a proposed training manual and detailed training plan with specific 43 information as identified in PART 2 of this specification. 44 45 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 46 TRAINING 01820 -1 04/26/11 1 A. Preparation of training materials and instructions to be provided shall be 2 performed by personnel: 3 4 1. Trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment 5 and systems installed under this Contract. 6 7 2. Familiar with the training requirements of the Owner. 8 9 B. The Contractor shall furnish the resumes and references for each instructor to 10 be used in the training program. 11 12 C. The Engineer and Owner may review the resumes. Based on the review of 13 the resumes and contacts with references, the Engineer shall approve, 14 request additional information, or reject proposed instructors for the training 15 program. If a proposed instructor is rejected, the Contractor shall submit the 16 resume and references of another candidate within a reasonable time. 17 18 PART 2 PRODUCTS 19 20 2.01 TRAINING PLAN 21 22 A. A detailed training plan specific to the project or equipment shall be prepared 23 with specific information as follows: 24 25 1. Title and objectives. 26 2. Training schedule. 27 3. Prerequisite training and experience of attendees. 28 4. Recommended types of attendees (e.g., managers, engineers, 29 operators, maintenance staff). 30 5. Course description and outline of course content, 31 6. Duration. 32 7. Location (e.g., training center or site). 33 8. Format (e.g., lecture, self - study, demonstration, hands -on). 34 9. Instruction materials and equipment requirements. 35 10 Training manual. 36 37 B. The factory training program shall be completed before start -up of the Owner's 38 system and shall use equipment similar to the Owner's equipment. 39 40 C. The field training programs shall be conducted in accordance with the 41 approved schedule. 42 43 D. In conjunction with start -up of, the Contractor shall provide a competent and 44 experienced person thoroughly familiar with the Work for one 8 -hour day to 45 instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation, maintenance, and 46 control of the equipment or systems. TRAINING 01820 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 E. The Contractor shall coordinate and submit a training schedule to the 3 Engineer 30 days before the first training event. 4 5 2.02 VIDEOTAPED TRAINING MATERIAL 6 7 A. The Contractor shall produce or provide video training material subject to 8 approval of the Owner. 9 10 B. Provide four copies of each videotape in DVD format in plastic case with title, 11 the Owner's name, and date on a label in a clear plastic sleeve. 12 13 C. Bear all costs associated with production and provision of the DVDs. 14 15 PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) 16 17 18 19 END OF SECTION TRAINING 01820-3 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TRAINING 01820 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02062 2 3 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 4 5 PART 1 _ GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, tools, equipment, materials, and incidentals required to 10 remove all existing structures, equipment, pipe, fittings, valves, and 11 appurtenances as noted on the Contract Drawings, as reasonably inferred and 12 as required in order to perform the work as described in the Contract 13 Documents. 14 15 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 16 17 PART 3 - EXECUTION 18 19 3.01 GENERAL 20 21 A. The Contractor shall not proceed with the removal of any equipment, piping, or 22 appurtenances without specific approval of the Engineer. Any equipment, 23 piping or appurtenances removed without proper authorization, which are 24 necessary for the operation of the facility, shall be replaced to the satisfaction 25 of the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. 26 27 B. All existing equipment, valves, hardware, tubing, insulation, hangers, and 28 supports not required to be reused and not designated as being turned over to 29 the Owner, shall become the property of the Contractor immediately upon 30 removal from their present locations. The Contractor shall remove such 31 material from the plant site at his own expense and it shall not be reused. 32 33 C. All existing equipment, valves, hardware, tubing, insulation, hangers, and 34 supports designated as being turned over to the Owner, shall be identified, 35 cleaned, protected, crated or boxed and stored at the plant site. 36 37 D. Pieces of equipment weighing 150 Ibs or more shall be provided with suitable 38 skids before storing. 39 40 E. Wherever piping is removed for disposition, adjacent pipe, and headers that 41 are to remain in service shall be blanked off or plugged and then supported or 42 anchored in an approved manner. 43 44 G. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against damaging the 45 material and equipment to be stored and reused. The Contractor shall repair 46 any damage resulting from his operations, as directed by and to the 47 satisfaction of the Engineer. Itemized lists of materials removed and stored REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 02062 -1 04/26/11 1 shall be given to the Resident Project Representative daily. A final typed 2 itemized list shall be furnished to the Engineer in 6 copies at the completion of 3 construction. The list shall include items, method of packaging, and place of 4 storage. 5 6 3.02 EQUIPMENT TO BE RETAINED 7 8 A. All equipment removed shall remain the property of the Owner unless 9 designated otherwise by the Owner. 10 11 B. If the Owner elects not to retain ownership of a certain item, the item shall 12 become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the plant 13 site at the Contractor's expense_ 14 15 16 END OF SECTION REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 02062 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 SECTION 02064 2 3 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to modify, 10 alter and /or convert existing structures as shown or specified and as required 11 for the installation of new mechanical equipment, piping, and appurtenances. 12 Existing piping and equipment shall be removed and dismantled as necessary 13 for the performance of structural alterations in accordance with the 14 requirements herein specified. 15 16 1.02 DEWATERING FOR STRUCTURES 17 18 A. The Contractor shall note that all of the clarifiers, except Clarifiers 1 thru 4 at 19 the Northeast WRF, have ground water pressure relief valves installed in the 20 bottom of the clarifiers. The operability and capability of these valves is 21 unknown. The Contractor shall take any and all precautions necessary to 22 assure that the clarifiers do not become buoyant when dewatering of the 23 clarifier. 24 25 B. The East Plant has a permanent under drain type groundwater dewatering 26 system installed in the vicinity of the clarifiers that must be used at all times 27 while any clarifier is empty. The Contractor shall furnish, install, operate, and 28 maintain the pump and a backup pump for this system while it is in operation. 29 30 C. The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, operate, and remove a 31 temporary dewatering system, as required to lower and control the 32 groundwater level, such that there is no danger of any clarifier circular 33 structure floating. In no event shall water rise to cause unbalanced pressure 34 on structures. Flotation shall be prevented by maintaining a positive and 35 continuous operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fully 36 responsible and liable for all damages, which may result from failure of this 37 system. 38 39 D. The Contractor shall assume all risk, and at his own expense, correct all 40 damage resulting from inadequacy of the dewatering system, from flooding by 41 groundwater, or from the clarifier structures becoming buoyant while empty 42 and being rehabilitated. 43 44 C. Dewatering System 45 46 1. The dewatering system shall be adequate to maintain the groundwater 47 level as indicated on the drawings and prevent flotation. The MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 02064 -1 04/26/11 1 dewatering system must maintain the lowered water table 24 hours per 2 day, 7 days per week until no longer needed. 3 4 2. The Contractor shall provide and have ready for immediate use at all 5 times diesel or gasoline powered standby pumping units to serve the 6 system in case of failure of the normal pumping units. 7 8 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for creating and implementing a 9 dewatering plan, a groundwater disposal plan, and for obtaining a 10 Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) Permit for the 11 discharge of groundwater produced from the dewatering operation. 12 The plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and the 13 application shall be submitted to the FDEP. The plans must be 14 approved and the FDEP permit received prior to initiating any 15 dewatering activities. 16 17 4. Removal of the dewatering system shall be accomplished after the 18 dewatering system is no longer required. 19 20 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 21 22 PART 3 - EXECUTION 23 24 3.01 GENERAL 25 26 A. The Contractor shall cut, repair, reuse, excavate, demolish, or otherwise 27 remove parts of the existing structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the 28 Contract Drawings, herein specified, or necessary to permit completion of the 29 work under this Contract. He shall dispose of surplus materials resulting from 30 the above work in an approved manner. The work shall include all necessary 31 cutting and bending of reinforcing steel, structural steel, or miscellaneous 32 metal work found embedded in the existing structures. Any item called for to 33 be removed shall be assumed to include connecting conduit, wiring and 34 supports, unless as otherwise directed by the Engineer. 35 36 B. The Contractor shall dismantle and remove all existing equipment, piping and 37 other appurtenances required for the completion of the work. Where called for 38 or required, the Contractor shall cut existing pipelines for the purpose of 39 making connections thereto. Anchor bolts for equipment and structural steel 40 removed shall be cut off one inch below the concrete surface. Surface shall 41 be finished as specified in Specification 03740. 42 43 C. At the time that a new connection is made to an existing pipeline, additional 44 new piping, extending to and including a new valve, shall be installed. 45 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 02064 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D. No existing structure, equipment, or appurtenance shall be shifted, cut, 2 removed, or otherwise altered except with the express approval of and to the 3 extent approved by the Engineer. 4 5 E. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making 6 openings in walls and partitions, the Contractor shall take all precautions and 7 use all necessary barriers and other protective devices so as not to damage 8 the structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, and not to 9 damage the structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise 10 permitted, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete. 11 12 F. Materials and equipment removed in the course of making alterations and 13 additions shall remain the property of the Owner, except that items not 14 salvageable, as determined by the Engineer and the Owner, shall become the 15 property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him off the work site at his own 16 place of disposal. Operating equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, 17 lubricated, and greased for protection during prolonged storage. 18 19 G. All alterations to existing structures shall be done at such time and in such 20 manner as will comply with the approved time schedule. So far as possible 21 before any part of the work is started, all tools, equipment and materials shall 22 be assembled and made ready so that the work can be completed without 23 delay. 24 25 H. All workmanship and new materials involved in constructing the alterations 26 shall conform to the General Specifications for the classes of work insofar as 27 such specifications are applicable. 28 29 I. All cutting of existing concrete or other material to provide suitable bonding to 30 new work shall be done in a manner to meet the requirements of the 31 respective section of these Specifications covering the work. When not 32 covered, the work shall be carried on in the manner and to the extent directed 33 by the Engineer. 34 35 J. Surfaces of seals visible in the completed work shall be made to match as 36 nearly as possible the adjacent surfaces. 37 38 K. Non - shrink grout shall be used for setting wall castings, sleeves, leveling 39 pump bases, doweling anchors into existing concrete and elsewhere as 40 shown. 41 42 L. Where necessary or required for the purpose of making connections, the 43 Contractor shall cut existing pipelines /couplings in a manner to provide an 44 approved joint. Where required, the Contractor shall weld beads, flanges, or 45 provide Dresser Couplings or equal, all as required. 46 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 02064 -3 04/26/11 1 M. The Contractor shall provide flumes, hoses, piping, and other related items to 2 divert or provide suitable plugs, bulkheads, or other means to hold back the 3 flow of water or other liquids, all as required in the performance of the work 4 under this Contract. 5 6 N. Blasting will not be permitted to complete any work under this Contract. Care 7 shall be taken not to damage any part of existing buildings or foundations or 8 outside structures. 9 10 3.02 CONNECTING TO EXISTING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 11 12 A. The Contractor shall verify exact location, material, alignment, joint, etc. of 13 existing piping and equipment prior to making the connections called out in the 14 Drawings. The verifications shall be performed with adequate time to correct 15 any potential alignment or other problems prior to the actual time of 16 connection. 17 18 3.03 CLEANING EXISTING STRUCTURES 19 20 A. After dewatering and before commencing work on any tank, structure, 21 channels, clarifier, conduit or other structures, the Contractor shall remove and 22 dispose of the grit and other solids remaining in such structures in a lawful 23 manner. 24 25 26 END SECTION MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 02064 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02221 2 3 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. This section includes, except as elsewhere provided, all excavation for pipelines 10 and appurtenances including drainage, filling, backfilling, grading, disposal of 11 surplus material and restoration of trench surfaces. 12 13 B. Excavation shall provide suitable room for installing pipe, structures and 14 appurtenances. Pavement shall be cut with pneumatic chisels along straight 15 lines before excavating. 16 17 C. The Contractor shall furnish and place all sheeting, bracing and supports, and 18 shall remove from the excavation all materials which the Engineer may deem 19 unsuitable for backfilling. The bottom of the excavation shall be firm, dry and in 20 all respects, acceptable. The length of open trench shall be related closely to the 21 rate of installing pipe. All excavation shall be made in open trenches. 22 23 D. All pipe and fittings shall be clearly marked with the name or trademark of the 24 manufacturer, the batch number, the location of the plant and strength 25 designation, as applicable. All pipe shall be laid with a 2 -inch metallic tape, 26 appropriately color -coded and imprinted with the type of service, 12- inches below 27 final grade, directly above the utility for identification and ease of location. The 28 appropriate tape color codes are as follows: 29 30 Grey, Gravity Sewer 31 Green - Sanitary force main 32 Blue - Potable water 33 Lavender - Reclaimed water 34 35 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 36 37 2.01 MATERIALS 38 39 A. General 40 41 1. Materials for use as fill shall be described below. For each material, the 42 Contractor shall notify the Testing Lab of the source of the material at 43 least ten calendar days prior to the date of anticipated use of such 44 material. 45 46 2. Materials shall be furnished as required from off site sources and hauled 47 to the site. EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -1 04/26/11 1 3. Disposal of unsuitable material is specified in this Section. See 2 Paragraph 3.10. 3 4 B. Common Fill 5 6 1. Common fill shall consist of mineral soil, free of organic material, loam, 7 wood, trash and other objectionable material which may be compressible 8 or which cannot be compacted properly. Common fill shall not contain 9 stones larger than 10 -in. in any dimension, broken concrete, masonry, 10 rubble, or other similar materials. It shall have physical properties such 11 that it can be readily spread and compacted during filling. 12 13 2. Material falling within the above specification, encountered during the 14 excavation, may be stored in segregated stockpiles for reuse. All material 15 which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is not suitable for reuse shall be 16 spoiled as specified herein for disposal of unsuitable materials. 17 18 C. Crushed Stone 19 20 1. Crushed stone shall be used for manhole bases, as a drainage layer 21 below structures with underdrains and at other locations indicated on the 22 Drawings. 23 24 2. Crushed stone for pipe bedding shall be size No. 67 with gradation as 25 defined in Table 1 of Section 901 of Florida Department of Transportation 26 Standard Specifications for Road & Bridge Construction. 27 28 D. Select Fill 29 30 1. Select fill shall be noncohesive, non - plastic material free of all debris, 31 lumps or clods. Fill material shall be clean earth fill composed of sand or 32 an approved mixture of clay and sand. Backfill material placed within one 33 foot of piping and appurtenances shall not contain any stones or rocks 34 larger than 2 inches in diameter, or 3/4 -inch in diameter for PVC pipe, 35 36 PART 3 - EXECUTION 37 38 3.01 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS 39 40 A. Excavated material shall be stacked without excessive surcharge on the trench 41 bank. Inconvenience to traffic and abutters shall be avoided as much as 42 possible. Excavated material shall be segregated for use in backfilling as 43 specified below. 44 45 B. Surplus excavated material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is suitable for 46 use in backfilling or for replacing rock and boulders shall be stockpiled at a 47 satisfactory site to be obtained by the Contractor to be used as required. EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unsatisfactory surplus material including paving, rock or boulders, muck, stumps 2 and other material, as directed by the Engineer, shall be disposed of by the 3 Contractor. 4 5 C. It is expressly understood that no excavated material shall be removed from the 6 site of the work or disposed of by the Contractor except as directed by the 7 Engineer. When removal of surplus material has been approved by the 8 Engineer, the Contractor shall dispose of such surplus material. 9 10 D. Should conditions make it impracticable or unsafe to stack material adjacent to 11 the trench, the material shall be hauled and stored at a location provided by the 12 Contractor. When required, it shall be rehandled and used in backfilling the 13 trench. No extra compensation will be made for rehandling material. 14 15 3.02 SHEETING AND BRACING 16 17 A. The Contractor shall furnish, put in place, and maintain sheeting and bracing 18 required to support the sides of the excavation and prevent loss of ground which 19 could damage or delay the work or endanger adjacent structures. If the Engineer 20 is of the opinion that at any point sufficient or proper supports have not been 21 provided, he may order additional supports placed at the expense of the 22 Contractor from his responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports. Care shall 23 be taken to prevent voids outside of the sheeting, but if voids are formed, they 24 shall be immediately filled and rammed. 25 26 3.03 TEST PITS 27 28 A. The Contractor may be required to excavate test pits for the purpose of locating 29 underground utilities or structures as an aid in establishing the precise location of 30 new work. Test pits shall be backfilled as soon as the desired information has 31 been obtained. The backfilled surface shall be maintained in a satisfactory 32 condition for travel until resurfaced as hereinafter specified. 33 34 B. Excavation of test pits shall be considered work incidental to the project and shall 35 be done at the Contractor's expense. 36 37 C. If, for any reason, a test pit is left open for any period of time, it shall be properly 38 barricaded and lighted by the Contractor, when directed by the Engineer, in 39 accordance with State and Local laws. 40 41 3.04 DRAINAGE 42 43 A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment and perform all 44 incidental work required to install and maintain the drainage system he proposes 45 for handling ground water or surface water encountered. He shall assume all 46 responsibility for the adequacy of the methods, materials, and equipment 47 employed. Construction shall not begin until the Engineer is assured that the EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -3 04/26/11 1 proposed method will be satisfactory. The requirements for a stable subgrade 2 are indicated below, and the Contractor must alter his drainage methods, if, in 3 the opinion of the Engineer, the trench bottom is unsatisfactory. 4 5 B. The Contractor shall provide pumping equipment and devices to properly remove 6 and dispose of all water entering trench and excavation. The grade shall be 7 maintained acceptably dry until structures and pipe to be constructed therein are 8 completed. All drainage shall be performed without damage to the trench, 9 pavements, pipes, electrical conduits, or other utilities, 10 11 C. Pipe and masonry shall not be laid in water or submerged within 24 hours after 12 being placed. Water shall not flow over new masonry within four days after 13 placement. 14 15 D. In no event shall water rise to cause unbalanced pressure on structures until the 16 concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours. The Contractor shall prevent 17 flotation of the pipe promptly placing backfill. 18 19 E. If the Contractor elects to use underdrains for handling water, he shall furnish 20 and install pipe and crushed stone graded from course to fine, and shall furnish 21 and install all pumps and equipment necessary to maintain the water level 22 continuously at the required elevation. Pipe underdrains shall be laid with open 23 joints and bedded in crushed stone for the full width of trench, and to a depth of 24 6 -in. below the invert of underdrain. 25 26 F The invert of underdrain shall be 12 -in. below the normal subgrade. Pipe 27 underdrains shall have no permanent outlet and shall be sealed at the 28 completion of the work. The length of continuous underdrain to be used shall be 29 limited as conditions require, An impervious bulkhead of clay or concrete shall 30 be constructed in the trench bottom between 100 ft. lengths of the underdrainage 31 system to obstruct the free flow of ground water after construction is completed. 32 All excavation below normal grade for the purpose of installing underdrains, the 33 crushed stone and underdrain pipe shall be considered a part of the drainage 34 work to be done under the pipe items. The Contractor shall continuously guard 35 against the loss of earth through subbase or the underdrain. Should Toss of 36 either take place, the Contractor shall alter the stone size to provide a 37 satisfactory barrier or filter. 38 39 G. Where other methods of handling water prove inadequate, the Contractor shall 40 furnish, install, operate, and remove proper well point facilities. 41 42 H. The Contractor shall submit a dewatering plan to the Engineer for submission to 43 the FDEP prior to commencement of work in accordance with the Environmental 44 Resource Permit. 45 46 3.05 TRENCH EXCAVATION 47 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. Excavation shall be made for all trenches which are required for the installation of 2 pipes, culverts, manholes and drainage structures. 3 4 B. Trench width at the ground surface may vary depending on depth, type of soil, 5 and position of surface structures. The minimum clear width of the trench, 6 sheeted or unsheeted, measured at the springline of the pipe should be 1 foot 7 greater than the outside diameter of the pipe. The maximum recommended clear 8 width of the trench at the top of the pipe is equal to the pipe outside diameter 9 plus 2 feet. If the maximum recommended trench width must be exceeded or if 10 the pipe is installed in a compacted embankment, then pipe embedment should 11 be compacted to a point of at least 2 -1/2 pipe diameters from the pipe on both 12 sides of the pipe or to the trench walls, whichever is less. 13 14 C. The trench may be excavated by machinery to, or just below the designated 15 subgrade provided that the material remaining in the bottom of the trench is no 16 more than slightly disturbed. 17 18 D. Rock shall be removed to a minimum of 8 -in. clearance around the bottom and 19 sides of the pipe being laid. 20 21 E. The trench bottom should be constructed to provide a firm, stable and uniform 22 support for the full length of the pipe. Bell holes should be provided at each joint 23 to permit proper assembly and pipe support. Any part of the trench bottom 24 excavated below grade should be backfilled to grade and should be compacted 25 as required to provide firm pipe support. When an unstable subgrade condition 26 is encountered that could provide inadequate pipe support, additional trench 27 depth should be excavated and refilled with suitable foundation material. Ledge 28 rock, boulders, and large stones should be removed to provide 4- inches of sail 29 cushion of all sides of the pipe and accessories. 30 31 3.06 PIPE BEDDING 32 33 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install pipe on the type of bedding shown on the 34 Drawings or as specified by the Engineer but shall be a Type 4 bedding at a 35 minimum. Regardless of the type of bedding used by the Contractor, holes in the 36 trench shall be provided to receive the pipe bell. The hole excavated shall be 37 sufficient to relieve pipe bells of all Toads and yet provide support over the total 38 length of the pipe barrel. 39 40 B. Pipe should be installed with proper bedding providing uniform longitudinal 41 support under the pipe. Backfill material should be worked under the sides of the 42 pipe to provide satisfactory haunching. All pipe bedding material should be 43 select fill. Sharp stones and crushed rock (larger than 3 /4 -in.), which could cause 44 significant scratching or abrasion of the pipe, should be excluded from the 45 embedment material. Proper compaction procedures should be exercised. EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -5 04/26/11 1 C. 2 3 4 5 3.07 BACKFILLING 6 7 A. 8 9 10 B. 11 12 13 14 15 C. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 F. 28 29 30 Where required to provide a firm bedding for the pipe, and with the approval of the Engineer, a crushed stone bedding shall be provided from a depth of 12" below the pipe up to the pipe haunches. E. As soon as practicable after the pipe has been laid, joined and bedded, backfilling shall begin and thereafter be prosecuted expeditiously. Selected backfill material free from stones and other foreign material shall be placed to a depth of 1 -foot over the top of the pipe. Backfill shall be thoroughly compacted by hand - tamping as placed. The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled in loose 12" lifts of common or structural fill as applicable. Any space remaining between the pipe and side of the trench shall be packed full by hand shovel with selected earth, free from stones having a diameter greater than 2 -in., and thoroughly compacted with a tamper as fast as placed up to a level of one (1) foot above the top of the pipe. The filling shall be carried up evenly on both sides with at least one person tamping for each person shoveling material into the trench. The remainder of the trench above the compacted backfill, as just described shall be filled thoroughly compacted by rolling, ramming, as the Engineer may direct, sufficiently to prevent subsequent settling. Backfill around manholes shall be selected material and thoroughly compacted. All backfill shall be compacted, especially under and over pipes connected to the structures. 31 G. All fill shall be placed in a dry condition. 32 33 3.08 COMPACTION 34 35 A. 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 Gravel and crushed stone in open areas, shall be placed in layers not to exceed eight (8) inches in depth as measured before compaction. Each layer shall be compacted by a minimum of four (4) coverages. Incidental compaction due to traffic by construction equipment will not be credited toward the required minimum four (4) coverages. Fill shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12- inches and should be compacted to a minimum of 98% of the maximum modified Proctor dry density, as established in accordance with ASTM D -1557. Density tests should be performed in each fill lift to confirm compaction before the next lift is placed. EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C. Areas adjacent to structures and other confined inaccessible to the roller or truck 2 shall be compacted with approved hand guided mechanical compaction 3 equipment. 4 5 D. Backfill and compaction for manholes and drainage structures shall be in 6 accordance with the requirements of Section 02220. 7 8 E. It is the intention that the fill materials, with respect to moisture, be used in the 9 condition they are excavated insofar as this is practicable. Material which is too 10 wet shall be spread on the fill area and permitted to dry, assisted by harrowing if 11 necessary, until the moisture content is reduced enough to allow for proper 12 compaction as determined as determined by the Engineer. Muck, mud, or 13 organic material shall not be utilized as trench fill. Such matter shall be removed 14 from the trench and replaced with suitable fill material. 15 16 3.09 GRADING 17 18 A. Grading shall be performed at such places as are indicated on the Drawings, to 19 the lines, grades, and elevations shown or as directed by the Engineer and shall 20 be made in such a manner that the requirements for formation of embankments 21 can be followed. All unacceptable material encountered, or whatever nature 22 within the limits indicated, shall be removed and disposed of as directed. During 23 the process of excavation, the grade shall be maintained in such condition that it 24 will be well drained at all times. When directed, temporary drains and drainage 25 ditches shall be installed to intercept or divert surface water which may affect the 26 progress or condition of the work. 27 28 B. The right is reserved to make minute adjustments or revisions in lines or grades if 29 found necessary as the work progresses, due to discrepancies on the Drawings 30 of in order to obtain satisfactory construction. 31 32 C. Stones or rock fragments larger than 4 -in. in their greatest dimensions will not be 33 permitted in the top 6 -in. of the subgrade line. 34 35 D. All fill slopes shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross - section and alignment 36 shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 37 38 E. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be jarred loose or 39 otherwise removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut and fill slopes shall 40 be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross - section and alignment shown on the 41 Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 42 43 3.10 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE SURPLUS MATERIAL 44 45 A. Unsuitable and surplus excavated materials and pavement shall become the 46 property of the Contractor and removed and disposed of by him off the project 47 site. EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -7 04/26/11 1 B. Suitable excavated materials may be used for fill or backfill if it meets the 2 Specification for common fill and is approved by the Engineer. Excavated 3 material so approved may by neatly stockpiled at the site where designated by 4 the Engineer provided there is an area available that will not interfere with the 5 operation of the plant or inconvenience traffic or adjoining property owners. If 6 space limitations do not permit stockpiling on the site, the Contractor will be 7 required to make arrangements for off -site stockpiling. Transport of such 8 material from and to the immediate site including any stockpiling agreements 9 shall by entirely at the Contractor's expense and shall not constitute grounds for 10 additional payment. 11 12 C. Surplus excavated material shall be used to fill depressions or other purposes as 13 the Engineer may direct. 14 15 3.11 DISPOSAL AND REPLACING OF ROCK 16 17 A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all pieces of rock which are not 18 suitable for use in other parts of the work. Rock disposed of by hauling away to 19 spoil areas is to be replaced and approved surplus excavation obtained 20 elsewhere on the site, insofar as it is available. Any deficiency in the backfill 21 material shall be made up with acceptable material from outside sources. 22 23 B. Rock may be used in fill only with the approval of the Engineer. 24 25 26 END OF SECTION EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -8 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02485 2 3 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily return all 10 construction areas to their original conditions or better. 11 12 B. Work includes furnishing and placing seed, sod, fertilizer, gravel, concrete, 13 asphalt, planting, watering and maintenance until acceptance by the Owner. 14 15 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 16 17 A. Requirements 18 19 It is the intent of this Specification that the Contractor is obligated to deliver a 20 satisfactory stand of grass as specified. If necessary, the Contractor shall repeat 21 any or all of the work, including grading, fertilizing, watering, and seeding or 22 sodding at no additional cost to the Owner until a satisfactory stand is obtained. 23 24 B. Satisfactory Stand 25 26 For purposes of grassing, a satisfactory stand of grass is herein defined as a full 27 lawn cover over areas to be seeded or sodded, with grass free of weeds, alive 28 and growing, leaving no bare spots larger than 3/4 sq. yd. within a radius of 10 ft. 29 30 31 1.03 SUBMITTALS 32 33 A. Provide technical data as required for shop drawings on all materials or 34 installation procedures required under this Section and in accordance with 35 Section 01300 and 01340. 36 37 B. Submit representative topsoil samples for analysis by a private laboratory to 38 determine nutrient deficiencies and outline a proper fertilization program. 39 40 41 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 42 43 2.01 MATERIALS 44 45 A. Fertilizer 46 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485 -1 04/26/11 1 1 Fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer, the elements of which are derived 2 from organic sources. Fertilizer shall be a standard product complying 3 with State and Federal fertilizer laws. 4 5 2. Percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus and potash shall be based on 6 laboratory tests on soils outlined in Paragraph 1.03B and approved by the 7 Engineer. For purpose of bidding, assume 6% nitrogen, 6% phosphorus 8 and 6% potash by weight. At least 50% of the total nitrogen shall contain 9 no less than 3% water - insoluble nitrogen. 10 11 3. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site, mixed as specified, in the original 12 unopened standard size bags showing weight, analysis and name of 13 manufacturer. Containers shall bear the manufacturer's guaranteed 14 statement of analysis, or a manufacturer's certificate of compliance 15 covering analysis shall be furnished to the Engineer. Store fertilizer in a 16 weatherproof place and in such a manner that it will be kept dry and its 17 effectiveness will not be impaired. 18 19 4. Superphosphate shall be composed of finely ground phosphate rock as 20 commonly used for agricultural purposes containing not less than 20% 21 available phosphoric acid. 22 23 B. Grass seed shall be the same as existed prior to construction or as approved by 24 the Engineer and shall be 99 percent minimum purity, 80 percent minimum 25 germination and 1 percent maximum weed seed, labeled in accordance with U.S. 26 Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under Federal Seed Act in 27 effect. Seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or 28 storage shall not be acceptable. 29 30 C. All disturbed areas with the limits of construction shall received vegetative 31 treatment after final grading in accordance with these plans or landscaping plans. 32 Disturbed areas not specifically designated with a vegetative cover shall be 33 vegetated as follows: 34 35 1. Side slopes constructed at 4:1 (H to V) shall be sodded with argentine 36 Bahia or seeded and then covered with an erosion control blanket. The 37 blanket shall be the S75BN blanket as manufactured by North America 38 Gree or approved equal. 39 40 2. Side slopes less than 4:1 (H to V) shall be seeded and mulched. 41 42 D. Sodding 43 44 1. Sod shall be Argentine Bahia of firm texture having a compacted growth 45 and good root development as approved. 46 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485-2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. Sod shall be certified to meet Florida State Plant Board Specifications, 2 absolutely true to varietal type, and free from weeds or other objectionable 3 vegetation, fungus, insects and disease of any kind. 4 5 3. Before being cut and lifted the sod shall have been mowed 3 times with 6 the final mowing not more than a week before cutting into uniform 7 dimensions. 8 9 E. Mulch shall be fresh hay. Rate of application specified herein shall correspond to 10 depth not Tess than 1 inch or more than 3 inches according to texture and 11 moisture content of mulch material. 12 13 F. It is the Contractor's responsibility to water the site, as required during seeding 14 and sodding operations and through the maintenance period and until the work 15 is accepted. The Contractor shall make whatever arrangements may be 16 necessary to ensure an adequate supply of water to meet the needs for his 17 work. The Contractor shall also furnish all necessary hose, equipment, 18 attachments and accessories for the adequate irrigation of lawns and planted 19 areas as may be required. 20 21 G. Asphaltic concrete surface shall consist of either Type S -1 or Type S -3 asphaltic 22 concrete meeting the specified criteria outlined by the Florida Department of 23 Transportation Specifications, and Placement & Compaction Procedures. 24 25 H. Base material shall consist of either limerock or shell material complying with 26 FDOT specifications and meeting a minimum LBR of 100. 27 28 29 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 30 31 3.01 INSTALLATION 32 33 A. Following the subgrade preparation, the Contractor shall commence work on 34 lawns and grassed areas. Areas to be seeded or sodded shall be free from soft 35 spots and uneven grades. Apply 20 lbs. of 12 -3 -6 fertilizer per 1,000 sq. ft. 36 37 B. Seeded and sodded areas shall be protected against the traffic or other use by 38 placing warning signs or erecting barricades as necessary. Any areas damaged 39 prior to actual acceptance by the Owner shall be repaired by the Contractor as 40 directed by the Engineer. 41 42 3.02 LAWN BED PREPARATION 43 44 A. Areas to be sodded shall be cleared of all rough grass, weeds, and debris and 45 the ground brought to an even grade as approved. 46 47 B. The soil shall then be thoroughly tilled to a minimum 8 -inch depth. SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485 -3 04/26/11 1 2 C. Superphosphate at a rate for bidding purposes of 5 pounds per 1,000 square foot 3 and complete fertilizer at a rate for bidding purposes of 16 pounds per 1000 4 square foot shall be evenly distributed over entire area and cross - disked into a 5 depth of 4 -6 inches. 6 7 D. The areas shall then be brought to proper grade, free of sticks, stones, or other 8 foreign matter over 1 -inch in diameter of dimension. The surface shall conform 9 to finish grade, less the thickness of sod, free of water- retaining depressions, the 10 soil friable and of uniformly fill texture. 11 12 3.03 SOD HANDLING AND INSTALLATION 13 14 A. A one -foot wide strip of sod shall be provided around all structures, except 15 fencing, along the edges of slabs and along the edge of pavement. 16 17 B. During delivery, prior to planting, and during the planting of the lawn areas, the 18 sod panels at all times be protected from excessive drying and unnecessary 19 exposure of the roots to the sun. All sod shall be stacked during construction 20 and planting so as not to be damaged by sweating or excessive heat and 21 moisture. 22 23 C. After completion of soil conditioning as specified above, sod panels shall be laid 24 tightly together so as to make a solid sodded lawn area. On mounds and other 25 slopes, the long dimension of the sod shall be laid perpendicular to the slope. 26 Immediately following sod laying the lawn areas shall be rolled with a lawn roller 27 customarily used for such purposes, and then thoroughly watered. 28 29 D. Bring the sod edge in a neat, clean manner to the edge of all paving and shrub 30 areas. Top dressing with approved, clean, weed free, sand may be required at 31 no additional cost to the Owner if deemed necessary by the Engineer. 32 33 3.07 CLEANUP 34 35 A. Soil, mulch, seed, or similar materials spilled onto paved areas shall be removed 36 promptly, keeping those areas as clean as possible at all times. Upon 37 completion of seeding and sodding operations, all excess soil, stones, and debris 38 remaining shall be removed from the construction areas. 39 40 3.08 MAINTENANCE 41 42 A. Any existing landscape items damaged or altered during construction by the 43 Contractor shall be restored or replaced as directed by the Engineer. 44 45 B. Maintain landscape work until Owner accepts project. Watering, weeding, 46 cultivating, restoration of grade, mowing and trimming grass, protection from 47 insects and diseases, fertilizing and similar operations as needed to ensure SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 normal growth and good health for live plant material shall be the responsibility of 2 the Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner. Sodded areas shall 3 receive no less than 1.5 inches of water per week. 4 5 3.09 REPAIRS TO LAWN AREAS DISTURBED BY CONTRACTOR'S OPERATIONS 6 7 8 9 10 11 A. Lawn areas planted under this Contract and all lawn areas damaged by the Contractor's operation shall be repaired by proper soil preparation, fertilizing, and reseeding, in accordance with these Specifications. 12 13 END SECTION SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485 -5 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 03600 2 3 GROUT 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install 10 grout complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 11 12 1.02 SUBMITTALS 13 14 A. Submit to the Engineer, shop drawings and product data showing materials of 15 construction and details of installation for: 16 17 1. Commercially manufactured non- shrink cementitious grout. The 18 submittal shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage 19 requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature 20 considerations, conformity to required ASTM standards and Material 21 Safety Data Sheet. 22 23 2. Commercially manufactured non - shrink epoxy grout. The submittal 24 shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product 25 life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity 26 to required ASTM standards and Material Safety Data Sheet. 27 28 29 30 31 32 4. Concrete grout. The submittal shall include the mix design, constituent 33 quantities per cubic yard, the water /cement ratio, and fiber 34 reinforcement. 35 36 B. Laboratory Test Reports 37 38 1. Submit laboratory test data as requested by the Engineer. 39 40 C. Certifications 41 42 1. Where applicable, certify that commercially manufactured grout 43 products and concrete grout admixtures are suitable for use in contact 44 with potable water after 30 days curing. 3. Cement grout. The submittal shall include the type and brand of the cement, the gradation of the fine aggregate, product data on any proposed admixtures and the proposed mix of the grout. 45 46 D. Qualifications 47 GROUT 03600 -1 04/26/11 1 1 Grout manufacturers shall submit documentation that they have at least 2 10 years experience in the production and use of the proposed grouts 3 to be supplied. 4 5 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 6 7 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 8 9 1. ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and 10 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, 11 Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes 12 13 2. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of 14 Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and 15 Polymer Concretes 16 17 3. ASTM C827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early 18 Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures 19 20 4. ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, 21 Hydraulic- Cement Grout (Non- shrink) 22 23 B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Standard (CRD) 24 25 1. CRD C -621 - Corps of Engineers Specification for Non- shrink Grout 26 27 C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect 28 at the time of bid opening shall apply. 29 30 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 31 32 A. Qualifications 33 34 1. Grout manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the 35 production and use of the type of grout proposed for the work. 36 37 B. Pre - installation Conference 38 39 1. Where specifically required, and well in advance of grouting, conduct a 40 pre - installation meeting to review the requirements for surface 41 preparation, mixing, placing and curing procedures for each product 42 proposed for use. Parties concerned with grouting shall be notified of 43 the meeting at least 10 days prior to its scheduled date. 44 45 C. Services of Manufacturer's Representative 46 47 1. A qualified field technician of the non - shrink grout manufacturer, GROUT 03600 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 specifically trained in the installation of the products, shall attend the 2 pre - installation conference and shall be present for the initial installation 3 of each type of non - shrink grout. Additional services shall also be 4 provided, as required, to correct installation problems. 5 6 D. Field Testing 7 8 1. All field testing and inspection services required shall be provided by 9 the Owner. The Contractor shall assist in the sampling of materials and 10 shall provide any ladders, platforms, etc, for access to the work. The 11 methods of testing shall comply in detail with the applicable ASTM 12 Standards. 13 14 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 15 16 A. Deliver materials to the jobsite in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled 17 with the manufacturer's name, product identification, batch numbers and 18 printed instructions. 19 20 B. Store materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 21 Total storage time from date of manufacture to date of installation shall be 22 limited to 6 months or the manufacturer's recommended storage time, 23 whichever is less. 24 25 C. Material that becomes damp or otherwise unacceptable shall be immediately 26 removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at no additional 27 cost to the Owner. 28 29 D. Non- shrink, cement -based grouts shall be delivered as pre - blended, 30 prepackaged mixes requiring only the addition of water. 31 32 E. Non - shrink epoxy grouts shall be delivered as pre - measured, prepackaged, 33 three component systems requiring only blending as directed by the 34 manufacturer. 35 36 1.06 DEFINITIONS 37 38 A. Non - shrink Grout: A commercially manufactured product that does not shrink 39 in either the plastic or hardened state, is dimensionally stable in the hardened 40 state and bonds to a clean base plate. 41 42 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 43 44 2.01 GENERAL 45 46 A. The use of a manufacturer's name and product or catalog number is for the 47 purpose of establishing the standard of quality desired. GROUT 03600 -3 04/26/11 1 2 B. Like materials shall be the products of one manufacturer or supplier in order to 3 provide standardization of appearance. 4 5 2.02 MATERIALS 6 7 A. Non - shrink Cementitious Grout 8 9 1. Non - shrink cementitious grouts shall meet or exceed the requirements 10 of ASTM C1107, Grades B or C and CRD C -621. Grouts shall be 11 Portland cement based, contain a pre - proportioned blend of selected 12 aggregates and shrinkage compensating agents and shall require only 13 the addition of water. Non - shrink cementitious grouts shall not contain 14 expansive cement or metallic particles. The grouts shall exhibit no 15 shrinkage when tested in conformity with ASTM C827. 16 17 2. General purpose non - shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the 18 standards stated above and shall be SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Set 19 Grout by Master Builders, Inc.; Gilco Construction Grout by Gifford Hill 20 & Co.; Euco NS by The Euclid Chemical Co.; NBEC Grout by U. S. 21 Grout Corp. or equal. 22 23 3. Flowable (Precision) non - shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the 24 standards stated above and shall be Masterflow 928 by Master 25 Builders, Inc.; Hi-Flow Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co.; SikaGrout 212 26 by Sika Corp.; Supreme Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Five Star Grout by 27 U. S. Grout Corp. or equal. 28 29 B. Non - shrink Epoxy Grout 30 31 1. Non - shrink epoxy -based grout shall be a pre - proportioned, three 32 component, 100 percent solids system consisting of epoxy resin, 33 hardener, and blended aggregate. It shall have a compressive strength 34 of 14,000 psi in 7 days when tested in conformity with ASTM D695 and 35 have a maximum thermal expansion of 30 x 10 -6 when tested in 36 conformity with ASTM C531. The grout shall be Ceilcote 648 CP by 37 Master Builders Inc.; Five Star Epoxy Grout by U.S. Grout Corp.; 38 Sikadur 42 Grout -Pak by Sika Corp.; High Strength Epoxy Grout by the 39 Euclid Chemical Co. or equal. 40 41 C. Cement Grout 42 43 1. Cement grouts shall be a mixture of one part portland cement 44 conforming to ASTM C150, Types I, II, or III and 1 to 2 parts sand 45 conforming to ASTM C33 with sufficient water to place the grout. The 46 water content shall be sufficient to impart workability to the grout but not 47 to the degree that it will allow the grout to flow. GROUT 03600 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 D. Concrete Grout 3 4 1. Concrete grout shall proportioned with cement, [pozzalan,] coarse and 5 fine aggregates, water, water reducer and air entraining agent to 6 produce a mix having an average strength of 2900 psi at 28 days, or 7 2500 psi nominal strength. Coarse aggregate size shall be [3/8] [1 /2] -in 8 maximum. Slump should not exceed 5 -in and should be as low as 9 practical yet still retain sufficient workability. 10 11 2. Synthetic reinforcing fibers shall be added to the concrete grout mix at 12 the rate of 1.5 Ibs of fibers per cubic yard of grout. Fibers shall be 13 added from the manufacturer's premeasured bags and according to the 14 manufacturer's recommendations in a manner that will ensure complete 15 dispersion of the fiber bundles as single monofilaments within the 16 concrete grout. 17 18 E. Water 19 20 1. Potable water, free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic 21 matter, or other deleterious substances. 22 23 PART 3 - EXECUTION 24 25 3.01 PREPARATION 26 27 A. Grout shall be placed over cured concrete which has attained its full design 28 strength unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 29 30 B. Concrete surfaces to receive grout shall be clean and sound; free of ice, frost, 31 dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, laitance and paints and free of all loose 32 material or foreign matter that may affect the bond or performance of the 33 grout. 34 35 C. Roughen concrete surfaces by chipping, sandblasting, or other mechanical 36 means to ensure bond of the grout to the concrete. Remove loose or broken 37 concrete. Irregular voids or projecting coarse aggregate need not be removed 38 if they are sound, free of laitance and firmly embedded into the parent 39 concrete. 40 41 1. Air compressors used to clean surfaces in contact with grout shall be 42 the oil -less type or equipped with an oil trap in the air line to prevent oil 43 from being blown onto the surface. 44 45 D. Remove all loose rust, oil or other deleterious substances from metal 46 embedments or bottom of base plates prior to the installation of the grout. 47 GROUT 03600-5 04/26/11 1 1 E. Concrete surfaces shall be washed clean and then kept moist for at least 24 1 2 hours prior to the placement of cementitious or cement grout. Saturation may 3 be achieved by covering the concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of a I 4 soaker hose, flooding the surface, or other method acceptable to the Engineer. 5 Upon completion of the 24 hour period, visible water shall be removed from 6 the surface prior to grouting. The use of an adhesive bonding agent in lieu of I 7 surface saturation shall only be used when approved by the Engineer for each 8 specific location of grout installation. 9 10 F. Epoxy -based grouts do not require the saturation of the concrete substrate. 11 Surfaces in contact with epoxy grout shall be completely dry before grouting. 12 I 13 G. Construct grout forms or other leak -proof containment as required. Forms 14 shall be lined or coated with release agents recommended by the grout 15 16 manufacturer. Forms shall be of adequate strength, securely anchored in I place and shored to resist the forces imposed by the grout and its placement. 17 18 1. Forms for epoxy grout shall be designed to allow the formation of a I 19 hydraulic head and shall have chamfer strips built into forms. 20 21 22 H. Level and align the structural or equipment bearing plates in accordance with I the structural requirements and the recommendations of the equipment 23 manufacturer. 24 I 25 I. Equipment shall be supported during alignment and installation of grout by 26 shims, wedges, blocks or other approved means. The shims, wedges and 27 blocking devices shall be prevented from bonding to the grout by appropriate 1 28 bond breaking coatings and removed after grouting unless otherwise approved 29 by the Engineer. 30 1 31 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 32 33 A. Mix, apply and cure products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's I 34 recommendations and this Section. 35 36 B, Have sufficient manpower and equipment available for rapid and continuous I 37 mixing and placing. Keep all necessary tools and materials ready and close at 38 hand. 39 1 40 C. Maintain temperatures of the foundation plate, supporting concrete, and grout 41 between 40 and 90 degrees F during grouting and for at least 24 hours I 42 thereafter or as recommended by the grout manufacturer, whichever is longer. 43 Take precautions to minimize differential heating or cooling of base plates and 44 grout during the curing period. 45 1 46 D. Take special precautions for hot weather or cold weather grouting as 47 recommended by the manufacturer when ambient temperatures and /or the 1 GROUT 03600 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 temperature of the materials in contact with the grout are outside of the 60 and 2 90 degrees F range. 3 4 E. Install grout in a manner that will preserve the isolation between the elements 5 on either side of the joint where grout is placed in the vicinity of an expansion 6 or control joint. 7 8 F. Reflect all existing underlying expansion, control and construction joints 9 through the grout. 10 11 3.03 INSTALLATION - CEMENT GROUTS AND NONSHRINK CEMENTITIOUS 12 GROUTS 13 14 A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add cement, 15 sand, pea gravel or admixtures without prior approval by the Engineer. 16 17 B. Avoid mixing by hand. Mixing in a mortar mixer (with moving blades) is 18 recommended. Pre -wet the mixer and empty excess water. Add 19 premeasured amount of water for mixing, followed by the grout. Begin with 20 the minimum amount of water recommended by the manufacturer and then 21 add the minimum additional water required to obtain workability. Do not 22 exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended water content. 23 24 C. Placements greater than 3 -in in depth shall include the addition of clean, 25 washed pea gravel to the grout mix when approved by the manufacturer. 26 Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for the size and amount of 27 aggregate to be added. 28 29 D Place grout into the designated areas in a manner that will avoid segregation 30 or entrapment of air. Do not vibrate grout to release air or to consolidate the 31 material. Placement should proceed in a manner that will ensure the filling of 32 all spaces and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. 33 Provide grout holes as necessary. 34 35 E. Place grout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Do not place cement 36 grouts in layers. Do not add additional water to the mix (retemper) after initial 37 stiffening. 38 39 F. Just before the grout reaches its final set, cut back the grout to the substrate at 40 a 45 degree angle from the lower edge of bearing plate unless otherwise 41 approved by the Engineer. Finish this surface with a wood float (brush) finish. 42 43 G. Begin curing immediately after form removal, cutback, and finishing. Keep 44 grout moist and within its recommended placement temperature range for at 45 least 24 hours after placement or longer if recommended by the manufacturer. 46 Saturate the grout surface by use of wet burlap, soaker hoses, ponding or 47 other approved means. Provide sunshades as necessary. If drying winds GROUT 03600 -7 04/26/11 1 inhibit the ability of a given curing method to keep grout moist, erect wind 2 breaks until wind is no longer a problem or curing is finished. 3 4 3.04 INSTALLATION - NONSHRINK EPDXY GROUTS 5 6 A. Mix in accordance with the procedures recommended by the manufacturer. 7 Do not vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency 8 of the grout mix. Do not overmix. Mix full batches only to maintain proper 9 proportions of resin, hardener and aggregate. 10 11 B. Monitor ambient weather conditions and contact the grout manufacturer for 12 special placement procedures to be used for temperatures below 60 or above 13 90 degrees F. 14 15 C. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid trapping 16 air. Placement methods shall ensure the filling of all spaces and provide full 17 contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as 18 necessary. 19 20 D. Minimize "shoulder" length (extension of grout horizontally beyond base plate). 21 In no case shall the shoulder length of the grout be greater than the grout 22 thickness. 23 24 E. Finish grout by puddling to cover all aggregate and provide a smooth finish. 25 Break bubbles and smooth the top surface of the grout in conformity with the 26 manufacturer's recommendations. 27 28 F. Epoxy grouts are self curing and do not require the application of water. 29 Maintain the formed grout within its recommended placement temperature 30 range for at least 24 hours after placing, or longer if recommended by the 31 manufacturer. 32 33 3.05 INSTALLATION - CONCRETE GROUT 34 35 A. Screed underlying concrete to the grade shown on the Drawings. Provide the 36 surface with a broomed finish, aligned to drain. Protect and keep the surface 37 clean until placement of concrete grout. 38 39 B. Remove the debris and clean the surface by sweeping and vacuuming of all 40 dirt and other foreign materials. Wash the tank slab using a strong jet of 41 water. Flushing of debris into tank drain lines will not be permitted. 42 43 C. Saturate the concrete surface for at least 24 hours prior to placement of the 44 concrete grout. Saturation may be maintained by ponding, by the use or 45 soaker hoses, or by other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Remove 46 excess water just prior to placement of the concrete grout. Place a cement 47 slurry immediately ahead of the concrete grout so that the slurry is moist when GROUT 03600 -8 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 the grout is placed. Work the slurry over the surface with a broom until it is 2 coated with approximately 1/16 to 1 /8 -in thick cement paste. A bonding grout 3 composed of 1 part portland cement, 1.5 parts fine sand, an approved bonding 4 admixture and water, mixed to achieve the consistency of thick paint, may be 5 substituted for the cement slurry. 6 7 D. Place concrete grout to final grade using the scraper mechanism as a guide 8 for surface elevation and to ensure high and low spots are eliminated. Unless 9 specifically approved by the equipment manufacturer, mechanical scraper 10 mechanisms shall not be used as a finishing machine or screed. 11 12 E. Provide grout control joints as indicated on the Drawings. 13 14 F. Finish and cure the concrete grout as specified for cast -in -place concrete. 15 16 3.06 SCHEDULE 17 18 A. The following list indicates where the particular types of grout are to be used: 19 20 1. General purpose non - shrink cementitious grout: Use at all locations 21 where non shrink grout is called for on the plans except for base plates 22 greater in area than 3 -ft wide by 3 -ft long and except for the setting of 23 anchor rods, anchor bolts or reinforcing steel in concrete. 24 25 2. Foowable non - shrink cementitious grout: Use under all base plates 26 greater in area than 3 -ft by 3 -ft. Use at all locations indicated to receive 27 flowable non - shrink grout by the Drawings. The Contractor, at his /her 28 option and convenience, may also substitute flowable non - shrink grout 29 for general purpose non - shrink cementitious grout. 30 31 3. Non - shrink epoxy grout: Use for the setting of anchor rods, anchor 32 bolts and reinforcing steel in concrete and for all locations specifically 33 indicated to receive epoxy grout. 34 35 4. Cement grout: Cement grout may be used for grouting of incidental 36 base plates for structural and miscellaneous steel such as post base 37 plates for platforms, base plates for beams, etc. It shall not be used 38 when nonshrink grout is specifically called for on the Drawings or for 39 grouting of primary structural steel members such as columns and 40 girders. 41 42 5. Concrete grout: Use for overlaying the base concrete under scraper 43 mechanisms of clarifiers to allow more control in placing the surface 44 grade. 45 46 END OF SECTION GROUT 03600 -9 04/26/11 1 THIST PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK GROUT 03600 -10 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 03740 2 3 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and cut, 10 remove, repair or otherwise modify parts of existing concrete structures or 11 appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Work 12 under this Section shall also include bonding new concrete to existing 13 concrete. 14 15 1.02 SUBMITTALS 16 17 A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01420, a Schedule of 18 Demolition and the detailed methods of demolition to be used at each location. 19 20 B. Submit manufacturer's technical literature on all product brands proposed for 21 use, to the Engineer for review. The submittal shall include the manufacturer's 22 installation and /or application instructions. 23 24 C. When substitutions for acceptable brands of materials specified herein are 25 proposed, submit brochures and technical data of the proposed substitutions 26 to the Engineer for approval before delivery to the project. 27 28 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 29 30 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 31 32 1. ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy- Resin -Base Bonding 33 Systems for Concrete. 34 35 2. ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy -Resin 36 Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Sheer. 37 38 3. ASTM C883 - Standard Test Method for Effective Shrinkage of 39 Epoxy -Resin Systems Used with Concrete. 40 41 4. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 42 43 5. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 44 45 6. ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of 46 Rigid Plastics. 47 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -1 04/26/11 1 7 ASTM D732 - Standard Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by 2 Punch Tool. 3 4 8. ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of 5 Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating 6 Materials. 7 8 B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect 9 at the time of bid opening shall apply. 10 11 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 12 13 A. No existing structure or concrete shall be shifted, cut, removed, or otherwise 14 altered until authorization is given by the Engineer. 15 16 B. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making 17 openings in existing structures, all precautions shall be taken and all 18 necessary barriers, shoring and bracing and other protective devices shall be 19 erected to prevent damage to the structures beyond the limits necessary for 20 the new work, protect personnel, control dust and to prevent damage to the 21 structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted, 22 shown or specified, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete. 23 24 C. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified products shall 25 have a minimum of 10 years experience in the manufacture of such products 26 and shall have an ongoing program of training, certifying and technically 27 supporting the Contractor's personnel. 28 29 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 30 31 A. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with the 32 manufacturer's name, labels, product identification and batch numbers. 33 34 B. Store and condition the specified product as recommended by the 35 manufacturer. 36 37 38 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 39 40 2.01 MATERIALS 41 42 A. General 43 44 1. Materials shall comply with this Section and any state or local 45 regulations. 46 47 B. Epoxy Bonding Agent 48 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. General 2 3 a. The epoxy bonding agent shall be a two - component, 4 solvent -free, asbestos -free moisture insensitive epoxy resin 5 material used to bond plastic concrete to hardened concrete 6 complying with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type II and the 7 additional requirements specified herein. 8 9 2. Material 10 11 a. Properties of the cured material: 12 13 1) Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 8500 psi minimum 14 at 28 days. 15 16 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 4000 psi minimum at 14 17 days. 18 19 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 20 6,300 psi minimum at 14 days. 21 22 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 5000 psi minimum at 14 23 days. 24 25 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): One 26 percent maximum at 14 days. 27 28 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882) Hardened to Plastic: 1500 29 psi minimum at 14 days moist cure. 30 31 7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM C883): Passes Test. 32 33 8) Color: Gray. 34 35 3. Approved manufacturer's include: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - 36 Sikadur 32, Hi -Mod; Master Builder's, Cleveland, OH - Concresive 37 Liquid (LPL) or equal. 38 39 C. Epoxy Paste 40 41 1. General 42 43 a. Epoxy Paste shall be a two- component, solvent -free, asbestos 44 free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to bond 45 dissimilar materials to concrete such as setting railing posts, 46 dowels, anchor bolts and all-threads into hardened concrete and 47 shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type 1, MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -3 04/26/11 1 Grade 3 and the additional requirements specified herein. It may 2 also be used to patch existing surfaces where the glue line is 3 1 /8 -in or less,. 4 5 2. Material 6 7 a. Properties of the cured material: 8 9 1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi 10 minimum at 28 days. 11 12 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 3,000 psi minimum at 14 13 days. Elongation at Break - 0.3 percent minimum. 14 15 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 16 3,700 psi minimum at 14 days. 17 18 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 2,800 psi minimum at 14 19 days. 20 21 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 1.0 percent maximum at 22 7 days. 23 24 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,000 psi at 14 days moist 25 cure. 26 27 7) Color: Concrete grey. 28 29 3. Approved manufacturer's include: 30 31 a. Overhead applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - 32 Sikadur Hi -mod LV 31; Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH - 33 Concresive 1438 or equal. 34 35 b. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, N.J. - Sikadur Hi -mod LV 32; 36 Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH -- Concresive 1438 or equal. 37 38 D. Non - Shrink Precision Cement Grout, Non - Shrink Cement Grout, Non - Shrink 39 Epoxy Grout and Polymer Modified mortar are included in Section 03600 40 GROUT. 41 42 E. Adhesive Capsule type anchor system shall be equal to the HVA adhesive 43 Anchoring System by Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK. The capsule shall 44 consist of a sealed glass capsule containing premeasured amounts of a 45 polyester or vinylester resin, quartz sand aggregate and a hardener contained 46 in a separate vial within the capsule. 47 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F. Acrylic Latex Bonding Agent 2 3 G. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive 4 5 1. General 6 7 a. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive shall be a two - component, 8 solvent -free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material suitable 9 for crack grouting by injection or gravity feed. It shall be 10 formulated for the specific size of opening or crack being 11 injected. 12 13 b. All concrete surfaces containing potable water or water to be 14 treated for potable use that are repaired by the epoxy adhesive 15 injection system shall be coated with an acceptable epoxy 16 coating approved by the FDA for use in contact with potable 17 water. 18 19 2. Material 20 21 a. Properties of the cured material 22 23 1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi 24 minimum at 28 days. 25 26 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 5,300 psi minimum at 14 27 days. Elongation at Break - 2 to 5 percent. 28 29 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 30 12,000 psi minimum at 14 days (gravity); 4,600 psi 31 minimum at 14 days (injection) 32 33 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 3,700 psi minimum at 14 34 days. 35 36 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): 1.5 percent 37 maximum at 7 days. 38 39 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,400 psi at 2 days dry; 40 2,000 psi at 14 days dry plus 12 days moist. 41 42 7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM 883): Passes Test. 43 44 3. Approved manufacturer's include: 45 46 a. For standard applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - 47 Sikadur Hi -Mod; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH - MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -5 04/26/11 1 Concressive 1380 or equal. 2 3 b For very thin applications; Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - 4 Sikadur Hi -Mod LV; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH - 5 Concressive 1468 or equal. 6 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 8 9 3.01 GENERAL 10 11 A. Cut, repair, reuse, demolish, excavate or otherwise modify parts of the existing 12 structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, 13 or necessary to permit completion of the Work. Finishes, joints, 14 reinforcements, sealants, etc, are specified in respective Sections. All work 15 shall comply with other requirements of this of Section and as shown on the 16 Drawings. 17 18 B. All commercial products specified in this Section shall be stored, mixed and 19 applied in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 20 21 C. In all cases where concrete is repaired in the vicinity of an expansion joint or 22 control joint the repairs shall be made to preserve the isolation between 23 components on either side of the joint. 24 25 D. When drilling holes for dowels /bolts at new or existing concrete, drilling shall 26 stop if rebar is encountered. As approved by the Engineer, the hole location 27 shall be relocated to avoid rebar. Rebar shall not be cut without prior approval 28 by the Engineer. Where possible, rebar locations shall be identified prior to 29 drilling using "rebar locators" so that drilled hole locations may be adjusted to 30 avoid rebar interference. 31 32 3.02 CONCRETE REMOVAL 33 34 A. Concrete designated to be removed to specific limits as shown on the 35 Drawings or directed by the Engineer, shall be done by line drilling at limits 36 followed by chipping or jack- hammering as appropriate in areas where 37 concrete is to be taken out. Remove concrete in such a manner that 38 surrounding concrete or existing reinforcing to be left in place and existing in 39 place equipment is not damaged. Sawcutting at limits of concrete to be 40 removed shall only be done if indicated on the Drawings, or after obtaining 41 written approval from the Engineer. 42 43 B. Where existing reinforcing is exposed due to saw cutting /core drilling and no 44 new material is to be placed on the sawcut surface, a coating or surface 45 treatment of epoxy paste shall be applied to the entire cut surface to a 46 thickness of 1 /4 -in. 47 48 C. In all cases where the joint between new concrete or grout and existing MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 concrete will be exposed in the finished work, except as otherwise shown or 2 specified, the edge of concrete removal shall be a 1 -in deep saw cut on each 3 exposed surface of the existing concrete. 4 5 D. Concrete specified to be left in place which is damaged shall be repaired by 6 approved means to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 7 8 E. The Engineer may from time to time direct the Contractor to make additional 9 repairs to existing concrete. These repairs shall be made as specified or by 10 such other methods as may be appropriate. 11 12 3.03 CONNECTION SURFACE PREPARATION 13 14 A. Connection surfaces shall be prepared as specified below for concrete areas 15 requiring patching, repairs or modifications as shown on the Drawings, 16 specified herein, or as directed by the Engineer. 17 18 B. Remove all deteriorated materials, dirt, oil, grease, and all other bond 19 inhibiting materials from the surface by dry mechanical means, i.e. - 20 sandblasting, grinding, etc, as approved by the Engineer. Be sure the areas 21 are not Tess than 1 /2 -in in depth. Irregular voids or surface stones need not be 22 removed if they are sound, free of Iaitance, and firmly embedded into parent 23 concrete, subject to the Engineer's final inspection. 24 25 C. If reinforcing steel is exposed, it must be mechanically cleaned to remove all 26 contaminants, rust, etc, as approved by the Engineer. If half of the diameter of 27 the reinforcing steel is exposed, chip out behind the steel. The distance 28 chipped behind the steel shall be a minimum of 1 /2 -in. Reinforcing to be 29 saved shall not be damaged during the demolition operation. 30 31 D. Reinforcing from existing demolished concrete which is shown to be 32 incorporated in new concrete shall be cleaned by mechanical means to 33 remove all loose material and products of corrosion before proceeding with the 34 repair. It shall be cut, bent or lapped to new reinforcing as shown on the 35 Drawings and provided with 1 -in minimum cover all around. 36 37 E. The following are specific concrete surface preparation "methods" to be used 38 where called for on the Drawings, specified herein or as directed by the 39 Engineer. 40 41 1. Method A: After the existing concrete surface at connection has been 42 roughened and cleaned, thoroughly moisten the existing surface with 43 water. Brush on a 1/16 -in layer of cement and water mixed to the 44 consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately after application of cement 45 paste, place new concrete or grout mixture as detailed on the Drawings. 46 47 2. Method B: After the existing concrete surface has been roughened and MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -7 04/26/11 1 cleaned, apply epoxy bonding agent at connection surface. The field 2 preparation and application of the epoxy bonding agent shall comply 3 strictly with the manufacturer's recommendations. Place new concrete 4 or grout mixture to limits shown on the Drawings within time constraints 5 recommended by the manufacturer to ensure bond. 6 7 3. Method C: Drill a hole 1 /4 -in larger than the diameter of the dowel. The 8 hole shall be blown clear of loose particles and dust just prior to 9 installing epoxy. The drilled hole shall first be filled with [epoxy paste], 10 then dowels /bolts shall be buttered with paste then inserted by tapping. 11 Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, deformed bars shall be 12 drilled and set to a depth of ten bar diameters and smooth bars shall be 13 drilled and set to a depth of fifteen bar diameters. If not noted on the 14 Drawings, the Engineer will provide details regarding the size and 15 spacing of dowels. 16 17 4. Method D: Combination of Method B and C. 18 19 5. Method E: Capsule anchor system shall be set in existing concrete by 20 drilling holes to the required depth to develop the full tensile and shear 21 strengths of the anchor material being used. The anchor bolts system 22 shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendation in holes sized 23 as required. The anchor stud bolt, rebar or other embedment item shall 24 be tipped with a double 45 degree chamfered point, securely fastened 25 into the chuck of all rotary percussion hammer drill and drilled into the 26 capsule filled hole. The anchor may be installed in horizontal, vertical 27 and overhead positions. 28 29 3.04 GROUTING 30 31 A. Grouting shall be as specified in Section 03600. 32 33 3.05 CRACK REPAIR 34 35 A. Cracks on horizontal surfaces shall be repaired by gravity feeding crack 36 sealant into cracks per manufacturer's recommendations. If cracks are less 37 than 1/16 -in in thickness they shall be pressure injected. 38 39 B. Cracks on vertical surfaces shall be repaired by pressure injecting crack 40 sealant through valves sealed to surface with crack repair epoxy adhesive per 41 manufacturer's recommendations. 42 43 44 END OF SECTION MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -8 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 05500 2 3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install 10 miscellaneous metals as shown on the Construction Drawings and as 11 specified herein. The miscellaneous metal items include but are not limited 12 to the following: 13 14 1. All metal frames, ladders, stair rails, floor opening frames including 15 gratings and supports. 16 17 2. Prefabricated access hatches and frames. 18 19 3. Anchors and anchor bolts except those specified to be furnished with 20 all equipment. 21 22 4. Railings, posts and supports both interior and exterior. 23 24 5. Cast iron frames, covers, grates, drain leaders and drains. 25 26 6. Stair nosings, steel plates, overhead steel doorframes, angle frames, 27 plates and channels. 28 29 7. Guardrails 30 31 1.02 COORDINATION 32 33 A. The work in this section shall be completely coordinated with the work of 34 other Sections. Verify at the site both the dimensions and work of other 35 trades adjoining items of work in this Section before fabrication and 36 installation of items herein specified. 37 38 B. Furnish to the pertinent trades all items included under this Section that are 39 to be built into the work of all other Sections. 40 41 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 42 43 A. Detail Drawings, as provided for in the General Conditions, showing sizes of 44 members, method of assembly, anchorage, and connection to other 45 members shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before fabrication. 46 47 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -1 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 B. For each fabricated item include drawings, elevations, and details. Show the following: 1. Details of Sections 2. Jointing and Connections 3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS symbols; indicate net weld length. 4. Reinforcing 5. Fasteners and Anchors 6. Accessories 7. Location of each finish C. Manufacturer's specifications, details and installation instructions. Submit for: 1. All manufactured products used in fabrications. D. Samples shall be submitted at the request of the Engineer for concurrent review with shop drawings. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Field measurements shall be taken at the site to verify or supplement indicated dimensions and to insure proper fitting of all items. B. Where fabricated items or their anchors are to be embedded into concrete and masonry work, deliver such items to those performing the installation, together with all coordination Drawings and installation instructions required. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork where required for installation in new concrete or other adjacent work. 1.05 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS A. Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the materials herein specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where reference is made to a standard of one of these, or other organizations the version of the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1. Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe 2. Gray Iron Castings 3. Galvanizing, general 4. Galvanizing, hardware 5. Galvanizing, assemblies 6. Stainless Steel Bolts, Fasteners 7. Stainless Steel Plate and Sheet Wire 8. Welding Rods for Steel MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -2 ASTM A53 ASTM A48 (Class 30) ASTM A123 ASTM A153 ASTM A386 AISI, Type 316 AISI, Type 316 AWS Spec. for Arc Welding 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9. ANSI /AWS D1.1 -88 -- Structural Welding Code -- Steel; 1988. 2 10. ANSI /AWS D1.3 -81 -- Structural Welding Code -- Sheet Steel; 1981 3 11. ASTM A 36/A 36M -88d -- Standard Specification for Structural Steel; 4 1988. 5 12. ASTM A 307 -88a -- Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and 6 Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength; 1988. 7 13. ASTM A 501 -88 -- Standard Specification for Hot - Formed Welded 8 and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 1988. 9 14. ASTM A 563 -88a -- Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel 10 Nuts; 1988. 11 15. ASTM B 221 -85a -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Alumi- 12 num -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes; 1985. 13 16. FS FF -S-92B -- Screw, Machine: Slotted, Cross- Recessed or 14 Hexagon Head; 1974 (Amended 1975). 15 17. FS FF -W -84A -- Washers, Lock (Spring); 1967 (Amended 1980). 16 18. FS FF -W -92B -- Washer, Flat (Plain); 1974. 17 19. SSPC -PA 1 -- Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting; Steel 18 Structures Painting Council; 1982, 19 20. SSPC -Paint 12 -- Cold - Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film); 20 Steel Structures Painting Council; 1982. 21 21. SSPC -Paint 13 -- Red or Brown One -Coat Shop Paint; Steel 22 Structures Painting Council; 1982. 23 22. SSPC -SP 1 -- Solvent Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting Council; 24 1982. 25 23. SSPC -SP 3 -- Power Tool Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting 26 Council; 1982. 27 24. SSPC -SP 5 -- White Metal Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting 28 Council; 1985. 29 25. SSPC -SP 6 -- Commercial Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting 30 Council; 1985. 31 26. SSPC -SP 8 -- Pickling; Steel Structures Painting Council; 1982. 32 27. SSPC -SP 10 -- Near -White Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting 33 Council; 1985. 34 35 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 36 37 2.01 ANCHORS, BOLTS, AND FASTENING DEVICES 38 39 A. Anchors, bolts, etc., shall be furnished as necessary for installation of the 40 work of this Section. 41 42 B. Compound masonry anchors shall be of the type shown or required and shall 43 be equal to Star Slug in compounded masonry anchors manufactured by 44 Star Expansion Industries, equal by Phillips Drill Co., Rahlplug, or equal. 45 Anchors shall be minimum "two unit" type. 46 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -3 04/26/11 1 C. The bolts used to attach the various members to the anchors shall be the 2 sizes shown or required. Stainless steel shall be attached to concrete or 3 masonry by means of stainless steel machine bolts and iron or steel shall be 4 attached with steel machine bolts unless otherwise specifically noted. 5 6 D. For structural purposes, unless otherwise noted, expansion bolts shall be 7 Wej -it "Ankr-- Tite ", Phillips Drill Co. "Wedge Anchors ", or Hilti "Kwik- Bolt ". 8 When length of bolt is not called for on the Construction Drawings, the length 9 of bolt provided shall be sufficient to place the wedge portion of the bolt a 10 minimum of 1 -inch behind the reinforcing steel within the concrete. Material 11 shall be as noted on the Construction Drawings. If not listed, all materials 12 shall be stainless steel. 13 14 2.02 ALUMINUM ITEMS 15 16 A. Aluminum gratings shall be of serrated I -Bar Aluminum Alloy 6063 -T6, and 17 shall be Thompson Fabricating Company, Aluminum I -Bar Grating; or equal. 18 Bearing bars shall be 1 -1/2 inch minimum. Grating to be of sufficient 19 strength to carry a uniformly distributed live load of not less than 200 pounds 20 per square foot with maximum deflection of 1/4" of the span length. Provide 21 bearing angles, anchors, and bolts constructed of aluminum or stainless 22 steel and as detailed. Grating shall be removable type with standard 23 removable fasteners. Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete surfaces 24 shall be protected with a special protective lacquer or bituminous coating or 25 other approved coating in order to keep stains to a minimum. Top surface of 26 all bars shall be flush; ends of gratings shall be provided with binding strips 27 of same depth and thickness as the main bars welded thereto. All openings 28 2 inches and greater in diameter shall be banded with a bar of the same 29 depth and thickness as the main bearing bars of the grating, or furnished 30 with continuous cross bridges. Each cut bar shall be welded to the band if 31 banding is utilized. The ends of all grating sections shall be likewise banded. 32 Clamps and bolts used for attaching grating to supporting members shall be 33 stainless steel. All grating shall be clamped unless noted otherwise. Clamps 34 shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 35 36 B. Stair treads shall be as specified above for grating and shall have abrasive 37 nonslip nosing. 38 39 C. Aluminum nosing at concrete stairs shall be an extrusion of 4 -inch minimum 40 width with abrasive filled and shall be Wooster Products, Inc., Alumogrit 41 Treads, Type 116; equal by Barry Pattern and Foundry Co.; Andco; or equal. 42 Embedded anchors shall be furnished with a minimum of three anchors per 43 tread 44 45 D. Aluminum ladders shall be fabricated to the dimensions and details and 46 installed as shown on the Construction Drawings. MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 E. Aluminum Handrails, Mechanically Fastened Type: 3 4 1. All aluminum mechanically fastened type pipe handrails and 5 guardrails shall be clear anodized aluminum finish and installed as 6 specified herein and indicated on the Construction Drawings. 7 Handrails shall be made of nominal 1 -1/2 inches inside diameter pipe 8 (schedule 40 for rails, schedule 80 for posts) fabricated of seamless 9 6105 -T5 or6061 -T6 alloy, ASTM B -429 or ASTM B -221. The supplier 10 of the handrail system shall supply all necessary fittings, rackets, 11 transition, corner and connector pieces, toeboards, protective 12 gaskets, etc., for a complete job at the locations indicated on the 13 Construction Drawings. All mounting hardware including bolts, studs, 14 nuts, etc., shall be stainless steel Type 316. Bends shall be smooth 15 and accurate to the details shown. The handrail systems shall comply 16 with all OSHA codes and Section 1208.2 of the Standard Building 17 Code. Railing systems incorporating pop- rivets or glued fittings shall 18 no be allowed. 19 20 2. Handrailings and components shall be as manufactured by Thompson 21 Fabricating Company, Birmingham, Alabama, or approved equal. 22 23 3. Handrails and stair rails shall be designed to withstand a 200 Ib 24 concentrated load applied in any direction at any point on the top rail. 25 Handrails and stair rails shall also be designed to withstand a load of 26 50 lb /ft. applied horizontally to the top rail. The 200 Ib load will not be 27 applied simultaneously with the 50Ib /ft. load. In addition, the handrails 28 shall be designed to withstand a load of 100lb /ft. applied vertically 29 downward to the top rail and simultaneously with the 501b /ft. horizontal 30 Toad. The 100lb /ft. vertical load does not apply to stair rails. 31 32 4. Spacing of posts where posts are required shall be as noted on shop 33 drawings, but in all cases shall be uniform and shall not exceed the 34 requirements of OSHA and Section 1208.2 of the Standard Building 35 Code. Shorter spacing may be used where required to maintain the 36 maximum spacing. The fabricator of the aluminum handrail and 37 guardrail system shall be responsible for the design and preparation 38 of shop drawings and design calculations (signed and sealed by 39 Florida Registered Engineer) to meet OSHA requirements and 40 Section 1208.2 of Standard Building Code. 41 42 5. All railings shall be erected in line and plumb. Field splicing and 43 expansion compensation shall be accomplished using internal splice 44 sleeves. Make provisions for removable railing sections, as detailed 45 and where shown on the Construction Drawings. 46 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -5 04/26/11 1 6. Where handrail or guardrail posts are set in concrete, as per the 2 manufacturer's requirements, the posts shall be set into aluminum 3 sleeves cast in the concrete and firmly cemented with 1651 epoxy 4 resin by E -Bond Epoxies, Oakland Park, Florida, or Moulded 5 Reinforced Plastics, Inc., Fort Lauderdale, Florida or equal. Collars 6 shall be placed on the posts and fastened in place, as shown and as 7 detailed on approved shop drawings. 8 9 7 Where handrail is supported from structural members, it shall be done 10 by the use of approved sockets, flanges, brackets, or other approved 11 means, which will provide neat and substantial support for the pipe 12 railing. 13 14 8. All railing shall be properly protected by paper, plastic or by an 15 approved coating or by both against scratching, splashes or mortar, 16 paint, or other defacements during transportation and erection and 17 until adjacent work by other trades has been completed. 18 19 F Toeboards: 20 21 1. Contractor shall furnish and install aluminum toeboards conforming to 22 latest OSHA requirements on all railings and other locations where 23 indicated on the Construction Drawings. 24 25 2. Toeboards shall consist of an extruded 6063 -T6 aluminum shape 26 bolted by means of a pipe clamp to the railing posts without requiring 27 any drilling or welding of the toeboard to the railing posts as 28 manufactured by Thompson Fabricating Company, or approved 29 equal. Toeboards shall have pitched top and tear drop bottom to 30 prevent accumulation of dirt, or other material. 31 32 3. Toeboards shall be aluminum alloy 6063 -T6. All fastening hardware 33 shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 34 35 G. Kickplates, if required, shall be fabricated and installed as shown on the 36 Construction Drawings. 37 38 H. Aluminum safety gate shall be fabricated of extruded aluminum. 39 40 I. Prefabricated checkerplate aluminum floor hatches shall be Type "JD ", or 41 "KD" as manufactured by Bilco Co., equal by Babcock -Davis Associates, 42 Inc.; Type "AM" Inland - Ryerson Construction Products Co., Milcor Division; 43 or equal, sized as shown. Hatches with either dimension over 3 feet -6 44 inches shall be double leaf type. Hatches shall be designed for a live load of 45 300 pounds per square foot. Hatches shall be watertight. 46 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 J. Ship ladders shall be of all aluminum construction as detailed. Treads shall 2 have abrasive nosing as manufactured by Thompson Fabricating Company, 3 Birmingham, Alabama. 4 5 K. Checkplate aluminum cover plates shall be fabricated to the details shown 6 and installed at the locations shown. 7 8 L. Structural aluminum angle and channel door frames shall be provided as 9 shown on the Construction Drawings and shall be anodized. Frames shall 10 be fabricated with not less than three anchors on each jamb. 11 12 M. Miscellaneous aluminum shapes and plates shall be fabricated as shown_ 13 Angle frames for hatches, beams, grates, etc., shall be furnished complete 14 with welded strap anchors attached. Furnish all miscellaneous aluminum 15 shown but not otherwise detailed. Structural shapes and extruded items 16 shall conform to the detail dimensions or the Shop Drawings within the 17 tolerances published by the American Aluminum Association. 18 19 2.03 STEEL ITEMS 20 21 A. Sleeves shall be steel or cast iron pipe in walls and floors with end joints as 22 shown on the Construction Drawings. All pipe sleeves shall have center 23 anchor around circumference as shown. 24 25 B. Miscellaneous steel pipe for sleeves and lifting attachments and other uses 26 as required shall be Schedule 40 pipe fabricated according to the details as 27 shown on the Construction Drawings. 28 29 C. Miscellaneous steel shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the 30 Construction Drawings and shall include: beams, angles, support brackets, 31 closure angles in roof at edge of T -beam; base plates to support ends of 32 T- beams; door frames; splice plates, anchor bolts (except for Equipment 33 furnished in Divisions 11, 13, 14 and 15); lintels and any other miscellaneous 34 steel called for on the Construction Drawings and not otherwise specified. 35 36 D. Guardrails shall be of a standard FDOT W -Beam design with reflectors. All 37 mounting hardware including bolts, washers, nuts shall be galvanized. 38 39 2.04 CAST IRON ITEMS 40 41 A. Outside pipe clean -out frames and covers, when and where shown on the 42 Construction Drawings, shall be heavy duty, R- 6013 -R -6099 series as 43 manufactured by Neenah Foundry Co., or equal. All outside pipe clean -outs 44 shall be 6 -inch diameter. 45 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -7 04/26/11 1 B. Frames, covers and grates for manholes, catch basins and inlets shall be of 2 a good quality, strong, tough even grained cast iron and capable of 3 supporting an H -20 loading. Castings shall be as manufactured by the U.S. 4 Foundry, Neenah Foundry, Mechanics Iron Foundry or equal. Sizes shall be 5 as shown on the Drawings. Covers to have letters "WATER ", "SEWER" or 6 "DRAIN ", as applicable, embossed on top. 7 8 C. Electric and telephone manhole frames and covers, when and where shown 9 on the Construction Drawings, shall be ductile iron castings conforming to all 10 requirements of ASTM A536. The covers shall be watertight and shall have 11 the letters "HIGH VOLTAGE," "LOW VOLTAGE," "SIGNAL," "TELEPHONE," 12 as applicable, embossed on top in letters 2 inches high. The clear opening 13 shall be 36- inches. 14 15 2.05 STAINLESS STEEL ITEMS 16 17 A, Stainless steel plates, when and where shown on the Contract Drawings, 18 shall be manufactured using 316 S.S. 19 20 2.06 MATERIALS - MISCELLANEOUS 21 22 A. Use fasteners of suitable size and length for the materials being fastened 23 and for the type of connection required. 24 25 1. For concealed interior and exterior use or built into exterior walls: 26 Nonferrous stainless steel and zinc coated. 27 28 2. For embedded anchor that will be protected from the elements, use 29 fasteners of the same material as the miscellaneous stem being 30 fastened. 31 32 PART 3 - EXECUTION 33 34 3.01 FABRICATION 35 36 A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, 37 straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and 38 texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. 39 40 B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely 41 withstand stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Steel 42 accessories and connections to steel or cast iron shall be steel, unless 43 otherwise specified. Threaded connections shall be made so that the 44 threads are concealed by fitting. 45 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -8 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C_ Welded joints shall be rigid and continuously welded or spot welded as 2 specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. 3 Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous_ 4 5 D. Welding of parts shall be in accordance with the Standard Code for Arc and 6 Gas Welding in Building Construction of the AWS and shall only be done 7 where shown, specified, or permitted by the Engineer. All welding shall be 8 done only by welders certified as to their ability to perform welding in 9 accordance with the requirements of the AWS Code. Component parts of 10 built -up members to be welded shall be adequately supported and clamped 11 or held by other adequate means to hold the parts in proper relation for 12 welding. 13 14 E. Welding of aluminum work shall be on the unexposed side as much as 15 possible in order to prevent pitting or discoloration. 16 17 F. All aluminum finish exposed surfaces, except as specified below, shall have 18 manufacturer's standard mill finish. Aluminum handrails shall be given an 19 anodic oxide treatment in accordance with the Aluminum Association 20 Specification AA- C22 -A41. A coating of methacrylate lacquer shall be 21 applied to all aluminum before shipment from the factory. 22 23 G. Castings shall be of good quality, strong, tough, even - grained, smooth, free 24 from scale, lumps, blisters, sand holes, and defects of any kind which render 25 them unfit for the service for which they are intended. Castings shall be 26 thoroughly cleaned and will be subjected to a hammer inspection in the field 27 by the Engineer. All finished surfaces shown on the Drawings and /or 28 specified shall be machined to a true plane surface and shall be true and 29 seat at all points without rocking. Allowances shall be made in the patterns 30 so that the thickness specified or shown shall not be reduced in obtaining 31 finished surfaces. Castings will not be acceptable if the actual weight is less 32 than 95 percent of the theoretical weight computed from the dimensions 33 shown. The Contractor, if requested by the Owner or Engineer, shall provide 34 facilities for weighing castings in the presence of the Owner or Engineer 35 showing true weights, certified by the supplier. 36 37 H. All steel finish work shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of all loose 38 mill scale, rust, and foreign matter before shipment and shall be given one shop 39 coat of primer compatible with finish coats specified in Painting Section after 40 fabrication but before shipping. Paint shall be applied to dry surfaces and shall 41 be thoroughly and evenly spread and well worked into joints and other open 42 spaces. Abrasions in the field shall be touched up with primer immediately after 43 erection. Final painting is specified in Painting Section 09900. 44 45 I. Galvanizing, where required, shall be the hot -dip zinc process after fabrication. 46 Following all manufacturing operations, all items to be galvanized shall be MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -9 04/26/11 1 thoroughly cleaned, pickled, fluxed, and completely immersed in a bath of molten 2 zinc. The resulting coating shall be adherent and shall be the normal coating to 3 be obtained by immersing the items in a bath of molten zinc and allowing them to 4 remain in the bath until their temperature becomes the same as the bath. 5 Coating shall be not less than 2 oz. per sq. ft. of surface. 6 7 J Provide for anchorage of type indicated; use anchors of same material and finish 8 as item except where specifically indicated otherwise. 9 10 K. Fabricate to prevent water intrusion or migration. 11 12 3.02 INSTALLATION 13 14 A. Install all items furnished except items to be imbedded in concrete or other 15 masonry which shall be installed under Division 03. Items to be attached to 16 concrete or masonry after such work is completed shall be installed in 17 accordance with the details shown. Fastening to wood plugs in masonry will not 18 be permitted. All dimensions shall be verified at the site before fabrication is 19 started. 20 21 B. All steel surfaces to come in contact with exposed concrete or masonry shall 22 receive a protective coating of an approved heavy bitumastic troweling mastic 23 applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions prior to installation. 24 25 C. Where aluminum is embedded in concrete, apply a heavy coat of approved 26 bitumastic troweling mastic in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions 27 prior to installation. 28 29 D. Where aluminum contacts masonry or concrete, provide a 1/32 -inch neoprene 30 gasket between the aluminum and the concrete or masonry. 31 32 E. Where aluminum contacts a dissimilar metal, apply a heavy brush coat of 33 zinc - chromate primer and provide a 1/32 -inch neoprene gasket between the 34 aluminum and the dissimilar metal. 35 36 F Where aluminum contacts wood, apply two coats of aluminum metal and 37 masonry paint to the wood. 38 39 G. Anchor metal fabrications to substrata indicated; set all fasteners required. 40 41 H. Cut, drill and fit items as required for installation. 42 43 1. Fit exposed connection together accurately to form tight hairline joints. 44 45 2. Weld joints as indicated. 46 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -10 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a. Comply with AWS code for welding procedures, for appearance 2 and quality of welds, and for corrective methods. 3 b. Grind exposed joints smooth. 4 5 I. Set items accurately in location, alignment and elevation; level, true and free of 6 rack, measured from established lines and levels. 7 8 J. Provide temporary bracing as required. 9 10 3.03 CLEANING AND TOUCH -UP 11 12 A- Touch up shop paint immediately after erection. 13 14 1. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded surfaces. 15 16 2. Paint with same material used for shop painting, minimum 2 mils dry film 17 thickness. 18 19 20 21 END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -11 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -12 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 06600 2 3 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SUMMARY 8 9 A. This section includes all Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Products and 10 Fabrications, including but not limited to: 11 12 1. FRP Weir Plates 13 2. FRP Scum Baffles 14 3. FRP Splice Plates 15 4. FRP Scum Baffle Supports 16 5. FRP Accessories 17 18 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK 19 20 A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as 21 required for the provision and proper installation of all of the FRP Products as 22 shown on the Drawings and specified herein. All anchor bolts, gaskets, sealants, 23 and other accessories and appurtenances, required for a complete and operating 24 installations shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. 25 26 1.03 REFERENCES 27 28 A. ANSI /NSF 61 — Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects. 29 B. ANSI /AWWA F101 -- Contact - Molded, Fiberglass- Reinforced Plastic Wash 30 Troughs and Launders 31 C. ASTM D 638 -- Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 32 D. ASTM D 695 — Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid 33 Plastics 34 E. ASTM D 790 — Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced 35 and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials, 36 37 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 38 39 A. All FRP products and fabrications shall be supplied by an experienced firm who 40 has continually engaged in the manufacture and /or fabrication of fiberglass 41 reinforced plastics. Firms not listed in this specification must clearly document a 42 minimum of five years experience with similar projects of equal scope or design. 43 44 B. The Contractor shall assure that all field dimensions are taken accurately and 45 communicated properly to the FRP Fabricator, that other trades will not affect a 46 proper installation of the FRP, and that all manufacturer's instructions and 47 recommendations are followed. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -1 4/26/11 1 1.05 SUBMITTALS 2 3 A. Submit shop drawings and product data for all FRP materials and fabrications as 4 required by this scope of work. 5 6 B. Product Data: 7 8 1. Manufacturer's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, 9 and identification of materials of construction, including resins and glass 10 fiber content and layout for FRP constructions. 11 12 2. Manufacturers catalog data with load and deflection charts for all FRP 13 gratings. 14 15 3. Manufacturers catalog data for all FRP Structural Shapes. 16 17 4. Manufacturer's 6 -inch square samples of FRP laminate of the same 18 construction, thickness, and color as the structural item. 19 20 5. Test results of FRP laminate. 21 22 6. Installation instructions and manufacturer certification that materials 23 comply with specified requirements and are suitable for the intended 24 application. 25 26 C. Shop Drawings: 27 28 1. Shop drawings shall show all FRP materials as required and include all 29 dimensions, connections, fasteners, structural supports, adjustments, 30 openings, anchors, tolerances, assembly, and installation details as 31 required and shall be based on field measurements by the Contractor to 32 ensure proper installation. 33 34 1.07 WARRANTY 35 36 A. The manufacturer shall warrant the weirs, scum baffles and bracket supports to 37 be free of defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with Specification 38 Section 01740 39 40 1.08 COORDINATION 41 42 A The Contractor and the manufacturer shall coordinate the weir and scum baffle 43 design and installation requirements with the clarifier mechanism, scum box, 44 scum beach, and effluent launder channel configurations. 45 46 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 47 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -2 4/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.01 GENERAL 2 3 A. All FRP materials shall be manufactured with vinylester, with chemical 4 formulations as necessary to provide the corrosion resistance, strength and other 5 physical properties compatible with domestic wastewater as required. 6 7 B. All structural shapes shall be constructed of continuous strand roving, continuous 8 transverse mat, and synthetic surface veil, and shall include ultraviolet (UV) 9 inhibitors. 10 11 C. After fabrication of FRP, all cuts, holes, and abrasion shall be sealed according 12 to Manufacturer's instructions to prevent corrosion. 13 14 2.02 FRP WEIRS, SCUM BAFFLES, SPLICE PLATES, AND SUPPORTS 15 16 A. Except for bolts and hardware specified herein, weirs, splice places, baffles, and 17 supports shall be polyester plastic resin, reinforced with glass fiber and molded to 18 produce uniform smooth surfaces. 19 20 B. The glass content of the finished laminate shall not be less than 30% and not 21 more than 32% using Type E silane glass with chrome or silane finish. Final 22 laminate thickness shall be within 10% of nominal specified thickness. 23 24 C. The surface shall be resin rich, free of voids and porosity, without dry spots, 25 crazes or unreinforced areas and shall provide for increased corrosion resistance 26 and UV protection. All machines or cut edges shall be sealed with resin. The 27 weirs, splice places, baffles, and supports shall all be the same color and shall be 28 green, white, or grey. 29 30 D. Ultraviolet resistance is required in all laminates. Surfacing veil is required on all 31 surfaces to increase chemical resistance and provide additional UV protection. 32 33 E. The weirs, splice plates, baffles, supports, and washers shall be a minimum of 34 1/4" thick plastic laminate. Oversized mounting holes shall be provided for 35 vertical and horizontal alignment of at least 2" with 5" diameter FRP washers to 36 cover the holes. 37 38 F. Weirs and splice plates shall be mounted with 1/2" x 4 -1/4 inch stainless steel 39 anchors on 24 -inch centers. The weirs shall not exceed 12 -feet in length unless 40 otherwise noted. Cut ends of non - standard lengths shall be sealed with resin. 41 42 G. The scum baffle panels shall be 12- inches high and shall not exceed 12 -feet in 43 length unless otherwise noted. Splice plates shall be minimum 6 -inch x 12 -inch. 44 The scum baffle brackets shall be 7 -inch x 10 -inch x 1/4 -inch FRP with gussets on 45 both sides and slotted holes to provide horizontal, vertical and radial adjustment 46 of the baffle. The brackets shall be installed a maximum of 4 -feet on center or as 47 shown on the Drawings. Fastening holes in the scum baffle panel shall be FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -3 4/26/11 1 countersunk to accommodate 3/8 -inch flat head fasteners Cut ends of non- 2 standard lengths shall be sealed with resin_ 3 4 G. Anchors, nuts, bolts, washers and all other hardware shall be Type 316 stainless 5 steel. 6 7 H. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Laminate Physical Properties: 8 9 Method Test Min. Value 10 ASTM D -638 Tensile Strength 24,000 psi 11 ASTM D -790 Flexural Strength 25,0006psi 12 ASTM D -790 Flexural Modulus 1.4 x 10 psi 13 ASTM D -2583 Barcol Hardness 40 14 ASTM D -570 Water Absorption 0.2% 15 16 I. Construction shall comply with all requirements of ANSI /AWWA /NSF standards 17 listed above, and manufacturer shall provide proof of such certification. 18 19 J. Straight weirs shall be cut from a flat sheet. Curvilinear weirs (clarifier) cut from a 20 flat sheet will not be acceptable. 21 22 K. Weir notch configuration and dimensions shall match the existing weirs. 23 24 L. Weirs, splice plates, baffles, supports, and washers shall be as manufactured by 25 Nefco Inc., Warminster Fiberglass, or approved equal. 26 27 PART 3 - EXECUTION 28 29 3.01 INSPECTION 30 31 A. Upon receipt of material at job site, the Contractor shall inspect all materials for 32 shipping damage. Any damage is to be noted on the shipping receipt / packing 33 list and reported promptly to the shipper. 34 35 3.02 HANDLING AND STORAGE 36 37 A. Handle all FRP materials with reasonable care to prevent damage. Use shipping 38 pallets to move material. Do not drag FRP materials. 39 40 B. If FRP materials are not to be installed immediately, then store to prevent 41 twisting, bending, breaking, or damage of any kind. 42 43 3.03 INSTALLATION 44 45 A. Installing contractor to coordinate and verify that other construction trades and 46 materials have been installed per the contract drawings, and, that they are 47 accurate in location, alignment, elevation, and are plumb and level FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -4 4/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 2 B. Install FRP materials in accordance with the installation drawings and instructions 3 supplied by the FRP Manufacturer. 4 5 C. Install materials accurately in location and elevation, level, and plumb. Field 6 fabricate as necessary for accurate fit. 7 8 D. All field cuts, holes or abrasions must be sealed with Manufacturer's sealing resin 9 according to Manufacturers instructions to prevent corrosion. 10 11 E. If the Work requires the Contractor to perform additional tasks that may damage 12 the installed FRP materials, the Contractor shall be responsible for covering the 13 FRP materials with plywood, or other suitable protective material. 14 15 F. Prior to installation of the weirs and scum baffle supports, the Contractor shall 16 pressure wash and grind smooth the concrete surface where those items will be 17 mounted to the existing structure. 18 19 3.04 CLARIFIERS WEIR INSTALLATION 20 21 A. V -notch weirs on all clarifiers shall be installed level around the entire perimeter 22 of the clarifier. The weirs shall be checked for level with a surveying instrument 23 at 12 locations around the circumference of each clarifier representing the face of 24 a clock. The weirs shall be adjusted to a tolerance of ± 1/32 -inch at each of the 25 12 locations. 26 27 28 END OF SECTION FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -5 4/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -6 4/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 09865 2 3 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the surface 10 preparation and application of shop primers necessary to complete this 11 Contract in its entirety. 12 13 1.02 SUBMITTALS 14 15 A. Submit to the Engineer for review, shop drawings, manufacturer's 16 specifications and data on the proposed primers and detailed surface 17 preparation, application procedures and dry mil thickness. 18 19 B. Submit representative physical samples of the proposed primers, if required by 20 the Engineer. 21 22 23 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 24 25 2.01 MATERIALS 26 27 A. Submerged Services: 28 29 1. Shop primer for ferrous metals which will be submerged or which are 30 subject to splash action or which are specified to be considered 31 submerged service shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series 66 32 at 3.0 -5.0 mils (D.F.T.), PPG Pitt -Guard Epoxy Coating 97 -145 at 4.0- 33 6.0 mils (D.F.T.), or approved equal. 34 35 2. Voids and bugholes in concrete surfaces must be filled with Tnemec 36 Series 218 (up to 1/4" deep) or Tnemec Series 219 (1/4" to 1 1 /z" deep) 37 or approved equal recommended by manufacturer of approved paint 38 system. 39 40 B. Non - submerged Services: 41 42 1. Shop primer for ferrous metals other than those covered by Paragraph 43 2.01A shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series 66 Epoxy Fast 44 Dry Primer 94 -109 (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) or approved equal. 45 46 C. Non - primed Surfaces: 47 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 09865 -1 04/26/11 1 1 Gears, bearings surfaces, and other similar surfaces obviously not to be 2 painted shall be given a heavy shop coat of grease or other suitable 3 rust - resistant coating. This coating shall be maintained as necessary to 4 prevent corrosion during all periods of storage and erection and shall be 5 satisfactory to the Engineer up to the time of the final acceptance test. 6 7 D. Compatibility of Coating Systems: 8 9 1. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the 10 manufacturer to be compatible with their corresponding primers and 11 finish coats specified in Section 09900 for use in the field and which are 12 recommended for use together. 13 14 15 PART 3 - EXECUTION 16 17 3.01 APPLICATION 18 19 A. Surface Preparation and Priming: 20 21 1. Nonsubmerged components scheduled for priming, as defined above, 22 shall be sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC -SP -6, Commercial 23 Grade, immediately prior to priming. Submerged components 24 scheduled for priming, as defined above, shall be sandblasted clean in 25 accordance with SSPC- SP -10. Near White, immediately prior to 26 priming. 27 28 2. Surfaces shall be dry and free of dust, oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill 29 scale, and other foreign material before priming. Concrete surfaces 30 shall be prepared in accordance with ICRI CSP 4 -6. 31 32 3. Shop prime in accordance with approved paint manufacturer's 33 recommendations. 34 35 4. Priming shall follow sandblasting before any evidence of corrosion has 36 occurred and within 24 hours. 37 38 5. Allow all new concrete to cure for a minimum of 28 days. Test for 39 moisture by plastic film tape down test (ASTM D4263). 40 41 42 43 END OF SECTION SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 09865 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 121 22 23 I24 25 26 I27 28 29 I30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work of this section consists of furnishing all materials, labor, equipment and incidentals required and performing all the painting necessary to complete this Contract in its entirety. B. It is the intent of these Specifications to paint all concrete where scheduled, exposed miscellaneous metal, pipe, fittings, supports, valves, equipment and all other work obviously required to be painted unless otherwise specified. Minor items omitted in the schedule of work shall be included in the work of this Section where they come within the general intent of the Specifications as stated herein. C. The following surfaces or items are not required to be painted: 1. Portions of metal, other than aluminum, embedded in concrete. This does not apply to the back face of items mounted to concrete or masonry surfaces that shall be painted before erection. Aluminum to be embedded in or in contact with concrete or masonry shall be coated to prevent electrolysis. 2. 3. 4. 5, 6. 7. 8. Packing glands and other adjustable mechanical equipment. Stainless steel. Fencing Concealed surfaces of pipe or crawl spaces. Acoustical ceilings. Tile. Fiberglass other than piping. 9. Electrical switchgear, motor control centers and control panels. 10. Polyethylene chemical storage tanks. PAINTING 09900 -1 parts and nameplates of , lighting and power panels, 04/26/11 1 1.02 REFERENCES 2 3 A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 4 5 1. SSPC -SP -1 through SSPC -SP -10 Surface Preparation Specifications 6 7 B, International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) 8 9 A. ICRI CSP — 3 through ICRI CSP — 6 Concrete Surface Preparation 10 Standards. 11 12 1.03 SUBMITTALS 13 14 A. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions, 15 shop drawings, working drawings and product data including manufacturer's 16 specifications and data on the proposed paint systems and detailed surface 17 preparation, application procedures and dry film thickness. 18 19 B. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions, 20 color cards, including standard and special colors, for initial color selections_ 21 22 C. Schedule of Painting Operations: Submit to the Engineer for review and 23 approval a complete Schedule of Painting Operations in a timely manner and 24 properly notify and coordinate the fabricators' surface preparation and painting 25 operations with these Specifications. This Schedule shall include for each 26 surface to be painted, the brand name, the percent volume of solids, the 27 coverage and the number of coats the Contractor proposes to use in order to 28 achieve the specified dry film thickness, and color charts. When the Schedule 29 has been approved, apply all material in strict accordance with the approved 30 Schedule and the manufacturer's instructions. Wet and dry paint film gages 31 shall be made available to the Engineer to verify the proper application while 32 work is in progress. 33 34 1.04 SPARE MATERIAL 35 36 A. Furnish one unopened gallon can of each type and each color of paint used. 37 38 1.05 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS 39 40 A. Contractor shall submit a list of projects successfully completed during the 41 past 3 years of similar projects. Contractor shall also supply record of 42 Certificates of Approval from Manufacturers to show they have completed 43 technical product and application training. Contractors shall submit a list of 44 surface preparation and application equipment sufficient to mix and apply the 45 products specified. 46 47 PART 2 - PRODUCTS PAINTING 09900 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2.01 MATERIALS 3 4 A. All painting materials shall be fully equal to those manufactured by the 5 Tnemec Company Inc., Carboline, PPG /Porter Coatings, and Sherwin 6 Williams. The painting schedule has been prepared on the basis of these 7 products and recommendations for applications. No brand other than those 8 named will be considered for approval, unless the brand and type of paint 9 proposed for each item in the following schedule, together with sufficient data 10 substantiated by certified tests conducted at no expense to the Owner, to 11 demonstrate its equality to the paint(s) named, is submitted in writing to the 12 Engineer for approval within 30 days after the issuance of the Notice to 13 Proceed. The type and number of tests performed shall be subject to the 14 Engineer's approval. 15 16 B_ All painting materials shall be delivered to the mixing room in unbroken 17 containers, bearing the manufacturer's brand, date of manufacturer, batch 18 number, and name. They shall be used without adulteration and mixed, 19 thinned, and applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions for the 20 applicable materials and surface and with the Engineer's approval before 21 using. 22 23 C. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the 24 manufacturer to be compatible with the finish paints to be used. 25 26 D. No paint containing lead will be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil. 27 28 E. Work areas will be designated by the Engineer for storage and mixing of all 29 painting materials. Materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements 30 of pertinent codes and fire regulations. Proper containers outside of the 31 buildings shall be provided and used for painting wastes, and no plumbing 32 fixture shall be used for this purpose. 33 34 F All recommendations of the paint manufacturer in regard to the health and 35 safety of workmen shall be followed. 36 37 2.02 PAINTING SYSTEMS 38 39 A. Colors for pipe shall match that of existing connected piping. Colors for 40 structural steel shall match that of existing connected structural steel. 41 42 B. The following surfaces shall have the types of paint scheduled below applied 43 at the dry film thickness (D.F.T.) in mils per coat noted. Some of the painting 44 systems listed below may not be used in this project. Some colors will require 45 an additional coat beyond that listed below to obtain the proper color 46 coverage. 47 PAINTING 09900 -3 04/26/11 1 1. Non - submerged concrete and precast concrete walls and ceilings: 2 3 a. Tnemec 4 lst Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 5 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 6 7 b. Carboline 8 lst Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 9 2nd Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 10 11 c. PPG /HPC 12 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 13 D.F.T.) 14 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 15 D.F.T.) 16 17 d. Sherwin Williams 18 1st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer 19 2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat 20 21 2. Submerged Concrete 22 23 a. Tnemec 24 1st Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (3.0 — 5.0 mils D,F.T.) 25 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 26 27 b. Carboline 28 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0 -14.0 mils D.F.T.) 29 30 c. PPG /HPC 31 2 Coats: Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97-- 32 946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 33 34 d. Sherwin Williams 35 1st Coat : Cor Cote FRE (80 -100 mils D.F.T 36 37 38 3. Interior Exposed Masonry (above grade and interior partitions) 39 40 a. Tnemec 41 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 54 -660- (80 -100 sq, ft. per gal,) 42 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 -- 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 43 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 44 45 b. Carboline 46 1 Coat: Sanitile 600 /600TG (60 -80 sq. ft. per gal.) 47 2 Coats: Sanitile 655 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 48 49 c. PPG /HPC PAINTING 09900 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Coat: Aquapon Polyamide Epoxy Block Filler 97- 685/686 (40 2 to 80 sq. ft. per gal © 12.0 -24.0 mils D.F.T.) 3 2 Coats: Aquapon High Build Semi -Gloss Polyamide Epoxy 4 Coating 5 97 -130 Series. (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 6 7 d. Sherwin Williams 8 1st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer 9 2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat 10 11 4. Interior and Exterior Exposed Masonry (Unpainted) 12 13 a. Tnemec 14 Regular CMU 15 2 Coats: Prime a Pell 200 @ 75 -100 SF /gallon /coat 16 Split face CMU 17 2 Coats: Prime a Pell Plus @ 65 -80 SF /gallon /coat 18 19 b. Carboline 20 CMU 21 1 Coat: Carbocrete Sealer WB © 60 -80 SF /gallon 22 Split Face CMU 23 2 Coats: Carbocrete Sealer WB, 1st coat @ 40 -60 SF /gallon & 24 2nd coat © 80 -120 SF /gallon 25 26 c. PPG /HPC 27 2 Coats: PPG /HPC Canyon Tone Stain Clear at 100 to 150 SF 28 per gallon. 29 30 5. Exterior Exposed Stuccoed Walls 31 32 a. Tnemec 33 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 34 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 —6.0 mils D.F.T.) 35 36 b. Carboline 37 1st Coat: Sanitile 100 (10.0 -12.0 mils D.F.T.) 38 2nd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils DFT) 39 3rd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T.) - OPTIONAL 40 41 c. PPG /HPC 42 1st Coat Pitt -Flex Elastomeric Coating 4 -110 (5.5 -7.3 mils 43 D.F.T.) 44 2nd Coat Pitt -Flex Elastomeric Coating 4-110 (5.5 -7.3 mils 45 D.F.T.) 46 47 6. Ferrous metals submerged or subject to splashing 48 49 a. Tnemec PAINTING 09900 -5 04/26/11 1 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 104 -1211 High Solids Catalyzed Epoxy 2 Coating (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 3 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 104 -Color High Solids Catalyzed Epoxy 4 Coating (8.0 - 10.0 mils D.F.T.) 5 6 b. Carboline 7 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0 -14.0 mils D.F.T.) 8 9 c. PPG /HPC 10 1 Coat: Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 11 946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 12 1 Coat: Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 946/949 13 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 14 15 d. Sherwin Williams 16 1st Coat: Cor -Cote HB 6.0 -9.0 mils (D.F.T.) 17 2nd Coat: Car -Cote HB 6.0 -9.0 mils (D.F.T.) 18 19 20 7. Exterior non- submerged ferrous metals: 21 22 a. Tnemec 23 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 -- 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 24 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 25 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 - 4.5 mils D.F.T.) 26 27 b. Carboline 28 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 29 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 30 3rd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 31 32 c. PPG /HPC 33 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 34 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 35 D.F.T.) 36 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi -Gloss Urethane 95 -8800 (2.0 -6.0 37 mils D.F.T.) 38 39 d. Sherwin Williams 40 1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (3.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 41 2nd Coat: HiSolids Polyurethane (2.0 -4.0 mils (D.F.T.) 42 43 8. Interior non - submerged ferrous metals: 44 45 a. Tnemec 46 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 47 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 48 49 b. Carboline PAINTING 09900 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.) 2 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 3 4 c. PPG /HPC 5 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 6 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 7 D.F.T.) 8 9 9. Exterior galvanized and non - ferrous metal: 10 11 a. Tnemec 12 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 13 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 14 15 b. Carboline: 16 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 17 2nd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 18 19 c. PPG /HPC 20 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 21 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 22 D.F.T.) 23 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi -Gloss Urethane 95 -8800 (2.0 -6.0 24 mils D.F.T.) 25 26 d. Sherwin Williams 27 1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (2.5 -3.5 mils D.F.T.) 28 2nd Coat: H- Solids Polyurethane (2.5 -3.5 mills D.F.T.) 29 30 31 10. Interior galvanized and non - ferrous metals: 32 33 a. Tnemec 34 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 35 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 36 37 b. Carboline: 38 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 39 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 40 41 c. PPG /HPC 42 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 43 D.F.T.) 44 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 45 D.F.T.) 46 47 11. Galvanized and non - ferrous metal submerged or subject to splashing: 48 49 a. Tnemec PAINTING 09900 -7 04/26/11 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0 -14.0 mils D.F.T.) c. PPG /HPC 1st Coat: PPG Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 2nd Coat: PPG Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 3rd Coat: PPG Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 12. Metal surfaces exposed to temperatures above 250 °F: a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 39- 1261(0.7 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 39- 1261(0.7 --- 1.5 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1 Coat: Thermaline 450, up to 450 °F (8.0 -10.0 mils D.F.T.) or 1st Coat: Carbozinc 11 or 11 HS (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Thermaline 4700, 400- 1000 °F (2.0 mils D.F.T.) c. PPG /HPC 2 Coats: Speedhide Int /Ext Aluminum Paint 6 -230. (1.0 -1.3 mils D.F.T. per coat) 13. Insulated Pipe: a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) c. PPG /HPC 2 Coats: PITT -TECH Interior /Exterior Satin DTM Industrial Enamels 90 -474. Series.(2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 14. Aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals: a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) PAINTING 09900 -8 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 b. Carboline 2 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 3 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 4 5 6 c. PPG /HPC 7 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 8 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 9 D.F.T.) 10 11 15. Plastic Piping - Interior: 12 13 a. Tnemec 14 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 15 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 16 17 b. Carboline 18 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.) 19 2 Coats : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) PAINTING 09900 -9 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 c. PPG /HPC 1st Coat: 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 16. Plastic Piping - Exterior a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.) 2 Coats : Carbothane 133HB (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) c. PPG /HPC 1st Coat: 2nd Coat: 3rd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) Pitthane HB Semi -Gloss Urethane 95 -8800 (2.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) d. Sherwin Williams 1st Coat: Hi- Solids Polyurethane (2.5 -3.5 mils D.F.T) 2nd Coat: Hi- Solids Polyurethane (2.5 -3.5 mils D.F.T) 17. Interior Drywall and Plaster - Industrial Areas a, Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 51-792 (1.0 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2,0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0 -5.0 mils DFT) 3rd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) c. PPG /HPC 1st Coat: 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 18. Interior Drywall and Plaster - Office Areas PAINTING 09900 -10 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r r r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 a. Tnemec 3 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 51 -792 (1.0 — 1.5 mils D.F.T.) 4 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 -- 3.0 mils D.F.T.) 5 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 — 3.0 mils D.F.T.) 6 7 b. Carboline 8 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.) 9 2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 10 11 c. PPG /HPC 12 1st Coat: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer /Sealer 6 -2 13 (1 mil DFT) 14 2 Coats: Speedhide Int Latex Eggshell 6 -411 15 (2 mils D.F.T. per coat) 16 17 19. Interior Concrete Floors 18 19 a. Tnemec 20 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 201 (5.0 — 7.0 mils D.F.T >) 21 2nd Coat: Tenemec Series 280 (8.0 — 10.0 mils D.F.T.) 22 23 Note: Apply 50 — 70 mesh silica sand at 5 lbs. per 150 sq. ft. 24 between 1st and 2nd coat to provide non -slip surface_ 25 26 b. Carboline 27 1st Coat: Carboguard 1340 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.) 28 2 Coats: Carboguard 890 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 29 30 Note: Utilize 40 -60 mesh silica sand to provide non -slip surface. 31 Consult with Carboline for application details. 32 33 c. PPG /HPC 34 1st Coat: Megaseal High Solids Primer 99 -6639 35 (5.0 — 7.0 mils D.F.T) 36 2nd Coat: Megaseal Self - Leveling Epoxy 99 -6680 37 (10.0 -12.0 mils D.F.T.) 38 39 20. Concrete in highly Corrosive Environment Special Coating 40 41 a. Tnemec 42 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 434 Perma - Shield H2S 43 (125 mils D.F.T.) 44 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma -Glaze 45 (12.0 -15.0 mils D.F.T.) 46 47 b. Carboline PAINTING 09900-11 04/26/11 1st Coat: Plasite 5371 (125 mils) 2nd Coat: Plasite 4500S (12.0 -15.0 mils D.F.T.) c. PPG /HPC /Polyspec (Concrete Headworks) 1st Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer 2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner (100 mils) 3rd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner (100 mils) d. PPG /HPC /Polyspec (Manholes /Lift Stations -Force & Gravity Mains) 1st Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer 2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner (100 mils) 3rd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner (100 mils) e. PPG /HPC /Enviroline (Concrete Headworks) 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3 -5 mils DFT) #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20 -40 mils DFT) #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20 -40 mils DFT) f. PPG /HPC /Enviroline (Manholes /Lift Stations -Force & Gravity Mains) g. 1st Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3 -5 mils DFT) 2nd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20 -40 mils DFT) 3rd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20 -40 mils DFT) Sherwin Williams 1st Coat: CorCote FRE (80 -100 mils D.F.T) PAINTING 09900 -12 04/26/11 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 a 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 21. Metals submerged or subject to splashing in highly Corrosive 3 Environment Special Coating 4 5 a. Tnemec 6 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma - Shield H2S (30 mils 7 D.F.T.) 8 9 b. Carboline 10 1 Coat: Plasite 4500S (35.0 -40.0 mils D.F_T.) 11 12 c. PPG /HPC /Polyspec 13 1st Coat: 14 2nd Coat: 15 16 d. Sherwin Williams 17 1st Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0 -9.0 mils D.F.T) 18 2nd Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0 -9.0 mils D.F.T) 19 20 22. Secondary Containment Concrete 12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite 21 22 a. Tnemec 23 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 61 -5002 Tenemeliner (8.0 -10.0 mils 24 D.F.T.) 25 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 61 -5001 Tenemeliner (8.0 -10.0 mils 26 D.F.T.) 27 28 b. Carboline 29 1st Coat: Semstone 800 primer 30 Finish Coats: Semstone 870 31 (reference Semstone 870 application spec for installation details) 32 c. PPG /HPC /Polyspec 33 1st Coat: 34 35 23. Buried Pipe Appurtenances (Coal Tar Epoxy / Bitumastic Coating) 36 37 a. Tnemec 38 1st Coat Tnemec Series 46H -413 Tneme -Tar (14.0 -20.0 mils 39 D.F.T) 40 2nd Coat Tnemec Series 46H -413 Tneme -Tar (14.0 -20.0 mils 41 D.F.T) 42 43 b. Carboline 44 1st Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0 -20.0 mils D.F.T) 45 2nd Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0 -20.0 mils D.F.T) 46 47 c. Sherwin Williams PAINTING 09900 -13 04/26/11 1 1st Coat: Tar -Guard (16 -20 mils D.F.T) 2 2nd Coat: Tar -Guard (16 -20 mils D.F.T) 3 4 C. Any surfaces not specifically named in the Schedule and not specifically 5 excepted shall be prepared, primed and painted in the manner and with 6 materials consistent with these Specifications. The Engineer shall select 7 which of the manufacturer's products, whether the type is indicated herein or 8 not, shall be used for such unnamed surfaces. No extra payment shall be 9 made for this painting. 10 11 2.03 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT 12 13 A. Color coding shall consist of color code painting and identification of all 14 exposed conduits, through items and pipelines for the transport of gases, 15 liquid and semi- liquids including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe 16 coverings, fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and all operating 17 accessories that are integral to be whole functional mechanical pipe and 18 electrical conduit system. Colors shall be as noted in the Paint and Color 19 Coding Schedules attached at the end of this Section. 20 21 B. All hangers and pipe support floor stands shall be painted the same color and 22 with the same paint as the pipe it supports. The system shall be painted up to, 23 but not including, the flanges attached to the mechanical equipment nor the 24 flexible conduit connected to electrical motors. When more than one pipe 25 system is supported on the same bracket, the bracket shall be painted the 26 same color as the adjacent wall or ceiling. Colors shall be as noted in the 27 Paint and Color Coding Schedule. 28 29 C. Ali systems which are an integral part of the equipment, that is originating from 30 the equipment and returning to the same piece of equipment, shall be painted 31 between and up to, but not including, the fixed flanges or connections on the 32 equipment. 33 34 2.04 LETTERING OF TITLES 35 36 A. Each pipe system shall be labeled with the name of the materials in each 37 pipeline and alongside this an arrow indicating the direction of flow of liquids. 38 Titles shall be as so described in attached schedule. Titles shall not be 39 located more than twenty (20) linear feet apart and shall also appear directly 40 adjacent to each side of any wall the pipeline breaches, adjacent to each side 41 of the valve regulator, flowcheck, strainer clean -out, and all pieces of 42 equipment. 43 44 B. Titles shall identify the contents by complete name. Identification title 45 locations shall be determined by the Engineer but, in general, they shall be 46 placed where the view is unobstructed and on the two lower quarters of pipe PAINTING 09900 -14 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 E 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 or covering where they are overhead. Title should be clearly visible from 2 operating positions especially those adjacent to control valves. 3 4 C. Titles on equipment shall be applied at eye level on machines, where possible, 5 or at the uppermost broad vertical surface of low equipment. Where more 6 than one piece of the equipment item to be titled exists, the items shall be 7 numbered consecutively, as indicated on the mechanical drawings, or as 8 directed by the Engineer; for example Pump No. 1, Pump No. 2, etc. Titles 9 shall be composed and justified on the left hand side as follows: Pump No. 1. 10 11 D. Application of titles. 12 13 1. The color of the titles shall be black or white, as approved, to best 14 contrast with the color of the pipes and equipment and shall be stencil 15 applied. 16 17 2. Stencil text is to be in ALL CAPS worded exactly as shown in the 18 Schedule. Titles are to be printed in a single line. 19 20 3. Letter sizes. 21 22 Outside Diameter 23 of Pipe or Size of Legend 24 Covering (inches) Letters (inches) 25 26 3/4 to 1 -1/4 1/2 27 1 -1/2 to 2 3/4 28 2 -1/2 to 6 1 -1/4 29 8 to 10 2-1/2 30 More than 10 3 -1/2 31 32 Equipment titles are to be two inches high. 33 34 4. Arrow sizes. Where "a" is equal to 3/4 of outside diameter of pipe or 35 covering, the arrow shaft shall be 2 "a" long by 3/8 "a" wide. The arrow 36 head shall be an equilateral triangle with sides equal to "a." Maximum 37 "a" dimension shall be 6 inches. 38 39 5. When using direction arrows, point arrowhead away from pipe markers 40 and in direction of flow. If flow can be in both directions, use a 41 double- headed directional flow. 42 43 2.05 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT 44 45 A. Unless otherwise indicated, all fabricated equipment shall be shop primed and 46 shop or field finished. 47 PAINTING 09900 -15 04/26/11 1 B. All items to be shop primed shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material 2 prior to priming. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any prime coating shall 3 have been improperly applied or if material contrary to these Specifications 4 shall have been used, that coating shall be removed by sandblasting to white 5 metal and re- primed in accordance with these Specifications. 6 7 C. All shop prime coats shall be of the correct materials and applied in 8 accordance with these Specifications. Remove any prime coats not in 9 accordance with these Specifications by sandblasting and apply the specified 10 prime coat at no additional cost to the Owner. 11 12 D. Shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and damaged or bare spots 13 retouched with the specified primer before the application of successive paint 14 coats in the field. 15 16 E. Be responsible for and take whatever steps are necessary to properly protect 17 the shop prime and finish coats against damage from weather or any other 18 cause. 19 20 F A shop finish coat shall be equal in appearance and protection quality to a 21 field applied finish coat. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a shop finish coat 22 does not give the appearance and protection quality of other work of similar 23 nature, prepare the surfaces and apply the coat or coats of paint, as directed 24 by the Engineer, to accomplish the desired appearance and protection quality. 25 Submit to the Engineer sufficient evidence that the standard finish is 26 compatible with the specified finish coat. 27 28 G. Wherever fabricated equipment is required to be sandblasted, protect all 29 motors, drives, bearings, gears, etc., from the entry of grit. Any equipment 30 found to contain grit shall be promptly and thoroughly cleaned. 31 32 PART 3 - EXECUTION 33 34 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES 35 36 A. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared, as specified herein or in Section 37 09865, and shall be dry and clean before painting. Special care shall be given 38 to thoroughly clean interior concrete and concrete block surfaces of all marks 39 before application of finish. 40 41 B. All metal welds, blisters, etc., shall be ground and sanded smooth in 42 accordance with SSPC -SP -3 or in difficult and otherwise inaccessible areas by 43 hand cleaning in accordance with SSPC -SP -2. All pits and dents shall be 44 filled and all imperfections shall be corrected so as to provide a smooth 45 surface for painting. All rust, loose scale, oil, grease and dirt shall be removed 46 by use of approved solvents, wire brushing or sanding. 47 PAINTING 09900 -16 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C. Concrete surfaces shall be finished as specified in Division 3. Report 2 unsatisfactory surface conditions to the Engineer. Concrete shall be free of 3 dust, oil, curing compounds, and other foreign matter. Concrete surfaces shall 4 have any laitance or weak layers removed prior to install of coatings or linings 5 using captive shot blasting systems. Concrete shall have a minimum surface 6 tensile strength of at least 300 PSI per ASTM D -4541 standard. Testing is 7 required to confirm this strength using ASTM D -4541 standard and methods. 8 Surface profile shall be CSP -3 to CSP -6 meeting ICRI (International Concrete 9 Repair Institute) standard guideline #03732 for Coating, Concrete, producing 10 an anchor profile equal to 60 -grit sandpaper or coarser. Prepare concrete 11 surfaces by mechanical (captive shot blast) means to achieve this desired 12 profile. Moisture Vapor Transmission should be 3 pounds or less per 1,000 13 square feet over 24 hour timeframe as confirmed through a calcium chloride 14 test as per ASTM E -1907. Quantitative relative humidity (RH) testing, ASTM 15 F -2170, should confirm concrete RH results < 75 %. Application of coatings 16 and linings should be made when out gassing of concrete is declining during 17 periods when surface temperatures of the concrete is falling. Use of a surface 18 thermometer to determine when surface temperatures are falling is required. 19 When in doubt, double priming may be required. All surface irregularities, 20 cracks, expansion joints and control joints should be properly addressed prior 21 to application of coatings and linings. Remove all contaminates and 22 contaminated surface layers prior to application of coatings and linings. 23 24 D. Concrete block surface shall be smooth and cleaned of all dust, efflorescence, 25 chalk, loose mortar, dirt, grease, oil, tar and other foreign matter. 26 27 E. All plastic pipe surfaces shall be lightly sanded before painting. 28 29 F. Wood surfaces shall be dry. Sand to obtain a smooth surface. Ali 30 encrustations shall be removed. 31 32 G. Exposed Pipe: Bituminous coated pipe shall not be used in exposed 33 locations. Pipe that will be exposed after project completion shall be primed in 34 accordance with the requirements herein. Any bituminous coated pipe that is 35 inadvertently installed in exposed locations shall be sandblasted clean before 36 priming and painting. After installation all exterior, exposed flanged joints shall 37 have the gap between adjoining flanges sealed with a single component 38 polysulfide sealant to prevent rust stains. 39 40 H. Primed or Previously Painted Surfaces and Nonferrous Surfaces: All coated 41 surfaces shall be cleaned prior to application of successive coats. All 42 nonferrous metals not to be coated shall be cleaned. This cleaning shall be 43 done in accordance with SSPC -SP -1, Solvent Cleaning. 44 45 I. Shop - Finished Surfaces: All shop- coated surfaces shall be protected from 46 damage and corrosion before and after installation by treating damaged areas 47 immediately upon detection. Abraded or corroded spots on shop - coated PAINTING 09900 -17 04/26/11 1 surfaces shall be "Hand Cleaned" and then touched up with the same 2 materials as the shop coat. All shop coated surfaces which are faded, 3 discolored, or which require more than minor touch -up, in the opinion of the 4 Engineer, shall receive new surface preparation before being repainted. Cut 5 edges of galvanized sheets and exposed threads, and cut ends of galvanized 6 piping, electrical conduit and metal pipe sleeves, that are not to be finished 7 painted, shall be "Solvent Cleaned" and primed with zinc dust -zinc oxide metal 8 primer. 9 10 J. Galvanized and Zinc - Copper Alloy Surfaces: These surfaces to be painted 11 shall be "Solvent Cleaned" and treated as hereinafter specified. Such 12 surfaces not to be painted shall be "Solvent Cleaned." Brush off blasting per 13 SSPC -SP7 galvanized surfaces to insure optimum coating adhesion. 14 15 K. Aluminum embedded or in contact with concrete must be painted with one 16 shop coat of zinc chromate followed by one heavy coat of aluminum 17 pigmented asphalt paint. Brush off blasting per SSPC -SP7 of galvanized 18 surfaces to insure optimum coating adhesion. 19 20 3.02 WORKMANSHIP 21 22 A. General: 23 24 1. Primer (spot) and paint used for a particular surface shall, in general, be 25 as scheduled for that type of new surface. Confirm with the paint 26 manufacturer that the paint proposed for a particular repaint condition 27 will be compatible with the existing painted surface. Sample repainted 28 areas on the actual site will be required to insure this compatibility. 29 Finished repainted areas shall be covered by the same guarantee 30 specified for remainder of work. 31 32 2. At the request of the Engineer, samples of the finished work prepared in 33 strict accordance with these Specifications shall be furnished and all 34 painting shall be equal in quality to the approved samples. Finished 35 areas shall be adequate for the purpose of determining the quality of 36 workmanship. Experimentation with color tints shall be furnished to the 37 satisfaction of the Engineer where standard chart colors are not 38 satisfactory. 39 40 3. Protection of furniture and other movable objects, equipment, fittings 41 and accessories shall be provided throughout the painting operations. 42 Canopies of lighting fixtures shall be loosened and removed from 43 contact with surface, covered and protected and reset upon completion. 44 Remove all electric plates, surface hardware, etc., before painting, 45 protect and replace when completed. Mask all machinery name plates 46 and all machined parts not receiving a paint finish. Dripped or 47 spattered paint shall be promptly removed. Lay drop cloths in all areas PAINTING 09900 -18 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 where painting is being done to adequately protect flooring and other 2 work from all damage during the operation and until the finished job is 3 accepted. 4 5 4. On metal surfaces apply each coat of paint at the rate specified by the 6 manufacturer to achieve the minimum dry mil thickness required. If 7 material has thickened or must be diluted for application by spray gun, 8 the coating shall be built up to the same film thickness achieved with 9 undiluted material. One gallon of paint as originally furnished by the 10 manufacturer shall not cover a greater area when applied by spray gun 11 than when applied unthinned by brush. Deficiencies in film thickness 12 shall be corrected by the application of an additional coat(s). On 13 masonry, application rates will vary according to surface texture, 14 however, in no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be 15 exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to 16 achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the 17 coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint. 18 19 5. Paints shall be mixed in proper containers of adequate capacity. All 20 paints shall be thoroughly stirred before use and shall be kept stirred 21 while using. No unauthorized thinners or other materials shall be added 22 to any paint. 23 24 6. Only skilled painters shall be used on the work and specialists shall be 25 employed where required. 26 27 B. Field Priming: 28 29 1. Steel members, metal castings, mechanical and electrical equipment 30 and other metals that are shop primed before delivery at the site will not 31 require a prime coat on the job. All piping and other bare metals to be 32 painted shall receive one coat of primer before exposure to the 33 weather, and this prime coat shall be the first coat as specified in the 34 painting schedule. 35 36 2. Equipment which is customarily shipped with a baked -on enamel finish 37 or with a standard factory finish shall normally be field painted unless 38 the prefinished equipment is specifically color selected and unless the 39 finish has not been damaged in transit or during installation. Surfaces 40 that have been shop painted and have been damaged, or where the 41 shop coats or coats of paint have deteriorated, shall be properly 42 cleaned and retouched before any successive painting is done on them 43 in the field. All such field painting shall match as nearly as possible the 44 original finish. 45 46 C. Field Painting: 47 PAINTING 09900 -19 04/26/11 1 1 All painting at the site shall be designated as Field Painting. 2 3 2. All paint shall be at room temperature before applying, and no painting 4 shall be done when the temperature is below 50 °F, in dust -laden air, 5 when rain or snow is falling, or until all traces of moisture have 6 completely disappeared from the surface to be painted. 7 8 3. Successive coats of paint shall be tinted so as to make each coat easily 9 distinguishable from each other with the final undercoat tinted to the 10 approximate shade of the finished coat. 11 12 4. Finish surfaces shall not show brush marks or other irregularities. 13 Undercoats shall be thoroughly and uniformly sanded with No. 00 14 sandpaper or equal to remove defects and provide a smooth even 15 surface. Top and bottom edges of doors shall be painted and all 16 exterior trim shall be back - primed before installation. 17 18 5. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly 19 manner so as to facilitate inspection. All exterior concrete and masonry 20 paint shall be performed at one continuous manner structure by 21 structure. Materials subject to weathering shall be prime coated as 22 quickly as possible. Surfaces of exposed members that will be 23 inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned and painted before erection. 24 25 6. All materials shall be brush painted unless spray painting is specifically 26 approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for all 27 damage caused by overspray or drifting. 28 29 7 Ali surfaces to be painted, as well as the atmosphere in which painting 30 is to be done, shall be kept warm and dry by heating and ventilation, if 31 necessary, until each coat of paint has hardened. Any defective paint 32 shall be scraped off and repainted in accordance with the Engineer's 33 directions. 34 35 8. Before final acceptance of the work, all damaged surfaces of paint shall 36 be cleaned and repainted as directed by the Engineer. 37 38 9. Any pipe scheduled to be painted and having received a coating of a tar 39 or asphalt- compound shall be painted with two coats of PPG /HPC 40 PITT - GUARD® Epoxy Penetrating Sealer 95 -2328 or equal before 41 successive coats are applied per the schedule. Tnemec recommends 42 using 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline over tar, but a test patch must be run 43 initially to test the paint's compatibility with the tar. Carboline does not 44 recommend application of their coatings over tar. Instead, Carboline 45 recommends removal of the tar followed by the application of suitable 46 coatings based on the substrate and intended service application. 47 PAINTING 09900 -20 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.03 CLEANUP 2 3 A. The premises shall at all times be kept free from accumulation of waste 4 material and rubbish caused by employees or work. At the completion of the 5 painting remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and all rubbish from 6 and about the buildings and leave work "broom clean" unless more exactly 7 specified. 8 9 B. Upon completion, remove all paint where it has been spilled, splashed or 10 splattered on all surfaces, including floors, fixtures, equipment, furniture, etc., 11 leaving the work ready for inspection. 12 13 C. All cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in 14 closed metal containers or destroyed at the end of each day. Upon 15 completion of the work, the entire job left clean and acceptable to the 16 Engineer. 17 18 3.04 INSPECTION, TESTING EQUIPMENT AND PROCEDURES 19 20 A. Inspection 21 22 1. All phases of the work are subject to inspection by the Engineer to 23 assure proper performance and compliance with the specifications. 24 25 2. The Engineer shall be advised of the proper time to inspect surface 26 preparation, prime coat and each succeeding coat. The Contractor 27 shall apply additional coats only after the previous coat has been 28 approved by the Engineer or Owner's representative. 29 30 B. Testing 31 32 1. The Contractor shall have on the project site the following testing 33 equipment. Equipment shall be in calibration and proper working order. 34 Equipment shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers' 35 instructions or as directed by the Engineer. 36 37 a. Sling Psychrometer: Relative humidity and dew point readings 38 shall be taken at intervals throughout the days work. Readings 39 shall be taken at the start of the mornings work, mid day and 40 afternoon. Should environmental conditions change, additional 41 reading shall be taken to assure that coatings are being applied 42 under the conditions as outlined by the coatings manufacturer. 43 44 b. Surface Temperature Thermometer: Surface temperatures shall 45 be taken in areas where work is being performed. Surface 46 temperature shall be that as specified by the coatings 47 manufacturer. PAINTING 09900 -21 04/26/11 1 2 c. Replica Tape & Micrometer: Testex X- Course Replica Tape 3 shall be employed to determine the surface profile of blasted 4 surfaces. Surface profile shall be as specified. 5 6 d. Dry Film Thickness Measurements: Dry film thickness reading 7 shall be taken with a properly calibrated (per the manufacturer's 8 instructions) Type 1 (magnetic) or Type 2 (electromagnetic) 9 instrument. Dry film thickness reading will be taken and 10 recorded in the in a frequency and manner as dictated by the 11 Engineer. 12 13 e. Holiday Detection: After completion of immersion coating 14 systems on steel surfaces, all surfaces shall be holiday detected 15 in accordance with ASTM G 62 low voltage holiday detection. 16 Holiday detector shall be a Tinker & Rasor Model M -1 or equal. 17 Areas found to have holidays shall be marked and repaired in 18 accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions. The 19 Engineer shall be notified of time of testing so that he might be 20 present to witness testing. The Contractor shall provide ladders, 21 rigging, etc. as necessary to allow the Engineer to spot check 22 paint thickness of each coat. 23 24 25 3.05 PAINT 26 27 A. General Notes & Guidelines: 28 29 1. All color numbers and names herein refer to master color card. Colors 30 of specified equal manufacturers may be substituted with approval of 31 the Engineer. 32 33 2. Pipe lines, equipment, or other items which are not listed here shall be 34 assigned a color by the Engineer and shall be treated as an integral 35 part of the Contract. 36 37 3. When color coding is specified or directed by the Engineer, it shall 38 consist of color code painting and identification of all exposed conduits, 39 through lines and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquids or 40 semi- liquids, including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe 41 coverings, fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and any 42 operating accessories which are integral to a whole functional 43 mechanical pipe and electrical conduit systems. 44 45 4. The colors of the Finish Schedule shall be interpreted as follows: 46 47 COLORS TNEMEC # COLORS TNEMEC # 48 White 11 WH Tank Blue 25BL PAINTING 09900 -22 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ivory 01 BR Blue 11 SF 2 Red 06SF D. Blue 78BL 3 L. Green 52GN L. Blue 26BL 4 Green 09SF Aqua 1OGN 5 D. Green 08SF 6 7 COLORS TNEMEC # COLORS TNEMEC # 8 L. Brown 06BR Inter. Orange 05SF 9 Brown 84BR Orange 04SF 10 Bronze 86BR Tan 04BR 11 L. Gray 31GR Yellow 03SF 12 M. Gray 33GR Safety Yellow 02SF 13 D. Gray 34GR 14 15 16 are potential hazards, shall be Safety Orange 04SF. 17 18 6. All safety equipment shall be painted in accordance with OSHA 19 standards. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 8. All conduits shall be painted to match its background surface. 29 30 9. Building surface colors shall be painted, as scheduled in the Finish 31 Schedule, or as selected by the Engineer. 32 33 10, Control panels shall be factory finished. 34 35 3.06 GUARANTEE AND ANNIVERSARY INSPECTION 36 37 A. All work shall be warranted for a period of one year from date of acceptance of 38 the project. 39 40 B. The Owner will notify the Contractor at least 30 days prior to the anniversary 41 date and shall establish a date for the inspection. Any defects in the coating 42 system shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 43 Should a failure occur to 25% of the painted surface, either interior or exterior, 44 the entire surface shall be cleaned and painted in accordance with these 5. All moving parts, drive assemblies, and covers for moving parts which 7 All in -line equipment and appurtenances not assigned another color shall be painted the same base color as the piping. The pipe system shall be painted with the pipe color up to, but not including, the flanges attached to pumps and mechanical equipment assigned another color_ Tanks shall be painted the color of the piping system that they serve, unless the tank is fiberglass or polyethylene. 45 specifications. 46 47 3.07 PAINT AND COLOR CODING SCHEDULE 48 PAINTING 09900 -23 04/26/11 1 Piping and Legend 2 Backwash Waste 3 Blower Air 4 Coagulant 5 Compressed Air 6 Drains 7 Fuel 8 Potable Water 9 Process Sample 10 Reclaimed Effluent 11 Return Activated Sludge 12 Sodium Hypochlorite 13 Sprinkler 14 Thickened Sludge 15 Wastewater 16 Waste Activated Sludge Color Light Brown Green Aqua Dark Green Red Black Red Dark Blue Light Grey Red Pantone Purple 522C Brown Yellow Red Dark Brown Dark Gray White Bands Orange White PAINTING 09900 -24 Orange 04/26/11 Equipment and Building Color Exterior Equipment, Valves, Gates, Fans Match System Interior Equipment and Pumps (including factory finished) Match System Structural Steel (Interior) White Ceiling White Cranes and Hoists Yellow Ductwork Match Surface Mounted Interior Air Handling and Ventilation Equipment Match Surface Mounted Valve and Gate Operators Match System Electrical Conduit and Junction Boxes Match Surface Mounted Submerged Concrete Black 3.08 PAINT SCHEDULE A. Items to be painted are as noted on the Drawings and /or called for in the Specifications. END OF SECTION PAINTING 09900 -25 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PAINTING 09900 -26 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 SECTION 11225 CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to install replacement parts, perform repairs, and rehabilitate the existing clarifiers at the locations shown on the Drawings and specified herein. • Northeast Plant • Northeast Plant • Marshall Street Plant • East Plant Clarifiers 1 thru 4 Clarifiers 5 thru 8 Clarifiers 1 thru 4 East Clarifier and West Clarifier Northeast Plant Clarifiers Nos. 1 through 4 The Work at the Northeast Plant Clarifiers Nos. 1 through 4 consists of the removal of existing equipment and the furnishing and installing of new equipment including but not limited to: • Center Column (Assumed to be 30 -inch diameter) • Rotating Cage and Arm Mechanism (75 -foot diameter except #2) • Drive Assembly • Access Bridge Assembly • Energy Dissipating Baffle System • Dual Skimmer Assemblies • A Single Scum Beach Plate and Trough Assembly • Scum Trough Piping • All Associated Brackets, Supports, Anchors and Hardware • Design RAS Flow Range (MGD) = 0.60 - 2.25 • Assumed Design MLSS Avg Flow (MGD) = 2.25 Clarifiers No. 1 and No. 2 shall be rehabilitated first. Clarifiers No. 3 and No. 4 shall remain in service while No. 1 and No. 2 are being rehabilitated. Clarifiers No. 1 and No. 2 shall remain in service while No. 3 and No. 4 are being rehabilitated. At least one Return Activated Sludge (RAS) pump and one Waste Activated Sludge (WAS) pump shall remain in service at all times. The Contractor will be allowed to take all four Clarifiers Nos.1 through 4 out of service for not more than 72 consecutive hours for replacement of the telescoping valve seals in the RAS Wet Well and the RAS and WAS pump suction valves. CLARIFIERS 11225 -1 04/26/11 1 1 1 2 3 C. Northeast Plant Clarifiers Nos. 5 through 8 ' 4 5 The Work at the Northeast Plant Clarifiers Nos. 5 through 8 consists of the 6 removal of existing equipment and the furnishing and installing of new I 7 equipment including but not limited to: 8 9 • Center Column (30 -inch diameter) I 10 • Rotating Cage and Arm Mechanism (75 -foot diameter) 11 • Drive Assembly 12 • Access Bridge Assembly 1 13 • Energy Dissipating Baffle System 14 • Dual Skimmer Assemblies 15 • A Single Scum Beach Plate and Trough Assembly 1 16 • Scum Trough Piping 17 • All Associated Brackets, Supports, Anchors and Hardware 18 • Design RAS Flow Range (MGD) = 0.60 - 2.25 1 19 • Assumed Design MLSS Avg Flow (MGD) = 2.25 20 I 21 At least two clarifiers, one Return Activated Sludge (RAS) pump and one 22 Waste Activated Sludge (WAS) pump shall remain in service at all times. The 23 Contractor will be allowed to take all four Clarifiers Nos.5 through 8 out of 24 service for not more than 72 consecutive hours for replacement of the 25 telescoping valve seals in the RAS Wet Well and the RAS and WAS pump 26 suction valves. I 27 28 D. Marshall Street Plant Clarifiers Nos. 1 through 4 29 I 30 The Work at the Marshall Street Plant Clarifiers Nos. 1 through 4 consists of 31 the removal of existing equipment and the furnishing and installing of new 32 equipment including but not limited to: I 33 34 • Center Column (30 -inch diameter) 35 • Rotating Cage and Arm Mechanism (100 -foot diameter) 1 36 • Drive Assembly 37 • Access Bridge Assembly 38 • Energy Dissipating Baffle System I 39 • Dual Skimmer Assemblies 40 • A Single Scum Beach Plate and Trough Assembly 41 • Scum Trough Piping 42 • All Associated Brackets, Supports, Anchors and Hardware 43 • Design RAS Flow Range (MGD) = 0.5 - 3.75 44 • Design RAS Flow Avg (MGD) = 1.25 45 • Design MLSS Flow Range (MGD) = 1.5 - 10 46 • Design MLSS Flow Avg (MGD) = 3.75 1 CLARIFIERS 11225 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 No. 2 Clarifier shall be rehabilitated first. A minimum of three clarifiers shall 4 remain in service at all times. It may be possible for all clarifier equipment to 5 be temporarily shut down during equipment change -outs and change -over 6 periods for no more than 2 -hours upon approval by the Engineer. 7 8 E. East Plant, East and West Clarifiers 9 10 The Work at the East Plant, East and West Clarifiers consists of the removal 11 of existing equipment and the furnishing and installing of new equipment 12 including but not limited to: 13 14 • Center Column (Sandblast and Repaint) (30 -inch diameter) 15 • Single Skimmer Arm and Blade Assembly (Replace) (100 -foot 16 diameter) 17 • Remainder of Rotating Mechanism (Sandblast and Repaint) 18 • Drive (Replace) 19 • West Clarifier Access Bridge Assembly (Replace) 20 • East Access Bridge Assembly (Sandblast and Repaint Center Platform 21 • Influent Baffle Well (Sandblast and Repaint) 22 • Scum Beach Plate and Trough Assembly (Replace) 23 • All Associated Brackets, Supports, Anchors, and Hardware (Replace) 24 • Design RAS Flow Range (MGD) = 0.5 - 2.5 25 • Design RAS Flow Avg (MGD) = 1.9 26 • Design MLSS Flow Range (MGD) = 1.5 - 8.75 27 • Design MLSS Flow Avg (MGD) = 2.5 28 29 The East Clarifier shall be rehabilitated first. A minimum of one clarifier shall 30 remain in service at all times. 31 32 F Existing equipment shall be removed and dismantled or demolished and 33 disposed of as necessary for the repairs and replacements in accordance with 34 the requirements specified herein. 35 36 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM 37 38 A. All of the equipment specified herein is intended to be standard equipment for 39 use with the activated sludge waste treatment process and shall be designed 40 for use in center feed type circular clarifiers with peripheral weirs and troughs. 41 All clarifiers furnished under this project shall be of the same design in all 42 aspects. 43 44 B. Clarifiers with suction header type sludge collection and removal are approved 45 for this project as described in Section 2.09 of this Section 11225. Clarifiers 46 that use scraper type mechanisms for sludge collection and removal are not CLARIFIERS 11225 -3 04/26/11 1 acceptable and shall not be approved. Clarifiers that use multiple, individual 2 suction riser pipes or stepped -type mechanisms are not acceptable and will 3 not be approved. 4 5 C. Control of sludge withdrawal shall be external of the basin via existing 6 telescoping valves, one dedicated to each clarifier. 7 8 D. Clarifier drives shall be of cast iron construction and shall be equipped with 9 horizontal or vertical speed reduction units with cast iron housings as 10 described in Sections 2.04 and 2.05. Clarifier drives using hydraulic pressure 11 to produce rotational force or hydraulic drives are not acceptable. Clarifier 12 drives constructed of fabricated steel are not acceptable. 13 14 E. Existing Clarifier Floor, Influent Piping, RAS Piping and Drain Piping 15 16 1. The existing clarifiers are equipped with drain piping connected to 17 sumps located in the floor near the center column (except the clarifiers 18 at the Marshall Street plant). 19 20 2. According to plant staff, there are no drains in the Marshall Street 21 clarifiers. 22 23 3. All of the existing drains must remain functional, and the equipment 24 furnished shall provide for continued operation of the drains after the 25 project has been completed. 26 27 4. The Contractor shall modify the floor, the existing drain sump, the 28 existing drain piping, the existing RAS pipe, and the existing influent 29 pipe in all clarifiers as necessary to accommodate the equipment 30 furnished. 31 32 E. Clarifier 2 at the Northeast Plant 33 34 Clarifier 2 at the Northeast Plant has a side wall feature not found in 35 any of the other clarifiers. The interior of the perimeter circular clarifier 36 wall has been thickened. This thickened wall extends upwards from 37 the floor approximately 5 feet and inwards from the original wall 38 approximately 6 -8 inches. The thickened wall appears to have been 39 added after the clarifier was originally constructed and no drawings of 40 the thickened wall have been located. Due to this feature, the radius of 41 Clarifier #2 rotating mechanism below the water surface will be 6 " -8" 42 (nominal) less than the other 75 -foot diameter clarifiers. The 43 Contractor shall field verify all existing clarifier dimensions including 44 basin diameter at the floor, center of tank to center of the outer bridge 45 supports, and all relative elevations. 46 47 F Clarifier Equipment CLARIFIERS 11225 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Except as noted on the Drawings, new clarifier equipment shall include: 3 4 1. Drive mechanism complete with reducer, motor, and overload trip 5 device; 6 2. Sludge removal equipment including supports, center cage, truss arm, 7 and sludge collection device; 8 3. Influent energy dissipating system and supports; 9 4. Influent flocculating well and supports; 10 5. Center support column, adapter if required, anchor bolt template, and 11 grout shield; 12 6. Access bridge and platform including hand railings, kick plates, and 13 walkway surface as shown on the Drawings; 14 7. Dual rotating surface skimmer assemblies with pivoted skimmers 15 except at the East Plant which shall have a single skimmer arm. 16 8. One scum trough and submerged shelf (Beach); 17 9. All bolts, drill -in anchors, and hardware of Type 316 stainless steel; 18 and, 19 10. All other appurtenances shown on the Drawings or as required for a 20 completely operational system. 21 11. The Contractor shall field verify all existing clarifier dimensions and 22 elevations. 23 24 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS 25 26 A. All clarifier equipment described herein shall be furnished by a Manufacturer 27 regularly engaged in the design, manufacture and production of the type of 28 equipment specified herein. At the time of bidding, the Manufacturer's 29 experience shall include not Tess than 10 (ten) different installation locations 30 (facilities) where clarifiers that incorporate sludge removal mechanisms and 31 influent baffle systems as specified herein in tanks of the same or larger 32 diameter as those required for this project, have been in satisfactory operation 33 for not less than five (5) years. 34 35 B. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, delivered and installed in 36 accordance with the best practices and methods. Each component and 37 ancillary equipment item furnished under this specification shall be new and 38 unused. 39 40 C. All clarifier equipment shall be designed and sealed by a registered 41 professional engineer. The equipment shall be designed, fabricated and 42 installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. 43 44 1.04 SUBMITTALS 45 46 A. Six (6) copies of all materials required to establish compliance with these 47 Specifications shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of the CLARIFIERS 11225 -5 04/26/11 1 General Conditions and the General Requirements. Submittals shall include 2 at least the following: 3 4 1. Certified shop drawings showing all important details of construction, 5 dimensions, minimum required spacing, and anchor bolt locations. 6 7 2. Complete installation instructions including anchor bolt layout, piping 8 details and mechanical connections. 9 10 3. Descriptive literature, bulletins and /or catalogs of the equipment. 11 12 4. Information required by Section 01340. 13 14 5. The total weight of the equipment, including the weight of the single 15 largest item or component. 16 17 6. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts. 18 19 7 Electrical power and control data covering the following details: 20 21 a. Approximate enclosure dimensions including height, width, and 22 depth, maximum wire size (main terminal block or disconnect 23 device.) 24 25 b. A control schematic diagram shall be provided that shows power 26 and control circuits in sufficient detail to evaluate the control 27 system design. Control schematic shall be color coded. 28 29 8. Performance data covering all internal mechanical components. The 30 submittal shall contain any additional information necessary for the 31 Engineer to determine that the proposed equipment meets the 32 specified requirements. 33 34 B. Descriptive Information: 35 36 1. Performance data demonstrating how the proposed design removes 37 sludge from the entire tank bottom. Data shall be from an existing 38 clarifier operating under the following field conditions: 39 40 a. Actual plant operation; 41 b. Similar diameter, side water depth, and floor slope; 42 c. Return sludge concentrations not less than 5,000 mg /I; 43 d. Return sludge flow range from 50% to 150% of the influent flow 44 for each clarifier; 45 e. Maximum velocity in the suction header shall not exceed 3.0 to 46 4.5 fps; and, CLARIFIERS 11225 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f Maximum head Toss shall not exceed 1.0 -feet for the suction 2 header. 3 4 2. Complete test procedure for field testing the sludge collector 5 mechanism for the AGMA -rated torques specified. 6 7 3. Details of construction showing: 8 9 a. Type of material used for each component; 10 b. Dimensions, thicknesses, and weights of each component; 11 c. Size, shape, and cross - section of header if so equipped; 12 d. Size, shape, and location of inlet openings; and, 13 e. All manifold seals. 14 15 4. Complete assembly drawing of collector components giving type of 16 material, dimensions and thicknesses of each element. 17 18 5. General arrangement of drive unit verifying AGMA ratings, overload 19 protection, construction, housing material and horsepower. Provide the 20 design parameters used per AGMA 6034 -B92 and the resulting values 21 per AGMA 2001 -D04. 22 23 6. Weight of each complete collector, verified by the Contractor with 24 substantiating copy to the Engineer as the material is received on the 25 job site. 26 27 1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE AND TRAINING MANUALS 28 29 A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Training Manuals shah be prepared 30 for each set of clarifiers as follows: 31 32 1. Northeast Plant Clarifiers 1 thru 4 shall have dedicated Manuals 33 2. Northeast Plant Clarifiers 5 thru 8 shall have dedicated Manuals 34 3. Marshall Street Clarifiers 1 thru 4 shall have dedicated Manuals 35 4. No new Manuals are required for the East Plant clarifiers 36 37 B. Copies of the operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished to the 38 Engineer in accordance with Section 01730 and 01820. The instructions shall 39 be prepared specifically for each set of clarifiers as identified above and shall 40 include all required drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, and other 41 materials required to instruct operation and maintenance personnel unfamiliar 42 with such equipment. 43 44 C. Each Operating and Maintenance Manual shall contain a complete set of the 45 approved shop drawings for each piece of equipment provided. 46 CLARIFIERS 11225 -7 04/26/11 1 D. A factory representative who has complete knowledge of the proper 2 equipment operation and maintenance shall be provided for a minimum of two 3 (2) days to instruct representatives of the Owner and the Engineer on proper 4 operation and maintenance of the equipment. This work may be conducted in 5 conjunction with the inspection of installation and the test run as provided 6 under PART 3 of this Specification. If there are difficulties in operation of the 7 equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service 8 shall be provided at no cost to the Owner. 9 10 1.07 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS 11 12 A. The Manufacturer's recommended spare parts shall be furnished as required 13 for scheduled maintenance for a period of one (1) year following Substantial 14 Completion. 15 16 B. At minimum, the following shall be provided as spare parts: 17 18 • Twelve (12) shear pins of the same rating as installed in the clarifier drive. 19 • Two (2) secondary gear -motor assemblies or gearbox /motor combinations, 20 as applicable. 21 • One set of main gear bearings and replaceable bearing races. 22 • Four (4) chain and sprocket assemblies as applicable. 23 24 C. All tools and spare parts shall be properly packed and protected for long 25 storage and placed in containers clearly identified in indelible markings as to 26 contents. 27 28 1.08 WARRANTY 29 30 A. Provide one (1) year equipment warranty in accordance with Section 01740 of 31 these Specifications. 32 33 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 34 35 2.01 GENERAL 36 37 A. These Specifications call attention to certain features, but do not purport to 38 cover all details of construction of the equipment. They are, however, 39 intended to cover the furnishing, delivery, installation and field testing of all 40 materials, equipment and apparatus, as required. Any additional auxiliary 41 equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed installation not 42 mentioned in these Specifications, nor shown on the Drawings, shall be 43 furnished and installed. 44 45 B. The material covered by these Specifications is intended to be standard 46 equipment of proven ability and as manufactured by reputable concerns 47 having experience in the production of such equipment. The equipment CLARIFIERS 11225 -8 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 furnished shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with 2 best practice and methods and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as 3 shown on the Drawings. 4 5 C. All the sludge collection equipment shall be fabricated using fixtures or jigs, 6 assembled in the Manufacturer's shop to insure proper fitting of parts, then 7 match- marked for erection, and disassembled for shipment. The assembled 8 components shall be available for inspection by the Engineer prior to 9 disassembly. The Manufacturer shall provide 21 days notification to the 10 Engineer to schedule the inspection. 11 12 D. All components supplied shall conform to the size requirements as set forth on 13 the Drawings, to the requirements included in this Specification, and to the 14 overall design parameters. 15 16 17 2.02 STRUCTURAL MEMBERS 18 19 A. Structural steel shall conform to ASTM A36. 20 21 B. All steel parts shall have a minimum thickness of /4 -inch. 22 23 C. Structural support members shall be shop welded or a field bolted assembly. 24 Field welding will not be permitted on structural members. 25 26 D. All steel structural components shall be designed so that stresses developed 27 do not exceed allowable stresses, as defined by current AISC standards when 28 designed for 200% of the specified AGMA -rated torque. 29 30 E. Panel lengths and member sizes shall be selected, such that slenderness 31 ratios do not exceed 200 for compression and 240 for tension. For strength, 32 the controlling member force shall be used to determine member size. 33 34 F Maximum deflection in a span under combined live and dead loads shall not 35 exceed L/360. 36 37 2.03 DRIVE MECHANISM 38 39 A. The drive mechanisms shall be assemblies consisting of a primary gear 40 reduction unit, an intermediate gear reduction unit, and final reduction unit 41 with a pinion and internal spur gear mounted in a cast iron or ductile iron 42 turntable base, completely factory assembled and finish painted. Fabricated 43 steel housings and exposed gearing are unacceptable and will not be 44 considered. The primary and secondary reduction units shall have horizontal 45 shafts as defined in Section 2.04 or vertical shafts as defined in Section 2.05 46 herein. Drive design criteria shall be as listed below. 47 CLARIFIERS 11225 -9 04/26/11 1 1. Minimum internal gear pitch diameter: 40 - inches 2 2. Minimum ball race diameter: 42 - inches 3 3. Motor horsepower: 3/4 - HP 4 4. AGMA rated torque: 16,875 ft -Ibs 5 5. Speed: 0.04 RPM 6 6. Overturning Moment 305,700 ft -Ibs 7 8 2.04 HORIZONTAL SHAFT DRIVES 9 10 A. Horizontal Shaft Reduction Units 11 12 1. The drive unit shall be designed and manufactured by the clarifier 13 equipment Manufacturer. 14 15 2. All gearing shall be enclosed in gray cast iron ASTM A -48 Class 40B 16 housings. 17 18 3. The drive shall be designed to allow removal and replacement of ball 19 bearings and ball race strip liners without removing the walkway bridge. 20 The internal primary gear shall be a one -piece design_ 21 22 4. All gearing shall be designed in accordance with the latest AGMA 23 standards for both strength and durability, based on 24 -hour 24 continuous, uniform load duty and 20 -year design life at the specified 25 output speed. Spur gearing shall be designed in accordance with 26 AGMA Standard 2001 -D04 "Fundamental Rating Factors and 27 Calculation Methods for Involute Spur and Helical Gear Teeth ". Worm 28 gearing shall be designed in accordance with AGMA Standard 6034- 29 B92 (February 1992) "Practice for Enclosed Cylindrical Worm Gear 30 Speed Reducers and Gearmotors" with a minimum 1.25 service factor. 31 The rated torque of the drive shall be the lowest value computed for the 32 worm gear set, spur gear and pinion for strength and durability. 33 Planetary and cycloidal gearing not covered by AGMA standards shall 34 not be used. 35 36 5. All bearings shall be designed for a minimum B -10 life of 200,000 hours 37 of continuous duty at the output speed specified. Design and rating of 38 all other bearings, including pinion and thrust bearings, shall be based 39 on a B -10 life of not less than 100,000 hours of continuous duty. 40 41 6. The turntable base shall have an annular raceway to contain ball 42 bearings upon which the internal gear rotates. The ball race shall 43 ensure a low unit ball load, long life and stability, without the necessity 44 of guide shoes or steady bearings. The balls shall be alloy steel and 45 shall bear vertically and horizontally on four (4) renewable, specially 46 hardened (38 -42 Rockwell C) steel liner strips force fitted (pins or cap 47 screws not permitted) into the turntable base and internal gear. The CLARIFIERS 11225 -10 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 liner strips shall be 3/8 -inch thick x 3/4 -inch wide. The internal gear, 2 pinion and ball race shall run in an oil bath and be protected by a felt 3 seal and steel dust shield. 4 5 7. The turntable base shall be bolted to the center and be designed to 6 support the internal gear with the rotating mechanism and the access 7 bridge. An oil filling and level pipe, along with a drain plug and sight 8 gauge, shall be furnished as part of this unit. A pipe shall be attached 9 to the bottom of the turntable for condensate removal. The oil piping 10 shall terminate within the center of the base for easy access. 11 12 8. The turntable assembly shall be so designed that the one -piece internal 13 gear, bearings, and bearing races are removable when the access 14 bridge is removed. 15 16 9. The main bearing shall be capable of withstanding the overturning 17 moment without the aid of any underwater guides or bearings to ensure 18 correct tooth contact for AGMA rating of the main gear. 19 20 B. Primary Reduction Unit 21 22 1. Provide a commercially available gear reducer or gear motor in a cast 23 housing. 24 25 2. All bearings shall be anti- friction type running in oil. 26 27 3. The motor shall be totally enclosed, ball bearing type, of ample power 28 for starting and continuously operating the drive mechanism without 29 overloading. 30 31 4. The motor shall conform to NEMA standards and be suitable for 32 operation on 230/460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz current. 33 34 5. A Primary reduction unit shall drive the intermediate reduction unit by a 35 close coupled drive or through a chain and sprocket arrangement with 36 #80L self - lubricating chain and stainless steel OSHA approved 37 removable chain guard. 38 39 6. Provide proper chain tension by an adjustable steel base mounted on 40 the intermediate reduction unit. The tension shall be adjusted 41 according to the Manufacturer's recommendations. 42 43 C. Intermediate Reduction Unit 44 45 1. Provide worm gear type intermediate reduction units with grease and 46 oil lubricated anti - friction type bearings in a cast or ductile iron housing 47 securely bolted on the machined top face of the final reduction casting. CLARIFIERS 11225 -11 04/26/11 1 1 Worm and shaft shall be a two -piece assembly for ease of I 2 maintenance. 3 1 4 2. The unit shall be mounted on a machined face on the top of the final 5 reduction unit. Align and maintain accurate centers with the final 6 reduction gearing. Swivel base mounting of the intermediate unit are 7 not acceptable. 8 9 3. Mount an electro - mechanical overload device on the thrust end of the 10 intermediate worm pinion shaft. The overload device shall be totally 11 enclosed in an epoxy coated cast aluminum, cast iron, or ductile iron 12 housing with a NEMA 4X rating. The overload device shall be 13 adjustable and sense end thrust or torque, be integrated into the drive 14 motor control circuit, and interrupt power to the motor. 15 16 4. A visual dial -type torque indicator shall be provided and oriented so it 17 may be read from the walkway. 18 19 5. Microswitches shall be factory set to: (1) sound an alarm when the 20 load on the mechanism reaches 100% of the AGMA rated torque 21 rating; and (2) deactivate the motor when the load reaches 120% of the 22 AGMA rated torque. 23 24 6. Provide a shear pin device, set for 130% of the AGMA rated torque 25 mounted on the drive unit. 26 27 D. Final Reduction 1 28 29 1. Provide internal, full depth involute tooth design, ductile iron spur gear 30 driven by a heat treated steel pinion from the slow speed shaft of the 31 intermediate reduction unit. 32 33 2. Provide bearings at top and bottom of pinion to ensure complete tooth 34 contact between mating surfaces. Pinion and pinion shaft shall be 35 furnished as a one -piece or two -piece assembly. 36 37 3. Provide cast or ductile iron turntable base with annular raceway to 38 contain balls upon which the internal gear rotates. The ball race shall 39 ensure low unit ball Toad, long life and stability without the use of I 40 submerged guide shoes, bumpers or steady bearings. 41 I 42 4. Provide an internal gear of one -piece design such that the gear is 43 replaceable when the access bridge is removed. The bearings and 44 bearing races shall be replaceable without removing the bridge. 45 I 46 5. Internal gear, pinion and balls to run in an oil bath and be protected by 47 a felt seal and vertical steel dust shield. CLARIFIERS 11225 -12 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 6. Provide oil filling and level pipe along with a drain plug and sight gauge. 3 4 7. Turntable base shall be bolted to the center column and be designed to 5 support the bridge, internal gear and rotating mechanism. 6 7 8. The internal final gear shall be driven by a heat - treated steel pinion 8 from the slow speed shaft of the intermediate gear reduction unit. The 9 internal gear shall be of ductile iron and shall be designed to support 10 the center cage and collector. 11 12 2.05 VERTICAL SHAFT DRIVES 13 14 A. Vertical Shaft Reduction Units 15 16 1. The drive unit shall be designed and manufactured by the clarifier 17 equipment Manufacturer to ensure unit responsibility. The drive unit 18 shall be designed for the torque value and shall turn the mechanism at 19 the speed specified in Section 2.03. 20 21 2. The main bearing shall be designed for the total rotating mechanism 22 Toads with a minimum L -10 life of 876,000 hours. The drive unit shall 23 be capable of producing and withstanding the peak momentary torque 24 while starting. 25 26 3. The drive main gear shall be designed to a minimum AGMA 6 rating 27 when rated in accordance with the latest AGMA standard. Gear teeth 28 shall be designed for proper load distribution and sharing. The main 29 bearing shall be capable of withstanding the overturning moment 30 without the aid of any underwater guides or bearings to ensure correct 31 tooth contact for AGMA rating of the main gear. 32 33 4. All spur gearing shall be designed to the latest AGMA spur gear 34 standard for strength and surface durability, based on a life of B -10 35 200,000 hours, continuous duty at the specified output speed. The 36 design running torque rating of the drive gearing shall be based on the 37 smaller of the strength and durability values determined from the above 38 AGMA standard. 39 40 5. All components of the drive shall be direct coupled. 41 42 B. Physical Characteristics 43 44 1. The drive unit shall consist of a solid internal main spur gear, bearing 45 turntable, pinion, secondary speed reducer, support base, and drive 46 unit bearing. 47 CLARIFIERS 11225 -13 04/26/11 1 2. The drive shall be mounted on the center column and support the 2 entire rotating load of the mechanism. 3 4 3. The main internal gear shall be forged of alloy hardened steel. The 5 pinion shall be heat treated alloy steel. All speed reducers shall be fully 6 enclosed and running in grease. 7 8 4. The drive housing shall be cast iron or ductile iron. Lubricant and dust 9 shields shall be provided. 10 11 5. The drive bearing shall include a forged steel precision gear /bearing 12 set, with fully contoured raceways hardened to a minimum 58 -60 Rc 13 and protected by a neoprene seal. 14 15 6. The drive shall be designed so that the balls and nylon spacers can be 16 replaced without removing the access walkway. 17 18 7 The main gear to pinion gear mesh shall be grease lubricated. 19 Lubrication fittings shall be readily accessible. Continuous condensate 20 drains shall be provided in the main gear housing. 21 22 C. Overload Protection 23 24 1. An overload device shall be provided in a stainless steel, weatherproof 25 enclosure. The device shall be actuated by torque generated from the 26 main drive, which shall operate two independently adjustable, factory 27 calibrated overload switches. The alarm switch shall be set at 100 28 percent of running torque and the motor cutout switch shall be set at 29 120 percent of the running torque. 30 31 2. A visual torque indicator shall be provided and oriented so that it can be 32 read from the walkway. It shall be calibrated from 0 to 160 percent of 33 design AGMA torque rating. 34 35 D. Turntable 36 37 1. The turntable base shall be cast iron or ductile iron and have an 38 annular bearing raceway upon which the rotating assembly rests. It 39 shall have a maximum allowable deflection in accordance with the 40 bearing specifications. The allowable modulus of elasticity shall be a 41 minimum of 29 x 106 psi. 42 43 2. The center cage shall be fastened to and supported from the gear 44 casing. 45 CLARIFIERS 11225 -14 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3. Ball bearings shall be of high carbon chrome alloy 52100 steel running 2 in fully contoured races, as part of a precision gear /bearing set. The 3 balls shall be grease lubricated and protected by elastomer seals. 4 5 E. Speed Reducing Unit: 6 7 1. The speed reducing unit shall consist of cycloidal, helical, or planetary 8 speed reducers directly connected to a motor without the use of chains 9 or v- belts, and shall be keyed to the pinion. 10 11 2. The main ring gear of cycloidal drives shall be made of high carbon 12 chromium bearing steel and be fixed to the drive casing. An eccentric 13 bearing on the high speed shaft shall roll cycloidal discs of the same 14 material around the internal circumference of this main ring gear. The 15 lobes of the cycloid disc shall engage successively with pins in the fixed 16 ring gear. The movement of the cycloid discs shall be transmitted then 17 by pins to the low speed shaft. 18 19 3. The speed reducer efficiency shall be a minimum of 90% per reduction 20 stage. 21 22 4. The speed reducer helical or planetary gearing shall be manufactured 23 to AGMA standards and shall provide at least 95% power transmission 24 efficiency per stage. The speed reducer shall have a minimum service 25 factor of 1.25 based on the output torque rating of the drive. 26 27 5. The reducers shall be fitted with radial and thrust bearings of proper 28 size for all mechanism loads and be grease lubricated. 29 30 6. The speed reducer shall be reversible to release any stored energy as 31 the result of an over torque condition. 32 33 2.06 CENTER COLUMN 34 35 A. The center column shall be a cylindrical steel pipe and shall support the drive, 36 one end of the access bridge, and all rotating components. The center 37 column shall also provide a pathway for flow to enter the clarifier. 38 39 B. The top of the center column shall accept the drive unit. The center column 40 shall be set plumb, and shall be at the center of the diameter of the clarifier 41 structure. 42 43 C. The center column shall be fabricated of 1/4 -inch thick (minimum) steel plate 44 and shall be anchored to the concrete base with a minimum of eight (8) 1 -inch 45 diameter anchor bolts. The center pier base plate will be double punched to 46 allow the use of existing anchors if practical, or if not, will allow the installation CLARIFIERS 1122515 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 2.07 INFLUENT FLOCCULATION WELL 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 B. The new influent flocculation well shall be no smaller than the existing 21 flocculation well with respect to depth and diameter. 22 23 24 25 26 D. The influent flocculation wells shall be of adequate size to diffuse the flow into 27 the tank at a uniform flow through velocity. Ports shall be cut into the influent 28 well to permit the escape of entrapped scum. The ports shall have adjustable 29 sized openings and contain baffles to prevent short circuiting to the effluent 30 weir. 31 32 2.08 INFLUENT ENERGY DISSIPATION SYSTEM 33 34 A. An energy dispersion system shall be located between the center column and 35 the influent flocculation well. The energy dispersion system shall be designed 36 to dissipate energy from the incoming flow by discharging the flow through 37 nozzles or ports in a counter clockwise, tangential direction or by decreasing 38 the velocity of the stream and forcing the influent to change direction multiple 39 times between the center column and the influent feed well. 40 41 B. The energy dissipation system shall promote effective mixing and tapered 42 flocculation within the influent well. 43 44 C. The energy dissipation system shall be fabricated from a minimum 3/16 -inch 45 thick steel plate. The system shall be supported from the drive cage and of new drill -in anchors. The center column shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication. All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. The Manufacturer shall provide a steel template to accurately locate the anchor bolts. E. The center column shall serve as an influent pipe and shall have a minimum of three (3) overflow areas at its upper end to diffuse flow into the influent well. The combined total of the three areas shall be a minimum of 175% of the center column cross sectional area. The diameter of the new center column shall be 30 inches. A. The influent flocculation well shall be fabricated of 3/16 -inch thick (minimum) steel plate sections with bolted connections and 1/4 -inch thick (minimum) structural steel trim angles top and bottom for shape and rigidity. The influent well shall be supported from the drive cage. C. The influent flocculation well and all supports shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication. All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. 46 influent well support beams. 47 CLARIFIERS 11225 -16 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D. The energy dissipation system and supports shall be hot dip galvanized after 2 fabrication. All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. 3 4 E. The Manufacturer shall provide hydraulic calculations showing dimensional 5 characteristics, port area, velocity, headloss, and mixing intensity. 6 7 2.09 SLUDGE COLLECTION SUCTION HEADER 8 9 A. The sludge collector mechanism shall utilize a center drive mounted on a 10 stationary center support pier. A welded structural steel cage attached to the 11 drive shall support and rotate a single sludge suction header device. 12 13 B. The sludge suction header shall be located parallel to the tank bottom and 14 shall have a series of inlet orifices arranged such that in a single revolution of 15 the header the entire tank bottom is swept clean. The header shall 16 continuously remove settled sludge proportionally, resulting in a uniform 17 withdrawal over the entire radius of the tank. The header shall be 18 hydraulically designed to remove larger volumes of sludge at greater 19 distances from the tank center. 20 21 C. The mechanism shall collect the sludge from the tank bottom and carry it 22 through the header to the center outlet, the removal being accomplished by 23 hydrostatic pressure. Design movement through the header shall be at a 24 constant velocity. 25 26 D. The sludge suction header shall be fabricated of 1/4 -inch thick steel plate and 27 hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. The header cross section shall be 28 rectangular shaped and shall taper in size from a maximum near the tank 29 center to a minimum at the outer end, to provide uniform sludge draw -off 30 velocities throughout. 31 32 E. The longitudinal cross - sectional axis of the header shall be mounted at an 33 angle of 45° with the tank bottom to physically trap sludge for maximum solids 34 concentration. 35 36 F. A 2 -inch flexible neoprene squeegee fluidizing blade shall be installed as an 37 integral part of the header to direct the sludge into the area of influence of the 38 orifices with minimum sludge agitation. The squeegee shall have slotted 39 holes providing 1 -inch vertical adjustment. 40 41 G. At the inner end of the header, a flange shall be provided for bolting to the 42 center manifold. The header shall have a center scraper of '/4 -inch steel plate 43 with a neoprene blade to clean the tank bottom around the manifold directing 44 the sludge to the first orifice. 45 CLARIFIERS 11225 -17 04/26/11 1 H. At regular intervals, not to exceed 30- inches, the Manufacturer shall size and 2 space inlet orifices varying in size from a minimum diameter near the tank 3 center to a maximum at the outer end. 4 5 I. The design of each orifice shall be proportionate to the volume of sludge 6 withdrawn and the design of the orifices and header shall be such as to insure 7 hydraulic balance in the tank and uniform sludge withdrawal from the entire 8 tank bottom at all flows. 9 10 J. The suction header shall be fitted with a flange and bolted to a mating flange 11 on the center manifold. The suction header shall be supported from the 12 center cage and by one of the truss arms. The entire suction header 13 assembly shall be vertically adjustable using jack - bolts, steel tie -bars, or 14 turnbuckles. 15 16 K. The center manifold shall be located at the base of the center column and 17 rotate around the stationary center column. The center manifold shall be 18 supported by the steel cage, connected to the suction header, form a ring 19 around the center column, receive sludge from the suction header and deliver 20 sludge to the sludge outlet pipe located in the floor of the clarifier_ 21 22 L. The center manifold shall be fitted with two sealing rings and 2 seals designed 23 to ensure only sludge from the suction header enters the center manifold. A 24 bottom plate shall be securely anchored to the concrete floor and grouted in 25 place after proper aligning 26 27 M. Two rotating truss arms located 180 degrees apart shall be provided and fitted 28 to support the two rotating skimmer assemblies. One of the truss arms shall 29 also support the suction header. 30 31 N. The truss arms shall be constructed of Y4 -inch minimum thickness members 32 pinned at the base and connected to the center cage through adjustable steel 33 tie -bars or turnbuckles. 34 35 O. Steel plate counterweights, not exceeding 50- pounds each, shall be installed 36 as necessary on the truss arm providing balance for the entire rotating 37 assembly. 38 39 P With respect to the Northeast WRF, Clarifiers 1 thru 4, the existing concrete 40 floor, the influent piping, the drain piping, and the drain sump shall be 41 modified as necessary by the Contractor to accommodate the equipment 42 provided. No modifications are required to those items for any other Clarifiers. 43 44 Q. If so equipped, the existing clarifier drain piping and drain sump shall be 45 modified or relocated as necessary and shall remain fully functional. 46 CLARIFIERS 11225 -18 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R. No field welding will be permitted on equipment supplied by the Manufacturer 2 except for spot welds to lock in the skimmer supports or as approved by the 3 Engineer. Field welding may be required to modify the sludge and influent 4 pipes below the level of the existing floor. 5 6 2.11 CENTER CAGE 7 8 A. Each new center cage shall be of an all- welded construction made up of 9 structural steel members having a minimum thickness of 1/4 -inch. The center 10 cage shall be underhung from the drive, rotate continuously, and support all 11 rotating equipment. 12 13 B. All center cages shall be welded structural angle steel construction and shall 14 be provided by the clarifier manufacturer. 15 16 C. The entire center cage assembly shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication. 17 All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. 18 19 2.12 ACCESS BRIDGES and PLATFORMS 20 21 A. All bridges shall be welded structural steel access bridges of wide flange 22 beam construction and shall be provided by the Manufacturer. 23 24 B. The access bridge shall extend from the tank wall to the center column with a 25 platform extension provided for 360 degree access around the drive. 26 Aluminum grating and dielectric gaskets shall be used on the access bridge(s) 27 and platform. 28 29 C. All ferrous components of the bridge shall be hot dip galvanized after 30 fabrication. All fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 31 32 D. The bridge shall be designed to support, in addition to the dead load, a live 33 Toad of 50 pounds per square foot (psf), with a deflection not exceeding 1/360 34 of the span. 35 36 E. The platform shall be a minimum 9 -foot x 8 -foot rectangular extension from 37 the access bridge to provide working clearance around the drive. 38 39 F. A two -rail handrail systems consisting of not Tess than 1 -1/2 -inch diameter, 40 Schedule 40 aluminum pipe for the rails and vertical posts, and a 3/16 -inch 41 thick x 4 -inch high aluminum toe plate, shall be furnished for both sides of the 42 access bridge(s), platform. Handrails shall meet the requirements of Section 43 05200. 44 45 G. At the Northeast Plant and at Marshall Street, the Contractor shall remove the 46 existing sludge blanket level detector equipment from each of the bridges. 47 After the new clarifier equipment has been installed and tested, the Contractor CLARIFIERS 11225 -19 04/26/11 1 shall re- install the existing sludge blanket level detector equipment on each 2 bridge using new conduit and hardware. The existing blanket detection probe 3 equipment shall be re- connected to the actual instrument to provide a 4 complete and operational system. 5 6 H. At the East Plant the Contractor shall furnish and install a new sludge blanket 7 level detection system on each clarifier. The existing probe mounting 8 brackets, probes, cable, and instrument are to be removed and replaced with 9 new mounting brackets, new probes, new cable, a new instrument and new 10 conduit and hardware as specified. The new system shall be re- connected to 11 the existing plant SCADA system in the same fashion as the existing system 12 is connected. 13 14 4.13 SCUM REMOVAL EQUIPMENT 15 16 A. A "full radius" surface skimmer, consisting of a scum blade, hinged skimmer, 17 scum trough, and scum beach shall be provided. All scum removal equipment 18 shall be 304 stainless steel. The scum beach and trough supports shall be 19 also be 304 stainless steel. All springs, pivot points, threaded fasteners, and 20 anchors shall be 316 stainless steel. 21 22 B. Scum removal equipment shall be installed on each clarifier as generally 23 described below: 24 25 1. Northeast Plant Clarifiers 1 thru 4 shall be equipped with dual scum 26 skimmers and a single 4 -foot scum beach, submerged shelf, and 27 trough assembly similar to the existing configuration. 28 2. Northeast Plant Clarifiers 5 thru 8 shall be equipped with dual scum 29 skimmers and a single 4 -foot scum beach, submerged shelf, and 30 trough assembly similar to the existing configuration. 31 3. Marshall Street Clarifiers 1 thru 4 shall be equipped with dual scum 32 skimmers and a single 4 -foot scum beach, submerged shelf, and 33 trough assembly similar to the existing configuration. 34 4. The East Plant shall be equipped with a single scum skimmer and a 35 single 6 -foot scum beach, submerged shelf, and trough assembly. The 36 single skimmer is similar to the existing configuration while the 6 -foot 37 beach and trough assembly is an upsize from the existing. 38 39 C. Scum Blade, Skimmer, And Hinged Wiper Assembly 40 41 1. The scum blade shall extend from the influent feed baffle to the scum 42 baffle and shall be supported from below by a rotating sludge scraper 43 or sludge suction header arm. 44 45 2. The skimmer assembly shall be mounted on the outer end of the scum 46 blade to form a pocket for trapping the scum. The skimmer assembly CLARIFIERS 11225 -20 04/26/11 1 I1 shall insure continual contact and proper alignment between the hinged 2 wiper, the scum baffle, and the scum beach plate and trough assembly. 3 4 3. The hinged wiper shall have a wearing strip on its outer end, which 5 contacts the scum baffle and a neoprene strip on its lower and inner 6 edge. The scum shall be trapped as the wiper meets the scum beach 7 plate ramp and is raised up the ramp and discharged into the scum 8 trough. 10 9 4. Skimmers that rely on support from the scum baffle are not acceptable. 11 12 D. Scum Beach Plate and Scum Trough 13 14 1. The scum beach plate and trough assembly shall be supported with 15 structural elements attached to the wall. 16 17 2. The scum trough and beach plate shall be fabricated of 1/4 -inch thick I18 304 stainless steel plate, adequately supported from the tank wall. The 19 scum trough width shall be as specified in 2.13 B. All scum beach 20 plate and trough assemblies shall be designed to integrate with the I 21 scum baffle and consist of a beach plate, inner radius baffle, 6 -inch 22 discharge pipe and flushing device. 23 I 24 3. The inner edge of the scum trough shall be furnished with a 4 -foot long 25 x 16 -inch deep stainless steel baffle plate extension to entrap additional 26 scum. I27 28 4. The beach plate shall slope at a nominal incline of 1 -3/4 -inch per foot 29 to a point typically 5 -inch below the maximum water elevation. The I 30 submerged trough shall continue on a horizontal run for an additional 4- 31 feet along the scum baffle. An inner radius baffle extending 9- inches 32 below and 3- inches above maximum water level shall run from the I33 trough to the end of the submerged shelf. 34 35 5. A 6 -inch standard pipe flange shall be provided for connection to the 36 scum discharge piping. 37 38 E. Scum Pipes and Wall Penetrations 1 39 40 1. New scum pipes shall be installed to convey scum out of the scum 41 trough and out of the clarifier through the existing opening as shown on I42 the Drawings. New scum pipes shall be installed on all clarifiers except 43 at the East Plant. At the East Plant the existing scum pipes shall be I 44 modified as required and be connected to the new scum troughs on 45 both clarifiers. 46 1 1 CLARIFIERS 11225 -21 04/26/11 1 2. All new scum pipes shall be schedule 80 PVC of the same size as the 2 existing scum pipes but not smaller than 6 -inch. A flanged connection 3 shall be made at the scum troughs_ 4 5 3. The new scum pipes shall extend through the wall and connect to the 6 existing scum pipes at the first pipe joint outside the clarifier wall using 7 the correct adapters and fittings. 8 9 4. New gaskets, new Link - Seals, and new hardware associated with the 10 actual wall penetrations shall be furnished and installed on all clarifiers 11 except at the East Plant. 12 13 2.14 HARDWARE 14 15 A. All equipment bolts, drill -in anchors, and associated hardware shall be 316 16 stainless steel, furnished by the Contractor in accordance with the 17 Manufacturer's recommendations, and of ample size and strength for the 18 purpose intended. 19 20 B. All equipment drill -in anchors and attachment bolts shall be set by the 21 Contractor in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and shall be of 22 316 stainless steel construction. 23 24 2.15 COATINGS 25 26 A. All carbon steel components shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication. 27 28 2.16 ELECTRICAL CONTROL AND POWER 29 30 A. Electrical control and power for each clarifier shall be installed as shown on 31 the electrical drawings and specified in Division 16. 32 33 2.17 MOTORS 34 35 A. Motors shall meet the requirements of the electrical specifications and shall be 36 suitable for the type of service specified herein with a 1.15 service factor. 37 38 PART 3 - EXECUTION 39 40 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES 41 42 A. In accordance with Specification 01820, the Contractor shall provide the 43 services of the Manufacturer's field service representative for a period of not 44 Tess one (1) eight -hour day to provide Owner training. 45 46 B. The Contractor shall provide the services of the Manufacturer's field service 47 representative to ensure proper assembly and in accordance with CLARIFIERS 11225 -22 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Specification 01625 as needed in order to inspect the installed equipment, 2 supervise testing, and supervise unit start up. 3 4 C. A written report of the Manufacturer's field service representative's findings 5 and installation approval shall be submitted to the Engineer covering all 6 inspections and outlining in detail any deficiencies noted. This report upon 7 approval by the Engineer shall be included in the O&M Manual. 8 9 D. The field service representative shall provide a written certification to the 10 Engineer that all equipment has been installed in accordance with the 11 Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and is ready to be placed in 12 service. 13 14 3.02 DEWATERING, DEMOLITION, AND MODIFICATIONS 15 16 A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for designing, permitting, 17 furnishing, installing and operating a dewatering system as needed to protect 18 the existing clarifiers against flotation. The Northeast Plant clarifiers Nos. 1 -4 19 are not equipped with dewatering /hydrostatic pressure relief valves in the floor 20 or wall of the clarifier. All other clarifiers are equipped with hydrostatic 21 pressure relief valves, which may or may not be capable /suitable for 22 adequately dewatering and protecting the clarifiers against hydrostatic uplift 23 and floating. Although the Work of this project includes the installation of new 24 hydrostatic pressure relief valves in all of the clarifiers, the Contractor shall be 25 responsible for installing piezometers, monitoring groundwater levels and 26 providing and operating such dewatering equipment as needed to protect the 27 clarifiers from flotation. The Contractor shall repair any damage to any 28 clarifier and piping caused by flotation, to the Engineer's satisfaction and at no 29 cost to the Owner. 30 31 B. Equipment and hardware shall be designed and manufactured to replace or 32 upgrade the existing equipment being removed /demolished. Installation shall 33 require no modifications to the existing concrete structure with the exception 34 of influent piping and sludge piping floor penetrations area and the drain line 35 sump area in the floor of the Northeast WRF Clarifiers 1 thru 4. Otherwise all 36 equipment shall be "bolt in ". Unless otherwise stated, all equipment supplied 37 in this section shall be stainless steel or galvanized steel and all fasteners and 38 associated hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 39 40 3.03 INSTALLATION 41 42 A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions 43 and accurately aligned in orientation with related equipment in order to insure 44 proper operation. 45 CLARIFIERS 11225 -23 04/26/11 1 B. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial 2 operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the 3 Manufacturer's recommendations. 4 5 C. Drill -in anchor bolts shall be furnished by the Manufacturer and installed by 6 the Contractor in accordance with the Manufacturer's templates and 7 recommendations. 8 9 D. Each component shall be prefabricated in the factory of the manufacturer and 10 shall be shipped in assemblies complete and operable as detailed on the 11 Drawings and specified herein. Each component assembly shall be erected in 12 the field in accordance with the Manufacturer's installation drawings. 13 14 E. The Contractor shall install all equipment and supply all necessary temporary 15 construction equipment, power and labor in accordance with General 16 Mechanical Requirements and in accordance with the Manufacturer's 17 recommendations to provide a complete and satisfactory installation. 18 19 F. The Contractor shall plumb, adjust for true plane of rotation, grout beneath the 20 center column, grout beneath the center sludge collection assembly, grout 21 beneath the manifold seal plate, and grout beneath the drive unit as required 22 by the manufacturer. 23 24 G. Any field welding shall have weld spatter and burrs removed by chipping and 25 grinding to prevent operator injury and shall be coated in accordance with 26 Specifications 09865 and 09900. Any accessories mounted on or attached to 27 the exterior of the tank and supplied by the Manufacturer will be considered 28 part of the Manufacturer's erection responsibility. 29 30 3.04 PAINTING 31 32 A. All areas where the factory applied galvanizing has been compromised shall 33 be coated with bituminous epoxy as specified in Section 09865 and Section 34 09900. 35 36 3.05 INSPECTION AND TESTING 37 38 A. The rotating mechanism of each unit shall be field tested, after erection, and 39 in the presence of the Engineer to confirm and verify the structural, 40 mechanical, and electrical integrity of the equipment. Each unit shall be 41 loaded to 100% and 120% of the design torque specified. This field test shall 42 include checking the operation of all alarm and drive shutdown electrical and 43 electro - mechanical equipment, as well as the SCADA functionality of all new 44 and reconnected equipment. 45 CLARIFIERS 11225 -24 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 w 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Testing shall be accomplished with the mechanism in operation and under its 2 own power. Loads shall be applied to the arms by tensioning cables attached 3 to the arms and the floor or wall. 4 5 1. Test by anchoring each of the lower arms of each rotating mechanism 6 to the floor or wall. 7 8 2. Demonstrate proper operation of high torque alarm, power cut -off, and 9 shear pin break points for each drive. 10 11 3. Repeat test to verify results 12 13 C. All labor, materials and test apparatus necessary for conducting the above 14 tests shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 15 16 END OF SECTION CLARIFIERS 11225 -25 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CLARIFIERS 11225 -26 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 I1 SECTION 11310 2 I3 RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL I6 7 1.01 - DESCRIPTION 8 9 A. This specification covers non -clog, end suction, back pullout centrifugal 10 pumps designed specifically for return activated sludge (RAS) in municipal 11 wastewater treatment plants. 12 13 B. The RAS pumps shall serve to replace the existing RAS pumps; two (2) 14 pumps in the North RAS building and two (2) pumps in the South RAS 15 building. All four pumps shall be identical except for the impellers and the 16 motor HP. 17 18 C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any modifications to the existing 19 concrete maintenance pad and /or the existing pump discharge piping that 20 may be needed to accommodate RAS pumps that are not in -kind 21 replacements of the existing pumps. All such modifications shall be subject to 22 the approval of the Engineer. The centerline dimensions and elevations of the 23 existing pump suction piping, including the eccentric reducers, shall not be I24 modified. 25 26 1.02 - RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I27 28 A. Painting 29 II30 B. Basic Mechanical Requirements 31 32 1.03 - QUALITY ASSURANCE I33 34 A. Pumps shall be in accordance with applicable Hydraulic Institute Standards. 35 36 B. Motors shall be in accordance with NEMA Standards. 37 38 C. Should equipment that differs from the specified requirements be offered and I39 determined to be equal to that specified, such equipment shall be acceptable 40 only on the basis that any revisions in the layout and construction of the 41 structures, piping and appurtenant equipment, electrical work, etc., required to II42 accommodate such a substitution shall be made at no additional cost to the 43 City and be as approved by the Engineer I44 45 1.04 - SUBMITTALS 46 I 47 A. Pump submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 and 01340. RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -1 04/26/11 1 1 1 I 2 B. Submit dimensional drawings for approval showing weights and materials of 3 construction by ASTM reference and grade_ Show pump surface preparation 4 and coatings. 5 6 C. Submit pump performance curves for approval showing the specified 7 operating points, including the pump head, efficiency, brake horsepower and 8 NPSH required at full speed; the impeller diameter and pump sphere size 9 capability; the reduced speed head, efficiency and brake horsepower curves 10 for all specified reduced speed operating points and speeds with a minimum 11 of two additional speeds (85 and 70% if not otherwise specified) in addition to 12 the full speed curve. 13 14 D. Submit motor data for approval including manufacturer, model or type, and 15 dimensional drawing. Show horsepower, service factor, full load speed, 16 NEMA design, frame size, weight, enclosure, winding insulation class and 17 treatment, rated ambient temperature, voltage, phase, frequency, full Toad 18 19 current and locked rotor current. Also show the guaranteed efficiency and 1 power factor at full, a /4, and 1/2 Toads. Provide a statement from the pump 20 motor manufacturer that the motors are compatible with the proposed VFDs. 21 22 E. Submit manufacturer's certified pump performance curve and dynamic 23 balance certificates for approval prior to shipment. 24 25 F. Submit manufacturer's short commercial motor test data prior to shipment. 26 28 27 G. Submit Operation and Maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 1 01730 for approval prior to shipment. These manuals shall include all of the 29 approved and corrected submittal data, installation, operation and 30 maintenance requirements and test data on all equipment furnished by the 31 pump supplier. If test data has not been completed at the time these manuals 32 are prepared, this test data may be furnished later. 33 1 34 H. In the event that it is impossible to conform to certain details of this Section 35 due to different manufacturing techniques, describe completely all 36 nonconforming aspects. 37 38 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 39 1 40 2.01 - GENERAL 41 42 A. All equipment for the pumps, including motors and bases, shall be furnished 43 as a complete unit by the pump supplier. The Pump Data Sheet included at 44 the end of this section shows the minimum pump requirements. I45 46 B. The pumps and motors shall be rated for continuous duty and shall be 47 capable of pumping the specified flow range without cavitation or excessive RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 I 21 22 23 I24 25 26 I27 28 29 I30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 1 1 1 1 1 1 vibration. The pumps and drives shall not infringe upon the motor service factor at any point on the pump full speed curve. C. The amplitude of vibration shall not exceed the limits set forth in the latest edition of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. Corrosion resistant nameplates with the name of the manufacturer and the serial number shall be attached to each pump E. Corrosion resistant nameplates with the name of the manufacturer, serial number, horsepower, speed, voltage and amperes shall be attached to each motor. F The pumping equipment shall be ITT A -C Series 12x12x15 NSY, or approved equal, meeting the design requirements herein. 2.02 MATERIALS Part: Casing Suction Cover Suction Cover Wear Plate Impeller Impeller Nut & Set Screw Impeller Wear Ring Stuffing Box Bearing Frame Shaft Shaft Sleeve Base 2.03 PUMP CONSTRUCTION Material: Cast Iron Cast Iron Stainless Cast Iron Stainless Stainless Cast Iron Cast Iron Steel Stainless Stainless Designation: ASTM A48, Class 30 ASTM A48, Class 30 AISI 410 SS 2 -3% Nickel Cast Iron 18 -8 SS AISI 410 SS ASTM A48, Class 30 ASTM A48, Class 30 AISI 4140 316 SS ASTM A36 A. Casing - The pump casing shall be of sufficient strength, weight and metal thickness to insure long life, accurate alignment and reliable operation. The volute shall have smooth fluid passages large enough at all points to pass any size solid which can pass through the impeller and provide smooth, unobstructed flow. A large clean out opening with removable cover, having its interior surfaces match the volute contour, shall be located on the casing at the impeller centerline to allow access to the interior of the impeller. The casing shall be split perpendicular to the shaft with removable suction cover and stuffing box cover. Machined fits for these parts shall be accurately aligned and identical so that the casing may be installed for either clockwise or counterclockwise direction of rotation. The casing shall be arranged so that the impeller may be removed without disturbing either suction or discharge piping. The discharge flange shall be ANSI 125# flat face. All flange bolt RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -3 04/26/11 1 holes shall be slotted for ease of assembly and disassembly. The discharge 2 flange shall be drilled and tapped for a gauge connection. 3 4 B. Suction Cover - The suction cover shall be removable to allow for access to 5 the impeller_ The suction flange shall be 125# flat face with slotted bolt holes, 6 and shall be drilled and tapped for a gauge connection. 7 8 C. Suction Cover Wear Plate - A suction cover wear plate shall be furnished. It 9 shall provide' /4 -inch minimum wear and shall be installed with its wear surface 10 parallel to the end of the impeller inlet. 11 12 D. Impeller - The impeller shall be of the enclosed type and shall be keyed and 13 secured to the shaft by a lock nut and set screw. The impeller shall have a 14 tapered bore. It shall be readily removable without the use of special tools. 15 The impeller clearance adjustment shall be made through the use of shims 16 placed between the frame and the outboard bearing housing. Pump impellers 17 operating at 1200 RPM or greater or with a maximum diameter of greater than 18 12.5 inches shall be dynamically balanced. 19 20 E. Impeller Wear Ring - A replaceable "L" shaped wear ring shall be mounted on 21 the impeller to provide a re newable surface opposite the suction cover wear 22 plate. 23 24 F. Stuffing Box - The stuffing box cover shall be made with an integral stuffing 25 box and shall be designed to accept either packing or a mechanical seal. 26 Drilled and tapped sealing liquid connection and drain ports shall be provided. 27 28 1. The pumps shall be supplied with John Crane Type 3740 split 29 mechanical seal. 30 31 G. Bearing Frame - The pump bearing frame shall be a one piece rigid frame 32 with a cast iron bearing housing mounted at the outboard end and a cast iron 33 end cover mounted at the inboard end. Both ends of the frame shall be 34 provided with lip type grease seals and labyrinth type deflectors to prevent the 35 entrance of contaminants. The frame shall be provided with a % -inch tapped 36 hole, located as low as possible, to drain the leakage from the packing gland. 37 38 1. Pump bearings shall be designed for a minimum 50,000 hours life at 39 the worst -case design point specified. Inboard bearings shall be the 40 radial type and outboard bearings shall be the radial and axial type 41 suitable for thrust Toads in two directions. Bearings shall be grease 42 lubricated with provisions for the addition and relief of grease. The 43 outboard bearing shall be locked to the shaft with a nut and 44 Iockwasher. The Iockwasher shall have a key seat tab on its inside 45 diameter to prevent it from turning and a set of tabs on its outside 46 diameter, one of which will align with a notch in the nut, to prevent it 47 from turning. RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 H. Shaft - The pump shall be fully and accurately machined, tapered at the 3 impeller end and of sufficient size to transmit the full driver output. 4 5 I. Shaft Sleeve - A renewable 316 SS shaft sleeve shall be provided that 6 extends through the stuffing box and under the gland. An 0-ring seal shall be 7 provided between the sleeve and shaft. Pumps with mechanical seals shall 8 use 316 SS sleeves hardened to 500 Brinell. 9 10 J_ Couplings - The pump shall utilize the manufacturer's standard flexible 11 coupling. Coupling halves shall be secured to the driver and driven shafts by 12 a set screw located over the key. Coupling guards shall be the expanded 13 metal type and shall meet OSHA standards. 14 15 K. Hardware - All machine bolts, nuts and cap screws shall be of the hex head 16 type. Hardware or parts requiring special tools shall not be used. 17 18 L. Horizontal Pumps - Horizontal pumps shall have either a suction nozzle with a 19 cleanout handhole or be provided with a separate cast iron reducing suction 20 nozzle with a cleanout handhole. The handhole shall have a removable cast 21 iron cover. The handhole shall have a minimum diameter of 4 inches and 22 shall have its inner surface match the contour of the nozzle. Horizontal 23 pumps shall have a drip rim baseplate with a tapped hole at one end for 24 draining. 25 26 2.04 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS 27 28 A. One set of all special tools required for normal operation and maintenance 29 shall be provided. 30 31 B The following spare parts shall be provided: 32 33 1. One mechanical seal for each pump. 34 2. .One set of gaskets for each pump. 35 3. One Impeller Wear Ring for each pump 36 37 2.05 MOTORS 38 39 A. Pump motors shall be in accordance with Section 16481. The motors shall be 40 3 phase, 60 hertz and 460 volts and shall be sized so that the service factor is 41 not infringed upon throughout the full speed performance curve of the pumps. 42 At minimum, motors shall have Class B insulation and a 1.15 service factor. 43 Motors shall have re- greaseable or oil tube bearings. Variable speed motors 44 shall be rated for inverter duty per NEMA MG -1, Part 31. 45 46 B. The motors shall be powered with VFDs. 47 RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -5 04/26/11 1 2.06 FACTORY TESTS 2 3 A. Each motor shall be given a non - witnessed short commercial test to 4 determine that the motor is free from electrical and mechanical defects and to 5 provide assurance that it meets the specifications. Testing shall be in 6 accordance with NEMA standards and shall consist of no load current, locked 7 rotor current, winding resistance, high potential and bearing inspection. 8 9 B. Each pumping unit, with a calibrated factory test motor, shall be given a 10 factory performance test to provide assurance that the unit meets the 11 specifications. Tests shall be performed in accordance with Hydraulic Institute 12 Standards. Variable speed pumps shall be tested at full speed and all 13 specified reduced speeds with a minimum of two reduced speeds. Copies of 14 the test reports shall be provided to the Engineer. 15 16 2.07 FACTORY PAINTING 17 18 A. The pumps shall be cleaned and blasted to SSPC -SP10 and shall be given 19 one coat of rust inhibitive primer to a minimum of 4 -6 mils DFT and one coat 20 of epoxy finish to 4 -8 mils DFT. 21 22 2.08 ROTATION 23 24 A. The rotation and discharge position shall be as shown on the Drawings. 25 26 PART 3 - EXECUTION 27 28 3.01 INSTALLATION 29 30 A. Pumps, drivers and bases shall be precisely leveled and aligned, accurately 31 anchored into position and grouted by the Contractor. Installation shall be in 32 strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recognized industry 33 practices. The Contractor shall furnish the anchor bolts and the required 34 lubricants for initial operation. The existing concrete maintenance pads shall 35 be modified as necessary to accommodate the new naseplates. 36 37 B. Pressure gauges shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor for the 38 suction and discharge flanges for each pump. The gauges shall have a 4.5 39 inch dial and be installed with a pressure snubber, brass tee handle and a 40 seal with a 316 SS diaphragm. The gauge calibration ranges shall be as 41 small as is practical so that that full range is utilized, but safely within 42 maximum conditions. 43 44 C. The Contractor shall verify proper operation of the existing seal water supply 45 system and connect the existing seal water supply system to each pump such 46 that seal water is automatically supplied to the inlet port of the stuffing box RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 I21 22 23 I24 25 26 I 27 28 29 I30 31 32 I33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 1 1 1 1 1 1 when the pump is started and in operation. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer if the existing seal water system is not functioning properly. 3.02 JOBSITE PAINTING A. The Contractor shall clean and touch up the factory paint as required and as specified in Section 09900. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General - Furnish the services of a factory representative in accordance with Specification Section 01820 to inspect the final installation, supervise a test run of the equipment, and provide operator training. The factory representative shall provide a written certification that the pumps are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Motors - The Contractor shall check all motors for correct clearances and alignment, and for correct lubrication in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall check the direction of rotation of all motors and reverse if necessary. C. Pumps - After the pumps have been completely installed and inspected by a factory representative, field tests shall be conducted on each unit in the presence of the Engineer to show conformance with the specifications. The Contractor shall supply all labor, equipment and incidentals required to complete these tests. The factory representative shall provide a complete startup report for each pump, documenting the pump operating conditions at startup. This report shall be made part of the operation and maintenance manual. Pumps that cannot be made to comply with the specifications shall be removed and replaced with pumps that satisfy the conditions specified_ 3.04 PUMP DATA INFORMATION Service Location Position Driver Shaft Sealing Gauges Quantity Specific Gravity Design Point: Capacity TDH Efficiency North RAS Building Indoors Horizontal Variable Speed JC 3740 Split Seal Required 2 1.0 4,500 gpm 23' TDH 76.5% RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -7 South RAS Building Indoors Horizontal Variable Speed JC 3740 Split Seal Required 2 1.0 4,700 gpm 29' TDH 78.5% 04/26/11 Runback Point: Minimum Capacity TDH Efficiency Runout Point: Minimum Capacity TDH Efficiency Max. NPSH Required Minimum Sphere Size Minimum Casing Thickness Min. Nominal Shaft Diameter Maximum Motor Speed Minimum Motor Size Minimum Shut -Off Head Min. Suction & Discharge Sizes Basis of Design: ITT A -C Series Basis of Design: 2,400 gpm 36' TDH 70% 5,100 gpm 18' TDH 70% 27 ft. 2,500 gpm 43' TDH 70% 5,500 gpm 20' TDH 70% 27 ft. 4.50 inches 4.5 inches 0.50 inches 0.50 inches 3.625 inches 3.625 inches 1,200 rpm 1,200 rpm 40 hp 50 HP 50 ft. 59 ft. 12" by 12" 12" by 12" 12x12x15 NSY 12x12x15 NSY Replacements for existing RAS Pumps Design criteria taken from existing pump design criteria. END OF SECTION RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -8 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 11317 2 3 WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMP 4 5 PART1 GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish and install two (2) progressing cavity waste activated sludge (WAS) 10 pumps complete with bases and appurtenances as specified herein. 11 12 B. Electric motors shall be furnished as part of the work of this Section and 13 shall be as specified in Division 16. 14 15 C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any modifications to the existing 16 concrete maintenance pad and /or the existing pump discharge piping that 17 may be needed to accommodate WAS pumps that are not in -kind 18 replacements of the existing pumps. All such modifications shall be subject 19 to the approval of the Engineer. The centerline dimensions and elevations of 20 the existing pump suction piping, including the eccentric reducers, shall not 21 be modified. 22 23 1.02 SUBMITTALS 24 25 A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of all 26 materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall 27 include at least the following: 28 29 1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of 30 construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. 31 32 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins and /or catalogs of the equipment. 33 34 3. Data on the characteristics and performance of the pumps. The data 35 shall include performance curves, based on actual shop tests of like 36 pumping units, which show that they meet the specified requirements 37 for head, capacity and horsepower. Curves shall be submitted on 38 8- 1 /2 -in by 11 -in sheets. 39 40 4. Complete data on motors in accordance with Division 16 and a 41 statement form the motor manufacture that the motors are compatible 42 with the proposed VFDs.. 43 44 5. Furnish wiring diagrams and elementary or control schematics as 45 requested. 46 47 6. Complete data on pump drive including gearbox. WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMP 11317 -1 04/26/11 1 2 7 All information required by Section 01340. 3 4 8. The total weight of the equipment, including the weights of the larger 5 components. 6 7 9. A complete total bill of materials for all equipment. 8 9 10. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the 10 manufacturer's current price for each item. Include gaskets, etc, on 11 the list, list bearings by the bearing manufacturer's numbers only. 12 13 11. Complete description of surface preparation and shop prime painting. 14 15 B. In the event that it is impossible to conform to certain details of this Section 16 due to different manufacturing techniques, describe completely all 17 nonconforming aspects. 18 19 C. Operating and Maintenance Data 20 21 1. Operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished to the 22 Engineer as provided for in Section 01730. The instructions shall be 23 prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all cuts, 24 drawings, equipment lists, and descriptions that are required to 25 instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such 26 equipment. 27 28 2. A factory representative who has complete knowledge of proper 29 operation and maintenance of the pumps shall be provided in 30 accordance with Specification Section 01820 to provide instruction to 31 operations and maintenance personnel on proper operation and 32 maintenance. The work may be conducted in conjunction with the 33 inspection of the installation and test run as provided. If there are 34 difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's 35 design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no 36 additional cost to the Owner. 37 38 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 39 40 A. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) 41 42 B. Anti - Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA) 43 44 C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 45 46 D. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) 47 WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMP 11317 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 2 3 F Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in 4 effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 5 6 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE Ili 7 8 A. Pumps to be furnished under this Section shall be furnished by a single I9 manufacturer, and shall be by Robbins and Myers, Inc., Moyno Series 2000 10 or approved equal. 11 12 B. Should equipment which differs from the specified requirements be offered 13 and determined to be equal to that specified, such equipment shall be 14 acceptable only on the basis that any revisions in the layout and construction 15 of the structures, piping and appurtenant equipment, electrical work, etc 16 required to accommodate such a substitution shall be made at no additional 17 cost to the City and be as approved by the Engineer. 1 18 19 C. Pump drives units and motors shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer 20 and be factory- mounted on a common base plate of fabricated steel. I21 22 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 23 I24 A. All of the equipment specified herein is intended to be standard equipment 25 designed for use in pumping sewage sludge. 26 127 B. The WAS pumps shall pump sludge up to 4 percent solids from the return 28 sludge pit. 29 1 30 C. Each pump shall be capable of 200 gpm at 20 psi TDH. 31 32 1. The pump drive shall consist of a variable speed foot mounted helical 1 33 concentric gear motor driving the pump through belt and pulley on an 34 L- shaped base plate and at a maximum pump shaft speed of 325 35 rpm 36 37 2. The pumps shall be controlled locally and remotely for start-stop and 38 variable speed operation. a39 40 3. The pump motor shall be 10Hp, 3PH /60HZ/460V, 1750 RPM, Inverter 41 duty. 1 42 43 PART 2 PRODUCTS 44 45 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 46 I 47 A. General WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMP 11317 -3 04/26/11 1 1 2 1 The equipment specified herein is intended to be standard pumping 3 equipment of proven ability as manufactured by a reputable firm 4 having long experience in the production of such equipment. The 5 equipment furnished shall be designed and constructed in accordance 6 with the best practices and methods and the same model and pump 7 performance currently in use at the plant. 8 9 2. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal 10 strength and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the work to be 11 done. Ample room and facilities shall be provided for inspection, 12 repairs and adjustment. 13 14 3. All necessary foundation bolts, plates, nuts and washers shall be of 15 Type 304 stainless steel. 16 17 4. Brass or stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the 18 manufacturer pump model and serial number shall be attached to 19 each pump. 20 21 5. The manufacturer shall supply all gearmotors and appurtenances, 22 and factory -mount them on a common base plate with the pumps. 23 24 6. The nameplate rating of the motors and drives shall not be exceeded, 25 nor shall the motor design service factor be reduced when its pump is 26 operating at the maximum design performance. 27 28 2.02 PUMPS 29 30 A. Pumps shall be heavy duty, positive displacement, progressing cavity type. 31 The pump body shall be of thick - walled cast iron and shall incorporate two 32 inspection ports 180 degrees apart. The pump shall be cradle mounted to 33 permit the suction port to be rotated to any angle perpendicular to the 34 centerline of the pump. Suction and discharge connections shall be 125 lb 35 ANSI cast iron flanged. 36 37 B. The pump rotor shall be machined of high carbon tool steel, hardened to a 38 Rockwell "C" value of 57 to 60 and covered with a heavy layer of hard 39 chrome plate at least 0.010 -in thick for abrasion resistance. 40 41 C. The rotor shall rotate relative to a one- piece, medium -high acrylonitrile Buna 42 "N" rubber stator of approximate 65 -70 Durometer hardness (Shore A) 43 securely bonded to its steel tube housing. The stator shall be arranged to 44 prevent the pumped material from contacting the bonding or the tube. 45 46 D The rotor shall be joined to the drive shaft by a carbon steel connecting rod 47 and crowned -gear type, grease - lubricated, sealed universal joints of chrome WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMP 11317 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 alloy tool steel, of adequate design to transmit the required thrust and torque 2 while allowing the rotor to move through an eccentric path. The gear joint 3 seals shall be clamped at both outside and inside diameters and recessed I4 within heavy walled steel tubing to prevent damage by rags or other objects. 5 I6 E. The connecting rod operating angle shall not exceed 1 -1/4 degrees off 7 center. The connecting rod shall telescope within a hollow drive shaft and 8 shall be attached to the drive shaft in close proximity to the bearings. This I9 point of attachment shall not be more distant from the nearest bearing than 10 the spacing between the two bearings. 11 12 F The drive shaft shall be mounted in two tapered roller bearings. The AFBMA 13 minimum B -10 life expectancy of the bearings shall be in excess of 100,000 14 hours at the maximum operating conditions specified herein. Fittings shall I15 be provided for grease lubrication of the bearings. Shaft and bearings shall 16 be suitable for use with a belt drive or direct drive. 17 18 G. The pump stuffing box shall be equipped with a John Crane Type 3740 split 19 mechanical seal. 20 121 H. The pump manufacturer shall provide a pressure indicating switch, or a 22 pressure gauge /pressure switch arrangement, suitable for the type of service 23 intended in the discharge line of the pumps, to indicate pump discharge 124 pressure, to shutdown the pump in the event of excessive discharge 25 pressure, and to transmit an alarm signal to a remote location_ The 26 indicating pressure switch or combination pressure switch /pressure indicator 127 shall have a range of 0 to 50 psi. The gauges shall be approximately 28 4- 1 /2 -in in diameter. Gauge accuracy shall be within 2 percent of scale 29 range. Connections shall be 1 /4 -in male NPT. Dials shall have black 130 lettering and scales on a white background and shall bear legend showing 31 service and units of graduation. Gauge dials shall be sealed to prevent 32 entrance of moist air. Cases shall be stainless steel. The switch shall have 133 a continuous duty rating of 2 Amps at 110 Volt, 60 Hz, single pole, double 34 throw contacts and an average differential of contact action no greater than 1 35 percent of range. Set point shall be adjustable. The assembly shall be g36 mounted on an Isolator Ring that is filled with glycerin and prevents 37 contamination from the product being pumped. 1 38 39 I. Furnish a list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the 40 manufacturer's current price for each item. Include gaskets, etc., on the list. 41 List bearings by the bearing manufacturer's numbers only. 42 43 J. The proposed pumps shall fit in the existing space provided therefore without 44 encroaching on adjacent pump access space or working space. To this end, 45 the Contractor shall, with 30 days from the Notice to Proceed, submit 46 installation drawings (scaled and dimensioned) of any pump whose 147 dimensions differ more than 2- inches from the specified pump. The WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMP 11317 -5 04/26/11 1 1 Engineer will review the installation drawings and advise the Contractor 2 whether the proposed pump is acceptable. The Engineer shall be the sole 3 judge of the acceptability of pumps other than that specified 4 5 2.03 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS 6 7 A. One set of all special tools required for normal operation and maintenance 8 shall be provided. 9 10 B The following spare parts shall be provided: 11 12 1. One mechanical seal for each pump. 13 2. One set of gaskets for each pump. 14 3. One rotor and one stator. 15 4. Two sets of shaft universal joints. 16 5. One pressure gauge. 17 6. One pressure switch assembly. 18 7. One set of drive belts 19 20 2.04 MOTORS 21 22 A. Motors shall be Inverter duty, horizontal, totally enclosed, fan cooled, of 23 horsepower and speed as specified in Paragraph 1.05 above and shall 24 conform to Divisions 16 requirements. 25 26 B. The motor shall be mounted parallel to the pump on a L -shape baseplate as 27 shown on the drawings and driven through belt and pulleys and covered by a 28 suitable galvanized belt guard. 29 30 2.05 DRIVES 31 32 A. The pump motors shall be powered by remote mounted variable frequency 33 drives as specified in Section 16775. 34 35 2.06 BASE 36 37 A. The base shall be fitted with lifting Tugs and grout holes for grouting to the 38 concrete base. The base shall be fabricated from hot dipped galvanized 39 steel. 40 41 2.07 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 42 43 A. All surfaces shall be prepared and shop primed as part of the work under 44 this Section. Surface preparation and shop priming shall be as specified in 45 Section 09900. 46 47 PART 3 EXECUTION WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMP 11317 -6 04/26/11 1 A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3.01 INSTALLATION 3 4 A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions 5 and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. The pump 6 assemblies shall be installed under supervision of a representative of the 7 manufacturer supplying the equipment. Installation shall include furnishing 8 the required oil and grease for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease 9 shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor 10 bolts shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 11 12 B. The base shall be set over the existing concrete maintenance pad_ The 13 maintenance pad shall be modified as necessary to accommodate the pump 14 base. The pump base plate shall be grouted in place after proper leveling. 15 16 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING 17 18 A. Furnish the services of a factory representative in accordance with 19 specification 01820 who has complete knowledge of proper operation and 20 maintenance to inspect the final installation and supervise a test run of the 21 equipment. These services may be combined with those provided under 22 Paragraph 1.02 C. above. 23 24 B. The Contractor shall re- connect the existing seal water supply system to 25 each pump such that seal water is automatically supplied to the inlet port of 26 the stuffing box when the pump is started and in operation. The Contractor 27 shall notify the Engineer if the existing seal water system is not functioning 28 properly. 29 30 C. After all pumps have been completely installed under the direction of the 31 manufacturer's factory representative the Contractor shall conduct, in the 32 presence of the Engineer, such tests as are necessary to ensure that pump 33 conforms to the requirements specified herein. Field tests shall include all 34 pumps included under this Section. Pumps shall be operated for at least 24 35 hours run time prior to acceptance. 36 37 D. If the pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, 38 corrective measures shall be taken, or pumps shall be removed and 39 replaced with pumps that satisfy the conditions specified. 40 41 E. The factory representative shall provide written certification that the pumps 42 are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 43 44 45 46 END OF SECTION WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMP 11317 -7 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMP 11317 -8 04/26/11 1 SECTION 13615 2 3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 4 i5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK I8 9 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all instrumentation and controls 10 hereinafter specified to perform the intended function and achieve a fully 11 integrated and operational system. The equipment and services defined 12 herein shall be furnished by a single instrumentation system integrator 13 who shall coordinate the instrument and control system for proper I14 operation with related equipment and materials provided by other 15 suppliers of the Owner. I16 17 B. Work shall include all labor, materials, plant facilities and equipment, 18 performance of all work necessary to complete the manufacture, to make 119 factory tests, to prepare and load for shipment, to deliver to the site, to 20 provide programming, calibration, installation supervision, training system 21 start-up, services and incidentals required to completely furnish and install 22 an instrumentation and control systems, including all work necessary 23 during the Warranty Period, as specified herein, in other specification 24 sections as listed below under related work, and as shown on the 25 Contract Drawings. 26 27 C. The equipment and services to be provided include: 1 28 29 1. All general instrumentation requirements as specified herein. 30 2. All field and analytical equipment and services as specified herein. I31 3. All control panels and control panel mounted equipment and 32 services as specified herein and in Division 16 33 4. All coordination and interfacing with the control system equipment I34 specified under Section 13630. 35 5. All coordination and interfacing with each piece of equipment 36 specified under Division 11 (equipment), Division 15 (mechanical), 37 and Division 16 (Electrical), where applicable. 38 39 D. Auxiliary and accessory devises necessary for system operation or 40 performance, such as transducers or relays to interface with existing 41 equipment or equipment provided by other suppliers under other Sections 42 of these Specifications, shall be furnished, coordinated and interfaced by 43 the instrumentation system integrator whether or not they are shown on 44 the drawings or specified herein. 45 r i 46 E. Equipment shall be fabricated, assembled, installed, and placed in proper 47 operating condition in full conformity with detail Drawings and PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -1 04/26/11 1 Specifications, engineering data, instructions and recommendations of the 2 equipment manufacturer as approved by the Engineer. 3 4 1.02 SUBMITTALS 5 6 A. The submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 and shall 7 include_ 8 9 1. Manufacturer's data. 10 2. Shop drawings. 11 3. Certificates of compliance. 12 4_ Certified test reports. 13 5. Operation and maintenance manual. 14 15 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 16 17 A. Instrumentation and control equipment furnished shall be manufactured 18 by a firm regularly and currently engaged in the design and manufacture 19 of similar equipment. Equipment furnished shall be new and of current 20 design. 21 22 B. Equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and repair, and 23 access to critical parts shall not require a major disassembly. Internal 24 field adjustments where permitted or required herein shall be easily 25 accessible upon removal of a panel or cover. 26 27 C. Materials and Installation shall comply with the requirements of the 28 referenced electrical codes and standards, and the codes and standards 29 referred to shall be used for establishing the minimum quality of the 30 materials and equipment supplied and installed. Equipment of the same 31 type shall be a product of the same manufacturer. Capacities of 32 equipment shall not be less than that indicated on the drawings or 33 specified. 34 35 D. All exposed pneumatic tubing shall be routed through a device designed 36 to protect the tubing from crushing through incidental contact. The 37 pneumatic tubing shall be attached to the protective track as required by 38 manufacturer's recommendations and shall be protected from crimping by 39 those attachment methods. The protective track devices shall be 40 stainless steel and shall be "Tube- Track" or approved equal. 41 42 E. All exterior mounted instruments shall be furnished with appropriately 43 sized stainless steel rain shields. 44 45 F Model numbers and names for equipment listed herein are for the 46 purpose of establishing a standard of quality or matching existing PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -2 04/26/11 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 N 1 r 1 1 instrumentation. Like equipment of a different manufacturer must be pre - 2 approved by the Engineer. 3 4 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING 5 6 A. Shipping Precautions 7 8 1. After completion of shop assembly, factory test and approval, all 9 equipment, cabinets and the panel insert shall be packed in 10 protective crates and enclosed in heavy duty polyethylene 11 envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from 12 damage, dust and moisture. Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside 13 the polyethylene coverings. Boxed weights shall be shown on 14 shipping tags together with instructions for unloading, transporting, 15 storing and handling at job site. 16 17 2. Special instructions for proper field handling, storage and 18 installation required by manufacturer for proper protection shall be 19 securely attached to each piece of equipment prior to packaging 20 and shipment. 21 22 3. None of the central control and monitoring equipment shall be 23 shipped to the site until the room(s) is /are environmentally suitable. 24 25 B. Identification 26 27 1. Each component shall be tagged to identify its location, tag number 28 and function in the system. Identification shall be prominently 29 displayed on the outside of the package. 30 31 2. A permanent stainless steel or other non - corrosive material tag 32 firmly attached and permanently and indelibly marked with the 33 instrument tag number, as given in the tabulation, shall be provided 34 on each piece of equipment supplied. 35 36 C. Storage 37 38 1. Equipment shall not be stored out -of- doors. Equipment shall be 39 stored in dry permanent shelters including in -line equipment, and 40 shall be adequately protected against mechanical injury. If any 41 apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by 42 the contractor at his own expense. If any apparatus has been 43 subject to possible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out 44 and put through such tests as directed by the engineer. This shall 45 be at the cost and expense of the contractor, or the apparatus shall 46 be replaced by the contractor at his own expense. 47 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -3 04/26/11 1 2 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 3 4 2.01 INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL 5 6 A. Type 7 8 1. All instrumentation supplied shall be of the manufacturer's latest 9 design and shall produce or be activated by signals, which are 10 established standards for the water and wastewater industries. 11 12 2. All electronic instrumentation shall be of the solid -state type and 13 shall utilize linear transmission signals of 4 to 20 mA DC. 14 15 3. Outputs of equipment that are not of the standard signals as 16 outlined, shall have the output immediately raised and/ or 17 converted to compatible standard signals for remote transmission. 18 No zero based signals will be allowed. 19 20 4. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware and floor 21 stands, wall brackets, or instrument racks as shown on the 22 drawings or as required. 23 24 5. Equipment installed in a hazardous area shall meet class, group 25 and division classification as shown on the electrical drawings, or 26 comply with the local or national electrical code, whichever 27 requirement is most stringent. 28 29 6. All indicators and recorder readouts shall be linear in process units. 30 31 7. All transmitters shall be provided with either integral indicators or 32 conduit mounted indicators in process units, accurate to two 33 percent. 34 35 8. Electronic equipment shall be of the manufacturer's latest design, 36 utilizing printed circuitry and suitably coated to prevent 37 contamination by dust, moisture, and fungus. Solid -state 38 components shall be conservatively rated for their purpose, to 39 assure optimum long term performance and dependability over 40 ambient atmosphere fluctuations and 0 to 100 percent relative 41 humidity. The field mounted equipment and system components 42 shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid, and slightly 43 corrosive service conditions. 44 45 9. All equipment, cabinets and devices furnished hereunder shall be 46 heavy -duty type, designed for continuous industrial service. The 47 system shall contain products of a single manufacturer, insofar as PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -4 04/26/11 1 possible, and shall consist of equipment models, which are 2 currently in production. All equipment provided shall be of modular 3 construction and shall be capable of field expansion. 4 5 B. Electrical 6 7 1. All equipment shall be designed to operate on a 60 hertz 8 alternating current power source at a normal 120 volts, plus or 9 minus 10 percent, except where specifically noted. All regulators 10 and power supplies required for compliance with the above shall be 11 provided between power supply and interconnected instrument 12 loop. Where equipment requires voltage regulation, constant 13 voltage transformers shall be furnished and installed. 14 15 2. All analog transmitter and controller outputs shall be 4 to 20 16 milliamps into a minimum load range of 0 -750 ohms, unless 17 specifically noted otherwise. 18 19 3. All switches shall have double -pole, double -throw contacts rated at 20 a minimum of 600 volts- amperes (VA), unless specifically noted 21 otherwise. 22 23 4. Materials and equipment used shall be U.L. approved wherever 24 such approved equipment and materials are available. 25 26 5. All equipment shall be designed and constructed so that in the 27 event of a power interruption, the equipment specified hereunder 28 shall resume normal operation without manual resetting when 29 power is restored. 30 31 2.02 LIGHTNING /SURGE PROTECTION 32 33 A. General - in addition to manufacturer's standard, internal protection, 34 supplementary lightning /surge protection shall be provided to protect all 35 systems from surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines. 36 The protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not 37 interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument 38 surge withstand level, and shall be maintenance -free and self - restoring. 39 Instruments shall be housed in a suitable metallic case, and properly 40 grounded. Ground wires for all surge protectors shall be connected to a 41 good earth ground and, where practical, each ground wire shall be run 42 individually and insulated from each other. These protectors and 43 specified instrumentation /transmitters shall be mounted in a separate 44 NEMA 3R stainless steel vented enclosure with three (3) point latch. The 45 units shall be as manufactured by Telecommunications Industries inc., 46 Joslyn, Edco or equal. 47 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -5 04/26/11 1 B. Power supply - additional protection of all alternating current (ac) 2 instrument power supply lines shall be provided. Cabinet(s) /panel(s) and 3 groups of field instruments, as approved by the Engineer, shall be 4 protected by isolation transformers and surge suppressors. Individual 5 field instruments shall be protected by individual gas tube surge 6 suppressors or Edco Slac Series Hybrid AC suppressor with noise filter, or 7 approved equal. The hybrid ac suppressor shall be three stage type with 8 a response time of less than 5 nanoseconds, a maximum surge current of 9 10k amps, an input voltage of 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, and be cap -able of 10 withstanding a minimum of 50 occurrences at 500 amps each. 11 12 C. Signal line - protection of all field analog, discrete, digital and telemetered 13 signal lines shall be provided. Protection devices shall be installed at the 14 both ends as close to the instrument being protected as possible. Where 15 signal lines enter control rooms through an interface cabinet, the 16 protection devices shall be mounted in the interface cabinet. Protection 17 shall be with the combined use of gas -tube surge arresters and Zener 18 diode protectors or Edco ss65 series multi -stage hybrid suppressor or 19 approved equal. The multi -stage hybrid suppressor shall be capable of 20 protecting a signal pair plus the cable shield with a DC clamping level of 21 36V +/ -10% (I -g) and 72V +/ -10% (1 -1), a maximum let thru voltage of 44V 22 @ 400A (I -g) and 90v © 400A (1 -1) and capable of withstanding a 23 minimum of 400 occurrences at 500 amps each. 24 25 2.03 SLUDGE BLANKET LEVEL SYSTEM (EAST PLANT ONLY) 26 27 A. Furnish and install one sludge blanket detector for each of the two existing 28 clarifiers. The sludge blanket level detection system shall consist of a 29 detector and an interface controller. 30 B. Sludge Blanket Level Detector 31 1. The sludge blanket level detector shall utilize ultrasonic 32 measurement principals and meet the following requirements: 33 a. Range: 0.2 to 12 m (0.6 to 40 ft.) 34 b. Resolution: 0.03 m (0.09 ft.) 35 c. Accuracy: ±0.1 m ( ±0.33 ft.) 36 d. Operating Temperature: 2 to 50 °C (35 to 122 °F) 37 e. Power Requirement: 12 V, 2.4 W 38 f. Measurement Interval: 10 to 600 seconds (adjustable) 39 g. Probe Mounting: Pivot mount assembly 40 h. Calibration: Factory calibrated 41 i. Probe Construction: 42 1) Wiper: Silicon 43 2) Body: Stainless steel 44 3) Face: Polyoxymethylene PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -6 04/26/11 1 1 j. Certifications: 2 1) CE certified to EN 61326 - 1:1998 /A1 /A2 /A3 and EN 3 61010 - 1:2001. 4 2. The sludge blanket detector shall be Sonatax by Hach, or approved III5 equal. 6 7 C. Interface Controller 1 8 9 1. The controller shall be a microprocessor -based instrument. 10 Connections between the sensor and the controller shall be "plug i11 and play." The controller shall have the option for 12 RS232 /MODBUS or RS485 /MODBUS serial input/output capability 13 for two -way communication to a computer and a have wireless 14 downloading capability through an IR Port located on the interface 15 unit to download and print real -time data, calibration history, and 16 current set points in a CSV format. 17 18 2. The Interface unit shall allow operators to control sensor and 19 interface functions with menu- driven software. The interface unit 20 shall have a built -in data logger with the capacity to store data on 21 15- minute intervals for up to 6 months with two sensors per 22 controller. The interface unit shall include one analog 4 -20mA 23 input, two standard and four optional analog 4 -20mA outputs, and 24 3 unpowered SPDT form `C' alarm contacts. The interface unit 25 shall include two independent PID control functions_ 26 27 3. The interface unit shall be housed in a NEMA- 4X /IP66 metal 28 enclosure with corrosion resistant finish and have a 160 x 240 pixel 29 display. The controller shall be mounted horizontal or vertical on 30 surface, panel, or pipe as shown on the drawings. 31 32 4. The AC power supply shall be housed in the interface unit and 33 automatically accept input in the range of 100 to 230 VAC, 50/60 34 Hz. All system components shall be certified by ETL to UL 35 61010A -1, CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1. 136 37 5. The controller shall be warranted for two full years against defects 38 in material and workmanship. 39 40 6. The controller shall be Hach Company Model sc200 Controller or 1 1 1 1 1 t 41 pre- approved equal. 42 43 2.04 MAGNETIC FLOWMETER 44 45 A. Primary Flow Head 46 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -7 04/26/11 1 1. Electromagnetic flowtube shall be AFTCO UniMag, Krohne 2 Enviromag, Endress Hauser PROline Promag 10W or Engineer 3 approved equal. 4 5 2. Each meter will have an epoxy - coated steel metering tube welded 6 at all joints and a non - conductive liner, suitable for the liquid being 7 metered. 8 9 3. Each connection will be steel flanged ANSI Class 150/300, for 10 meter sizes up to 24" and AWWA Class B, D or F for meters larger 11 than 24 ". 12 13 4. There will be no electronic components on the primary flow head. 14 An integral or remote converter will supply coil drive power. Output 15 signal from the primary will be fed through cable supplied with the 16 meter to the signal converter. 17 18 19 20 6. Meter will have field replaceable electrodes with access ports. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 9. The instrument will be manufactured in an ISO 9001 approved 31 facility. 32 33 B. Converter 34 35 1. The Magnetic Flowmeter Converter shall be integrally mounted. It 36 will provide precisely controlled and regulated primary field 37 excitation. It shall convert the primary flowmeter signal into a 4 -20 38 mA DC and pulse output directly proportional to the flow rate. 39 40 2. The full scale measuring range shall be a direct digital input in 41 engineering units and fully adjustable over a range from 1.0 to 40 42 ft /sec. 43 44 3. Each converter shall contain internal self - diagnostics, automatic 45 data integrity checking, and be completely interchangeable with 46 other converters of the same type without need for recalibration. 47 No auxiliary test meter or primary simulator shall be required for 5. Electrode material will be compatible with the process fluid. 7 When installed in lined or non - metallic piping, the meter will be provided with corrosion - resistant grounding rings or electrodes. 8. Meter calibration will be performed by a volumetric comparison method. A calibration certificate will accompany each meter. The calibration facility will be certified to 0.5% accuracy. The calibration facility must be traceable to national standards. PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -8 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 commissioning, zeroing, or interchanging of flow meter /converter. 2 3 4. Each converter shall contain the following features as standard 4 equipment: 5 • Simultaneous analog output (500 -ohm load) and a scaled pulse 6 output. 7 • Status output. 8 • Low flow cutoff. 9 • Forward / reverse flow measurement capabilities. 10 • Integral rate of flow indicator and 7 -digit resettable LCD 11 totalizer. 12 • Capability of testing analog and frequency outputs. 13 • Engineering units for display and programming; flow and total 14 shall be user programmable in any engineering unit of measure. 15 16 5. All adjustments and changes of programming shall be by direct 17 digital input. 18 19 6. For ease of repair / replacement all converter configuration and 20 totalizer data shall be stored on a removable EPROM. When 21 removed and placed into a replacement / spare converter, no 22 additional programming shall be required. 23 24 7 For ease of wiring, power and output wiring terminals shall be a 25 plug in type, removable from the instrument without disconnecting 26 wiring. 27 28 8. Repeatability shall be 0.10% of rate. 29 30 9. Accuracy of the system (Primary Flow Head and Converter) shall 31 be: 32 33 • Meter sizes 3/8" — 40" +/- 0.3% of actual flow rate (for velocities 34 >1 m /sec) 35 • Meter sizes 1/10" — 1/4" +/- 0.5% of actual flow rate (for 36 velocities >1 m /sec) 37 38 10. The enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X. The converter shall 39 incorporate EMI /RFI protection / suppression as well as overload 40 protection for output circuits and meet the requirements of the EU- 41 EMC Directives and bear the CE Approval symbol. 42 43 11. The instrument shall be manufactured in an ISO 9001 approved 44 facility. 45 46 47 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -9 04/26/11 1 2.05 LIQUID LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH 2 3 A. Type SO ball float switch shall be installed in the following locations and 4 as shown on the drawings: 5 6 B. Functional /performance: 7 8 1. Differential - less than one -inch. 9 10 2. Switch rating - 4.5 amps at 115V AC, 3.0 amps at 230V AC 11 12 C. Physical: 13 14 1. Float - molded high density polyethylene. 15 16 2, Switch - totally encapsulated mercury switch_ 17 18 3. Cable - heavy duty, synthetic rubber jacketed, integral to float. 19 20 D. Options /accessories required: 21 22 1. Provide 316 stainless steel adjustable clamp tubes, pipe brackets, 23 and u- bolts; 24 25 2. The floats shall be mounted on a vertical one -inch stainless steel 26 pipe with all stainless steel hardware; 27 28 3. The lead wire shall be a waterproof cable of sufficient length so that 29 no splice is required prior to the junction box; and, 30 31 4. Provide a castle - aluminum NEMA 4X junction box with terminals for 32 all floats and tapped as required for conduit connections. 33 34 E. Manufacturers: 35 36 1. Consolidated Electric Co., Model LS. 37 38 2. Flygt ENH -10 39 40 3. Roto -float 41 42 4. Engineer approved equal 43 44 2.06 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER 45 46 A. Ultrasonic level transmitter systems shall be furnished for fluid level 47 measurement. The ultrasonic level transmitter system shall include an PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -10 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ultrasonic transducer and transmitter connected by a cable. The 2 ultrasonic level transducer shall be designed to operate on the principle of 3 sound echoing to provide level measurement without contact of fluid. The 4 transducer shall provide electronic signal output to the transmitter 5 proportional to the fluid level. The transmitter shall be furnished with all 6 equipment as necessary to meet the requirements as set forth herein shall 7 be included and connected so as to provide a complete and operational 8 system. 9 10 B. The Contractor shall furnish cable with sufficient length for connection of 11 the transducer and the transmitter. Contractor shall size ultrasonic 12 transducer to measure entire depth of wetwell structure. 13 14 C. The transmitter shall operate on 120 volts, 60Hz, and shall have a NEMA 15 4X polycarbonate enclosure. The transmitter output shall be 4 -20 mA DC_ 16 Calibration parameters shall be permanently stored even during power 17 interruptions. Contractor shall be responsible for calibration. 18 19 D. The ultrasonic level transducers shall be Siemens Echomax XPS and 20 transmitters shall be Siemens HydroRanger 200 or Engineer approved 21 equal. 22 23 E. Ultrasonic level indicators shall be installed in the locations as shown on 24 the drawings using the manufacturers recommended mounting 25 recommendations. 26 27 2.07 TRANSIENT PROTECTION /SURGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES 28 29 A. Surge and transient protection devices shall be two -stage units 30 incorporating gas tube and electronic clamping. Either polarity in surges 31 shall be equally protected. The protection devices shall provide long life, 32 reliability and easy mounting. Surge protection devices for 4 -20 mA loops 33 shall add no more than 50 ohms to the circuit and provide impulse 34 clamping levels of 100V maximum for line -to -line and 50V maximum for 35 line -to- ground. Surge protection shall be used on all 4 -20 mA transmitters 36 (e.g. LIT, PIT, FIT). Surge protection devices for instrument loops of 4 -20 37 mA shall be Model 1669 -02 as manufactured by Joslyn Electronic 38 Systems Corporation or approved equal. 39 40 PART 3 - EXECUTION 41 42 3.01 INSTALLATION 43 44 A. Field mounted elements shall be installed, calibrated, and started -up in 45 strict compliance with the manufacturer's requirements and 46 recommendations. Conflicts between the manufacturer's requirements 47 and recommendations and these Specifications or the Drawings shall be PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -11 04/26/11 1 presented to the Engineer for resolution before any affected work is 2 started. Installed equipment shall be certified as appropriate for the 3 application and process by the Contractor_ 4 5 B. Connections of instruments to process piping shall include, as close as 6 practical to the point of connection, a tight closing block valve suitable for 7 the maximum process pressure and temperature and for the material 8 involved. If connections are of threaded or welded pipe, there shall be a 9 union or flanged connection located to facilitate disassembly of the 10 connection and removal of the instrument without interrupting process 11 operation. 12 13 C. All field - mounted instruments shall be protected and isolated from 14 vibration, temperature extremes, radiant heat, rain, sleet or falling water, 15 and similar adverse conditions. 16 17 D. Impulse lines of pressure instruments shall be as short as practical and 18 shall be installed with a minimum slope of I --inch per foot (1:12) downward 19 toward the instrument in liquid system and upward toward the instrument 20 in gaseous systems. If this preferred direction of slope cannot be 21 maintained, the cpntractor shall submit for approval an installation 22 configuration utilizing traps, drains, and /or vents at high and low points, 23 which will ensure freedom from mixed phase offset effects and provide 24 ease of purging or draining. Pressure lines of pressure instruments shall 25 be insulated. 26 27 E. Field mounted elements shall be marked with data required for calibration 28 such as location of adjustments, span, offset, zero suppression, and test 29 voltages. If such data are not provided in permanent markings or on the 30 manufacturer's nameplate, a durable tag or label shall be affixed in a 31 protected location that will become readily visible in the normal course of 32 servicing the instrument. 33 34 F. Provide DC power supplies for devices as required. Mount on a stanchion 35 in proximity of device in a NEMX 4X box. Provide conduit and wire to 36 device. 37 38 3.02 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND CALIBRATION 39 40 A. Factory Tests and Calibration. All field - mounted elements shall be 41 factory- tested by the manufacturer to assure satisfactory performance 42 prior to shipment to the job site. Whenever possible, this shall include 43 calibration to the actual range and conditions of use. Calibration shall be 44 traceable to the National Bureau of Standards with an uncertainty not 45 more than 1/2 of the specified or claimed accuracy of the instruments. 46 47 B. Field Tests and Calibration. Field mounted elements which were not 48 calibrated to final working values of range, span, and zero suppression at PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -12 04/26/11 1 the factory shall be so calibrated prior to or at the time of installation. This 2 calibration shall meet the same requirements for accuracy and be 3 traceable, as required for factory testing above. The Engineer shall be 4 given 48 hours notice and the opportunity to witness this calibration. 5 6 7 END OF SECTION PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -13 04/26/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -14 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 13630 2 3 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. The existing controls system at the Northeast consists of an Allen- Bradley 10 PLC -5 system with Allen- Bradley 1794 Flex I/O communicating over a 11 DeviceNet network. Existing DeviceNet panels and their locations are as 12 follows: 13 14 1. DeviceNet Panel 100 (DNP -100): In front of Clarifier No. 5 15 2. DeviceNet Panel 101 (DNP -101): End of Aerobic Digester Tank 16 3. DeviceNet Panel 102 (DNP -102): South RAS Pump Building 17 4. DeviceNet Panel 103 (DNP -103): North RAS Pump Building 18 5. DeviceNet Panel 104 (DNP -104): Adjacent to DNP 100 19 6. DeviceNet Panel 105 (DNP -105): In front of Clarifier No. 5 20 21 Unless otherwise noted, all new instrumentation and I/O for the South 22 Clarifiers, RAS, WAS pump stations shall be wired to the existing South 23 DeviceNet Panel DNP -102, and all new instrumentation and I/O for the North 24 Clarifiers, RAS, WAS pump stations shall be wired to the existing North 25 DeviceNet Panel DNP -103. Existing instrumentation currently wired to other 26 DeviceNet panels shall remain. 27 28 All instrumentation and I/O for the East and Marshall Street WWTP's shown 29 herein is to replace existing I /O, except for the sludge blanket level at the East 30 WWTP. Therefore, all I/O shall be routed to their existing panels at these two 31 facilities, 32 33 B. The Contractor shall furnish the services of a Systems Integrator to perform 34 the work of this section and all related Division 13 specifications to install, 35 program start-up, and test a complete and operable system as indicated on 36 the Drawings and specified herein. The Systems Integrator shall have not 37 Tess than 5 years verifiable experience in the water /wastewater field. The 38 Systems Integrator shall be Rocha Controls, Commerce Controls, Curry 39 Controls, or approved equal. 40 41 C. The Contractor shall furnish and install additional I/O modules, power 42 supplies, thick /thin cables for trunk line or drop lines, trunk line taps, and all 43 required ancillary DeviceNet media /hardware in the existing DeviceNet Panels 44 to provide the monitoring and control of equipment specified herein. 45 46 D. The RAS and WAS pump variable frequency drives (VFD) are specified to be 47 furnished with DeviceNet communications modules. The Contractor shall be LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -1 04/26/11 1 responsible for coordinating between the VFD manufacturer /supplier and the 2 Systems Integrator to ensure that the proper hardware is provided to connect 3 the VFD's to the DeviceNet network. Where required, the DeviceNet network 4 trunk line shall be extended from the existing DeviceNet Panels to the VFD's. 5 6 E. The "Owner's Systems Programmer" referred to in this specification shall 7 mean the Systems Programmer that will be performing PLC ladder logic 8 programming and development of HMI graphics for the monitoring and 9 controlling of the equipment specified herein and as shown in the I/O list. The 10 cost for performing the PLC programming and HMI graphics development by 11 the Owner's Systems Programmer shall be paid for under the SCADA 12 Software Implementation Services Allowance bid item. 13 14 F. PLC ladder logic programming of the existing PLC, HMI graphics, and alarms 15 for the monitoring and control of the equipment as specified herein shall be 16 performed by the Owner's Systems Programmer. The Contractor shall be 17 responsible for furnishing, installing and testing the complete control system. 18 The Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, materials, equipment, 19 calibration, coordination and incidentals required to furnish and install the 20 control system specified or required. 21 22 1. The Owner's Systems Programmer has furnished the Owner a detailed 23 description for the proposed work. The following list generally 24 summarizes the Owner's Systems Programmer's Scope of Work: 25 26 • Develop and submit Citect graphic screens 27 • Prepare PLC application software 28 • Prepare Citect HMI application software 29 • Update the existing Plant2Business /Plant2Net databases 30 • Provide startup services 31 • Prepare and submit a control narrative 32 • Provide application software electronic backup files 33 34 G. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is 35 required, but do not cover all details, which will vary in accordance with the 36 requirements of the equipment furnished. They are, however, intended to 37 cover the furnishing, the shop testing, the delivery and complete installation 38 and field testing, of all materials equipment and appurtenances for the 39 complete system herein specified, whether specifically mentioned in the 40 Specifications or not. 41 42 H. For all systems there shall be furnished and installed all necessary and 43 desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned 44 in these Specifications or not. This installation shall include field- testing of the 45 entire installation and instruction of the regular operating personnel in the 46 care, operation and maintenance of all equipment. 47 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -2 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS 2 3 A. The Contractor, thru the Systems Integrator, shall assume full responsibility 4 for the satisfactory installation and operation of the pumping system. 5 6 B. All equipment furnished under these Specifications shall be new and unused 7 and shall be the standard cataloged product of a manufacturer having a 8 successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems 9 specified herein. 10 11 1.03 SUBMITTALS 12 13 A. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with the Specifications 14 shall be submitted in accordance with the General Conditions. Submittals 15 shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 16 17 1. Shop drawings prepared by the manufacturer and submitted to the 18 Engineer for review prior to the manufacture of the equipment. The 19 shop drawings shall include outline dimensions and external connection 20 diagrams. A list of components, interface cables, specifications and a 21 copy of the manufacturer's warranty shall be included with the 22 submitted data. 23 24 2. Operating Instructions: The Contractor shall submit operation and 25 maintenance manuals for the entire control system. 26 27 a. General - equipment function, description and normal and 28 limiting operating characteristics. 29 30 b. Installation instructions - assembly procedures and alignment 31 and adjustment procedures. 32 33 c. Operation instructions - start -up procedures, normal operating 34 conditions, emergency and normal shutdown procedure. 35 36 d. Maintenance instructions. 37 38 e. Trouble - shooting guide. 39 40 f. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 41 42 g. Drawings - cross sectional view, assembly and wiring diagrams. 43 44 3. Complete master wiring diagrams and control schematics shall be 45 furnished for approval before proceeding with manufacture or 46 modification of an existing panel. 47 48 4. DeviceNet Network Drawings: furnish a DeviceNet network drawing LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -3 04/26/11 1 showing cable types, DeviceNet media taps, and all nodes (new and 2 existing) connected to the DeviceNet network. Calculations showing 3 distances of trunk lines and drop lines meeting the manufacturer's 4 maximum allowed distances shall be provided. 5 6 5. Certifications: The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a written 7 certification signed by the manufacturer's representative that the 8 equipment has been properly installed, tested, calibrated, and operated 9 under typical operating conditions, and satisfactory operation has been 10 obtained. 11 12 1.04 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 13 14 A. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be furnished in accordance with 15 Section 01730. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation 16 and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, 17 programming logic, calibration requirements, etc., that are required to instruct 18 operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment the 19 number and special requirements shall be as specified. 20 21 1.05 SPARE PARTS 22 23 A. One (1) spare of each type of I/O module and terminal base shall be provided. 24 25 B. One (1) spare DC power supply of each size and type shall be provided 26 27 C. Fuses: 20 percent of each size and type use, but no less than ten of each 28 size and type. 29 30 D. Relays: 20 percent of each type used, but no Tess than ten of each type. 31 32 E. One copy of the PLC program, after debugging, recorded on CD -ROM for 33 each PLC. 34 35 F Spare parts shall be properly protected for long periods of storage and packed 36 in a box clearly identified with indelible markings as to the contents. 37 38 1.06 WARRANTY 39 40 A. The Contractor shall provide a warranty in accordance with Specification 41 01740 and shall guarantee that the equipment furnished is suitable for the 42 purpose intended and free from defects of design, material and workmanship. 43 In the event the equipment fails to perform as specified, the Contractor shall 44 promptly repair or replace the defective equipment without any cost to the 45 Owner (including handling, shipment and labor costs). 46 47 PART 2 - PRODUCTS LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -4 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2.01 EXISTING PANEL MODIFICATIONS 3 4 A. All new instrumentation and I/O for the South Clarifiers, RAS, WAS pump 5 stations shall be wired to the existing South DeviceNet Panel DNP -102, and 6 all new instrumentation and I/O for the North Clarifiers, RAS, WAS pump 7 stations shall be wired to the existing North DeviceNet Panel DNP -103. The 8 Contractor shall remove all existing hardware, wiring, circuit breakers, contact 9 relays, and other components in the existing panels that are not being used or 10 that is not properly operating. Additional components and wiring in these 11 existing panels shall be installed in a manner that meets the specifications 12 herein to provide the monitoring and control of equipment specified in this 13 section. 14 15 B. Internal Electrical Wiring 16 17 1. Panel equipment shall be mounted and wired on or within the cabinet. 18 Wiring shall comply with the National Electrical Code. Wiring within the 19 panel shall be grouped together with harnesses or ducts and secured 20 to the structure. Wiring shall be numbered in compliance with the 21 numbering system used on the wiring /connection diagrams. Wiring 22 and connection diagrams shall comply with ISA 5.4 Instrument Loop 23 Diagrams and shall be submitted by the System Integrator as part of 24 the Shop Drawings for review by the Engineer. 25 26 2. Power and low voltage DC signal wiring shall be routed in separate wire 27 ways. Crossing of the two system wires shall be at right angles. 28 29 3. Control wire shall be 14 AWG Type THWN stranded and shall be insu- 30 Iated for not less than 600 volts unless specified otherwise. 31 Conductors shall be of tinned copper construction. All interconnecting 32 wiring, except for electronic circuits, shall be rated for not less than 90 33 degrees C. 34 35 4. Signal wire shall be 1 pair 16 AWG shielded. Conductors shall be of 36 tinned copper construction. 37 38 5. Wire color shall be: Line Power - Black; Neutral or Common - White; 39 AC Control - Red; DC Control - Blue; Equipment or Chassis Ground - 40 Green; specified externally powered circuits - Orange. 41 42 6. Wiring shall terminate at a master terminal board, rigid type and 43 numbered. The master terminal board shall have a minimum of 25 44 percent spares. 45 46 7. Terminal blocks shall be arranged in vertical rows and separated into 47 groups (Power, AC control, and DC signal). LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -5 04/26/11 1 2 8. Terminal blocks shall be barrier type with the appropriate voltage rating 3 (600 volts minimum). Terminal strips shall be provided for the purpose 4 of connecting all control and signal wiring. They shall be the raised 5 channel mounted type as manufactured by Allen Bradley or approved 6 equal. 7 8 9. Wiring trough for supporting internal wiring shall be plastic type with 9 snap on covers. The side walls shall be open top type to permit wire 10 changing without disconnecting. Trough shall be supported to the sub 11 panel by stainless steel screws_ Trough shall not be bonded to the 12 panel with glue or adhesives. 13 14 10. Each wire shall be provided with numbered heat shrink tubing 15 identification markers at both ends and the numbering shall be in 16 accordance with the Control Panel Drawings. Identification markers 17 shall be pre - typed. Handwritten markers or paper markers will not be 18 permitted. 19 20 11. Direct interlock wiring between equipment will not be allowed. Only one 21 side of a terminal block row shall be used for internal wiring. The field 22 wiring side of the terminal shall not be within 6- inches of the side panel 23 or adjacent terminal. 24 25 12. Wiring troughs shall not be more than 60 percent visible fill. Wiring 26 trough covers shall be match marked to identify placement. If 27 component identification is shown on covers for visibility, the ID shall 28 also appear on the mounting sub - panel. 29 30 13. Each panel shall be provided with an isolated copper grounding bus for 31 all signal and shield ground connections. Shield grounding shall be in 32 accordance with the instrumentation manufacturer's recommendations. 33 34 14. Each panel shall be provided with a separate copper power grounding 35 bus (safety) in accordance with the requirements of the National 36 Electrical Code. 37 38 15. Each panel, where required, shall be provided with analog signal 39 isolation (1 /1) where analog signals are sent from one panel or console 40 to another. 41 42 16. Each panel shall be provided with surge suppression protection 43 (electrical transients) for connections between AC power systems and 44 electrical and electronic equipment. Surge suppressor grounding shall 45 be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 46 47 17. All wiring to hand switches and the like which are live circuits LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -6 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 independent of the panel's normal circuit breaker protection shall be 2 clearly identified as such. 3 4 B. Relays not provided under Division 11, 15, or 16 and required for properly 5 completing the control function defined in this Section or shown on the 6 Drawings shall be provided under this Section. For example, discrete field 7 control and status circuitry shall be isolated from PLC I/O termination boards 8 using relays. Relays shall have red LED indicators that illuminate upon coil 9 energization. 10 11 C. Relays shall be mounted in their respective panel and shall be clearly 12 identified as being live circuits independent of the panel's normal circuit 13 breaker protection. 14 15 D. Nameplates shall be provided for flush mounted equipment. The nameplates 16 shall be approximately 1 -in x 3 -in constructed of black and white laminated, 17 phenolic material having engraved Helvetica letters approximately 1 /4 -in high, 18 extending through the black face into the white layer. Nameplates shall be 19 beveled and attached to panels by self tapping stainless steel screws. 20 Adhesive bonded or glued on name plates shall not be accepted. 21 22 E. Components shall be mounted in a manner that permits servicing, adjustment, 23 testing, and removal without disconnecting, moving or removing any other 24 component_ 25 26 F Components shall be mounted on plates on the inside of panels in such a 27 manner that allows for removal of the components without removal of the 28 plate. Components shall not be mounted directly to the enclosure. 29 30 G. Internal components shall be identified with suitable plastic engraved name 31 plates attached with stainless steel drive pins adjacent to (not on) each 32 component identifying the component in compliance with the Drawings, 33 Specifications, and System Supplier's data. 34 35 H. The Contractor through the Systems Integrator shall provide to the Owner and 36 Engineer a completed as -built drawing showing the actual control components 37 and devices (show existing and new devices) that are mounted in the existing 38 panels after modification. Drawing shall also include identification of each 39 wire in the existing panel to which terminal strip it is connected, circuit breaker 40 identification, Flex I/O modules and corresponding I /O, etc. Two additional 41 copies of the panel as -built shall be placed in the pocket holder on the door of 42 the existing panel. 43 44 2.02 INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION 45 46 A. All components provided, both field and panel mounted, shall be provided with 47 permanently mounted name tags bearing the entire tag number of the LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -7 04/26/11 1 1 component. Panel mounted tags shall be white with black lettering lamicoid 1 2 plastic; field mounted tags shall be stamped stainless steel. 3 I 4 B. Nameplates for panels and panel mounted equipment shall be as indicated on 5 the Drawings. 6 1 7 C. Field mounted tags shall be 16- gauge, of 304 stainless steel, with 3/16 -inch 8 high characters. 9 1 10 D. Tags shall be attached to equipment with a commercial tag holder using a 11 stainless steel band with a worm screw clamping device or by a holder 12 fabricated with standard stainless steel hose clamps and meeting the same 13 description. In some cases where this would be impractical, use 20 -gauge 14 stainless steel wire. 15 1 16 E. For field panels or large equipment cases use stainless steel screws, 17 however, such permanent attachment shall not be on an ordinarily 18 replaceable part. In all cases, the tag shall be plainly visible to a standing II 19 observer and not obscure adjustment ports or impair the function of the 20 instrument. Field mounted control stations, recorders or indicators shall have 21 a nameplate indicating their function and the variable controlled or displayed. I 22 Nameplate shall be attached by one of the above methods. 23 24 2.03 PANEL COMPONENTS 25 26 A. Industrial Relays and Time Delays 27 I 28 1. Type: 29 30 a. Industrial heavy duty relays. I 31 32 2. Functional /Performance: 33 I 34 a. Contact arrangement/function shall be as required to meet the 35 specified control function specified. 36 I 37 b. Contacts shall be rated 10 amps continuous at 600 volts. 38 39 c. Relays shall be provided with convertible contact blocks. 40 41 d. Pneumatic time delay relays shall be used on time delays Tess 42 than 180 seconds and shall be adjustable. 1 43 44 e. Solid state time delay relays shall be used on time delays 45 between 180 seconds and one -hour. t 46 47 3. Options /Accessories Required: LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -8 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 a. Provide all mounting rails, etc. that are required. 3 4 4. Manufacturers: 5 6 a. Allen Bradley 7 8 b. Square D 9 10 B. General Purpose Relays and Time Delays 11 12 1. Relays shall be double pole, double throw, octal plug in type with a 13 transparent dust cover. The relay shall be equipped with an indicating 14 light to indicate when its coil is energized. The mechanical life of the 15 relay shall be 10,000,000 operations minimum. 16 17 a. Type: 18 19 (1) Units shall be of the general purpose plug -in type. 20 21 b. Functional /Performance: 22 23 (1) Coil voltage shall match supply voltage. 24 25 (2) Contact arrangement /function shall be as required to 26 meet the specified control function. 1 27 28 c. Mechanical life expectancy shall be in excess of 10,000,000. 29 30 d. Duty cycle shall be rated for continuous operation. 31 32 e. Units shall be provided with integral indicating Tight to indicate if 33 relay is energized. 34 35 f. Solid state time delays shall be provided with polarity protection 36 (DC units) and transient protection. 37 38 g. Time delay units shall be adjustable and available in ranges from 39 0.1 second to 4.5 hours, 40 41 2. Physical: 42 43 a. For 120VAC service, provide contacts rated 10 amps at 44 120VAC; for 24VDC service provide contacts rated 5 amps at 45 28VDC, for electronic (milliamp/ millivolt) switching applicator 46 provide gold plated contacts rated for electronic service_ 47 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 1 1 1 1 1 1 13630 -9 04/26/11 1 b_ Relays shall be provided with dust and moisture resistant covers. 2 3 3. Options /Accessories Required: 4 5 a. Provide mounting sockets with pressure type terminal blocks 6 rated 300 volt and 10 amps. 7 8 b. Provide mounting rails /holders as required. 9 10 4. Manufacturers: 11 12 a. Allen Bradley 13 14 b. Potter & Brumfield 15 16 c. Eagle Signal Controls 17 18 C. Signal Isolators /Boosters /Converters 19 20 1 _ Type: 21 22 a. Externally powered solid state electronic type. Loop powered 23 devices are not acceptable. 24 25 2. Functional /Performance: 26 27 a. Accuracy - 0.15 percent. 28 29 b. Inputs - Current, voltage, frequency, temperature, or resistance 30 as required. 31 32 c. Outputs - Current or voltage as required. 33 34 d. Isolation - There shall be complete isolation between input 35 circuitry, output circuitry, and the power supply. 36 37 e. Adjustments - Zero and span adjustment shall be provided. 38 39 f. Protection - Provide RFI protection. 40 41 3. Physical: 42 43 a. Mounting - Suitable for mounting in an enclosure or instrument 44 rack. 45 46 4. Options /Accessories Required: 47 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -10 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a. Mounting rack or general purpose enclosure as required. 2 3 5. Manufacturers: 4 5 a. Phoenix Contact or approved equal 6 7 F Signal Relay Switches (Current Trips) 8 9 1. Type: 10 11 a. Solid state electronic type. 12 13 2. Functional /Performance: 14 15 a. Input - 4 -20 mA. 16 17 b. Output - Isolated contact output, double pole double throw, rated 18 5 amps at 120 VAC. 19 20 c. Accuracy - 0.1 percent. 21 22 d. Protection - Provide RFI protection. 23 24 e. Deadband - Adjustable between 0.1 to 5.0 percent of span. 25 26 f. Setpoint Adjustment - Provide graduated dial for each alarm 27 setpoint from 0 to full scale. Alarms shall be adjustable to trip on 28 rising or falling input signal. 29 30 g. Repeatability - Trip point repeatability shall be at least 0.1 31 percent of span. 32 33 3. Physical: 34 35 a. Mounting - Suitable for mounting in an enclosure or high density 36 instrument rack. 37 38 4. Options /Accessories Required: 39 40 a. Mounting rack or general purpose enclosure as required. 41 42 5. Manufacturers: 43 44 a. Rochester Instrument Systems 45 46 b. Acromag Inc. 47 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -11 04/26/11 1 c. Moore Industries 2 3 G. Intrinsically Safe Relays 4 5 1. Type: 6 7 a. Relays shall be of the solid state electronic type in which the 8 energy level of the sensing or actuation circuit is low enough to 9 allow safe usage in hazardous areas. 10 11 2- Options /Accessories Required: 12 13 a. Relays shall match power supply provided. 14 15 b. Relays shall be located in non - hazardous areas. 16 17 3. Manufacturers: 18 19 a. Consolidated Electric 20 21 b. Gems Safe -Pak 22 23 c. Warrick Controls 24 25 d. R. Stahl, Inc. 26 27 H. All other relays, switches, timers, lights, and ancillary control devices, ancillary 28 wiring, and hardware whether specified herein or not, that is required for a 29 complete and operation pump control system shall be furnished and installed. 30 31 2.04 DISTRIBUTED I/O SYSTEM 32 33 A. General 34 35 1. The existing system is an Allen- Bradley 1794 -Flex I/O distributed I/O 36 system communicating using an existing DeviceNet network for 37 communications. 38 39 2. All terminal bases, I/O modules, communications adapters, power 40 supplies shall be DIN rail mounted and be compatible with the existing 41 1794 -Flex I/O system. 42 43 3. All required mounting hardware for DIN -rail mounting shall be furnished 44 and installed by the Contractor. 45 46 4. Allen- Bradley part numbers with the " # #" indicates the suffix for the part 47 number shall be determined /sized by the Contractor. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -12 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 B. Terminal Bases 3 4 1, For each new Flex I/O module furnished, the Contractor shall furnish 5 and install appropriate terminal bases. The terminal bases shall 6 provide terminal connection points for I/O wiring and plug together to 7 form the backplane. Terminal bases shall have screw type terminal 8 connections. 9 10 2. All terminal bases shall be of the same series and type. 11 12 3. Terminal bases shall be model 1794 -TB # #. 13 14 C. I/O Modules 15 16 1. Contractor shall furnish and install sufficient quantities of the 1794 - ## 17 digital input, digital output, analog input, and analog output modules 18 into the existing DeviceNet Panels (North and South) for all I/O signals 19 monitored and controlled as specified herein. Extender cables for I/O 20 modules shall be Allen- Bradley 1794 -CE3. 21 22 2. All of the input /output modules for each type shall be of the same 23 series to reduce spare parts inventory requirements, including cables, 24 chassis, power supplies, etc. 25 26 3. Ten (10) percent spare of each I/O type shall be installed with a 27 minimum of 8 digital inputs, 8 digital outputs, 2 analog inputs and 2 28 analog outputs. 29 30 4. All input/output shall be color coded and titled with a distinctive label. 31 32 D. Communications Module 33 34 1. All communications shall be via the existing DeviceNet network. 35 Contractor shall furnish and install a DeviceNet communications 36 adapter module, Allen - Bradley 1794 -ADN. 37 38 E. Power Supplies 39 40 1. The existing Flex I/O System is equipped with a 1794 -PS13 power 41 supply. The Contractor shall remove the existing power supply and 42 install a new power supply as specified herein. 43 44 2. Sufficient quantities of DIN rail mounted power supplies shall be 45 furnished and installed for the Flex I/O System. Power supply shall be 46 compatible with the Flex I/O system and shall be model Allen - Bradley 47 1794 -PS3. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -13 04/26/11 1 2 3. Power supplies shall be configured for 120VAC /60Hz power and shall 3 provide sufficient power to the I/O backplane to power all modules in 4 the rack with sufficient spare power available for future modules in the 5 spare slots. 6 7 F. PLC Programming Software 8 9 1. The Owner's Systems Programmer possesses the appropriate versions 10 of Rockwell Automation Software, RS Linx, RSNetworx, RSLogix 11 Programming Software needed to program all PLC's. 12 13 2. The Owner's Systems Programmer shall supply all programming 14 necessary to provide a fully debugged and operating system. The 15 software required shall consist of those programs necessary for the 16 equipment to efficiently perform the functions specified herein, plus 17 enable convenient and efficient preparation of new programs. All 18 programs shall be completely debugged and operable prior to delivery 19 of the equipment. The Contractor shall provide whatever additional 20 controls required for smooth operation of the system, whether or not 21 specified herein, at no additional cost to the Owner. The Owner or 22 Engineer shall not be required to expend any programming effort in 23 order to achieve a fully operational system. 24 25 3. The Contractor shall provide hard copy (paper printouts) of the PLC 26 program. The program shall show an English annotated ladder or 27 boolean logic description of the PLC logic. 28 29 G. DeviceNet Media 30 31 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing 32 sufficient quantities of DeviceNet media, such as power supplies, trunk 33 line cables, drop line cables, connectors, and taps to connect all 34 DeviceNet devices onto the existing network. 35 36 2. The RAS and WAS pump variable frequency drives (VFD) are specified 37 to be furnished with DeviceNet communications modules. The 38 Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the VFD 39 manufacturer /supplier and the Systems Integrator to ensure that the 40 proper hardware and media is provided to connect the VFD's to the 41 DeviceNet network. Where required, the existing DeviceNet network 42 trunk line shall be extended from the existing DeviceNet Panels to the 43 VFD's. 44 45 3. Contractor shall adhere to the manufacturer's maximum distances for 46 trunk lines and drop lines. Drawings and calculations shall be provided 47 by the Contractor to show distances of all trunk lines, drop lines and LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -14 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 nodes such that it meets the manufacturer's maximum specified 2 distances. If the sum of all drop lines, new and existing, exceeds the 3 manufacturer's recommendation, the Contractor shall modify the data 4 rate in the DeviceNet network (including modifying the PLC data rate) 5 so that it meets the manufacturer's recommended cumulative 6 distances. 7 8 4. Trunk lines and drop lines shall be installed using thick cable (12.2mm) 9 or thin cable (6.9mm) and shall be Allen - Bradley 1485C - # #. Cable type 10 shall match existing trunk line or drop line cable system. Mating 11 connectors (male /female) shall be furnished and installed. 12 13 5. If additional power is required on the existing DeviceNet network, the 14 Contractor shall furnish and install sufficient power supplies. Power 15 supplies for the DeviceNet network shall be Allen- Bradley 1787 -DNPS. 16 Allen- Bradley Power Taps 1485- P2T5 -T5 (thick cable) or 1485T -P2T5- 17 T5C (thin cable) shall be used to connect power supplies to the 18 DeviceNet network. 19 20 6. Taps to the trunk line shall be made with Allen- Bradley DeviceBox taps 21 1485P -P # ## and shall have a minimum of 4- ports. Open -style taps for 22 drop lines or nodes shall be made using Allen- Bradley Open Style Tap 23 1492 -DN3TW or equal. 24 25 7 Terminating resistors, where required, shall be furnished and installed 26 by the Contractor. I 27 28 8. All other required ancillary hardware, media, connectors, etc. shall be 29 furnished and installed by the Contractor for a complete and 30 operational DeviceNet network. 31 32 2.05 DC POWER SUPPLY I 33 34 A. 24VDC Power Supplies shall be provided in the control panels. 24VDC Power 35 Supplies shall be switching type, din rail mountable power supplies. I 36 37 B. 24VDC Power Supplies shall be approved for use in UL -580 industrial control 38 cabinets. 39 40 C. Provide fuse or short- circuit protection. Provide a minimum of 1 set of dry 41 contacts configured to change state on failure for monitoring and signaling 42 purposes. 43 44 D. Operating temperature range: 0 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius. 45 46 E. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental 47 touch. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 1 1 1 1 13630 -15 04/26/11 1 2 F. Provide self - protecting power supplies with a means of limiting DC current in 3 case of short circuit. 4 5 G. Power supplies shall be as manufactured by Allen- Bradley, Phoenix Contact 6 Quint Series or approved equal. 7 8 2.06 HMI GRAPHIC SCREENS 9 10 A. The Owner's System Programmer shall submit to the Owner for approval all 11 HMI graphic screens in color print on 8.5" x 11" sized paper. The Contractor 12 shall provide the following as a minimum for all HMI graphic screens: 13 14 1. All rotating equipment, such as pumps, shall be programmed with 15 elapsed run time meters and the cumulative run time shall be displayed 16 on the HMI. A separate screen shall be furnished to display elapsed 17 run times for all equipment. 18 19 2. All 4 -20mA level, pressure and flow signals shall be capable of being 20 "trended" (depict historical data) on the HMI. All flow meters shall be 21 totalized to show daily total flow on the HMI. 22 23 3. Each process shall have a minimum one (1) dedicated HMI graphic 24 screen for control and monitoring of process equipment related to the 25 structure /process. At minimum the following screens shall be provided. 26 27 Overall Clarifier Screen 28 RAS Pump Station — North 29 WAS Pump Station - North 30 RAS Pump Station — South 31 WAS Pump Station - South 32 Separate historical trending screens for each 4 -20mA Al 33 Elapsed time meters for rotating equipment 34 35 B. All HMI graphic screen development shall be performed by the Owner's 36 Systems Programmer and paid for under the SCADA Software 37 Implementation Services Allowance. 38 39 C. Any other PLC /HMI programming requested by the Owner shall be performed 40 by the Owner's Systems Programmer and paid for under the SCADA Software 41 Implementation Services Allowance. 42 43 2.07 UPS AND SURGE SUPRESSION 44 45 A. For any panel that is modified as part of this project, the existing UPS in each 46 panel shall be removed and delivered to the Owner. A new UPS shall be LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -16 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 provided in every existing panel that is modified or where additional I/O is added. B. The UPS shall provide backup power for all Flex I/O power supplies, and 24VDC power supplies and any other devices that were previously on the existing UPS plus any new devices, such as I/O modules, that are added to the existing panel. 9 C. The UPS shall be capable of sustaining the operation of the equipment for a 10 minimum one (1) hour in the event of a power failure. 11 12 D. There shall be no measureable break in the output power of the UPS during 13 transfer from normal AC line supply to battery power or from battery power 14 back to normal AC line supply. 15 16 17 18 19 G. The UPS shall be capable of providing surge suppression for all equipment in 20 the event of a surge or spike on the incoming 120VAC power lines. 21 22 H. 23 24 25 26 27 2.08 I/O LIST Exact sizing of the UPS shall be the responsibility of the Systems Integrator. Acceptable UPS manufacturers are: 1. Allen Bradley 2. Approved equal 28 29 30 A. Northeast Plant Legend S stem 10X 20X 30X Tag Name Clarifier System RAS System WAS System Description Clarifiers — North CL1 -Z1-101 CL1 -OA -101 CL1 -LI -101 CL2 -Z1-102 CL2.OA -102 CL2 -LI -102 CL3 -Z1-103 CL3 -OA -103 CL3 -LI -103 Clarifier #1 Run /Off Status Clarifier #1 Failed /Overtorque Alarm Clarifier #1 Sludge Blanket Level (existing) Clarifier #2 Run /Off Status Clarifier #2 Failed / Overtorque Alarm Clarifier #2 Sludge Blanket Level (existing) Clarifier #3 Run /Off Status Clarifier #3 Failed / Overtorque Alarm Clarifier #3 Sludge Blanket Level (existing) LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -17 04/26/11 CL4 -ZI -104 CL4 -OA -104 CL4 -LI -104 Clarifier #4 Run /Off Status Clarifier #4 Failed /Overtorque Alarm Clarifier #4 Sludge Blanket Level (existing) CL5 -ZI -105 CL5 -OA -105 CL5 -LI -105 CL6 -ZI -106 CL6 -OA -106 CL6 -LI -106 CL7 -ZI -107 CL7 -OA -107 CL7 -LI -107 CL8 -ZI -108 CL8 -OA -108 CL8 -LI -108 Clarifiers — South Clarifier #5 Run /Off Status Clarifier #5 Failed /Overtorque Alarm Clarifier #5 Sludge Blanket Level (existing) Clarifier #6 Run /Off Status Clarifier #6 Failed / Overtorque Alarm Clarifier #7 Sludge Blanket Level (existing) Clarifier #7 Run /Off Status Clarifier #7 Failed /Overtorque Alarm Clarifier #7 Sludge Blanket Level (existing) Clarifier #8 Run /Off Status Clarifier #8 Failed /Overtorque Alarm Clarifier #8 Sludge Blanket Level (existing) RASP1- ZI -N201 RASP 1- OA -N201 RASP1- SI -N201 RASP2- ZI -N202 RASP2- OA -N202 RASP2- SI -N202 RAS Pumps — North RAS Pump #1 Run /Off Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #1 Failed Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #1 Speed Indication (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #2 Run /Off Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #2 Failed Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #2 Speed Indication (via VFD /DeviceNet) RASPI- ZI -S201 RASP 1 -OA -5201 RASP1- SI -S201 RASP2- ZI -N202 RASP2- OA -N202 RASP2- SI -N202 RAS Pumps — South RAS Pump #1 Run /Off Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #1 Failed Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #1 Speed Indication (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #2 Run /Off Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #2 Failed Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #2 Speed Indication (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pumps - North WASP1- HOR -N301 WASP1- ZI -N301 WASP1- OA -N301 WASP1- HS -N301 WASP1- SI -N301 WASP1- HSC -N301 WASP2- HOR -N302 WASP2- ZI -N302 WASP2- OA -N302 WAS Pump #1 VFD HOR Switch Position Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #1 Run /Off Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #1 Failed Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #1 Start/Stop Command (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #1 Speed Indication (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #1 Speed Control (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #2 VFD HOR Switch Position Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #2 Run /Off Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #2 Failed Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -18 04/26/11 WASP2- HS -N302 WAS Pump #2 Start/Stop Command (via VFD /DeviceNet) WASP2- SI -N302 WAS Pump #2 Speed indication (via VFD /DeviceNet) WASP2 - HSC -N302 WAS Pump #2 Speed Control (via VFD /DeviceNet) WASP1- HOR -S301 WASP1- ZI -S301 WASP1- OA -S301 WASP1- HS -S301 WASP1- SI -S301 WASP1- HSC -5301 WASP2- HOR -S302 WASP2- ZI -S302 WASP2- OA -S302 WASP2- HS -S302 WASP2- SI -S302 WASP2-HSC-S302 WAS Pumps - South WAS Pump #1 VFD HOR Switch Position Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #1 Run /Off Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #1 Failed Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #1 Start/Stop Command (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #1 Speed Indication (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #1 Speed Control (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #2 VFD HOR Switch Position Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #2 Run /Off Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #2 Failed Status (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #2 Start/Stop Command (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #2 Speed Indication (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #2 Speed Control (via VFD /DeviceNet) FIT -N301 FIT -5301 LIT -N201 LAH -N201 LAL -N201 LIT -S201 LAH -S201 LAL -S201 Flow Meter North WAS Flow Meter South WAS Flow Meter (existing) Level Transmitters RAS North Wetwell Level Indication (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS North Wetwell High Level Alarm RAS North Wetwell Low Level Alarm RAS South Wetwell Level Indication (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS South Wetwell High Level Alarm RAS South Wetwell Low Level Alarm LSL -N201 LAL -N201 LSL -S201 LAL-S201 Float Level Switches RAS North Wetwell Low Level Float Switch RAS North Wetwell Low Level Shutoff Alarm RAS South Wetwell Low Level Float Switch RAS South Wetwell Low Level Shutoff Alarm Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) - North RASVFD -I I -N201 RASVFD- SI -N201 RASVFD-1 I-N202 RASVFD- SI -N202 WASVFD- II -N301 WASVFD- SI- -N301 WASVFD- II -N302 WASVFD- SI -N302 RAS Pump #1 VFD Output Current (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #1 VFD Output Frequency (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #2 VFD Output Current (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #2 VFD Output Frequency (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #1 VFD Output Current (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #1 VFD Output Frequency (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #2 VFD Output Current (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #2 VFD Output Frequency (via VFD /DeviceNet) RASVFD- II -S201 RASVFD- SI -S201 RASVFD- II -S202 RASVFD- SI -S202 Variable Frequency Drives (VFD1 - South RAS Pump #1 VFD Output Current (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #1 VFD Output Frequency (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #2 VFD Output Current (via VFD /DeviceNet) RAS Pump #2 VFD Output Frequency (via VFD /DeviceNet) LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -19 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 WASVFD -II -5301 WASVFD- SI -S301 WASVFD -II -5302 WASVFD -Si -5302 B. WAS Pump #1 VFD Output Current (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #1 VFD Output Frequency (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #2 VFD Output Current (via VFD /DeviceNet) WAS Pump #2 VFD Output Frequency (via VFD /DeviceNet) Marshall Street Plant Legend 10X Tag_Name CL1 -ZI -101 CU-OA -101 CL1 -LI -101 CL2 -ZI -102 CL2 -OA -102 CL2 -LI -102 C. East Plant System Clarifier System Description Clarifiers Clarifier #1 Run /Off Status Clarifier #1 Failed /Overtorque Alarm Clarifier #1 Sludge Blanket Level (existing) Clarifier #2 Run /Off Status Clarifier #2 Failed /Overtorque Alarm Clarifier #2 Sludge Blanket Level (existing) Legend w,stem 10X Clarifier System Tag Name Description CL1 -ZI -101 C L 1 -OA -101 CL1 -LI -101 CL2 -ZI -102 CL2 -OA -102 CL2 -LI -102 Clarifiers Clarifier #1 Run /Off Status Clarifier #1 Failed /Overtorque Alarm Clarifier #1 Sludge Blanket Level Clarifier #2 Run /Off Status Clarifier #2 Failed /Overtorque Alarm Clarifier #2 Sludge Blanket Level 7 8 9 2.09 CONTROL REQUIREMENTS 10 11 12 A. General 13 1. All I/O shown on the I/O list shall be programmed by the Owner's 14 Systems Programmer into the existing PLC and displayed on the LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -20 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 existing HMI SCADA graphics screens. 2 3 2. Any other control strategies, controls or HMI SCADA graphics screens 4 required by the Owner shall be provided by the Owner's Systems 5 Programmer. 6 7 B. RAS Pumps 8 9 1. The RAS pumps shall be automatically controlled by the controller 10 embedded in the VFD to maintain an operator adjustable level setpoint 11 as measured by the level indicating transmitter in the RAS wet well. 12 The programming of the VFD controller to maintain an operator 13 adjustable setpoint shall be programmed by the VFD supplier. The 14 Contractor shall be responsible for installing wiring and conduit to 15 extend the existing level indicating transmitter to the VFD for control. 16 Signal isolators, if required, shall be furnished and installed. 17 18 2. All RAS Pumps shall have a low -level interlock via the existing RAS wet 19 well LIT to shut -off the RAS Pump(s) on low level in the corresponding 20 RAS wet well. Low level shutoff setpoint shall be operator adjustable 21 from the HMI. RAS Pump status as shown in the I/O list shall be 22 provided via the DeviceNet network and displayed on the existing HMI 23 SCADA graphics screens by the Owner's Systems Programmer. 1 24 25 C. WAS Pumps 26 27 1. WAS Pump status and control as shown in the I/O list shall be provided 28 via the DeviceNet network and displayed on the existing HMI SCADA 29 graphics screens by the Owner's Systems Programmer. 130 31 2. All WAS Pumps shall have a low -level interlock via the existing RAS 32 wet well LIT to shut -off the WAS Pump(s) on low level in the 33 corresponding RAS wet well. Low level shutoff setpoint shall be 34 operator adjustable from the HMI. WAS Pump status as shown in the 35 I/O list shall be provided via the DeviceNet network and displayed on 36 the existing HMI SCADA graphics screens by the Owner's Systems 37 Programmer. 38 39 D. Float Level Switches 40 41 1. Low level float switches shall be hardwired to the RAS/WAS VFD to 42 shutoff the corresponding North or South RAS /WAS pumps on low 43 level in the wet well. The level switches shall function to shutoff the 44 pumps in any mode, manual or automatic. An alarm shall be displayed 45 on the HMI when the pumps are shutoff by the low level float switch. 46 47 PART 3 - EXECUTION LOCAL CONTROL. PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 1 1 1 1 13630 -21 04/26/11 1 2 3.01 INSTALLATION 3 4 A. The work included in this section consists of furnishing, installing and placing 5 in operation the instruments and appurtenances, including all conduit, wiring 6 and circuitry necessary to provide the Owner with a fully operable system 7 properly calibrated and installed. 8 9 B. Install and mount equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents, 10 manufacturer's instructions and installation detailed shop drawings. Mount 11 equipment so that they are rigidly supported, level and plumb, and in such a 12 manner as to provide accessibility; protection from damage; isolation from 13 heat, shock and vibration; and freedom from interference with other 14 equipment, piping and electrical, 15 16 C. Include the services of a factory trained, qualified service engineer of the 17 equipment manufacturer and the Instrumentation Systems Integrator to 18 inspect the complete equipment installation to assure that it is installed in 19 accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, make all adjustments 20 necessary to place the system in trouble -free operation and instruct the 21 operating personnel in the proper care and operation of the equipment 22 furnished. 23 24 D. All workmanship utilized in the manufacture and installation of this system 25 shall be of the highest quality and performed in a manner consistent with all 26 accepted practices for industrial controls. 27 28 3.02 START -UP SUPERVISION 29 30 A. The Instrumentation Systems Integrator shall provide a qualified service 31 technician to inspect all final connections and check the system prior to start - 32 up. The service technician shall coordinate with the Owner's representative 33 for functional check -out of the complete system. 34 35 B. The Instrumentation Systems Integrator shall be provided on site during start 36 up of the system to make adjustments and tune the system as deemed 37 necessary by the Engineer. 38 39 3.03 FIELD TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE 40 41 A. Field tests shall consist of installation check -out, Field Acceptance Test, and 42 Final Inspection in sequence. Each stage of testing shall not be commenced 43 until the preceding stage is substantially complete as determined by the 44 Engineer. 45 46 B. After the Contractor has demonstrated that the pump station is capable of 47 being controlled under all conditions described in the Control Strategy, the LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -22 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Contractor shall furnish the services of the Systems Integrator for a minimum 2 of two 8 -hour days to assist in the determination of operating setpoints based 3 on actual field conditions. Such services shall be furnished upon 48 -hours 4 notice. 5 6 C. Field Test: When the operating setpoints have been established to the 7 satisfaction of the Engineer and the facility is complete and ready for 8 operation, the PLC and associated components shall be inspected and tested 9 for compliance with the Contract Documents. Testing of the equipment shall 10 be made by the Contractor in the presence of the Systems Integrator, the 11 Engineer, the Electrical subcontractor, the pump equipment manufacturer's 12 representative, and the Owner's representative. The equipment shall include, 13 but not be limited to, the following: 14 15 1. Controls: Controls shall be tested to determine satisfactory 16 performance. 17 18 2. Electrical: Contractor shall record readings of voltage and amperage 19 on all electrical components at start and steady state operating 20 conditions. Such readings shall be recorded on a form provided by the 21 manufacturer and the results shall meet the manufacturers prescribed 22 limits_ If a tested item fails to meet its requirements, then it shall be 23 replaced. Results of the tests, including the serial number of the 24 accessories tested, shall be furnished to the Engineer. 25 26 3. Inspection: A thorough inspection of all mechanical and electrical 27 equipment and controls, fittings, brackets, mountings, seals, conduit, 28 painting, components, and features shall be made while the facility is 29 being tested to determine performance and compliance with design 30 requirements and specifications. 31 32 4. Repairs, Adjustments and Replacements: The Instrumentation 33 Systems Integrator shall make any and all necessary repairs, 34 adjustments, and replacements until performance has been 35 demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall 36 bear the cost of any repair, adjustment and replacement. 37 38 3.04 TRAINING 39 40 A. Provide up to eight (8) hours of operator training by the Systems Integrator in 41 accordance with Section 01820 to train operators not familiar the control 42 systems. Training shall highlight procedures on navigating through screens, 43 adjusting setpoints, turning on /off equipment through the HMI SCADA system. 44 Training shall also include the operation and maintenance of all networking 45 equipment. 46 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -23 04/26/11 1 1 3.06 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 2 3 A. The Contractor through the Systems Integrator shall provide to the Owner and 4 Engineer complete as -built drawing(s) showing the actual control components 5 and devices (show existing and new devices) that are mounted in the existing 6 panels after modification. Drawings shall also include identification of each 7 wire in the existing panel, to which terminal strip it is connected, circuit breaker 8 identification, Flex I/O modules, corresponding I /O, etc. Two additional copies 9 of the panel as -built shall be placed in the pocket holder on the door of the 10 existing panel. 11 12 13 END OF SECTION LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -24 04/26/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15010 2 3 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including all specification 10 sections apply to the work. 11 12 1.02 SUMMARY 13 14 A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and 15 includes requirements common to more than one section of these 16 specifications. 17 18 1.03 ACCESSIBILITY 19 20 A. Equipment and materials shall be installed allowing for adequate access for 21 service and. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment with the 22 final location of access panels and doors. Allow ample space to remove all 23 parts that may be replaced or require service. Extend all grease fittings to an 24 accessible location. 25 26 1.04 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 27 28 A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building 29 components. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify finai 30 locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of 31 the actual equipment to be connected. Arrange for chases, slots, and 32 openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. 33 34 B. Coordinate the installation of supporting devices and sleeves to be set in 35 poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are 36 constructed. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical 37 materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention 38 to large equipment requiring positioning. 39 40 C. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical 41 services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom 42 possible. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment 43 above ceilings with suspension system, Tight fixtures, and other installations. 44 45 D. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and 46 overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing BASIC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENTS 15010 -1 04/26/11 1 regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide 2 required connection for each service. 3 4 1.05 NAMEPLATE DATA 5 6 A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power 7 operated mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, 8 model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, 9 labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in 10 an accessible location. 11 12 1.06 THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION 13 14 A. All packaged equipment shall be Independently Third Party labeled as a 15 system for its intended us by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory 16 (NRTL) in accordance with OSHA Federal Regulation 29CFR1910.399 and 17 NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code" (NEC), Article 90 -7. 18 19 20 PART 2 — PRODUCTS -NOT USED 21 22 23 PART 3 — EXECUTION- NOT USED 24 25 26 27 28 END OF SECTION BASIC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENTS 15010 --2 04/26/11 � �J � ' � � � � � � � � � � � ' � � 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 1Q 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 zs 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 3i 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 �45 46 47 SECTION 15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.�1 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all the materials, tools, labor, supervisian and appliances for and properly install, connect, adjust, test and place in continuous satisfactory service all ductile iron pipe and fittings at the locations and to the elevatians indicated, specified or required for the proper completion of all work. B. Wherever Construction activities disturb existing conditions or work already completed, Contractor shall restore the same to its original candition in every detail. All such replacement and repair shall meet with the approval of the Engineer and the Owner. C. Ductile iron pipe and fittings are not necessarily completely indicated or detailed on the Canstruction Drawings. The Drawings are schematic only, and indicate pipe and fittings in a general way. It is the Contractor's responsibility ta furnish all materials, pipe and fittings required. D. It is the intent of these Contract Dacuments to require an installation, complete in every detail, whether or not indicated on the Canstruction Drawings, or specified herein. Consequently, the Contractar shall be responsible for all details, devices, accessories, and special construction necessary to properly rurnish, install, adjust, test, piace into continuous satisfactory service, and complete the Work in an acceptable manner. E. Full r�sponsibility for designing, fabricating, and installing the ductile iron pipe and fittings, for selecting materials of construction, and for demonstrating compliance with specified performance requirements shall rest with the Contractor, and thr�ugh the Contractor, the Manufacturer and the Material Supplier. The Engineer's approval of 1) the manufacture and installation af the ductile iron pipe and fittings 2) the use of materials included in this Specification, and 3) alternative materials offered by the Contractor, shall not relieve the Contractor and Supplier of full responsibility for meeting all performance requirements and guarantees. F. The requirements af this specificatian 15062 supersede relevant articl�s in Sectian IV. DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings and as DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-1 04/26/11 1 z 3 4 5 6 1.03 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2a 21 22 z� 24 25 26 27 28 29 3d 31 32 33 34 35 3E 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 �45 46 47 48 � specified herein. All pipe, fittings, specials and appurtenances used for patable water piping shall be NS�-61 certified for continuous contact with potable water. REFERENCE SPECIFICATI�NS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. All Work specified her�in shall be in accardancE with the standards of the below listed organizations, exc�pt as otherwise shawn or specifi�d. Where reference is made to a standard of ane of these, or other organizatians the version of the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. B1.1 - Standard Specification far Unified Inch Screw Threads. 2. B16.5 - Standard Specification for Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings and other special Alloys. C. American Society far Testing Materials (ASTM) � 1 2 3 4 A3Q7 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Balts and Studs, �0,000 psi Tensile Strength. C33 - Standard Specificatian far Concrete Aggregates. C128 - Standard Specification for Specific Gravity and Absorptian of Fine Aggregate. C144 - Standard Specification for Masonry Mortar. 5. C150 - Portland Cement. 6. D75- Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates. 7. ES - Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials. 8. E23 - Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials. 9. G95 - Cathodic Disbondment Test. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. C104 - Standard for Cement - Mortar Lining for Ductile Iran Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. C1q5 � Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-2 04/26/11 � L„� � LJ C� � � � � � � � � � � L� u � 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 1� 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 2�4 25 26 27 28 ?g 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 �40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 3 � 5 6 7 8 9 C111 - Standard for Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. C115 - American National Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges. C15Q - Standard for the Thickness Design af Ductile Iron Pipe. C151 - Standard for Ductile - Iron Pipe. Centrifugally Cast for Water or Other Liquids. C153 - 5tandard for Ductile Iron Compact Fittings. 3-inch through 16-inch for Water and Other Liquids. C60� - Standard for Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. C651 - Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains. E. NSF International, The Public Health and Safety Company 1 2 No. 6Q - Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects. No. 61 -Drinking Water System Companents - H�alth Effects. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit Shop �rawings to the Engineer of p�pe, fittings and all appurtenances in accordance with these Contract Documents and Sections �1300 and 01340. The requirements of AVWVA C11D, C150, C151 and the fallowing supplemental requirements are applicable: 1. Certified dimensianal drawings of all pipe, specials and fittings. 2. Joint and pipe/fitting wall construction details, which indicate the type and thickness of the wall; manufacturing toleranc�s; performance history; and all other pertinent infarmation required for the manufacture of the praduct. 3. Details of fittings and specials such as elbows, wyes, tees, outlets, connections, test bulkh�ads, bosses and nozzles or other specials where shawn on the Construction Drawings, which indicate amount and position af reinforcem�nt. All fittings and specials shall be praperly reinforced to withstand the internal pressure both circumferential and langitudinal, and the external loading conditions as indicated in the Contract Documents. Shop Drawings shall clearly detail special DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-3 04/26/11 1 z � 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1$ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 3� 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 �45 1.Q5 46 47 castings indicating all pertinent dimensions. 4. Drawings of special d�tails such as reinforc�ment, cathodic pratectian system elements, testing stations, joint banding, etc., shall be at a scale that clearly depicts the item being detailed and, in general, shall not be at a scale less than 1/8-inch equal to 1-foot. 5. Detailed and certifi�d calculations of required jaint restraint length computed as indicat�d in these Cantract Documents. In addition, the Contractor shall submit calculations, drawings, and/or ather documentatian to prove to the Engineer's satisfaction that the pipe and unr�strained joints downstream of in-line valves can withstand the c�mpressive farces g�nerated by the field test pressure withaut affecting the pipeline system. Failure to provid� adequate proof shall result in the Contractor being required to pravide restrained joints downstream of in-line valves d�signed to withstand th� full field t�st pressure_ 6. The Supplier of the pipe shall submit, through the Contractar, a Certificate of Compliance that th� pipe, fittings and oth�r products ar materials furnished for this project comply with all applicable pravisions of these Sp�cifications. 7. A complete field pressure testing, flushing, and disinfection plan for ' review and approval prior to the performance of any af these activities. B. The Cantractor shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for all pipe and other praducts or materials furnished under this Section of the Specifications, as specified in A�1�i/AVWVA C105, C110, C150, and C151; respectively, and certified Cb(�1�5 of the following supplemental data for all pipe, fittings, and specials: 1. The Supplier shall provide, through the Contractor, a sworn statement that the inspection and all specified tests have been made and all results thereaf comply with the requirements of these Specifications. C. All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests and in the preparatian of any design reparts shall be barne by the Contractor. D. Approval af the Shop Drawings and the design report and acc�ptance of the certifications by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to ensure that the pipe is designed and install�d in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall furnish materials under this Section that are new, unused DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15D52-4 04/26/11 C� ! , _.J � � �� � � � � � � L_J r � � 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 2�4 25 2G 27 28 29 3D 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 1.06 and as specified, or if nat particularized herein, which are the best of their respective kind, free af defects and imperfections, and suitable for the service intended, subject to the approval of the Engineer. B. The Contractor shall provide workmanship that is first class in every respect, and have the installation performEd by workmen thoraughly experienced in such work. A neat and warkmanlike appearance in the finished Work shall b� required. C�l �il The Contractar shall perform Work in accordance with all applicable laws and regulations and in accordance with all applicable permits and easements. The ductile iron pipe furnished under this Specificatian shall camply with AW1NA C151 except as it may be modified herein. E. Welders and welding methads shall be certified to a nationally recagnized welding specification for the type of ductile iron used to manufacture the pipe and fittings. F. All test equipment used in activities affecting quality control shall be calibrated � and certified at not longer than annual intervals, unless ath�rwise specified or required. G. All pipe shall be clean, sound, and withaut defects. No manner af repair will be accepted, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer. H. The Contractor, at na additional cost to the Owner, shall perfarm all the testing and recarding that is required in these Specifications unless atherwise specifiied. The Engineer shall have the right to determine the amount of pipe to be r�jected as d�fined in AVWVA C151 Section 5.7.1 "D�t�rmining Rejection." SUPPLIER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. All pipe shall be manufactured, fabricated, coated, cement mortar-lined or epoxy-lin�d by a single qualified Manufacturer at one location. Fittings may be fabricated and the lining for forc� main pipe and fittings may be appli�d at a site other than where the pipe is manufactured, however, all testing and application of cement mortar linings and coatings shall be performed wher� the pipe is manufactured and shall be subject to inspection by the Owner, the Own�r's R�presentative and/or the Engineer. The Manufacturer shall have at least 5 years experience in work similar in specification to that which is to be furnished on this praject. The Manufacturer shall be required to show experit�nce in supplying pipe in environments similar to those expected to exist on this project and that the pipe supplied in those environments has functioned satisfactorily. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-5 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 �� 45 46 47 �8 1.07 SHOP TESTS A. All pipes shall be tested by the Manufacturer in accordance with AWWA C104, C110, C150, and C151, the Manufacturer's standard procedures, and this Specification. Shop Tests shall be subject to witness by the Engineer and/ar Owner, and/or the Owner's Representative and certified test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor far approval. No lot af pipe shall be shipped to the site of the Work until acceptable shop tests are completed and approved. 1. The Contractor shall perform or have performed said material tests at no additional cost to the Owner. The Owner and/or the Owner's Representative and/or the Engineer shall have the right to witness all testing conducted by the Contractor; provided that the Gontractor's schedule is not delayed far the convenience of th� Own�r. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide notice to the Owner and the Engineer of propos�d tests in accordance with this Section and the Contract Documents. 2. Tests and examinations ta v�rify the quality of work shall be perFormed by persons other than those engaged in the activity being examined. Such persons shall not report directly ta the production supervisor responsibl� for the Work. All instruments, gauges and other testing and measuring equipment used in activities affecting quality shall be of proper range, type, and accuracy to verify conformance with the Specification requir�ments. Procedures shall be in eff�ct ta assure that they are calibrat�d and certified at not I�nger than annual intervals. Caiibration shail be against measurement siandards, whicn have icnown relationship to national standards where such exist. Gauges must be calibrated and certified for the piece of equipment of which they are a part and must remain on the piece of equipment following certification. Materials and items including products previously checked or manufactured with equipment found to be out of calibration or adjustment shall be consider�d unacceptable until it can be determined that all applicable requirements have been met. 3. The Supplier shall maintain records of all internal and required tests and inspections. These records shall include records of materials, manufacturing, examination, repairs, and test data taken befor� and during fabricatian. The Engineer reserves the right to request that specific data be included in the records that may not otherwise be included. Whenever tests and �xaminations are performed an a pipe element or pipe, the appropriate pipe identification number shall be shawn on the report for all pipe 18" in diameter and larger. Copies of all records af tests conducted by the pip� Supplier, independent laboratory, or material manufacturers shall be given to the Engineer in such farm as to be appropriate for permanent records. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062--6 04/26/11 � �� � � � �� � � � � lJ � � � � � � � 4. The Engineer shall have access to all records of tests and inspections related to pipe manufactured far use in the Work and shall also have the right to witness any tests being performed by the Supplier relative to praducts, materials, or the pipe being produc�d. 5. In additian to those tests specifically required, the Owner may request additional samples for testing by the Owner. The cost for these additional sampl�s shall be borne by the Owner at no additional cost to the Cantractor. 6. All tests required by AWWA C151, and as r�quir�d herein, shall be perform�d by the Supplier and records of all such tests shall be provided to the Owner. B. Dimensions shall be subject ta gauging in the presence of the Engineer. Dimensions af �ach pipe shall be taken at the bell end using gauges, properly calibrated and certified, and at the plain end using a circumference tape and caliper or apprapriate template as approved by the Engineer. Representative samples fram each of the molds each shift when the mold is used in manufacturing pip� for the Praject shall be gauged. C. Epoxy Linings 1. All ductile iron pipe and fitting linings shall be checked for thickness using a magnetic film thickness gauge. The thickness testing shall be done using the methad outlin�d in SSPC-PA-2 Film Thickness Rating. The interior lining of all pipe barrels and fittings shall be tested for pinhales with a nondestructive 2,50Q-valt test tn ASTM G62. Any defects found shall be repair�d prior ta shipment. 2. Each pipe joint and fitting shall b� marked with the date of application of the lining system along with its numerical sequence of application on that date and records maintained by the applicator. D. Each pipe prior to mortar lining shall be hydrastatically tested ta 500 psi far at least 10 seconds. Any leaks or weeps in a pipe shall be cause for that pipe ta be rej�cted. A list of pipe by identifying number that fails this test shall be furnished to the Engineer. E. Each pipe shall b� w�ighed before the application of any lining or coating. Any pipe that has a weight that does not meet the requirements of C151 shall not be acceptable for the Work. The scale for weighing completed pipe shall be calibrated in conformance with governing regulations. F. Tensile tests shall be made on test specimens cut longitudinally and tests shall meet the requirements of A1NWA C151 and ASTM E8. Samples for tests shall be takEn every three haurs. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-7 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1.08 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 �0 �41 42 43 �4 45 46 47 G. Impact test specimens shall be cut langitudinally or circumferentially accardance with Figure 51.2 of AWWA C151. The impact test shall meet the requirements of AVWVA C151 and ASTM E23. 1. Samples for tests shall be taken not less than ane every hour. Any pipe that fails the Charpy impact test after ane pass through the annealing furnace may be cause for all pipe in that heat to be rejected unless the Supplier can prove to the satisfaction of the Engineer that additional annealing will produce pipe that meets the requirements of these Specifications. H. Far any impact test caupan that tests belaw 9 ft-Ibs, the impact test caupon shall be evaluated for microstructure per ANSI A21.51. Graphite type and size per ASTM A-247, percent primary carbide and percent pearlite shall be recorded. Acceptance of cement mortar lining cracks and lo�se areas of linings shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A.21.4. INSPECTION A. All Work under this Specification, including but not limited to proof of design testing, shop testing and the production af the pipe, fittings and specials, shall be subject to inspection by the Owner's representatives and/or the Engineer in the Supplier's plant. All travel, lodging and meal costs associated with this plant inspection shall be incurred by the Owner and/ar the Engineer. B. The Engineer shall have the right ta order any pipe that, in th� Engineer's opinion, daes not meet the Sp�cifications to be rej�cted and not shipped ta the Project site. C. The Owner and/or the Owner's Repr�sentative and/or the Engineer reserve the right to witness the testing of materials by the pipe Suppli�r ar have it performed by an independent testing service. If the independent test results show that the pipe manufactured meets the requirements of the Specifications, the costs far such testing shall be paid by the Owner, If the independent test results show that the pipe manufactured daes not meet the requirements of this Specification, the Contractor shall pay for all testing and retesting costs. The Supplier shall make all plant laboratory facilities available to the Owner and/or the Engineer and shall notify the Engineer at least fourteen (14) days prior to start of production of the pipeline materials far the Project. D. The Cantractor shall furnish six (6) copies of the Supplier's swarn certificate of insp�ction and testing of all ductil� iron pipe and fittings used on th� Work. All pipe and fittings will be subject ta inspection and appraval by the Engineer during production and after deliv�ry of material ta the Project Site. No broken, DUCTILE IR�N PIPE AND F'ITTINGS 15062-8 04/26/11 � � � � � � � � � � � � �� � � 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2D 21 2� 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 cracked, misshaped, imperfectly coated, damaged or atherwise unsatisfactory pipe or fittings shall be used. Such inspection by the Engineer shall n�t relieve the Contractar af full respansibility for the materials installed. E. The Gontractor shall furnish the Engineer with lists, in duplicate, of all pieces of pipe and fittings in each shipment received, and these lists shall give the weight, class, size and description of each item received at the Project Site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All ductile iron pipes, including flanged, mechanical joint, push-on joint, restrained joint, and plain end pipe, shall be manufactur�d in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Specification C 151/A 21.51. Minimum wall thickness of pipe shall be calculated as specified herein. B. Where ductile iron pipe is supplied for the Project or shown on the Drawings, abov� ground pipe shall be flanged and buried (underground) pipe shall be mechanical joint, restrained jaint or push-an joint, as required. C. All ductile iron fittings shall be marked in accordance with ANSI/AWUVA C 11�/A 21.10 Section 10-9, "Markings on Fittings." All ductile iron pipe shall be marked in accordance with Section 51-10, "Marking Pipe" of ANSI/AW1NA Specification C 151/A 21.51. In addition, each 18" diamet�r and larger pipe shall be marked by casting or stamping it with a unique identifying number that will allow the Owner to carrelate the pipe to shop tests pertaining to it and to allow the Contractor to mark the laying schedule in accordance with the requir�ments of this Sp�ciiication. D. Maximum pipe laying lengths shall b� 2Q feet with shorter lengths provided as required by the Construction Drawings or to complete the Work and as allowed by AW1NA C151. E. 5hop cement-mortar lined pipe shall have smooth dense interiar surfac�s and shall be free from fracture, excessive interior surface crazing and roughness. F, Pipe joints shall not t�e bonded far electrical conductivity in accardance with these Specifiications and the details as shown on the Construction Drawings and the following schedule: 1. All blow-offs, air valve assemblies, and lateral connections ta or from the pipe shall nat be fitted with dielectric gaskets and/or couplings. G. All materials that may be in contact with the water being conveyed (linings, gaskets, lubricants, grout, disinf�cting agents, etc.) shall be in accordance with and approved by the appropriate NSF Standard 60 ar 61. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15Q62-9 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 4B 47 2.02 2.03 2.04 DESIGN CRITERIA A, The pipe furnished under this section shall be ductile iron pipe, ce►r�ent mortar or epoxy lined and asphalt caated, with EPDM gasket jaints. The pipe shall consist of a cast ductile iron wall, shop lined with Partland cement mortar (potable water and reclaimed water) or epoxy (sanitary force main) and an ext�riar coating of asphalt. B. The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked according to applicable requirements stated herein and except as modified, shall canform to ANSI/AW1NA C104, C150, C151. C. Pipe supplied for this praject shall be suitable for use with neutral pH (approximately 7.0) treated wastewater efFluent meeting FDEP Part IV water quality standards (reclaim�d water), domestic raw sewage (force mains) or chloraminated drinking water (potable water). - � r �y[eP►I A. All ductile iron pipe shall have a minimum wall thickness, shown in Table 1, as � calculated according ta AWWA C150. B. Where threaded flanges are used on ductile iron pip�, the minimum thickness of the pipe wall at the last critical thread after threading shall not be less than the minimum calculated thickness of the pip� including net thickness, casting tolerance and service allowance. C. The Cantractor snail provide design aata on the pipe inciuding calculations showing the separate and combined stress�s in the wall of the pipe due to the design loads. f�/_��'�:�I_1� A. All ductile-iron pipes shall meet the requirements af ANSI/AW1NA C 151/A21.51. The interior of the pipe shall be finished so that the Hazen-Williams friction factvr will not be less than 130. Each length of pipe shall be hydrostatically test�d to at least 500 psi by the manufacturer in accardance with ANSI/AW1NA C 151/A21.51. Additionally, 30-inch and larger pipe shall be hydrostatically tested to 75% of the yield strength of the metal, based on the nominal thickn�ss of the pipe. B. Castings and connecting pieces, such as bell and bell, bell and spigot, bell and flange, flange and flange, flange and spigat, and flange and flare, shall meet the requir�ments of ANSI/A1NWA C110/A21.10. Connecting pieces may be fabricated. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-10 04/26/11 � �� � � C� � � �, � 1 l� � 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2Q 2.05 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2$ 29 3D 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 �40 41 42 43 44 45 46 �7 C. The exterior of expased ductile iron pipe, fittings, glands and bolts shall be field coated with one prime coat of Tnemec 66, 3.0 to 5.q mils minimum dry film thickness, a second coat of compatible Tnemec Enamel, 4.0 to 6.0 mils per coat minimum dry film thickness and a final coat of Tnemec 73, 2.5 to 4.5 mils per coat minimum dry film thickness. Field caatings shall be applied in strict conformance with the caating manufacturer's recammendations and Section 09900. D. Pipe that is to be buried shall have the standard asphaltic autside coating specified in ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51. E. The weight and class d�signation shall be painted conspicuously in a contrasting color on the outside af each pipe, fitting, and special casting after the shop coat has cured. F. Epoxy lining for force mains shall be an amine cured epoxy cantaining at least 2�% ceramic quartz pigment by volume. Th� standard of quality is Proteco 401 Ceramic Epoxy or appraved equal. AL�71►�� A. Flanges and flanged joints far ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and r�quirements of ANSI Specification B 16.1. Where threaded flanges are used, th�y shall be ductile iron and conform to the requirements af ANSI/AWWA Specification C 115/A 21.15. All flanged ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be rated for 250 pound warking pr�ssure and shall be faced and drilled to match ANSI 616.1 Class 125 flanges unless special drilling is called for or required. Where tap or stud bolts are required, flanges shall be drilled and tapped accordingly. B. All pipe flanges shall b� coated with a rust preventive coating, as specifi�d in ANSI/A1NWA Specification C 115/A 21.15, immediately after they have been faced and drilled. C. Flanged bolt holes on �ach end of flanged pipe and fittings shall accurately straddle the same horizantal and vertical c�nterlines unless special drilling is called for, or required. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the flanges of the pipe are compatible with the flanges af the various components and/or appurtenances. E. Flanged pipe, approximately twelve (12) inches ar less in length, shall have flanges cast solidly to pipe barrel. Flanges on pipe longer than twelve (12) inches in length may be of the threaded type. Pip� threads shall be of such length that, with flanges screwed home, the end af the pipe shall praject beyond the face line of the flange. Flange and pipe shall then be faced ta giv� DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-11 �4/26/11 a flush finish to the flange and the flange surface shall be normal to the axis af the pipe. Flanges shall be of such design that the flanged neck completely covers the threaded portion of the pipe to protect it against damage and corrosion. F. Push-on joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and requirements of ANSI/AWUVA Specification C111/A 21.11 as they apply to push-on joints. G. Mechanical joints far ductil� iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and requirem�nts of ANSI/AWWA Specification C 111/A Z1.11. Wh�re stud bolts are required, bells shall be drilled and tapped accordingly. The Cantractor shall tighten jaint bolts by the use of approved wrenches, to a tension recommended by the pipe Supplier. H. Where joints are in contact with liquids, or buried underground, the Contractor shall paint all bolts and nuts with two (2) heavy coats af coal tar pitch and where joints are buried, the joints, including glands and bolts, shall be wrapped with twa laps of $ mil polyethylene film and sealed ta the pipe with polyethylene adhesive tape. Restrained Joints: 1. All buried pipe shall be restrained as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping system shall be restrained based an the pressures shown on the drawings or specified elsewhere herein. Pipes subject ta gravity flow shall be restrained based on 30 psi of working pressure. Restrained jaint length indicated in the Tables includ�d an the Drawings represents the length on all sides of fittings and valves within which all joints must be restrained. As a minimum, the joints at all fittings and valves shall be restrained. 2. Restrained jaints shafl be capable of holding against withdrawal for line pressures 50 perc�nt above the normal warking pressure, but not less than 200 psi. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained push--on joints or restrained mechanical jaints. 3. The pipe Supplier's standard restrained joints shall be of the type utilizing cast lugs, shop welded retainer lugs or retainer rings bearing against pipe shoulders. Field installed joint restraint systems, such as Megalugs, as manufacturered by EBAA Iron, or approved equal, are required for restraining mechanical joint fittings. Field welding or grooving of the restrained joint or components shall nat be acceptable. Restrain�d joints shall be capable of withstanding full bulkhead thrust that can be developed within the pipetine due to the sum of the working and surge pressures. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15�62-12 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ 9 1� 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 z7 2$ 29 3p 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 3$ 39 40 41 42 A3 44 45 46 �7 48 f��iI: 2.07 � 5 FITTINGS Thrust blocks shall nat be permitted unless specifically identified an the Drawings. Jaints in tunnels and casings shall be restrained joints as defined previausly. A. All restrained joint, flanged, mechanical joint, and push-on jaint shall be ductile iron and shall be manufactured in accordance with, and shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AVWVA Specification C 110/A 21.1p or C153. B. Dimensions of flanged fittings not included under ANSI/AVWVA Specification C11Q/A 21.10 shall conform to the requirements af ANSI Specification B 16_1, Class 125. Fittings shall be shart radius (compact) type were possible_ C. All fittings shall meet the requirements, as to dimensions and weights, as shown in the current Edition of the "Handboak af Ductile Iron Pipe" of th� Ductile Iran Pipe Research Association. D. All fittings furnished under ANSI/AUVWA Specification C110/A 21.10 ar C153 shall be ductile iron and shall have the same minimum pressure rating as the pipe to which it is connected. E. Special fittings, where required, shall be of an approved design and have the same diameters and thickness as standard fittings, unless otherwis� required, but their laying I�ngths and other functional dimensions shall be determined by their positians in the pipelines and by the particular piping materials to which they cannect. INTERIOR LINING A. Potable Water and Reclaimed Water Piping: 1. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be lined with standard single thickness cement mortar lining and bituminous seal coated inside, at the paint of manufacture, in accardance with ANSI/AUVWA Specification C 104/A 21.�. Partland cement far cement mortar lining shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C15Q, Type II cement. Shop cement-martar lined pipe shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and shall be free from fractures, excessive interior surface crazing, disbondment, and roughness. 2. Th� Cantractor shall take precautions to prevent damage to the interior lining and shall repair all damaged linings to the satisfaction of the Engine�r. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-13 04/26/11 : ij !� Test r�cords shall be submitted to the Engineer far his review and approval. The use and type of any admixtures must be appraved by the Engineer prior to their use. All material batching shall be by weight. 5. The method of placing and curing of the mortar lining shall be ane with which the manufacturer has �xperience and can demonstrate a successful history. The lining shall be cured in a manner acceptable to the Engineer so that it will provide a hard and durable lining with a minimum of cracks, surface crazing and disbanded areas. Epoxy Lining for Wastewater 5ervice 1. Prior to abrasive blasting, th� entire area to receive the protective compound shall be inspected far oil, grease, etc. Any areas with oil, grease, or any substance that can be removed by solvent, shall be solvent cleaned to remove thas� substances. After the surface has been made free of grease, oil ar oth�r substances, all areas to receive the pratective compounds shall be abrasive blasted using sand or grit abrasive media. The entire surface to be lined shall be struck with the blast media sa that all rust, loose oxides, etc., are r�moved from the surface. Only slight stains and tightly adhering oxide may be left on the surface, Any area where rust reappears before lining must be re- blasted. 2. After the surface preparation and within 8 hours af surface preparation, the interior of the pipe shall receive 40 mils nominal dry film thickness of Pratectc 4�'� .".c lining sha!! take place when the substra#� or ar�-obient temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. The surface also must be dry and dust free. If flange pipe or fittings are included in the project, the lining shall nat be used on the face of the flange. 3. Due ta the tolerances involved, the gasket area and spigot end up to 6 inches back from the �nd af the spigot end must be caated with 6 mils nominal, 1Q mils maximum using Protecta Joint Compound. The Joint Compound shall be applied by brush to ensure coverage. Care should be taken that the Joint Compound is smaoth without excess buildup in the gasket seat or on the spigot ends. Coating of th� gasket seat and spigot ends shall be done after the application of the lining. 4. The number of coats of lining applied shall be as recommended by the lining manufacturer. However, in no case shall this material be applied abave the dry thickness per coat recommended by the lining manufacturer in printed literature. The maximum or minimum time b�tween coats shall be that time recommended by the lining material manufacturer. To prevent delamination between coats, no material DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-14 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 za 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 3$ 39 40 41 42 �43 44 45 46 47 ��1�:j 2.09 5 shall be used for lining which is not indefinitely recoatable with itself without raughening of the surface. Protecto Joint Compound shall be used for touch-up ar repair in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. EXTERIOR COATINGS A. The exterior of all pipe and fittings to be submerged in water and for underground installation shall be given a bituminous coating at the point of manufactur�, in accardance with ANSI/AWUVA Specification C 151 /A 21.51 _ PIPE APPURTENANCES A. Threaded flanges shall be ductile iron and shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15. Flanges with long hubs far flanged pipe shall be screwed on the thread�d end of the pipe in the shop. The face of the flange and the �nd of the pipe shall be refaced together. There shall be no leakage through the pipe threads, and the flanges shall be designed to prevent corrasion of the threads from autside. �langes shall meet th� requirements of ANSI B16.1, and shall be faced and drilled to that standard, unless special drilling is called for or required. The Contractar shall be responsible for assuring that the flanges of the pipe are compatible with the flanges of the various components and/or appurtenances. They shall be faced accurately at right angles ta the pipe axis, drilled smaoth and true, and the machined faces covered with zinc dust and tallow or equivalent material. The back of the flang�s and bolt holes shall be coated with asphaltic coating meeting th� requirements of ANSI/A1NWA C151/A21.51, Section 51-8.1. Coating material shali be appiiea immediaiEiy ar"'ter iacing and driliing. Udhere iap or stud poiis are required, flanges shall be tapped. All flanged joints shall be tharoughly balted thraugh, stud or tap bolts af required size. All flanged joints buri�d underground shall alsa be protected as specified under Section 2.08. Only flang�s made in USA shall be supplied to th� Project. B. All bolts and nuts used in the finished work for flanges shall be af carbon steel and shall confarm to the ASTM A 3Q7 Grade B. The ends of all bolts shall be finished tn the standard radius in an acc�ptabl� manner. All screw threads shall be "American Standard, Caarse Thread (N.C.). Stud bolts shall be hexagonal, cold pressed semi-finished and made vf inedium open-hearth steel. All dimensions shall be in accordance with "Am�rican Standard, H�avy." Balts and nuts shall be cadmium or zinc plated at the point of manufacture by an approved pracess with a plating thickness of Q.00�3 to 0.0005 inch�s. All bolts and nuts furnished shall be delivered ta the field free fram grease, rust, and dirt. C. All nuts and bolts that come into contact with water or that are to be buried shall be painted with two (2) heavy coats of an appraved coat tar pitch, in DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-15 �4/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1p 11 12 13 14 15 2.10 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 �43 accardance with Section 09900. D. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full-faced type EPDM gaskets one-eighth (1/8) inch thick. All gaskets for flanged joints shall be EPDM having a Durometer of 75 to 85 ar neoprene having a Durometer of 55 ta 65. As an alternate, the Contractor may supply the pipe Supplier's (manufacturer's) gasket such as American Cast Iran Pipe Company's "Toruseal" gask�t or U.S. Pipe's "Flange Tyte" gasket. Gask�ts for bell and spigat joints shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with AW1NA C111. E. Subject to the Engineer's approval, welded autlets shall be allowed; however, the welded-nn outlet diameter shall not be greater than ane qua�ter the diameter of the main line. COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLINGS A. The Cantractor shall furnish and install where required or where shawn on the Drawings, manufactured compression cauplings equal to Style 38 or Style 39 where isolating dielectric couplings are required, as manufactured by the Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries or an appr�ved equal. The compression couplings shall cansist of twa (2) ste�l follower flanges, ane (1) steel middle ring with pipe staps removed, and sufFicient rolled thread, track-head bolts to properly compress the gaskets, Aft�r fabrication, the middle and follower rings shall be cald expanded ta size and dimension. Thickness of the middle ring shall be suitable for the pressures specified, and the application, and in no case be less than one-half (1/2) inch thick. All parts of the compression caupling shall be galvanized or heavily cadmium plated at the point of manufacture and shall be epoxy coated in accordance with AWWA C2 � 0 or AWWA C203. I'' C The entire compression sleeve coupling unit shall be rated for working pressure plus surge pressure as a minimum. The Contractor shall pravide field coating for buried couplings in accardance with A1NWA C203 and these Contract Dacuments. D. Small deflectians in the pipe alignment shall be allowed at compression type coupling joints, but such deflectians shall not exceed three (3) degrees between any two (2) adjac�nt pipe sections. Where changes in line and/or grade in excess af three (3) degrees are required the deflections shall be made by deflecting multipl� jaints or by using fittings approved by the Engineer. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-16 04/26/11 ' , 1 2 ' 4 5 ' 7 8 1 9 10 11 ,12 13 14 '15 16 17 '18 19 20 '21 22 23 '24 25 26 '27 28 29 '30 31 32 '33 34 35 ,36 37 3$ � 39 40 41 ' �2 43 '44 45 46 ' �t7 � PART 3 — EXECUTIQN 3.01 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS A. The Contractor shall transpart, deliver and distribute along the line af the work, the pipe, specials and appurtenances. All Work shall be in strict accardance with the provisions of applicable permits and easements. B. Pipe shall be loaded for shipment upon suitable cars or trucks that shall be pravided with padded bunks with nylon belt tie-down straps or padded banding. In laading and unloading the pipe, more than ordinary care shall be taken to prevent any injury to the pipe, ends, coatings and connections. Such work shall be don� slawly with the pipe at all times und�r control, and under no conditian shall the pipe be dropped. Field repair af damaged pipe shall not be allawed, except for linings and coatings. The pipe shall be protected during shipping by covering ar some other means acceptable to the Engineer to prevent cantamination of the pipe and ta protect th� lining fram drying during transport. C. All pipe, fittings, etc., shall be carefully handled and pratected against damage ta the lining and coating/int��ior and exterior surfaces, impact shocks, and free fall. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Pipe handling equipment shall consist of wide belt slings, padded cradles, or other devices designed and constructed to prevent damage to the pipe or coatings. The use of forks, chains, hooks, or oth�r equipment that may damage the pipe ar its lining or coating shall nat b� allowed. D. In distributing the pipe in the field, each pipe shall be placed as nearly as possibie to the poini where it is to qe iaid, and facing in the proper direction. Pip� shall not be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a manner that will protect the pipe against injury whenever stored at the trench site or elsewhere. Coated pipe shall be stored an padded skids, sand ar dirt berm, sand bags, ar other suitabl� means so that coating will not be damaged. Coated pipe shall be handled with wide belt slings. Pipe fittings and specials which are placed in storage, streets or drives must be so arranged as nat to cause undue inconvenience to traffic and must be protected sufficiently ta prevent any damage including but not limited to the interior lining and exterior coatings. Chains, cables or other equipment likely to cause damage to the pipe, fitting or special coating or lining shall not be used. Pipe which has been impraperly distributed and which must be moved langitudinally alang the trench shall be reloaded on a suitable car or truck or lifted and swung by a derrick or moved by such means as may be satisfactory to the Engineer. E. If in the pracess of manufacture, transpo�tation, or handling, any ductile iron pipe, fitting ar special receives any deformation to the pip� wall, ends ar connectians, such pipe, fitting or special shall be rejected and replaced at the Contractor's expense. DUCTILE IR�N PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-17 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 �o 21 zz 23 24 25 26 3. Q2 2i 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 �. In the presence of the Engineer, the Cantractor shall inspect upon delivery all pipe, fittings, and specials and mark as "rejected" all pipe lengths and fittings ar specials exhibiting signs of damage to the exterior coating, interior cement mortar linings, joint ends, or pipe wall and the Contractor shall at the Contractor's expense immediately remove the same from the job site, or repair to the Engineer's satisfaction. Any pipe, fittings or specials deemed nat suitable for installation shall be replaced in kind by the Contractor at the Contractor's own exp�nse. G. The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting to insure that there are no damaged portions af the pipe. If any defective pipe is discovered after having been laid, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe or fitting in a satisfactory manner, by the Cantractor at the Contractor's own expense. H. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean each pipe or fitting af any fareign substance that may have callected on or in it prior to the pipe or fitting being placed in the trench. The openings af all pipes and fittings in the trench shall be closed during any interruptian of the Work. As pipe laying progresses, the Contractor shall keep the pipe interior free of all debris. The Cantractor shall completely clean the interiar of the pipe of all sand, dirt, martar splatter, and any other d�bris following completion of pipe laying, pointing af joints and any necessary interiar repairs prior to testing and disinfecting the completed pipeline. INSTALLATION QF PIPE A. Ductile iron piping shall be install�d in strict accordance with the manu- Tacturer's instructians. �ipe shali be laid anly after the trench has been excavated as described Division 2 of the Specifications. Pipe laid in trench shall b� laid to a firm and even bearing for its full length. Precautions shall be taken against flotation. The pipe shall be backfilled with selected fine �xcavated material as shown on the Drawings and thoroughly compacted to one faot above the top of the pipe and thereafter backfilled as specified in Section 02221. B. Precautians shall be taken against flotation. Pipe shall be laid directly on the bedding material. Pipe shall be laid in the trench where the bedding forms a continuous and uniform suppork for the full length af the pipe except that the grade may be disturbed for the removal of lifting tackl�. Bell holes shall be formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent point loading at the bells or couplings. Excavation shall be made as needed autside the normal trench section at field joints to permit adequate access to the joints for field connection operations. C. Each section of pipe shall be laid in the order and positian shown on the laying schedule, In laying pipe, it shall be laid to the set line and grade, within plus or DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-18 04/26/11 1 �._J 1 ' 1 1 � ' 1 1 1 ' 1 L� ' 1 1 1 ' 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 1D 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1$ 19 zo 21 22 23 2� 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 4�4 �5 �46 47 minus one inch. D. The maximum obtainable separation between raw water, potable water, reclaimed water ad sewage lines shall be practiced. A minimum horizontal separation of 3 feet, outside to outsid�, shall be maintained between raw water lines, potable water mains and reclaimed water mains or a minimum of 6 fe�t separation between sewage lines and either water or patable water lines. In instances wher� water lines cross a potable water main or a sewag� collection line, a minimum vertical separation af 12 inches shall be maintained between the invert of the upper pipe and the crown of th� lawer pipe. In instances where a vertical separation of 12 inches between a raw water line and a patable water main or a s�wage collection line cannot be achieved, then the raw water line shall be placed in a cast iron sleev� or encased in concrete centered at the point of crossing. E. Where necessary ta raise ar lower the pipe due to unfor�seen obstructions or other causes, the Engineer may change the alignment and/or the grades. Such change shall be made by the defl�cti�n of joints, ar by the use of additional fittings. F, Except for short runs that may be permitted by the Engine�r, pipe shall not be laid uphill on grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe that is laid an a downhill grade shall be blocked and held in place until suffici�nt support is furnished by the following pipe ta prevent movement. G. Contractor shall coordinate yard piping installation such that a minimum of 36 inches of cover is maintained over piping at all times, unless otherwise indicated an the plans. At crossings, a minimum of 6 inches of vertical separation between pipes shall be maintained while alsa maintaining 3�-inch minimum cover, unless otherwise indicated an the Drawings. H. Bedding and backfilling shall be in accordance with 5ection 02221 of these Specifications and the details shown on the Construction Drawings. Bedding shall be carefully worked into the area between th� trench bottom and the pipe wall to keep it round. Bedding shall not be depasited on top of the pipe, but alongside it, and in such a way that it rises evenly on bath sides. J. All jaints shall b� assembled in accardance with the Manufacturer's recommended procedures. In general the pracedure shall be as described herein. Immediately before jointing pipe, the bell of the pipe shall be tharaughly cl�an�d, and a clean gasket shall be placed in the bell graave. The spigot shall be carefully cleaned and the bell cantaining the gasket and the spigot lubricated with a v�getable-based lubricant. The spigat of the pipe section shall then be aligned with the bell end and inserted into the bell of the previously laid joint and telescaped into its proper positian. Tilting of the pipe to insert th� spigat into the bell will not be permitted. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-19 04/26/11 K. Restrained joints shall be assembled in a similar manner as described abave except that the restraining device shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommended procedures. L. Balt hales of flanges shall straddle the field harizontal and field vertical centerlines of the pipe. The Contractor shall clean flanges by wire brushing b�fore installing flanged fittings. The Contractor shall clean flange bolts and nuts by wire brushing. M. The Contractor shall insert the nuts and bolts (or studs), finger tighten, and progressively tighten diametrically opposite bolts unifarmly around the flange to the proper tension. The Contractor shall execute care when tightening joints to prevent any strain upan valves, pumps and other equipment. After tightening all bolts any stulls shall be removed from the interior of the pipe if it is not to be buried. N. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reset ar replace the gasket, reinstall ar retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. Flanged joints shall be watertight. O. Pipe stulls, if recammended by the Supplier, shall be left in place until bedding and backfilling aperations have been completed. After the backfill has been placed, the stulls shall be removed and shall remain the praperty of the Contractor. P. After stulls are removed, the Contractor shall check the inside diameter of the pipe to verify that deflection has not exceeded the allowable 3 percent. The frequency or checking shall be as directed by the Engineer but in no case shail be less than the frequency of soil density testing. Q. All pipes shall be laid with a 2--inch metallic tape, appropriat�ly color coded and imprinted with the type of service, 12 inches below final grade and directly above the utility, for identification and ease of location. The apprapriate tape color cades are as follows: 1. Sanitary Force Main: Green 2. Potable Wat�r: Blue 3. Reclaimed Water: Purple R. Care shall be taken in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint on the opposite end of one piece which would induce stresses in the pipe or fitting or prevent pressure fram being evenly and uniformly applied upon the gasket. The pipe or fitting shall be free to move in any direction while bolting. Bolts shall be gradually tightened, each in turn, at a uniform rate of gasket compression around the entire flange. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 150�2-20 04/26/11 ' �1 ' 1 ' ' , � 1 ' ' ' 1 S. No pipe shall be installed upon a foundation inta which frost has penetrated or at any time that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of frost at the bottom of the excavation_ Na pipe shall be laid unless it can be established that the trench will be backfilled before the formatian of ice and frost accurs. T_ Pipes underneath structures and slabs shall be ductile iron and shall have a 6- inch minimum concrete encasement for pipes 24 inches and smaller (�xcept pipes 3 inches and smaller, which shall be SCH 80 PVC). 8-inch minimum concrete encasement for pipes larger than 24 inches up t� and including 36 inches and 9 inches minimum cancrete encasement for pipes larger than 36 inches. Concrete encasement shall extend a minimum of 12 inches past edge of structure or slab. U. All pipe and fitting jaints occurring within restrained joint limits as required an the Canstruction Drawings, or as ordered, shall be properly secured to prevent thrust forces from pulling the pipeline joints apart. All tied joints shall be harnessed by using the pipe Manufacturer's standard restrained joint arrangem�nts conforming to these Specifications. Where approved by the Engineer, joints may be restrained by the use of rads and clamps. The rads and clamp harnessing arrangements shall be installed utilizing (ugged fittings and pipe with saddle clamps placed to bear against the pipe bells. Saddle clamps around the barrel of the pipe that depend on friction or set screws to prevent sliding of the clamp are not acceptable. The pipe clamps, tie rods and their assembly shall meet the requirements of the Natianal Fire Protection Association Bulletin Na. 24. After each tied joint is connected up, all pipe clamps, bolts, heads, tie rads and nuts shall be coated as recommended by the Supplier. V. Careful inspection shall be made of every joint to insure a smooth continuous interior surface. The Cantractor shall thoroughly clean the interior of the pipe and remove any abstructions that may reduc� the pipe's carrying capacity. Following campletion af pipeline progressively or in sections, including completian of inside inspectians, insafar as might be possible or practicable, the line shall be kept partially filled with water. '37 W. The Contractor shall patch the cement mortar lining of any pipe that has a 38 crack exceeding the allowable crack as determined by the Engineer. Lining 39 failures that exceed 100 square inches and that have dimension greater than '�40 12-inches shall be cause for the pipe to be rejected. There shall not be more 41 than one patch on the lining af any on� joint of pipe, fitting ar special. 1 1 1 1 X. Wherever necessary and approved by the Engineer, patches shall be made by the Contractor with a martar of ane part Portland cement and two parts cl�an, sharp sand; all measur�m�nts to be by weight. No pipe requiring the lining to be patched shall be installed until the patch is placed. Pipe thus patched shall not be installed until the patch has be�n propErly and adequately cured and approved for laying by the Engineer. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FIT7INGS 15062-21 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1$ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 3� 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 �44 �5 �46 Q�7 4$ 3.03 3.04 3.Q5 Y. All buried process piping (�xcluding drainage and starmwater piping) shall be restrained in accardance with the restrained joint table provided in the Drawings. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping system shall be restrained based on a 150 psi warking pressure. Pipes subject to gravity flow shall be restrained based on a 3Q psi working pressure. Restrained joint length indicated in the Tables represents the length an all sides of fittings and valves within which all joints must be restrain�d. As a minimum, the joints at all fittings and valves shall be restrained. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for lin� pressures 5d percent aboue the normal working pressur� but not less than 150 psi on pipe subject to pressure and 30 psi on pipe subject to gravity flow. The pipE and fittings shall be restrained mechanical joints. C��j�r<<C . . A. Whenever pipes require cutting to fit into the lines, the work shall be done in a satisfactory manner so as to leave a smooth end, at right angles to the axis af the pipe. Pipe cutting shall only be dane by saws specifically designed for that purpose. After cutting, the end of the pipe shall be bevel�d to the dimensions af the Manufacturer`s specifications. COMPRES510N SLEEVE COUPLINGS A. The Contractor shall tharoughly clean with a wire brush all surfaces that will be in contact with the gaskets. ' B. The follower rings shall be placed aver the pipe ends, then the Contractor shall slip the gaskets that have bee�`► lubricated with an approved vegetable based lubricant over the pipe ends. The Contractar shall place the middle ring over the previously laid pipe then insert the end of the jaining pip� into the middle ring, and position both gaskets evenly in the middle ring gasket grooves. The Contractor shall insert bolts in bolt holes af follawer rings and tighten nuts in the sequence and with the t�rque requirements of the coupling manufacturer. After tightening all bolts the stulls shall be remaved fram the interior of the pipe if it is not to be buried. DRILLING AND TAPPING A. Where shown on the Constructian Drawings or where required, ductile iron pipe, fittings or specials shall be drilled and tapped to receive drainage outlets, air relief outlets, or other pipe or plugs for pressure testing and/or chlorination. Hales shall b� drilled accurately and at right angles to the axis of the pipe or fitting. B. Where size of the outlet pipe to be connected is such as ta require bossES ar reinforcement saddles for making the connection, the Contractor shall furnish such outlet connections with bosses or reinforcement saddles drilled and tapped as indicated on the Construction Drawings or as approued by the DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-22 04/26/11 , , 1 2 ' � 5 1 � 8 ,9 10 11 '12 13 14 ,15 16 17 �18 19 20 ,21 22 23 ,24 25 26 ,27 28 29 ,30 31 32 '33 34 35 ,36 37 38 ,39 40 �1 '42 43 44 ,45 46 47 1 ' [c�iI:� K�i�1 Cc�i : Engineer. �Y�1:»_[rl��:��"l_1:7_��[�]►L'1� � • � IiW�Le� A. The Contractor shall remave all debris, dirt, grease, mortar and other foreign material by the use of saap and water or other salvent as may be required. B. After each joint has been made the Contractor shall give all ste�l balts and nuts a chemical wash of the phosphate type followed by one (1) coat of primer especially prepared for the finish of the bolt and nut installed. After this pretreatment, the Contractor shall coat all balts and nuts as follows: C D E Give all bolts and nuts that will be exposed one (1) caat of primer. Paint all balts and nuts that will be underground in accordance with these Cantract Documents. All piping and fittings shall have its surface prepared and painted as specified in Sectians 09865 and 09900. �Y�1,»I�:Ky�1����y�:��I[�l� A. Contractor shall, at no additional cost to Owner, arrange for pipe Manufacturer's field representative ta be an-site and provide instruction to each crew warking during the installation af a minimum of four push-an joints and faur r�strained joints The Manufacturer's field representative shall certify that the installations abserved w�re satisfactorily completed and all pipe installation crews were familiar with the proper methods and procedures far the pipeline install�tians. ����I.y:ii�Ce7r1�i����i►Ce7 A. The Contractor shall remove all sand and foreign matter fram the pipeline as work progresses. The ends of all pipes shall be suitably closed, in a manner approved by th� Engineer, at each break or pause in pipe laying, and at the end of each work day, so as to minimize the amount of materials that can enter the pip�. B. Prior to pressure testing, all 24-inch and smaller mains shall be flushed to remove all sand and ather fnreign matter. The velacity of the flushing water shall not be less than 2 feet per secpnd. Flu�hing shall be terminated at the direction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall dispose of the flushing water withaut causing property damage or violatian af �nvironmental regulations or permits. C. Priar to pressure testing, all 30-inch and larger mains shall be televis�d. All dirt and foreign matter shall be removed and the pipe shall be clean�d in a DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND �ITTINGS 15062-23 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 manner appraved by the Engineer_ After cleaning, the mains shall be re- televised. Pre-and post-cleaning videotapes shall be furnish�d to the Owner. D, Testing of lines shall be as specified in Section III. END OF SECTION DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-24 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1� 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 z�r 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 4Q 41 �2 43 44 45 46 47 SECTION 15Q64 PQLYVINYL CHI�ORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install in the locations as shown on the Drawings, the PVC piping, fittings and appurtenances as specified herein. B. The requirements of this specification 1506� supersede relevant articles in Section IV. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM �r I� Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings. All pip�, fittings, valves, solvents and glue used for potable water piping shall be NSF-61 certified for continuous contact with potable water. 1.Q3 QUALIFICATIONS A. All PVC pipe, fittings and appurtenances shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture af the items to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shaii comply with ihese 5pecifiications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditians and shall include dimensioning and technical specification for all piping to be furnished. B. Submit to the Engineer, for review, samples of all materials specified herein. 1.05 TOOLS A. Special tools, solv�nts, lubricants, and caulking compounds required for normal installation shall be furnished with the pipe. PART 2 - PRODUCTS POI�YVINYL CHL�RIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064-1 04/26/11 f�� � � i�►� i I � � ��:7 I_\ �y A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: 1_ Class-rated PVC pipe and accessaries four to twelve inches (4"-12") in diameter, where shown or as specified on the Drawings, shall meet the requirements of AVWVA Specification C900 "Palyuinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe." Pipe shall be Class 150, meeting requirements of Dimension Ratio (DR) 18 with cast iron outside diameters. Each length of pipe shall be hydrotested to four (4) times its class pressure by the manufactur�r in accordance with AWWA C900. W3 RCW piping shall be pipe Class 200 meeting requirements of Dimension Ratia (�R) 14. 2. Class-rated fourkeen inch (14"') or larger PVC pipe and accessories for force main use only shall meet the requirements of AVWVA Speci- fication C905, "Polyvinyl Chlaride Water Transmission Pipe". Pipe shall be Class 235, me�ting the requirements of DR 18 with cast iron outside diameters. Each length of pipe shall be hydratested by the manufacturer to two (2) times its class pressur� in accordance with AWWA C905. 3. Pressure rated PVC pipe smaller than 4" shall be 200 psi SDR-21 conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2241. Potable water main pipe shall have EPDM gasket push-on joints canforming to ASTM F 477. Force main pipe shall have SBR gasket push-on joints conforming to ASTM F-477. C! PVC pipe less than 4" in diameter which is exposed to view shall be � ASTM D-1785 Schedule 80 pipe with UV inhibitors. 5. All PVC pipe shall be new, unused and manufactured for this praject. Palyvinyl chloride sewer pipe shall conform to ASTM D-3034, F794, and D-1784 (PVC compound). The PVC pipe shall be manufactured by Jahns-Manville Corporation, Certain-Teed Corporation, or equal. All PVC sewer pipe shall b� green and conspicuausly labeled with the manufacturer's name, nominal pip� size, applicable material code or PVC cell classification, standard dimension ratio number, product type, standard specification d�signation, and production record code. 6. Pipe shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provisions shall be made for expansion and contraction at each jaint with an elastomeric ring, and shall have an integral thickened bell as part of each joint. PVC Class pip� shall be installed in accordance with the Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association Guide Specificatian UNI-B-3-i6, and as recommended by the manufiacturer. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND �ITTINGS 15064-2 ' � 1 ' 1 ' 1 04/26/11 1 ' �� � ' ' �� : 1 ' 1 ' C� ' 1 � ' � �J � , 7. Pipe shall be furnished in nominal lengths af approximately 20 feet, unless oth�rwise direct�d by the Engin�er. Pipe far potable water supply and accessori�s shall bear the NSF inark indicating pipe size, manufacturer's name, and AW1NA and/or ASTM Specification number, working pressure and praductian code. Pipe and couplings shall be made from Class 12454-A or Class 12454�B virgin compound, as designed in ASTM D1784. 8_ PVC pipe shall be color coded as follows: sanitary mains - green; potabl� water mains - blue; reclaim�d water mains — lavender, process piping — brown. Specific colors shall match county standard colors as applicable. Joints: 1. Joints for PVC sewer shall be af the bell and spigot type conforming to ASTM D-3212 using factary installed flexible elastomeric seals (gaskets). These gaskets shall be SBR and shall conform to ASTM F- 477. Joints far PVC water pipe shall be of the bell and spigot type using factory installed, fl�xible �lastomeric seals (gaskets)_ Th�se gaskets shall be EPDM and shall confarm to ASTM F-477. Z. The PVC joints for buried pipe shall be of the push-on type unless otherwise directed by the Engineer so that the pipe and fittings may be connected on the job without the use af salvent cement or any special equipment. Th� push-on joint shall be a single rubber gasket joint designed ta be assembled by the positioning af a continuaus, molded rubber ring gasket in annular recess in the pipe ar fitting socket and the forcing of th�: plain end of the entering pipe into the socket, tnereby compressing the gasket radially to the pipe ta farm a pasitive seal_ The gasket and annular recess shall be designed and shaped sa that the gasket is locked in plac� against displacement as the joint is assembled. The rubber ring joint shall be designed for thermal expansion or cantraction with a total temperature change of at least 75 degrees F in each jaint per length of pipe. The b�ll shall consist of an integral wall s�ction with a solid cross-section elastomeric ring which shall meet requirements of ASTM D1869. The thickened bell sectian shall be designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall_ Lubricant furnished for lubricating joints shall be nontoxic, shall not support the growth afi bacteria, shall have no deteriorating effects on the gasket or pipe material, and shall nat impart color, taste, or odor to the water. 3. PVC joints far expased pipe shall b� threaded or solvent welded joints where called fior on thE Drawings, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Teflon thread tape ar liquid Teflon thread lubricant shall b� used on all threaded jaints ta serve as bnth a sealer and lubricant. Thr�aded joints should be made hand tight (hard). When the joint is POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064-3 �4/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2$ 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 3� 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 C hand tight a strap wrench shauld be used to make up one ta two (1-2) additianal full turns past the hand tight point. Do nat use pipe wrenches or pump pliers an plastic pipe ar fittings. Fittings: 1. Fittings for pressure rated PVC pipe smaller than 4" in diameter shall be salvent weld Schedule 80 PVC and shall conform ta ASTM Specification D2464-69. 2. The manufacturer af the pipe shall supply all polyvinyl chloride accessories as well as any adaptors and/or specials required to perform the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Standard double bell couplings will nat be accepted where thE pipe will slip completely through the coupling. 2.02 RESTRAINED JQINTS A. All buried piping shall be restrained in accordance with the restrained joint table provided in the Drawings. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping system shall be restrained based an a 15� psi working pressure. Pipes subject to gravity flow shall be restrained based on a 30 psi working pressure. Restrained joint length indicated in the Tables represents the length on all sides of fitting5 and valves within which all jaints must be restrained. As a minimum, the joints at all fittings and valves shall be restrained. B. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for line pressures 50 percent above the normal working pressure but nat less than 150 psi. The pipe and fittings shall be r�strained push-on joints or restrained mechanical joints. C: PVC push-an pipe bell and spigot joints shall be restrained with the Uni-Flang� Corp. Series 1390 Restrainer or appraved equal. The restraining device and Tee head bolts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12. Clamping bolts and nuts shall b� manufac- tured of corrasian resistance high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel meeting the requirements nf ASTM A-242. D. Ductile iron mechanical joint fittings used with PVC pipe shall be r�strained with the Uni-�lange Corp. Series 1300 Restrainer, EBAA Iron, Inc., Series 2000PV Mechanical Joint Restraint Gland, or approved equal. The restraining device and Tee h�ad bolts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45�12. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be manufactur�d af corrosion resistant high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A-242. E. Thrust blacks shall nafi be permitted unless specifically shown on the Drawings. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (f'VC) PIPE AND �ITTINGS 15064-4 04/26/11 � � , � 1 LJ , � � ' L.J � � C� 1 � � � � 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 z2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 �� 38 39 40 �1 42 43 44 45 46 47 PART 3 - EXECUTION � .: ►17�f►[HJI7�_\►�IT����I►LeI� A. Car� shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading ta prevent injury to th� pip�. Pip� ar fittings shall not be dropped. Any damaged pipe or fittings shall be replaced. B. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection just prior to being laid or installed, and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective_ C. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been laid or installed, it shall be removed and replaced with a saund pipe in a satisfactory manner at no additional expense to the Owner. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying, shall be kept clean until they are used in the work, and when installed or laid, shall conform to the lines and grades required. 3.02 INSTALLING EXPOSED PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. All piping and fittings shall be installed true to alignment and rigidly supported thrust anchars shall be prdvided where required. Each length of pipe shall be cleaned out before erection. B. 5leeves shall b� installed of praper size for all pipes passing through floors or walls as shown on the Drawings. Wher� indicated on the Drawings or required for liquid or gas-tightness the pipe be sealed with a mechanical seal equal to Link-Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., Wayne, Michigan. C. Concrete inserts for hangers and supporks shall b� furnished and installed in the cancrete as it is placed. The inserts shall in accardance with the requirements of the piping layaut and jointing method and their locations shall be verified from approved piping layout drawings and the structural drawings. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Section 15094 of these specificatians. D. All valves, fittings, equipment, and appurtenanc�s needed upon the pipelines shall be set and jainted as indicated on the Drawings or as required. Valves and appurtenances are included in Section 15100 of these specifications. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a manner as ta prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. Wh�n manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall nat be transmitted to their equipment, a certification shall be submitted stating that such requirements have been complied with. 3.03 FLUSHING AND TESTING POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064-5 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ 9 10 11 12 13 �4 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 A. Prior to pressure testing, all mains shall be flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter. The velocity of the flushing water shall nat be less than 2 feet per second. �lushing shall be terminated at the direction af the Engineer. The Cantractor shall dispose af the flushing water without causing a nuisanc� or property damage. B. Complete PVC piping syst�ms shall be field pressure tested after installatian and including all companents to 15p psi far 2 hours. Any leaks discovered during t�sting shall be repaired. The repair�d component or portion must be retested until th� entir� system passes the pressure testing. [c�iL�Y�1:�ys[y��:l�"l_1:L��[�]�I_1►1�7��11►��I�[�7 A. All piping and fittings exposed to vi�w shall have its surface prepared and be painted as specified in Sections 09865 and 09900 of these specifications. Surface preparation and shop priming is a part of the work of this Section. Pipe marking is included in Section 09900, but it shall be part of the work of this Sectian to assist as required by the Engin�ering in identifying pipe contents, direction of flow and all else required for proper marking of pipe. L�►11�I�����C�1►� POLYVINYL CHLQRIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15p64-6 04/26/11 � � � � 1 � , ' � LJ L_7 r �_ . � � ��� � � ._.� ' � ' 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 �6 37 38 39 40 41 42 �43 44 45 46 47 SECTIDN 15094 f�l��:I_1�[e]�:�y�1►1�I.Y�1�'lil:ir.� PART 1 - GEN�RAL 1.Q1 SC�PE OF WORK A. It is the intent of the project to remove existing pipe supports, hangers, and straps and furnish and install new pip� supports, hangers, and straps as shown an the Drawings. B. Furnish all labor, mat�rials, equipment and incidentals and install hangers, supparts, cancr�t� inserts, and anchar bolts, including metallic hanging and supparting devices for supporting exposed piping. C. All new pipe supports, hangers, straps hardware, clips, unistrut, and anchors shall be 3Q4 stainless steel and shall match the number, type, location, and capacity of the existing supports. 1.Q2 QUALIFICATIONS A. Hangers and supports shall be of approved standard design and shall be adequate to maintain the suppo�t�d load in proper position under all operating conditions, The minimum working factar for pipe supports shall b� five (5) times the ultimate tensile of the material, assuming 10 fe�t of water filled pipe being supported. B. ,�li pipe anci appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a manner as to prevent any strain being impo5ed on the equipment. When manufactur�rs have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be transmitted to their equipment, the Contractor shall submit a certificatian stating that such requir�ments have been complied with. � i l e�� � 1 e�►�i I �� r_1 � A. B. Submit to the Engineer for review, as provided in the Gen�ral Conditions, shop drawings of all items ta be furnished under this section. Submit to the Engineer, for r�view, samples of all materials specified herein. I �_1: i �� , : i � ] �1 � I � �� 2.01 GENERAL A. All pipe and tubing shall be supported as required to prevent significant stresses in the pipe or tubing material, valves and fittings, and to suppart and PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094-1 04/26/11 secure the pipe in the intended position and alignment_ All supports shall be designed to adequately secure th� pipe against excessive dislacation due ta thermal expansion and contraction, internal flow farces, and all probable external forces such as equipment, pipe and personnel contact. All pipe supports shall be approved prior to installation. B. All materials used in manufacturing hangers and supports shall be capabie of meeting, the respective ASTM Standard Specifications with regard to tests and physical and chemical properties, and be in accordance with MSS SP-58. C. Hangers and supports shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI B31.1.0 that th� maximum unsupported span shall not exceed 10 feet atherwise specified herein. D. Unless otherwise specified h�r�in, pip� hangers and supparts shall be manufactured by Piping Technology & Products, Inc. ar equal. Any reference to a specific figure or number is for the purpase of establishing a type and quality of and shall not be considered as proprietary. Any item in type, style, quality, design and performance will be for approval. 2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR METAL PIPE A. Suspended single pipes shall be supported by 304 SS hangers suspend�d by steel from 304 SS concrete inserts, beam clamps or ceiling maunting as follows: 1 _ Hangers: Pipe Siz�s_Inch�s Pipinq Technaloqv & Products Fiq_ _No. 1 /2" to 3" 50 3" to 30" 83 Above 30" See SPECIAL SUPPORTS, Paragraph 2.Q4 2. Hanger rods shall be rolled 3o4 stainless steel machine threaded with load ratings conforming to ASTM Specifications and the strength of the rod shall be based on root diameter. Hanger rods shall have th� fallowing minimum diameters: Pipe Sizei Inc_h__es Less than 2-1 /2 2-1/2 though 4 4 6 8-12 Min. Rod Diameter, In. 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS "' 15094-2 Q4/26/11 , � � �1 14-16 1 20-30 1-1 /2 Above 30 See SPECIAL SUPPORTS, Paragraph 2.p4 � 6 3. Where applicable, structural attachments shall be beam clamps. Beam 7 clamps, for rod sizes 1/2-inch through 3/4-inch shall be equal to Grinnell 8 Fig. No. 229, and for rod sizes 7/S-inch through 1-1/4 inch�s shall be ,9 equal to Grinnell Fig. Na. 228 or equal. 10 11 4. Concrete inserts far pipe hangers shall be designed ta be used in �12 ceilings, walls or floors, spot inserts for individual pip� hangers or 13 ceiling mounting bolts for individual pipe hang�rs, and shall be as 14 manufactured by Ramset/Red Head, or equal, and shall be as follows: � � _ ' 1 � � � ' � � ' C.� �� a. 304 SS Multi Set II drop in style anchors shall be used wh�re applicable and shall be used for hanger rods up to and including 7/8--inch diameter. b. Ceiling mounting plat�s shall be used, where applicable, and be for hanger rod sizes 1-inch through and including 1-1/4 inches, shall be Fig. 47, Fig. 49 or Fig, 52 as manufactured by Grinnell or approved Equal. All pipe hangers shall be capable af vertical adjustment under load and after erection. Turnbuckles, as required and where applied, shall 304 SS be equal to Grinnell Fig. No. 230. Wall or column supported pipes shall be , supported by welded steel brackets equal ta Grinnell �ig. 194, 195, and 199, as r�quired, for pipe sizes up to and including 20-inch diam�ter. Additional wall bearing piaies snaii be provided wh�re required. 5. Where the pipe is locat�d above the bracket, the pipe shall b� set on a Q.S�inch n�aprene pad and U-bolt assembly supported by the bracket for pipes 4-inches and larger or by a U-bolt far pipes smaller than 4-inches. U-bolts shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 120 and 137. 6. Where the pipe is located below the bracket, the pipes shall be supported by pipe hangers suspended by steel rods from th� bracket. Hangers and steel rads shall be as specified above. 7. Wall or column supported pipes 8-inches and smaller may be supported by hangers equal to Grinnell Figures 103, as required. C. Floar supported pipes 3-inches and larger in diameter shall be supported by either cast-in-place concrete supports or adjust-able pipe saddle supports as directed by the Engineer. In general, concrete supports shall be used wh�n lateral displacement of the pipes is prabable (unless lateral support is PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094-3 04/�6/11 1�7 r� provided), and adjustable pipe saddle type supports shall be used where lateral displacement of the pipes is not probable. 1. Each cancrete suppart shall conform to the details shown an the Drawings. Concrete shall be poured after the pipe is in place with temporary supports. Tap edg�s and vertical corners of each concrete suppart shall have 1-inch bevels. Each pipe shall b� secured on each concrete suppork by a wrought iran ar steel anchor strap anchored to the concrete with cast-in-place bolts or with expansian bolts. Where directed by the Engineer, vertical reinforcement bars shall be grouted into drilled holes in the cancrete floor to prevent overturning or lateral displacement of the concrete support, Unl�ss otherwise approved by the Engineer, maximum height shall be five (5) feet. � � , � C� �_� 2. Concrete piers used to support base elbows and tees shall be similar to � that specified above. Piers may be square or rectangular. 3. Adjustable pipe saddle support shall be screwed or welded to the corresponding size 150 Ib. companion flanges or slip-on welding flang�s respectively. Supporting pipe shall be of Sch�dule 40 steel pipe construction of the size recommended by the pipe support manufacturer. Each flange shall be secured to the concrete floor by a minimum of twa (2) expansion bolts per flange. Adjustable saddle supports shall be equal to Grinnell �ig. No. 259. Where used under base fittings, a suitable flange shall be substituted for the saddle. Floor supported pipes less than 3-inches shall b� supported by fabricated steel supparts. Verticai piping snaii be supported as foilows: 1. Where pipes change from harizontal to vertical, the pipes shall b� supported on the horizontal runs within 2 feet of the change in direction by pipe supports as pr�viously specified herein. 2. For vertical runs exceeding 15 feet pip�s and great�r than eight-inches in diameter shall be supported by the fabricated pipe support as shown in the drawings. 3. Where vertical piping passes thraugh a ste�l floor sleeve, the pipe shall be supported by a friction type pipe clamp which is supported by the pipe sleeve. Pipe clamps shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 262. Anchor balts shall be equal to Kwik-Bolt as manufactured by the McCullock Industries, Minneapolis, Minnesota or Wej-it manufactured by Wej-it Expansion Products, Inc., Bloomfield, Colorado. All rods, hangers, inserts, brackets, and components shall be 30�4 Stainless Steel. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094-4 04/26/11 � LJ 1 � � � � � , � � r� � � �J � � � � , 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1$ 19 2a 21 z� 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 3$ 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLASTIC PIPE A. Single plastic pip�s shall be supparted by pipe supparts as previously specified herein. B. Multiple, suspended, horizontal plastic pipe runs, where possible, and rubber hose shall b� supported by ladd�r type cable trays such as the Electray Ladder by Husky-Burndy, the Globetray by the Metal Products Division of United States Gypsum, or equal. Ladder shall be of mild steel construction. Rung spacing shall be approximately 18 inches far plastic pipe and 12 inches for rubber nase. Tray width shall be appraximately 6 inches for single runs af rubber hose and 12 inches for double runs of rubber hose. Ladder type cable trays shall be furnished complete with all hanger rods, rod couplings, cancret� inserts, hanger clips, etc., required for a complete support system. Individual plastic pipes shall be s�cured to the rungs of the cabl� tray by strap clamps fasteners �qual ta Globe Model M-CAC, Husky-Burndy Model SCR or equal. Spacing between clamps shall not exceed 9 feet. The cable shall provide cantinuous support alang the length of the pipe. C. Individual clamps, hangers, and supports in contact plastic pipe shall provide firm suppart, but not so firm as to prevent longitudinal due to thermal expansion and contraction. 2.04 SPECIAL SUPPORTS A. Pipes, requiring special supports as defined in this specification or shown on the drawing, shall be supported by means of a supporting framework anchored into the floor or curbing. i he vertical piping shall be suitably secured to horizontal support members connected at each end vertical support members and spaced as required to provide a rigid installation. 1. Th� complete supporting system shall be as manufactured by the Unistrut Corparation, Globe-Strut as manufactured by the Metal Products Division of U.S. Gypsum, Qr equal. V�rtical and horizontal supporting members shall be U-shaped channels similar to Unistrut Series P1000. 2. Vertical piping shall be secured to the horizantal members by pipe clamps ar pipe straps equal to Unistrut Series P1100M and Seri�s P2558. All components shall b� of 304 stainless steel. 3. The assemblies shall be furnished complete with all nuts, bolts, and fittings r�quired for a complete assembly. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094-5 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1p 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 z� 25 26 27 zs 29 30 31 32 33 3�4 35 4. The design of each individual framing syst�m shall be the responsibility af the Contractar. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall show all details of the installatian including dimensions and types of supparts. B. Any required pipe supports for which th� supports specified in this Sectian are not applicable, including pipe supparts for above 30-inch diameter pipe; high temperature and high pressure (greater than 150 psi) shall be fabricated or constructed from s#andard aluminum shapes in accardance with Specifications, cancrete and anchar hardware similar to items previausly specified herein and shall meet the minimum requirements listed below and be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 1 � Pipe support systems shall meet all requirements of this Sectian and all related Sections of this Specification_ Complete design d�tails of the entire pipe support systems shall be provided, for approval by the Engineer. 3. The pipe support system shall nat impase loads on the supporting structures, in excess of the loads for which th� supporting structure is designed. 4. Hanger rads for above 30-inch pipe shall be a minimum of 1-1/2-inch diameter and shall not exceed the Manufacturer's standard maximum recommended safe load. 2.05 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING A. f'ipe hanger and support spacing shall b� in accordance with ANSI B3�.1.1.� and MSS SP-69. In no case shall the spacing of hangers or supparts exceed the fallowing: Maximum unsupported pipe span (F EET) Nominal Pipe Size - Ductile Iron � Steel PVC-1 and PVG2 Inches 5ch. 80 1/2 N/A 5�Y 3. 5 3/4 � N/A 6 3.5 1 W� N/A 7 3.8 1-1/4 �� N/A 7 4.0 u� 1-1/2 - 3 N/A 9 4.0 � � 4 7 10 5.5 --�.���_—µ 5-10 10 10 10 12-4$ 10 per manufacturer 10 or as shawn on drawings PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094-6 04/26/11 � � , � L� ' � � � C.J 1 � , � PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All pipes, horizontal and vertical, shall be rigidly supported from the building structure by approved supports. Supports shall be provided at changes in direction and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or specified herein. No piping shall b� supported from other piping ar fram metal stairs, ladders and walkways, unless it is so indicated on the Drawings, or specifically directed or authorized by the Engineer. B. All pipe supports shall be designed with liberal strength and stifFn�ss to support the resp�ctive pipes under the maximum combination of peak loading conditions ta include pipe w�ight, liquid weight, liquid movement, and pressure farces, thermal expansian and contraction, vibrations and all prabable externally applied forces. Prior to installation, all pipe supparts shall be approved by the Engineer. 20 C. Pipe supports shall b� provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both �21 sides of split type couplings, and sleeve type couplings and to minimize all 22 pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall nat be utilized ta support 23 connecting pipes. �J C� � � ' �J LJ � � , n E F Pipe supports shall be provided as follows: 1. Cast iron and ductile iron shall be supported at a maximum support spacing of 10 feet-0-inches with a minimum of one support per pipe section at th� jaints. 2. Supports for multiple PVC pipes shall be continuous wherever passible. Individually supported PVC pipes shall be supported as recamm�nded by the manufacturer except that support spacing shall not exceed five (5) feet. 3. Support spacing for galvanized steel pipe and copper tubing shall not exceed five (5) feet. 4. All v�rtical pipes shall be supported at each flaor ar at intervals of at least 15 feet by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets or wall rests, and at all points necessary to insure rigid construction. Pipe supports shall not result in pnint loadings, but shall distribute pipe loads evenly along the pipe circumference. Effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe shall be accounted for in pipe suppork selection and installation. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15�94-i 04/26/11 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 �4 15 16 17 1$ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 G. Ins�rts for pipe hangers and supports shall be installed on farms before cancrete is poured. Before setting these items, all Drawings and figures shall be checked which have a dir�ct bearing on the pipe location_ RESponsibility for the proper location of pipe supports is included under this Sectian. � � �� H. Continuous m�tal inserts shall be embedded flush with the concrete surface. , 3.02 PRIME COATING A. Prior to prime coating, all pipe hangers and supports shall be thoroughly clean, dry, and free from all mill-scale, rust, grease, dirt, paint and other foreign substances to the satisfaction af the Engineer. B. All submerged pip� supports shall be prime coated with Kappers 654 Epoxy Primer or equal. All other pipe suppor#s shall be prime coated with Rust- Inhibitive Primer No. 621 as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa, or equal. , ' ' , C. Finish coating shall be compatible with the prime coating used and shall be applied, as specified in Section 09900. ' 3.03 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, suitable insulation shall be provided between adjoining surfaces to eliminate direct cantact and any resulting �lectrolysis. The insulation shall be bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nanmetallic separators or washers, ar upan approval by the Engin�er. END OF SECTIQN PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094-8 04/26/11 ' [�� � � i ' � �-� � � l._ ' � � -, I, IJ L] � , ' ' LI _.; L� sECTioN � 5� o0 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 - GENERAL �.o� SC�PE OF WORK A. Furnish all labar, materials, equipment and incidentals requir�d far camplete and ready aperation of all valves and appurtenances shown an the Construction Drawings and as specified herein. : C C All valves and appurtenances shall be af the size shown on the drawings. All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the manufacturer cast in raised I�tt�rs an some apprapriate part of the bady. The equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. 2. 4. 5. 6: 8. 9a 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Eccentric Plug Valves Slanting Disk Check Valve Swing Check Valve Telescopic Valv�s Resilient W�dge Gate Valves Butterfly Valves Pressure Relief Valves Ball Valves Air Release Valves Combination Air and Vacuum Release Valves Valve Actuators Valve Boxes Gauges Flange Adapter Couplings Flexible Couplings Quick Connect Couplings Flexible Type Expansian J�ints Unions 1.02 DESCRIPTI�N OF SYSTEMS A. All of th� equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard for use in controlling the flow of wastewater, waste activated sludge, return activated sludge, scum, etc., depending on the application. B. Unless otherwise specified herein ar on the drawings all r�silient seats, seals, and other sEaling components of valves and flexible fittings shall be of EPDM constructian. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-1 04/26/11 2 3 5 6 8 9 1D 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 C. All replacement valves are to be provided with an actuatar to match the type of the existing actuator and mounted in an identical fa5hion as the existing actuator. 1.03 QUAL.IFICATIONS A. All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be praducts of well-established reputable firms who are fully experienced and qualified in the manufacture of the particular equipment ta be furnished. The �quipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications, as applicable. 1.04 SUBMITTALS I�1 � ! � � �� �� � Complete shop drawings af all valves and appurtenances shall be submitted to � the Engineer for review. 1.05 TOOLS � A. Special tools, if required for normal aperation and maintenance, shall be supplied � with the equipment. 1.06 VALVE INDICES A. The Contractar shall submit a valve schedule containing all valves required for the work. The schedule shall the locati�n, type, a number, words to identify the valve"s function, and the narmal operating pasition for each valve. PART 2 -- PR�DUCTS 2.01 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES A. All plug valves shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with standard ANSI/AWWA C517 Table 1, Resilient-Seated Cast-Iron Eccentric Plug Valves, ofi the lat�st revision unless atherwise specified. MANUFACTURER shall provide affidavit of compliance with AWWA Standard. Valves sha11 be as manufactured by DeZurik, Val-Matic, Homestead or approved equal. B. Plug valves shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C50�4, latest edition. Each valve shall b� performance tested in accordance with Paragraph 5.2 �f the above ref�rence and shall be given a leakage test and hydrastatic test as described in Paragraphs 5.2.2 and 5.2.3 of the above reference. The leakage test shall be applied to the face af the plug tending to unseat the valv�. The manufacturer shall furnish certifi�d copies of reports cavering proof of design testing as described in Section 5.2.� of the above reference. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-2 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1T 18 19 2D 21 22 23 24 25 26 z� 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 �2 43 4� 45 46 47 2.02 C. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated eccentric type with resilient faced plugs and shall be furnished with end connections as shown on the plans. Flanged valves shall be faced and drilled to the ANSI B16.1 125/15Q Ib. standard. Mechanical joint ends shall be in full compliance with ANSI/ AWWA C111/A21.11. Screwed �nds shall be to the NPT standard. D. Valve bodies shall be of ASTM A126 Class B or ASTM A48, Class 40 cast iron_ E. Port areas for valves 20 inches and smaller shall be a minimum of 80 percent of full pipe area. Valves 24-inch and larger shall hav� a minimum port area of 100 percent of full naminal pipe area. F. All expased nuts, bolts, springs, washers, etc., shall be zinc or cadmium plated. Valve plugs shall be constructed of ASTM A-48, Class �40 cast ir�n or ASTM A- 536 ductile iron. Resilient plug facings shall be of Neoprene. �� H Valves shall be furnished with permanently lubricated stainless steel, oil-impregnated branze or non-metallic upper and lawer plug stem bearings. Valve seats shall be either nickel or stainless steel. Epoxy seats are not acceptable. Plug valves greater than 6 inches in diameter shall be supplied with manual gear actuatars unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. J. Shaft seals shall be af the multiple V-ring type with a packing gland fallower. Shaft seals shall be externally adjustable and repackable without rEmaving the actuator or bonnet fram the valve. K. Valves shall have a factory-appli�d, internal and external, fusian bonded epoxy r�sin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all applicable requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard C550-90 entitled "Protectiue Interiar Coatings for Valves and Hydrants". S�.ANTING DISK CHECK VAL.VE (NOT USED) A. Valve body shall be heavy two-piece ASTM A126 Grad� B cast iron. The two (2) body halves and body seat shall be O-ring sealed and bolted together in a mann�r to sandwich the body seat on a 55° angle. Each bady half shall have a covered access hole for internal inspection and each body half and disc shall be fully machined to acc�pt the attachment of a bottom buffer oil dashpot. B. The seat ring and disc ring shall permit replacement in the field withaut need for special taols or machining. Disc and seat ring shall be bronze. The area throughout the valve body must be equal to full pipe area. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 1510D-3 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 zo 21 �2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 C. The pivot pins in the body and the bushings in the disc lugs shall be stainless steel of different hardness to prevent galling. The bushings shall be press fit to prevent wear. D. An indicator shall be pravided to show position of the disc. E. The valve shall have a battom mount�d buffer for free apen and positive non- slam clasing. The buffer shall be designed to contact the disc during the last 10% of clasure and thereaft�r control th� disc clasure until the valve is shut in a manner to minimize ar prevent wat�r hammer. The rate of hydraulic control and the initial point af buffer cantact to the disc closure shall be �xternally adjustable and variable to suit the water column reversal time. The bottom buffer hydraulic system must be self contained and independent from pip�line media to prevent contamination of the media and prot�ct the cylinder against carrosion. The buffer rod, oil reservoir and buffer pneumatic tank shall be stainless steel. F. Valve shall be Apco Series $OOB slanting disc ch�ck valve with bottom mounted buff�r or approv�d equal. 2.03 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Swing check valves shall be constructed with heavy cast iron or cast steel body with a bronze or stainless steel seat ring, and a nancorrosive shaft for attachment afi weight and I�ver. Flanges shall be drilled for ANSI Standard B.16.1, 125 Ib. Class. Check valves shall absolutely prevent the return af water or wastewater back through the valve when the inlet pressure decreases belaw the delivery pressure. B. The valves must be tight seating and must operate without hammer or shock_ The seat ring must be renewable and shall be securely held in place by a threaded joint. C. Check valves shall be the lever and weight type with an adjustable position w�ight and lever arm attached to the disc assembly to allow adjustment of the closure force. D. The valves shall be as manufactured by the Mueller, Kennedy ar approved equal, ' and shall be suitable for harizontal installation. E. The Contractor is responsible for all labor and material casts associated with all work made necessary by the use af replacement check valv�s with lay lengths different than the existing check values. 2.04 TELESCOPING VALVES A. N�w telescapic valve assemblies shall be installed at existing locatians as shown on the Drawings. The valves shall be sized and manufactured to be in-kind VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 1510Q-4 04/26/11 �� �� �l 1 �l � � � 1 replacements for the existing valves that are to be removed, except that the new � valves shall require a manual actuator (electrically operated actuator not 3 required). The new valves shall be mounted and function properly with�ut � 4 requiring modifications to the existing structure or the existing piping. LJ � � � � � � r 1 � l� � � �J i� ' : C The original shop drawing of the existing valves is attached to these specifications in Appendix A. Each valve assembly shall be complet� and include but not be limited ta the following components: • Cast ar ductile iron floor mounting pedestal with offset as required. • Manual, rising stem, rack and pinion lifting mechanism with handwheel and gear reducer. • Stem Rod (stainless steel) • Stem Cover and graduat�d pasition indicator • Stem Guide (branze or UHMW polyethylene) • Bail (stainless steel) • Slip Tube with v-notch (minimum 1/8 thick, 304 Stainless Steel or Brass) � Gasket Retainer and Flange (stainless steel) N�oprene 5plit Gasket D. The slip tube shall be stainless steel and manufactured from seamless tube or pipe with a minimum wall thickness of 1/8-inch. The finish O.D. of the tube shall be �+ 0.04 inches cylindrical runout and have a smaoth 125 micra-inch or better surface. The slip tube shall penetrate the riser pipe a minimum of 9-inches in the up position and have a 48-inch maximum travel range. E. The bail sha!! be rigidly welded to the slip tube and shall be connected to the stem with a flanged type connection and multiple fasteners. F. The handwheel shall be 16-inch minimum diameter cast aluminum, cast iron, or stainless steel and control the pinion shaft via a gear reducer mounted on the pedestal. The lifting mechanism shall provide for infinite adjustment and have an integral locking d�vice to secure th� stem in any positi�n through out the trav�l rang�. The lifting device and gearbox shall comply with the Section 2.04 Valve Actuators af this specification. G. A stainless steel companion flange and double 1/4" thick neaprene wiper gasket shall b� installed at the top of the riser pip�. The I.D. of the gasket shall be 1/8- inch smaller than the D.D. of the tube. The gask�ts shall be of split design, sandwiched between the riser pipe flange and the companion flange, and replaceable withaut removing the slip tube from the riser pipe. The riser pipe flange and the companion flange shall be 150# standard drilling pattern. H. Th� telescoping valve assemblies shall b� manufactured by Envirex (Siemens) or approved equal. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-5 04/2�/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 2.05 RESILIENT SEATED AND RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES A. All gate valves 4 inches to 24 inches in diameter shall be resilient seated or resilient wedge, manufactured ta meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA C515 af latest revision and in accordance with the following Specifications. Valves shall have an unobstructed wat�rway equal to or greater than the full nominal diameter of the valve. B. The valves are to be nan-rising stem with the stem made af cast, forged or rolled branze shawn in AWWA C515. Two stem seals shall be provided and shall be EPDM of the O-ring type, one abave and ane below the thrust collar. C. The sealing mechanism shall consist of a cast iron gate having an EPDM coating, The resilient sealing mechanism shall provide zero leakage at the valve d�sign pressure wh�n installed with the line flow in either direction. D. The valve b�dy, bonnet, and bonnet cover shall be cast iron ASTM A126, Class B. All ferrous surFaces inside and outside shall have a minimum 1 Q mil fusion-bonded epoxy coating. A handwheel or wrench nut complete with all required extensions shall be provid�d for each valve to operating the valve depending upon the application. All Valves are to be tested in strict accordance with AWWA C515. E. Handwheels or chain wheels shall be turned left or counterclockwise to open the valves. Handwheels shall be of ample size and shall have an arrow and th� word OPEN cast thereon to indicate th� direction of opening, F. �/alves shall have a factary-�pplied, internal and external, fusion banded epoxy resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all applicable requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard C550-90 entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants". G. Valves shall be equal to those as manufactured by American, MB�H, Mueller, Kennedy, Clow, ar equal. 2.06 BUTTER�LY VALVES FOR WASTEWATER SERVICE A. Replacement butterfly valves for th� RAS pumps shall be supplied with end � connectians identical to those valves they are replacing. B. Butterfly valves shall meet, exceed, or otherwise conform to the AWWA Standard Specifications for Resilient Seated Butt�rfly Valv�s, Designation C504, except as hereinafter specified. Valves, except as specified hereinafter, shall be Class 150A or B, and equal to those manufactur�d by Bray, Henry Pratt Company, DeZurik, American, Kennedy, Mueller, Ham�stead, ar equal. The valve discs VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-6 Q4/26/11 � 1 1 [ _� � � � shall be canstructed of cast iron canforming to ASTM A-�48, Class 40, ASTM 2 A-126, Class B or ductile iran confarming ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 for Class 3 150 or less. Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 shall be � 4 provided for all Class 250 valves. � � � � � l� � � � � � D. All butterfly valves shall be in accardance with Table 1 and Table 2 af above- mentioned AWWA Specification far short-body valves. Adequate two-way thrust bearings shall b� provided. Flange drilling shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.1. E. Valve seats for flanged valves shall be EPDM synthetic rubber compound. Valve seats 24 inches and larger shall be field adjustable and replaceable without dismounting operator disc or shaft and without remouing the valve from the line. All retaining segments and adjusting d�vices shall be of carrosion resistant material with stainless steel screws and be capable of a 1/8-inch adjustment. Valves 20 inches and smaller shall have bonded or mechanically restrained seats as outlined in AWWA C504 except for the wafer type valv�s. Where elastomer seat is mounted an the valve body, the mating edge of the valve disc shall be 18- 8 stainless steel or Nickel-Chrome, 80-20%. Where elastomer seat is mounted on the valve disc, the valve body shall be fitted with an 18-8 stainless steel seat offset fram the shaft, mechanically restrained and covering 36Q degrees af the peripheral opening or seating surface. F. The valve body shall be canstructed of ductil� iron or close grain cast iron per ASTM A-126, Class B with integrally cast hubs for shaft bearing housings of the through boss-typ�. G. The valve shaft shall b� turned, graund, and polished constructed of 18-8, ASTM A-276, Type 304 stainless steel and d�signed far both torsional and shearing stresses when th� valve is operated under its greatest dynamic or seating torque. Shaft shall be of either a one-piece unit extending full size through the valve disc and valve bearing or it may be of a stub shaft design. Shaft bearings shall be Teflon or nylon, s�lf-lubricated type. H. All vatves shall be subj�ct to hydrostatic and leakage tests at the point of manufacture. Th� valves shall be test�d in conformance with AWWA C-504. 38 I. The manufacturer shall certify that the required tests on the various materials and �39 on the completed valves have been satisfactory and that the valves conform to all �4p r�quirements of the Sp�cifiication and the AWWA standard. � � � �� J T� � Where indicated on the Drawings, extension stems, floorstands, couplings, stem guides and floor boxes, as required, shall be furnished and installed. Valves shall have a factory-applied, internal and external, fusion bonded epoxy resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all applicable VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 151 DO-7 04/26/11 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2Q 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3D 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 4� 41 42 43 44 45 46 2.07 requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard C550-90 entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants". PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES A. Floor type hydrostatic pressure relief valve shall be designed for installing in the floor of concrete tanks and shall be type F-1493 as manufactured by Clow Valve Campany or equal. The valves shall b� design�d to open at a hydrostatic head of 9-inches of wat�r. B. The ass�mbly shall consist of three parts: caver, bady, and grate. All three parts shall be af cast iran confarming to ASTM specifications A-126 Class B. They shall be designed so that neither the cover nor grate can became separated from the bady of the valve, due to ground water pr�ssure around the tank. However, when necessary, both may be �asily removed hy turning them to right or left to free them from locking lugs cast integrally an the inside of the body. � ' 1 � ' l� � C. The seats shall be of Buna-N rubber, bonded ta the cover, mating with a � machined bronze seat in the body. 2.08 BALL VALVES 1 A. PVC ball valves shall be of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC with union, socket, threaded or flanged ends as required. Ball valves shall be full port, full flow, all plastic � construction, 150 psi rated with Teflon seat seals and T-handles. PVC ball valves shall be as manufactured by Spears, Plastiline, Haywa�d, or equal. B. True union, vented, PVC ball valves shall be used on th� chemical clean system and shall be manufactured ta ASTM � 1970 specifications and constructed fram PVC Typ� I, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 1245. All O-rings shall be Latharge Viton. All valves shall have stem with double O-ring seals. All valve handles shall be polyprapylene with built-in lockout mechanism. All valve union nuts shall have Buttress thr�ads. All seal carriers shall be Safe-T-Blocked. All valv� components shall be replaceable. All valves shall be certified by NSF International for use in potable water servic�. All 1/2" through 2" valves shall be pressure rated ta 235 psi, all 2-1/2" through 8" and all flanged valves shall be pressure rated to 150 psi for water at 73° F. Valv�s shall have a vent hol� in the ball to equalize internal fluid pressures. Install valve with ball vent on the pr�ssure (upstream) sid� when in closed position. V�nted ball valves shall be True Union 2000 Industrial Ball Valves as manufactured by Spears, True Unian Z-Ball Valves by Hayward, or Engin�er appraved equal. C_ Bronze, brass or stainless steel ball valves shall be of 2-piece (1" and smaller) or 3-piece (1-1/2" and larger) construction. Valves shall be rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure and 400 psi WOG pr�ssure. Valves shall have stainless steel, bronze or brass body, stainless steel or chrame plated brass ball, VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-5 04/2E/11 C� ' � � � � � � ' � � � � � � L_.� � � � � � i � � � � �� �J � 2 3 4 5 � 7 $ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 3$ 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 4� 47 � replaceable Teflon or TFE seats and seals, blowout proof stem and vinyl covered steel handle. All end connections shall be thr�aded. All valves shall be mounted in such a position that valve positian indicatars are plainly visible when standing on the floar. 2.09 AIR RELEASE VALVES A. The air release valv�s shall be installed as shown on the Construction Drawings. The valv�s shall have a cast iron body cover and baffle, stainless steel float, EPDM seat and stainless steel trim. The fittings shall be threaded. Air release valves shall be equipped with a vacuum ball ar check featur� in arder ta prevent air from �ntering the valve during vacuum conditions. The valves for wastewater and sludge applications shall be Model D-025 as manufactured by A.R.I. or equal. Air release valves for reclaimed and patable water service shall be A.R.I. ModEl D-040-C-VAC or equal. B. A stainless steel or brass ball valve shall be provided on the inlet af all air release valves. 5tainl�ss steel ar brass piping shall be provided for air release valves on pumps. 2.10 COMBINATION AIR AND VACUUM RELEASE VALVES A. The air and vacuum valves for the transfer pump discharge lines shall be installed as shown on th� Construction Drawings. Th� valves shall have a cast iron body caver and baffle, stainless steel flaat, and an EPDM seat. The valves shall be 2" threaded connection. Air and vacuum valves shall be equipped with a baffle ta protect the float from direct contact with the rushing air and water and to prevent the flaat from clasing prt;matureiy in the vaive. Th� valves snall be Model D-040-C as manufactured by A.R.I. or equal. B. A stainless steel ball valve shall be provid�d on the inlet of all air and vacuum valves. 2.11 VALVE ACTUAT�RS A. General 1. All valve actuators shall canform to the latest version of the AWWA Standard Specifications for the respective type of valves and shall be either manual, motor-operated, or air operated and shall match the existing valv� operator. 2. Actuators shall be capable of seating and unseating the disc against the full design pressure and velocity, as specified for each class, into a dry system downstream, and shall transmit a minimum torque to the valve. Actuators shall be rigidly attached ta the valve body. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-9 04/26/11 1 z 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2� 3p 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 3$ 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 : 3. The actuator manufacturer shall be responsible far properly sizing the actuator far the installed pressure conditions. 4. The Contractor is responsible for handling and installing th� valve and actuator in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall replace any damaged actuator without cast ta the Owner. 5. Valves focated seven (7) feet or more above the floor level shall be equipped with an actuator that allaws operation af the valve less than five (5) feet from floor level. Manual aperators shall have a chainwheel and electric actuator shall have a remote mounted control panel. Manual Actuators 1. Manual actuatars shall have permanently lubricated, totally �nclased gearing with handwheel and gear ratia sized an the basis of r�quired opening and closing torque values. Actuators shall be equipped with handwheel, positian indicator, and mechanical stop-limiting locking devices to prevent over travel in the open and closed positians. They shall turn counter-clockwise to open valves. Manual actuators shall be of the traveling nut, self-locking type and shall be designed to hold the valve in any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed without creeping or fluttering. Actuators shall be fully enclosed and designed ta produce the specified tarque with a maximum pull of 80 pounds on the handwhe�l or chainwheel. Actuator components shall withstand an input of 450-foat pounds for 30" and smaller and 300-foot pounds for larger than 3�7" size vaives at extrem� acivator positions withaut damage. Valves located above grade shall have handwheel or chain wheel and positian indicator, and valves located below grade shall be equipped with a 2-inch square AWWA operating nut located at ground level and cast iron extensian type valve box. Valve actuatars shall conform to AWWA C5Q4, latest revision. 2. Handwheels or chainwheels shall be turned left ar counterclockwise to open the valves. Handwheels shall be of ample size and shall hav� an arrow and the word OPEN cast thereon to indicate the direction af opening. 3. Chainwheels shall be provided for valves 6 feet or mar� above the op�rator walkway. Process air piping valves in th� aeration basins shall have actuators and handle extensions to allow actuation of the valve a minimum of 24 inches above the aperatar walkway, 2.12 VAI..VE BOXES VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-10 Q4/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 �o 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 2.13 A. All buried valves shall have cast-iron three-piece valve baxes. Valve boxes shall be provided with suitable heavy bonnets and to extend to such elevation at ar slightly above the finished grade surface, as directed by the Engineer. The barrel shall be twa-piece, sliding type, having 5-1 /�-inch shaft. The upper section shall have a flange at the bottom having sufficient bearing area ta prevent settling and shall be complete with cast iron covers. B. All valves shall have actuating nuts extended within 12 inches of the top of the valve boxes. Valve baxes shall be provided with cancrete base and valve nameplate engraved with lettering 1/8-inch deep as shown on the Construction Drawings. PRESSURE AND VACUUM GAUGES A. All pumps furnished under this cantract shall have pressure/ vacuum gauges installed on their respective suction lines and pressure gauges installed on their discharge lines. All pressure and vacuum gauges furnished under this Contract shall be maunted per manufacturer requirements. B. Each gauge shall be direct mounted, phenolic, shock resistant or 304 stainless steel case with a 4-1/2-inch diameter dial and furnished with a clear glass crystal window, 1/4-inch shut-off valve, and a bronze pressur� snubb�r. Pravide stainless steel diaphragm seals betwe�n shut-off valve and pressure gauge an all lines with unclear matter in suspension of solution. All gauges shall be weatherproofed. The face dial shall be white finished aluminum with jet black graduations and figures. The face dial shall read in units of both pounds per square inch and feet of head. C. Suction gauges shall read from 10 inches of inercury vacuum to 50 feet of head. Discharg� gauges shall read from zero feet of head ta the expected shutoff h�ad of the respective pump. D. Gaug�s shall be as manufactured by H.O. Trerice Co., Marshalltawn Instruments, Dwyer, Ametek, Ashcraft, Helicoid, Wekslar or equal 2.1�4 FLANGE ADAPTER COUPL.INGS I�l :3 Flange adapter cauplings shall be of th� sizes shown on the Drawings. Flange adapter couplings shall have a 150 psi minimum pressure rating. C. All couplings shall be restrained and shall have a sufficient numb�r af anchor studs to me�t or exceed the test pressure rating for this project, 150 psi minimum. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-11 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1$ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3Q 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 4�4 45 4� 47 D. Couplings shall be JCM Model 301 R ar equal. 2.15 FLEXIBLE COl.1PLINGS A. Flexible couplings shall be �ither the split typ� or the sleeve type as shown on the Drawings. B. Split typ� coupling shall be used with all interior piping and with exterior piping as noted on the Drawings. The cauplings shall be mechanical type for radius groove piping. The couplings shall mechanically engage and lock groaved pipe ends in a positive couple and allow for angular deflection and contraction and expansion. C. Couplings shall cansist of malleable iran, ASTM Specification A47, Grade 32510 housing clamps in twa or more parts, a single chlorinated butyl composition s�aling gasket with a"C" shaped cross-section and internal sealing lips projecting diagonally inward, and two ar more oval track head type balts with hexagonal heavy nuts confarming to ASTM Specification A183 and A194 to assembl� the housing clamps. Bolts and nuts shall be hat-dipped galvanized afterfabrication. D. Victaulic type couplings and fittings may be used in lieu of flanged jaints. Pipes shall be radius grooved as specified for use with the Victaulic couplings. Flanged adapter connections at fittings, valves, and equipment shall be Victaulic Vic Flange Style 741, equal by Gustin-Bacon Group, Division of Certain-Teed Products, Kansas City, Kansas or equal. E. 5leeve type couplings shall be used with all buried piping. The couplings shall be of steel and shall be Dresser Styl� 38 or 40, as shown on the Drawings, or equal. The co;.rpling sha!I be pr���i�+ed with hat dipped galvaniz�d steel b�ltv and nuts unless indicated otherwise. F G H All couplings shall be furnished with the pipe stap removed. Couplings shall be provided with gaskets of a camposition suitable for exposur� to the liquid within the pipe. If the Contractor decides to use victaulic cauplings in li�u of flanged joints, he shall be responsible for supplying supports for the joints. 2.16 Ql11CK CONNECT COUPLINGS A. Quick cannect couplings shall be Model 633-E hose shank adapter and Model 633-C has� shank coupler as manufactured by Dover Corporation �PW Division, Cincinnati, Ohio, Ever-tite Coupling Ca., Inc., New York, New York, or equal. 2.1i ��EXIBLE TYPE EXPANSION JOINTS VALVES AND APPURTENAN.CES 15100-12 04/26/11 1 � 1 � � � � �� �I �J � � � � ,� � �' i � 1 A. Expansion joints shall be manufactured of molded EPDM rubber with filled arches and wire reinforcement. Joints shall b� reinfarced with baked enamel ductile iron or split galvanized steel retaining rings placed directly against the inside of the flange to prev�nt dam�ge to the rubber surface when the bolts are tightened. Flanges shall be drilled to ANSI 150#. Rated working pressure shall be 150 psi. Retaining rings, contral rads, bolts, nuts, and washers shall be coated according to Section 09900 or shall be 304 or 316 stainless steel. B. Jaints shall be rated for a minimum operating t�mperature of 180°F. C. Tapered expansion joints shall be �ccentric, single arch, and shall be capable of a 1/2" maximum lat�ral deflection. Double arch expansion joints shall be required where called aut on the drawings. D. Joints shall be provided and installed with the manufacturer's standard cantrol rods. Total joint deflection shall not exceed the manufactur�r's recommended maximum. Joints shall be installed in neutral position. E. Expansion joints shall be Mercer Series FER, Proco, Red Valve Redflex, or equal. 2.18 UNIONS A. Unions on ferrous pipe 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be 150 pounds malleable iron, zinc-coated. Unions on water piping 2-1/2 inches in diameter and larger shall be flange pattern, 125-pound class, zinc-coated. Gaskets far flanged unions shall bE of the best quality EPDM. Unions shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, ar partitions. ' : : ���:/xrl��r[�]►J 3.01 INSTALLATI�N A. All valves and appurtenances shall be installed in the locations shown, true to alignment and rigidly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer before they ar� installed. B. After installatian, all valves and appurtenances shall be tested at least 2 hours at the working pressure corresponding to the class of pipe, unless a different test pr�ssure is specified. If any joint proves to be d�fective, it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Install all floor boxes, brackets, �xtension rods, guides, the various types of operatars and appurtenances as shawn on the Drawings ihat are in masonry floors or walls, and install cancrete inserts for hangers and supports as soon as farms are erected and before concrete is poured. B�fare setting these it�ms, the VAI�VES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-13 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2$ 29 30 31 32 33 3� 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 �3 44 �45 46 Contractor shall check all plans and figures which have a direct bearing on their locatian and he shall be responsible far th� proper location of these valves and appurtenances during the construction of the structures. D. Pipe for use with flexible couplings shall have plain ends as specified in the respective pipe sections in Division 15. E. Flanged joints shall be made with high strength, low alloy Corten bolts, nuts and washers. Mechanical joints shall be made with mild corrosion resistant alloy steel bolts and nuts. All exposed bolts shall be painted the same color as the pip�. All buried bolts and nuts shall be heavily coated with twa (2) coats (14-20 mils DFT) of bituminous paint camparable to Carboline Bitumastic 300M, Tnemec Series 46H-413 Tneme-Tar, or approved equal. F. Prior to assembly of split couplings, the grooves, as well as ath�r parts, shall be thoraughly cleaned. The ends of the pipes and outside of the gaskets shall be moderately coated with petroleum jelly, cup greas�, soft soap or graphite paste, and the gasket shall be slipped over ane pipe end. After the other pipe has been brought to the correct position, the gasket shall be centered properly over the pipe ends with the lips against the pipes. The housing sectians then shall be placed. After the bolts have been inserted, th� nuts shall be tightened until the housing sectians are firmly in c�ntact, metal-to-metal, without excessive bolt tension. G. Prior to the installation of sleeve-type couplings, the pipe ends shall be cleaned thoraughly for a distance of 8 inches. Soapy water may be used as a gasket lubricant. A follower and gasket, in that order, shall be slipped over each pipe to a distance of about 6 inches from th� end, and the middle ring shall be placed on the substantial completion date unless otherwise requested by the Owner. H. Valve boxes with concrete bases shall be installed as shown on the Construction Drawings. Mechanical joints shall be made in the standard manner. Valve stems shall be vertical in all cases. Place cast iron box over each stem with base bearing on compacted fill and top flush with final grade. Boxes shall have sufficient bracing to maintain alignment during backfilling. Knabs on cover shall be parallel to pipe. Remave any sand or undesirable fill from valve box. 3.02 SHOP PAINTING A. Ferrous surfaces of above ground valves and appurtenances to be painted shall receive a coating of rust-inhibitive primer compatible to paint system specified in Section Q9900. All pipe cann�ctian openings shall be capped to prevent the �ntry of foreign matter prior to installation. 3.03 FIELD PAINTING A: All m�tal valves and appurtenances specified h�rein and exposed ta view, except VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-1 � 04/26/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ 9 1Q 11 ball valves, shall be painted as part of the work in S�ction 09900. 3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Completed pipe shall be subjected to a hydrastatic pressure and leakage in accordance with Section 01625. All leaks shall be repaired and lines retested. Prior to testing, the pipelines shall be supported in an approved manner to prevent movement during tests. END OF SECTION VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 151 D�-15 [�Zlf��yl�fil 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK VALVES AND APPURTENANCES � 1510Q-16 04/26/11 � 1 „ �� � � �J � � ' ' � 1 �J 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16010 BASIC �LECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specificatian sections, apply to work of this Section. 1�1y�il�]�1�•'� A. The work shall be in confarmance with the latest adapted version of the following: NFPA 70 Natianal Electric Cade FBC Florid� Building Cade B. The installation shall also comply with all applicable rules and regulations of lacal and state laws and ordinances. Include in the work, without extra cost, any labor, materials, services, apparatus and drawings required to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations. Infarm the engineer of any work or materials which canflict with any of the applicable cades, standards, laws, and regulatians before submitting their bid. `�iX���l�Lt]:dl� 0 : Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connect�d. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 15 for rough-in requirements. 1.0�4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: A. Existing services shall nat be interrupted withaut priar cons�nt of the owner's authorized representative and may be interrupted only at, and for, the specific time d�signated by the owner's authorized representative. B. Make a tharough examination af the site and the contract documents. No claim for extra compensatian will be recognized if difficulties are encountered which an examination of site conditians and contract documents prior to executing contract would have revealed. C. Caordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components. BASIC EI..�CTRICAL REQUIREMENTS BID DOCUMENTS 15q1� - 1 4/25/11 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 zz 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 �❑ � Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building component5 to allow for el�ctrical installations_ F. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to b� set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural compon�nts, as they are constructed. Sequenc�, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the wark. Give parkicular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior ta closing-in the building. 1 1 ' � , ' G. Coardinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation af electrical equipment and materials. ' H. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipm�nt components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Coordin�te the installation of electrical materials and equipment above ceilings with suspensi�n system, mechanical equipment and systems, and structural companents. J. Temporary electrical service and construction lighting shall be provided under this sectian. Pravide for all electrical service for construction period, making all connections and removal of same at job conclusion. Furnish and install temparary lighting for construction period. At job completion, all temporary lamps shall be removed and replaced with new lamps. K. All �xisting and new conduit/raceways within the project area shall be properly suppart�d. Add support to �xisting conduit as required to comply with the NEC. 1.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING: � .� C Refer to the Division 1 Section: CUTTING AND PATCHING for general requirements for cutting and patching. Do not endanger ar damage installed work through pracedures and processes of cutking and patching. Arrange for repairs required to restore other wark because of damage caused as a result of electrical installations. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS BID D�CUM�NTS 16010 - 2 4/25/11 ' ' ' 1 � ' , 1 [:� �1 , � 1 1 �J � , 1 LJ 2 3 5 6 $ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 z� z� 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 3�4 35 36 37 3$ 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 D E Na additional compensation will be autharized for cutting and patching work that is necessitated by ill�timed, defective, or non-canforming installations. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to: 1 2 3 4 5 6 Uncaver work to pravide for installation of ill-timed work. Remove and replace defective work. Remove and replace work not canfarming to requirements af the contract documents. Remove samples of installed work as specified far testing. Install equipment and mat�rials in existing structures. Upon written instructions from the engineer, uncover and restore work to provide for engine�r abservation of conc�aled work. F. Cut, remove and legally dispose of, selected electrical equipment, comp�nents, and materials as indicated; including, but not limited to, remQVal of electrical items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the new work. �� W Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled ta be remaved. Frovide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent ar�as. Locate, identify, and protect electrical services passing through remodeling or demolition area and serving ather areas required to be maintained operational. When transit services must be interrupted, pravide temporary services for the affected areas and notify the owner prior to changeover. 1.06 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS: A. Refer ta the Conditions of the Cantract (G�n�ral and Supplementary) and Division 1 Section: SHOP DRAWINGS, PR�DUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES for submittal definitions, requirements, and procedures. B. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accept�d anly when submitted by the contractor. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the engineer will not be processed. BA51C ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS BID DOCUMENTS 16Q1Q - 3 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2Q 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2$ 29 3Q 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 4�4 45 46 1.07 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS: Refer ta the Instructions to Bidders and the Division 1 S�ction: PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTION far requirements in selecting praducts and requesting substitutians. 1.08 PRODUCT LISTING: I�1 I:� Prepare listing of majar electrical equipment and materials for the project 5ubmit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in the Division 1 Section: PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS. C. When two or more items of the same material or equipment are required, they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity daes not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, wire, conduit, fittings, sheet metal, st�el bar stock, welding rads, solder, fasten�rs, motors for dissimilar equipment units, and similar items used in work, except as atherwise indicated. � E � Provide products which ar� compatible within systems and other connected items. No substitution will be considered unless written request has been submitted to the engine�r at least ten (10) days prior to the date far receipt of bids. If the engineer approves any praposed substitutians, such approval will be set farth in an addendum. 1.09 ❑ELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver praducts to project praperly identified with names, madel numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and pratected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling. B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless aff-site storage is authorized in writing, Protect stored equipment and materials from damage. ' C. Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize canstruction site cangestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow af installation. 1.10 RECORD D�CUMENTS: A. Refier to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSE�UT or PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS for requirements. The following paragraphs BASIC �LECTRICAI. REQUIREMENTS BID DOCUMENTS 16010 - 4 4/25/11 � ' C. � , 1 � 1 �J ' ' �J ' 1 1 ' C� ' 'rJ � , 1 � l] 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2$ 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 supplement the requirements of Division 1. B. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to conduit size and location, bath exterior and interi�r; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; concealed equipment, dimensioned to calumn lines; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements; support and hang�r details; change orders; concealed control system d�vices. C 0 Mark Specifications ta indicate approved substitutions; change orders; actual equipment and materials used. Contractor shall provide engineer with recard drawings (AutoCAD compatible file format) and one set af blueprints. 1.11 WARRANTIES: A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: SPECIFIC WARRANTIES far procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requir�ments. B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 16 inta a separated set of vinyl- covered, three-ring binders, tabulat�d and indexed for easy reference. C. Pravid� complete warranty information for each item to include product ar equipment; date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephane numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. 1.12 CLEANING: A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSE�UT or FINAL CLEANING for general requirements for final cleaning. END OF SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS BID D�CUMENTS 16010 - 5 4/25/11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 ' � ' 1 , 1 , ' ' 1 , 1 1 ' 1 ' , BASIC EL�CTRICAL R�QUIR�MENTS BID DOCUMENTS 16�10 - 6 4/25/11 ' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 za 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 sECTioN � �� � o RACEWAYS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 RELATED D�CUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sectians, apply to work of this Sectian. B. This Section is a Divisian 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methads section and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical raceways specified herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of rac�way work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types af raceways specified in this section include the following: Heavy Wall Aluminum PVC Schedule 80 Liquid-tight flexible PVC coated metal conduit Rigid nonmetallic conduit 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems of typ�s and sizes require, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least three (3) years af successful installation experience an projects with electrical raceway work similar ta that required for this project. C. Codes and Standards: 1. UL Complianc� Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL safety standards pertaining ta electrical raceway systems. Pravid� raceway products and camponents which have been UL. listed and labeled. RACEWAYS 1611p - 1 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1� 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 4D �l 1 42 43 44 45 46 47 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDl.11T AND TUBING A. General: Provide aluminum condui#, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thickness) far each service indicated. B_ Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection d�termined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable portions af NEC for raceways. C � Rigid aluminum Conduit: Pravide rigid aluminum, heavy wall, threaded type. Liquid-Tight Flexible Non-metallic Conduit: Provide liquid-tight flexible non-metallic canduit for all motor cann�ctions. E. Conduit Fittings: Couplings and connectors for conduit �iz�s 2" and smaller shall be aluminum hex-nut, expansion-gland type. Aluminum set screw type fittings may be used for conduit sizes 2�/z" and larger. 2.02 NONMETALI.IC C�NDUIT AND DUCTS A. General: Provide nonm�tallic conduit, ducts and fittings of types, sizes and weights for each service indicated. Where types and grades are nat indicated, provide proper selectian determined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements which comply with provisions for NEC for raceways. B. Electrical Plastic Conduit: 1. Heavy Wall Canduit: Schedule 8Q, 90°C, UL-rated, constructed of Schedule S0, 90 polyvinyl chloride. For direct burial, UL listed and in conformity with NEC Article 347. C. Conduit and Tubing Accessories: Provide conduit, tubing and duct accessori�s of types, sizes and materials, complying with manufacturer's published product information, which mate and match conduit and tubing. D. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast-m�tal conduit bodies of types, shapes and sizes as required to fulfill jab requirements and NEC requirements. Construct canduit bodies with threaded conduit-entrance ends, removable covers, either cast or galvanized steel and corrosion- resistant screws. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.�1 OBSERVATION RAC EWAYS 16110 - 2 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 ' ' � � � ' , ' ' �J ' IJ 1 � ' 1 ' 1 1 2 3 5 6 8 9 1Q 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2� 27 28 2� 3a 31 32 33 34 35 36 3i 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 A. Examine areas and conditions under which raceways are to be installed and substrate which will support raceways. Notify contractor in wiring of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. �o not praceed with work until unsatisfactory canditions have been correct�d in manner acceptable to installer. 3.D2 INSTAL.LATION OF RACEWAYS A. General: Raceways run below grade, under flaors on grade or in concrete shall be PVC heavy wall type (Schedule 80) conduit, provided rigid aluminum conduit is used on elbows and risers to boxes, cabinets, etc. B. Sizes of raceways shall be not less than NEC requirem�nts and shall not in any case be less than indicated on drawings. Larger size raceways and/or pull boxes shall be installed if th�r� is excessive length unbrok�n run or excessive number of bends. Combining of circuits other than thase indicated on the drawings will not be permitted. C. Caordinate with other work, including wir�s/cables, boxes and panel work as nec�ssary to interfac� installatian of electrical raceways and comp�nents with other work. 1. Avoid use of similar passibility of electrolysis coast surfaces with assembling. metals thraughout system to eliminate . Where dissimilar m�tals are in contact, corrosion inhibiting compound before 2. Use roughing-in dimensions of electricaiiy operated unit Turnisned by supplier. Set conduit and boxes for connectian tv units only after receiving review of dimensions and aft�:r checking location with ather trades. 3. Provide nylon pullcard in empty conduits where indicated. Test all empty conduits with ball mandrel. Clear any canduit which rejects ball mandrel. Pay costs involved for restaration af conduit and surrounding surfaces to original condition. 4. Use liquid-tigh# flexible conduit wher� subjected to one or more of the following canditions: a b c. d. Exterior location. Maist or humid atm�sphere where candensate can be expected to accumulate. Corrosive atmosphere. Subjected to water spray ar dripping oil, water or grease. RACEWAYS 16110 -- 3 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25111 1 2 3 4 5 E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2Q 21 22 23 24 25 26 2i 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 D E F. G H J K. Cut conduits straight, ream properly and cut threads for heavy wall conduit deep and clean. F�ield-bend canduit with benders designed for purpose so as not to distort nor vary internal diameter. F�asten conduit terminations in sheet metal enclasures by twa (2) locknuts and terminate with bushing. Install lock nuts inside and outside enclosure. Conduits are not to cross pip� shafts or ventilating duct openings. K�ep canduits a minimum distance of 6" from parallel runs of flues, hot water pipes or other sources of heat. Do not install harizontal raceway runs below water and steam piping. Support riser canduit at each floor level with clamp hangers. Use af running threads at canduit joints and terminations is prahibited. Where required, us� 3-piece union or split couplings. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/wires within raceways. L. Concealed Conduits: 1. 2. 3. 4. Metallic raceways installed undergraund or in floors below grade, or outside ar� to have conduit threads painted with corrosian-inhibiting compound befare couplings are assembled. Draw up coupling and conduit sufficiently tight to ensure water tightness. Far floors-on-grade, install conduits under concrete slab. Install underground canduits a minimum of 24" below finished grade. All conduits installed belaw grade or under concrete slab to be minimum of 1 inch. M. Canduits in Concrete 51ab: 1. Place conduits betw�en bottom reinfarcing steel and tap reinforcing steel. Place conduits either parallel ar at 90° to main reinfarcing ste�l. 2. Separate conduits by not less than diameter of largest conduit to ensure proper concrete bond. RACEWAYS BID DOCUMENTS 16110 - 4 4/25/11 N O 3 n Canduits crossing in slab must be reviewed for proper cover by engineer. Embedded conduit diameter is not to exceEd ane-third (1/3) of slab thickness. Install conduits as not to damage or run thr�ugh structural members. Avoid horizontal or cross runs in building partitions or side walls. Exposed Conduits: 1 � Install expos�d conduits and extensions fram concealed conduit systems neatly, parallel with or at right angles to walls of building. Install exposed conduit work as not to interfere with c�iling inserts, lights or ventilation ducts or outlets. 3. Support Expased conduits by use of hangers, clamps or clips. Suppart conduits minimum of 18" on each side of bends and outlet box�s and an spacing nat to exceed 8'-0". C! �� Run conduits for outlets on waterpraof walls expased. Set anchars for supporting conduit on waterproof wall in waterproof cement. Abave requirements for exposed conduits also apply to conduits installed in space above hung ceilings and in crawl spaces. P. Non-�Vietaiiic Conauits: 1 2 Make solvent cemented joints in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer. Install PVC conduits in accordanc� with NEC and in compliance with local utility practices. Q. Conduit Fittings: 1. Construct locknuts far securing conduit to metal enclosure with sharp edge for digging into metal and ridged outside circumference for proper fastening. 2. Bushings for terminating conduits smaller than 1" and are to have flared battom and ribbed sides, with smaath upper edges to prevent injury to cable insulation. RACEWAYS BID DOCUM�NTS 16110 - 5 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 3. Install insulated type bushings for terminating conduits 1" and larger. Bushings are to have flared bottom and ribbed sides. Upper edge to have phenolic insulating ring molded into bushing. 4. Bushing of standard ar insulated type to have screw type graunding terminal. 5. Miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece unions, split couplings and plugs to be specifically designed for their particular application. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Mechanically assemble metal enclosures and raceways far conductors to form continuous electrical conductor and cannect to electrical boxes, fiittings and cabinets as to provide effective electrical continuity and rigid mechanical assembly. B. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughaut system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Wher� dissimilar metals are in contact, coat all surfaces with corrosion-inhibiting compound befare assembling. C. Install expansion fittings in all raceways wher�ver structural expansian joints are crossed. ' D. Make changes in directian of raceway run with proper fittings supplied by raceway manufacturer. No field bends of raceway sections will be ' permitted. E. Properly suppart and anchor raceways far their entire length by structural ' materials. Raceways are not to span any spac� unsupported. F. Use boxes as supplied by raceway manufacturer wherever junction, pull, or device boxes ar� required. Standard �lectrical "handy" boxes, etc. shall not be permitted far use with surFace raceway installations. G. Raceway penetrations of fire-rated walls and/or floars shall be sealed to maintain integrity af construction. All products, materials and methods of installation shall b� UL approved and meet NFPA requirements. H. Unless otherwise noted an drawings, natified by engineer and/or authorities having jurisdictian, the following materials may be used: 1. Rock Wool: Minimum four pound cubit foot density; flame spread 15, smoke d�veloped 0, fuel contribution 0 by ASTM 3$4; minimum melting point 2000°F. RACEWAYS 16110 - 6 � I� 1 r� L� � �_ ' I� L. BID DQCUMENTS 4/25/11 ' 2. Concr�t� and masonry ar� also approved firestop materials by NFPA 90A. 3. UL approved products such as Nelsan Type CLK Silicon Sealant. Manufacturer's recommendatians shall be strictly followed. Submit camplete data on fire-stopping materials and construction methods for review by engineer before prQCeeding with work. �N❑ OF SECTION 16110 RAC�WAYS BID DOCUMENTS 16110 - 7 4/25/11 1 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK � 1 L_..� l� �� ' 1 , 1 1 , L� , � 1 ' � RACEWAYS BID DOCUMENTS 16110 - 8 4/25/11 ' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ 9 1p 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 � 27 28 2y 3Q 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 3$ 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general pravisions of Cantract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specificatian sections, apply to work of this Section. B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methads section, and is part af each Division 1E s�ctian making reference to wires and cables specified her�in. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: I� '-�. C� Extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Types of electrical wir�, cable, and connectors specified in this Section include the fallowing: Copper canductars Fixture wires_ Split-bolt connectors Wirenut connectars Applications of electrical wire, cable, and connectors required for praj�ct are as follows: 1. For power distribution circuits 2. For lighting circuits 3. �or motor-branch circuits 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufactur� af electrical wire and cable products of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing electrical wiring and cabling wark similar to that required for this project. WIRES AND CABLES BID DOCUMENTS 1fi120 - 1 4/25/11 2 3 5 6 $ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3Q 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 ` 1 �, C � NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to � construction, installation, and color;coding of electrical wires and cables. D. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEE� Stds. 82, "Test Procedur�s for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Canductors", and Std. 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to wiring systems. E. ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM B1, 2, 3, 8 and D-753. Provide copper canductors with conductivity af not less than 98% at 20°C (68°�). F. The following systems af color-coding shall be strictly adhered ta: Ground�d Leads Green Grounded Neutral Leads White 277/480 Volt, Ungrounded Phase Wires Brown, Orange and Yellow 120/208 Volt, Ungrounded Phase Wires Red, Blue, Black , � 1 1 , G. The color cade assigned to each phase wire shall be consistently followed 1 throughaut. H. Where existing base building colar-cading differs from calor-cading assign�d herein. Contractor shall use existing colar coding as required ta maintain consistency. Advise engineer in writing of calor-coding to be used. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: I_1 :. Deliv�r wire and cable properly packaged in tactory-fabricated type containers, or wound on NEMA specified type wire and cable reels. Store wire and cable in clean dry space in original c�ntainers. Protect praducts from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic. C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrading, puncturing and tearing wire and cable insulatian and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of wires/cables is maintained. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Building Wires: A. Provid� factory-fabricated wires of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials for applications and services indicated. WIRES AND CABLES BID DOCUMENTS 16120 - 2 4/25/11 , � i �J � � � �� �� r� � r-, I� �� � � � � � 1 1...��� 1 2 3 5 6 8 9 1Q 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 �0 41 42 43 44 45 �6 B. Conductar insulation shall be dual type THHN/THWN 75°C (167°F) for dry, damp, and wet locations. Conductor insulation with single type marking THHN 90°C (194°F) may be used for dry locatians only. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES: A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and wiring connectors as indicated, in compliance with applicabl� r�quirements af NEC, NEMA, UL, and NECA"s "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. Unless otherwise noted, all branch circuit canductors shall be No. 12 AWG. Branch circuits over 75 feet in length shall be Na. 10 AWG unless noted atherwise_ C �❑ E F C� Install UL Type THWN or THHN wiring in conduit, f�r feeders and branch circuits. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use pulling compound ar lubricant, where nec�ssary. Compound used must not deteriarate conductor or insulation. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cabl�, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips which will not damag� cables or raceway. Keep conductor splices ta minimum. H. Install splices and tapes which possess equival�nt-or-better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductars being spliced. Us� splices and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor mat�rial. 3.02 FIEL.D QUALITY CONTROL: A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed feeder wires and cables with megohm meter to determine insulatian resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. A list af fe�d�rs tested shall be submitted ta the engineer indicating the insulation resistance level for each cable. B. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits. WIR�S AND CABL�S BID DOCUMENTS 16120 - 3 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 � C. Subsequent ta wir� and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirem�nts. Where necessary, correct malfiunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES 16120 - 4 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 � � 1 � � � � � , � �I LJ , � � � L� � � 1 z 3 5 6 $ 9 1p 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 SECTION 16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED D�CUMENTS: A. Drawings and general pravisions of Cantract, including General and 5uppl�mentary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to wark of this Section. B_ This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical wiring boxes and fittings specifi�d herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: n : Extent of electrical box and associated fitting work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Types of el�ctrical boxes and fittings specified in this Section include the follawing: Outlet baxes. Junction box�s. Pull boxes. 1.03 QUALI i Y ASSur��NCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engag�d in the manufacture of electrical baxes and fittings af types, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar servic� for not less than three (3) yea rs. B, Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least three (3) years of successful installatian experience an projects utilizing electrical boxes and fittings similar to those required for this project. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings. D. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 50, UL 514- Series, and UL 886 per�aining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide electrical boxes and fittings which are UL listed and labeled. ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, AND RACEWAYS BID DOCUMENTS 16135 - 1 4/25/11 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATED MATERIALS: A. Outlet Boxes: Provide aluminum outlet wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes (including box depths as indicated), suitable far installation at respective lacatians. Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes and with cable and canduit-size knockout openings in bottom and sides_ 1. Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet bax accessories as required for each installation; including box supports, maunting ears and brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet baxes being used to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situatians. B. Device Boxes: Provide aluminum, non-gangable device boxes; af shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes (including bax depths as indicated), suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct device boxes for flush mounting with maunting holes, and with cable-size knackout openings in bottom and ends and with threaded screw holes in end plates for fastening devices. Pravide cable clamps and carrasion-resistant screws for fastening cable clamps and for equipment type grounding. 1. Device Bax Accessories: Pravide device bax accessories as r�quired for each installation; including mounting brackets, device bax extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and plaster board expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with d�vice boxes being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations. 2. Flush mounted wall outlets shall be 4" square baxes or gang boxes, not less than 1'/z" deep. Baxes shall be provided with extension rings and/or covers with sufficient depth to bring the covers flush with the finished wall. 3. Box�s for flush mounting in concrete block work with ane or two devices shall have covers with square corners on the raised partion of the caver. The covers shall have a sufficient amount of depth to be flush with the face of the block. The bottom side of the covers or boxes shall be installed at the masonry course nearest to the dimension specified or noted. ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, AND RACEWAYS BID DOCUMENTS 16135-2 4/25/11 ' L.� � i � � � � � � i �J � � � r � � [J � ' �. Outlet boxes for expased wall mounting and outdoor installation shall be cast aluminum boxes with suitable cast aluminum covers. Weatherproof receptacle covers shall have spring hinged lids. C. Rain-Tight Outlet Baxes: Pravide corrosion-resistant, cast-aluminum, rain- tight autl�t wiring boxes; of types, shapes and sizes (including depth of boxes), with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit, cast- aluminum face plates with spring-hinged watertight caps suitably configured for each applicatian, including face plate gaskets and corrosion- r�sistant plugs and fasteners. D. Junction and Pull Boxes: Pravide aluminum junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective lacation and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainl�ss steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. All junction boxes shall be designated with permanent marker circuit numbers and panelboard numbers of circuits contained within. PART 3 - EXECIJTION 3.01 INSTALL.ATION �F ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS: A. General: Install electrical baxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, and in accardanc� with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. : C Ir� Coardinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable, wiring devic�s, and raceway installation wark. Provide weather-tight outlets for interior and exteriar locations exposed to weather or moisture. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been remaved. E. Install electrical boxes in thase locations which ensure ready accessibility to enclased electrical wiring. All existing and new junction boxes within the project area shall be made accessible. Relocate existing junction baxes as required to camply with the NEC. F. Metallic and approved nonmetallic el�ctrical outl�t boxes may be installed in v�rtical fire reSistive assemblies classified as 2-hour or less without affecting the fire classification, pravided such apenings occur an one side only in each framing space and that openings do not exceed 16 square inches. Boxes located opposite sides af walls or partitions shall be separated by a horizontal distance of 24". �LECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, AND RACEWAYS BID DOCUMENTS 16135 - 3 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 G. In openings larger than 16 square inches, the wall shall be built around �penings so as not ta int�rfere with the integrity of the wall rating. H. All clearances between such boxes and the gypsum board shall be completely filied with joint compound or other approved material. I. Position recessed outlet boxes accurat�ly to allow far surface finish thickness. J. 5et floor boxes levei and flush with finish flooring material. K. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly ta substrates, or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. L. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect baxes from constructian debris and damage. END OF SECTION 16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, AND RACEWAYS �ID DOCUMENTS 16135 - 4 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 �5 46 yx���.�.rt:�« ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS F�R EQUIPMENT ' _ : -�iQ�7�►1.�:L•� 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specificatian sectians, apply to wark af this Section. B. This 5ectian is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical connections for equipm�nt specified herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of electrical cannections far equipment is indicated by drawings and schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defin�d to include connectians used for providing electrical power to equipment. B, Electrical connections for equipment, nat furnished as integral part of equipment, are specified in other Division 16 sections, and are w�rk of this Section. C. Motor starters and contrallers nat furnished as integral part of equipment are specifi�d in applicable Division 16 sections and are work of this Seciian. D. Junction boxes and disc�nnect switches required for connecting motors and o#her electrical units of equipment ar� sp�cifi�d in applicable Division 16 sections, and are work af this Section. E. Electrical identification for wire/cable conductors is specified in Divisian 16 section, "Electrical Identification", and is work af this Section. �. Raceways and wires/cables required for connecting motors and other electrical units of equipment ar� specified in applicable Division 16 sections, and are work of this Sectian. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms r�gularly engaged in manufacture of electrical cannectors and terminals, of types and ratings required, and ancillary connection materials, including electrical insulating tape, saldering fluxes, ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT �ID DOCUM�NTS 16142 - 1 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 and cable ties; whose products have been in satisfactory u5e in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least two (2) years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing electrical connections for equipment similar to that required for this praject. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEC as to type products used and installation af electrical power connections (terminals and splices) far junctian boxes, motor start�rs, and disconnect switches. D, UL Compliance: Comply with UL Std 486A, "Wire Conn�ctors and Saldering Lugs for Use With Capper Conductors" including, but not limited to, tightening of electrical connectars to torque values indicated. Provide electrical connection products and materials which are UI� listed and labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: A. General: �ar each �lectrical connection indicated, provide complete assembly of materials; including, but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tap�, cable ties, solderless wir�nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations of types indicated. Metal shall not be used for outdoar applications. The cantractor shall use aluminum for autdoor instaiiations. B. Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings, Gen�ral: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) indicated for each type service. Wher� types and grades ar� not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with NEC requirements for raceways. Provide products complying with Division 16 Basic Electrical and in accordance with the following listing af inetal conduit, tubing and fittings: Rigid aluminum conduit. Rigid metal conduit fittings. Electrical m�tallic tubing. EMT fittings. Flexible metal conduit. Flexible metal conduit fittings. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. Liquid-tight flexibl� metal conduit fittings. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16142 - 2 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 � � C.� �� � C. Wir�s, Cables, and Cannectors: 1. General: Provide wires, cabl�s, and cannectors complying with Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials And Methads section "Wires and Cables". �9 2. Wires/Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/cables 10 (conductors) for electrical connections which match (including sizes 11 and ratings) wires/cabl�s which are supplying electrical pawer. �12 Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 13 2Q°C (68°F). r L� L� w� � ' D. Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and terminals which mate and match (including sizes and ratings) with equipment terminals, and are r�commend�d by equipment manufacturer for intended applicatians. PART 3 -- EXECUTI�N 3.01 OBSERVATION: A. �bserve area and conditions under which electrical cannections for equipment are ta be installed and notify contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to prop�r completion of th� work. Do n�t proceed with the wark until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION �F ELECTRICAL C�NNECTI�NS: 32 A. Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with equipment �33 manufacturer's written instructions, with recognized industry practices, and 34 complying with applicable requirements of UL and NEC to ensure that 35 praducts fulfill requirements. � ' � L__ � � L. � B. Coordinate with ather work, including wires/cables, raceway, and equipment installation as necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connectians for �quipment with ather work. C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductars in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connectians for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed �quipment. ELECTRICAL CONN�CTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT BID DOCUMEN7S 16142 - 3 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1i 1$ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 3$ 39 40 41 42 �3 44 45 D. Maintain existing electrical service and feeders to accupied areas and operational facilities unless atherwise indicated, or when authorized otherwise in writing by owner ar engineer. Provide temporary service during interruptions to existing facilities. When necessary, schedule momentary autages far replacing existing wiring systems with new wiring systems. When that "cutting-over" has been successfully accomplished, remove, relocate, or abandon existing wiring as indicated. E. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, �r of greater insulation resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced. F. Prepare cables and wir�s by cutting and stripping covering armor, jack�t, and insulatian properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning wir�. G W Trim cabl�s and wires as shart as practicable and arrang� routing to facilitate insp�ction, testing, and maintenance. Provide flexible conduit for motor connections and other electrical equipment connections where subject to movement and vibration. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit for connection of matars and other electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration; and also where connections are subjected ta ane or more of the following conditions: 1. Exterior location. 2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate. 3. Corrosive atmasphere. 4. Water spray. 5. Dripping oil, grease, or water. 3.03 FIELD QUAL.ITY CONTROL: A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source, test connections to demonstrate capability and campliance with r�quirements. Ensure that direction of rotation of �ach motor fulfills requirem�nt. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 16142 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPM�NT 16142 - 4 BID DOCUM�NTS 4/25/11 � 1 z 3 4 5 6 7 $ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2$ 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 4� 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 SECTION 16143 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Cantract, including General and Supplementary Conditians and Divisian 1 Specification sectians, apply to work of this Section. B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part af each Divisian 16 section making referenc� to wiring devices specified herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems which are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy. B. Types of el�ctrical wiring d�vices in this section include the fallowing: Receptacles. Ground-fault circuit interrupters. 5witches. Wallplates. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wiring devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years. B. Installer's C2ualifications: Firm with at least two (2) years of successful installation exp�rience an projects utilizing wiring devices similar to those required for this proj�ct. r� NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and wiring of electrical wiring devices. UL Compliance: Provide wiring devices which are UL listed and labeled. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devic�s. WIRING D�VICES 16143 - 1 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3D 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.D1 ACCEPTAB�E MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers; Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers providing wiring devices which may be incorparat�d in the work include; but are not limited to, the fallawing (for each type and rating of wiring device): Arrow-Har�, Caoper Industries Bryant Electric, Inc. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. Harvey Hubbell Inc. Pass and Seymour Inc. Leviton Manufacturing Co. Inc. 2.02 FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES: A. General: Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated and which comply with NEMA Stds. Pub/No. WD1. Provide ivory color devices exc�pt as otherwise indicated. :. C Receptacles: 1. All receptacles shall be the grounding type with ground connection made through an extra pole that shall be permanently connected to the green grounding canductor. 2. Duplex receptacles for 20 ampere, 120 volt service shall be twa- pole, three-wire rec�ptacles, rated 2p amperes at 125 volts. Receptacles shall be Harvey Hubbell, Inc., Catalog No. 5362-I. 3. Single receptacles for 20 amps, 120 volts service shall be two-pole, three-wire rated 20 amperes at 125 volts. Receptacles shall be Harvey Hubbell Inc,, Catalog No. 5361-I, Switches: 1. Snap: Provide toggle switches, rated 20 amperes at 120/277 volts, quiet typ�, and shall be UL apprav�d without derating far tungsten lamp loads or inductive loads. All switches shall hav� a grounding t�rminal which shall be cannected to the gre�n grounding conductor. The following catalog numbers are Harvey Hubbell, Inc. WIRING DEVICES BID DOCUMENiS 16143 - 2 4/25/11 T e Catalo No. Single Pole HBL 12�1-I 2.03 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES: A. `In Use' covers for receptacles. B. Weatherproof caps for switches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES: A. Install wiring devic�s as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard af Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. : C �� Install wiring devices anly in electrical boxes which are clean; free from excess building materials, dirt, and debris. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed. Install wallplates after painting wark is completed. 3.02 PROTECTION OF WALLPLATES AND RECEPTACLES: A. Upon installation of wallplates and receptacles, advise contractor regarding proper and cautiaus use of convenience outlets. At time of substantial completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs. 3.03 GROUNDING: A. Provide equipment graunding connections for all wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated. 3.�4 TESTING: A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring far electrical continuity and for shart-circuits. Ensure praper polarity of connections is maintained. 5ubs�quent to energization, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 16143 WIRING DEVICES BID DOCUMENTS 16143 - 3 4/25/11 L .� 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY I�EFT BLANK � , � � � , � � � � �� �� � � , C� [_1 WIRING DEVICES BID DDCUMENTS 16143 - 4 4/25/11 , 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 SECTION 1617Q CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general pravisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. B. This 5ection is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 sectian making referenc� to circuit and motor discannects specifi�d herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: � : Extent of circuit and motor disconnect switch work is indicated on drawings and schedules. Types of circuit and motar disconnect switches in this Section include the following: Equipm�nt disconnects. Applianc� disconnects. Motor-circuit disconnects. C. Wires/cables, rac�ways, and electrical boxes and fittings required in connection with circuit and mator disconnect work are specified in other Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of circuit and motor disconnect switches of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for nat less than three (3) years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing circuit and motor discannect work similar to tha# required for this project. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining ta construction and installation of electrical circuit and motor disconnect devic�s. CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS BID DOCUMEN7S 1617Q - 1 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 D. UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 98, "Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches." Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches which have been UL listed and labeled. E. NEMA Compliance: Camply with applicabl� requirements of NEMA Stds. Pub No. KS 1, "Enclosed Switches" and 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)." � � Y�1:3►�il����i A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on circuit and motor disconnect switches. B. Submit shop drawings in booklet farm with separate sheet for each circuit and motor disconnect with praposed switch and accessaries clearly identified on each sheet. Identify each device with corresponding names, abbreviations (numbers and lettering) to match terminalogy af contract documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject manufacturers offering circuit and incorporated in the work are limit�d to: Square D Company. Westinghouse/Cutler-Hammer General Electric Co. Siemens Energy & Automation 2.02 FABRICATED SWITCHES: to compliance with requirements, ' motor disconnects which may be A. Heavy�Duty Safety Switches: Pravide surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, NEMA 4X stainless steel enclos�d safety switch�s, of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; incarporating quick-make, quick-break type switches. Construct so that switch blades are visible in OF� position with daor apen. Equip with operating handle which is integral part af enclosure base and whose aperating position is easily recognizable, and is padlockable in �FF position. Construct current carrying parts of high- conductivity copper, with silver-tungst�n type switch contacts and positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips. � � `, � � � 1. All fuses for safety switches shall be dual �I�ment, cartridge type. � Fuses shall be Bussman "Fusetron" or Chase-Shawmut "Trionic." CIRCUIT AN❑ M�TOR DISCONNECTS 16170 - 2 BID DOCUMENTS � 4/25/11 � L. I L: � � � LJ � L� � � �� � � � LJ � � � �---�L 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 2�4 25 26 27 28 29 3Q 31 �z 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 The contractor shall furnish and install proper size fuses where required for all fusible equipment and shall furnish to the owner one spare fuse far each fuse installed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3_01 INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES: A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructians, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, NECA's "Standard af Installation", and in accordanc� with recognized industry practices. B. Install disconnect switches for use with motor-driven appliances and motors and cantrollers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated. C. Unless othErwise indicated, prot�ctive devices shall be mounted with top of cabinet or enclosure 6'-6" abave finished floor; shall be properly aligned; and shall be adequately supported independently of the conn�cting raceways and other equipment. All steel shapes, etc., necessary for the suppart of the equipment shall be furnished and installed wh�re the building structure is nat suitable for mounting the equipment directly thereon. Unless otherwise indicated, all branch circuit protective devices enclasures shall be NEMA type I, generat purpose type. Branch circuit pratective devices installed outdoors or exposed ta the weather shall have weatherproof enclosures, NEMA Type 4X. 3.02 GROUNDING: A. Provide equipment grounding connections sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective ground for electrical disconnect switches wh�re indicated. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Subsequent ta completion of installatian of electrical disconn�ct switches, energize circuitry and d�:monstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at project site, then retest to d�monstrate compliance. Otherwise remove and replace with new units and retest. END OF SECTION 16170 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS BID DOCUMEN7S 16170 - 3 4/25/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS �ID DOCUMENTS 16170 - 4 4/25/11 �J � � I�� �� � LJ � � L! LJ �J r L�' � � C� SECTI�N 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REL.ATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions af Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work ofi this Section. B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is a part of each Division 16 section making refer�nce to electrical supporting devices specified herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: n : Extent of suppo�ts, anchors, sleeves, and seals is indicated by drawings and schedules and/or specified in other Division 16 sectians. Types of supparts, anchors, sleeves, and seals specified in this Section include the following: Clevis hangers. �ne-hale canduit straps. Two-hale conduit straps. Round steel rods. Expansion anchors. Toggl� bolts. Wall and floor seals. Corn Clamps. C. Supparts, anchors, sleeves, and seals furnished as part of factory fabricated equipment are specified as part of that equipment assembly in other Division 16 sectians. 1.03 QUAI�ITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of suppo�ting devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products hav� been in satisfactory use in similar s�rvice for not less than three (3) years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years af successful installatian experience with projects utilizing electrical supporting device work similar ta that required far this project. SUPPORTING DEVICES BID DOCUMENTS 16190 - 1 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1$ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 C. NECA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Contractars Association's "Standard of Installation", pertaining to anchors, fasteners, hangers, supparts, and equipment mounting. D. UL Campliance labeled_ 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Provide electrical components which are UL listed and A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data an s�ipparting devices, including catalog cuts, specifications, and installatian instructions for each type of support, anchor, sleeve, and seal. I l_1: i�• Z J,: i�]�1 � L� r.y 2.01 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES: A. G�neral: Provide supparting devices which camply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction, in accordance with published product information and as required for cnmplete installation and as herein specified. Where more than ane type of supporting device meets indicated requirements, selection is installer's option. 1:3 � Supports: Pravide supporting devic�s af types, sizes, and materials indicated and having the follawing canstruction features: 1. Cl�vis Hangers: For supparting conduit; aluminum with '/z" diameter hale for raund steel rad, approximately 54 pounds per 100 units. 2 3 4 5 6 7 Reducing Cauplings: Aluminum rod reducing coupling, '/z" by 5/S", approximately 16 pounds per hundred 100 units. One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting conduit; aluminum. Two-Hole Conduit Straps: Far supparting conduit; aluminum. Hexagon Nuts: For'/z" rod size, aluminum. Round Aluminum Rod: '/z" diameter. Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; � aluminum. Anchors: Provide anchors of types, sizes, and materials indicated with the following construction features: (all aluminum) SUPPORTING DEVIC�S BID DOCUMENTS 16190 - 2 4/25/11 �� � �� u 1. Expansion Anchors: '/z". 2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead, 3/16" by 4". Sleeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals, of typ�s, sizes and materials indicated, with th� fallowing canstruction features: 1. Wall and Floor Seals: Provide factory-assembled watertight wall and floor seals, of types and sizes indicated, suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Canstruct seals with steel sleeves, malleable iron bady, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, mEtal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws. Seals shall be fire-rated where required. E. U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment; aluminum of types and sizes indicated. Construct with 3/16" diameter holes, $" D.C. on top surFace, and with the following fittings which mate and match with U-channel: ,21 Fixture hangers. 22 Channel hangers. 23 End caps. '24 Beam clamps. 25 Wiring studs. 2� Thinwall conduit clamps. �27 Rigid conduit clamps. 28 Conduit hangers. � � � 2.�2 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES: A. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 4p galvanized aluminum pipe. Remove burrs. B. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeves for piping which penetrate foundatian walls b�low grade or exteriar walls. Caulk bEtw�en sleeve and pipe with nontoxic, UL classified caulking material to ensure watertight seal. 5eals shall be fire-rated where required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES: 44 A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves, and seals as indicated, in accordance �45 with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry 46 practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply �l7 with requirements of NECA and NEC for installation of supporting devices. � � SUPPORTING DEVICES BID DOCUMENTS 16190 - 3 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ 9 10 11 12 B. Caordinate with other �lectrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work. C. Install hangers, supports and attachments to support piping properly fram building structure. Arrange for grouping af parallel runs of horizontal conduits ta be supparted together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with spacings indicated and in compliance with NEC requir�ments. END OF SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 - 4 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 � � 1 � LJ � � �l � � � � � � � � � f � � THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 - 5 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1$ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 zs 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 �42 43 44 45 46 47 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTI�ICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Cantract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sectian, and is part of each Division 16 sectior. making reference to electrical identificatian specified herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: I•1 : Extent of electrical identification work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Types of electrical identification work specified in this 5ecfion include the fallowing: � Equipment/system identification signs. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.0� �L�CTR��A� I�ENTIFICA�I�P.i MA � �RiALS: A. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: 1. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate in si�es and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style af sizes and wording indicated; black face and white core plies (lett�r colar) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. 2. Signs shall be black face with white core plies (letter colar). .� � c. Thickness:'/16", except as otherwise indicated. �ast�ners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot, or should not, penetrate substrate. Nam�plates for essential electrical systems shall be red with white letters. �L�CTRICAL IDENTIFICATI�N BID DOCUMENTS 16195 - 1 4/25/11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 z� 28 29 3� 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 2.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS: A. General: Caordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in electrical identificatian work with .correspanding designations shown, specified, or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturer or as required far proper identification and op�ration/maintenance of electrical systems and equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION: � w General Installation Requirements: i � l_� I] � � � 1. Install electrical identificatidn praducts as indicated, in accordanc� with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC. � 2. Coardination: which require painting. Where identification is ta be applied to surfaces finish, install identification after completion of � 3. Regulations: Camply with governing regulations and requests of � governing authorities far identification of electrical work. Equipment/System Identification: 1. General: Install engraved plastic-laminat� sign on each major unit of electrical equipment in building; including central or master unit of each electrical syst�m including communication/ control/signal systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification or signal system. Provide text matching terminalogy and numbering of the contract docum�nts and shop drawings. Pravide signs for each unit of the following categories af �lectrical work: a b c. d. e. Pan�lbaards, electrical cabinets and enclasures. Access panels/doors to electrical faciliti�s. Transfarmers. Fire alarm equipment cabinets. Disconnect switches, motor starters, contactors, including current originatian. 2. Install signs at locatians indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing withaut ELECTRICAL ID�NTIFICATION BID DQCUMENTS 16195 - 2 4/25/11 � � 1 2 3 � 4 5 � � � � �� L� �' �I � � �J ' l� � � interFerence with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secur� to substrate with fasten�rs, except use adhesive where fasteners should not, or cannot, penetrate substrate. END OF SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 61D DOCUMENTS 16195 - 3 4/25/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ELECTRICAL, IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 4 � � �� , �� � '�� � � � � [.� � �' � BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 � 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 3� 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 �43 44 �5 46 47 48 yx.���•�.r�.�a Cel:i�l�l►lr]I►[e� PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Gen�ral and Supplementary Conditions and Divisian 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section_ B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 Section making rEference to grounding specified herein. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. The extent of electrical graunding and bonding work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and as specified herein. Grounding and bonding work is defined to encompass systems, circuits, and equipment. :3 C The type of electrical grounding and banding work specified in this Section includes the fallowing: Solidly grounded Applications of el�ctrical grounding and bonding work in this Sectian includes the following: Electrical power systems Graunding electrodes Separately derived systems Raceways Service equipment Enclosures Equipment D. Refer to other Division 1� sectians for wires/cables, electrical raceways, boxes and fittings, and wiring devices which are required in conjunction with electrical grounding and bonding work; not work of this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Praduct Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding and bonding products and associated accessories. GROUNDING BID DOCUMENTS 16452 - 1 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1Q 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Zo 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2$ 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms rEgularly engaged in the manufacture of graunding and bonding products, af types and ratings required, and ancillary grounding materials; including stranded cable, copper braid and bus, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, and bonding jumpers; whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not I�ss than five (5) years. B. Installer's Qualificatians: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experi�nce on projects with electrical graunding work similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: 1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local �lectrical code requir�ments of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC as applicable ta electrical grounding and banding, pertaining ta sysfiems, circuits, and equipment. 2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicabl� requirements of UL Standards No.'s 467, "Electrical Grounding and Banding Equipment", and 869, "Electrical Service Equipment", pertaining to grounding and bonding of syst�ms, circuits, and equipment. In addition, comply with UL 5td. 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Provide grounding and bonding products that are UL. listed and labeled far their intended usag�. ' ' ` •�,:ii]�1�I�� 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING: A. Materials and Components, General: Except as �th�rwise indicated, provide �lectrical grounding and bonding systems indicated; with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, solderless lug terminals, grounding electrades and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional accessories needed for a camplete installation. Where more than one type component praduct m�ets indicated requirements, selection is installer's optiQn. Wh�re materials ar components are not indicat�d, provide products that comply with NEC and UL, requirements, and with established industry standards for those applications indicated. B. Conductars: Unless otherwise indicat�d, provide electrical grounding conductors for grounding system connections that match power supply wiring materials and are sized accarding to NEC. GROUNDING BID DOCUMENTS 16452 - 2 4/25/11 C. Bonding Plates, Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide electrical bonding plates, connectors, terminals, lugs, and clamps as recammended by bonding plate, connector, terminal, and clamp manufacturers for indicated applications. D. Graund Electrodes: Solid copper, 5 Ohms, three-quarter inch (3/") diameter by twenty fe�t (20'). f 7�\: i����� x� 1 � l I C� L l 3.�1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding and bonding cannections are ta be made, and notify cantractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to inst�ller. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GR�UNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS� A. General: Install electrical grounding and bonding systems as indicated, in accardance with manufacturer's instructions; applicable portions of N�G, NECA's "Standard of Installatian", and in accordance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that products comply with requirements. B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical graunding and bonding system work with other work. C. Ground electric�! sen�ice system neutral at s�rvic� entrance to the building cald water line and to three (3) three-faurths inch (3/a") diameter, iwenty feet (20') long ground rods spaced ten feet (10') apart. D. Ground each separately-derived system neutral ta separate grounding electrade. E. Connect together system neutral, service equipment enclosures, expased noncurrent carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal rac�way systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing systems. F. All raceways with Na. 10 or 12 AWG phase canductors for receptacles, lighting fixtures, and similar circuits shall be provided with a parity-sized green equipment ground conductar. Ground conductor shall be installed in entire raceway system, including wall switches and flexible conduit to light fixtures. Equipment ground conductor sizes for circuits with phase conductors larg�r than No. 12 AWG are indicated on drawings. Graund conductors shall be connected to ground buss in panelboards. GROUNDING BID DOCUMENTS 16452 � 3 4/25/11 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 G. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment-graunding conductors with grounding lug, bus, or bushing. Conductors looped under screw or bolt heads will not be permitted. H. Connect grounding electrode conductars to ane inch (1 ") diameter or greater metallic cold water pipe, using a suitably sized ground clamp_ Provide connections to flanged piping at street side of flange. � � � L.� I. Install clamp-on connectors on clean metal contact surfaces to ensure � electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. J. Provide a graunding bushing and a cantinuaus copper banding jumper from the bushing to the equipment ground bus in all feed�rs. The bonding jumper shall be the same size as the equipment ground conductor. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installatiori of electrical grounding and bonding systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance-to-ground is over tw�nty-five (25) ohms, take appropriate actian to reduce resistance to twenty-five (25)ohms or less by driving additianal graund rods then ret�st ta demonstrate compliance. ���I�Ii7�yx��[�7� . - GROUNDING 16452 - 4 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 � SECTION 16460 1 : _ ► y7i7:� �il� PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Sectian. B. This is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Mat�rials and Methods section, and is part of each Divisian 16 Section making reference to transformers specified herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: I•1 : C� Extent of transformer work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Types of transformers specified in this Section include the following: Dry-Type Transformers Electrical wiring cannections far transformers are specified in applicable Division 16 sections. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of pawer/distribution transformers of types and ratings r�quired; whose products have been in satisfactary use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B, Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least five (5) years of successful installation experience on projects utilizing electrical power and distribution transformers similar to those required far this project. C�? C E NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction of electrical power/distribution transformers. ANSI Compliance: Camply with applicabl� requirements of ANSI Standards C57-Series pertaining to power/distribution transformers. NEMA Complianc�: Camply with requirem�nts of NEMA Std Pub/No.'s ST 20; "Dry-Type Transfiormers for General Applications", TR 1, and TR 2i. TRANSFORMERS BID DOCUMENTS 16460 - 1 4/25/11 2 3 5 6 7 $ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1$ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 �1 42 43 44 45 46 �. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/UL 506; "Safety Standard for Specialty Transformers". G. NESC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI Std C2) pertaining to indoor and outdoar installation of transformers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: I�1 � 1 ' � 1 �� Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data; including rated kVA, frequency, primary and secondary voltages, and p�rcent taps. ' PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABI._E MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work, but are nat limited to, the following: General Electric Ca. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc Cutler Hammer/Eaton 2.02 POWER/DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS: Square D Ca. A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard materials and companents as indicated by published product infarmation, design�d and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, and as required fior complete installation. B. Dry-Type Distribution Transformers: 1 2 Transformers sized 15 kVA and below shall have twa (2) — 2�/z percent taps above and b�low rated primary voltage. Transformers 15 kVA and below shall be 115°C temp�rature rise abave 40°C ambient, unless noted otherwise. 3. Limit transformer surface temperature rise to maximum af 50°C rise above a 40°C ambient. Pravide wiring connectors suitable for copp�r or aluminum wiring. Cushion-mount transformers with external vibration isalation supports; sound-level ratings not ta exceed 45 dB far transformers 15 ta 45 kVA and 50 dB for 5Q to 150 kVA as determined in accordance with ANSI/NEMA standards. Electrically TRANSFORM�RS 16460 - 2 BID DQCUM�NTS 4/25/11 ' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2$ 29 3Q 31 3� 33 3A 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 �5 46 ground core and cails to transformer enclosure by means of flexible metal graunding strap. Provide transformers with fully-encl�sed she�t-steel enclosur�s. Provide transformers suitable for wall mounting. C. Equipment/System Identificatian: Provide equipment/system identification nameplates complying with Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section "Electrical Identificatian" in accordance with the following listing: Equipment/System Identification. D. Finishes: Coat interior and exterior surfaces of transformer, including bolted jaints, with manufactur�r's standard color baked-an enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTI�N: Installer must �xamine areas and conditi�ns under which power/distribution transformers and ancillary equipment are to be installed, and natify contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper campletian of the work. Do not proceed with the work until satisfactory conditions have be�n corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. 3.�2 INSTALLATION OF TRANS�ORMERS: Install transformers as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructi�ns, applicable requirements af N�C, NESC, NEMA, ANSI, and IEEE standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. 3,03 GROUNDING: Provide equipment grounding connections for paw�r/distributian transformers as indicated. K�iZi����l►Ce�i A. Prior to energization of transformers, ch�ck all accessible connectians far compliance with manufacturer's torque tightening specifications. B. Prior to �nergization, check circuitry for electrical continuity and for short- circuits C. Upon compl�tion of installation of transformers, energize primary circuitry at rated voltage and frequency from normal pawer source, and test transfarmers; including (but nat limited to) audible saund levels, to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. D. Where passible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replac� with new units or companents, and proceed with retesting. END OF SECTIQN 1�460 TRANS�ORMERS 16460 - 3 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 �1 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ' 1 1 1 ' 1 � � I� ' ' 1 ' 1 � � ' TRANSFORMERS BID DOCUMENTS 16460 - 4 4125/11 ' � � L_J r �.J � � ' 1 CJ ' 1 l_J 1 1 1 ' � 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 �o 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2$ 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL `�i7�:���:����7�I�I�1�1►�1�►��yl A. Drawings and general provisions of Cantract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply ta work of this Sectian_ B. This Sectian is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Mat�rials and Methods sectian, and is a part af each Division 16 sectian making reference ta pan�lbaards specified herein. �IT�.�� u u _ : I_1 I:? Extent of panelboard and enclosure work, including cabinets and cutaut boxes, is indicated by drawings and schedules and as specified h�rein. Types of panelboards and �nclosures required for th� project include the following: Pow�r Distribution Panelboards Lighting and Appliance Panelboards C. Ref�r to other Division 16 Sections for wires/cables, electrical baxes and fittings and raceway work required in conjunction with installatian of panelboards and �nclosures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on panelboards and enclosures. Shop drawings shall indicate arrangement af busses, branch circuits, enclosures, dimensions, etc. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of pan�lboards and enclosures, of types, sizes, and ratings required; whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service far nat less than five (5) years. B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least three (3) years of successful installatian �xperience on projects utilizing panelboards similar to those PANELBOARDS BID DOCUM�NTS 16470 - 1 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ZO 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 C required for this project. Codes and Standards� 2 Electrical Cade Compliance: Comply with applicable lacal code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Article 384 as applicable to the installatian and construction of electrical panelboards and enclosures. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 67, "Electric Panelboards", and UL codes 50, 869, and 1053 pertaining to panelboards, accessories and enclosures. Provide panelbaard units that are UL listed and labeled. I�` 'i�.�����]1�1� �� � ►�i I� ►1 � � Z[� l l � � :� � : i•� A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering electrical panelboard products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limit�d ta, the following: General Electric Company Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D Company Cutler-Hammer / Eatan Carp f��iy�y_1►1��:ii7_1:��b� A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclasures, and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials; with the design and canstructian in accordanc� with published product informatian. Equip with proper number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL, and established industry standards far those applications indicated. B. Power Distribution Panelboards: Provide dead-frant, safety-type power distribution panelboards as indicated; with panelboard switching and pratective d�vices in quantities, ratings, types, and with arrangement shown; with anti-turn, sold�rl�ss pressure type main lug connectors approved for use with copper conductors. Select unit with f�eders connecting at top of pan�l. Equip with copper bus bars with not I�ss than 98 percent conductivity, and with full-sized neutral bus. Provide suitable lugs an neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections. Provide bolt-an, molded-case circuit breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicat� when tripped. PANELC�OARDS BID DOCUMENTS 16470 - 2 4/25111 ' ' , 1 1 1 ' 1 ' 1 ' � 1 1 1 1 � 1 ' Provide panelboards with bar� uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards which mate and match properly with panelbaards. 1. Power panelbaards shall be General Electric type 'Spectra', Square D typ� 'I Line', Siemens type 'P3' or Cutler-Hammer typ� 'PR�3a'. Voltage shall be as indicated. C. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Provide dead-front safety type lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated; with switching and pratective devices in quantities, ratings, types and arrangements shown; with anti-burn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for use with capper conductors. Construct unit for connecting fe�ders at top of panel. Equip with copper bus bars, full-sized neutral bar, witf� t��lk-iri ly�e iieavy-c�uty, quick-- make, quick-br�ak, circuit breakers, with toggle handl�s that indicate when tripped. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus far each outgaing feeder required, and provide bare uninsufated graunding bars suitable far bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards that mate and match properly with panelboards. 1. Panelboards shall be General Electric A-S�ri�s, Square D type "NQ", Siem�ns type "P1" or "P2" �r Cutler-Hammer type PRL2. Panelboard boxes shall be five and three-fourths inches (5 3/4") deep. Valtage shall be as indicated. D. Panelboard Enclosures: Provid� galvanized sheet steel cabinet-type enclosures, in siz�s and NEMA types as indicated; code-gauge, minimum 16-gauge thickness. Cabinets shall be furnished without knockouts and all hoies for raceways shall be driiied and punched on the jab. Panelboard enclosures shall b� five and three-fourths inches (5 3/") deep. Provide fronts with adjustable trim clamps and doors with flush locks and keys; all panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with concealed piano daar hinges and door swings as indicated. Provid� baked gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for recessed mounting. Provide enclosures that are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards that mate and match properly with panelbaards ta be enclos�d. E. All panelboards shall be connected distributed phase with circuit numbering as indicated on the drawings. Panelboards shall be numbered with odd numbers on the left side of the panel and even numbers on the right side of the panel. Panelbaards shall have a circuit directory card mounted in a frame with plastic cover, mounted on the inside of the door, and directory cards shall be completed with a typewriter to indicated areas and/or devices served by each circuit. All new and existing panelbaards being used for this project shall have new typed directories. PANELBOARDS BID DOCUMENTS 16470 - 3 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 i 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 �0 41 42 43 44 45 46 F. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory-assembled, bolt-on, malded- case circuit breakers of frame sizes, characteristics, and ratings, including RMS symmetrical interrupting ratings indicated. Select breakers with p�rmanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip, and with fault-current limiting protectian; ampere ratings as indicated. Multi-pole break�rs shall have a common trip bar so that the tripping of one pole will automatically trip all poles of the breaker. Construct with over-center, trip-free, toggle-type aperating mechanisms with quick-mak�, quick-break action, and positive handle trip indicatian. Construct breakers for maunting and operating in any physical position and operating in an ambient temperature of 40°C_ Pravide breakers with mechanical screw type removable connectar lugs; AL/CU rated. 1. Individual Enclased Circuit Break�rs: Circuit breakers shall be molded case type. Breakers shall have thermal-magnetic trip units and magnetic trip shall be adjustable. Breakers shall have a cammon trip bar so that the tripping af one pole will automatically trip all poles of the br�aker. Breakers shall be trip free and trip indicating and shall have quick-make, quick- break contacts. Enclasur� shall have insulated, groundable neutral. G. Panelboards shall be installed complete with connectors and associated hardware for all circuit breakers and circuit breaker spaces listed in the panelboard schedule. H. When connecting equipm�nt to existing panelboards, the new and existing circuit breakers shall be identified. A new circuit directory card shall be provided. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINA I IUN: Examine areas and conditions und�r which panelboards and enclosures are ta be installed and notify contractar in writing of conditions detrimental to praper completion of w�rk. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactary conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. 3.02 INSTALLATIDN OF PANELBOARDS: A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufactur�r's written instructian, applicable requirements af NEC standards, NECA's "Standards of Installatian", and in compliance with r�cognized industry practic�s to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Tighten connectors and t�rminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance PANELBOARDS RID DOCUMFNTS 1647a - 4 4/25/11 � ' ' 1 , � � , 1 ' � , , � 1 ' 1 , 1 2 3 4 5 6 % 8 9 10 11 12 13 1� 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 with equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening valu�s for equipment connectors. C. Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are perman�ntly and m�chanically anchored. 3.03 GROUNDING: � : Pravide equipment grounding cannectians for panelboard �nclosures as indicated_ Prior to �nergization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits and for short-circuits. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: /� ; Adjust aperating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. Tauch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes. END OF SECTION 16470 PAN�LBOARDS 16470 - 5 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PANELBOARDS BID DOCUMENTS 16470 - 6 4/25111 ' i 1 � 2 3 4 , 5 6 1 $ 9 1� ' 11 12 13 ' 14 15 ,16 17 18 '19 20 21 '22 23 24 '25 26 27 '28 29 30 ,31 32 33 �34 35 36 ,37 38 39 ,�0 41 42 ' �43 44 45 ' 46 47 , ' SECTION 16481 MOTORS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTIDN �urnish and install the motars as hereinafter specified and as called for in other sectians of these Specificatians. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS Motar shall be sufficient size for the duty to be performed and shall not �xceed their full-rated load whcn the driven equipment is operating at specified capacity. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The motor manufacturer shall submit to the Engine�r certified dimension prints showing nameplate data and outline dim�nsions within three weeks of the date they receive the order. B. Submit Operatian and Maintenance Manual and parts lists as specified in Division 1 PROJECT CL�SE�UT. C. Guarantee: All equipment furnished and installed under this Section shall be guaranteed against def�cts of workmanship, materials and improper installation fior a period of eighteen manth from date af acceptance. All such equipment ar parts proven defective, due to the above noted causes, shall �� ���.la:.e� ir� the machines uy #h� CO!�TRACTOR at no exp�r�s° to the Owner. D. Pravide equipment warranty in accordance with Division 1 SPECIFIC WARRANTIES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RATI N G A. Unless otherwise noted, all motors shall be of the law voltage type. All motors 2 through 100 horsepower shall be rated 230/�60 volt, 3 phase, 6Q Hertz A.C.; motors 125 horsepower thraugh 300 horsepawer shall b� rated 460 volt, 3-phase, 6Q Hertz, and mators below 2 horsepower shall be rated 115/230 volt, 1 phase, 6D Hertz A.C. 2.02 THREE PHASE INDUCTION M�TORS MOTORS 1�481-1 BID DOCUMENTS �/25/11 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2Q 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 3� I�1 , Motors 25 HP and larger shall have a 120-volt space heater far maisture cantrol. ' B. Unless specifically noted in other sections af these 5pecifications, all mators shall have an efficiency as indicated in the table below. Motors shall be "premium efficie�" type. ��:��I Motor Min. Max. Motor Min. Max. HP Eff. dba HP Eff_ dba 1-2 84.0% 74 25-30 92.0% 92 3-5 86.5% 79 40-50 93.�% 97 %.5-1 Q 90.2% 84 60-75 94.0% 100 15-20 91.�% 89 100 94.1 % 102 C. Motors operating with variable frequency drives shall indicate on the nameplate that they are suitable for their intended applications (Inverter duty Rated) and they shall be provided with an integral temperature switch that apens on high temperature. Motors operating with Variable Frequency Drives (VFD's) shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG1 Part 31. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION I�� : General: 1. All dripproof and weather protected Type I motors shall have epoxy encapsulated windings. Totally enclosed mators shall nat b� encapsulated. Motors not readily available with encapsulated windings may be standard type. Motors exposed ta the outside atmasphere shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) unless otherwise specified. 2. Squirrel�cage rotors shall be made from high-grade steel laminatians adequately fastened together and to the shaft, or shall be cast aluminum or bar-type construction with brazed end rings. Low Voltage, Three Phase Motars: Motars shall b� of the squirrel-cage induction type, NEMA design B. Horizontal, vertical solid shaft, vertical hollow shaft, normal thrust and high thrust types shall be furnished as specified herein. All MOTaRS BID DOCUMENTS 16481-2 4/25/11 C1 � ' ' ' 1 ! 1 �2 3 4 � 5 6 7 � 8 9 10 , 11 12 13 � 14 15 16 t17 18 19 ' zo 21 '22 23 24 �25 26 z� �28 29 30 '31 32 33 �34 35 36 37 38 39 ,40 41 42 ,43 44 45 '46 4i 48 � ' motors shall be built in accordance with current NEMA, IEEE, ANSI and AFBMA standards where applicable. Motors shall be of the type and quality described by these Specifications, fully capable af performing in accardance with manufacturer's nameplate rating, and fr�e fram defective material and warkmanship. 2. Mators shall have normal or high starting torque (as required), law starting current (not to exceed 600 percent full load current), and low slip. 3. Outdoor motars shall be totally enclosed fan-caaled construction with 1.15 s�rvice factor unl�ss otherwise noted_ Indoor motors shall be ODP unless otherwise noted. 4 5 Outdaar motors shall be mill and chemical duty suitable for aperation in moist air with hydrogen sulphide gas present. The output shaft shall be suitable for direct cannectian ar belt drive as required. 6. Motors shall have Class F insulation temperature rise. a Class B nonhygroscapic insulation system. may be used but shall be limited to Class B 7. All motors shall have a final caating of chemical resistant carrosion and fungus protective �poxy fortified enamel finish sprayed over red primer over all interiar and exterior surfaces. Stator bore and rotor of all motors shall be epaxy coated. �3 �] 10 11 All fittings, balts, n�ts, and screws shall be 31 � stainless st�el. Balts and nuts shall have hex heads. All machine surfaces shall be coated with rust inhibitor for easy disassembly. Conduit boxes shall be gasketed. Lead wir�s between motor frame and conduit box shall be gasketed. Totally �nclosed motors shall be provided with condensate drain hole and epoxy coated mator windings to prot�ct against moistur�. 12. Nameplates shall be stainless steel. Lifting lugs or "O" type bolts shall be supplied an all frames 254T and larger. Enclosures will have stainless steel screen and motors $hall be protected for corrosion, fungus and insects. 13. Low voltage, three phase motors shall be manufactured by General Electric, U.S. Motors, Westinghouse or approved equal. MOT�RS BID DOCUMENTS 164$1-3 4/25/11 14 15 �ractional Horsepawer: a. Fractianal horsepaw�r motors shall be rigid, welded-steel, design�d to maintain accurat� alignment of mator compon�nts and provid� adequate protection. End shields shall be reinforced, lightweight die-cast aluminum. Windings shall be af varnish-insulated wire with slat insulation of polyester film, baked-on banding treatment to make the stator winding strongly resistant ta heat, aging, moisture, electrical stresses and ather hazards. b. Motor shaft shall b� made from high-grade, cold-rolled shaft steel with drive-shaft extensions carefully machined to standard N�MA dimensions for the particular drive connection. c. All motors shall be equipped with vacuum-degassed (sealed) antifriction bearings made to AF�BMA Standards, and be af ample capaci#y for the motor rating. The bearing housing shall be large enough to hold sufficient lubricant to minimize the ne�d for frequent lubrication, but facilities shall be pravided far adding new lubricant and draining out old lubricant without motor disassembly. The bearing housing shall have long, tight, running fits ar rotating seals to pratect against the entrance of foreign matter into the bearings, ar leakage of lubricant out of the bearing cavity. Integral Horsepower: � � G. � e Motor frames and end shi�lds shall be cast iron or heavy fabricated st��! of such design ar�d pr���rtians as to hald al� motor camponents rigidly in proper position and provide adequate pratection for the type of enclosure employed. Windings shall be adequately insulated and securely braced ta resist failure due to electrical stresses and vibrations. The shaft shall be made af high-grade machine steel or steel forging of size and design adequate to withstand the laad stresses normally encountered in matars of the particular rating. Bearing journals shall be gound and polished. Rotors shall be made from high-grade steel laminations adequat�ly fastened tag�ther, and ta the shaft. Rotar squirrel-cage windings may be copper or bar-type construction with brazed end rings. All motars shall be �quipped with vacuum-degassed (sealed) antifriction bearings made to AFBMA Standards, and be of ample capacity for th� motor rating. The bearing housing shall be large enough to hold sufficient lubricant to minimiz� the need for frequent lubrication, but facilities shall be provided for adding new lubricant and draining out old MOTQRS BID DOGUMENTS 16481-4 4/25/11 f �`J lubricant withaut motor disassembly. The bearing housing shall have long, tight, running fits or ratating seals ta pratect against the entrance of foreign matter into the bearings, or leakage of lubricant out of the bearing cavity. B�arings of high thrust motors will be locked for momentary upthrust af 30% downthrus#. All bearings shall have a minimum B10 life rating af 100,000 hours in accardance with AFBMA life and thrust values. Vertical hollow-shaft motors will hav� nonreverse ratchets to pr�vent backspin. C_ Low Voltage, Single Phas� Motors: 1. Single phase motors shall be split-phas� and capacitor-start inductian types rated far continuaus horsepower at the rpm called for on th� Drawings. Motors shall be rated 115/230 volts, 60 Hertz, single phase, op�n dripproof, or totally enclosed fan cooled as called for an the Dr�wings, with temperature rise in accordance with NEMA Standards for Class B insulation. 2. Totally enclosed fan cooled motars shall b� designed for severe-duty. 3. Mators shall have carrosion and fungus protective finish on internal and external surfaces. All fittings shall have a carrasion protective plating. 4. Mechanical characteristics shall be the same as specified for polyphase fractional h�rsepawer motors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATI�N A. Motar Connections: All motors shall be connected ta the conduit system by means of a short section of fl�xible conduit, 18 inch minimum and 60 inches maximum, unless otherwise indicated. Far all motor cannections, the CONTRACTOR shall install a grounding conduct�r in the conduit and terminate at the motor control center with an approved grounding clamp. B. Connection to motor leads shall b� compression type with 3M brand heat shrink baat. �43 44 3.02 TESTS AND CHECKS ' �I �� ' A. The following t�sts shall be performed on all motors after installation but befiore putting motors into service. MOTORS 16481-5 BID D�CUMENTS 4/25/11 1 2 ;3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1� 15 16 17 1. The CONTRACTOR shall megger each motor winding before energizing the motor, and, if insulation resistance is found ta be low, shall notify the Engineer and shall not energize the mator_ The CONTRACTOR shall check direction of rotatian of all motors and reverse connectians if n�cessary. The following table gives minimum acceptable insulation resistance in megohms at various temp�ratures and far variaus voltages with readings being taken after on� minute of inegger test run. TABLE 2 Degree Winding Voltage Tem erature °F °C 11�V Z3UV 460V 37 -1��. 3.9 60^ My�� 10$ �--f210 50 10 32 60 � 120 68 20 ~ 13 26 50 86 30 5.6 11 21 104_.._ 45 2.4 -___. 4. 5 .�.-, 8. $ 122 50 � 1 2 �3.7 140 60 .5 .85 _4._.� 1 6 2. The C�NTRACTOR shall check each mator for correct clearances and alignment and for carrect lubrication, and shall lubricate if required in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 16481 M�TORS 16481-6 BID DOCUMFNTS 4/25/11 � � 1 2 � 3 4 � 6 7 � 9 10 �11 12 13 '14 15 16 �17 18 19 �2D 21 22 ,23 24 25 �26 27 28 �29 30 31 �32 33 34 '35 36 37 '38 39 40 '41 42 43 �44 45 � 1 ��x��C�7►�i[:�E:i�3 MOTOR STARTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general pravisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification s�ctinns, apply to work of this Section. B. This is a Division 1G Eiasic Clectrical Materials and Methods sectian, and is part of each Division 16 Section making reference to motor starters herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF W�RK: A. Extent of motor starter wark is indicated by drawings and schedules. 1.p3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms r�gularly engaged in the manufacture of motor starters of types, ratings, and characteristics required; whose products hav� been in satisfactory use in similar service for nat I�ss than five (5) years. B. fr�sialler's Qualifications: Firm w�i�i ai feas� three (3) y�ars o� succe���u� installation experiEnce on projects utilizing motor starters similar ta that required fior this project. C. NEC Compliance: Camply with NEC as applicable to wiring methods, construction, and installation of motor starters. D. UL Campliance: Provide motor sta�t�rs and components which are UL listed and labeled. `�iZ�Y�1:3►�il���_1�� A. Praduct Data: Submit manufactur�r's data on motor starters. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: MOTOR STARTERS 16483 � 1 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 3� 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering motor starters which may be incorporat�d in the wark include, but are not limited to, the following: General Electric Co. Square D Co. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp. Siemens �• � � Y� � i C�] r � ] : �9 �_\ : i � � : �� i A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor starters and ancillary components which comply with manufacturer's standarci materials, design, and canstruction in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation. B. Manual mator starters for 115 volts, single phase motars one horsepower and smaller shall be single pole, harsepower rated switches with thermal overload units and heaters. Starters shall be Square D Class 2510, with stainless steel cover plates or equal. C. Magnetic full voltage starters for three phase motors shall be three pole, horsepower- rated, magnetically operated, with three thermal overload units and four extra auxiliary contacts. Cantrol voltage shall be 120 valts supplied from a control power transformer. A Hand-Off-Autamatic, HOA switch shall be mounted in front cover. 5tarters shall be Square D Class 8536 or �qual. G. Combinatian magnefic, fuii voifage star�ers for three phase mators snaii be three pole horsepower-rated, magnetically operated switches, with three thermal overload units and four extra auxiliary contacts. Control valtage shall be 120 volts supplied from a contral power transformer. A three pole horsepawer-rated, non-fusible disconnect switch shall alsa be included in the enclosure. An HOA switch shall be mounted in front cover. Starters shall be Square D Class 8538 or equal. E F Phase loss protection shall be pravided on all starters serving mators 15 horsepower or larger. Provide 0-15 minute on-delay auto restart functian on each starter. 2.03 MICROPROCESSOR-BASED MOTOR CONTROL A. Matar Starters -� Based Motor Control 1. Provide motor starters of the electromechanical typ� with coil controlled by an application-specific microprocessor. MOTOR STARTERS 16483 - 2 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 � C� � � LJ L _� 1 C� 1 � 1 1 L� 1 ' �� � LJ CJ 2. Provide one (1) current sEnsar accurat� to 2% far each phase to provide motor running averioad protection that yeilds a time-current curve closely parall�ling that af the respective mator heating damage boundary. Running averload protection shall be DIP switch selectable for the specific motor full load amp�res. 3. Provide DIP switch selectable overlaad trip class of 10, 20, and 3n. �4. Provide phase loss protection and phase unbalance protection_ If the phase unbalance an any two phases is greater than 30% of the DIP switch selected trip rating, a phase loss/unbalance trip occurs. 5. Provide ground fault protection set at 20% af maximum continuous ampere rating with a start delay of 17 seconds, and a run delay of 0.4 seconds to prevent nuisance tripping on startup. : E:? �] Provide an application-specific micropracessor with the foloowing features: a. Micraprocessor shall measure control circuit voltage and prevent clasing of the coil on voltages belaw 78V AC and/or voltages above 135V AC. b. Micraprocessor shall apply voltage to the coil such that a guaranteed maximum of two (2) milliseconds of main contact bounc� acurs an cantactor clasure. c. Microprocessor shall continuously measure coil circuit voltage and current sa as ta maintain constant cail power at a level to maintain main contact closure and rninirr�ize coil power consumption. d. Microprocessor shall wait for three (3) half-cycles of control start signal prior to activating a close ta pr�vent starts resulting from momentary voltage spikes, switching transients, flutt�ring cantacts, and shorked programmable logic control outputs. The phase angle of the power in the contral circuit is to be compared with the phase angle of th�input start signal to pr�v�nt starts resulting from capcitively coupled or inductively coupled signals. Motor starters shall have replaceable fixed and movable contacts. Accessories: MOTOR STARTERS 16483 - 3 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/1-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 zs 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 a. Motor starter shall be designed to acccommadat� two (2) auxiliary contact blocks, each capable of a combination of up to four (4) normally closed or four (4) normally open auxiliary contacts. Contacts to be color coded; black designating NC and silver designatinv NO. Cantacts to be rated ten (1) amperes continuous, 7200 VA make, 720 VA break for 120 through 600V AC, and 69 VA make and break for 125 through 300V DC. Provide a minimum of one (1) spare NO contact and one (1) spare NC contact in addition ta any auxiliary cantacts required. b. Provide a mechanical interlock on reversing or multispeed contactors of the lever-typ� rY�ecfiariisrr7 (wilh electrical cantacts included) to prevent clasing of one cantactor when the other is clased. c_ Provide metering madule capable of displaying control voltage and staus where utilized in starter applications, "cause of trip," "current at time of trip," and "current in each phase" shall be capable of being displayed. d. Provide an addressable communication card capable o transmitting control and diagnostic data over an apen Device Net netwark to a persanal cvmputer or PLC. The addition of the Device Net communication module shall nat increase the size of the controller. The startEr shall also be capable of transmitting the following data: �� PART 3 - EXECUTION 1) On-Off reset control functions 2) 5tatus (On, Off, Tripped, No Response) 3) Current in each phase 4) Percent phase unbalance 5) Control voltage 6) Overlaad protection settings 7) Trip current magnitude 8) Average motar current 9) Hand/Manual/Local Control 1 p) Cause of trip indication Furnish Schneider Electric "TESYS T Motor Management System" or equal. ' 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS: MOTOR STARTERS 16483 - 4 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 ' � � � C� � C� � � ' � � � � � � � � � _J � r-, ��_J C� 1 2 4 5 6 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 A. Install motar starters as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices; camplying with applicable requirements of NEC, UL and NEMA standards to insure that products fulfill requirements. B. Motor starters or any other electrical equipment lacat�d in smoke or fire rated walls shall be mounted an Unistrut channels. Channels shall be supparted from floar and structure above ceiling. There shall be no penetratians of the fire rated assembly pursuant ta th� equipment installation. C_ Unless atherwise indicated, motor starters shown on the drawing shall be furnished and installed under this Section. The full laad current and starting characteristics af each motar shall be verifi�d far prap�r s�lection of motor over load devices_ D. Furnish and install all steel shapes, etc., necessary for a support of all motor starters. E. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accardance with equipmenf manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. [c�iy�s\�al����l►C�1_1►1rIy��_1►ll►Ce� � � � Inspect electrical starter's operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units far fr�e mechanical movement. Touch-up scratched or marr�d surfaces ta match ariginal finish. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Subsequent to connecting wires/cables, energize motor starter circuitry and demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements. Where necessary correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. Ensure that directian of rotation of each motor fulfills requirements. 1�►1�I�l�yx��[�7►�i[:�E:�? MOTOR STARTERS 164$3 - 5 BID DQCUMENTS 4/25/ 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MOTOR STARTERS BID DOCUMENTS , 164$3 - 6 4/25/11 , � � L_J L� J L..J � � SECTION 16620 SURGE SUPPRESSION SECTION 16620 - SURGE SUPPRESSION PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. B. This 5ection is a Divisian 16 Basic Electrical Mat�rials and Methods sectian, and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical surge suppression specified herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION �F WORK '21 A. The work required under this division shall include all materials, labor, and 22 auxiliaries required ta furnish and install camplete surge suppression for the 23 pratection of building electrical and electronics systems from th� eff�cts af �24 line-induced transient voltage surge and lightning discharge, as indicated on 25 drawings or specified in this section. � r� � � C� � � �-� � B. Types of surge suppression specified in this section include the following: Service entrance type. Distribution and branch circuit panels. Point af use type (receptacle and plug-in units). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All surge suppression d�vices shall be manufactured by a campany normally engaged in the design, development, and manufacture af such devices for el�ctrical and electronics systems equipment. . - The surge suppressar manufacturer shall affer t�chnical assistance through support by a factory representative and local stacking distributor. Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one saurce, from a single manufacturer. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall provide a product warranty for a period of not less than five (5) years from date of installation. Warranty shall cover unlimited SURGE SUPPR�SSION BID DOCUMENTS 1662D � 1 4/25/11 replacement of suppressor's modules during the warranty period. Thase firms responding to this sp�cification shall provide proof that they have regularly engaged in the design, manufacturing and testing of suppressors far not less than twenty five (25) years. �����K�]r]�y_1►1rZ.��_1►1i7e : � �? A. The fallawing standards and publicatians are referenced in various parts af this specification and shall apply: UL 1449-2009 (Third Edition): Standard for Safety, Transient Valtage Surge Suppr�ssors. UL 1 z�3- (listed as an electromagnetic interference filter that provides noise attenuation) IEEE C62.41-2002 (IEEE 587): Guide for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. IEEE C62.33-2002: Standard Test Specifications for Varistor Surge Pratection Devices IEEE C62.45-2002: IEEE Guide for Surge T�sting for Equipment Cann�cted to Low- Voltage AC Power Circuits. NEC 285, 25D.56 — 2008 NFPA 78� and CSA —(National Fire Protection Associatian and Canadian Standards Associations) ISO 9001:2000 — Quality standard / Military Standards (MIL-STD 220A) UL 96A — Lightning Protection Master Label B. The fusing element must be capable of allowing the suppressor's rated singl� impulse current to pass through the suppressor at least one time without failure. The system shall be tested to 1,000 sequential per C62.45- 2002 section 8.38 referencing C62.41.1 and C62.41.2 Category C3 combination wave transi�nts. The Category C3 combination wave is defined as a 1.2 x 50�s wave at 20,000 valt open circuit voltag� wav�form and 8 x 20�as wave at 10,000 amperes short circuit current waveform. In addition, the system camponents shall be tested repetitively 1,000 times testing based on IEEE C62.33 (MOV test) and C62.35 (SAD test) without failure or degradation exceeding ±10%. C. All manufacturers must comply with above listed standards and any additions � SURGE SUF'PRESSION BID DOCUMENTS 16620 - 2 4/25/11 , �� L ..J � � � � � � ' �.! �� L� �� l.' � � � � � 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2� 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 �47 current revisions of industry standards. All products that do not comply with current industry standards will not be accepted. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Must have ten day prior approval to bid on project. Request for submittal must be in writing and attached with independent documentatian of the following items. B. Drawings: Electrical and mechanical drawings shall be providEd by the manufacturer which shaw unit dimensions, weights, maunting provisions, connectian notes, wire size and wiring diagram. C. Equipment manual: The manufacturer shall furnish an installatian manual with installation notes, start-up and operating instructians for the specified system. Installation instructions shall clearly state whether the system requires an �xternal overcurrent device to maintain the system's UL 1449 listing. D. Independent Testing: 1 �a High exposure with the 10 x 1,OOO�s tests per IEEE C62.41.2 Sectian 7.2 Life Cycle/Repetitive Testing per C62.45-2002 section B.38 minimum of 1,000 ta 2,000 times. E. UL 1449 stipulatian far fused TVSS — The manufacturer's autharized representative is required to submit the foll�wing: 1. C�rtify that the TVSS system is UL 1449 listed (UL Card) with UL Card. 2. Indicate the type of internal or external fusing that is incorporated in fihe TVSS system and what impact the fusing has on the performance of the device with respect to surge capacity and clamping levels. 1.p�' REQUIRED SUPPRESSORS A. Pravide surge suppression for the equipment describ�d herein: 1 'r� On main electrical service entrance panels as shown in the praj�ct drawings. On distribution and branch circuit panels as shown in the project drawings. SURGE SUPPRESSION BID DOCUMENTS 16620 - 3 4/25/11 3. On all equipment id�ntified in the project drawings_ PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2_01 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPR�SSORS 0 . L ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS LEA Internatianal — PV20� Current Technology — TG100-L2 Liebert — SI-025-ANCE The surge suppr�ssor manufacturer shall offer a complete line of surge suppression products to support the required suppr�ssors listed in Part 1. The surge suppressor's minimum surge current capacity shall be 200kA per phase (L-N plus L-G) and 100kA per mode (L-N, L-G, L-L and N-G). D. The system protection modules shall contain a technalagy that utilizes a symmetrical array of balanced metal oxid� uaristors (MOV). Each MOV will be individually coordinated to pass UL 1449. E. The service �ntrance surge suppressors shall be designed with replaceable modules far purposes af in-service replacement. The unit suppressar shall be designed with redundant back-up surge protection in the event of a module failure. F. Madule stafius indicatars shall be pravided to indicate individual module status. When a module has failed, the madule LED status indicator shall indicate said failure. G. Each protection module shall hav� a capacitive filtering system cann�cted in each Line to Neutral (L-N)(Wye) made or Line to Line (L-L)(Delta) mode to provide EMI/RFI noise attenuation (Ul� 1283) H. Service entrance suppressors shall utilize narmal and c�mmon mades of protection - each phase lin� ta neutral, �ach phase line to ground and neutral to ground. Surge suppressor shall provide the fallowing monitoring features: dry cantacts, digital surge counter, and audible alarm with alarm disable switch. Suppressor shall utilize a NEMA 4 or NEMA 12 enclosure. J. Service entrance and panel type suppressors shall be installed with a means of discannecting the suppressor. If no dedicated circuit breaker is included in panel, manufacturer shall provide an integral fused disconnect. SURGE SUPPRESSION BID DOCUMENTS 16620 - 4 4/25/11 � L-J � � � � � l� C.J � 1 � � L _1 � � � �� 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 �14 15 16 17 1$ 19 2Q 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2$ 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 f�/ L Suppressors shall b� af a hybrid design and include circuitry with tight, wave- tracking clamping characteristics. Suppressors shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuaus operating voltage of not less than 115% of nominal RMS line voltag�. M. Each suppressor shall have an internal disconnect switch when not connected to a s�parate circuit breaker or fused disconnect switch which is dedicated specifically for the suppressor. N. Suppressors shall be failsafe, shall allow no follow-through current, shall have repeated surge capability, shall be solid state, shall be self-restaring, and shall b� fully aut�rnatic. O. Suppressars shall have an aperating temperature range af -40❑C to +85i�;C. 2.02 DISTRIBUTION BRANCH PANEL SUPPRESSORS /_� . ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS LEA International — SP200 Current Technology — CG100 Liebert �- AI I-111-RKE Suppressors shall meet all specification requirEments in section 2.1 except as fallows: 1. The suppressor's minimum surge current capacity shall be 200kA per phase (L-N plus L-G) and 10QkA per mode (L-N, L-G, L-L and N-G). 2. The suppressor protection modules shall contain a technology that utilizes a symmetrical array of balanced metal oxide varistors (MOV). Each MOV will be individually coordinated ta pass UL 1449. The suppressor is non-modular. 3. The suppressor shall provide thE following manitoring features: dry contacts, audible alarm and utilize a NEMA 4X enclasure. 2.03 BRANCH PANEL SUPPRESSORS A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS LEA International — SP100 Current Technology — CG060 Lieberk —ACV-111-RKE SURGE SUPPR�SSION 1662Q - 5 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 2 3 5 6 $ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 f:? �� Suppressors shall meet all specification requirements in section 2.1 except � as fallows: 1. The suppressor's minimum surge current capacity shall be 100kA per � phase (L-N plus L-G) and 50kA per made (L-N, L-G, L-L and N-G). 2. The suppressor pratection modules shall contain a technology that utilizes a symmetrical array of balanced metal oxide varistars (MOV). Each MQV will be individually coordinated to pass UL 1449. The suppressor is non-modular. � , 3. The suppressor shall provide the following monitoring f�atures: dry ' contacts, audible alarm and utilize a NEMA 4X enclosure. PART 3 - EXECUTIQN 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPRESSORS A. Suppressors shall b� installed as close as practical to the electric panel or electronic equipment to be pratected, consistent with available space. Suppressars shall be clase nippled to the device being protected in a position near the point of connections, which will minimize lead length between suppressor and the buses or control breaker to which the suppressor connects. Must have a grounding of 25 Qhms (NEC 250.56) or less and avoid any unn�cessary or sharp bends. B. For service entrance suppressars the lead length shall not exceed 36" fram power it is protecting and use a 3 pole 60 amp breaker far disconnection means. For distribution and sub panels, the lead length shall not exceed 18" from the power it is protecting and use a 3 pole 30 amp breaker for disconnection means. END OF SECTION 16620 SURGE SUPPRESSION 16620 - 6 BID DOCUMENTS 4/25/11 SECTIQN 16775 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.D1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work af this Section. 1.�2 DESCRIPTION �F WORK: Extent of variable frequency drives work required by this S�ctian is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this Section. A. All Variable Frequency Drives (Drives) shall be provided with the complete cantrol and protective functians listed is part 2 of this specification, the Auto control modes of the RA5 and WAS shall b� pravided as fiollaws: 1. WAS Pumps: positian, the network. When Drive Hand/Off/Auto selector switch is in AUTO Drive will be controlled via SCADA/PLC DeviceNet 2. RAS Pumps: When Drive Hand/Off/Auto selector switch is in AUTO position the VFD will operate in PID/set-point mode where 4-20mA signal proportional to level will be wired to �ach drive from a level transducer. The desired level set point will be entered directly into the Drives digital keypad display. The drive shall automatically modulate speed as required to maintain set point. The VFD manufacture will program the VFD far this operation as part of the factory field stark-up services. 3. Both RAS and WAS pumps Drive will communicate via DeviceNet for monitoring Drive status. B. Contractor shall m�asure Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) for voltage and current at the line side and load side of the Drives. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Praduct Data: Submit manufacturer's drive specifications and installation and start-up instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required cl�arances, and methads of assembly of components. C. Maintenance Data: Submit Operation and Maintenanc� Manual and parts VARIABLE FREQU�NCY DRIVES BID DOCUMENTS 16775 - 1 4/25/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 �T 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 zs 29 3Q 31 32 33 34 3� 36 37 38 39 �0 41 42 43 44 45 �l6 47 4$ 7 lists as specified in Section 01730. Provide training material as specified in Section 01820. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Handle variable frequency drives and camponents carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting, and scaring_ Da not install damaged drives or components; replace with new. : C Stare drives and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions far unloading driv�s and moving them ta final lacatian. 1.05 WARRANTY: All units shall be warranted far a period of eighteen (18) months fram the date af Engineer's acceptance and beneficial use of the system by the Owner. Any warranty expense during that time shall be born entirely by the manufacturer, including any travel costs or living expenses necessary to repair in warranty equipmsnt. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE: /�1 : The speed control for variable speed pumps shall be variable frequency drives suitable for installatian as shown on the drawings. The variable frequency drives shall include all internal auxiliaries required to m�et the functional specifications. C. The variable frequency drives shall canf�rm to all requirements stipulated in this section and Division 16 - Electrical, and shall be designed for an extended speed range of 0% to 100% of full load motor speed. D. Each driv� shall have the fallowing design features. 1 �� The drive shall employ micraprocessar-based inverter logic isolated from power circuits. The drive shall employ a diode or fully gated bridge on the input. 3. All drives shall employ a DC bus inductor ta reduce line harmanics and improve power factor. � VARIA�LE FREQUENCY DRIVES 16775 - 2 � BID DOCUMENTS � 4/25/11 C [� � �. J � � � � � L.J CJ 1.,� 4. Variable frequ�ncy drive harmonic distortion shall be limited in accordance with IEEE 519 (1992) as measured at the input terminals of the VFD. 5. The drive shall employ a comm�n Main Cantrol Board. 6. The drive shall employ a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) inverter system using third generator IGBT's ta minimize audible motor noise and increase ov�rall performance. 7 � � The drive shall employ a switching logic power supply operating from the DC bus. The driv� shall emplay phase to phase and phase to ground MOV protection. The drive shall be provided with DeviceNet serial control capability far future monitoring and cantral flexibility. 10. The drive shall be designed to have a minimum of 2 kHz carri�r frequency without de-rating output to minimize audible mator noise. 11. All drives above 75 hp shall be provided as 18-pulse dual rectifier input. Full kva rated phase shifting transformers shall be provided and mounted internal to the VFD enclosure. 12. All drives 40 hp and abave shall be provided as 12 pulse dual rectifier �n�ut. 13. The drive shall be designed to operate on an AC line which may cantain line notching and up to 10% harmonic distortion. � 33 14. The drive shall be designed to shut down with no camponent failure in 34 the event of an autput phase to phase or phase to ground short circuit 35 and provide annunciation of the fault condition. � lJ �- 1 � �� 15. The drive shall be designed with a comman control connection diagram for all ratings. 16. The drive shall be designed such that the inverter section power semiconductors do not require commutation capacitors. 17. The driv� shall be designed to be variable torque rated. The drive shall supply 110% of rated current for up to one minute. 18. The drive shall be designed to allow all parameter adjustments ta be made with the door closed. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES BID DOCUMENTS 16775 - 3 4/25/11 19. The drive shall be provided in a NEMA 3R (Marine grade aluminum, powder coated ANSI 61) enclosure. Maximum dimensions of the enclosures are as follows: a_ 40HP and 50HP VFDs: 32"W x 25"D x 84"H, floor standing. b. 1 OHP: 26"W x 18"D x 48"H, wall mounted. 20. The drive shall be designed with a common Custam�r Interface for all horsepawer ratings. The Interface shall include an LCD digital display, programming keypad and operator keys option. 21 _ The drive shall provide multiple programmable stop modes, including ramp, caast, brake and S-curve. 22. The drive shall be designed to have an adjustable output frequency up to 60 Hz ±1 Q%. E, The drives shall have the following features. Interface: The drive shall provide a removable Human InterFace Module with integral display to show drive operating conditians, adjustments, and fault indications. The display shall be removable under power without causing a drive fault and be visible and operable without opening the enclosure door. This unit is a 7 line by 21-character backlit LCD display with graphics capability. It is used to display drive operating conditions, fault / alarm indications and pragramming information with full text support in English language. The drive can also be pragrammed and display all speed values in either H�rtz or RPM. 2. Volts per Hertz Adjustment: Drive programming shall provide the ability ta fully configure the volts per hertz for squared, cubed, straight line or full custom patterns. 3. Current Limit: The drive shall pravide a programmable current limitfrom 20% ta 150% of variable torque rating. Current limit shall be active for all drive states; accelerating, canstant speed, and decelerating. The drive shall employ PI Regulation far smooth transition. 4. Acceleration/Deceleration: The Accel/Decel settings shall provide separate adjustments to allow either setting to be adjusted from 0 seconds to 600 secands. Th� drive shall provide a second set of remotely selectable Accel/Decel settings. 5. Speed R�gulation: The drive shall be capabl� of operating in a variety of speed regulation modes, including slip compensation with 0.5% speed regulation. 6. Speed Prafiles: The drive shall be capable of producing speed profiles ' VARIABLE �REQUENCY DRIVES BID DOCUMENTS 16775 - 4 4/25/11 � � � � � � �J � � � � �� �� �� � � � � 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 1Q 11 12 13 1� 15 16 17 18 19 20 z� 22 23 24 25 26 27 2$ 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 with linear acceleration/ deceleratian or 'S-Curve' profiles that provide changing Accel/Decel rates. S-Curve profiles shall be selectable for fixed or adjustable values. 7_ Adjustments: The digital interface shall be used for all set-up, operation, and adjustment settings. All adjustments shall be stored in non-volatile memory for factory default values as well as a programmable set of user defaults. 8. Auto Commissianing: The drive shall be capable of automatically determining the motor's stator resistance by outputting both an AC and DC voltage ta the mator and monitaring motor curr�nt. Stator resistance shall be stored in drive memary far determining proper voltage and current requirements. 9. IR Compensation (DC Boost): The drive shall provide a selectable range for offsetting mator losses at low frequency operation DC Baost shall be current regulated and shall automatically adjust, on each start, to load changes. DC Boost shall be programmable from 15% ta 120% of drive rated current. This functian shall be part of the Auto Cammissioning and set by th� VFD during AutaTuning. 10. Fault Reset/Run: The drive shall pravide up to ten automatic fault r�set and restarks follawing a fault condition before locking out and requiring manual restart. 11. 5kip Tendencies: The drive shall provide three adjustable sEtpaints ta Iock out cantinuous aperation at frequencies which may product mechanical resonance. The setpoints shall have an adjustabie bandwidth of 0 Hz to 60 Hz. 12. Run On Power Up: The drive shall provide for autamatic restart of equipment after restoration of pawer after an outage. 13. Fault Memory: The drive shall provide a means to store the last four faults as well as operating frequency, drive status, and pawer made at time of fault. Infarmatian shall be maintained in the �vent of power loss. 14. Overload Protection: The drive shall provide NEC motor overload pratection testing in accordance with UL Standard 991. (including Thermal Memary Retention per the newest UL Standard). 15. Terminal Blocks: The drive shall provide separate terminal blocks far control and pow�;r wiring. 16. Operator's Devices: The drive shall be provided with the following daor mounted pilot devices in addition to the door mounted Human Int�rFace VARIA[3LC �REQUENCY DRIV�S BID DOCUMENTS 1 16775 - 5 4/25/11 Module: a. Hand/Off/Auto selector switch b. Power On pilot light c. Run pilot light d. Fault pilot light 17. Control Inputs: The drive shall provide a separate control input terminal block for customer wiring to remote start, stop, auxiliary, r�mote speed reference access and enabl� inputs. Four additional inputs shall be provided as programmable for functions such as preset speed access, job, second Accel and Decel time access and lacal cantrol selection. Inputs shall be programmable to configure the drive for standard 3 wire, 2 wir�, EC and serial operation requirements. 18. Ride Through: The drive shall be capable of cantrol logic ride thraugh in the event af power outages up to 2 seconds in duration. 19. Lass of Reference: In the event of loss af the 4 mA to 20 mA reference signal, the drive shall be user pragrammable to the following: a. Fault and stop b. Alarm and maintain last refer�nce (within 10%) c. Alarm and got to preset speed d. Alarm and go to minimum speed e. Alarm and go to maximum speed. 20. Analog Output: The drive shall supply two analog outputs selectable 0 volt DC to 10 voft DC or 0/4 mF� to 20 mA which shaii be user pragrammable such that is proporti�nal to autput frequency, output current, bus voltage or output power, KW; output volts, or output current. 21. Digital I/O: The drive contact output ratings shall be 115 volt AC / 3D valt DC, 5.0 amps resistive, 2.0 amp inductive. The three contacts provided shall be as follows a. Farm C Fault Contact b. Two programmable Form A contacts. 22. Reference Signals: a. Digital: The drive shall be capable of operating from a pulse input with programmable Phase I�ock Loop for input/output synchranization. b. Analog: Th� drive shall be capable of operating from the following speed reference signals: i. VFD Human Interface Madule (Hand) ii. 4 mA to 20 mA signal (Remote) VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES BID DOCl.1M�NT5 16775 - 6 4/25/11 � � � � �� � ' � LJ , , � � � � � �� ' r 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 �7 iii. Internal set-point controller with 4-20mA process variable input signal from external transducer. 23. Internal pump Controller Capability: In addition ta ability to follow an analag input related for speed control the driue shall be able to operat� in the following control modes: a 0 � r.i Simplex cantroller: The drive shall Accept a 4-20ma input proportional to the process variable (flow, pressure, or as indicated in other section of the plans and specifications). Th� drive shall accept direct keypad �n#ry or analag input �ntry of desired setpoint. The Drive shall utilize PI setpoint contral ta continuously modulate output speed to maintain setpaint. Multi-plex cantroller: The drive shall be capable of being operated as a multiplex controller aperating as in simplex made with same system inputs but provide lead-lag control of up to 6 pumps such that setpoint is controlled via operation of one ar more pumps while alternating pumps to evenly distribute operation time. Digital inputs shall be programmable to include the following functions and digital display shall indicate the following condition status using the following English messages: i. Check Valve input alarm/fault ii. High or low IevEl Alarm/fault iii. High or l.ow input pressure Alarm/fault iv. High pressure alarm/fault v. External Fault vi. Pump precharge Analog inputs shall be programmable to include the following functions and digital display shall indicate the following condition status using the following English messages: i. Process variable input (pressure, flow, level, ar other). ii. Setpoint iii. Speed reference 24. The fallowing pump specific cantrol and protectiv� features shall be provided. Prot�ctive features shall provide English language display on drive digital display when active: a. Lass of prime protECtion b. Over Cycling protection c. No flow detection d. Thrust bearing start e. Low input pressure f. Low/high flow level g. Anti Jam protection h. De-scale operation VARIABLE FR�QU�NCY DRIVES BID DOCUMENTS 1 16775 - i 4/25/11 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 �. Acceptable manufacturer for the variable frequEncy drive units is Allen- Bradley, Yaskawa by ICON Technologies and Square D. Any other manufacturer must be pre-approved ten (10) days prior to bid opening date. PART 3 - �XECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: Examine areas and conditions under which variable frequency drives are to be installed. Do nat proceed with work until un5atisfactory conditions have been correct�d in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF DRIVES: A. General: Install variable frequency drives where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructians, complying with recagnized industry practices to ensure that system complies with requirements and services intended purpases. L� � � L. .� � � 1 B. Access: Provide access space around drives far service as indicated, but in � no case less than that recommended by the manufacturer. 3.03 HARMONIC TESTING: A. Furnish in tabularform the Voltage, Current and Total harmonicdistartion at the Line Side and Load side af each Drive. Measurements shall include fundamental thru the 11 th harmonic component. The measurem�nts shall be taken for each �rive at No-Load and Full-Load. The PCC shall be the Line terminals of the Driv�. B. Test instrument used shall be Wave Analyzer type which measure amplitude and phase angles and can recard the measured values. Measurement Instrument shauld have a canstant bandwidth for the entire range af frequencies used; Selectivity (ability to separate harmonic components of diff�rent frequencies) attenuation shall be 60dB (0.1 % af fundamental) as a minimum. 3.04 TRAINING: Provide start up services as specified in S�:ction 01625 and training services as specified in Section 0182p. END OF SECTION 16775 VARIABL� FREQUENCY DRIV�S 16775 - 8 BID DOCUMENTS � 4/25/11 � � � ._ � � � � � r � �' � � � � � � � � sECTioN v CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Tablc ot Contents: CONTRACTBOND ..............•--•-••-•---...-•---•-•---•-•-----•--.............................................................-•--- 1 CONTRACT....................................................................•-•--------................................................... 3 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYML+'N"I . ..................................................... 6 1'It01'OSAL BOND -------------------------••-•---•-•-•-•-•-•-•--••----................................................................. 7 AFTI.DAV[.T ...........................................................................................................................•---•.. 8 NON-COLLUSI�N AFFIDAVIT ---•-•----••--------------•---....-----.....................................................--- � PROPOSAL....................................................................•-----•-•---•-----.....----•----........:.................... l 0 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEE'C' ................................................................. 13 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL----•-•-••-• ......................................................•--•-•-•--........---...-•----•--...-•---.. l4 Sec�ion v .aoc C'age i U4/26/1 1 1 - �FLORiDA SURETY BONDS, IN� � j � � �A � 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' 1 1 1 1 1 1..� i=: . 1 � ' July 21, 2011 City of Clearwater, Florida 100 South Myrtle Avenue, 3rd Floor Clearwater, FL 33756 Re: Auihority to Date Bonds and Poweirs of Attorney Principad: RTD Construction, Inc. 620 N. Wymore Road, Suite 200 Maitland, FL 32751 407-786-7770 Fax 407-786-7766 1326 S. Rid�ewood Avenue, Suite �'15 Daytona Beach, FL 32114 386-898-0507 Fax 386-898-0510 888-786-BOND (2663) Fax 888-718-BOND (2663) www, F I or i daSu rety8 on ds. ca m Bond No.: 5066271 Project: CLARIFIER REHABILITATION - NORTMEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 1-4 (iQ-0023-UT), Glearwater, Florida Dear Sir or Madam: Please be advised that as Surety on the above referenced bond, executed on, your behalf for this pxoject, we hereby authorixe you to date the bonds and the powers of attomey concurrent with the date of the contract agreement. Qnce dated, please fax a copy of the bands ta aur office. Sincerely, -�- WeStField Insurance Company ��. Teresa L. Durham � Attomey-in-Fact and Florida Licensed liesident Agent 1 , Public Work �xecuted In 6 Gounterparts F.S. Chapter 2SS.05 (1)(a) , Cover Page 7HIS BOND IS GIVEN TO COMPLY WITH 8EC710N 256.05 OR SECTION 713.23 FLDRIDA S7A7UTES, AND ANY ACTION IN51'iTUTED BY A CLAIMANT UNDER THIS B�ND FOR PAYMENT MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE ' WITH THE NOTICE AND TIME I.IMITATION PR�VISIONS IN SECTION 255.05(2) OR SECTION 713.23 FLORIpA 57AYUTES. soND No: 6066271 LJ 1 1 1 1 1 ' �� ' 1 , 1 ' 1 ' CONTRACTOR NAME: CONTRACTOR ADDRESS: CONTRACTQR PHONE N�: SUItETY COMPANY: OWNER NAME: OWNER ADARESS: OWNER PHONE NO.: OBLIGEE NAME: (If contracting entiry is different from the ownar, the contracting public entiry) OBI,IGEE ADD1t�SS: OBLIGEE PHONE NO.: BOND AMOUNT: CONTRACT N�.: (If applicable) DESCRiPTION OF WOitK: PRQJECT LOCATION: LEGAL DESCRIPTIQN: (If applicable) RTD Constructi�n�Inc. _ __ _. 5344 9th Street Ze h rhills FL 33542 81 783-9119 Westfield Insurance Com an PO Box 5001 Westfield Center, OH 44251-5001 (330) 887-Oi.Qi Citv of Clearwater, Florida _ , 100 South Myrtle Avenue, 3rd Floor Clearwater FL 33756 727 562-4758 1,419,235.18 CLARIFIER REHABILITATION - NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 1-4�0-0023-UT) Clearwater, Florida FRONT pAGE All other bond page(s) are deemed subsequent to this page �egardless of any page num�er(s) that may be printed thereon. ' 1 �1 ' THE ATTACHED STATUTORY COVER PAGE FORMS AND SEC�MES A FART UF THIS BOND. STATE OF FLORIDA CUUNTY OF PYNELLAS BOND NUMBER: 60�6271 Executed in 6 Counterparts cotvTRac�r soND , KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE FRESENTS: That we RTD NSTRUCTIOIV INC. Contractor and WESTFIELD INSLTRANCE COMPANY (Surery) whose home address is P. O. B X 5001 WES?FIELD CENTER �H10 44Z51-5001. 1 ' 1 1 ' 1 , 1 1 1 ' 1 ' ' _ HEItEINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety", ar� held and firmly hound into the City af Clearwater, Florida (hereinafter called the "Qv►mer") in the p�nal sum of: ONE MILLION FOUR HUNDRED NINETEEN THOUSAND TWO HUNDRED THIRTY•FIVE DOLLARS AND EIGHTEEN CENTS ($1,419,235.1$) for the payment af which we bind oursclves, our heirs, cxecutors, administrators, successors, and assigns for the faithfut performance of a certain writtea cantract, dated the„_,__,_, day of � 20l I, entered into between the Contractor and the City af Clearwatcr for: CLARIFIER REHABILITATION — NORTHEAST WRF CLARiFIERS !-4 (10-OQ23-UT) a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully copied hcrein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the Contractor sha{1 in alj respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the one-ycar guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract documents {which include the Advertisement far Sids, Form oiProposal, Form af Contract, Form of Surety 8ond, Instructions to Biddcrs, General Conditians and Technical Specifications) and thc Plans and Specificatinns therein referred to and made a part thercaf, and such alteratians as may be madc in said Plans and Specificatians as therein provided far, and shatl indemnify and save harrnless the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, dama�es, injury or canduct, want of care or sfcill, ncgligence or default, including patent infringements on the Part af the said Contractor agents or employ�es, in the execution or performance of said contract, includin� errors in the plans fumishcd by the Contractor, and further, if such "Conaactor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make payments to all persons supplying him� them ar it, labor, material, and supplies used diractly ar indirectly by said Contractar, Contractors� Sub-Contracwr, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosccution of the work pmvidcd far in said Contract, this obligation shall be vaid, atherwise, the Contractor and Surety joindy and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference b�tween the sum to which thc said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may be obliged ta pay for the completinn of said work by contract or atherwisc, dt any damages, direct or indirect, or cansequentiat, which said �wner may sustain an accaunt of such wark, or on account of the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in al1 things, keep and executc all the provisions of said cantract. Pas� t 1 ' �-� ' 1 1 ' 1 ' 1 ' 1 1 1 ' 1 � ' �� CONTRACT BOND (2) And the said Contractor and Surety hereby futther bind themselv�s, their successors, executon, administrators, and assi�ns, jointly and severally, that they wi11 amply and fully protect the said Q+��ner a�ainst. and will pay any and all amounts, damages. costs and judgmcnts which may be reco��ered against or which the �vvner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by rcason nf nny damages arisin� from the performance of said work. or of the repair or maintenance ehereof: or the manner of doing the same nr the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or servancs or the impraper performance of the said work by the Contraetor ar his agents or servants, ar th� infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done; as aforesaid, or otherwisc. And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors> heirs, e�ecutors, administrators, and assi�ns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the ��mer may be campelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the work, embraced by said Contract. And the said Surety, for the value received, here6y stipulates and ggrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract ar to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect irs abligatians on this ban�, and it dnes hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration ar addition to the terms of the cantract or ta the work or to the speci�c�tions. I�' TESTIM�NY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this . day of , �21.�.• __ _-------� --•-- .. -� - --- — � � f'J�,�_ -� i � .i� •i - i� � .i aw ' r' ' , WITNESS: C4UNTERS[GNED: ��.U�• _, TERESA L. DURHAM FLORIDA LICENSED RESIDENT AGENT Pa�c Z t.v1 • ■ a�vv � C0�4TRA � , . �� . ' :I' I �I;�YI `, ,. WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY SUR.E'I'Y `: `','�� � : .,. p � Q / ii .C1 p� , ° y �'�✓� , . � . � . r • , . 17y: JG.iV��u ,� r^. �w, �•� A'R'ORNEY-I�'-FAC'� :�� ; ,,�� TERESA L. DURHAIV� =� � � INQUIRIES: (407) 786�'�,��. � "� ""+� � ��w� : , .� _ .�,,. : '� `� ^!'���..j.., :°A,�,� ``�.ti [� ' � , 1 1 �J 1 1 1 ' � ' � ' ' ' 1 � THI5 p�WER OF A7TORNEY SUPERCEUES ANY PREVIOU5 POWER BEARING TMIS SAME POWEq � AND ISSUED PRIOR TO D4/13/70, FOR ANY PERSON OR P�RSON5 NAMED BELOW. - POWER NO. 0990992 00 General Power of Attorney GERTIFIED C�PY Westfield Insurance Co. Westfield National Insurance Co, �hio Farmers Insurance Co. Westfieid Center, Ohio Know Al! Men by rthese Presents, 7hat WE5TFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE GOMPANY and QF110 FARMERS INSURANGE GOMPANY, corporations, hereinafter referred ro individualry as a"Gompany" and collactively as "Companies," dwy organized and existing under the laws of the State of Ohio, and having its principal office m WeStfield Center, Medina County, Ohlo, do by these presen[s make, constltute end appoint pON BRAMLAOE, JEFFREY W. REICH, LESLIE M. DONAHUE, SUSAN L REICH, PATRICIA L. SLAUdH7ER, dLOR1A A. RICHARDS, TERESA L DURHAM, 41SA A. ROSELAND, CHERYL FOLEY, J. GREGORY MACKENZIE, JOINTLV DR SEVERALLY of MAITLAND and Stata of FL its true and lawful Attorney�s►-in-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver a�ry and all bonds, recognizances_ underlakings, or other instruments ar contracts of suretyship- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LIMITATION: 7H15 PoWEa OF ATraRNEY CaNNOT 8E USEP TO EXECUTE NQTE GUARANTEE, MOR7GAGE D�FICIENCY, MORTGAGE GUARANTEE, OR BANK DEPO5ITORY BONDS. and to bind any of the Companies thereby as Fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seal of the applicaple Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all tha[ the said Attorney(s)-in-Fect may do in the premises. Saiq appointment is made under and by authority of the following resolution adoptad by the Board of Directors of eacn of the WESTFIELD INSURANCE GOMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OFilO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY: "&e It Resolved, that the President, any 5anior Executive, any Secretary or any Fidelity 8� Surety Operations Executive or other Executive shall be and Is hereby vested with Tull power and authorlty to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for 8nd on bBh31f pf th0 CO/IlpBny Sl1bJeCt t0 the fOIIOWIIIg pfOVi91�f1S: The Attorney-in-Facf. may he given full power and authority for anQ in the name ot and on behalf af the Company, to execute, acknowledge and dellVer, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements of inqemnity and other conpitional or obligatory undertakings and any and all notices and doCUments canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and eny such instruments so executed py any such Attorney-in-FsCt shall be a5 binding upOn the Company as iF signed by tne President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary." "Be it Further Resolved, that the signature of any such designated person and the seal of the Company heretofare or hereafter affixed to any power oF attorney or any certificate relating thereto by tacsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signaturas or tacsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." (�ach adopted at a meeting held on February 6, 2000). In Wi[ness Whereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WES7FIELD NATIONAL INSIJRANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE GOMPANY have caused these prssents to be signed by thelr Senior Executive and their corporate seals to bs hereto afTixed thls 13th day of APRIL A.D., 2010 . w.w� �����u�,�n��� ' �,.w�r�n. carpora�e ~"""'+ , � "'•• WESTFIELp INSURANCE COMPANY Yp tinNA(. sea�s q��s �.',h�'$"� ,,••`�,�;T••••' •��5�;•• ��` � �`'°� WES7FIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY o,tt�xed v� �+• �p�� r o: •9"- }� �s!_ � OHIO FARM�RS INSURANCE COMPANY +`- 'u'� '�x,s e�:�'��"^W'• 3 � r• 5� �� - r: SE.AL :m: =�� �= ` . � `��•,,� ,an �� � = �'. ,:o ,: ��';_ 1649 . �� � . :,�'•. : '*� = � .,: aj,,� ••..� ..- � t State of Ohio ,�� *����,.,�•' �"•�n:,..«��••••' By: Gounty or nnedina ss.: Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., 5enior Executive Un this 13th day oT APRIL A.D., 201D , before me personally came Richard L. Klnnaird, Jr. to me known, who, being bY m0 duly sworn, did depose and say, that he resides In Medlna, ahio; that he is Senior EXeCUtive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANGE COMPANY and OMIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the compenies dascribed in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seals ot said Companles; that the seals affixed to said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed by order oT the Boards of Directors of said Companfes; and that he signed his name thereto by Ilke order. NotaYlal N"""Nw,,� . ' Seal q\ p L a, � amxea �p.,,.-....... �' 2 : -\\lllq� t � wlliam J. Kahelin, A rney at Law, Notary Public S[ate af Ohio ��1+� •��O My Cvmmission poes Nat Expire (Sec, 147.03 Ohlo Revised Code) County of Medina ss.: q ro �~��01 � I, Frank A. Carrino, 5ecretary of WEStFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIQNAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, do here�y Certify that the abave and forP.going is a true and colrect GDpy of a POWer of Attorney, exeCUted by said Companies, which is still in full force and affect; and furthermore, the resolutions of the �oa►ds at Directars, set out in the Power of Attomey are in futl fvrce and effect. In Wi[ness Whereof, I have hereunto sat my hand and aftixed the seals of sald Companies at Wastfield Center, Ohio, [his day of _-- Rr.U:;-., . _ - Y,,,�� esw:,, - • . . , . �,C1NA r _ , p•l�1`s� �;�� - �;•°�P'�!... �,'N.r '.= .a. �.. _ - = o: ••�a = ' rr"� yNr �''i^b F -' ''yx : — HZ �R !i Qi •� e�: 'c7= ,_ _ � fS�aJA FAa��- - �'. SEAL :m = — �wi�ay :n� •,�,,.� �: ;••. :-�:� _ u • 4 - ���/��� �1���������� gpO�A,,�2 (COrr.b:ned) (eib'-02j .r.w""un a. �� ��� a �t►ATEIt�p'e � �.. ' ' °� � Sacr¢tary � � ��:� 1$4H r � Frank A. Carrino", Secref 4 �•' ••'�` a �, �y�M���IU��N�.�� 1 w ' 1 1 ' ' 1 ' ' ' , 1 � 1 1 1 � � CONTRACT This CONTR.ACT rnade and entered into this $`�` day of � U�uS �i' , 2p11 by and between, the City of Clearwater, Florida, a m.unicipal cozporation, here�nafter designated as the "City", and RTD CONSTRUCTI�N, INC. of the City of ZEPHYRHILLS, County of PASCO and State of FLORIDA hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises arad agreezn�ents on the part of the other herein contained, do h�reby undertake, promise acxd agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of mon�y as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contra.ctor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perfarm all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipznent for the following: CLARIFXER REHABILITATION — NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFXERS 1-4 (10-0023-UT} F�R THE Si7M OF: ONE MILLIUN FOUR HUNDRED NINETEEN THOUSAND TWO HUNDRED TH�RTY-FTVE DULLARS AND EIGHTEEN CENTS ($1,419,235.18) In. accordance with such pro�osal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which xxaay be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which nnay be herein referred ta, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successars aud assigns shall be ful.ly completed in a goad and wark�xlanlike manner to the satisfaction of the Ciry. If the Contractor should fail to comply vvith any of the tez�ns, conditions, provisions or stipulatians as contained herein within rhe tixne specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of az�y or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contra.ctor is abligated ta perform in accordaz�ce with the provisians as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSTGNS DOE5 HEREBY AGREE T4 ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHXCH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CTTY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT UF THIS C�NTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATYONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, dUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY. CLAXMS MADE UNDER THIS C�NTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTR.ACTOR'S SUB-CONTR.ACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPL�YEES RESULTING FRUM ACTIVITIES SY THE AF�REMENTIUNED CONTRACTOR, SUS-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLDYEES. I'age 3 , 1 CONTRACT �2) ' In addition to the foregoing pravisions, the Contractor agrees ta conform ta the Following requirements: , In connection with the performance af wark under this contract, the Contractor agrees not ta discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religzon, color, or national arigin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: ' employrnent, upgrading, demation, or trans%r; recna.itment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or tertnination; rates of pay or other fornns af compensation; and selection for training, including , apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees ' or applicants far employment, notices to be provided by the contracting o�ficer setting forth the provisions of the nan.-discrinnination clause. ' The Contractor further a�rees to insert the foregoing pr�visions in all contracts hereunder, including c.�ntracts or agreements with labor unions and/or wprker's representatives, except sub-contractors for stazxdard commercial supplies or raw materials. ' It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be perfartt�ed by the Cantractor is not completed within the tirne stipulated ' herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Connractor the sum of �1,000.00 ner dav for each day that the work ta be performed by the Contractor remains incampl�te beyond the time limit speci�ed herein, which sum of $1,000.00 ner da� shall only and solely represent dazziages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of � the Contractoz to camplete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this surn is not to be cons�ued as a penalty but is only to b� construed as liquidated damages for failure of the ' Contractor to complete and perform all work witk�.in the tixne period as specified in this contract, It is further znutually agreed between tlae City and the Contractor that if, any time after the �xecution of ' this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithfitl performance of the te�xz�s and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any tizn.e deenn the surety or sureties upon such perfornnance bond to be unsatisfactary ar if, �or any reason, the said band ceases to ' be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its ow;n. e�cpense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice frorn the City ta do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and arnounts and with such surety or sureties as shall b� satisfactory to the , City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this cantract until such new or additional security band guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and fiarnished to the City in a form ' satisfactory to it. ' 1 �J � I'age 4 � � 1 1 , 1 1 1 , 1 , , 1 1 1 1 1 �� CONTRACT (3) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, tlae day and year fixst above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By.�' r �. � William B. Horne, II City Manager Countersigned: r By: � � l/ Fr Hibbard, Mayor-Councilmexnber (Contractor must indicate whether Corporation., Partnership, Company or Individual.) (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principa]'s name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he m�ust, by �davit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). Page 5 (Seal) ��u�.at�.� �a.� — Roseznarie Call Camilo Sota Assistant City Attorney � � � . t ► � �r, � �. �! �1 � f� r1 �_� � . �.. � � 1 Sy_ ��� �uiUrul! �j � . �"a �e5 id�R.� �, ' ,.. � �� - -� � '�,,.� � �� �� :. � °,:� ',� � � .. . �. t� , �� 1 1 1 �� C4NTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FTNAL PAYMENT (CURPORATION FORM) STATE OF FLORIDA COUN'�'Y OF On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to admini.ster oaths and take ackriowledgznents, , who after being duly sworn, deposes and says: That he is the (TITLE) of RTD � CONSTRUCTION,,INC. a Floxida Cozpoxataan, with its principal place of business located at 5344 9T� STREET, ZEPHYRHT[.LS, FLORIDA 33541 (herein, the "Contractor"). ' That the Can�actor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of ^ , 20_, with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a rnunicipal corporation, as Ov�mer, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of �� , 1 CLAR�F�ER REHABILTTATION — NURTHEAST WRF 1-4 (10-0023-UT) Ihat said work has naw been completed and the Cantractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors, laborers and material men in connection with said work and the:re are no liens outstanding of any nature nox any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work against the described properiy. That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requizements of Ch.apter 713, Florida Statutes, , and upon consideration of the payment oi (Final Full Ann�aunt of Cantract) in full satisfaction and discharge af said contract. ' 1 ' , , ' 1 1 That the Qwner is hereby xeleased from any claim which might arise out of said Contract. The word "liens" as used in this affidavit sha.11 nnean any and all arising under the operatian a� the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes. Sworn and subscribed to before me This day of , 20 NOTARY PUSLIC ivly Commission Expires: Page G RTD CONSTRUCTION, INC. AFFIANT I:• PRESIDENT , 1 �� LJ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' 1 �I J � , , ' Executed in 2 Counterparts PRUFQSAL BQN.D (Not to bc filled out if a cettified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESEN'I'S: That we, the undersi�ned, RTD Construction, Inc. __ as Principal, and Westfield Insurance Company as Surety, who'S addre55 is PO Box 5001. Westfield Centey OH 44251-50Q1 , are held and firmly bound unto the City of Cleazwater, Flarida, in the sum of K ,,� �1 �.�e kw�dred � i.e�r w�� Dollars ($ 1`i 1, qq+ )(being a minimum af 10% af Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and �uly to be made, we hercby jointly and severally bind ourselves, aur heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. The canditian pf the above obligation is such that if the attached Pt�oposal of RTD Construction, Inc. as Principal, 8nd _ Westfield Insurance Compan� �� � Surety, farwork specified as: Bid No. 10-0023-UT; Northeast Water Fteclamation Facility WRF^ Clarifiers 1-4 Rehabilitation � all as stipulated .in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided hereFor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded t�a thc above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after natice of said awar� enter into a contr�ac� in wridng, and furnish Che t�quired Perfarmance Bpnd with surety or sureties to be approved by tbic City Manager, this obligation shall be void, vthawise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the fu]l amount of tlus Pmposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated ar liquidated damages. Signe� this 9th �ay of June (Principal must i�icar.e whether corporation, parinership, campany or individual) The peison signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title; the person signing far a corporatinn must, by affidavit, show his suthority ta bind the ccxporaiion 5cction v.doc 20 �� . RID C��, Znc. � A ' rP�'atian Princip � By. Title � E. , Presi� Westfield Insurance Company � .�.t�--v � '� � � �"'�-�rn Surety Teresa L. Durham, Aktorney- in-Fact & FL Licensed Resident Agent Pagc 7 af 14 04/26/1 1 ' THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY SUPERCF�ES ANY PREVIOUS POWER BEARING THI5 5AME POWER � AND ISSUED PRIOR TO 04/73/1D, FOR ANY PERSqN OR P�R50N5 NAMEO BELOW. �J ' ' ' General Power of Attorney CERTIFIED COPY POWER NO. 0990992 00 Westfield Insurance Co. Westfreld National Insurance Co. �hio Farmers Insurance Co. Westfield Center, Ohio Know A!r AAen by These Presenis, 7hat WESTFIELD iNSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELp NA710NAL INSURANCE CqMPANY and �HIQ FARMERS INSURANCE GOMPANY, corporations, hereinafYer referred to individually as a"Gompany" antl collectively as "Companies,' duly organiZed and exisYmg under the Idws of the State of Ohio, ana naving its princlpal oftice in Westfield Genter, Medlfte C011llty, Ohio, po ay these presents make,con5tltute and appoint DDN 6RAMLAGE, JEFFREY W. REICH, LESLIE M. DONAHUE, SUSAN L REICH, PATRICIA I.. 5LAUGHTER, GLORIA A. qICNARDS, TERESA L DURHAM, LISA A_ ROSELANO, CHERYL FDLEY, J. GREGORIF �AACKENZIE, JOIN7LY OR SEYERALLY pi MAITLANU and State of FL its true and lawful Attomey(sj-in-Fact, with full power and authonty hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver arry and all 6ands, recagni2anCes, undel'takings, or other instruments ol' contraGts of , wretyship-------------------�--------•---.._..---�------�•-------------• LIMITATI4N: 7Ft15 pb1NER OF ATT�RNEY CANNOT BE USED TO E%ECUTE N�TE GUARAHTEE, MORTGAGE DEFICIENCY, MdRTGAGE iCiUARANTEE, OR BANK DEVOSITORY BONb5. and to bind any of the Companies thereby as fully and to the same e�dent as iF such bonds were signed by the President, sealad wrth the corporata ' seal ot the applicaoie company ana auiy attested by its 5ecretary, heraby ratifying and confirming all that the salcl Attorney(s�-In-Fact may do in the premises. Said appointment is made under and by authonty oT [he fauowing resWution adopted by the Board ot Directors ot eacn of the WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIEL� NATIpNAL INSURANCE COAAPANY anQ OHIp FqRMERS INSURANCE COMPANY: "86 lt Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any SaCretary or any Fidelity & Surety Operations ExeLUtive or other Executive shall be and Is herehy vested with full ppwer and authority to appofnt 2ny onB Or more sultable persons as Aftorney(s)-in-FaCt to represent and act Tor and on behalf of the Company subject to the tollowing provisions: , Tha Attorney-in-Fact. may be given tuli power and auChority Ta and in the name ot and on bEhalt ot the Cbmpany, to eXeCUt6, aCknoWledge and dellver, any and all bOnds, resogniZanCes, contracts, agreements Df indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all notices and documents canceling or terminating the Companys liability thereunder, and sny 5uch instruments 5o axecuted by any such Attorney-in-Fsct shall ba as hinding upon the Company as if slgned by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Se�retary " "Se It Furlher Resaved, that the signature of any such designated p�son and the seal of the Company heretotare or hereafter affixed to any ' pawer pf attorney qr any certificate relating thereto by }acsimfle, and any power of attorney vr certificate bearing facsimile signatures or Tacsimile seal shafl ne valia ana binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking [o which it is attacnad" (Each adopted at a meeting held on February 8, 200D}. In Witness Whereof, WES7FIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL iNSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY haVB Caused these presents to be signed by thell' Senlol' Execudve and their corporate spals to be hereto afflxetl this 73th day of APRIL A.D., 2070 . Corvorate .yy��`'� �,.•`'��nNA(,��'' .�'°�~���"'"•� WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY , Seais ���..�--• 'vC��� ;� ,rP,..• ..ks�,: �� �� yVESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY '6'tt�"���1' ""'� � �� �� �'_�,_ ����.�� QHIO FARMERS.INSURP,NCE CUMPANY ,�'� �ry� sv '�: SEta�. �me =e' •�Q � - � , ����•, �„n� � : 3.. -.o ? _� :.]g4� *�; . State of Ohio �„ *�.�� '~..�%�.W��"��� �y: County of Medina ss.: Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., Senior Executive 1 ' ' , ' 1 r 1 On this 13th day oi APR14 A.D., 2010 , berore me personauy came Rlchard L. Kinnaird, Jr. to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say, that ne resides in Medina, Ohio; that he �s Seninr Executive nf WE57FIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIEL.D NATIDNAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHtO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seals of s8id Gompanies: that tlle seals atfix�ed to 58id iny�rumBnt 8re such cOrpOrate sBals; that they were so attiXed by order of the Boards of Dire+ctors oP said Companies; and that he signed his name thereta by Ilke order. NotaHal , SBdI �� A L � a,�r%Ed �(P.,.-....... S oj ���iu//� ;�`� � �. - '� • Willlam J. Kabelin, A ney at Law, Notary Pub/ic State oi O�io a� , M�o My Commission ppes Not E�ire (5ec. 147.03 Ohio Revised Code) County of Medina 55.: �, .t� '�.� r� o � °,,� �"'r.w.......«.+' I, Fcank A. Carrino, 5eCfetary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE CQMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OFilO FARMERS INSURANCE COI�APANY, do here6y certiiy that the above and foregoing is a true and corred copy of a Power pf Attornay, executed by said Gompanies, which is still in full forca and effect: and furthermora, the resotutipns af tne 8oards ot Directors, set out in [he Power of Attorney are In iull TOrce and effect. In Witness whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals aF said Companies at Westfield Center, ohio, thls gth day of ]une A.D., 2011 ,� y�� � ,��.P��nNA!'�., , - ��� 9 .� � ��� :"q � •,NSG�:� g�� •�br� � i��{ i�� =LL_� :y'^ sr�v�"'"".�9��� � i � ��-��i� _ � : SFAL '" �� � � �, •. ;`.� : � ; ?p ; �� : 1848 ; � z Frank A. Carrina", Secret s�� '� � ..� � : y'• =a�! ' ••••- ' • � • � ' a "+ ' .a.,n .r �r��1���• �wM�N��, BP�AC2 (cvrnbinedZ (�06-02) AFF1D4`'1"1" i.�'� �� till�d iia and executed if th� bidder is a c.�rporatiora) STAT� ��" �'L4R[D.4 . ) C'C)l..'NT�'� UF Floriaa ..- -.__._._.._._..1 Marjorie �Tvrdan h�:in�� dui�' ti��urn. dc�a�:c� a�+� �,a��� that hr,�hG is R�n co......T� -,- - _..__ - �c�:rctar� ��f nstructaa�, ?s�c. _. .�. - a�i�r��or�tinn��,r<Y�ani�zcl and �.�isring u�tder and by �'irt�r ��f th� la�ti� �,f thC Su�te �;r1` Flr+ricia_ ar�d I�a� i»�� it� princiral ��f'tice at: 53�4 9Ch Btreet Zeph�rrhills Pasco �L ��.1'�t� �L tiillTlf�4�.�...��_. ......... ......�..--�-�----..._._..._.__.._........ _...........,.___-_..-----.... . _�. . ,�.�...� . �_ T� .. ... .... .. . ( UI'1�....._ .. ...........-............. . _ .. _ .. . ' �4• � tl' �i�1Tt ���ICiill ft111kYi�' ���'�'� 1�1.11 }lc t� kamilu�r .�.ilh Itlt f`.'C'l�fij4. 1711I1G1t' ii)t�F�� ;1111� �e1•�R�'��� �.�r RTD Cons�.�uction„ Inc. ....... . .. . .. . . ._-_.�.__.._..—��'I11� i�l �����r'�'�(�,•.ili��t1���. \J�ri:iz�t !tn ih�� ;�s��� �I�.�; Dannie E. .Tarda.n ^ Pr�sident . _._.._._--__.__ -- �.__.._._.... _......._....._........ .._._........__._ ..............- --- -.. --... _ 1()i`ii��r's ��rn�) , l�it1� ��� i�lc.' w:��1�1��t',i11G�i1, I� t�ll�� �ILl1IlU�IT.�.��I Eii S1€;Il C�1t ��fc��]�i•,:il :��T �TD C4ris�.ruCtion, ITlC. . _.. _� _._____�._..�_._._._,.» ................ ...__........., . li,i' tia��1 ��it�+�+rsll��n F?ti- � 1!'[u�• ��I Resblut7.�lri af C�ie Boaxd caf Liree�ors . ciat� �� 11Cthtr :t �ir��� isi��� � h}' l�n� c�7r :i Rc�.�.�lutiiu� �,f th� Iiti,�y��c - 1 ..._. . _.. __.----- -- - - - ---- ----- -- - - - - i c � i Aug. 1s�., 199a T--� _ Dircct��r.� 11�h � rs«luticu� �ri� c cialyy,i .i�.i���� '��nl. � � . /J Sr�'C►i'I1 iC} h�I(11'L' itlt illlS 9th ciav af �une h91' �Iu1W!!$SiON � €3b 7�.`8 f 9 EXP�REB: JtmE 8, 20t2 den'�lad 7hn.i hhhary P�tn {lnderrMag _s,l��� ?(1 1� TyG?e�pri�lt:'�t�m� n�i��er nf T�intary Citl� �►r r�nk.�aric] 5�nal 'tio_. it <rny �I I r � ' 1 LJ LJ , 1 1 1 �a�r-GOt..LCISlO;�: ,A,F�TD.A"1'i�f S'i.4TE'O!� k�LUR[DA ) Pasco C'C1L�NT1� (7F __.._._T � Dannze �. �ordan hei����. (irs� ciull' stir�n►��, c1c:h,�r5,inci �:i�, thu� ft� i� � � E. ' _ . Presicler�.t ��� RTD Can�tructian, IrLC. t`]C �?�37�1ti [Ili3i�lPl� �fl� 1�'•1':��I.1lIly�' �I�[?�1(i4c1� lll' [�1L�: ��liJ� �lli;�l �1[� 1� �I.:I'lUl(ll' i1111� il��i t11��t1ti1�: t�i tiflif[71: lEi:]1 �:+it1 t�i�i�l�� iti «�7� ��n,�n: i;�liy' inli.rc:�i�c1 in ��r�7tl�rrn��sr af�riliatt�cl in ,� !,utii»rs� �•.�<�} ���i14i :m� -.,�h��r I,id�l.�r �,iti rl�� ��inic �nntra�t: :h�t saicl hidcicr ha, nc�l �i�llu�lcri_ L�7n�Pir��l. ���n�ti�°r.•d. <<r �:n'ce�1. clirc.:iCy� �7� m�iii��•tlti�. ,� �th rrn�� i,icl���r� ur �i�r�nrt. trr ���rt in a cha��i hiii ,,r 1li.it ,�34h irihi�' j'�c,�t•tiGitl �lu�fl rGl'rczii� �r��n� I,i,1�l�n,�. a�i�i ha5 n��t in an�� rna,�nrr_ ,hr��tE�- .�r ir7dirrcil�. �:�.,u{,ht h� ��r�rriu•n1 ��i �,'�ll�.�,�<<�r. ,�i �i�il��!�111111W;11;llfV �'i �l7tli��ll'i1�:t. 1l l�h .111�. �1Citil�[l. �l` fl\ !�1C �71�j ��("'ItiC �11 .1��I:1i1� l�l' .ill` �ylile'I (i}l�l�Cl'. � �1' ie.� Ci�i cat'i;� �.+��..�rli�.�c��l. �,r��1�ii �.�r :�,�s1 �14►�1�r�t ±••C sa��l hiil by-iL� r��' if�:.rt � �t ;im �'�Ili�r !�icl�i�r ��r t�� tiG:�•ur�� :u�� ;iu1',lJld:.l;_:� .IM iltltil I�Ic l IiV ��� C��.:3I1\�Il�I". �'���CIi��4. �'1':It14' �1Crtii�i1 ��1 ���Iti��ll� lllt;.'I-�:�(CCl lil i.�lt �'U"�.�E?t�;.,:�! .:c�f1ll:ll'l. ;i�li� 1�1�11 :lj� til'cll:`lZl�i�l� Lt�Y1L:S1Il��i Ill tiiil�i (�I'�.�f'tiy:;i�� l�(' ��I�l �lft' �itl�: �ifii.� !ur?h��'. ih:�l �la:�� ��t�iL1�I hC35 I1��{ i�li�C�'?�1 ���C I(lt�l�'CC1l\ hll�[111�1Lij t�11ti hi�i. ��r rhr :OIl�l"�ll� l�l�",I"Li'�i_ •lT 4i1','ll��i.'li �f1����1iI1.1U�711 ��!' t'��li,r 1'u�il%ll-G' l�l'.'1'Cll� lf� .,r�ti _l�;<���ial���i� u1' 1�� an4' n�en�b�Y' �1C :l��."11l �iTk'1'c'l��_ ,- � pari�i� E. J!ard� p fi nt pre5ident , 5���ai-�� t.c� �ncl subscnhcd hcfc�re n7� this 9th day n# aune _ p0 1i ryc�tary Puhlic ---� , ' l � � 1 1 r��tawan .ix�sAV . �'� ��"�= idlY CaMi+�+�S ' }, !7G 1y531B �.: �s.�' r IU: h . ? • E'; r1R"r...5.,1�^E �'�, 2��52 �"y.:� y�� pN.tip=ibc,ih��ryPu�f:l!nvtnviW:x ��� � L 1 � C-� � I� � 1 � � 1 1 1 1 ' ' 1 �� � 1 � �����N�1� PROPQSAL Il'1 Tn Ti�[E C:IT1' [.l� C:�1 FArd'1'1'��T�:R, �'I.OT�iDA, Fc�r �C�L.�.Ajt1�.a,'('ER_C.'L,,Ai�1�lEFt FtEHABi[..I�,�'T1(7'ti fPi�4JECT �t1U-{I(1�3-1�T aT�d �1r:�in�� su�f� ��iher��n�•k irni.l�nt�l th�retu. .ill in accti�rdan�e�� itl�i th� tif+7�tr�+�I ci�:�� �rn�c;nts. marke�l C-I..F' _�f211' � 1 E:R C�t.A�t F�R R�H.�BII._1'f -� 1 1(1!ti' — -- � F'R(].iF C"� � i p-(►(1� �-i'T 1 �',\�i1 l�l�{�1�1 Illll�l Ld�C 'Ur1I1�C U� 1;'14'' (,iw'.i !�1�:7 F�4i1 I�1��U��i iilti �'`i���•h�;:l� f'�r.tC�.'�:J'�1:t+ J1;�� �.�1� �I���;il:l.�...• �1L'.11E'i? �1 lf1C �l��jCl" fCr l\'�1t�11'1 <ifl ll���i1�� Iti :Il:lc�� 3flCf Ff\ f)1�r�� �ij���i,1i"� .stlibl�llli.�� !�� �i�� ��� ,�i; f?.'fl.11� . . tliG C�jl� r,! C'1�•��t-t�•c+t�i. F�I��r��i,:i. th,al 7�,� �t.i�h ,.n�txr.i ��r �,�����inLL, �li.ill 1ti�.� �_��ir�ici��.•�I �; �,��icir�f� _,,r,.tr.a,i �`.It�l��tli G ��Til�l�:�ic �"�'tllll (�lc' ! ltit'1I1��' ralfCCt111' 1�1:11 tUilt�.ti �S!'� f11a1�:3���4` It� �;+.+'.Ci Illl' �-+`til �i .i'.;' ,',,,,f"�; 1�, r�C' alt,n�. ��r �vith«ut tfti� :�(1�T'(�`,.1� l�i I�i�' (. �ti4 �ll��lll��' ;1ti iU (Il�' 1(�iiTl ilfl�� a�":_.l�14V ��1 'l�ll" :.,�{l;i.l�'! :111�� :1�3 ihl:" �?41-IIi1L'11I l�l��iUI114I7E5 It�i11111`_ ��itil'I�� �lil� 11!�� Eft�L"I7 :l�,]�.)f()��f•".l,l f�� ,ti',;.i�Li � 1�,� !�i��}Illt'�" .1111� tiUl��l ��1��1lLl� k� G-�c.°r��l,�° �I�G3r��ri a°ith Ihi� nuti��. �h� sianc;r c�t tkt� f'rc�pusat. �� hidiier. al�., d�clares that the ��tt1y� ��rsC►n. pc;i°�unti. ���mran�� �,r p.rr�ic:5 i�it�.r�st�d in Ihis Pri�������1. ��'e n;ta�o�R�i ii� this Pmposal, tEiat i�r lias uar�f�ll� �xan�in���1 tht° l�iv�rli�:rnent. lnstructian:� l.> �3ir�il�rw, C`i.�ntr:��t Spc�itications, P�eil15. �1k�1�7�CtIlG'11�:1I ��::cific�tir,zi5. �.;,�en�ral C��nditios►s. Special I'rc���isi�u��s. ;�►�d C nntract $bnd. t��s�t ile �r his rc:��r��enl�Ci� e has made ;u~h im�c.�sti�ation as is necessary ta detern��n� �he charactcr ar�d �xt�nt U�' the w�nrk anc� he �+roFx���• ��nd a�rce;: thnt if th� Prapc�sal b� �cre}xt�:d. i�� u�ill c�ntract with the City nf� Clc.��n���t�:r. Flnrida. �n the Cr�rn.� c�i' c�,ntrac�: h�rete� annex�ii, to prcavide the necessary labor. m�t�ri�ls. rt�ac}�inen-, �quiP�7ient, tuc,ls c>�- aEapairatus, do all the �a�ni� reyuiru� tc� Gi►�����zte th� c�urnrnri withi�� th� tia�a� iatr��tticln�d in L}ie C.ir:n4ral C`anditiuizs anc� accordin� t�� �l�4 r�c�uirct7�c,nLS c�f the Cit)� nf Clc:a�,ti�at�.r. �lurida. us htr�in �u�d hcreinafirr se:t fnr[h. �rnd Fi�rnish tl�� 3ec�uired surety hcands Far tl�e i'c�ll���ti ii�g pric�s ti� w�it: ___�__ � � [� [� ' r 1 1 1 � u 1 r i �I �..J l� C� [] 1 1 PRU PUS.�L (2) !f the tnregoing Pm�►c�sal ;hai! h� acre.4�t�d h}r [he Ciry t7f Cle�tv��ater. �ic�ricid_ and th� unc�ersigned �hall fail to �xecut� a satisfactnt�• cnntract as stated in the Ad��ertis�ment hGrcin att,actie�d. lhen the C'ity di�ay, at its �.�ptic+n �eterntiine that the �n�d.�rsi��ne� F�as �handoned ttte ec�ntract, and th�rc:l�����n this Prnpc+�al ;hall bc null aii�i �caid. ��n�i th� tc�K'rlied c:heck c�r b��d �.ccot�ip�nyin�� thi5 f'rnpo�ul, �h�ll be ir>>�I4it�c.l t�� l��c�7mr �he � n��tr� ��� thr ('irv ��f t�learvva4er. I'farida. and clie f�ull amc,urit c�f';�i� c;h�::k ;hall h;: �-�tain��i b} tlie Cicy. ar ii�ti7� f'r'�.�}x,y;.�.� Boltd b� �ivcn, lhe Iull :�m�:�unl ��f �u�:l� hr,n�l �hall he pai�.l t�� ii�� l:'ifa� as �;ti�ulateci <�r liquicl�tic:�l cir�ana;�s: othervvis� the bnnd i�r �c:rtih�d �h4ck t�ccc�m�+an�'in� tlZi� f'rc,�c.��aL c,r t}�r ��rnr,unc ��f� �:tiel . l�u�:k. ,haill be retum��i tc� ihe under5i�wn�d u� �;��ciPi�d h��r��n. �tt�chc:ci her��tc� iti a i���ir�l ��r ��IiP�FI'.Cj �17u�k un sidders sond _... . .. _..___ .--- 8ank. t�.r tht tic�i�r ��! ---...�C:11!� �'Wr:.�!*[ . .. .....,� . . ,. ,... .. _ �..Y1�.._. .., r�� � n�►._l.7�_�ia1.�a�. Gl�d�7,...�!'�rn�..�... N L� � ._.._._._... ......._ ... ............_......... ... ' `� J�°; � `i �t 1 , v cl li7 1U111 �1� '�i l`•'�, ii! f i:11II�34(l�('t [Cli:]� �11C� �111iiSUtlC1. :�ll: fLl�} i111117r� �ifil� l:t'�I�jCillc'� �'�i �1�1 .�:i�c�il� dflt� �1.1Ci1�� IZ'!lc""CtiiCti{ f17 IfIC ���Id.'�i.il(i� �i1�1 i!I'c .!•• li����l�'�'•• � I! ���1'[f(►r�lili,Tl. f�t1� t!-,� ra���n7�•� ai7el :��i;h-4���4 �I the !'rCyidznl �inr:i �e�r�t�li_�'. I( I1T711 Cil �1c,rti��r�:t��i�, iii�: il�:lill�� �i11� 1tLIC�CE�St'� l)t 9,i1C f11�iT7i:?�1'ti t�s" ��11f'EI7CT'S. 7�1C �Iljl�l'C �I7[1�I I1ti1 Tll�� i�ll�\' �:1ti f1:Ifl1C hlll ;!�kl� lil� nan�e �,f' ai7y �,ars,a�a ���ith ti�.h���7� hicld�:r hr,�s �nv cyp� of a�r�c►�yun� �, h�ruhy ,u�h F7i:rti[�t1'� in��rnveine.nts, �nrichznc�nt. c�mploym�ni ur possiblE beneCit, v��heth�r s�.�o-conu'�1�tt�r, niat�rial�tt; n. az;et�t. suppliei�. nr ern�iloy�r i� �e.,ntin�'ent up��n the award oi�th� contr-act tc�� t.h� liicidrrl. v,�.r��s: Dannie E _ �7'qrdan, P�'esiden� AUDRtSSLS� 27646 �7'ohnstqn Rpa.d, pad� Ca.�y, Fl. 33523 Rusty A_ Haughn, Vice-Presxc$ent 3534 �rook Czossir�� Dr_ , Sra�,dan, F1 . 3357.1 Tony Jaardan, iT. P. , Field Oa�,e�^at�.ons 1.0253 He�ssome 'Road. Dade Citv. F]. - 33523 I�arjorie Jordaa�, Secre����r�'Treaffiurer ].02g0 Ne.wscam� * RTD Constructiq�, It�c. is a Florida Corppratian j Sia��atur� of' Bidcier: � Dade C�,ity, (�l�he bidder muat i��c!ic;:�te �; hcth�er C���'pt�r�tion. Paritiership. Com}aa��} or [ncii��idu;�l s 33523 CITl' C)F CLE.�R��'ATER .aUnE?VUC�!�� SIIE�T I'(tU.IF:CT: C'LE.�Ri�4ATER �L:aRIFIER KEFi,��BILI-T:�T1C?� � PRO,IECT f� IU-Ub?3-C'Ta j.��tii1�.11�'�e�t;]ll�;lli 1� I1C.1-i��i' rl]di:�� �..�i 1�7� �01�11\\"If��' d(.�l1�Tl[id 1L�:�1'�-l'.wi ilfl�:� l��U�illti4 t'�f ('�"rlI-1.� 'clilt.� ti�7C�itll'J�I'11U4_ �IIII�Fl(jtl17) ���. I ��ilc. �J.I�II 1 --- -..... .__.. '�(�l7�ik�11�11 �'i�. � _ �)1111'. _ `� ���--�I--- \c1�.I�-n�i1�r�1 `�,� � ).�tr: '�l�l.�c�ll�llil'i �.,..` i�.IIC. �u�.�:tI�.ILf[li ��', i�);:ll'. •'�ci�i��nciurii `.;.� t.�::i,• ��.3c3E::n�fum �,,_ iU;::tc. r�dd�:nclui» N�,, [7atc: ,4dclrnc�i��T� ?���,, i7ate: adde��d�un N�. ❑atz� -lddr:i�dun� 1`0. Dat�: RTD ConstructYan, Inc. - - ..__. __ ...–_... — .................. _.._.� i]�aniec,�;E3idcl�rl � ......___.�.- �------_.....--- _.......-- ---- (�l�l:c!CLII-� c )Iri��':') Dannie E. Jardan, President i�l itl� 01 � �lfirer► � June 9th, 2011 .. _ .. ..-- - --- , ` t.. � LJ 1 �J �� ' � ' 1 �J ' , r r ' , i � 1 BiDI)�R'S i'ROPOSAL F'iZUJ�C"!': C'LEAIt�'�`A"I'�ft CL.�RIF�ER REH:�BILITATiON PROJECT #10-CI(123-UT �iCil�THEAST V1'RF' C'I...aRfF1F:RS 1-4 RE�{ASILIT.�eT1C)N �AsE %3Cn i'�1�'� DCSCRIPTiO�I � Fqus4�rrien� ii�r C'Ianfe�r5 1 ihr� ��nd tlie !�lunh I2_AS Pum�� I a � S�'u�e ai llir ?vC7rtheuaC ��'k�F in �1CC.urdBnct� �a•irh tie�uon i!�? l;p. �.�.11 A. (Q[)P am�a.�nt paid directl� tc+ renclnr� hy tlu �(in� I �, I(.�11P -:�ali:� I a�. Sa� �tt�; l�.t�ined b;' th: l itr. in � ;a��rx�i:inC�' '�� iih ��..tian Ul 150� +,1:1iF}. .._.._. ______.__.___. � I�zh�ttiiliinti�:�n c,l �'lrr�tirrc I�I�ru J al�d sl�e !tiprr}� R_��ti I c � I'uin;� Nt�.�tie' al Ih� ?�nnfira.t Vti�RF u1 .i���:id.uiti� •,� iih '; 5cc�i��n t�� � c,,. ; ��;�. i._� �..�C�.�f) \ C ,ft�,r �uc i�ipic'i1�enlauntr "tic�� �� �c :�.Il�'•�r:tn.'r in --- � :�.. ��r�l�,i�� �� itl� St�li;irl �ll ! 5(i„ ;.1.111� �� ls�_hai��l�t:i�inri t�f l�Iaiititry jWll�n� r brs�� S�.�w�h FL•t5 F'«�z��+._... � ;!In a,<; Equipntrnt at tl5_ N�,�rt!»a�t �'-"Ir'k° ni n�c�+sr,iun�r ��i�h I���ttun �Il i�u. � III C� __._�—.r....__....._...._...._......__....� .� � f�_Iiah�lit:iti��tt ��f �,�'lar:l�icr�, l Gh.i�u �1 �tu? t1t�: Spiit�er �.c�a a� � ilie '�laryh.tll 5trcci \� k.F� �G� a�cc�r�an�e �� �th S�ctian ii l I:���. � U1C ��.- Rch�hilitaiiq�i ca1� !he Ea�t arid VI'e�t Clariiie�� st ll�z Ea+z t�'RF in ncc•r��ance u�i�Fr 5eccian 01150. 3.QID. :� Mc�hilizntinn in �c�qrdan4t w'ith Stction Dl 1 S0. �.41 F, 6 Inden�niticwcinn in �.ccnrdance w.i�h 5�ciion U115U. i.ti1 F. � 10°�0 �uixer's Contineency^ in accprda�nce �•ith Se�tipn 0�7;o.3.na�. ��a°G,�es��tasat.���,��-�� COI�T$�ACTOR: �Tp const�,atio�, xnc _ EsT. 4 L�n�t.r I i�tiy'r ��tic�, I �ro�r:+��, c��r��.I � �-� � �5o�z3� � �5��z�o ! 1_� � :> �l D'�D _. _ __�._..Y_..,. ... _._..�..----- � e � , %c,7 `�60 .... . i -- -�_------ ..._. __ ........... .. I [� `. Ris,,��i � __......i�......`..i I f t ' ,+ '.y .. ., � _ � i1 � [�.:��. : I _._._—_ i �......._..__. i_ .._�....—__.._....- I C � , ,;,. � : f �I ; C � �� rR -tc fi ._-. � LS 'VC) i- IN C'C'7NTRt CT . . __l �._ � � _ � ..�.�.� � �, s � i uu.uu Sl'B-TUT'Al. i°fEl�s 1-6 `-' '�10�0 * 7pr�9�Q =.�?.�.iin-.��!°i N1�{ I^� �..�!'�'iR"��.'; !vi'+ C C� [.'�rtilR..1('f I�fC.i7...�� ___--• - •._....._ C'(`)NTR,\(_ .� �_y H o� �+ 1(1U.ilU � �5 � � � z. c�� z B:h�E BID'r'ri'f',�C. (t'T�:'�IS 1-71 � I�119 Wa2 BtDDER'S BASE BID TOT4�, f I�'EP�'IS 1-7). S� 1`'! 1°I `j'� �. (Numbers? 1 1-_-_�_��__. _...._ ._ BiDDER'S BASE �31D Tt1"T4L (lT'El�'�S 1-7�: ay,��r_t,r,�n_�qyr�,+�rcc� ��!���.n._.... � n�s�v►� n ndr�a ._ ___...._._ _._ +�t�<»-d�) 'tFiE BlI?DER'S 7'UT.�L .aBQti� I5 H.iS TUT.AL BLD BASED �N F[IS Lt�[T PRICFS .�1ti1� L[i11P SUAI'PRiCFS �*:n TIIE E5'f"IDLATECI Q�C�.a,�i'ITI�S R�f�l`IREI? FC)R E�kCI{ SEC'1"IC):v. ffCYS [�IC�t'R� l5 1�(.)1� lti'FtiR1t_Al'f(.Ir Cl7'I.1' .A'1" 1'EiC "ft�'1E UF UPF til"��G F31i1�_ 1'1-tE c'."N fl' 1� 11 l.. �1 �.1:�. 'I'li[? 'f:�FtL'1.4T'1[t� � Ftf��l TIiE l tit"f PH.1['ES .a�il) [.l�aP �l'i�1 f'IiiC'F t311�. IF -I-liCitG IS :» [-;ftR(�R I�' 'TMIf: '��)'1'•1L 131 "�'Ilf I:If)f►Flt. 1'I �II.�I.L i�H' t""!i �'�(�F;I'�:\ti (a�E.1' fflE. l�l-f F`i�tl�'F.� atill I.1'1tP �1 11 PIl1C.'1�� �t1 �1 1. (:(i� }.it`. PRQP06.4� (�) ih� persc+n signing shall, in his o��m hand��•riting_ �i�n the Princ.ipal'S nan�e, hi� ��wn ri�lm� :attd his lill�. �1�"h�re the �+zrson signinD for a cc�rpc�ratian i� �ither than the l�retii�ient ��r ` ice-!'re�:ici�.nt. ite n�u�t. hy .ti f i�ia��it. sho� his authc�rity. tc� bind th� e��r���rat.ic�n. � �j�ti�;�y- Dannie E. Jpsda , --___.....------�--�-- ......... ... .._ _..____._ � k3��: � �ttl�: � President --- -- -_ ._.____ ._ ...._... _._..._. —� .__. _ _...---- -.... . .. _. .------...-- Dannie E _ �Tox+d3rx C3u,inc�sc ,-�dciress c>f� E3ic#dc 5��� 9tM street (.�ii� ;:nu �1Rat�. Ze�h�rhil�s...._.��:�.---...- ----------_......�_.....,... .._... ......_. 7_,i�r f "c'��ic _335�7. . [?.ite.�] �.�1. 9:00 A.M_ tttis, 9th �1�i� ,�f �`ia.ta,e � I � 1.;).. �it11 u � ' �� 1 � , 1 ' 1 1 ' 1 1 1 � ' 1 � I 3 4 6 7 8 10 ll 12 13 14 15 16 17 rs 19 20 zi 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 SCHEAULE QF EOUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS AND SU1'1'L1ERS CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHASILITATION NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 1-4 REHABILITATTON (PROJECT #10--0023-UT) The Bidder must provide with its Bid the name of the manufacturer/supplier he intends to use far each item of equipment listed below by circling one of the lisl:ed manufacturers/suppliers_ If Bidder fails to circle one of the manufacturers/suppliers listed below, Bidder agrees ta provide the equipment or material item manufactured by the Manufacturer listed as "A". If mc�re than one of the listed manufacturers/suppliers is circled, the Bidder agrees to provide the equipment or material item manufactured by the Manufacturer listed as "A". For items not listed below, [3idder declares that Bid is based on one af the manufacturers/suppliers named in the Contract Dacument if one or more manufacturers/suppliers were named. Sneci�cation Section ___ ,r,__ _ _ __ Eauipment_ ,, , , ,, , , , , ,__ M�tnufacturer/Supplier 11225 Clari�er Equipment A. Siemens B. Oviva C. W Tecn Walker 1� E. Hi-Te � 1 BIDD� • Sy: `� (signature) Title: bannie � . .7ordan, res ' dent Date: �une 9th, 2011 STATE OF Florida C�U'N`1"Y OF pasca The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this 9th day of Dannie E _ ,7ordan Preside 2011 by _� , (name) as (title) of RTO Construction, �nc. ,(bidder) a FL. behalf af the corporatian. He/s� -�s persanally k.no to e N/A as denti�c�tion. �� _, � - -�..�._.� _ -- � �.: 1'ELiP�DA LIN�SAY �=;:� � r--. ;= ytY C�t�.1t�••.�Q5i0Pi # GL' 755819 +�':_ G� r1F=S: J�°�s 6, ZD12 � ' - :.c��d:,d 1 n _; �rwn<-:ry ��h;rc L':�.M1_�.��ita3 l� f (signature) � Name typed/printed Natary Public, State of Florida Commission No. My Notary Commission Seal: June _ corporation on or has prvduced _ ' ' .� � I �7/:I_1 ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJEGT DOCUMENTATION Table of Contents: OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE UDP DOCUMENTS • Instructions for Addendum to Agreement • ODP Agreement Form • Addendum to Agreement • Attachment "A" • Attachment "B" • Attachment "C" � Attachment "D" • Procedures for Sales Tax Savings, Requests to Requisition and Receiving/Invoicing + Request to Requisition Form PROJECT PERMITS, No FDEP permit is anticipated. Contractor is responsible to obtain City of Clearwater Building Departrrtent Permi#s. GEOTECHNICAL SOIL REP�RT The geotechnical report for the installation of the graund water monitoring well north of clarifier No. 2 is attached, ASBESTOS REPORT No asbestos report is an#icipated. ' Appendix A.doc i 04/26/11 � OWNER D1R�CT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS � � �� n � � � LJ � 1 � � � L�� 1 ���.. �1Ppendix.A_doc 04/2C/ll � ' INSTRUCT�ONS FOR ' ADD�NDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR. C�NSTRUCTION OF CLEARWATF,R CLARIFIER REHABZLYTATIUN PR�JT CT , Cl'�:'Y OF CLE�IRWATER CUNTRACT # 10-0023 UT l..�l � � l...J L� �J 1 2 3 The Contractor and the City, prior to the ardering af any materials, must complete the Addendum to Agreement for Construction of the CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PROJECT. Attachment "A" is to be completed by the Contractor and submitted with the Addendum. Attachments "B", "C' and "D" relat� to Owner-Furnished Materials that are part of the of a Subcantractor's Work. Attachments "B" and "C' would be completed for each Subcontractor responsible for materials as part af the Suhcontractor's Wnrk. 4. Submit two (2) original capies of the Addendum and Attachments to: City of Clearwater Attention: Tara Kivett, Engineering Project Manager Phone: 727-562-4758 Fax: 727-562-4755 City of Clearwater Engineering Department 100 South Myrtle Avenue, #220 Clearwater, FL, 33756-5520 � 5. If you have any questions regarding this process please direct them to: Name, Tara Kivett, �ngineering Project Manager Phone: 727-562-4758 Fax : 727-562-4755 E-Mail: tara.kivett@myclearwater.com � ,J � � � �J 1 ��J ni�i���,a;x n.��o� oai2�ii i � � � , � � � �_J � [_� 4�.J ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR C�NSTRIJCTION OF CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PROJECT CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT #10-0023-UT: In reference to contract # 10-�023-UT dated between City of Clearwater, the Owner, and the Contractor. it is further AGREED as follaws: 1. The Owner has reserved the right to purchase certain portions of the material for the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in campliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. 2. The attachments lettered "A", "B", and "C", attached hereto (as amended by notations thereon) and incorpdrated herein shall b� executed by the Contractor and applicabl� Sub-contractors and the terms thereof shall govern the purchase of materials for the Project as determined by the Owner. 3. The c�ntract price shall be reduced by the cost af the materials purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales tax as bid by the Contractor even if the cost is in �xcess of the cost for the materials as bid by tfie Contractor. However, for purposes of calculating engineering fe�s, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based an the cantract amount, the original cantract amount shall be used. 4. The Contractor reserves the right to authorize payments for invaiced materials, prior to Owner's authorizatian process, as outlined in Attachment "D". 5. The Contractor will assist Owner in owner's direct purchase of materials for the project. However, owner acknowledges that Contractor's Sub-cantractors nonetheless each reserves the right to purchase project materials directly, without Owner's prior approval and consequent power to eliminate reimburs�ment af sales tax. This addendum, upon its execution by both parties, is made an int�gral part of the aforementioned agreement. CITY OF CLEARWATER: � Date: � � � ' � City Manager/Owner ATTEST: City Clerk (City's Corporate Seal) APPROVED AS TQ FORM: Camilo Soto Assistant City Attorney 1 � A�pciiclix /i.clu� � CONTRACTOR: Date: Contractor ATTEST: Secretary 04/Z(i/ I I � � , ATTACHMENT "A" FROM: CITY OF CLEARWA7ER _�__� (OWNER) 70 , __.�„�_, (GON7RACTOR) OWNER-FURNISHEb MATERIALS PROJECT: CL�ARWATEF2 CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PROJECT � CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRAC7 #10-0023-UT: � L� � � � � � � � �I � � � � 1_ The Contract Pric� includes Florida sales and ath�r applicable taxes for material, supplies, and equipment which will be a part af the Contractor's Work. The awner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of variaus construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. Owner-purchasing of construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of �xemption number. Z_ The Contractor shalt provide the Owner a list of all intend�d suppliers, vendors, and material for consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Contractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. 3. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying c�rrect quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchas�s, providing and abtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goads at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Contractor. However, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that the building materials are physically stored at the jab site priar to their installation or incarporatian into the project. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientatian, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular material furnished. The Contractor shall provid� all s�rvices required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever natur� resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Cantractor. 4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by dacumentation adequate to identify th� Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. 7his documentation may consist af a delivery ticke# and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase �rder together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward the invoice ta the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment A of this Contract. 5. The Contractor shall insure that �wner-Furnished Materials canfarm to the Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time af delivery if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non-conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Contractar shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective mat�rials in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condi#ion so that repair or replacement af those materials can occur without undue delay ar interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and othernrise incorporates into the Contractor's Wo�k such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or shauld have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorparation of such materials into the Praject, including liquidating ar delay damages. f. The Contractor shall maintain recards of all Owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates intn Contractor's Work from the stock of Owner-Furnished Materials in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any Owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. Appendix A.doc 0�3/26/1 1 � C� � � � � 7. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranti�s and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage- repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. 8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished Materials. 9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Qepartment of Revenue that is na longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdictian over such matters that is final and nat subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnish�d Materials. 10. As invoices are received, Contractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all � suppliers of Owner-Fumished Materials delivered to the Project during that delivery for us� by the Contractor and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Contractor's records of materials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials_ � � � �I I � I �� � � � �� 11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a listing indicating the acceptance af the goods or materials within thirty (3�) days af receipt of said gaods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's Certificate of Exemption number, invaices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other docum�ntation as may be reasonably required by the �wner. ihe check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The CnntractQr agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate_ At the end of the Project, Contract�r will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to pravide all Own�r-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the C�ntractor at the Owner's direction, or may be turned aver to the Contractor for salvage or dispasal at the Contractor's option. 12. The Contractor shall be entitled ta the benefits of any discounts attributable to the early payment of vendor invoices for materials furnished by the owner pursuant to the Specifications. 13. 7he Contract between Contractar and Owner is hereby amended to clarify that Owner- Furnished Material shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining the Contract Sum due Contract�r. Appendix A.doc 04/2G/I] � FROM TO PROJECT ATTACHMENT "B" OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILI7ATION PR�JECT CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRAC7 #10-0023-UT: CONTRACTOR) (SUBCONTRACTOR) 1. The Contract Price includes Florida sates and other applicable taxes for material, suppli�s, and equipment which will be a part of the Subcontractor's Work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of variaus canstruction materials included in the Subcontractor's cantract. Owner-Purchasing of construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change �rder basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include owner's Certification of Exemption number. 2. The 5ubcontractar shall provide the owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. 7he Subcontractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. 3. The Subcontractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents af orders in a timely mann�r, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of th� goods a# the time of delivery due to the negligence of the 5ubcontractor. Fiowever, the Owner assumes the risk of damage or lass during the time that the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into the project. ihe Subcontractor shall coardinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and ather arrangements normally required by the Subcontractorfor the particular material furnished. 7he Subcontractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. ihe Subcontractor agrees ta indemnify and hold harmless the �wner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods ta suppliers arising from the action of the Subcantractor. 4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Subcontractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and apprave the vendor's invoice far material delivered. Th� Subcontractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by docum�ntatian adequate to identify the Purchase �rder against which the purchase is made. This documentatian may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice frnm the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with suCh additional information as the Owner may require. The Subcontractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment "A" of this Contract. 5. The Subcontractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and determine prior ta incarparation into the Subcontractor's Work if such materials are patently defective, and wheth�r such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Subcontractor discovers defective or non-conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspectian, th� Subcontractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective mat�rials in the 5ubcontractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the �wner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can accur without undue delay ar interruption to the Project. If the Cantractor fails to perform such inspeckion and otherwise incorpara#es into the Subcontractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance af an insp�ctian, Subcontractor shall be responsible for all damages to the owner, resulting from Subcantractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating ar delay damages. 6_ The Subcontractor shall maintain records of all awner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into Subcontractar's Work from the stock of Owner-furnished Materials in its possession. l�he Subcontractor shall account monthly to the Qwner for any owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Subcontractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Subcontractor's Work. Appendix A.doc 04/26/11 �J � 'L.-J � � � � � � � 7. The Subcontractor shall be responsible far obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage-repair calls shall be forwarded to the Subcontractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendar, or sub-subcontractor. 8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Subcontractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished Materials. 9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Subcontractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protESt, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Subcontractor agrees to promptly notify Owner af any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished Materials_ 10. As invoices are received, Subcontractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers af Owner-Furnished Materials delivered ta the Project during that delivery for use by the Subcontractor and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment ta th� suppliers, based upon 5ubcontractor's records of mat�rials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials. 11 _ In order to arrange for the prompt payment ta the supplier, the Subcontractor shall provide to the Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within fifteen (15) days of receipt af said goods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required by the Owner. 7he check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The Subcontractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately abtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Subcontractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order far the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Subcontractor at the Owner's directi�n, or may be turned over to the Subcontractor for salvage or disposal at the Subcontractor's option. � � � � � � � � A.ppendix A.doc � 04/26/ l l �_J � From: 70: ATTACHMENT "C" � (CONTRACTOR) (SUBCONTRACTOR) � Praject: CLEARWAT�R CLARIFIER REHABILI7A710N PROJ�CT CI7Y OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT #10-OOZ3-UT: � This projECt qualifies the Owner to utilize its sales tax exemption for the purchase of materials used in the project. In order to do this, the City of Clearwater, Florida, (Owner) must pay for the materials directly. This shall be accomplished in the following manner� � � � � � � � � � � 1 2 3 Subcontracts will be issued by Cantractor to Subcontractors in the usual manner, including sales tax. Subcontractors will prepare their material orders and forward same to Contractor so that City of Clearwater (owner) purchase orders may be placed for these materials. Contractor will return ta the Subcontractor a copy of the City of Clearwater (owner) purchase order on behalf of the City of Clearwater (Owner). It shall read: To: Supplier Far: Material per attached Subcontractor order, 4_ The material supplier will then bill the City of Clearwater (Owner) c/o "Su�contractor" c!o Contractor. Subcontractor will approve invoice and send to Contractor who will submit same to City af Clearwater (Owner) for payment. 5. City of Glearwater (Owner) will then pay the invoice directly and the Subcontractor will be issued a deductive change order for the amaunt of the invoice plus sales tax. It is imperative that the Subcontractor apprave khe invoices and forward them to Contractor by the of each month for payment by the . Those received after the will be processed in the next month's billing cycle. � � Ap}�endiY A_doc � oaiz<,i i r � ,� [J � � � � � �,J �� � ATTACHMENT "D" PR�CEDURE FOR GENERATING SUB-CONTRACTOR DIREC7 PURCHASE ORD�RS FOR SALES TAX CREDITS 1 2 3 4 General Contractor will submit requisition for materials with vendor information required (see vendor application form), item description, quantity if applicable, price, etc. Also included will be the sales tax savings amount. Architect will review the requisition, and forward to the praject manager for approval and preparation of electronic purchase requisition. Requisition must cantain project number as well as correct account number_ Project Manager will then request requisitian approval from the �inance Director. Purchasing will issu� purchase order and will mail, fax, or otherwise distribute purchase order as requested. 5. A purchase order summary report will be maintained indicating the following: purchase order number, owner Certificate af Exemption number, vendor, total amount of P.O., total tax savings, amount previously requested, amount of current request, and r�maining balance of P.O. This reportwill be updated and issued with each group of payment requests (monthly). : � 7 � � � � Appendix A.doc � Payment requests with inv�ices must have receiving paperwork with authorized signatures and must be submitted for approval as indicated below: Payment authorization sequence: invoices must be submitted for approval in the following order. a. General Contractor b. Architect c. Project Manager d. Engineering/City Manager e. Purchasing/for processing only f_ �inance/for processing only oaizb/i i ' � PROCEDURES FOR SALES TAX SAVINGS, REQUESTS TO I7EQUISITI4N and RECEIV�NG/INVOICING CITY OF CLEARWATER � CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PROJECT CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT #10-OQ23-UT: � �_J [� � � [�� � � � Contractor: CEI: Addendum ta Aqreement for Construction: See separate instructions for completing the Addendum ta Agreement. Process procedures for tax savinqs: �� KI C! Completion of the Request to Requisition forms by Gontractor. Approved by CEI_ Approver(s): Original to Owner's Fiepresentative for processing of P.O. requisition. 5_ Based on Request to Requisition forms a schedule will be prepared for the City's Purchasing Manager to reduce the Cantractor's P.O. by the amount of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers. It is impartant to process as many material supplier Requests to Requisition as possible at one time thereby reducing the amount of changes necessary ta Contractor's P.O_ Construction contract will not change and the sum of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers plus the Contractor's P.O will represent the total contract commitment. Before sending to the Purchasinp Manaqer, the schedule will be forwarded ta the Own_er's Representative, CEI and Cpntractor's representative for approval. We will need the e-mail address for the Contractar's & CEl's contact person(s) for this process. 6. The estimated sales tax savings far each materials requisition will be deducted from the primary lines of Contractar's P.O. A related Sales Tax Savings line for each charge code will be added ta the Contractor's P.O. No changes will be made to the sales tax savings lines until all materials are purchased, received, accepted and paid for unless additional materials purchases are necessary. 7. Closing of the sales tax savings line on the Gontractor's P.O. can only be done through a change arder (Recommendation is that it's done on the final C/O). � Process procedures for request ta requisition forms: � �� � � 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 General description is a brief recap (s�wer lines and manholes; water lines; etc) Contractor should include their fax number as well as a contact number. In the description section af the Request to Requisition include any special delivery instructians_ Indicate whether ar not retainage is to be withheld. City's standard is 5%. Include the address where the supplier is to mail invoices. Where applicable, shipping and handling costs should be listed as a line item on the request to requisition. City staff will complet� the charge code line. Procedures where a detailed line item praposal has been received from the ODP supplier: a. On the request to requisition summarize the materials to be ordered by type of system (stormwater, streets, water, sewer, reclaimed, etc) giving the total dollar amount per for each system. Leave 2 line spaces between each system to allow for th� addition /\��pendi� A.�oc 04/26/].1 i � I _� �-� C� � � � � � � ,� � C� L.� �J of the City's charge cod�. b. Attach the supplier's praposal to be mailed as an attachment to the purchase order. Attachm�nt should include estimated quantities and types of materials. Cost information is optional: Procedures where a detailed line item prop�sal is not available: C� �7 c. Provide quantities and detailed descriptions of the items to be ordered, per unit and total cost as the City's P.O. will be sent directly to the Materials Supplier. d. Materials on each request to requisition should be grouped in r�lation to the major billing line items on Contractor's P.O. Leave 2 spaces between each group, as th� City will add the appropriate charge codes. 7he requesting afficial will be the Contractor's official with authority to procure materials. Contractor's authorized procur�r(s): The official approving that the materials requested meet the design sp�cifications will be authorized personnel from the CEI only. Authorized approvers: NOTE: Anv materials ordered bv the contractor that are not included on the City_'s issued ' urchase order or an amaunts ordered that exceed the amounts on the Git issued purchase order MUST be separately ordered pursuant to a purchase order direct� between the su lier and the contractor. These materials MUST be invoiced se aratel from the materials su lied ursuant ta the Cit issued urchase order. Another o tion would be ta submit an additional Request to Requisition to increase the amount of the O�P purchase order for that supplier. Process rocedures for receivin and invoicin : 1. lJpon receipt of materials, Contractor's representative will veri the materials are in usable condition and the quantity received. 2_ The Materials Suppliers will be instructed on the Gity's P.O. ta send their original invoice to the Contractor to the attention of . 3. Contractar must sign off on the invoice to approve the payment and, if no receiving report is attached, must indicate on the invoice that.all materials were received in usable condition. Any discrepancies with the invoice are to be resolved between the Contractor and the Materials Supplier. If the invoice is in error, it can be corrected by the Contractor before forwarding for payment under the following conditions: a. A corrected supplier's invoice can be paid up to the amount of the originally issued invpice but not in excess af that amount_ b. Non� of the original data on the invoice can be obliterated. If it is the City will return the invoice for replacement by a corrected one from the supplier. c. If the carrections cause the invoice amount to exceed the original billed amount, the excess must be invniced separat�ly by the supplier and is to have the same support documentation and/or approvals as all other invoices to be paid. 4. Supplier invoices for retainage amounts, if any has been withheld, are not required support documentation but must follow the approval process as all other invaices. 5. After approval the Contractar will forward the original invoice and any attachments to City of Clearwater's Owner Representative: City of Clearwater � Attentian: Tara Kivett, Engineering Project Manager Phone: 727-562-4758 Fax: 727=562-4755 City of Clearwater Engine�ring Department ' 100 South Myrtle Avenue, #220 Clearwater, FL, 33756-5520 Appendix A.doc 04/zfi/1 1 � C� 7. 8. 9 After appraval and verification of the materials received the Owner's Representative will forward the original invoice and any attachments to the appropriate City department for payment processing. Steps 1 through 7 will be fallQwed for each materials r�ceipt and invoice. Materials purchase P.O.s can be closed only upon completion of the materials acquisition and at the approval of the Contractor. Upon closing af a materials purchase P_O. any unused balance will be added back ko the appropriate line(s) on Contractor's P.O. Closing of Contractor's P.O.: 1. All Materials Suppliers' P.�.'s must be clased prior to the final change order and closing of the Contractor's P.O. A.ppendir A.doc 04/26/11 � � � ����4�� � � ���... . ` _. � .`N-"., ,>.�,.., �.�°" .. �-- ., � �ngineering �epartment � REQUEST TO REQUISITIUN STANDARD I'URCHASE ORDER G�neral Item Description: _,___._ �_..___ � Vendar: Street Address: _. �_.._ -_._.___ �...�_v__.�.. � __._�.. -�---__.__..._ ��__m______ City/State/Zip: _� _ __ Phone No: � R�ceiving Lacation (Ship to): �....__....._..._.. Street Address: � �._T. __.____, City/State/Zip: _______ _ .�_.__._r._..._...____ � Requested by: ._�____ Phone Number: � �Date Needed by: � Expense Code: (City will camplete) �_�_n� Units Detailed Description Price Per � Line # Quantlt $, etC. (List shipping 8� handling charges, if applicable) �ach _ Tatal � � m. � ..____._. �-- � � � Date: Date: � Requesting Official Approving Official Title and Organization - Contractor Title and Organization — C.E.I. Services I Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted C.�.&I. Firm and to Engineering. Engineering will prpcess and provide records retention according to City of Cleanroater's Records Management Program. Page 1 of 2 � A�pendix A.doc U4/26/1 1 � 1 � � � � � � � �' � � � � � � � Requested by: Phone Number: Date Needed by: Expense Cade: � ����ter r�;��::� � � _ _. : :� ,: - L�,.�.��,,�,. .._ _ _ . ENGINEERING l7�PAf2'iMENT REQUEST TO RE(�UISITCON SYI"ANDARD PURCF-IASE ORDER (Continuation page) � Units Detailed Description Price Per Line # Quantlt $, etC. (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) E�Ch Total Completed forms are routed for apprpval to contracted C.E.&I. Firm and to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention according to City of Clearwater's Records Management Prpgram. Page 2 of 2 Ap�endix A.doc 04/2G/1.1 � � PROJECrT PERMITS � Flor-ida Department O� Fnviz-o�a_�nental Permit AR�, NOI� flnticipated. The Conttac�or� shall b� rc;sponsible far obtaining City of Clearwater Building MDepartment Permits aY.�d any other permits that may a�ply. � � ,� � � � � � � � � � �� A.ppendix A.doc 04/Zti/ 1 1 � L� GEOTECHNICAL SOIL RTl'URT � Renort of the Monito�-itag Well Installation at the Noriheast WWTP, by Driggers .Fnganeering Services Inc. � � � � � � � � � ' L� Aprendi� A.dnc 04/2(i/i l � � r� � i � � REPORT �F THE , M�N�TOluNG WELL INSTALLAT101�T �`� � � � �.� � � � � � NORTHEAST WWTP CLEARWATF,R, FT1QRiDA Drigger � Engineering Services Incqrparated � 1 , ' ' Kin; Engineering Associaties, Inc_ 4921 Memarial I�ighway Suite 30U Tan�pa, Florida 33fi34 Attention: Mr. Christo}�her Kuzle��, P.E. 1 1 � RF: lteport at the Monitvring Well Tnstallati�ns Lakeside Statiou Yla�nt City, Florida Uur File: DES 1UG550 Dear N�i. Kuzler: May 26, 2D ] CJ � 1 ]n accordance with your request, DRIGGERS ENGIN�ERING SERVXCES, INC. is � Pleased to furnish a report of the monitoring well installation at the subject site. Presentcd herein is a brief discussion of the sco�e of services �erforrt�ed along with the completion report and well � sclaematic. [� � 1 1 1 1 � � M�1VIT�RING WELL INSTALLATIQN As requested, we instal.led one (1) manitoring well to nominal depths af 14 feet below existix�g grade. The well was constructed of 2 inch flush joint scl�edule 40 PVC. Tl}e xx�onitorin� well has scl�edule 4D, fl.010 slotted PVC well screen followed by schedule 40 PVC we�l casing. The well was excavated ��sing 6-1/4 inch hollaw stem augers having an 8 inch outside diarneter. The annulus between the 2 inck� weli and the borehole was backfilled using 20/30 silica sand fram. the tip to the top r�� the we11 screen which wa.5 then backfilled �vith native soil to existing g�-ade. At existing grade a concrete pad was constructed and a4"x4"x5' aluminum locking cover was installed. In addation to the aluminum lc�cking cover, w� installed four (�1) PVC covered concrete bo7lards. A detailed sch�matic (1'late II} of the znanitoring well has been attached along with the perniit application completi�n ze�ort. Also attached as Plate I is a monitoring well location plan and the classification boring log. Sarasota G9earwater Tampa Phone: 941.371.3948 A2220 49th Street North • Clsarwater, Florida 33762 Phvne: 813.948_Fs027 Fax: 941.371.8962 Phone: 727.571.1313 • Fax- 727_572.4090 Fax: 813.948.7845 sareffice@driggers-eng.com clwoffice@driggers�eng.com tpaofficeCmdriggers�ng.cvm �� � � ' �� � , ' [� � 1 1 1 ' , ' � � 1 Z DRTGGERS ENGINEL+'R1NG SER.V.ICES, INC:. appreciates the opportunity to assist you on this project. Should you have any questions concezr�ing the monitoring well installatioias, please do not hesitate to cantact tliis affice at yaur convenience. rAn JAD-REP\ 1065 SO Copies submitted: (3) Respectfully subrnitted, D.R]GGERS ENGINEE�2TNG SERVYCLS, XNC. - F���.�r►�� ��•� A. DR j� r, ► r` Jeff' A. Driggers, P.E. + ? �� •" �,\G�NS� .�'�ti� �, Project Engireer ' N�� 7'0598 ;N�; FL Registration No. 74598 �* � * ;* � �i -o : ; . '� �•. Sra�oF :�= I� O�. ���R�'D�.•�4ik'� �' ��si'•....•��,��= � � ;,,�N`� ��.�+ Driggers �ngineering 5ervices Incorporated � � 1 � ' ' ' APPEND�X , PLATE Z - Mp1V�TpR�N G WELL LQCATION PLAN 1 PLATF II- MONTT0�2TNG WEL.L DET�TL � � PERMIT A,P.pLiCATTQN AND COMPLETION REYpRT ' � oRrivr Lnc � 1 � 1 � � � Driggers �ngjneering 5ervices Inc.orp�����,� �'' � � � � �� � � l .� � � � � � �� � � � � � PLATE T� M�NITORING WELL LOCATI�N PLAN Driggers �ngineering Services Incnrpnrated ! . ': .� .- - �w,� • . . - - , . _ _ ,-�� : � � . xr� ' . �,,, � i.{�:r . . . ' ' - _ , .: .s � ,�{ '�°: � �:.:. ,,'i y �`�� .� ry• ^ '� � J ' ��:�"1�►�� i ,• x.d �.: -� � - ' _,� . - . � '1��,''_ .�,�` -.�r' � �'' • -- . . � -. - _" . F:, i .. _ - ..,�..:_ ..,d . . . ' ..;.� : .. . . ._ . • . .. ;1 1' ' .. _::`!:1;5����I`r�'�.--^.. .. ��+I" ,_ � ' . _ , - '� _ ' , ' . ' - i` t" • . ��l,� _ 4:� '� � � . � • _ . �. : : _'' _ . . .���_.�., }r:. .`..� -� -... .,. _ ,� �r 1'. F . 'f' / / . ,' � ' F � fl. _{ '�.� �{� ! ,! ' . i - .. . 1 2 ; ' . • _.. - - t_ "`� �i ' � _ . ' , �'� .. . _ �. . �` �i rY�� ��'�A., r • " • .� ' � . , � - � . . � �:(~ I�: ��. , � � . - . � !� i '�� y -. -. _ _ �1 ; — -- ` .� e �, '�� . � . - . � .- ' .. . . F "`-� 'r""�"� �r'°i:- ,,`r'':'�`' it :. ,, ��y,. , }, ��' � _ =�-- ; � ..:a-�� ' , . ,;'. - . . . - . � � ' � ' �__���� �' T4 , � ^� " - . - I . � i - : _ .. � �� + ',� - � � . 1 'Y .. � &+1 4 . _ , . � �� ' �. �� • • . .. . � � - •IJ � . t , r. r . . �� - , . . _ � t . lir �.�� ' . j�; —i-- . :��'�' ^ � �f. _ ,'�� � - , . -' ,� - �t�� � "�;_' n�' ''��rr ' ��tj � . . ' . ° • _ :#? • ' __.. '; ��'' '� � .� .. I : . . . � _ ;r= _. , .I..�.•. �,�„ + �, ,,�..,,, ` ` r — . r :1" - �, ' ; r '�. �r: � j ., � 1�� . , "-- •-^_.- ! -.S' i 1 .;, , �� � jf::.-:-��f._t.'�. � .�r • y .+ �1 �; �..�� ` , t�•. 1- �.-"p�' �[ . - �'� f r � ' .' 4 ' / . . . �h� - � ',M1 +F 1 � vy _ . . . . f I �� ] . ' -. � k.: . ' . ( . w .� ��Y.� '� `, r . � Ey � ���i, • • w , � � �:-.=--,, r�� .� _ - '� ..�� f:� ^�' . _� � !_ ,I t _�� . .���� -.__ . .� . .... _.. �_... - -- 'C=� I !`I..�.._�_T,1 :1.. ,. � f. _:-..�. ,. ' E' - • �, ~ i-� �:: .� _� �,. - i • _ Y � .: : - ' , " � i : . _ _ ''-- �, j" ` • _ -- � 1 _ . ...,• . ;-[ � �.���l�}�.�s . f _ -- .- ._..----- r'�j ------ � �`���� - � ..__._.... :x� __ �� :� . ,a�N�. 7 �'�1:�;� p-1 �)� � ;� I - 'S _ � =' ' '}. Y'� �:�,` � -°^^---�—•�+�f F. '�. ! �Y . }�" lr.� i p Y�, '� a � r ��� � ; �.. 'i ~ ' . . . I�• �.��� � � . �_ . . . . _.�hl��.h�i�a �.1Fi � — - �_ .......�_.. : , -.�� _ �;,'.'. ....._.. .. . _....... I'�•.. t;�i2iansia_i�1�7 td=i�TEi�. i-cul��rl PREPARED BY � �` DRIGG�RS EiVGIhi�ERlhiG S�RVICES, tNCORPORATEd 1 [� 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' 1 ' , , � PLATE II- M�NITORING WELL DETAIL f)rinnar�� Frlr-�jnppf Ir1d �01'VIC.AR Inrr�rr.r�r�ra.� . � , ' ' 1 � , , � ' ' ' ' 4"x4"x5' Aluminum Protective Gasing with Locking Lid �--- Four — 5'x3" Qia. Concrete Bollards Existi�g Grode � 3.6fi' 14.20' -��-..`-r:�.:- �' :°-: :7_ . �4 ` ". � . _ ` _. .{ .x�, . -♦� �'A�- •"•0.: ,: . �ti: .,: - • =-7 � �- 2" Locking Cap 7.6fi' of 2" Dia. PVC Casing (Schedule 4D) �-� 3'x3'x4" Concrete Service Pad 3.0' Na�ive Soif ��.z' 20/30 Silica Sand 1 �.0� 4f 2n ❑ICl. PVC Slotted Scr�en Schedule 40) Slot Size D.�10") 2"x2" Well Paint CAD FILE NAME: N: \ACL�i�hAM\PROTOS\706550MW.DWG. DRAWN BY: R.D.B. DATE: 5/26/10 SHEET TiTLE PREPARED BY � GR�UNDWATER M�NIT4RING WELL �. - IN STALLATI C�N D�ETAI L S�RWCESS IhlCORPORAiEp PR�JECT NAME SHEET N0. �LEARWA`TER NE WASTEWATER � TREATMENT PLANT ' GR�UN�INATER NIQNITORING 1NELL _ - , ^ GLEARWATER, �LaRlDA , ,.,.,., , � � PLATE II � ' L�J ' ' 1 C� 1 1 1 � ' PERMXT APPLZCAT�4N AND C�MPLETI�IV REP4RT 1 1 � l_J � ' 1 ' DrionPr� Fnnineerinct Services Ir1COrr�nratari � � � � ' � � � � � ' � � � � � � � � �I,E�.L CaMPLETtO1V REP�R7 �PEease com��ete �n black ink or �y�e.) P�RM17 #: 84482� . � G�PIWUP#: Dii�#: lndicate the number of wells drilledlabandaned for t�is re�o�t: _____ 1 lndicate the n�mber ot we�ls permitted but not drilfe�labandaned that are being cancelled: V�lATER W��L COi�TRACT4R'S S�GNATURE Dia�itall� Signed License # �222 1 certify tha� the rnformafian provided rn fhis repar# rs accurate and tr�s. Graut No, a# Ba s From �t, To ft. Nea# Cement: Bentonite: 0#�er 8 4.2 � 4.2 WELL LOCAT�ON: County PiNELL.AS 114 at �14 of 5ect�on 2� , Towr�shsp 28 , Range i 6 �.atitude, 28 ° 1' 48.25" , Langitutle: -82 ° 42' 13.42„ DATE STAMF May 24 201 a QfFcial Use �nly CHEM{CAL A�A�YS1S WNEN FtEQtlIRED lran: _ppm Sulfaie: �.,ppm CE��orides: p�m iDS rnqll S�cetch oFwell locatfan an praperty Conductivity ___�„_��umhaslct�'� Give aistances �rom s�tic tank and �ause, ar �] l�b �est [ j�ieitl Tgst Ki# fl�er reference points P��p '�ype [ ] Centrifugal � j �et [ ] S�bmersible � j Turb€ne Fiarsepower: Capaci�y: GPM: Pum� Depfh: �. Intake C3epth: �. Fo�m �EG-R.005.04�10ffl5j OWNER'S NAM�; CITY �F CLEARWATER C4MPL�TION DATE: a51�312�10 FEorida Unique f,D.: _ �arcel # �Pin}: 2f 2816a�00Q3100000 WELL �SE: [ ] Pubf�c Supply [ ] �rriga;ion � ] aomesGc � � t�anito� [ j Injectior� �(# �ther TEST WELL 1 PIEZ�METER DRILL MET�iflD: [] Ratary [ J Cabfe Tooi [] Cflmbination � j ,]ef QQ Auger [ ] Other Measured Siatic bVafer Level: s,� Measured Pumping Water tevel: After _Hours at GP�,�,. Measuring Pt. {aes�����: T.�.G. WhECh is ft. � above � J helow �and surface Casing: �� 61aek SteeE (� Galvar�izetl � PVC � j �t�er. [ l Open Nole �a�#h D�I�L G��TfN�S �OG � Screen (feef} Exa�rine cuttfngs every 2fl ft. ar af formatior� changes, Note cavities, Casing DEatnete� �ram �4 depth fa praduci�g zarres. aMi [3eptf� (f�.} Color Grain Size Type of1,?aterral diameter: 2 p 4 brown fi�e sand From: D fo: 4 2 4 11.s ra� flne sand 11,912, an �i e sand Diamet�r: � 2.314,2 ra fne sand Fr0�1: Ta: �,iE1Q� j%� Of Casing [ � Diamefer. 2 From: 4.2 Tv: � 4.2 Dril�er's �ame {�rint or type}: �a� �ay�es ' �.�� - S7AT� �F FLaRI�A PERMITAPPLICA710N 70 CONSTRUCT, �Fy oq REPAIR, MOOIFY, OR ABAN�ON A WELL � -- Cs� SouthwesT THIS Fqfil�l MUST Bt FILi.ED UL1T CO�APLE7ELY. ❑ Northwest � � ❑ St. Johns River rhowafcrrweflcunLaclu�isiusponSiWeforcomplefing 0 5outh Florida ��115 r°rm snd farvvarding fhe permi� �u the apprvpriarc y�, _ delegefed caunly whvra applicahle. ���we�• � SuwanneeRiver CNEI:K BOX FUR pPFROYAIATE DIS7fiiCT �pqp�55 ON aALK OF P[RMITFANM P�3rmit No.. .$��82� Florida Unique I.D. _____...___. Permit Stlpulslions Required (See attached) 34y _3 .01, 39 _..__ � 62-524 Quad # o33zzp��inaatinn # CUP/WUP Applicatlon Nv. _�— � 1 pwner, f�_ gnf Nsm df E h'tyiJCorportaGort -' PO sOX,474B,__._ C4� �iWAT�Fi FL_ _ p.3375&47q8 Address Y Gi zr 7eJephone Num6er z. 3200 SR 560, C1ealwztef , , , . _ �,� � • --- - -� _._. . ,� �.—.__.�._... ...._.. �� . . ._�... .... Well Location Address, Road Name ar number, City � Parcel # {Pin) 212816000003700000 �____ _.___.T _.....___._., _. "� 3_ JIMMY W RANUOLPH _....._...._...__,._..—. 9`2�Z _ �� a Well Arilling Gonlraclor license rda_ � � 740 1�7N AVENU� sw _ m � Addrass " LARGO FL 33T?0 �s G�y _ ^— 51ate ZJp �„ LL n PlNELLA5 L _��.._---•..._.._ �.— s. _��__..._....�-------- --- County Subdivision PJame 7elephone Na. NW NE _""r _ 4•.-�.� 1/•1 or �r4 �1 sec�ion 27 � � � �,,.,� �., ° r - r - -r ° (tndicnle Wall on Chan) � � � _ 5.Tawn::hip ,__� 2$ Range 76 _ y_.� ��... t i � _i_.1,_J _... ------L----...----.....L--------.—_____..._.. i i i l.ot Hlack Un1t � � � � SW SF 7. iJumber aF proposed wells 7 Gheck the use al wall: (s� n�oi p.�u b. addm�.ai �+ob+s� Irrigalion (fype) Public Water Supply (type) __.�.,_._ � � � r 1 � L� � �J ' Dqmnsiic Monibr LISt Otha� TEST WELL! PIEZOMETEiI �se� e�d�� ts� e�� P[slance from sepCic system� 1� It. Descriptiorl of faG{ily waste water treatme�+�z� start of construction data �iitzo7a 8. Appllcation for: � New Constructlon Repair/Modt(y A6andonment Oate �arnp (Rr�san br a onmanl 9. Eslimated: Well depth 29 Casing Depth Screen Interval fram 10 to � Casing Material: �(dG2Q7��!! l�i! 1 PVC Gasing Dlarneter Z Seal Maierial 5and ama��asi 0_ If applicable: Proposed From to Seal Material .____ Recel�ed: Tuesday, May 11, zolo Grouting Intetval From to Sael Material � Drawamapp(weRfpCalivlrar7dinAk'nfnWellslfewdhan JC"idenl"Jyknown From _..._, to Seal Material ,�a„d,land,,,a,ks�pva,,,He�/S6xesyehven„reaendle„dn,erkv. 1. Telescope Casing — or L1ner {check one) Diamster ,r �O� BIk-Steel / Galvanized / PVC Other (speciiy:) � Me4hod of ConstruclEon: Rotary Cable Tool Combinatlon � Auger ..Other {specify:) 3. Indicate tntai No. 01 wells an site a, List number af unused wells on site o.. Is thls well or any other we{I orwater witttdrawal on Ihe owner's contiguous property toveted undera Consumptive/Water Llse �ermil (CUP/1NUPj or CUP/WUP ppplicalivn?� No �. Yes (rFY�s, cOMPLEfE 17-fEFO1�oW1NG) CUPANUP No. Distric[well I.D. Na. ,_ Latitude 2s �o��4g.x5^ �_ Longitude ez° el2' ia.az^ . oata obtainea trom �PS _ or map� ar survey �(map datum NAD 27 IVAD 3 souln � Jr' . I Mrab� caitlly tl�al I M4! eanpl� Wlh Me apwfuFle rulns d TIBe 40, Farida Adminislraryva C,edn 1 uAifr vet I am the o�mar ol Ihe prapert�, lhal ihn warmailen provided is xwrale, vd Ywl I am aware nl nry and HW awalar us� perynY or aNlfclgl redvga parrtil, N naedaR, �as 6een or wiA b� a6�inrd recpon bBilie� undw GTapler 379, Floride SlaN[es, le mahpin or prepsAy abamden Ihis wntl; o�, l ceNFy IM11 am pYr 10 mn.�wxemeM d rel eon�uelion 1 fv6�ar re.ily 6+a! dl iJamwlpn pvridad nn M:s Yie aga�i lor tl+e o�w�er,lhN Ihe icJarmelbn p�ovided s accurale, ard IF�b1 I ha�e 4�famed Ihe owner d)os rc- r�pl'rarian o�¢v�M �eW tl�a� 1 rA eMaui nr.�aary app�aral kwn dher laderal. qala ar loesl opans7d01{es ss sfaled a6ave. 6wner mraWs eo parsonnrl 01 �e WAIO a a repns��Nah+s ��wess W thr rreN r+le. gwarm�.�. I applicd�e. I egree lo pWide o welf mmphtinn reperl tn the Dim�et w9Wn 30 �ey� . allar driPiry or 1he p�mv� a�lra�6r� rhkhever accuis 6�u. _DlgltaJ(y_Sti�gned 9222 Digl[elly_Slgned _ Siqnalure uf Contractor License No. Ownar's or Ape�t's Siqnature pate Approval Granied By: aucomaucaily[ssued __._ Issus Date: 5!?1/2oio Hydrolo�istApproval Inhlals Owner Num6or. Fee fieceiv�d_ � 5a•o� Receipt No.; IN107396Ta Check No.: ...._.� THIS PEl�IUIIT NOT VALI� UNTIL PFiOPERLY SIGNEb 9YAN AUTHORI�ED pFFICER aR REPRESEhITA71VE OFTH� WMp. IT SHALLBEAVAIIABI.EATTHE WELL SIT� pURING AI..L DRILLING OPERA71oNS. This permit ls vefid tor 90 days Irom the dats o{lssue. WHI"fE� ORIGINAL FILE ' FORM Ai.io-410 (1) REV. t2loa YELLOW; ❑RILLING CQNTHACTOp PINK: OWIVER 1 r � � � 1 ' � � � � � � r � � � � � Reeovary Public Water Supply (b�p) Corrimunily Non•Community Limi[ed Use publlc Supply (HRS; Llvesfock Landscape Irrlyalion Agriculturaf Irrigalion (crops, sod, orchards, nursery stock} NUrsery Irrigalion (retail outlets anlyj Pasticide Mixing & Loading RecreaiianArea Irrigation (ball lields, playgrounds) GoEf CoursH IrrigaGon Hea[ Pump {AC 5upply) HeaT Pump (AC Relum) Aquacullure (fish ponds) Class I Injection Well Gass V Injeclion Tesl (lemporary) WUP Induslnal WELI, S�TBAGK D1S7ANC�5: 25 it, From a treated building slab_ 75 ft. Dornestic �- From on site septic systern. 1 �0 ft. Public 5upply and I..imited Public Suppiy less than 2UO0 GPD Se�vage Flow. 2a0 ft. Public Supply and Limited Public Supply graater than 20D0 GS'D Sewage Flow_ These are common setback distances. Navrever they are nv! ap�Fnclas►ve. Refer ip olher applicable rules lor addifional selbacks. 1 � , � � � 1 � � � � M � � � ' , � ' SQUTHWEST FLQRIDA WA7�R MANAG�MENT DISTRIC7 STIPULATIdN NUMBER 39 - WELL AND DRILLHOLE AQANDONM�NT It will be ihe water welf contractor's responsibiJity to have any incomplete welf or drillhole attempted under this permit properly abandoned. Any incomplefe or abandoned well or drillhole as described in 40D-3, Florida Adminisfrative Code (F.A_C.), shall be abandoned as follows: � � The well shall be �xamined from land surface to the original depth af construction for clebris or abstructions (any debris or obstruction shall be removed prior to abandontrient). 7he well shall be plugged from bottom to top by an approved method of grauting with either Portland neat cement grout or an approved Bentonite product as specified in 4pD-3.517 2. (b}, F.A. C. It wil! be the owner's responsibility to have any well completed under this permit, or any existing well on this property, which meets the definitian of an abandoned welf as defined in Chapter 4DD-3.021(1), F.A.C., properly abandoned in accardance with Chapter 40D-3.531, F.A.C. (f will be the owner's responsibility to have any i�active well, which does not meet the above crit�ria and is no threat to the water resource properly capped in an air and watertight manner with a threaded, welded or bolfed cover or valve. !f the pump and well seal are water tight, the pump may be left in place. If practical, a protective cover two (2} feet in height shaA be placed around the well casing. A. Wells with a diameter of six (6) inches or more without pumping equipment sha11 have the well casing extended a rrFinimum af two (2) feet above land surFace. B. Wells with a diameter pf less than six {6) inehes without pumping equipment shall be securely set in a cancrete slab and have either the w�ll casing extended a minimum height of two (2) feet above land surface ar a pratective cover centered over the well casing. The co�creke slab shall be a minimum of faur (4) inches in thickness by two (2) feet by two {2) feet squar�. The protective cover shali be set in the concrete slab and exte�d a minimum af two {2J feet above land surface. In flood prone ar�as all wells shall extend a minimum of one (1) foat above the 1a0 year flnnd elevation, if practical, in accardance with Chapter 40D-3.521(4), F.A.C. Any plugging operations shall be permitted sepai-ately fram this permit by the Southwest Florida Water Management District and be witnessed by a designated �istrict representative. Arrangement for a District representative shalf be made with the local District Field 5ervices office a minimum of 24 hours in advance of these operatians. A District representative will be available for assignment dunng normal working hours (8:00 AM -�:30 PM), Monday through Friday. Travel time musf be taken into consideration. Exemptions may be made fpr extenuating circumsiances. For scheduling, please cpntact the Field Service Supervi$or in the Tam� office at 813 985-7481. Permit Numb�r: 804821 {11/03) � � 1 � � � � � � � � � � � ' � ' � � SOUTHWEST FL�RIDA WATER MANAGENfENT �tSTRICT STIPULATIQN # 34 - PINELLAS COUNTY The applicant shall camply wi#h Chapters 62�532, 64E-$, and 4pD-3 Florida Administrative Code with applicable construcfion standards and grauting procedures. No water supply sh�ll be interconnected with any approved public water su�piy unless all the following conditions ar� met: a. Th� water supply (including well, distributian piping and treatment facilities as applicable} was properly approved and permitied as a domestic drinking watar facility by state, local or ather required regulatary agencies. b. The water supply shall currently be in compfiance and good standing with said regulatory agencies. c. The agency supplying patable water to be interconnected with the water suppfy shall instali the necessary back flow prevention device at the point where the agency Indses jurisdiction ov�r their water supply after determining the private sysfem is not detrimeratal to their system. This shall be done prior to interconnection. d. Each installativn shafl require th� pubiic heaf#h unit and fhe agency supplying patable water to provide writfen approval to the plumbing inspection department prior to interconnection. 3. CampJiance must be maintained with all other state, local or otherwise building and regulatory agency rules and regulations. Contact the Pin�llas County Public Healti� Unit, Environmenta� Engineering Division at ( 727) 538-7277 for more informatian. 4 5 lrrigation water wells shall not be cannected to any patahle plumhing systern. In the event the weli is to be a6andnned, a District abandanment permit wiil be obtained priar ta cvmmencing with abanctonment operations. Permit Na. 804821 COF'Y T� �WN�R TQ BE PR�VIDED BY CQNTRACTQR �osras> SOUTWW�57 FLORIbA WATER NlANAG�ME�1T DIS7RIC'� STIPULA7I�N # 23 - 7EST/MONI'TOR W�LL A. This well is to be used as a test/monitar well. If it is to be r,o�verted into a production well, art additianaf permit shall be obtained. B. There shaiE be no injection of fluids into the manitor well without prior written appraval from the Florida Departm�nt of �nvironmen#al Protection (D�p) ar the District. This includes, but is not limif�d to treated graUnd water, ar the intraduction of micrabes far in-situ aquifer restoration. C. The well shal! be constructed in such a manner to prevent the unauthorized interchange af water between different water bearing zones (i.e., breaching of confining beds, clays nr hardpan intervals} as per Chapter 62-532.500 (2)(C}, Florida Administrative Code (�.A.C.). D. Priar written approval from the District shall be required if the monitor well will be pumped for use in hydrodynamic controi and/or contaminant plume management, if quantities reach or exceed requirement of a Water llse Permit. E. All monitor w�lls constructed at any facility which has been designated as a ground water contamination sit�, or a possible ground water contamination site, shafl adhere to #he constructi�n standards set forth by the DEP and other applicable rules. F_ In fhe event the wefl needs ta be abandaned, an abandonment permit shall be obtained priar to commencing with abandonrnent operations. G. An observer from aur Regulation Department is required an all abandonments to ensure compliance with appiicable 40D-3 regulations. Please cvntact the Field Service Supervisar in the Tampa Office ai 8{ 73) 985-i�81 for additional inFormation. Permit Na. 8Q4821 COPY TO OWNER TD BE PRQVIDED BY C�NTRACTOR (11103} � � ' � � �:� � t�J 1 � � � � � � � � � � S�UTHW�ST �LQRIDA WA7ER MANAG�MENT D15TRICT STiPUI�1TION # 1- SALT WATER INTRl.1SfON A. The location of the wel! is marginal due to potenfial saft-wat�r Encraachment. It may or may not yiefd water of acceptabfe quality in the near future. Therefore, t�is permit is granted with the understanding that if the well does not produce acceptable water, it will be properly abandnner�. B. In the event the well needs to be abandon�d, an af�andonment perrrzit shall be obtained prior to cammencing with abandanment procedures. , C. An observer from th� District's Regulation Department is reyuired on all abandonments to ensure compliance with Chapter 6�-532, Florida Administrativ� Code. Pl�ase contact the �ield Service Supervisor in the Tampa Office at 813 J85-7481 for additional information. Permit No.: Sa4821 COPY TQ OWNER TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR PR�VID�D BY CON7RACTOR (1'1103� � � C� � � � [J C� �� BC)�21NG LUG `.J C� � [� 1 � � LJ � ❑riaaers Enciineering Services lncorporated � � 1 ' � � � �� 1 � � � [J � 1 � � � � � DRIGGEF�S � ENGIRIEERING SERVICES II\IC�RP�RATED x�vD aucEU �o7zx��c x o<a PROJ�CT: Cl�arwater NE Wastewater Treatment Pla�l CLIENT: �� �� Groundwater Manitoring Wall Kin En ineerin Assaciates tnc. Clearwater, Ftorida WAiER TAEiLE: � DATE_ ��� Pro'ect Np. DE5 106550 8_7' 5113l10 7ECHNICIAtJ: DATE: COMPLE7IQN DEP'!"H_ S.F_lM.J. 5/13/10 T42' LOGATIQN: 7ESi fJUMBER: See "Remarks" PZ-1 ELEV. b�PTH p�o (��� DESC121P710N (F�� � REMARKS r � Brown Fine SAND with svme raots, � ��,�" Locatipn: 6.0' North trace of shell fragments and trace ��::�1 of East Tank Centerline � . _.. r of clayey Fine SAND pockets �SP) :p� � Brown and light brown Fine SAND (SP) _. �: 2 . Light brownish-gray clayey Fin� SAND a ��� wlth shell fragments and seams `�= of green CLAY (SP/GH} ��' o. :4 � C' '.l� v'; Dark brawnish-gray slightly silty �• �ine SAND with pieces af large roots SP-SM �3:�: c r Brownish-gray and light brawnish-gray g "'''' �" sandy CLAY wit� s�ams of da�k '���" r� brownish-gray sligi�tly silty Fine SAND �'`'�' } i: +;i•r SClSP-5M .� =�= r �ight brownish-gray and [�rownish-gray sil sli htl cla e Fine SAND 5AA . Dark brownish-gray slightly siliy 10 '�� Fine SAND with trace of finely diuided or anic materia! 5P-SM Light brownish-gray sandy CLAY with trace of raots (CH) -� .� Light brawnish-gray 12 ;i _i. � r ' sli htl sil Fine SAND SP-SM Light tannish-gray calcareous, silry Fine SAN� with shell fragments and t�tin seams of green silty CLAY (SM/CH) 1� �I � � L � � � � � � r � _� � CJ � 1 � � � ASB�STUS REPO�ir� No Asbestos RePort is Anticipated � A.��pendixA.doc U4/2(i/II